JP7748029B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines.

One example of a gaming machine that spins and then stops multiple reels is a slot machine. In a slot machine, multiple symbols are displayed around the outer periphery of each reel, and some of the symbols on each reel are visible through a display window. When a player inserts a medal, a winning line is set. After that, the player operates the start lever, and a lottery is held inside the slot machine to determine whether a winning combination, such as a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB"), a small bonus, or a replay, begins to spin. After each reel has started spinning, the player operates the stop switch, which stops each reel sequentially, completing one game. When all reels have stopped spinning, if a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination stops on a winning line, a prize is awarded, and the player is awarded a prize, such as a medal payout or a change in game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In recent years, in addition to the BB state, which is entered when a BB win is achieved, some machines have also been equipped with an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player and notifies the player of the order in which to operate the stop switch to achieve a specified win when a specified combination is won.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-355364

There is a demand for gaming machines such as those exemplified above to further increase gaming enjoyment.

The above problem is not limited to slot machines such as those exemplified above, but also applies to other gaming machines that cyclically display multiple types of images and then end the cyclical display based on the operation of a stop operation means.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase gaming enjoyment.

The invention of claim 1 relates to a gaming machine in which play is possible by using game values and the game values are awarded when a game result satisfies an awarding condition, the gaming machine comprising: execution means for executing an unplayable state transition process for transitioning to an unplayable state in which play is impossible when a predetermined abnormality occurs; difference number storage means for accumulating and storing the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result; and regulating information storage means for storing regulating information when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a predetermined number, and when the regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means, the unplayable state is transitioned to by executing the unplayable state transition process, the unplayable state transition process comprising: a first storage process for storing abnormality response information corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred in the response information storage means; a second storage process for storing regulating response information corresponding to the regulating information in the response information storage means when the regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means; and an unplayable state signal indicating that the game has become unplayable from outside the gaming machine. a first determination process for repeatedly determining whether or not the specified correspondence information is stored in the correspondence information storage means until the specified correspondence information is no longer stored in the correspondence information storage means; a second determination process for repeatedly determining whether or not a second specified operation has been performed until a second specified operation has been performed, if it is determined in the first determination process that the specified correspondence information is not stored in the correspondence information storage means; and a return process for returning the gaming machine from the non-playable state to a playable state in which play is possible, if it is determined in the second determination process that the second specified operation has been performed, wherein when a specified operation which is different from the second specified operation and includes a power-on operation for switching the gaming machine from a power-off state to a power-on state is performed, the difference number stored in the difference number storage means is set to an initial value, and the specified information is no longer stored in the specification information storage means, thereby making it possible to return from the non-playable state to the playable state.

This will make it possible to increase interest in gaming.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with a front door closed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with a front door open. Rear view of the front door. Front view of the housing. A diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. Block diagram of a slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for three-coin play. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for two-coin play. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a rotation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 1. 10 is a flowchart showing an instruction monitor display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 2. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a migration preparation process. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game areas. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing game zone processing in a normal zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rotation and display modes in a simulated game. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rotation and display modes in a simulated game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a slide table used in simulated gaming. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a slide table used in simulated gaming. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rotation and display modes in a simulated game. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process according to a second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an instruction monitor display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance determination process in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance execution process in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an additional notification process in the display control device. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo game flag storage area in the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the configuration of a header. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 1. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 2. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 3. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment, showing a state in which the front door is closed. FIG. 2 is a block diagram relating to a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an instruction monitor display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation end command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a menu process. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a press performance process. 10 is a flowchart showing a result display process. 13 is a flowchart showing game section processing in a chance mode in the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing section command processing in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing section command processing in a normal section and a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing of an all reel stop completion command in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command process in a chance mode. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of display modes displayed on an auxiliary display unit. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing game zone processing in a normal zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning roles and navigation rates. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning combination information creation process. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation navigation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a promotion determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode in the seventh embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a competition command process in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a competition presentation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a first effect determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second effect determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a competition command process in the notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in the notification mode. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game area in the eighth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a navigation counter update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a navigation determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. FIG. 13 is a block diagram relating to auxiliary performance in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the channel configuration, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the configuration of a layer for CH4. An explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the volume of background music and the volume of the winning sound. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a liquid crystal control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning sound instruction process. An explanatory diagram to explain the relationship between the output time of the winning sound and the volume recovery time of the background music. 10 is a flowchart showing a BGM output process. 10 is a flowchart showing a volume value setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining changes in volume values in each layer of the CH4 layer. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an ending movie in the tenth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an ED determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an ED process. 10 is a flowchart showing an error confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a restart process. 23 is a flowchart showing a winning probability setting process in the eleventh embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a first sensor buffer. 10 is a flowchart showing an ON edge confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a change end process. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting key OFF waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a front door command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a change end command process. An explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the series of operations performed when setting the winning probability, the set values, and the notification sounds that are announced. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game area in the twelfth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in notification mode A. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode A. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in notification mode B. A diagram showing the selection rate of the number of additional games in the lottery for the number of additional games. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles and notification contents. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode B. 10 is a flowchart showing the transfer game number addition process. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning probability setting process in the thirteenth embodiment 1. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a first sensor buffer. 10 is a flowchart showing an ON edge confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a change end process. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting key OFF waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a change end command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command process. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an end command process. 20 is a flowchart showing a setting change command process in the thirteenth embodiment 2; 10 is a flowchart showing a confirmation timer subtraction process. 10 is a flowchart showing a change end command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a termination confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command process. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an end command process. A figure showing the pattern arrangement of each reel in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game areas. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing game zone processing in a normal zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations and acquired point values. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing CZ point processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a second transition lottery process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary effect performed by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a point management process. Flowchart showing the CZ performance determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations and notified point values. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between notification points and performance contents. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop command process. 10 is a flowchart showing processing during CZ. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in premonition mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a sign confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a premonition effect process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning roles and navigation rates. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning combination information creation process. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation navigation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a promotion determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 23 is a flowchart showing a conventional stop command confirmation process according to the fifteenth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a conventional switch state confirmation process. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a rotation information buffer; FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a normal rotation information buffer; and FIG. 1C is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a switch buffer. 10 is a flowchart showing a conventional pre-start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop command confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing pre-start processing. FIG. 23 is a front view of a slot machine according to a sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game areas. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing game zone processing in a normal zone. 10 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the chance mode and small AT precursor mode. 10 is a flowchart showing an assist lottery process. 10 is a flowchart showing an assist acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a point lottery process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between winning combinations and acquired points. A flowchart showing the game section processing in chance mode and small AT precursor mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a mode transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a migration determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a CZ transition determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a small AT transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a continuation rate change process. 10 is a flowchart showing a continuation lottery process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in small AT mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a large AT transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in the large AT mode. 10 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in the large AT mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of auxiliary effects performed on the auxiliary display unit and the second auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal stage process. 10 is a flowchart showing a CZ stage process. 10 is a flowchart showing a precursor stage process. 10 is a flowchart showing a CZ process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an icon display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a display change process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining rearrangement and change of displayed icons. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of a slot machine in a seventeenth embodiment with the front door closed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in an auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing processing during non-playing. 10 is a flowchart showing input waiting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a menu change process. 10 is a flowchart showing an information change process when selecting a volume setting. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the flow of changes in the display screen on the auxiliary display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of the effect switch and the selection switch. A figure showing an example of navigation presentation in the 18th embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the effect control process performed at the start of a game. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance control process performed when a stop command is issued. 10 is a flowchart showing the effect control process performed at the end of the game. 10 is a flowchart showing a scenario update process. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormal reception process. A diagram showing the relationship between the command reception status and the progress of continuous performances. A diagram showing the relationship between the command reception status and the progress of continuous performances. A diagram showing the relationship between the command reception status and the progress of continuous performances. A diagram showing the relationship between the command reception status and the progress of the navigation performance. A diagram showing the relationship between the command reception status and the progress of the navigation performance. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game area in the 19th embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing game zone processing in a normal zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing an instruction monitor display process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a notification difference number update process. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in ending mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary effect performed in the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a number display process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing an acquired number update process. 10 is a flowchart showing the number display process in the ending mode. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game area in the 20th embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in notification mode A. 8 is a flowchart showing the B additional lottery process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game determination process. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rotation and display modes in a simulated game. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rotation and display modes in a simulated game. 10 is a flowchart showing an instruction monitor display process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode A. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in notification mode B. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode B. (a) A diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles and the probability of winning the transition lottery and the B additional lottery, (b) A diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles and the auxiliary effects performed on the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game ending process. 10 is a flowchart showing misalignment processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a notification content determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing notification command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a final game process. A figure showing an example of an auxiliary effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit in the 21st embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the number of games played. 10 is a flowchart showing an acquired number display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a remaining number display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first game process. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a termination process. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for the second game and thereafter. 6A and 6B are diagrams showing the relationship between the command reception status and the display content of the auxiliary display unit. 6A and 6B are diagrams showing the relationship between the command reception status and the display content of the auxiliary display unit. A figure showing the pattern arrangement of each reel in the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game areas. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary effect performed in the auxiliary display unit. A figure showing an example of a freeze A effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing game zone processing in a normal zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode and premonition mode. 10 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a mode transition determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a CZ transition determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a director determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles and conversion roles. 10 is a flowchart showing a notification mode transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a premonition mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a freeze process. 10 is a flowchart showing a freeze A process. 10 is a flowchart showing freeze B processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the present sign confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing the premonition effect processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop command process. 10 is a flowchart showing freeze A effect processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between conversion roles and freeze effects to be executed. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning roles and navigation rates. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning combination information creation process. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation navigation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a promotion determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the relationship between ROM addresses and storage contents in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between addresses in a RAM 106 and temporary storage contents. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a counting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a complete process. 10 is a flowchart showing a MY command transmission process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing error processing. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing 2. 10 is a flowchart showing MY clear processing. FIG. 10 is an image diagram showing the relationship between processing within a region and processing outside a region. 10 is a flowchart showing MY command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a process in a notification mode. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of reel stop results and display modes of the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of reel stop results and display modes of the auxiliary display unit.

(First embodiment)

Below, an embodiment of the invention as applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is one type of gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Figure 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Figure 5 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installed in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 in an openable and closable manner. A pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b are provided on the housing 11's left side when viewed from the front, and bearings 14a, 14b are provided on the front door 12 at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported relative to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending vertically between the support shafts 13a, 13b. Rotating the front door 12 allows the front open side of the housing 11 to be opened or closed. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its backside. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state can be released by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting the variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, which drives each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate individually, i.e., independently. The stepping motor is configured to rotate once by applying a drive signal (hereinafter referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 480 pulses. This excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. Furthermore, the reel unit 31 is equipped with a reel index sensor on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to detect when the reel has rotated once. Each time the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, described below. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before that detection signal was input.

Multiple symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the direction of its long side (circumference direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next at a specified position, it is necessary to output 24 excitation pulses (= 480 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control unit 101 can determine which symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and can stop a specified symbol at a position visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, based on the number of excitation pulses output after the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from 0 to 19 are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are eight types of symbols: "cherry" (e.g., the 19th symbol on the left reel 32L), "watermelon" (e.g., the 18th symbol on the left reel 32L), "bell" (e.g., the 17th symbol on the left reel 32L), "red 7" (e.g., the 16th symbol on the left reel 32L), "replay" (e.g., the 15th symbol on the left reel 32L), "star" (e.g., the 14th symbol on the left reel 32L), "bar" (e.g., the 11th symbol on the left reel 32L), and "white 7" (e.g., the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three parallel lines running horizontally and two diagonally, connecting the positions where these nine symbols are visible. More specifically, as shown in Figure 7(a), the horizontal combination lines are an upper line L1 connecting the upper row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a middle line L2 connecting the middle row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a lower line L3 connecting the lower row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, diagonal combination lines include a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols on the right reel 32R, and a upward-sloping line L5 connecting the lower symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols on the right reel 32R. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated combination line, i.e., an active line, a win is achieved, and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 7(b), only the middle line L2 is set as an active line. The four combined lines of the upper line L1, lower line L3, downward-right line L4, and upward-right line L5 are never set as active lines.

Figure 8 shows the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

State transition wins that only result in a transition in game state include BB1 win and BB2 win.

When the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a BB1 win is achieved. When the "red 7" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a BB2 win is achieved. When one of these BB wins is achieved, the game state transitions to BB state.

A replay win is a prize that grants you the privilege of playing the next game without inserting a medal.

If the "Replay" symbols on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a replay win will be awarded.

Small winning combinations that result in medal payouts include watermelon winning, cherry winning, bell winning, and supplementary winning.

When the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a watermelon win will be awarded and three medals will be paid out. When the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on an active line, a cherry win will be awarded and three medals will be paid out.

When the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on any of the combination lines, nine medals are paid out as a bell win. More specifically, in addition to when the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the middle line L2, nine medals are paid out as a bell win when a symbol combination that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upper line L1 stops on the middle line L2. Symbol combinations that appear to result in a bell win include, for example, a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "star" symbol, and a "star" symbol, or a combination of a "bar" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, and a "bar" symbol. Details of winning symbol combinations are omitted, but one medal is paid out when a complementary win is achieved.

In the following, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning prize will also be referred to as winning symbol combinations. For example, a BB2 symbol combination is a symbol combination that results in a BB2 prize, i.e., a combination of a "red 7", a "red 7", and a "white 7". Furthermore, the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to each winning prize will also be referred to as winning symbols. For example, a BB2 symbol is a "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, and a "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a starting operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to rotate.

To the right of the start lever 41 are button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, or 26R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning; when the center stop switch 43 is operated, the center reel 32M stops spinning; and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting gaming media.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means and is located on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is equipped with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47. Medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 through a medal discharge port 49 located at the bottom front of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals into an opening 48a in the discharge passage 48, and then pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. A reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from accumulating in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals accumulate above the height at which the guide plate 52a is installed, those medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection slot 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided on the lower left side of display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting three credited virtual medals as gaming media at a time. Also, to the left of first credit insertion switch 56 are second credit insertion switch 57 and third credit insertion switch 58. Second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time, while third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal. Together with medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56-58 constitute input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, while medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, credit insertion switches 56-58 merely involve the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting gaming media.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 49. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored gaming media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display unit 61, and a payout number display unit 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the payout number display unit 62, there is a zone indicator 66 that indicates the game zone. These display units 60-62 and the zone indicator 66 are made up of 7-segment displays, but they can of course be replaced with LCD displays or the like.

The upper part of the front door 12 is provided with an upper lamp 63 that lights up and flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that provides various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is used to perform various display effects as the game progresses, and since the play using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back of the auxiliary display unit 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply unit 91 and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch that supplies power to the main control unit 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by hall managers and others to adjust the medal payout. In other words, the hall manager and others can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is also operated to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10, in addition to resetting an error state.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of this slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in Figure 9.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is the calculation means. In addition to the power supply unit 91, the CPU 102 is connected via an internal bus to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and other components. The main control unit 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

Connected to the input side of the main control device 101 are various sensors, including the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a-44a that individually detect operation of each stop switch 42-44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, credit insertion detection sensors 56a-58a that individually detect operation of each credit insertion switch 56-58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

In addition, a power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply interruption state and generates a power outage signal not only during a power outage but also when the power is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, in this example 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power outage signal. The power outage signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power outage signal and executes the power outage processing described below. The power outage signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

Connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via input/output port 104 are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal path switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the section display 66, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65, and is equipped with a board that integrates the CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. for driving these devices. After receiving signals from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. Note that the display control device 81 may also be configured to drive and control the various display units 60-62.

The CPU 102 described above contains a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and, although not shown, various processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters, such as a credit counter that counts the number of credits. The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory that serves as storage means, and the programs for executing the various processes shown in the flowcharts of Figures 10 to 36 are stored in the ROM 105 described above as part of the control program.

RAM 106 is configured to receive backup voltage from power supply 91 and retain (back up) data even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a win flag storage area 106a for storing the results of the lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a status information storage area 106c for storing the game status, and a section information storage area 106d for storing the game section.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. When the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed during power outage processing (see Figure 10) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The CPU 102's NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing, which serves as a power outage flag generation process, is immediately executed.

Next, we will explain the various control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The processes performed by the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and normal processing performed in the main processing, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 10 to 36.

Figure 10 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101. The CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control unit 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

During power outage processing, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in the input/output port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are set to the off state. A RAM judgment value is then calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and this is saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting further access to the RAM. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for the possibility that the power supply will be completely cut off and processing will no longer be possible. Note that, in case the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been recovered, and the system allows writing to RAM 106, resets the power outage flag, and returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the system enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even within the infinite loop, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output. If the power outage signal is no longer being output, the system transitions to main processing.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed, which allows the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed, which drives the stepping motors that drive each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate, and brakes the corresponding stepping motor to stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors (see Figure 9), such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a, connected to the input/output port 104, and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to count the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out, and output the results to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, and payout number display unit 62. In step S111, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60-62 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S112, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S113, the values of each register saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S114, an interrupt enable process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes ends.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to gameplay will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 11.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In the pre-start processing, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data stored in RAM 106 (such as random number values used in the previous game) are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start wait process is performed.

The start waiting process determines whether a replay win was achieved in the previous game. If a replay win was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet, and the start waiting process ends. Note that the automatic insertion process inserts virtual medals without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed in the credit display unit 60. In other words, if a replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals. If a replay win was not achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the player of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor read result is normal, it determines whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if it has been operated, it performs a medal return process in which the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it determines whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been done, it performs a medal insertion process to change the number of bets, etc., and ends the start waiting process. Furthermore, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, it ends the start waiting process.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205 it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified numbers are set to "2" and "3". If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards are carried out. If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined in step S206 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards are carried out.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, as the system is configured to allow play to begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In this case, in step S207, an active line setting process is performed to set the middle line L1 as the active line, and in step S208, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Subsequently, the system sequentially executes the lottery process in step S209, the rotation initialization process in step S210, the 4.1 second wait process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the play section process in step S214, and the BB state process in step S215, before returning to step S203.

Next, the lottery processing in step S209 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 12.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. This slot machine 10 has six pre-prepared winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON, as well as performing a specified operation, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing will be based on. In step S302, when the setting is "Setting 1," the lottery table with the lowest expected value for medal payout is selected; when the setting is "Setting 6," the lottery table with the highest expected value for medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 13 is the lottery table selected for three-coin play in "Setting 3," and Figure 14 is the lottery table selected for two-coin play in "Setting 3." Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and is also set with a point value PV.

After selecting a lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when determining whether a role has been won or lost. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the role corresponding to the index value IV. When determining whether the role is a win or loss, a determination is made as to whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, where a win flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the win flag storage area 106a of RAM 106. For example, if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 5, in step S306, a middle, right, left bell win flag indicating a win for the bell, compensation role 2, or compensation role 4 is set in the win flag storage area 106a.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not the BB1 winning flag indicating that BB1 has been won or the BB2 winning flag indicating that BB2 has been won, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set is completed (see S203 in the normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag, these winning flags are reset on the condition that the corresponding winning is achieved. In other words, the BB1 winning flag and the BB2 winning flag may be valid across multiple games. Note that in step S306 when the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than BB1 or BB2 has been won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if BB1 or BB2 has been won, the corresponding winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, if BB2 is won in a two-coin game, and a three-coin game is played while the BB2 winning flag is carried over, BB1 is not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65,535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and the following step S308 determines whether there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it determines whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the win/loss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the win/loss of the hand is judged based on this judgment value DV.

By the way, when using the lottery table shown in Figure 13 to determine whether a winning combination is achieved in a three-coin game, the probability of winning a replay is approximately 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell is approximately 1 in 9.0 each, the probability of winning watermelon and cherry is approximately 1 in 50 each, and the probability of winning BB1 is approximately 1 in 12. In a three-coin game, winning a one-coin combination and winning BB2 do not occur.

When using the lottery table shown in Figure 14 to determine whether a winning combination is a success or failure in two-coin play, the probability of winning a replay is approximately 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell is approximately 1 in 16,000 each, the probability of winning watermelon and cherry is approximately 1 in 50 each, the probability of winning a one-coin combination is approximately 1 in 1.9, and the probability of winning BB2 is approximately 1 in 4.0. In two-coin play, there are no winning combinations in BB1.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no more targets to be determined, this means that the winning/losing judgment of the role has been completed. In such cases, the process proceeds to step S309, where the section lottery process related to the transition of the playing section is performed. In step S310, a lottery result command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 grasps the various results obtained in this lottery process, specifically the results of the winning/losing judgment of the role and the lottery results in the section lottery process. When the lottery result command has been sent, the lottery process ends.

When the lottery process is completed, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11, rotation initialization processing is performed in step S210. RAM 106 has a motor control storage area that stores information used to control the drive of the stepping motor, and the rotation initialization processing involves initializing this motor control storage area. In step S211, a 4.1-second wait processing is performed. In the 4.1-second wait processing, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (approximately 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reels began spinning in the previous game. If the wait time has not elapsed, the processing waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and the 4.1-second wait processing ends. Because of this 4.1-second wait processing, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately begin spinning even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41.

Next, the reel control process of step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 15. In this slot machine 10, in addition to a game in which a bonus such as a medal payout is awarded when a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role is stopped during one play (hereinafter also referred to as the "main game"), a pseudo game may also be played. Below, for ease of understanding, we will first explain the reel control process when no pseudo game is played, i.e., when only the main game is played.

In the reel control process, in step S401, a pseudo game determination process is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo game will be performed. In step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the spin start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, the repetition counter stored in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-play flag indicating that a pseudo-play has been performed is set. If the post-pseudo-play flag is not set, i.e., if a pseudo-play has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S607, where the reels begin accelerating according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, if the value of the repetition counter is 3, the spin start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained; if the value of the repetition counter is 2, the spin start setting table address for the center reel 32M is obtained; and if the value of the repetition counter is 1, the spin start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. In other words, the process in step S607 only obtains the spin start setting table address according to the value of the repetition counter, but does not control the drive of the stepping motor. Drive control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above, based on the obtained spin start setting table.

If a rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is obtained in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608, where 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, and if the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S610, where it is determined whether the post-pseudo-game flag has been set. If the post-pseudo-game flag has not been set, the process ends.

As described above, during the spin start process, acceleration begins in the order of the left reel 32L → center reel 32M → right reel 32R.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information for reel stop control in this game has been set. If the stop information has not been set, the process proceeds to step S404, where stop information setting processing is performed to set the stop information. In the stop information setting processing, stop information is created based on the result of the winning/losing combination determination, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Note that in step S404, only stop information for reel stop control in this game (hereinafter simply referred to as "stop information") is set; even if a pseudo game is being played, stop information for reel stop control in the pseudo game (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo game stop information") is not set. In step S405, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed.

In command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo game rotation start command is set in step S701. Here, the pseudo game rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has started spinning in a pseudo game. In step S702, it is determined whether a pseudo game flag indicating that a pseudo game will be played is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, i.e., if a pseudo game will not be played, the pseudo game rotation start command is cleared in step S703, and a rotation start command is set in step S704. Here, the rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has started spinning in a real game. In step S705, the set rotation start command or pseudo game rotation start command is sent to the display control device 81. Thereafter, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if command transmission process 1 is completed in step S406, proceed to step S407, where it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished. If the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at the specified rotation speed, proceed to step S408, where instruction monitor display process is performed. In the following step S409, command transmission process 2 is performed.

In command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined in step S901 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S902, where a stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop enable command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started rotating at a constant speed in this game. Also, in step S902, lamps (not shown) on each stop switch 42-44 are lit to notify the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command in this game. Then, command transmission process 2 ends.

When command transmission process 2 is complete, proceed to step S410 and perform stop control processing.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1008, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S1001. If a stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step S1009, where a stop position determination process is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is obtained. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is obtained based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the reel index sensor detection signal is input. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1106, where a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop command, the display control device 81 determines which stop switch was operated to issue the stop command and which reel will stop. In addition, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch that issued the stop command is turned off to notify the player that it is no longer possible to issue a stop command in this game. In the following step S1107, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding one symbol; a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols; a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols; and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S1107, a value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S1108, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether the pseudo-game flag is set, and if the pseudo-game flag is not set, the stop information change process is performed in step S1110, and then the stop position determination process is terminated.

Here, the stop information change process refers to a process that changes the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the stop information change process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, when a win occurs on any of the left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, or right-left-center bell (see Figure 13), the stop information change process is performed to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that generated the stop command.

For example, if the left-center-right bell is won, the stop information is changed so that a bell win occurs if the left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, and a compensatory role 1 or compensatory role 4 win occurs if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different order. The same applies to the left-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell. The stop information is changed so that a bell win occurs if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order corresponding to the name of the winning role, and a compensatory role win occurs if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different order. Note that below, the left-center-right bell, left-right center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell are collectively referred to as "push order roles" or "push order bells."

Incidentally, in this slot machine 10, if a replay is won through the stop information setting process and stop information change process, a replay win is achieved regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44. If the push order bell is won, a bell win is achieved regardless of the operation timing if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the correct operation sequence, and a supplementary role win is achieved regardless of the operation timing if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the incorrect operation sequence. If a 1-coin role is won, a supplementary role win is achieved regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44. If a watermelon, cherry, BB1, or BB2 is won, the corresponding win is achieved by operating the stop switches 42-44 in aim for the winning symbol, i.e., at the specified timing.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, once the stop position determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1010, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel spin counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001. In other words, once the slot machine 10 has determined the stop symbol number of the reel for which a stop command has been issued, it determines in step S1008 whether a next stop command has been issued, regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been issued has actually stopped. This allows the player to issue successive stop commands without waiting for the reel to stop. Note that the reel is not stopped during the stop control process (normal process), but during the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the arrival symbol on the reel for which the stop command has been issued is equal to the stop symbol number, and if so, brake processing is performed to stop the reel for which the stop command has been issued.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation counter is 0, this means that the stop pattern numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so proceed to step S1011 to determine whether the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not become stop pattern numbers, the process waits until the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers, the process proceeds to step S1012, where an all-reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions. In the following step S1013, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is ON, this means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, and the process continues to wait. If all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, the process proceeds to step S1014, where it is determined whether the instruction monitor (described below) is currently being displayed. If the instruction monitor is currently being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S1015. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not currently being displayed, the process waits for 100 msec in step S1016 and then terminates. Incidentally, the 100 msec wait in step S1016 is to wait for the brake process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the reel oscillation to converge.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, proceed to step S411 and determine whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, this process is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S213.

The medal payout process begins with a payout determination process. This process sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that a winning combination of symbols is aligned on a pay line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on a pay line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower rows of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a determination is made as to whether a winning combination has been achieved on the pay line. If a winning combination has not been achieved, the payout determination process is terminated. If a winning combination has been achieved, the process further determines whether the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag set in the win flag storage area 106a. If the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag, the winning condition device and the payout amount corresponding to that condition device are set in the payout information storage area provided in RAM 106, and the payout determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning condition device does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and abnormality processing is performed, which notifies the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state will remain until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination process is completed, a winning result command is sent to the display control device 81 to inform it of the condition device that won in this game.

When a winning result command is sent, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, this means that the previous payout determination process determined that a small win was not achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether a replay win has been achieved based on the condition device set in the payout determination process. If a replay win has not been achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if a replay win has been achieved, the replay setting process is performed and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process S204 described above, if it is determined that the replay setting process has been performed, the automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, medals equal to the payout number are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (50 medals stored), the payout number is added to the credit counter count value, and the added value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. Furthermore, if the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit while the payout number is being added, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. The medal payout process also changes the payout number displayed in the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout.

Next, we will explain the game section processing in step S214 later, and then the BB state processing in step S215.

The BB state processing determines whether the current game state is BB state. If it is not BB state, it determines whether the BB1 hit flag or BB2 hit flag is set. If neither BB hit flag is set, a state command is sent to the display control device 81 and the BB state processing ends. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (i.e., the game state of the next game), and a state command corresponding to the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is sent.

If any BB win flag is set, it is determined whether the corresponding BB win has occurred based on the condition device set in the previous payout determination process. If the corresponding BB win has not occurred, a status command is sent and the BB status process is terminated. If the corresponding BB win has occurred, the BB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of RAM 106 is cleared. At this time, if a BB1 win has occurred, a BB1 setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, and the remaining BB game number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c is set to 30. If a BB2 win has occurred, a BB2 setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, and the remaining BB game number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c is set to 30. A status command is then sent and the BB status process is terminated.

If the current game state is BB state, the remaining BB game counter is decremented by 1, and a determination is made as to whether the remaining BB game counter has reached 0. If the remaining BB game counter has not reached 0, a state command is sent and the BB state processing is terminated. If the remaining BB game counter has reached 0, this means that the BB state termination condition has been met, so the BB setting flag is cleared. A state command is then sent, and the BB state processing is terminated.

As described above, when the BB1 setting flag or BB2 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the game state remains in the BB state until 30 plays have been played. In the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, only three-coin play is possible, and a one-coin win is always achieved, resulting in a compensation win in which one medal is paid out. Therefore, when a game transitions to the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, the player will have lost 60 (= (3 - 1) x 30) medals by the time the BB state ends. In the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, only two-coin play is possible, and a one-coin win is always achieved, resulting in a compensation win in which one medal is paid out. Therefore, when a game transitions to the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, the player will have lost 30 (= (2 - 1) x 30) medals by the time the BB state ends.

In this slot machine 10, the main control unit 101 manages two game states: the normal state and the BB state, and also manages two game zones: the normal zone and the advantageous zone.

Figure 24 shows the transition of game zones.

The normal zone is a game zone where a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous zone. In the normal zone, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced. Therefore, in the normal zone, if two coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game, and if three coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.91 medals is expected for each game. If the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is won, the game zone will transition to the advantageous zone.

The advantageous zone is a play zone in which the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 can be announced if the player wins the push order bell. In other words, the advantageous zone is a play zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone in that the operation order can be announced. The advantageous zone is composed of two play modes: chance mode and notification mode. If the player wins the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone in the normal zone, the player will transition to the advantageous zone's chance mode. The advantageous zone ends when 1,500 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, or when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, regardless of the play mode at that time. When the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, more specifically, when the increase in the number of medals owned by the player in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400 without reaching 0. In other words, when the difference in the number of coins from the base point at which the player's medals in the advantageous zone have decreased the most reaches 2,400.

Chance mode is a game mode in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode. Chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won, or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in chance mode. When chance mode ends, the game transitions to notification mode. In chance mode, as in the normal section, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced if the push order bell is won. Therefore, in chance mode, if two coins are played, approximately 0.95 medals can be expected to be lost per game, and if three coins are played, approximately 0.91 medals can be expected to be lost per game.

In notification mode, when playing with three coins, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is selected is announced. Therefore, in notification mode, when playing with two coins, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals can be expected per game, while when playing with three coins, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals can be expected per game. Notification mode ends when the net increase in medals in this notification mode reaches a predetermined number. When notification mode ends, the advantageous zone also ends and the player transitions to the normal zone.

As described above, this slot machine 10 allows you to increase the number of medals you own by playing with three medals in notification mode.

The following explains the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing game zones, with reference to the flowcharts in Figure 25 and subsequent figures. To facilitate understanding, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained separately.

First, we will explain the processing during normal intervals.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process for the normal section. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S1302, where it is determined whether a win flag is set in the win flag storage area 106a, i.e., whether any winning combination has been achieved. If a win flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1303, where it is determined whether the win flag was set in the current game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a BB2 win does not occur in a three-coin game. Therefore, if the only win flag that is set is the BB2 win flag, it is determined that the win flag was not set in the current game. If a win flag other than the BB2 win flag is set, it is determined that the win flag was set in the current game. If the win flag was set in the current game, the transition flag is set in step S1304, and the interval indicator 66 is turned ON in step S1305, and this process ends. If the current game involves two coins, if the win flag is not set, or if the win flag is set but not for the current game, the process will end.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in the normal interval. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery for this game has been won. In such a case, the advantageous zone transition process shown in steps S1402 to S1408 is performed.

In the advantageous zone transition process, the transition flag is cleared in step S1402. In step S1403, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag, and in step S1404, the zone game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S1405, the game mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S1406, the transition game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 700. In step S1407, the mode game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S1408, the difference number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the transition flag is not set, or if the difference number counter is set to 0 in step S1408, an interval command is sent in step S1409, and this processing ends. Here, an interval command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp various information related to the play interval at the time the game ends (i.e., the play interval and play mode of the next game, and if it is an advantageous interval, the number of plays played in that advantageous interval and the number of plays played in that play mode, etc.), and in step S1409, an interval command corresponding to the play interval flag, play mode flag, and various counter values set in the interval information storage area 106d is sent.

As described above, if you win any role during three-coin play in the normal zone, you will move to the chance mode in the advantageous zone. As shown in Figure 13, for example, in the case of "Setting 3," if the BB1 win flag and the BB2 win flag are not carried over, there is only a 1 in 13 chance of a miss, and if the BB1 win flag or the BB2 win flag is carried over, there is only a 1 in 6.4 chance of a miss. Therefore, if you play three coins in the normal zone, the game will end in a few games. Note that if you play two coins, you will not move to the advantageous zone, regardless of the result of the role.

Next, we will explain the processing in chance mode during advantageous zones.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S1501, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S1502, where it is determined whether a rare role has been won. In this slot machine 10, watermelon and cherry are set as rare roles, so in step S1502, it is determined whether the watermelon win flag or the cherry win flag is set. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S1503, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. In step S1504, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the transition flag is set in step S1505 and the process is terminated. If the transition lottery has not been won, the process is terminated without setting the transition flag. If the current game involves two coins instead of three, or if a rare combination is not won, the process will end without conducting the transition lottery.

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1601, the termination determination process is performed.

In the termination determination process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 29, in step S1701, 1 is added to the value of the interval game number counter, and in step S1702, it is determined whether the value of the interval game number counter has reached 1500. If the value of the interval game number counter has not reached 1500, the process proceeds to step S1706, where it is determined whether a replay win has been achieved. If a replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1707, where a difference number adjustment process is performed to change the value of the difference number counter.

In the difference coin adjustment process, the number of medals bet (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out in the current game, and the result of this subtraction is added to the difference coin counter. It is then determined whether the value of the difference coin counter is 0 or greater. If the value of the difference coin counter is less than 0, the value of the difference coin counter is changed to 0 and the difference coin adjustment process is terminated; if the value of the difference coin counter is 0 or greater, the difference coin adjustment process is terminated as is. The reason the difference coin adjustment process is not performed when a replay win is achieved is that the result of subtracting the number of medals bet from the number of medals paid out in the current game is 0, so there is no need to perform the difference coin adjustment process.

If it is determined in step S1706 that a replay win has been achieved, or if the difference in number of coins adjustment process has been performed in step S1707, it is determined in step S1708 whether the value of the difference in number of coins counter is greater than 2400. If the value of the difference in number of coins counter is 2400 or less, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the value of the interval game number counter is 1500, or if it is determined in step S1708 that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400, the advantageous interval end process shown in steps S1703 to S1705 is performed, and this process ends. In the advantageous interval end process, the game interval flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S1703, and the interval display 66 is turned OFF in step S1704. In step S1705, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous interval. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the interval game number counter value, etc.).

Returning to the explanation of the game zone processing, in step S1602, it is determined whether the current game zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current game zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S1601, and after sending a zone command in step S1610, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S1603 and determine whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, in step S1604, add 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S1605, determine whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery to transition to the notification mode has been won, so in step S1606, the transition flag is cleared, and in step S1608, the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag. In step S1609, the net increase number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 120. Then, in step S1610, an zone command is sent, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S1605 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1607, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S1610, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to an announcement flag in step S1608, and the net increase number counter is set to 120 in step S1609. Thereafter, an interval command is sent in step S1610, and the process ends.

If step S1603 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S1610 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, even if the transition lottery is not won, chance mode transitions to notification mode if three coins are played corresponding to the value of the transition game counter. The value set in the transition game counter when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone is 700. Therefore, the event in which the value of the interval game counter reaches 1500 during the game zone end determination process (step S1702, see FIG. 21) does not occur if three coins are played. Furthermore, because the expected medal gain or loss in chance mode is -0.91 coins (playing three coins) or -0.95 coins (playing two coins), the event in which the value of the difference coin counter exceeds 2400 during the game zone end determination process (step S1708, see FIG. 21) does not occur. In other words, with this slot machine 10, when three coins are played, the advantageous zone ends in chance mode and the game transitions to the normal zone does not occur.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S1802, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S1803, where an add-on lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the net increase number counter. In the add-on lottery, the win/loss determination is based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the combination has been won. Incidentally, in the add-on lottery, for example, in a setting of 3, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a one-in-five probability that an add-on number of 30, 50, 100, or 300 will be won, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a one-in-three probability that an add-on number of 10, 20, 30, or 50 will be won. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery has been won. If the add-on lottery has been won, the add-on flag is set in step S1805, and an add-on command is sent in step S1806. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the add-on lottery and the number of add-on coins to be added to the value of the net increase coin counter. In step S1807, a value corresponding to the result of the add-on lottery is added to the value of the net increase coin counter. This process then ends. If the add-on lottery is not won, this process ends without setting the add-on flag. If the current game is a two-coin game instead of a three-coin game, or if a rare combination is not won, this process ends without conducting the add-on lottery.

Here, we will explain the unique processing that is performed in the notification mode during reel control processing.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 15, in step S401, pseudo-game determination processing is performed.

In the pseudo-game determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, in step S501, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if it is not the notification mode, the process ends. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S502, where it is determined whether the add-on flag is set. If the add-on flag is set, i.e., if the add-on lottery is won, the add-on flag is cleared in step S503, and the pseudo-game flag is set in step S504, and the process ends. If the add-on flag is not set, i.e., if the add-on lottery is not won, a pseudo-game lottery is held in step S505 to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game. In the pseudo-game lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery is not won, the process ends. If the pseudo-game lottery is won, the pseudo-game flag is set in step S504 and this process ends.

As described above, in notification mode, if the player wins the additional lottery or the pseudo game lottery, the pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is played for that game round.

Figure 31 shows an example of the rotation pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display pattern of the auxiliary display unit 65 when a pseudo game is being played.

In the notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of a young man character strolling down a road, and the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. In Figure 31(a), a bell win was achieved in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode. In the case of a pseudo game, when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, as shown in Figure 31(b), a notification urging the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 in order to aim for the "red 7" symbol and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. When the "red 7" symbols on each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R pseudo-stop on center line L2, as shown in FIG. 31(c), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a notification that the current game is a pseudo game, and also displays that an additional 100 coins will be added. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in FIG. 31(d), spinning begins with the left reel 32L. At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 ends the notification that the game is pseudo, and displays an image of a young man character strolling down the road and a message that the number of coins remaining to be paid out until the end of the notification mode has increased to 184, thereby notifying the player that the pseudo game has been switched to the main game.

Figure 32 shows another example of the rotation pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display pattern of the auxiliary display unit 65 when a pseudo game is being played.

In Figure 32(a), a bell win occurred in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 indicates that 84 coins remain until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo game is being played, as shown in Figure 32(b), when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, a notification urging the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 in order to aim for the "red 7" symbol and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. If the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R does not pseudo-stop on the center line L2, as shown in Figure 32(c), the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the player that the current game is a pseudo game and that no bonus will be added. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in Figure 32(d), spinning begins with the left reel 32L. At this time, if the push order bell is won, the auxiliary display unit 65 will end the notification that the pseudo game is in progress and will display the operation sequence that will result in a bell win and that the number of coins remaining to be paid out until the end of the notification mode remains at 84, thereby notifying the player that the pseudo game has been switched to the main game. If the center left and right bells are won, the operation sequence of "213" will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in Figure 32 (d).

As described above, when a simulated game is played on this slot machine 10, the game progresses in the following order in one play session: simulated game → main game. Therefore, the following explanation will begin with the reel control process in the simulated game.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 15, in step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, a repetition counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, a determination is made as to whether a post-pseudo-game flag, indicating that a pseudo-game has been played, is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., if a pseudo-game has not been played, the process proceeds to step S607, where acceleration of the reels begins according to the value of the repetition counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, a determination is made as to whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0. If the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S610, where a determination is made as to whether a post-pseudo-game flag has been set. If the post-pseudo-game flag has not been set, the process terminates.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information for reel stop control in this game has been set. Since the stop information has not been set in the first step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where a stop information setting process is performed to set the stop information. In other words, in this slot machine 10, after performing the rotation start process for the pseudo game, i.e., while the pseudo game is being executed, the stop information for this game is set. Thereafter, in step S405, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission process 1 is performed.

In command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 18, a pseudo-game rotation start command is set in step S701. In step S702, it is determined whether the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S705, where a pseudo-game rotation start command is sent to the display control device 81. This process then ends. Upon receiving the pseudo-game rotation start command, the display control device 81 starts the auxiliary effects for pseudo-games shown in Figure 31 (b) and other figures.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if command transmission process 1 is completed in step S406, the process proceeds to step S407, where it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished. If the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at the specified rotation speed, the process proceeds to step S408, where instruction monitor display processing is performed.

Here, the instruction monitor is a display unit that notifies the user of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 to achieve a bell win, and is managed by the main control unit 101. In this slot machine 10, the payout coin number display unit 62 functions as an instruction monitor, and when a left, center, or right bell win is achieved, i.e., when a bell win can be achieved by operating the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 in that order, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "1." When a center, right, or left bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "2." When a right, left, or center bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "3." When a left, right, or center bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "4." When a center, left, or right bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "5." When a right, center, or left bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "6."

Now, in the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 19, in step S801 it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, it is further determined in step S803 whether the pseudo game flag has been set. If the pseudo game flag has been set, this process ends without displaying the instruction monitor. In other words, in pseudo game, even if the push order bell has been won, the operation sequence that can achieve a bell win is not displayed on the instruction monitor. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, or if the push order bell has not been won, this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S409, command transmission process 2 is performed.

In command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined in step S901 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S903, where a pseudo stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the pseudo stop enable command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have begun rotating at a constant speed in the pseudo game. Also, in step S903, lamps (not shown) on each stop switch 42-44 are lit to notify the player or the like that it is now possible to issue a pseudo stop command in the pseudo game. Then, command transmission process 2 ends.

When command transmission process 2 is complete, proceed to step S410 and perform stop control processing.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1002, where it is determined whether a cancel operation to end the pseudo game has been performed. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, the settlement switch 59 functions as a cancel operation means, so it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If a cancel operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1008, where it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel in the pseudo game has been operated, i.e., whether a pseudo stop command has been issued. If a pseudo stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S1001. If a pseudo stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step S1009, where a stop position determination process is performed to pseudo-stop the spinning reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reached symbol is obtained. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel spin counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1104, where the pseudo game stop information is referenced. ROM 105 of the main control device 101 pre-stores a slide table (stop table) for pseudo stop control in pseudo games based on winning the additional lottery, and a slide table for pseudo stop control in pseudo games based on winning the pseudo game lottery. In step S1104, the slide table corresponding to the execution trigger of the pseudo game is referenced. Here, the slide table is a table that determines how far reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should slide (spin) from the timing when stop switches 42 to 44 are operated before a pseudo stop is made. In other words, a slide table is a group of stop data that can derive the relationship between the arrival symbol that reaches the base position when stop switches 42-44 are pressed and the pseudo-stop symbol that actually causes a pseudo-stop at that base position.

Figure 33 shows a slip table referenced in simulated gaming based on winning the bonus lottery. Symbols with a slip count of 0 are symbols that actually stop in the lower row. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the No. 15 "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the left reel 32L will stop without slipping, and the No. 16 "Red 7" symbol will stop in the middle row. Symbols with a non-zero slip count mean that the reel will slide the number of symbols indicated. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the No. 11 "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the left reel 32L will slide four symbols, and the No. 15 "Replay" symbol will stop in the lower row and the No. 16 "Red 7" symbol will stop in the middle row. In this way, in the slide table, the number of slides that will occur when the stop switches 42-44 are operated at the timing when the symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reach the bottom row is set for each symbol number. In the slide table shown in Figure 33, the number 16 "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will pseudo-stop in the middle row, regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44.

Figure 34 is a slide table referenced in a pseudo game based on winning a pseudo game lottery. In this slide table, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42-44, the number 16 "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M will pseudo-stop in the middle row, while the number 16 "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will pseudo-stop in the bottom row instead of the middle row.

Returning to the explanation of the stop position determination process, in step S1105, a pseudo stop command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the pseudo stop command, the display control device 81 determines which stop switch was operated to generate the pseudo stop command and which reel will be pseudo-stopped. In addition, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch that generated the pseudo stop command is turned off to notify the player that it is no longer possible to generate a pseudo stop command in the pseudo game. In step S1107, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is obtained based on the referenced pseudo game stop information. Then, in step S1108, the obtained number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually pseudo-stop at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, proceed to step S1010, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel spin counter has not reached 0, return to step S1001.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation counter is 0, this means that the stop pattern numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so proceed to step S1011 to determine whether the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not become stop pattern numbers, the process waits until the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers, the process proceeds to step S1012, where an all-reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions. In the following step S1013, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, and if any of the stop switches 42-44 are in an operated state, the process continues to wait. If all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, the process proceeds to step S1014, where it is determined whether the instruction monitor is being displayed. Since the instruction monitor is not displayed in a simulated game, the process waits for 100 msec in step S1016 and then ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S411, where it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S412, where transition preparation processing is performed to transition to the main game.

In the transition preparation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, a wait-for-operation timer is set in step S1201 (approximately 3.0 seconds in this embodiment). In step S1202, it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, it is determined in step S1203 whether the wait-for-operation timer has reached 0. The wait-for-operation timer is decremented in the timer decrement process of the timer interrupt process (step S108, see FIG. 10). If the wait-for-operation timer has not reached 0, processing returns to step S1202. If it is determined in step S1202 that the start lever 41 has been operated, or if it is determined in step S1203 that the wait-for-operation timer has reached 0, a post-pseudo-game flag is set in step S1204, and processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, once the transition preparation process is complete, return to step S402 and perform the spin start process.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, the repetition counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-play flag, indicating that a pseudo-play has been performed, has been set. As described above, if a pseudo-play has been performed, the post-pseudo-play flag is set in the transition preparation process, so the process proceeds to step S603, where it is determined whether the push-order bell has been won. If the push-order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S604, where the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win is displayed on the instruction monitor. Also, in step S604, an operation sequence command indicating the operation sequence to be notified is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the operation sequence command, the display control device 81 displays the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the operation sequence is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 slightly after the operation sequence is displayed on the instruction monitor.

If the instruction monitor is displayed in step S604 or if it is determined in step S603 that the push order bell has not been selected, the process proceeds to step S605, where the delay time is acquired. RAM 106 of the main control unit 101 contains a delay timer for determining the start timing of each pseudo-stopped reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S605, a random number is acquired and a value corresponding to the acquired result (i.e., a value obtained by a predetermined lottery) is set in the delay timer. The value of the delay timer is decremented in the timer decrement process of the timer interrupt process (step S108, see Figure 10). In step S606, the process waits until the value of the delay timer reaches 0. If the value of the delay timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S607, where the reel acceleration corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is initiated. In step S608, 1 is decremented from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, and if the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S610, where it is determined whether the post-pseudo-game flag has been set. If the post-pseudo-game flag has been set, the pseudo-game flag is cleared in step S611, and the post-pseudo-game flag is cleared in step S612, after which the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information has been set. In step S403 after the simulated game has been played, a negative determination is made because stop information has already been set, and the process proceeds to step S405 without performing the stop information setting process. In step S405, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission process 1 is performed. In command transmission process 1 after the simulated game has been played, a spin start command is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the spin start command, the display control device 81 starts the auxiliary effects for the actual game, as shown in Figure 31 (d) etc.

In step S407, it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished accelerating. When all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished accelerating and are now rotating at a constant predetermined speed, the process proceeds to step S408, where an instruction monitor display process is performed.

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, step S801 determines whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is notification mode, proceed to step S802 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, step S803 determines whether the pseudo game flag has been set. If the pseudo game flag has not been set, step S804 displays the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in a bell win on the instruction monitor, and this process ends. Also, in step S804, an operation sequence command indicating the operation sequence to be notified is sent to the display control device 81. However, after a pseudo game has been played, the operation sequence has already been displayed on the instruction monitor during the rotation start process (step S604, see FIG. 17), so performing step S804 does not change the display content of the instruction monitor. In other words, step S804 can be said to be processing for displaying the instruction monitor during a game round in which a pseudo game is not played.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, the command transmission process 2 in step S409 and the stop control process in step S410 have been explained in the reel control process for this game, so explanations will be omitted. When the stop control process is completed, proceed to step S411, where it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, this process is terminated.

This slot machine 10 is configured to allow the pseudo game to be canceled and the game to be switched to the main game. This configuration will be explained in detail below based on the flowchart in Figure 21.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1002, where it is determined whether a cancel operation to end the pseudo-game has been performed. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, because the settlement switch 59 functions as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If a cancel operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1003, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter is 3, i.e., whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the pseudo-game flag is cleared in step S1004, and the above-mentioned instruction monitor display processing is performed in step S1005. In the following step S1006, a pseudo-game end command is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the pseudo-game end command, the display control device 81 determines that the pseudo-game has been canceled. After that, the process waits for 30 msec in step S1007 and returns to step S1001. Incidentally, the process waits for 30 msec in step S1007 to wait for the display control device 81 to switch from the auxiliary effects for the pseudo game to the auxiliary effects for the main game.

Figure 35 shows an example of the rotation pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display pattern of the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo game is canceled.

In the notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of a young man walking down a road, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the remaining payout amount until the notification mode ends. In Figure 35(a), a bell win occurred in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that 84 coins remain until the notification mode ends. When a pseudo game is being played, once each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, a notification prompting the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 to aim for the "red 7" symbol and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in Figure 35(b). At this time, the remaining payout amount until the notification mode ends is not displayed. If a cancel operation is performed while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game transitions directly to the main game without any pseudo stops for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in Figure 35(c). At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 ends the notification that the pseudo game is in progress without reporting the results of the pseudo game in more detail, such as whether or not an additional bonus has been awarded. It also displays an image of the young man character strolling down the road and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode, indicating that the pseudo game has transitioned to the main game. However, if the additional bonus lottery was won, the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode is updated from 84 to 184, as shown in Figure 35(c).

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, if it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the reel rotation counter is not 3, i.e., if a cancel operation is performed while at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, a cancel operation flag indicating that a cancel operation has been performed is set, and then the process proceeds to step S1009, where stop position determination processing is performed to pseudo-stop the spinning reel. Then, in step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel rotation counter has not reached 0, this means that one remaining reel is spinning, so the process returns to step S1001, a positive determination is made in step S1001, and the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed based on the fact that the cancel operation flag has been set. Then, a negative determination is made in step S1003, and stop position determination processing is performed in step S1009. In step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation counter has reached 0. If the reel spin counter value reaches 0, the cancel operation flag is cleared and processing from step S1011 onwards is carried out.

As described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game will proceed directly to the main game without pseudo-stopping all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If a cancel operation is performed while at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the game will proceed to the main game after all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1901, the above-mentioned termination determination process is performed, and in step S1902, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S1901, and after sending a zone command in step S1908, this process is terminated.

If the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, step S1903 performs a net increase coin count update process to update the value of the net increase coin count counter. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is subtracted from the value of the net increase coin count counter, and the medal bet number (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is added to the subtraction result. Step S1904 determines whether the value of the net increase coin count counter has reached 0. If the value of the net increase coin count counter has not reached 0, step S1908 sends a zone command and then terminates this process. If the value of the net increase coin count counter has reached 0, steps S1905 to S1907 perform the favorable zone termination process, send a zone command in step S1908, and then terminate this process. In the favorable zone termination process, step S1905 changes the gaming zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S1906 turns off the zone indicator 66. Step S1907 performs initialization processing in response to the end of the favorable zone. The initialization process initializes information related to instruction functions stored in the section information storage area 106d (such as the section game number counter value).

Here, we will explain the playability of this slot machine 10.

This slot machine 10 allows for two-coin and three-coin play. However, when two-coin play is performed in the normal zone, even if a winning combination is achieved, the player will not transition to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, when two-coin play is performed in the advantageous zone, if the current play mode is the notification mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 will not be announced even if the push order bell is won. If the current play mode is the chance mode, no transition lottery will be held. In addition, in two-coin play, the mode game number counter, which triggers a transition to the notification mode, is not updated, while the interval game number counter, which triggers a transition to the normal zone, is updated (end determination process; see Figure 29). Furthermore, in two-coin play, there is an approximately 1 in 4.0 probability of winning BB2. If BB2 is achieved, the player must play 30 games to reduce their owned medals by 30. Therefore, when comparing two-coin play and three-coin play, three-coin play is more advantageous for the player.

When playing with three medals, there is a 1 in 12 chance of winning BB1, and if a BB1 win is achieved, it will be necessary to reduce the number of medals owned by 60 medals over 30 games. However, if a player plays with three medals while the BB2 win flag is carried over, the event of winning BB1 will not occur, and the event of winning BB2 will not occur either. Therefore, playing with three medals while the BB2 win flag is carried over is the most advantageous game for the player. Therefore, below we will explain the gameplay when playing with three medals while the BB2 win flag is carried over.

In the normal zone, if you win any role when playing with three coins, you will have won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone. For example, in "Setting 3," there is approximately a 1 in 1.2 chance of winning any role, and an approximately 1 in 6.4 chance of losing. Therefore, playing with three coins in the normal zone will almost always complete one game.

When the game transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the game starts in chance mode, and the transition game count is set to 700 (see Figure 26).

In chance mode, if a rare combination is won, a lottery is held to transition to notification mode. If the transition lottery is won, the game transitions from chance mode to notification mode. Even if the transition lottery is not won, if 700 three-coin plays have been performed in chance mode, the game transitions to notification mode (S1603, S1604, S1607, see Figure 28). In other words, in this slot machine 10, when transitioning from the normal mode to chance mode, 700 plays function as the so-called ceiling number. The advantageous zone ends when 1,500 plays have been performed or when the difference in number of coins reaches 2,400, regardless of the current play mode. When transitioning to notification mode after reaching the ceiling of 700 plays, the remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone is 800. In notification mode, the operation order is always announced when the push order bell is won, so players can expect to gain approximately 3.5 coins per game. Assuming you can play 800 times in notification mode, you can expect to gain approximately 2,700 medals. Therefore, even if you switch to notification mode after reaching the ceiling, you can expect the difference in medals to reach 2,400 and the advantageous period to end before you play 1,500 times.

When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, the net increase coin counter is set to 120 (see Figure 28). Therefore, when transitioning to notification mode, an increase of at least 120 medals can be expected. Furthermore, if a rare combination is won in notification mode, an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the net increase coins (see Figure 30). At this time, if the additional lottery based on a watermelon win is won, 30, 50, 100, or 300 is added, and if the additional lottery based on a cherry win is won, 10, 20, 30, or 50 is added. Then, when the value of the net increase coin counter reaches 0, the notification mode and advantageous zone end, and the game transitions to the normal zone (see Figure 36).

If the player wins the bonus lottery, a pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is played in the game. In a pseudo game based on a bonus lottery win, the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop pseudo on the center line L2, and the number of coins added to the net increase coin counter is announced. Even if the player does not win the bonus lottery, if the player wins the pseudo game lottery, a pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is played in the game. In a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win, the "red 7" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M stop pseudo on the center line L2, while the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R does not stop pseudo on the center line L2, and it is announced that the net increase coin counter will not be added. These pseudo games can be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game will proceed to the main game without any pseudo-stops on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R; if the settlement switch 59 is operated when at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the game will proceed to the main game after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have pseudo-stopped.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the additional lottery is won, a pseudo game is executed. In the pseudo game, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, and when the stop switches 42-44 are operated, the corresponding reel comes to a pseudo stop. Then, when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have come to a pseudo stop, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the system to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute auxiliary effects using the reels, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

However, it is possible that some players may find operating the stop switches 42-44 during a simulated game to be a hassle. Therefore, the slot machine 10 is designed to allow the simulated game to end if the settlement switch 59 is operated while the simulated game is in progress. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players who find operating the stop switches 42-44 during a simulated game to be a hassle from losing their motivation to play once the simulated game has begun.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

If the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the simulated game ends without any pseudo-stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This configuration makes it possible to configure the system so that the pseudo-stop results of the symbols in the simulated game cannot be known unless the stop switches 42-44 are operated during the simulated game, and makes it possible to prompt the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 during the simulated game.

When a pseudo game is executed, the actual game is executed after the pseudo game has ended. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped when the next game is started, even if the pseudo game could have ended without the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R coming to a pseudo stop. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, it is possible to move on to determining whether a stop command has been issued, without bringing the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to a pseudo stop or restarting their rotation. This allows for a swift transition from the pseudo game to the actual game.

If the settlement switch 59 is operated when at least one reel has come to a pseudo-stop, the pseudo game will end after all spinning reels have come to a pseudo-stop. This configuration allows a player who wishes to end the pseudo game midway through a pseudo game without operating the stop switches 42-44 to do so by operating the settlement switch 59, without operating the stop switches 42-44.

If the settlement switch 59 is operated during the execution of a simulated game, the subsequent processing changes depending on the value of the reel spin counter. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the simulated game ends depending on the circumstances under which the settlement switch 59 is operated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. For example, it is possible to configure the system so that all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped whenever the settlement switch 59 is operated. However, this configuration raises concerns that the significance of operating the stop switches 42-44 in the simulated game may be lost. This concern is more pronounced in configurations such as the present slot machine 10, where the stopping results of symbols in the simulated game do not depend on the timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44. However, this concern can be effectively alleviated by configuring the subsequent processing to change depending on the value of the reel spin counter.

If the player wins the bonus lottery, a pseudo game will be played. This configuration allows the pseudo game to be used as a notification that the net increase in coins is increasing, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In the simulated game, if the "red 7" symbol combination pseudo-stops on the middle line L2, an increase in the net increase in coins is notified, but if the "red 7" symbol combination does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, an increase in the net increase in coins is not notified. This configuration allows players who want to be notified of an increase in the net increase in coins to operate stop switches 42-44, while allowing players who do not want to be notified of an increase in the net increase in coins to operate the settlement switch 59.

Furthermore, the results of the symbols stopping in the pseudo game do not directly contribute to the increase in the net increase in coins. In this game, unless a winning combination is achieved, players cannot receive benefits such as medal payouts. However, in the pseudo game, the increase in the net increase in coins has already been determined through an additional lottery, so the player does not suffer any disadvantage even if the "red 7" symbol combination does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2. If the "red 7" symbol combination does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, the player simply is not notified that the net increase in coins will not increase. In this way, by making the pseudo game unrelated to the player's direct benefit, it is possible to position the pseudo game as a form of presentation in which players can actively participate, and it is possible to prevent players from suffering disadvantages by operating the settlement switch 59, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the player wins the bonus lottery, a pseudo game is played in that game. This configuration can increase the player's interest in the game. It is certainly possible to play a pseudo game in a game other than the one in which the bonus lottery was won. However, with this configuration, if the player forgets that they won a rare combination in a game before the pseudo game begins, there is a concern that the player may perceive the pseudo game as a fake and stop operating the stop switches 42-44 in an attempt to hit the "red 7" symbol. Furthermore, if the player wins a rare combination in the final game of the notification mode and the notification mode ends without winning the bonus lottery, there is a concern that the player may suspect that the bonus lottery was not played at all. On the other hand, if the pseudo game is played in the game in which the bonus lottery was won, the game flow will be pseudo game → actual game, which can effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Even if a player does not win the bonus lottery, they can still play a pseudo game if they win the pseudo game lottery. This configuration makes it possible to provide opportunities in the pseudo game where an increase in the net increase in coins is notified and opportunities where an increase in the net increase in coins is not notified, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When a pseudo game is played, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify the player that a pseudo game is being played. This configuration prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that one game has ended when the pseudo game has ended. Furthermore, even if the pseudo game transitions to the main game without all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R coming to a halt, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to whether the game is a pseudo game or a main game.

When a pseudo game is played in a game in which the push order bell has been won, the system is configured to notify the player of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. This configuration makes it possible to avoid operating the stop switches 42-44 in the pseudo game in the above operation sequence. Furthermore, the system is configured to notify the player of the above operation sequence after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been pseudo-stopped, but before the pseudo-stopped reels begin to accelerate. This configuration makes it possible to avoid operating the stop switches 42-44 in a different order from the above operation sequence in the actual game, which would result in the player being unable to win a bell.

In game times when a pseudo game is not being executed, the system is configured to notify the player of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached a constant speed. This configuration makes it possible to differentiate the timing of notification of the operation sequence in actual game times between game times when a pseudo game is being executed and game times when a pseudo game is not being executed. In this way, by ensuring that the operation sequence is notified before the operation of stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, and by differentiating the timing of notification of the operation sequence in actual game times depending on whether a pseudo game is being executed, it is possible to alert the player to check the instruction monitor.

When the pseudo game ends, a delay time is set based on the random number obtained for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the reels begin accelerating after waiting for that delay time. This configuration makes it possible to stagger the start times of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R when transitioning to the actual game. Even if the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped along the center line L2 during the pseudo game, the "red 7" symbols will no longer be lined up when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin rotating at a constant speed. This prevents the stop results from the pseudo game from being used as a guide for pressing the buttons in the actual game that follows.

When an operation sequence that can result in a bell win is announced, it is announced on the auxiliary display unit 65 controlled by the display control device 81, and also on the instruction monitor controlled by the main control device 101. Because the determination of whether the stop switches 42-44 have been operated is performed by the main control device 101, this configuration reliably avoids the occurrence of an event in which it is necessary to determine whether the stop switches 42-44 have been operated before the operation sequence is announced.

The system is configured to determine that a cancellation operation has been performed on the simulated game when the settlement switch 59 is operated. This configuration reduces the chances of a player unintentionally performing a cancellation operation. For example, it is possible to configure the system to determine that a cancellation operation has been performed if the start lever 41 is operated after the simulated game has begun. However, with this configuration, if a player repeatedly presses the start lever 41 to issue a start command, the second and subsequent operations of the start lever 41 may be determined to be cancellation operations, which could result in the pseudo game ending despite the player's intended enjoyment of the game.

When a pseudo game is executed, the stop information for the actual game is set after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has been spun, i.e., while the pseudo game is being executed. This configuration allows for a quicker transition from the pseudo game to the actual game, compared to a configuration in which the stop information for the actual game is set after the pseudo game has ended.

The pseudo-game stop information is configured to be set after a pseudo-stop command is issued. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the time required to determine whether a pseudo-stop command has been issued in a pseudo-game, even when the stop information is set while the pseudo-game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the pseudo game stop information is set after a pseudo stop command is issued, there is a possibility that the time between the issuance of the pseudo stop command and the pseudo stop of the corresponding reel may be extended. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, in the case of a pseudo game based on a winning bonus lottery, the number 16 "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is pseudo-stopped in the middle row regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop switches 42-44. In the case of a pseudo game based on a winning pseudo game lottery, the number 16 "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M is pseudo-stopped in the middle row regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop switches 42-44, while the number 16 "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R is pseudo-stopped in the lower row instead of the middle row. In this way, by configuring the stopping results of symbols in a pseudo game to be independent of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, it is possible to prevent a long delay between the issuance of a pseudo stop command and the pseudo stop of the corresponding reel, even if the pseudo game stop information is set after the pseudo stop command is issued.

In the pseudo game, the reels are configured to slide a maximum of 19 symbols from the time the stop switches 42-44 are operated before a pseudo stop occurs. This configuration makes it possible to ensure time to set pseudo game stop information after a pseudo stop command is issued, and time to determine the reel stop position based on the pseudo game stop information. Furthermore, in this game, the reels must be stopped within a predetermined time after a stop command is issued, so it is difficult to set stop information after a stop command is issued; it is necessary to set the stop information before determining whether a stop command has been issued. On the other hand, in the pseudo game, the above restrictions are not imposed, and so the above times can be ensured by configuring the reels to slide a maximum of 19 symbols before a pseudo stop occurs.

(Second embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, the number of added coins is notified in the pseudo game, but the number of added coins may also be notified in the actual game. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the reel control process.

In step S2001, a repetition counter stored in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S2002, acceleration of the reels begins according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, if the value of the repetition counter is 3, the spin start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained; if the value of the repetition counter is 2, the spin start setting table address for the center reel 32M is obtained; and if the value of the repetition counter is 1, the spin start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. Note that drive control of the stepping motor is performed in stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing based on the obtained spin start setting table.

If a spin start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is obtained in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003, where 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S2004, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0. If the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S2002. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S2005, where a stop information setting process is performed to set stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing role determination is created, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S2006, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S2007, a spin start command is sent to the display control device 81. In step S2008, it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished accelerating. When acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant predetermined speed, proceed to step S2009 and perform instruction monitor display processing.

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 38, step S2101 determines whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is notification mode, proceed to step S2102 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, step S2103 displays on the instruction monitor the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in a bell win, and this process ends. Also, in step S2103, an operation sequence command indicating the operation sequence to be notified is sent to the display control device 81. If the current game mode is not notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S2010, a stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. Then, in step S2011, stop control processing is performed, and this process ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 39, in the stop control process, in step S2201, it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process waits until a stop command is issued. If a stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step 2202, where stop position determination processing is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 40, in step S2301, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is obtained. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is obtained based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation count counter. In step S2303, a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. In addition, in step S2303, a lamp (not shown) of the stop switch for which the stop command has been issued is turned off to notify the player, etc., that it is no longer possible to issue a stop command in this game. In the following step S2304, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: stopping the reaching symbol that has reached the base position; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding one symbol; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding two symbols; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding three symbols; and stopping the corresponding reel after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S2304, a slip count value of 0 to 4 is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S2305, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S2306, it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter is equal to 0. If the value of the reel spin counter is not 0, i.e., if a stop command has not been issued for at least one reel, the stop information change process is performed in step S2307 and then the stop position determination process is terminated. If the value of the reel spin counter is 0, i.e., if a stop command has been issued for all reels, the stop position determination process is terminated without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, once the stop position determination process has ended, the process proceeds to step S2203, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel spin counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S2201. In other words, once the slot machine 10 has determined the stop symbol number of the reel for which a stop command has been issued, it determines in step S2201 whether a next stop command has been issued, regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been issued has actually stopped. This allows the player to issue successive stop commands without waiting for the reel to stop. Note that the reels are not stopped during the stop control process (normal processing), but during the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the arrival symbol on the reel for which the stop command has been issued is equal to the stop symbol number, and if so, braking is performed to stop the reel for which the stop command has been issued.

If it is determined in step S2203 that the value of the reel rotation counter is 0, this means that the stop pattern numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so proceed to step S2204 to determine whether the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not become stop pattern numbers, the process waits until the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers, proceed to step S2205 to send an all-reel stop completion command to the display control device 81. By receiving the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions. In the following step S2206, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is ON, this means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, and the process continues to wait. If all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, the process proceeds to step S2207, where an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 determines that all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. In step S2208, it is determined whether an instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S2209. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting 100 msec in step S2210. Incidentally, the reason for waiting 100 msec in step S2210 is to wait for the brake process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the reel oscillation to converge.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing an additional coin notification display that notifies the number of additional coins.

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the presentation determination process that is performed at the start of a game.

In step S2401, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received, and if not, this process is terminated. If a lottery result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2402, where it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is not notification mode, the process is terminated. If the current game mode is notification mode, it is determined in step S2403 whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has not been won, the process is terminated. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S2404, where a performance execution lottery is held. In the performance execution lottery, a win or loss is determined based on the type of rare role that has been won and the random number obtained by the display control device 81. Incidentally, in the performance execution lottery, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1 in 10 chance of winning the performance execution lottery, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a 1 in 5 chance of winning the performance execution lottery. In step S2405, it is determined whether the performance execution lottery has been won. If the effect execution lottery is won, the effect flag is set in step S2406 and this process ends. If the effect execution lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S2407 and determines whether an add-on command has been received. The add-on command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when the add-on lottery is won, and is sent before the lottery result command when the add-on lottery is won (see Figures 12 and 30). Therefore, if an add-on command has been received, it means that the add-on lottery has been won for this game round. In this case, the effect flag is set in step S2406 and this process ends. If an add-on command has not been received, this process ends as is. Note that when the display control device 81 receives an add-on command, it stores the number of add-on coins indicated by the add-on command in an add-on coin number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81.

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the effect execution process that is carried out during the game.

In step S2501, it is determined whether the effect flag is set, and if the effect flag is not set, this processing is terminated. If the effect flag is set, this means that an additional notification effect will be executed, so the processing proceeds to step S2502, where it is determined whether a stop command has been received. If a stop command has not been received, the processing waits until a stop command is received. If a stop command is received, the processing adds 1 to the value of the stop operation number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 in step S2503. In step S2504, it is determined whether the value of the stop operation number counter has reached 3, and if it has not reached 3, in step S2505 an alarm sound corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64, and processing returns to step S2502. If the value of the stop operation number counter has reached 3, in step S2506 an additional notification process is performed, and then this processing is terminated.

In the bonus notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, step S2601 determines whether an bonus command has been received, i.e., whether the bonus lottery has been won in the current game round. If the game round has won the bonus lottery, step S2602 waits until an all-reel stop completion command is received. If an all-reel stop completion command is received, step S2603 follows, and an alert sound corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter (3) is output from speaker 64. Then, step S2604 follows, and the process waits until an operation end command is received. If an operation end command is received, step S2605 follows, and the number of bonus coins won in the bonus lottery is displayed on auxiliary display unit 65. Then, step S2606 sets the value of the stop operation number counter to 0, and step S2607 clears the effect flag, terminating this process.

If it is determined in step S2601 that an add-on command has not been received, i.e., if the add-on lottery has not been won in this game round, the process proceeds to step S2608, where an alarm sound execution lottery is held to determine whether or not to output an alarm sound. In the alarm sound execution lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on a random number acquired by the display control device 81. The probability of winning the alarm sound execution lottery is approximately one in three. In step S2609, it is determined whether or not the alarm sound execution lottery has been won. If the alarm sound execution lottery has been won, the process waits in step S2610 until an all reels stop completion command is received. If an all reels stop completion command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2611, where an alarm sound corresponding to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. Thereafter, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and this process ends. If the notification sound execution lottery is not won, the notification sound is not output from the speaker 64, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0 in step S2606, the effect flag is cleared in step S2607, and this processing ends.

Here, we will explain the effect of the additional notification effects.

The bonus notification effect will be performed if you win the bonus lottery or if you win the effect execution lottery.

If the display control device 81 has won the additional lottery, it outputs a first sound alert (e.g., a "do" sound) when it receives a stop command based on the first stop command, and outputs a second sound alert (e.g., a "re" sound) when it receives a stop command based on the second stop command. Then, if it receives a stop command based on the third stop command, it outputs a third sound alert (e.g., a "mi" sound) after it receives an all-reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions, and displays the number of additional coins won in the additional lottery on the auxiliary display unit 65 after it receives an operation completion command indicating that all stop switches 42-44 have become untouched.

If the display control device 81 does not win the additional lottery, and receives a stop command based on the first stop command, it outputs a first alert sound (e.g., the note "do"); if it receives a stop command based on the second stop command, it outputs a second alert sound (e.g., the note "re"). If it receives a stop command based on the third stop command, and the alert sound execution lottery is won, it outputs a third alert sound (e.g., the note "mi") after receiving an all-reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions; and if the alert sound execution lottery is not won, it does not output the third alert sound (e.g., the note "mi") after receiving the all-reel stop completion command.

As described above, in the bonus notification effect, if the bonus lottery is won, the sequence is as follows: first alert sound output → second alert sound output → third alert sound output → number of bonus coins announced; if the bonus lottery is not won, the sequence is as follows: first alert sound output → second alert sound output → third alert sound output, or first alert sound output → second alert sound output. Here, for example, in setting 3, the probability of winning the bonus lottery is approximately one in five if a watermelon is won, and approximately one in three if a cherry is won. The probability of winning the effect execution lottery is approximately one in ten if a watermelon is won, and approximately one in half if a cherry is won. Therefore, in the case of a watermelon win, when the first alert sound is output, i.e., when the bonus notification effect begins, the expected probability of the number of bonus coins being announced exceeds 66%. In the case of a cherry win, when the first alert sound is output, i.e., when the additional alert effect begins, the expected probability of the additional coins being announced exceeds 40%. Because the probability of winning the alert sound execution lottery is approximately one-third, when the third alert sound is output, the expected probability of the additional coins being announced becomes even higher than the rate mentioned above. Because the third alert sound is output after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions, the player can continue to operate the stop switch that generated the third stop command to their heart's content before ending it.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In the stop control process, once the stop symbol number of the reel for which a stop command has been issued has been determined, step S2201 is configured to determine whether a next stop command has been issued, regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been issued has actually stopped. This configuration allows the player to operate another stop switch without waiting for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch to stop. As a result, improving the operability of stop switches 42-44 can increase the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the system were configured to determine whether the next stop command has occurred without waiting for the reels to stop, new problems could arise, such as the next game being able to start before the reels have stopped. Therefore, the slot machine 10 is configured to perform a standby process that waits for 100 msec once the stop symbol numbers for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been determined. This configuration allows the reel oscillation to converge while the standby process is being performed, effectively eliminating the above-mentioned concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

The 100 msec standby process is performed after it is determined that the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have matched the stop symbol numbers. This configuration shortens the standby time, and even when standby processing is performed, it is possible to prevent the wait time until the next game can be started from being too long.

It is certainly possible to configure the system to perform standby processing before determining whether the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop symbol numbers when the reel spin counter is determined to have reached zero, i.e., between steps S2203 and S2204. However, in such a configuration, the standby time must consider not only the time for the reel oscillation to converge, but also the time required for the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on the reels to reach the stop symbol numbers (i.e., the reel slip time). Because this slot machine 10 can slide up to four symbols, it is necessary to reserve approximately 179 msec (= 1.49 x 24 x 5) as standby time in addition to the time for the reel oscillation to converge. Furthermore, if the reels stop with three or fewer symbols instead of four, the standby time of approximately 36 msec (= 1.49 x 24 x 1) or more would be wasted time, resulting in prolonged gameplay. On the other hand, if the system is configured to perform standby processing after it is determined that the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have matched the stop symbol numbers, it will be possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

The system is configured to perform the 100 msec standby process after determining that all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. This configuration makes it possible to standardize the time required until the next game turn can be started, even when standby processing is performed, thereby improving operability when starting the next game turn. For example, it is possible to perform standby processing after determining that the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stopped symbol numbers, without providing process S2206, which determines whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. However, with this configuration, the time required until the next game turn can be started will vary depending on whether the player finishes operating all stop switches 42-44 after the standby process has ended or during the standby process. Furthermore, if the time required until the next round can begin changes, an event may occur in which, for example, when a player inserts a coin to start the next round, the operation is not accepted, reducing operability when starting the next round.

The standby process, which waits for 100 msec, is performed before the medal payout process. This configuration prevents the awarding of a special bonus, such as a medal payout, when the reel oscillation has not yet converged. Furthermore, by performing the standby process before the payout determination process performed during the medal payout process, the processing configuration can be simplified while increasing the versatility of the processing program related to the standby process. For example, if the payout determination process determines that a small win has been achieved, the standby process can be omitted or a standby process that waits for a time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out can be performed. If the payout determination process determines that a small win has not been achieved, the standby process can be performed for a predetermined time. This configuration prevents the delay before the next game can be started, since the standby time varies depending on whether or not a medal has been paid out. However, this configuration complicates the processing configuration, and when the processing program is applied to other slot machines that have different numbers of medals paid out when a small win is achieved, the processing time must be adjusted accordingly, reducing versatility.

In a configuration where a push order bell is included as a lottery feature and where operating the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation order gives the player an advantage, the system is configured to issue stop commands consecutively without waiting for the reels to stop. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will unintentionally operate the stop switches 42-44 in the wrong order. In other words, in a configuration where operating the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation order gives the player an advantage, players have sometimes unintentionally operated the stop switches 42-44 in the wrong order. This occurs when, for example, a player operates the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation order, but then operates the second stop switch when the reel corresponding to the first stop command has not yet stopped. This operation is not recognized as valid, and the third stop switch operated is determined to be the operation of the second stop command.

The standby process, which waits for 100 msec, is configured to be performed after the operation sequence is hidden if it is currently being displayed on the instruction monitor. This configuration makes it possible to quickly end the notification of the operation sequence on the instruction monitor while shortening the standby time. This is because the standby time can be shortened by the time required for the processing of steps S2208 and S2209.

If the system were configured to determine whether the next stop command has been issued without waiting for the reels to stop, new problems could arise, such as the reel corresponding to the second stop command not stopping even after all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, or the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped but at least one stop switch has not been operated. If these problems arise, problems will arise in the control performed by the display control device 81. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, once the main control device 101 has determined the stop positions of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it determines whether the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, and it also determines whether all stop switches 42-44 have entered an unoperated state. When the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R match the stop symbol numbers, an all-reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81, and when all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. With this configuration, the display control device 81 can perform control in response to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R having stopped upon receiving the all-reel stop completion command, and can perform control in response to the end of operation of all stop switches 42-44 upon receiving the operation end command. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

The main control device 101 is configured to send an operation end command after sending an all reels stop completion command. This configuration allows the display control device 81 to perform control in response to the completion of operation of all stop switches 42-44 after performing control in response to the completion of operation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, the maximum time required from determining the stop position of a reel for which a stop command is issued until the reel actually reaches the stop position can be determined by the main control device 101 to be approximately 179 msec, since the reel slides up to four symbols. On the other hand, the time required for all stop switches 42-44 to be in a state where they are not being operated depends on the player's operation, and therefore cannot be determined or predicted by the main control device 101. Therefore, by configuring the display control device 81 to send an operation end command after sending an all reels stop completion command, it is possible to reduce the time lag between the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on the receipt of the all reels stop completion command.

When it is determined that the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have matched the stop symbol numbers, an all-reel stop completion command is sent before determining whether all stop switches 42-44 have entered an unoperated state. This configuration reduces the lag between the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have entered a stopped state and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on receiving the all-reel stop completion command. Furthermore, when it is determined that all stop switches 42-44 have entered an unoperated state, an operation end command is sent before determining whether the instruction monitor is being displayed. This configuration reduces the lag between the timing when operation of all stop switches 42-44 has ended and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on receiving the operation end command.

The additional bonus notification effect is configured to progress when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and when all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, and the additional bonus notification effect is controlled by the display control device 81. In this configuration, there is a concern that one of the carefully prepared effects may not be executed depending on which of the following occurs first: all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped or all stop switches 42-44 have been operated. To alleviate this concern, for example, a third notification sound may be output when either all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped or all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, and an additional bonus notification may be executed when the other occurs. However, with such a configuration, the command type received from the main control device 101 will no longer correspond to the processing content to be executed, which could result in a new problem of the processing configuration related to the additional notification performance becoming more complex and requiring increased memory capacity.

On the other hand, by configuring the main control device 101 to send an all-reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions, and an operation end command indicating that operation of all stop switches 42-44 has ended, the display control device 81 can determine that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the all-reel stop completion command, and can determine that operation of all stop switches 42-44 has ended by receiving the operation end command. Furthermore, because the main control device 101 sends the operation end command after sending the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 can control the output of a third alert sound upon receiving the all-reel stop completion command, and then control the execution of an additional alert upon receiving the subsequent operation end command. This makes it possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

In the additional notification effect, a third notification sound is output from speaker 64 upon receipt of an all reels stop completion command, and an additional notification is executed on auxiliary display unit 65 upon receipt of an operation end command. In this way, by configuring the device that executes the effect upon receipt of an all reels stop completion command and the device that executes the effect upon receipt of an operation end command to be different, it is possible to reliably output the third notification sound even if the interval between receiving the all reels stop completion command and receiving the operation end command is short.

(Third embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in Figure 20, commands for pseudo-games and commands for actual games were prepared separately, and commands depending on the presence or absence of a pseudo-game flag were sent to the display control device 81. However, this configuration will be changed. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 44 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo game flag storage area provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. The pseudo game flag storage area consists of one byte. The most significant bit 7 and bits 5 to 0 of the pseudo game flag storage area are blank, and the sixth bit functions as a pseudo game flag storage bit. When setting a pseudo game flag (step S504, see Figure 16), the main control unit 101 sets the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area to "1", and when clearing a pseudo game flag (step S611, see Figure 17 or step S1004, see Figure 21), it sets the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area to "0". Therefore, if each bit in the pseudo gaming flag storage area is arranged from the most significant bit to form an 8-digit binary number, and the resulting value is converted to hexadecimal, the result will be 40H (01000000) if the pseudo gaming flag is set, and 00H (00000000) if the pseudo gaming flag is not set.

Next, we will explain command transmission process 1 in this embodiment. Command transmission process 1 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S406, see Figure 15), and is a process of transmitting a spin start command or a pseudo-game spin start command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 45, rotation start header information is obtained in step S2701.

Here, we will briefly explain the structure of a command. A command consists of a header that indicates the command type, a body that indicates the specific content, and a footer that indicates the final information in the command. The header consists of one byte, as shown in Figure 44 (b). The function of each bit in the header is as follows. The highest bit, bit 7, functions as a header identification bit and always stores "1". Bit 6 functions as a pseudo-game identification bit that indicates whether or not a pseudo-game is being played, bit 5 is blank, and bits 4 to 0 function as command type storage bits that indicate the command type. For example, the rotation start header information is 86H, or 10000110, and is pre-stored in ROM 105 of main control unit 101.

If rotation start header information is acquired in step S2701, proceed to step S2702, where pseudo game judgment information is added to the rotation start header information. In this embodiment, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area also functions as pseudo game judgment information. Therefore, in step S2702, 40H or 00H is added to 86H, which is the rotation start header information. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, i.e., if a pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S2702 will be C6H (11000110), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, i.e., if a real game is in progress, the addition result in step S2702 will be 86H (10000110). In step S2703, the addition result is sent to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not body information is present. If body information is present, the body information is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2705, and the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2706, after which this process ends. If body information is not present, the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2706, after which this process ends. Note that in command sending process 1, since no body information is set in the rotation start command (pseudo game rotation start command), a header indicating that it is a rotation start command (pseudo game rotation start command) and the footer are sent to the display control device 81.

Next, we will explain command transmission process 2 in this embodiment. Command transmission process 2 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S409, see Figure 15), and is a process of transmitting a stop enable command or pseudo stop enable command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 46, stoppable header information is obtained in step S2801. The stoppable header information is 87H, i.e., 10000111, and is pre-stored in ROM 105 of the main control unit 101. In step S2802, pseudo-game determination information is added to the stoppable header information. That is, in step S2802, 40H or 00H is added to the stoppable header information, 87H. As a result, if the pseudo-game flag is set, i.e., if a pseudo-game is in progress, the addition result in step S2802 is C7H (11000111). If the pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., if a real game is in progress, the addition result in step S2802 is 87H (10000111). In step S2803, the addition result is sent to the display control unit 81 as a header. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not body information is present. If body information is present, the body information is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2805, and the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2806, after which this processing ends. If body information is not present, the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2806, after which this processing ends. Note that in command sending processing 2, since no body information is set for the stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command), a header indicating that it is a stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command) and the footer are sent to the display control device 81.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the stop position determination process. In the stop position determination process in the first embodiment, a determination is made in step S1103 as to whether the pseudo game flag is set, and a pseudo stop command or a stop command is sent to the display control device 81 depending on the determination result (see Figure 22). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a determination is made in step S2903 as to whether the pseudo game flag is set, but regardless of the determination result, command transmission process 3 is performed in step S2905 to send a pseudo stop command or a stop command.

In command transmission process 3, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 48, stop header information is obtained in step S3001. The stop header information is 88H, i.e., 10001000, and is pre-stored in ROM 105 of the main control unit 101. In step S3002, pseudo game determination information is added to the stop header information. That is, in step S3002, 40H or 00H is added to the stop header information, 88H. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, i.e., if a pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S3002 is C8H (11001000), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, i.e., if a real game is in progress, the addition result in step S3002 is 88H (10001000). In step S3003, the addition result is sent to the display control unit 81 as a header. In step S3004, it is determined whether body information is present. If body information is present, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3005, and a footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this process ends. If body information is not present, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this process ends. In command transmission process 3, in step S3005, information indicating the reel on which the stop command or pseudo-stop command has occurred is transmitted as body information. More specifically, if the reel is the left reel 32L, 01H is transmitted as body information; if the reel is the center reel 32M, 02H is transmitted as body information; and if the reel is the right reel 32R, 03H is transmitted as body information. These pieces of body information are pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101. As a result of the above, in command transmission process 3, a stop command (pseudo stop command) is transmitted to the display control device 81, which includes a header indicating that it is a stop command (pseudo stop command), a body indicating the stopped reel (pseudo stopped reel), and a footer.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The system is configured to send different commands depending on whether a simulated game or a real game is being played. This configuration allows the display control device 81 to determine whether a simulated game or a real game is being played.

As a result of the above, the display control device 81 can control auxiliary effects according to simulated games and actual games, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

However, if the commands to be sent in the case of pseudo-games and the commands to be sent in the case of actual games are stored in ROM 105 in advance, there is a concern that the amount of data to be stored in advance will increase. Furthermore, since it becomes necessary to determine whether a game is pseudo-game or not when sending a command, there is a concern that in addition to the increase in data volume due to the addition of this determination process, the processing configuration will also become more complicated.

In this embodiment, therefore, in command transmission process 1, etc., header information, such as the rotation start header information, is added to the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area to create a header to be sent to the display control device 81. This configuration eliminates the need to pre-store the header to be sent in the case of pseudo game, making it possible to reduce the amount of data. Furthermore, in this configuration, the created header includes whether or not it is pseudo game, so there is no need for processing to determine whether or not it is pseudo game. Therefore, simplifying the processing configuration makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

The header is configured to include information indicating whether or not a game is a pseudo-game. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the commands sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81 from becoming redundant. In other words, instead of performing a calculation as in this embodiment, the display control unit 81 can determine whether or not a game is a pseudo-game by sending 00H or 40H in the body rather than the header, for example. However, this configuration increases the length of the command sent by one byte, which would result in the command becoming redundant.

The header contains a header identification bit, a pseudo-game identification bit, and a command type storage bit, and is configured to fit into one byte. This configuration prevents commands from becoming redundant, while allowing the display control device 81 to grasp a large amount of information through the header.

In the header, the pseudo game identification bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the command type storage bit. This configuration makes it possible to store information indicating whether or not a pseudo game is being played in a bit that would previously have been unused, making it possible to effectively prevent commands sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81 from becoming redundant. Furthermore, by creating header information by adding pseudo game determination information, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not a pseudo game is being played in the header without changing the conventional header configuration. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in development man-hours for the slot machine 10.

The pseudo-game flag storage area is configured with one byte, the same as the header, and all bits except the sixth bit are left blank. This configuration makes it possible to avoid changing the values of other bits, such as the command type storage bit, when adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information.

The header is created using the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area. This configuration allows the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area to function as information used to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo-game, and as information used when creating the header. As a result, there is no need to provide a storage area in RAM 106 for storing pseudo-game determination information, which makes it possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

(Fourth embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration was used in which a simulated game was performed, but it is also possible to perform only the actual game without performing a simulated game. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 49 is an oblique view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

A presentation switch 67 and a selection switch 68 are provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and to the left of the medal insertion slot 45. The presentation switch 67 is operated when a press-down presentation, described below, is executed, or when a menu screen is called up when no game is being played, and has the word "PUSH" displayed on its top surface. The selection switch 68 is made up of four switches - an up switch, a down switch, a left switch, and a right switch - that specify the up, down, left, and right directions, and is operated to select desired information from the various information displayed on the menu screen. The presentation switch 67 (more specifically, a presentation switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the presentation switch 67) and the selection switch 68 (more specifically, a selection switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the selection switch 68) are connected to the display control device 81, as shown in FIG. 50.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the reel control process.

In step S3101, a repetition counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S3102, acceleration of the reels begins according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, if the value of the repetition counter is 3, the spin start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained; if the value of the repetition counter is 2, the spin start setting table address for the center reel 32M is obtained; and if the value of the repetition counter is 1, the spin start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. Note that drive control of the stepping motor is performed in stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing based on the obtained spin start setting table.

If a spin start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is obtained in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103, where 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S3104, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0. If the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S3102. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S3105, where a stop information setting process is performed to set stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing role determination is created, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S3106, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S3107, a spin start command is sent to the display control device 81. In step S3108, it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished accelerating. When acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant predetermined speed, proceed to step S3109 and perform instruction monitor display processing.

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 52, step S3201 determines whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is notification mode, proceed to step S3202 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, step S3203 displays on the instruction monitor the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in a bell win, and this process ends. Also, in step S3203, an operation sequence command indicating the operation sequence to be notified is sent to the display control device 81. If the current game mode is not notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S3110, a stop possible command is sent to the display control device 81. Then, in step S3111, stop control processing is performed, and this process ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 53, in the stop control process, in step S3301, it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process waits until a stop command is issued. If a stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step 3302, where stop position determination processing is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 54, in step S3401, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is obtained. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is obtained based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S3402, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation count counter. In step S3403, a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. In addition, in step S3403, a lamp (not shown) of the stop switch for which the stop command has been issued is turned off to notify the player, etc., that it is no longer possible to issue a stop command in this game. In the following step S3404, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: stopping the reaching symbol that has reached the base position; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding one symbol; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding two symbols; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding three symbols; and stopping the corresponding reel after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S3404, a slip count value of 0 to 4 is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S3405, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S3406, it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter is equal to 0. If the value of the reel spin counter is not 0, i.e., if a stop command has not been issued for at least one reel, the stop information change process is performed in step S3407 and then the stop position determination process is terminated. If the value of the reel spin counter is 0, i.e., if a stop command has been issued for all reels, the stop position determination process is terminated without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, once the stop position determination process has ended, the process proceeds to step S3303, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel spin counter is not 0, the process returns to step S3301. In other words, once the slot machine 10 has determined the stop symbol number of the reel for which a stop command has been issued, it determines in step S3301 whether a next stop command has been issued, regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been issued has actually stopped. This allows the player to issue successive stop commands without waiting for the reel to stop. Note that the reel is not stopped during the stop control process (normal processing), but during the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the arrival symbol on the reel for which the stop command has been issued is equal to the stop symbol number, and if so, brake processing is performed to stop the reel for which the stop command has been issued.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the value of the reel rotation counter is 0, this means that the stop pattern numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so proceed to step S3304 to determine whether the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not become stop pattern numbers, the process waits until the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers, proceed to step S3305 to send an all-reel stop completion command to the display control device 81. By receiving the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions. In the following step S3306, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is ON, this means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, and the process continues to wait. If all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, the process proceeds to step S3307, where an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 determines that all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. In step S3308, it is determined whether an instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S3309. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting 100 msec in step S3310. Incidentally, the reason for waiting 100 msec in step S3310 is to wait for the braking process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the reel oscillation to converge.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 that are relevant to the present invention. To briefly explain the processing configuration of the display control device 81, like the main control device 101, the display control device 81 performs main processing and timer interrupt processing that is executed periodically. The timer interrupt processing in the display control device 81 is executed approximately every 10 msec. In addition, the display control device 81 receives various commands, such as lottery result commands, sent from the main control device 101 to grasp the progress of the game, and initiates the corresponding processing.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing.

In step S3501, it is determined whether an operation end command has been received. If an operation end command has not been received, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if an operation end command has been received, this means that all stop switches 42-44 have not been operated, i.e., the operation to issue stop commands to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has ended. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3502, where the standby timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 18,000. The value of the standby timer is decremented by one in the timer interrupt process. Since the timer interrupt process is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the standby timer will reach 0 after approximately 180 seconds. In step S3503, it is determined whether the effect flag has been set. If the effect flag has not been set, this process is terminated.

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the start wait processing. The start wait processing is performed during the main processing, and is executed upon receiving an operation end command.

In step S3601, it is determined whether the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3603, where it is determined whether the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S3604, where it is determined whether the value of the standby timer has reached 0. If the value of the standby timer has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step S3605, where it is determined whether the number of bets is 0. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the main control unit 101 transmits a bet number command indicating the number of bets to the display control unit 81 during the medal insertion process, which is performed when medals are inserted or credit insertion switches 56-58 are operated. The display control unit 81 determines whether the number of bets is 0 based on the number of bets indicated by the received bet number command or whether a bet number command has not been received. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3603.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, menu processing is performed in step S3606.

In the menu processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, a menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S3701. In step S3702, a selection menu execution process is performed. In this slot machine 10, the following selection menus are displayed on the menu screen: game history, payout table, volume adjustment, clear game history, and end menu. In the selection menu execution process, if the selection switch 68 is operated, a process is performed to highlight the selection menu corresponding to the operation of the selection switch 68. If the effect switch 67 is operated, a process is performed to execute the highlighted selection menu. In step S3703, it is determined whether the effect switch 67 was operated when end menu was selected, i.e., whether a menu end operation has been performed. If a menu end operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S3704, where it is determined whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3702, and the selection menu execution process continues. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3703 that a menu end operation has been performed, the menu end processing is performed in step S3705. In the menu termination process, the menu screen and other screens displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are hidden and the normal screen is displayed. In the following step S3706, the standby timer is set to 18,000. After that, the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process described above. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S3704 that the number of bets is not 0, this means that the player performed an operation to start the next game round (betting medals or virtual medals) while the menu screen and other screens were displayed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S3707, where the menu termination process described above is performed. After that, the process proceeds to step S3901 of the start command waiting process described below.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3604 that the value of the waiting timer has reached 0, waiting processing is performed in step S3607.

In the standby process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, the customer waiting effect is initiated in step S3801. In the customer waiting effect, a predetermined demo movie (attract effect) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that instead of or in addition to the customer waiting effect, the system may transition to power saving mode and display "power saving" on the auxiliary display unit 65. Alternatively, the system may transition to power saving mode by reducing the brightness of the auxiliary display unit 65 without executing the customer waiting effect or the power saving display. In step S3802, it is determined whether the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has not been operated, it is determined in step S3803 whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3802. If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, the customer waiting effect is terminated in step S3804, and the standby timer is set to 18,000 in step S3805. The process then proceeds to step S3701 of the menu process. If it is determined in step S3803 that the number of bets is not 0, the customer waiting effect ends in step S3806, and the waiting timer is set to 18,000 in step S3807. After that, the process proceeds to step S3901 of the start command waiting process, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3605 that the number of bets is not 0, start command waiting process is performed in step S3608.

In the start command waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, step S3901 determines whether a start command has been received. The start command is a command sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81, and is sent when it is determined in step S206 (see FIG. 11) of normal processing that a start command has been generated. If a start command has not been received, step S3902 determines whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3901. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 0, step S3903 sets the standby timer to 18,000, and the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. A typical example of a situation in which the number of bets becomes 0 in step S3902 is when a player operates the settlement switch 59 after betting a predetermined number of medals. If it is determined in step S3901 that a start command has been received, this means that a game has started, and the process proceeds to in-game processing in step S3904. A detailed explanation of the in-game processing will be omitted, but in-game processing, for example, if a push order bell is won in notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display the operation sequence that will result in the bell winning.

As described above, when the effect switch 67 is operated while no game is being played, the display control device 81 displays the menu screen on the auxiliary display unit 65, and when the value of the standby timer reaches 0, it starts the customer waiting effect.

In this slot machine 10, if the player wins the additional draw while in notification mode, a press effect is performed in which the player operates the effect switch 67 after all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, and the number of additional coins is notified. Therefore, the following describes the processing performed by the display control device 81 when executing such a press effect.

Figure 60 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process performed during the in-game processing described above. The effect determination process is performed at the start of the game.

In step S4001, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received, and if not, this process is terminated. If a lottery result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4002, where it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is not notification mode, the process is terminated. If the current game mode is notification mode, it is determined in step S4003 whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has not been won, the process is terminated. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S4004, where a performance execution lottery is held. In the performance execution lottery, a win or loss is determined based on the type of rare role that has been won and the random number obtained by the display control device 81. Incidentally, in the performance execution lottery, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1 in 10 chance of winning the performance execution lottery, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a 1 in 5 chance of winning the performance execution lottery. In step S4005, it is determined whether the performance execution lottery has been won. If the effect execution lottery is won, the effect flag is set in step S4006 and this process ends. If the effect execution lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S4007 and determines whether an add-on command has been received. The add-on command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when the add-on lottery is won, and is sent before the lottery result command when the add-on lottery is won (see Figures 12 and 30). Therefore, if an add-on command has been received, it means that the add-on lottery has been won for this game round. In this case, the effect flag is set in step S4006 and this process ends. If an add-on command has not been received, this process ends as is. Note that when the display control device 81 receives an add-on command, it stores the number of add-on coins indicated by the add-on command in an add-on coin number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81.

When operation of all stop switches 42 to 44 has been completed, an operation end command is sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81.

When the display control device 81 receives an operation end command, it determines in step S3303 of the operation end command processing shown in FIG. 55 that the effect flag is set, and proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, the effect switch 67 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a press display is initiated to prompt the player to operate the effect switch 67. In the following step S3305, 1000 is set to a first timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. Note that the value of the first timer is decremented by 1 in timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the first timer becomes 0 after approximately 10 seconds. If the first timer has been set to 1000, the operation end command processing is terminated.

In the start waiting process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 56, if the effect flag is set, a positive determination is made in step S3601 and press effect processing is performed in step S3602.

In the press effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, step S4101 determines whether effect switch 67 has been operated, and if effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process remains in standby. If effect switch 67 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S4102, where a result flag is set. Here, the result flag is a flag used to start a result display that notifies the player of the number of coins added if the player has won the additional coin lottery, or that no coins will be added if the player has not won the additional coin lottery.

Figure 62 is a flowchart showing the result display process performed during timer interrupt processing by the display control device 81.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the result flag is set. If the result flag is set, in step S4202, the result flag is cleared, and in step S4203, the display flag is set. In step S4204, a display counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0, and in step S4205, an image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that the ROM of the display control device 81 pre-stores result display image data to be executed if the additional lottery has been won, and result display image data to be executed if the additional lottery has not been won. The result display image data is composed of 201 pieces of image data associated with values from 0 to 200. In step S4205, result display image data corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is obtained, and the image data associated with 0 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If an image corresponding to the value of the display counter has been displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the result flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4206, where it is determined whether the display flag is set. If neither the result flag nor the display flag is set, this means that the result display is not being performed, and the process terminates. On the other hand, if the display flag is set, this means that the result display is being performed, and therefore in step S4207, 1 is added to the display counter value, and in step S4208, an image corresponding to the display counter value is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In step S4209, it is determined whether the display counter value has reached 200. If the display counter value has not reached 200, this means that the final image data of the result display image data has been displayed, i.e., the result display has been performed to the end, so in step S4210, the display flag is cleared, and in step S4211, the completion flag is set. In step S4212, a second timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 300. The value of the second timer is decremented by one during timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing occurs approximately every 10 msec, the value of the second timer will reach 0 after approximately 3 seconds. If the second timer is set to 300, the result display processing will end.

As described above, when a result flag is set during the press performance process, the result display process is initiated during the timer interrupt process approximately every 10 msec, and the result display is executed for approximately 2 seconds. Furthermore, when the result display is executed to the end, the final image data of the result display image data continues to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the process transitions to the menu process, standby process, or start command wait process described above (see Figure 56).

Returning to the explanation of the press performance processing, in step S4103, it is determined whether the value of the first timer has reached 0. If the value of the first timer has not reached 0, the process waits until the value of the first timer reaches 0. If the value of the first timer reaches 0, this means that approximately 10 seconds have passed since the start of the press display. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4104, where it is determined whether the completion flag has been set. If the completion flag has been set, this means that the result display has been completed, so the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, and the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the completion flag has not been set, this means that the result display is still in progress, so the process proceeds to step S4107, where the process waits until the value of the second timer reaches 0. To explain in more detail, in step S4107, the display counter value is 20, and the process waits until the value of the second timer reaches 0. If the value of the second timer becomes 0, the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, and the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and this processing ends.

Here, we will explain in detail what happens after pressing the display.

When a push-button display is displayed, the push-button display continues on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the effect switch 67 is operated. If the effect switch 67 is operated while the push-button display is being displayed, the result display begins. It takes approximately two seconds to display the result to completion.

Here, if the effect switch 67 is operated within approximately 8 seconds after the start of the press display, the result display can be completed within approximately 10 seconds after the start of the press display. Therefore, in such a case, the completion flag is also set when the value of the first timer reaches 0, so the press display process immediately ends and processing moves to step S3603 of the start wait process. The value of the second timer is not referenced at this time. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated within approximately 8 seconds after the start of the press display, the operation of the effect switch 67 to display the menu screen (hereinafter also referred to as the "menu start operation") becomes effective approximately 10 seconds after the start of the press display.

If the effect switch 67 is operated between approximately 8 and 10 seconds after the start of the push display, this occurs during the result display, approximately 10 seconds after the push display began. Therefore, in such a case, the completion flag is not set when the value of the first timer reaches 0, and the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start wait process after the value of the second timer reaches 0. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated between approximately 8 and 10 seconds after the push display begins, the menu start operation becomes effective 3 seconds after the result display has been executed to the end, that is, approximately 5 seconds after the effect switch 67 is operated.

If the effect switch 67 is operated approximately 10 seconds or more after the start of the push display, the completion flag will not be set when the value of the first timer reaches 0 (the result display will not have started), so the result display will be executed to completion and the process will proceed to step S3603 of the start waiting process after the value of the second timer reaches 0. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated approximately 10 seconds or more after the push display has started, the menu start operation will become effective 3 seconds after the result display has been executed to completion, i.e., approximately 5 seconds after the effect switch 67 is operated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In conventional slot machines, menu processing is not performed after a game in which an auxiliary effect, such as the above-mentioned press effect, is executed as a trigger for operating an effect switch; in other words, the menu screen is not displayed even when the effect switch is operated. In such a configuration, if a player wants to display the menu screen, they must continue playing until a game in which a press effect is not executed occurs, which can be frustrating for players.

In this embodiment, therefore, the menu processing is executed even after a game in which a press effect is executed. This configuration increases the opportunities for the menu screen to be displayed at the timing desired by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When the push display is initiated, the menu start operation is either enabled when the value of the first timer reaches 0, or enabled when the value of the second timer, not the first timer, reaches 0. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which the menu start operation is enabled depending on the start timing of the result display, i.e., the operation timing of the effect switch 67. This reduces the chances of players becoming frustrated when the menu screen does not appear even after operating the effect switch 67.

It is certainly possible to configure the menu start operation to become valid after a game in which a press effect has been executed by configuring the menu start operation to become valid after a certain period of time, such as three seconds, has elapsed since the result display was completed. However, with such a configuration, it is possible that players may become irritated by having to wait three seconds. To alleviate this concern, it is possible to configure the menu start operation to become valid immediately after the result display is completed. However, this configuration creates a new problem in that the menu screen may be displayed at a time unintended by the player. This is because if the result display is completed and the player operates the effect switch 67 again in the hope of further development of the effect, such as a so-called reversal effect, the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 will switch from the press effect to the menu screen.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, where the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the first or second timer, a grace period can be set between the completion of the result display and the menu start operation becoming valid, unless the effect switch 67 is operated approximately 8 seconds after the start of the press display. The existence of this grace period makes it possible to reduce the chances of the menu screen being displayed at a time unintended by the player. This may lead to player frustration at having to wait the grace period, but the length of the grace period varies depending on the timing of the operation of the effect switch 67. This makes it possible to have the player operate the effect switch 67 while feeling curious, wondering if the menu start operation has already been enabled this time. This makes it possible to reduce player frustration.

As a result of the above, the slot machine 10 is able to effectively resolve the above-mentioned concerns, reducing the chances that players will feel frustrated when the menu screen does not appear even when they operate the effect switch 67.

When the value of the first timer reaches 0, if a completion flag indicating that the results display has been completed is set, the menu start operation is enabled. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the menu start operation from being enabled in the middle of the results display.

The first timer is configured to be set to 1000. When the push display begins, it is generally expected that the time required from when the player recognizes the push display until they actually operate the effect switch 67 will be within 5 seconds, even if they operate it while hoping that the number of coins added will be announced. Since it takes approximately 2 seconds to complete the result display, setting the first timer to 1000 reduces the chance of the menu screen being displayed at a time unintended by the player. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the effect switch 67 is operated within approximately 8 seconds of the start of the push display, the menu start operation will become effective approximately 10 seconds later. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the effect switch 67 while reducing the chance of a long delay between the push display and the result display.

The second timer is configured to set the value to 300. If the result display has not been completed approximately 10 seconds after the start of the push display, it is possible that the player has not operated the effect switch 67 due to leaving the seat, etc. In such cases, the menu start operation is configured to become valid approximately 3 seconds after the result display has been completed, thereby reducing the chances of the menu screen being displayed at a time unintended by the player.

(Fifth embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, the notification mode was configured to end based on the net increase in coins played, but it may also be configured to end based on the number of games played. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

First, we will explain the processing performed by the main control unit 101.

The processing performed by the main control unit 101 in the normal zone is the same as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, in the normal zone, if you win any role when playing with three coins, you will have won the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone. For example, in the case of "Setting 3," there is approximately a 1 in 1.2 chance of winning any role, and an approximately 1 in 6.4 chance of losing. Therefore, playing three coins in the normal zone will end in approximately one game. Then, when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the game starts in chance mode, and the number of transition games is set to 700 (see Figure 26).

In chance mode, the processing performed by the main control unit 101 differs from that of the first embodiment in terms of game section processing.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S4301, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S4302, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S4301, and after sending a zone command in step S4311, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S4303 and determine whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, in step S4304, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S4305, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode has been won, so in step S4306, the transition flag is cleared, and in step S4308, the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag. In the following step S4309, the transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S4310, the mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, in step S4311, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4305 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4307, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S4311, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to an announcement flag in step S4308. In the following step S4309, the transition game count counter is set to 50, and in step S4310, the mode game count counter is set to 0. Thereafter, an interval command is sent in step S4311, and this processing ends.

If step S4303 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S4311 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S4401, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S4402, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S4403, where an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the combination has been won. Incidentally, in the additional lottery, for example, in a setting of 3, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a one-in-five probability that an additional number of games will be won, either 50, 100, or 300, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a one-in-three probability that an additional number of games will be won, 50. In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S4405, where a subsequent notification lottery is held to determine whether or not the number of additional games will be announced in a game subsequent to the current game. In the subsequent notification lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is a win or a loss. If the subsequent notification lottery is not won, an additional flag is set in step S4407, and an additional command is sent in step S4408. Here, the additional command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that the additional lottery has been won and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S4409, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This processing then ends. On the other hand, if the subsequent notification lottery is won, a subsequent notification command is sent in step S4410 without setting the additional flag. Here, the subsequent notification command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that the subsequent notification lottery has been won and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S4409, a value corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. Then, this process ends. If the bonus lottery is not won, this process ends. Also, if the current game is a two-coin game instead of a three-coin game, or if a rare combination is not won, this process ends without performing the bonus lottery.

As described above, if the add-on lottery is won, an add-on command or a subsequent notification command is sent to the display control device 81. If the add-on flag is set and an add-on command is sent, the number of added games is announced in the pseudo-game, as described in the first embodiment above (see Figure 31). Also, if a subsequent notification command is sent without setting an add-on command, the number of added games is announced in the revival effect described below. Note that if the pseudo-game lottery is won when a subsequent notification command has been sent (see Figure 16), the number of added games is announced in the revival effect, not in the pseudo-game.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S4501, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S4502, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S4501, and after sending a zone command in step S4508, this process is terminated.

If the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, step S4503 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S4504 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the favorable zone end processing shown in steps S4505 to S4507 is performed, and an interval command is sent in step S4508, terminating this processing. In the favorable zone end processing, step S4505 changes the gaming zone flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S4506 turns off the interval indicator 66. In step S4507, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the favorable zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the interval game number counter value, etc.).

If it is determined in step S4504 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process proceeds to step S4509, where it determines whether the completion flag is set. If the completion flag is not set, it determines in step S4510 whether the number of games remaining in the notification mode is greater than 50. The number of games remaining in the notification mode is derived by subtracting the value of the mode game number counter from the value of the transition game number counter. If the number of games remaining in the notification mode is greater than 50, the process proceeds to step S4511, where it determines whether the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200. If the number of games remaining in the notification mode is greater than 50 and the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, the completion flag is set in step S4512, and the transition game number counter is set to 1500 in step S4513. When 1500 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, or when the difference number in the advantageous zone reaches 2400, the advantageous zone ends regardless of the play mode at that time. Therefore, if the transition game number counter is set to 1500 when the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, the advantageous zone and notification mode will end when the difference number in the advantageous zone reaches 2400. In step S4514, a completion command indicating that the end has been confirmed when the difference number reaches 2400 is sent to the display control device 81. Then, in step S4508, an interval command is sent, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S4509 that the completion flag is set, if it is determined in step S4510 that the number of games remaining in the notification mode is 50 or less, or if it is determined in step S4511 that the value of the difference number counter is 2200 or less, then the section command is sent in step S4508 and then this processing is terminated.

This embodiment is characterized by the display effects on the auxiliary display unit 65 when moving from the notification mode (advantageous zone) through the normal zone and then to the chance mode (advantageous zone). Therefore, below, the various processes performed by the display control device 81 will be explained in accordance with the flow of the game.

This section explains the processing performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from chance mode to notification mode.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing section command processing in notification mode. Section command processing is initiated when a section command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated after the game has ended.

In step S4601, it is determined whether the current game was a transition game to the notification mode. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a game section memory area that stores information about the game section indicated by the section command. The game section memory area is composed of a first area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the current game, and a second area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the previous game. In step S4601, if information indicating chance mode is stored in the second area and information indicating notification mode is stored in the first area, it is determined that the current game was a transition game to the notification mode. In step S4602, a start flag is set. In step S4603, a display game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 50, and in step S4604, a post-notification game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S4605, a transition notification process is performed, and this process ends. By performing the transition notification process, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display, as shown in Figure 73(a), that notification mode will begin from the next game and that the number of games that can be played in notification mode is 50.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing start command processing in the notification mode. When the main control device 101 determines that a start command has been issued (step S206, see Figure 11), it transmits a start command to the display control device 81. The start command processing is initiated when a start command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S4701, it is determined whether the start flag is set. If the start flag is set, this means that the current game is the first game in the notification mode. Therefore, in step S4702, the start flag is cleared, and in step S4703, the value of the displayed game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and this processing ends. By performing this processing, as shown in Figure 73 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of a young man character strolling along the road and that there are 50 games remaining in the notification mode. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the control to notify the operation order when the push order bell is won is performed in the lottery result command processing that is activated when the lottery result command is received (step S310, see Figure 12).

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the display control device 81 when a completion command is not received in notification mode.

In the section command processing that is initiated after the game ends, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S4606, where it is determined whether a finish command has been received. If a finish command has not been received, step S4610 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of displayed games counter, and step S4611 determines whether the value of the number of displayed games counter has reached 1. If the value of the number of displayed games counter has not reached 1, step S4613 determines whether the value of the number of displayed games counter has reached 0, and if the value of the number of displayed games counter has not reached 0, the process terminates.

If it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the displayed game number counter has reached 1, this means that the next game will be the final game in the notification mode, at least in terms of the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the end flag is set in step S4612, and this processing ends.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S4613 that the value of the display game number counter has reached 0, this means that the player won the subsequent notification lottery in any of the games up until the value of the display game number counter reached 0. This is because, when the final game in the notification mode ends, the main control unit 101 sends an interval command indicating a normal interval rather than an interval command indicating that the mode is notification (see FIG. 65). In such a case, a revival flag is set in step S4614, and the value of the subsequent notification game number counter is set to the display game number counter in step S4615. Note that, when a subsequent notification command indicating that the player has won the subsequent notification lottery is received, the subsequent notification game number counter is incremented by the additional number of games indicated by the subsequent notification command. Thereafter, in step S4616, the subsequent notification game number counter is set to 0, and this processing ends.

In the start command processing that is activated at the start of a game, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 67, if it is determined in step S4701 that the start flag is not set, it is determined in step S4704 whether the end flag is set. If the end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4707, where it is determined whether the revival flag is set. If the revival flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4710, where it is determined whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is not set, the value of the displayed game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S4712, and this processing ends. By performing this processing, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is reduced by one each time a game is played.

If it is determined in step S4704 that the end flag is set, this means that the current game will be the final game in the notification mode, at least in terms of the remaining number of games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the end flag is cleared in step S4705, and the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an end screen in step S4706, terminating this processing. By performing this processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the fact that the notification mode has ended and the current number of medals won (e.g., 800), i.e., the difference in medals from the end of the previous game. Note that the lottery result command is received after the start command is received. However, if a lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won is received, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the operation sequence that can result in the bell winning in addition to displaying the end screen. For example, when a lottery result command indicating that the center left and right bells have been won is received, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display the end of the notification mode, the current number of medals won, and the operation sequence "213", as shown in Figure 73 (d).

If it is determined in step S4707 that the revival flag is set, this means that the subsequent notification lottery has been won, meaning that there is an additional number of games that have not yet been notified. In such a case, the revival flag is cleared in step S4708, and the revival effect processing is performed in step S4709, and this processing ends. By performing the revival effect processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, as shown in Figure 73(e), that the notification mode will continue and the number of additional games that were won in the subsequent notification lottery (for example, 50 games), and then the normal screen in the notification mode shown in Figure 73(b) is displayed.

As described above, if a completion command is not received in notification mode, the end screen is displayed at the start of a game when the number of remaining games on the auxiliary display unit 65 reaches 0. If the subsequent notification lottery is won, a revival effect is performed at the start of the next game after the end screen is displayed to notify the player that notification mode will continue.

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the display control device 81 when a completion command is received in notification mode.

In the section command processing that is activated after the end of a game, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S4606, where it is determined whether a finish command has been received. If a finish command has been received, this means that it has been confirmed that the game will end with a difference of 2400 coins. In this case, an ending flag is set in step S4607, and the displayed game number counter is set to 1500 in step S4608. Thereafter, ending notification processing is performed in step S4609, and this processing ends. By performing the ending notification processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that the ending video will begin from the next game.

When processing section commands in a game after a finish command is received, step S4610 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of displayed games counter, and step S4611 determines whether the value of the number of displayed games counter has reached 1. As described above, when processing section commands when a finish command is received, step S4608 sets the number of displayed games counter to 1,500. Therefore, when processing section commands in a game after a finish command is received, step S4611 determines that the value of the number of displayed games counter has not reached 1. For the same reason, step S4613, which is the step to proceed from step S4611, also determines that the value of the number of displayed games counter has not reached 0, and this processing ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 67, the start command processing that is activated when the game starts determines whether the ending flag is set in step S4710. If the ending flag is set, ending execution processing is performed in step S4711, and then this processing ends. The ending execution processing involves displaying a specified ending video on the auxiliary display unit 65.

As described above, if it is determined that the notification mode will end with a difference of 2,400 coins, a specified ending video will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from the next game until the notification mode and advantageous period end.

This section explains the processing performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from notification mode to normal mode.

In the section command processing that is activated after the end of a game, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 68, step S4801 determines whether the current game was a transition game to the normal section. More specifically, it determines whether information indicating a notification mode is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and whether information indicating a normal section is stored in the first area. If the current game was a transition game to the normal section, proceed to step S4802, where the continued game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1. Then, this processing ends. If the current game was not a transition game to the normal section, step S4803 adds 1 to the value of the continued game number counter, and this processing ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 69, the start command processing that is activated when the game starts determines in step S4901 whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is set, this means that a predetermined ending video has been displayed in the notification mode. In this case, the ending flag is cleared in step S4902, and a process is performed to display an ending screen on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S4903. Thereafter, the continuation flag is set in step S4904, and this process ends. By performing the above process, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the fact that the notification mode has ended and the number of medals acquired at the time the notification mode ended.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the ending flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4905, where it is determined whether the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is not set, the process sets the continuation flag in step S4906 and then proceeds to step S4907. If the continuation flag is set, the process proceeds directly to step S4907. In step S4907, processing is performed to continue displaying the ending screen. Thereafter, this processing ends. Note that in step S4907, processing to change and display the number of medals acquired is not performed.

As described above, when the notification mode ends due to a difference of 2,400 coins, the notification mode end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from the first game of the normal interval until the end of the normal interval. When the notification mode ends due to the consumption of the transition game count, the notification mode end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from the final game of the notification mode until the end of the normal interval.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in the normal interval. Lottery result command processing is initiated when a lottery result command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S5001, it is determined whether any winning combination has been achieved in the current game. If any winning combination has been achieved in the current game, this means that the player has won the lottery for transitioning to chance mode, i.e., the player will transition to chance mode from the next game, and this processing is then terminated. On the other hand, if no winning combination has been achieved in the current game, i.e., the normal mode will continue into the next game, the processing proceeds to step S5002, where it is determined whether the value of the continued game counter is less than 6. If the value of the continued game counter is less than 6, a suggestion jewel selection lottery is performed in step S5003. In the suggestion jewel selection lottery, a selection lottery is performed based on the setting status of the slot machine 10 and the random number acquired by the display control device 81. Incidentally, in the suggestion jewel selection lottery, in setting 1 or setting 2, a blue jewel is selected 40% of the time, a yellow jewel is selected 30% of the time, a green jewel is selected 20% of the time, and a red jewel is selected 10% of the time. In the case of setting 3 or 4, blue orbs are selected 20% of the time, yellow orbs are selected 30% of the time, green orbs are selected 30% of the time, and red orbs are selected 20% of the time. In the case of setting 5 or 6, blue orbs are selected 10% of the time, yellow orbs are selected 20% of the time, green orbs are selected 30% of the time, and red orbs are selected 40% of the time. Note that the selection rates may be different for each setting from setting 1 to setting 6. In step S5004, a process is performed to display the selection result of the suggestion orb selection lottery on the auxiliary display unit 65. This process then terminates. If it is determined in step S5002 that the value of the continued game counter is 6 or greater, the process proceeds to step S5005, where a fixed orb indicating the setting status of the slot machine 10 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. This process then terminates. For example, when a process to display a fixed orb is performed on a slot machine 10 with setting 6, an end screen and an orb labeled 6 are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 73(f).

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the all reels stop completion command processing during the normal interval. The all reels stop completion command processing is initiated when an all reels stop completion command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the end of the game.

In the all reels stop completion command processing, in step S5101, the suggested jewels or confirmed jewels displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are hidden, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the normal section, if the game does not transition to chance mode, suggestion jewels will be displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the first five games, and fixed jewels will be displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the sixth game and beyond. Here, the probability of not transitioning to chance mode, i.e., the probability of a miss, is approximately 1 in 6.4. Therefore, players who want to guess the setting from the appearance of suggestion jewels or players who want to understand the setting status from the fixed jewels, need to play in a way that increases the number of plays in the normal section.

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from the normal mode to the chance mode.

In the section command processing that is activated after the end of a game, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 68, step S4801 determines whether the current game was a transition game to chance mode. More specifically, it determines whether information indicating a normal section is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and whether information indicating chance mode is stored in the first area. If the current game was a transition game to chance mode, proceed to step S4802, and set 1 to the continued game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. Then, this processing ends. If the current game was not a transition game to chance mode, step S4803 adds 1 to the value of the continued game number counter, and this processing ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 72, the start command processing that is activated at the start of the game determines in step S5201 whether the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set, this means that the end screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the continuation flag is cleared in step S5202, and the end screen displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden in step S5203. Thereafter, in step S5204, the value of the continued game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and this processing ends. By performing this processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of the young man character strolling into the distance on the road and the number of games in chance mode, as shown in Figure 73 (g).

If it is determined in step S5201 that the continuation flag is not set, the value of the continued game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S5205, and the process ends. By performing this process, the auxiliary display unit 65 will increment the number of games played by one each time a game is played.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the notification mode ends when the difference in coins reaches 2400, the end screen is displayed in the game following the game in which the difference in coins reaches 2400, i.e., the first game of the normal interval. If the notification mode ends when the transition game count is exhausted, the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode. In this way, by varying the game in which the end screen is displayed depending on which end condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as by executing auxiliary effects according to the end condition that is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

When the notification mode ends because the difference in coins reaches 2,400, the end screen is displayed in the game following the game in which the difference in coins reaches 2,400. This configuration makes it possible to avoid displaying the end screen across multiple games when the notification mode has not ended. It is certainly possible to configure the end screen to be displayed in the game following the game in which the difference in coins reaches 2,394 or more. However, with this configuration, an event may occur in which the difference in coins does not reach 2,400 and the notification mode does not end, even though the end screen is displayed, in cases such as when the push order bell is not selected, or when the push order bell is selected but the stop switches 42-44 are not operated in the notified operation sequence. If this event occurs, the end screen will continue to be displayed until the difference in coins reaches 2,400 and the notification mode ends.

If the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference in number of coins is greater than 2200, the value of the transition game counter is changed so that the difference in number of coins reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends. This configuration makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game from various perspectives.

First, if the advantageous zone is configured to simply end when the difference in coins reaches 2,400, some players may lose interest in playing when the advantageous zone (notification mode) ends when the difference in coins reaches 2,400, thinking that they could have won even more medals if there was no limit on the number of medals. This is because it is rare for the difference in coins to reach 2,400 when the number of remaining games reaches 0. On the other hand, this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game number counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference in coins is greater than 2,200, allows players to play in the notification mode with the goal of reaching the difference in coins of 2,200. Furthermore, since the expected increase in coins per game in the notification mode is approximately 3.5 coins, if the difference in coins exceeds 2,200 when the number of remaining games is 57 or less, this is equivalent to winning the bonus lottery. This is because the expected number of games required to increase by 200 coins is 58. As a result of the above, even if an upper limit is set on the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone, it is possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play and increase their interest in the game.

Next, when the notification mode is terminated based on the difference in number of coins, as described above, the timing of the notification mode's termination will vary depending on the results of the lottery, etc. Therefore, in a configuration in which the notification mode's termination condition is determined by the number of games played, it is difficult to execute an ending effect across multiple games. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference in number of coins is greater than 2,200, it is possible to determine in advance that the difference in number of coins will reach 2,400 and the notification mode will end. Therefore, the number of games played from when the value of the transition game counter is changed until the difference in number of coins reaches 2,400 can be secured as the number of games required to display the ending video. This makes it possible to execute an ending effect in an optimal manner. Furthermore, the ending effect can notify the player that they have completed the advantageous zone, and allows the player to play while feeling a sense of superiority until the difference in number of coins actually reaches 2,400. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when an ending effect is executed, the ending screen is displayed during the first game of the normal section, allowing the player to enjoy the ending effect until the next game begins, and to play the next game while immersed in the afterglow of the ending effect. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

When the notification mode ends due to the number of transition games being played, the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode. When the notification mode ends due to the number of transition games being played, the final game of the notification mode will not be delayed due to the results of the lottery, etc. This makes it possible to avoid the end screen being displayed for multiple games even when the notification mode has not ended.

If the player wins the subsequent notification lottery, a revival effect is performed in the next game after the end screen is displayed, and the number of additional games is notified. This configuration allows the player to operate the start lever 41 to issue a command to start the next game while hoping that the notification mode will continue when the end screen is displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Now, consider the case where the end screen is displayed in the next game after the notification mode has ended, just as when the notification mode ends with a difference of 2400 coins. In this configuration, the play interval of the game that displayed the end screen is already the normal interval, so even if a rare combination is won in that game, no additional lottery is held, and an event that revives the notification mode cannot occur (see Figures 25 and 26). On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which displays the end screen in the final game of the notification mode, since that game is in the notification mode, if a rare combination is won, an additional lottery and a subsequent notification lottery can be held to produce a revival effect. Therefore, it is possible to produce a revival effect in an optimal manner, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

When the notification mode ends due to the number of transition games being played, an end screen is displayed at the start of the final game of the notification mode. This configuration prevents the carefully prepared end screen from going to waste. Furthermore, the player can view the end screen in the final game of the notification mode, and then be notified through a revival effect that the notification mode will continue. This increases the player's sense of satisfaction regarding the continuation of the notification mode. It is certainly possible to display the end screen and perform the revival effect after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. However, players typically play continuously, and in the notification mode, where virtual medals are stored and stored, the game interval is generally shorter because direct medal insertion is not required. Therefore, if the end screen is displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, there is a risk that the player will start the next game without checking the end screen, which could lead to an incident where the player realizes from the revival effect that the previous game was the final game of the notification mode. This not only wastes the carefully prepared end screen, but also diminishes the satisfaction felt by players as the notification mode continues. On the other hand, the slot machine 10, which displays the end screen at the start of the final game, can effectively alleviate the above concerns.

The end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal section. This allows the player to play the first game in the normal section while still enjoying the excitement of the notification mode. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the end screen is displayed across two games, it is confirmed that the game is not in an advantageous section and that a revival effect will not be performed. This makes it possible to provide new gameplay features using the end screens that have been available for some time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a configuration like the present slot machine 10 where a lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is not conducted during the normal period, there was a concern that players would prefer to play in the chance mode rather than the normal period and avoid playing on a slot machine in the normal period. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that if the end screen is displayed across two games, it is confirmed that the period is not advantageous and that a revival effect will not be performed. In this configuration, if a player who played in the notification mode sees the end screen in the final game of the notification mode, they will issue a command to start the next game in the hope of a revival effect. Therefore, if the advantageous period has ended, it is possible for the player who played in the notification mode to play the first game in the normal period. Even if the player ends their game at this time, the end screen will still be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, it is possible for other players other than the above player to start playing the second game in the normal period while hoping for a revival effect to be performed. This makes it possible to prevent players from avoiding playing on slot machines 10 that are in the normal zone, and to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the slot machines 10.

The ending screen is displayed continuously until the game transitions from the normal mode to the chance mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects performed during the normal mode, thereby preventing an increase in memory capacity.

If you win a role when playing with three coins, you will transition from the normal mode to chance mode, with a loss occurring only with a probability of approximately 1 in 6.4. By configuring the game so that the probability of transitioning to chance mode is higher than the probability of not transitioning, it is possible to reduce the number of games spent in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the end screen being displayed continuously for an extended period of time, and it is also possible to reduce the chances that a player will end their game while the end screen is still displayed.

Even if the probability of transitioning to chance mode is higher than the probability of not transitioning, as described above, an event may occur in which the player remains in the normal zone without transitioning to chance mode. Furthermore, if the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, there is a concern that gameplay in the normal zone may become monotonous. Therefore, the slot machine 10 is configured to display a suggestion jewel or a fixed jewel when the player does not transition from the normal zone to chance mode. This configuration makes it possible to encourage players to try to guess the setting based on the appearance of the suggestion jewel, or to encourage them to want the normal zone to continue until a fixed jewel is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing on a slot machine 10 that is in the normal zone, and it is also possible to prevent gameplay in the normal zone from becoming monotonous.

When all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the displayed suggestive or fixed jewels are hidden. This configuration makes it possible to configure the suggestive or fixed jewels so that they cannot be seen without actually playing the game, allowing players who want to guess the setting to play in the normal section. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in operation of the slot machine 10 due to the normal section.

From the sixth game onwards in the normal section, the slot machine 10 is configured to display a fixed jewel indicating the setting status. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play, even if the game does not transition from the normal section to chance mode. This is because if the player can understand the setting status through the fixed jewel, it becomes a major factor in deciding whether or not to continue playing.

When the game transitions to chance mode, the number of games played in chance mode is displayed. This configuration allows the player to understand the maximum number of games required before transitioning to notification mode and the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. However, since the number of games played in the normal zone is unrelated to the number of games played in the advantageous zone and chance mode, if the number of games were displayed after the end of the advantageous zone, for example, a game number that does not update until transitioning to chance mode, such as "-G," would have to be displayed. This could lead to the player perceiving play in the normal zone as meaningless and reducing their motivation to play. However, in a configuration like this slot machine 10 where the end screen is continuously displayed for each game in the normal zone, the end screen can be switched to display the number of games played in chance mode, reducing the visual discomfort. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

When the end screen is displayed, it is configured to display the end of the notification mode and the current number of medals won. Furthermore, when the end screen continues to be displayed, i.e., when the end screen is displayed in the normal section, the displayed number of medals won is not changed. This configuration makes it possible to accurately notify the player of the number of medals won in the advantageous section, even when the end screen is displayed in the normal section. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the number of medals won displayed on the end screen, it is possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

(Sixth embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, the probability of winning the push order bell was set so that the probability of winning the bell was the same when the left stop switch 42 was operated first, when the middle stop switch 43 was operated first, and when the right stop switch 44 was operated first. However, the probability of winning the push order bell may also be set so that the probability of winning the bell differs depending on which stop switch 42-44 is operated first. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 74 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R.

There are ten types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., number 19 on the left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., number 18 on the left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., number 17 on the left reel 32L), "White Star" (e.g., number 16 on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., number 15 on the left reel 32L), "Blue Star" (e.g., number 12 on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., number 11 on the left reel 32L), "White 7" (e.g., number 7 on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., number 6 on the left reel 32L), and "Red Star" (e.g., number 2 on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 74, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three parallel horizontal lines and two diagonally crossing lines, connecting the positions where these nine symbols are visible. More specifically, as shown in Figure 75(a), the horizontal combination lines are an upper line L1 connecting the upper row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a middle line L2 connecting the middle row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a lower line L3 connecting the lower row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, diagonal combination lines include a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols on the right reel 32R, and a upward-sloping line L5 connecting the lower symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols on the right reel 32R. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated combination line, i.e., an active line, a win is achieved, and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 75(b), only the upward-sloping line L5 is set as an active line. The four combined lines of the top line L1, middle line L2, bottom line L3, and downward-sloping line L4 are never set as active lines.

Figures 76 to 78 show the correspondence between the name of the condition device, the winning symbol combination, and the bonus awarded when a winning symbol is obtained.

BB is a conditional device that grants the bonus of transitioning to a gaming state when a winning combination is achieved.

When the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a BB win occurs. When a BB win occurs, the game state transitions to BB state.

The conditional devices that grant the replay bonus when a winning combination is achieved include Replay 1 to Replay 11.

To explain some winning patterns, for example, if the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 1 win will occur. When a Replay 1 win is achieved, the "Replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop on the middle line L2.

If the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 7 win is awarded. If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and any of the "red 7," "BAR," "red star," and "blue star" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 8 win is awarded. When a Replay 8 win is achieved, the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the downward-sloping right line L4. In other words, in this embodiment, if the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on any of the active line combinations, a Replay bonus is awarded, rather than a medal payout bonus.

Replay 9 is awarded when the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R stop on an active line, or when the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R stop on an active line. Replay 10 is awarded when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "White 7" or "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. If the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a replay 11 win will be awarded. In this embodiment, the winning combinations that stop when replay 9 wins through replay 11 wins are considered chance combinations.

The conditional devices that grant the medal payout bonus when a winning combination is achieved are Small Win 1 to Small Win 32.

Minor win 1 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upper line L1 when a win is achieved. Minor win 2 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the downward-sloping line L4 when a win is achieved. Minor win 3 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the middle line L2 when a win is achieved. Minor win 4 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upward-sloping line L4 when a win is achieved. Minor win 5 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the lower line L3 when a win is achieved. Minor win 6 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop in a small mountain shape (bottom, middle, bottom) when a win is achieved. When minor win 1 through minor win 6 are achieved, eight medals are paid out.

Small wins 7 to 27, 31, and 32 function as compensation wins in this embodiment, and one medal will be paid out if a win is achieved.

Small wins 28 to 30 function as cherry wins in this embodiment, and three medals are paid out when a win is achieved.

Figure 79 shows the lottery table selected during a non-BB internal play when the BB winning flag of "Setting 3" is not carried over. The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning role and a point value PV. In addition to the correspondence between winning roles, index values IV, and point values PV, Figure 79 also lists the condition devices that make up the winning role, the winning role number of the winning flag that is set when the role lottery is won, and the group number, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the game can only be started with three coins, and when the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in Figure 79, the winning probability for each combination is as follows: The probability of winning the first replay is approximately 1 in 9.1, the probability of winning the second replay is approximately 1 in 94, the probability of winning the third replay is approximately 1 in 6,600, the probability of winning the first watermelon is approximately 1 in 160, the probability of winning the second watermelon is approximately 1 in 200, the probability of winning the first chance is approximately 1 in 410, the probability of winning the second chance is approximately 1 in 820, and the probability of winning the third chance is approximately 1 in 820. The probability of winning Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2 is approximately 1 in 33. The probability of winning the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell is approximately 1 in 16. The probability of winning a common bell is approximately 1 in 54, the probability of winning a strong bell is approximately 1 in 2,200, the probability of winning a single-piece role is approximately 1 in 260, the probability of winning a weak cherry is approximately 1 in 82, the probability of winning a strong cherry is approximately 1 in 300, the probability of winning a double BB is approximately 1 in 4.8, and the probability of winning a single BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. When not in the BB internal state, there will be no winning events during the internal replay, and there will also be no losing events where no winning combination occurs.

Although not shown in the figure, the lottery table selected during a BB while the BB win flag is carried over differs from the lottery table for non-BB internal periods in that the point value PV for internal replay (IV = 4) and the point value PV for single BB (IV = 32) are different. Specifically, the point value PV for internal replay is set to 4, and the point value PV for single BB is set to 0. Therefore, during a BB, there is a 1 in 16,000 probability of winning a duplicate replay, and a single BB will not be won. Because the winning probability for other roles is the same as during a non-BB internal period, no losses occur during a BB internal period.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the winning combination and the reel stopping results.

In this embodiment, the condition device for creating the winning combination and the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set so that if a combination other than a single BB is won, some kind of winning combination will always be achieved. For example, if the second watermelon is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either Replay 7 or 8 will be achieved, and a replay bonus will be awarded. Similarly, if the strong cherry is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either Small combination 28 to 30 will be achieved, and three medals will be paid out. In the event of a single BB win, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated at a time that allows the BB symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R, to stop on the active line L5, which is the upward-sloping right line, a BB win will be achieved. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated at any other time, a BB win will not be achieved and the BB win flag will be carried over.

Furthermore, if the main control device 101 wins BB and a small winning combination, it sets and modifies the stop information so that the small winning combination takes priority. If the main control device 101 wins BB and a replay combination, it sets and modifies the stop information so that the replay winning combination takes priority. Therefore, for example, if a duplicate BB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the small winning combinations 7-27, 31, or 32 will be won, and one medal will be paid out. If the first replay is won while inside BB, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the replay combinations 1, 2, or 4 will be won, and a replay bonus will be awarded. The same applies if another combination is won while inside BB; regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, a winning combination for a condition device other than BB will be won, and the corresponding bonus will be awarded. As mentioned above, since no losses occur within the BB, in this embodiment, a BB win cannot be achieved in any game other than the one in which a single BB was won. In other words, in the first embodiment, a BB win was avoided by playing two coins to enter the BB2 state and then playing three coins, but in this embodiment, a BB win can be avoided without following the above procedure.

If you win on Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, operating the left stop switch 42, then the centre stop switch 43, and then the right stop switch 44 will result in a win for minor win 1, resulting in the payout of eight medals. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a win for minor win 7, 10, 15, or 18, resulting in the payout of one medal. The same is true for winning on Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Middle-Left-Right Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Middle-Right-Left Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Centre-Left Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2, Right-Left-Centre Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2, Right-Left-Centre Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order corresponding to the winning combination will result in a win for the winning condition device among minor wins 1-6, resulting in the payout of eight medals. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a win for any winning condition device other than minor wins 1-6, resulting in the payout of one medal. If the first special bell is won, operating the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 in this order will result in minor win 3 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 14, or 27 and one medal being paid out. If the second special bell is won, operating the middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 in this order will result in minor win 4 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 14, or 27 and one medal being paid out. If the third special bell is won, operating the right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 in this order will result in minor win 5 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 10 or 23 to 27 and one medal being paid out. If the fourth special bell is won, operating the right stop switch 44 → center stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 in this order will result in minor win 6 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 10 or 23 to 27 and one medal being paid out. In the following, left-center-right Bell 1, left-center-right Bell 2, left-center-left Bell 1, left-center-left Bell 2, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-right-left Bell 1, center-right-left Bell 2, right-center-left Bell 1, right-center-left Bell 2, right-left-center Bell 1, right-left-center Bell 2, and the 1st to 4th special bells are collectively referred to as "push order roles" or "push order bells." In addition, minor roles 1 to 6 are achieved when the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in any combination line or small hill shape. For this reason, in the following, minor roles 1 to 6 are collectively referred to as "bell roles."

The following explains the game zones in this embodiment.

The game zone in this embodiment is the same as the first embodiment in that it consists of two types of game zones, the normal zone and the advantageous zone, and that the advantageous zone consists of two types of game modes, the chance mode and the notification mode (see Figure 24). However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it can only be played with three coins, that the notification mode ends based on the number of games played in the notification mode rather than the net increase in coins, and that the navigation rate, which notifies the player of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is hit in the notification mode, can change. Therefore, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing the game zone will be explained below with reference to the flowcharts from Figure 80 onwards. To make it easier to understand, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained individually.

First, we will explain the processing during normal intervals.

Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process for the normal section. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S5301, it is determined whether a win flag has been set in the win flag storage area 106a, i.e., whether any role has been won. If the win flag has been set, proceed to step S5302, where it is determined whether the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the win role numbers 1 to 31 (see Figure 79) is stored in the win flag storage area 106a. If the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won, a transition flag is set in step S5303, and the interval indicator 66 is turned ON in step S5304, and this processing ends. If the win flag is not set, or if the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has not been won, i.e., if a single BB has been won, this processing ends immediately.

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in the normal interval. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S5401, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery for this game has been won. In this case, the advantageous zone transition process shown in steps S5402 to S5410 is performed.

In the advantageous zone transition process, step S5402 determines whether the first stop command has been issued to the left reel 32L, i.e., whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time, proceed to step S5403, where the transition flag is cleared. In step S5404, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag, and in step S5405, the zone game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S5406, the game mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S5407, the transition game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 700. In step S5408, the mode game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S5409, the difference number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. Then, in step S5410, an interval command is sent, and this process ends. Here, an interval command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp various information related to the play interval at the time the game ends (i.e., the play interval and play mode of the next game, and if it is an advantageous interval, the number of plays played in that advantageous interval and the number of plays played in that play mode, etc.), and in step S5410, an interval command corresponding to the play interval flag, play mode flag, and various counter values set in the interval information storage area 106d is sent.

If it is determined in step S5402 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, the transition flag is cleared in step S5411. Then, in step S5410, a section command is sent and this processing ends. In other words, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal section, even if the transition lottery result is won, the result is invalidated and the game does not transition to chance mode.

If it is determined in step S5401 that the transition flag is not set, a section command is sent in step S5410, and this processing ends.

As described above, if a role other than a single BB is won during the normal period, the game will transition to the chance mode of the advantageous period. As shown in Figure 79, for example, in "Setting 3," the probability of winning a single BB while not inside a BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first during the normal period, the game will end in almost one game. Also, if the BB is in progress, a role other than a single BB will always be won, so if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the normal period will end in one game.

Next, we will explain the processing in chance mode during advantageous zones.

Figure 82 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S5501, it is determined whether a rare role has been won. In this embodiment, the first watermelon, second watermelon, first chance, second chance, third chance, strong bell, weak cherry, and strong cherry are set as rare roles. Therefore, in step S5501, it is determined whether any of the winning role numbers 5 to 9, 27, 29, and 30 (see Figure 79) is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S5502, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to notification mode. In the transition lottery for chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. In step S5503, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the transition flag is set in step S5504 and the process is terminated. If the transition lottery has not been won, the process is terminated without setting the transition flag. If a rare combination is not won, the process will end without performing the transition lottery described above.

Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S5601, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S5602, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process was performed in the termination determination process of step S5601, and after sending a zone command in step S5611, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S5603, where it is determined whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time, in step S5604, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S5605, it is determined whether the transition flag has been set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won, so in step S5606, the transition flag is cleared, and in step S5608, the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In the following step S5609, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S5610, the mode game number counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S5611, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S5605 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5607, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S5611, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A in step S5608. In the following step S5609, the transition game count counter is set to 100, and in step S5610, the mode game count counter is set to 0. Thereafter, an interval command is sent in step S5611, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S5603 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, the transition flag is cleared in step S5612, a section command is sent in step S5611, and this processing ends.

As described above, from chance mode, the game transitions to notification mode A if the left stop switch 42 is operated first to play, if the transition lottery is won, or if the number of games played corresponds to the value of the transition game count counter. If the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first to play, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated and the game does not transition to notification mode A. Furthermore, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first to play, the value of the mode game count counter is not updated, so the game does not transition to notification mode A even if the number of games played corresponds to the value of the transition game count counter.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S5701, it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, proceed to step S5702, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, proceed to step S5703, where an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game count counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the combination has been won. In the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if the first watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1 in 8 chance of winning either 10, 30, or 50 additional games. In step S5704, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the additional flag is set in step S5705, and an additional command is sent in step S5706. Here, the additional command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the additional lottery and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the transition game count counter. In step S5707, a value corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. Then, this process ends. If the bonus lottery is not won, this process ends without setting the bonus flag. If a rare combination is not won, this process ends without performing the bonus lottery.

If it is determined in step S5701 that the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S5708, where a navigation determination process is performed to determine whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. The navigation determination process determines whether or not to perform navigation based on the set game mode flag, the set winning flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the winning combination has been achieved. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 85, if any of the following has been won: left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, or right-left-center bell 2, it is determined that navigation will be performed 33% of the time if the notification mode is A. More specifically, there are 1,980 random number values that result in a win for each of the above roles (see FIG. 79 ). Therefore, 660 random number values are set as random number values that are determined to be navigational, and the remaining 1,320 random number values are set as random number values that are determined not to be navigational. If any of the first, second, third, or fourth special bells is won, in notification mode A, navigation is determined to occur 100% of the time. In step S5709, it is determined whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. If navigation is to occur, a navigation flag is set in step S5710, and the process ends. If navigation is not to occur, a prediction flag is set in step S5711, a prediction command is sent in step S5712, and the process ends. Here, the prediction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the user that navigation will not occur for the operation sequence that will result in a bell win.

As described above, in notification mode A, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in the bell winning may or may not be navigated. Therefore, the following describes the processing performed by the main control unit 101 and display control unit 81 when actually navigating the operation sequence.

The main control device 101 performs processing to display on the instruction monitor the operation sequence that can result in a bell win during the rotation start processing (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display processing (see FIG. 19). In the first embodiment, the instruction monitor was displayed after determining whether or not the push order bell was won (S603, S802). However, in this embodiment, the instruction monitor is displayed after determining whether or not the navigation flag is set, rather than whether or not the push order bell was won, and the instruction monitor is displayed if the navigation flag is set.

Figure 86 is a flowchart showing the winning role information creation process. The winning role information creation process is a process for creating winning role information that indicates the result of the role judgment from the various information that makes up the lottery result command. The winning role information creation process is performed after the section lottery process is completed and before the lottery result command is sent (see Figure 12).

In step S5801, it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the winning role number is set as winning role information in step S5802, and this process ends. If the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S5803, and it is determined whether the navigation flag has been set. If the navigation flag has been set, this means that the current game mode is the notification mode, and it has been decided to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. In this case, the winning role number is set as winning role information in step S5802, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the navigation flag is not set, this means that the current game mode is a normal interval or chance mode, or that the current game mode is an announcement mode but a decision has been made not to navigate the operation sequence that can result in a bell win. In such a case, a group number is set as winning role information in step S5804, and this processing ends. Specifically, if any of the following is won: left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, group number "1" is set as winning role information. If any of the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, or fourth special bell is won, group number "2" is set as winning role information. When a group number is set, the winning role number is not set as winning role information. Therefore, when the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command including a group number, it can determine that one of the push order bells corresponding to the group number has been selected, but it cannot determine which push order bell has been selected. Note that hereinafter, left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, and right-left-center bell 2 are collectively referred to as "push order group 1." Additionally, the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell are collectively referred to as "push order group 2."

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the operation navigation process performed by the display control device 81. The operation navigation process is initiated when a lottery result command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S5901, it is determined whether a winning combination number has been received. If a winning combination number has been received, in step S5902 it is determined whether the winning combination is a push order bell, and if it is not a push order bell, this process ends. If a winning combination number indicating that the winning combination is a push order bell has been received, this means that the main control unit 101 has decided to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. In such a case, in step S5903, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S5901 that a winning combination number has not been received, this means that a group number has been received. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5904, where it is determined whether a prediction command has been received. If a prediction command has not been received, this means that the current play area is the normal area or chance mode, and the process ends. If a prediction command has been received, the process displays "???" on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S5905, and the process ends. By displaying "???" on the auxiliary display unit 65, it is possible to notify the player that the push order bell has been won, although it does not guide the player to the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of "???" functions as a promotion suggestion that will increase the navigation rate in subsequent games.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in a game session in which a simulated game is played, the above operation sequence and "???" will be displayed when the simulated game ends and the actual game begins.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the promotion determination process performed by the main control device 101. The promotion determination process is performed after the reel control process (S212, see Figure 11) has ended, i.e., after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

In step S6001, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated. If the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined whether the navigation flag is set in step S6002. If the navigation flag is set, it is cleared in step S6003 and then the processing proceeds to step S6004; if the navigation flag is not set, the processing proceeds to step S6004. In step S6004, it is determined whether the prediction flag is set, and if the prediction flag is not set, the processing is terminated.

If the prediction flag is set, the prediction flag is cleared in step S6005, and a determination is made in step S6006 as to whether a bell win has occurred. If a bell win has not occurred, this process ends. If a bell win has occurred, a promotion lottery is held in step S6007 to determine whether or not to increase the navigation rate. The promotion lottery is held based on the set game mode flag, the set win flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the winning combination has been achieved. In step S6008, a determination is made as to whether or not the promotion lottery has been won. If the promotion lottery has been won, this process ends. If the promotion lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S6009, where a determination is made as to whether or not the set game mode flag is notification flag A. If notification flag A is set, the process proceeds to step S6010, where the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag B.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag B, in subsequent game plays, as shown in Figure 85, if push order group 1 is selected, navigation will be determined to occur with a 66% probability, and if push order group 2 is selected, navigation will be determined to occur with a 100% probability.

If it is determined in step S6009 that notification flag A is not set, the process proceeds to step S6011, where the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag C.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag C, in subsequent game plays, if the push order bell is selected, navigation will be determined to occur 100% of the time, as shown in Figure 85.

If the game mode flag is changed in step S6010 or step S6011, a promotion command is sent in step S6012, and this processing ends. Here, the promotion command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the promotion lottery. When the display control device 81 receives a promotion command, it executes an effect suggesting that they have won the promotion lottery. In this embodiment, in notification mode A, a daytime image is displayed as the background image, in notification mode B, an evening image is displayed as the background image, and in notification mode C, a nighttime image is displayed as the background image. When the display control device 81 receives a promotion command, it executes processing to switch to the background image corresponding to the notification mode for the next game onwards.

Figure 89 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S6101, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S6102, it is determined whether the current gaming zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current gaming zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S6101, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S6108.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S6103 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S6104 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, step S6108 sends an interval command and then terminates this processing.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous zone end processing shown in steps S6105 to S6107 is performed, and an zone command is sent in step S6108, terminating this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S6105, and the zone indicator 66 is turned OFF in step S6106. In step S6107, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game number counter value, etc.).

Here, we will explain the playability of this slot machine 10.

The probability of winning Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Middle-Left-Right Bell 1, Middle-Left-Right Bell 2, Middle-Right-Left Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Centre-Left Bell 1, Right-Centre ... which form Push Order Group 1, is approximately 1 in 33. The probability of winning the 1st Special Bell, 2nd Special Bell, 3rd Special Bell, and 4th Special Bell, which form Push Order Group 2, is approximately 1 in 16.

When the operation order of stop switches 42 to 44 is used as a reference, the probability of achieving a bell win based on the push order bell win is as follows. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center-right operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are left-center-right bell 1 and left-center-right bell 2, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 17. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are left-center-right bell 1 and left-center-right bell 2, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 17. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the center-left-right operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, and the first special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the center-right-left operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, and the second special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the right-left-center operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, and the third special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the right-center-left operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, and the fourth special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1.

As described above, when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the left-center-right or left-right-center order, i.e., when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the probability of a bell winning is lower than when the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first. As a result, the expected number of medals paid out per game in the normal section and chance mode is approximately 1.9 medals when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the left-center-right or left-right-center order, and approximately 2.3 medals when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in any other order.

In this configuration, when considering only the expected medal payout per game, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 first. However, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal zone, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated, and the game does not transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the chance mode, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated, and the game does not transition from the chance mode to the notification mode. In addition, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the chance mode, the mode game number counter, which triggers a transition to the notification mode, is not updated, while the zone game number counter, which triggers a transition to the normal zone, is updated. Therefore, when considering the transition between game zones, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first. Therefore, the following describes the gameplay when the left stop switch 42 is operated first.

In the normal zone, if you win a role other than a single BB, you will move to chance mode in the advantageous zone. As shown in Figure 79, for example, in "Setting 3," the probability of winning a single BB while not inside a BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. Therefore, the normal zone will end in almost one game. Also, if you are inside a BB, you will always win a role other than a single BB, so the normal zone will end in one game.

When the game transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the game starts in chance mode and the transition game count is set to 700 (see Figure 81).

In chance mode, if a rare combination is won, a lottery is held to transition to notification mode. If the transition lottery is won, the game will transition from chance mode to notification mode. Also, even if the transition lottery is not won, the game will transition to notification mode if 700 plays have been played in chance mode (see Figure 83).

When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, the transition game number counter is set to 100 (see Figure 83). Therefore, when transitioning to notification mode, 100 plays can be played in that notification mode. Furthermore, if a rare combination is won in notification mode, an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter (see Figure 84). Then, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the notification mode and advantageous zone end, and a transition to the normal zone occurs (see Figure 89).

The notification mode starts from notification mode A. In notification mode A, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 33% probability is announced for push order group 1, and the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability is announced for push order group 2 (see Figure 85). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in notification mode A is approximately 4.4 medals, and in notification mode A, an increase of approximately 1.4 medals can be expected for each game played.

If the push order bell is won in notification mode A but the operation order is not announced, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display "???" to notify that the push order bell has been won (hereinafter referred to as the "promotion effect"). If a bell win is achieved in that play, a promotion lottery will be held. Then, if the promotion lottery is won, the system will transition from notification mode A to notification mode B (see Figure 88).

In notification mode B, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 66% probability will be announced for push order group 1, and the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability will be announced for push order group 2 (see Figure 85). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in notification mode B is approximately 5.1 medals, and in notification mode B, you can expect to receive an increase of approximately 2.1 medals per game.

If the push order bell is won in notification mode B but the operation order is not announced, a promotion effect will be performed in the same way as in notification mode A. If a bell win is achieved in that play, a promotion lottery will be held. If the promotion lottery is won, the game will transition from notification mode B to notification mode C (see Figure 88).

In Notification Mode C, if you win the push order bell, you will be notified of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability (see Figure 85). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in Notification Mode C is approximately 5.8 medals, and in Notification Mode C, you can expect to receive an increase of approximately 2.8 medals per game.

As mentioned above, in notification mode, the expected number of medals paid out per game changes depending on whether the player is in notification mode A, B, or C. For this reason, players hoping to win more medals should aim to win rare combinations to increase the number of games played when switching to notification mode, while also achieving a bell win in a game with a promotion effect.

As mentioned above, the probability of winning a push-order bell that can achieve a bell win using the left-center-right or left-right-center operation sequence is lower than the probability of winning a push-order bell that can achieve a bell win using other operation sequences. Therefore, in games with promotion effects, it is possible that the probability of achieving a bell win is higher if the center stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, as shown in Figure 79, in push-order group 1, the same point value PV is set for each of the six operation sequences, so the winning probability for each operation sequence is equal. The reason for the lower probability of winning a push-order bell that can achieve a bell win using the left-center-right or left-right-center operation sequence is due to push-order group 2, which can achieve a bell win using other operation sequences. Furthermore, in notification mode A and notification mode B, if push-order group 2 is selected, the operation sequence that can achieve a bell win with a 100% probability is announced. Therefore, in games with promotion effects, the probability of achieving a bell win is equal regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The probability of winning a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating left-center-right or left-center-center is lower than the probability of winning a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating other push-orders. This configuration makes it possible to vary the probability of achieving a bell win depending on the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

However, in a configuration in which the probability of winning a bell varies depending on the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated, there is a concern that disparities in profits may arise among players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10. In a situation in which the operation order is not announced, a player who knows this fact is likely to operate the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 first, while a player who does not know this fact is likely to operate the left stop switch 42 first, resulting in differences in the probability of winning a bell.

In this slot machine 10, in notification mode A and notification mode B, when a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating the center left/right, center right/left, right/left center, or right/center left operation sequence is won, the operation sequence is announced more frequently than when a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating the left/center right or left/right/center operation sequence is won. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the difference in the probability of winning the former push-order bell and the latter push-order bell when the operation sequence is not announced, thereby reducing the difference in the frequency of bell wins. As a result, it is possible to prevent disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, allowing players to enjoy the game regardless of their level of knowledge.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

In Notification Mode A and Notification Mode B, when the push order bell is won, the system determines whether or not to notify the operation order so that the frequency of bell wins does not differ depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified. This configuration makes it possible to avoid disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, allowing players to enjoy the game regardless of their level of knowledge.

In addition to the center, left, and right bells, a first special bell has been provided as a winning combination that can result in a bell win when the center, left, and right operation sequence is selected. Similarly, a second special bell has been provided in addition to the center, right, and left bells, a third special bell has been provided in addition to the right, left, and center bells, and a fourth special bell has been provided in addition to the right, center, and left bells. This configuration makes it possible to vary the frequency of bell wins when the left stop switch 42 is operated first and when the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, depending on the probability of winning the first to fourth special bells. As a result, it is relatively easy to realize a configuration in which the frequency of bell wins varies depending on the operation sequence.

Of the push order bells, push order group 1 is formed by left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, and right-center-left bell 2. Push order group 2 is formed by the first special bell that can achieve a bell win with the center-left operation sequence, the second special bell that can achieve a bell win with the center-right-left operation sequence, the third special bell that can achieve a bell win with the right-left-center operation sequence, and the fourth special bell that can achieve a bell win with the right-center-left operation sequence. In the notification mode, the frequency of determining whether to notify the operation order differs between when push order group 1 is selected and when push order group 2 is selected. This configuration enables control according to the group when determining whether to notify the operation order in the notification mode. As a result, when the push order bell is selected, it is possible to realize a notification mode with a relatively simple configuration, in which the operation order is either notified or not announced.

It is certainly possible to provide six types of push-order bells: left-center-right bell, left-center-right bell, center-left-right bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-left-center bell, and right-center-left bell. The winning probability for the left-center-right bell and left-center-right bell is lower than that for the center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-left-center bell, and right-center-left bell. This allows the navigation determination process to be performed so that the probability of winning a bell is equal regardless of the operation order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated when the operation order is not notified. However, with such a configuration, the lower limit of the navigation rate is restricted by the point values PV of the left-center-right bell and left-center-left bell. A detailed example will be explained in (78) below. Taking the point values in Group 1 in Figure 79 as an example, the upper limit of the value number for determining that navigation will not be performed is set to 3960 (= 1980 x 2). Therefore, in the above configuration, it is necessary to set the actual navigation rate and point value PV after taking into consideration both the desired navigation rate and the winning probability of each of the above roles, and there is a concern that trial and error could result in a significant amount of development time. On the other hand, in this embodiment, which controls according to group when deciding whether to notify the operation order, if the winning probability of each winning role belonging to group 1 is configured to be equal or nearly equal, the navigation rate can be set as desired. This makes it possible to effectively resolve the above concern, and it becomes possible to realize, with a relatively simple configuration, a notification mode in which the operation order is not announced when the push order bell is won, or in which the operation order is not announced.

In the notification mode, if push order group 1 is selected, the operation order is notified with a predetermined probability, and if push order group 2 is selected, the operation order is always notified. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, while also providing notification modes in which the operation order is not notified when the push order bell is selected, and in which the operation order is not notified.

The winning probability for winning roles belonging to push order group 1 is now equal. This configuration makes it possible to attribute the increased probability of winning push order bells, which can be achieved by operating in the following order: center left/right, center right/left, right left/center, and right center left, to push order group 2. Furthermore, by configuring the system to always notify the operating order when push order group 2 is selected, it is possible to achieve the same probability of achieving a bell win regardless of the operating order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated when the operating order is not notified in notification mode.

In notification modes A, B, and C, which have different navigation rates, the navigation rate differs when pressing group 1 is selected, but the navigation rate is the same when pressing group 2 is selected. This configuration makes it possible to change the navigation rate while avoiding disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10.

If the operation sequence is not notified in the notification mode, a promotion effect will be displayed. This configuration allows players to play while anticipating a transition to notification mode B or notification mode C, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the notification mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The configuration is such that a promotion lottery is held if a bell win occurs during a game in which a promotion effect is performed. With this configuration, the frequency of the promotion lottery, and therefore the probability of winning the promotion lottery, will differ between players who know that the frequency of bell wins varies depending on the operation order and players who are unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter players losing their motivation to play. However, with this slot machine 10, the probability of a bell win is the same regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, making it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

In the normal zone, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the game will not move to the advantageous zone, and in the chance mode, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the game will not move to the notification mode. This configuration encourages the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first, while also making it possible to differentiate between the increase and decrease of medals in notification mode and when not in notification mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the game's enjoyment.

When the main control device 101 sends a lottery result command in a situation where the push order bell has been won, if the operation order is to be notified, it sends the winning role number as the winning role information, and if the operation order is not to be notified, it sends the group number as the winning role information. If the operation order is not to be notified in a situation where the push order bell has been won, it is possible to configure the display control device 81 so that it does not know which push order bell has been won. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to obtain winning roles from the display control device 81.

Press order group 2 is formed by the first special bell, which can be achieved by operating the center, left, and right buttons in a bell winning sequence; the second special bell, which can be achieved by operating the center, right, and left buttons in a bell winning sequence; the third special bell, which can be achieved by operating the right, left, and center buttons in a bell winning sequence; and the fourth special bell, which can be achieved by operating the right, center, and left buttons in a bell winning sequence. This configuration makes it possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to obtain winning combinations from the display control device 81. For example, even if only the first special bell is set as press order group 2 and the point value PV of the first special bell is set to 16,720 (= 4,180 x 2), as in this slot machine 10, it is possible to differentiate the frequency of bell winning when the left stop switch 42 is operated first from the frequency of bell winning when the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, while maintaining the same frequency of bell winning when the operation sequence is not announced in the announcement mode. However, in this configuration, push order group 2 and winning the first special bell are uniquely associated, so even if the group number rather than the winning combination number is sent to the display control device 81, a fraudster would be able to detect that the first special bell has been won. On the other hand, in this embodiment, where push order group 2 is formed from four types of special bells, it is not possible to know which special bell has been won, making it possible to reduce the frequency with which fraudsters achieve bell wins. Furthermore, by configuring the first through fourth special bells to have equal winning probabilities, it is also possible to reduce the frequency with which fraudsters achieve bell wins.

(Seventh embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, if the player wins the additional lottery in the notification mode, the player is notified that the additional lottery has been won in that game. However, the configuration may also be such that the player is notified that the additional lottery has been won after a predetermined continuous effect or premonition effect is executed across multiple games. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S6201, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S6202, where it is determined whether the competition flag, described below, is set. If the competition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S6203, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S6204, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to notification mode. In the transition lottery for chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the combination has been successful. In step S6205, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has not been won, the process ends as is. If the transition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S6206, where a lottery is held to determine the number of competition games. In the lottery for the number of competition games, a value between 3 and 5 is obtained based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the combination has been successful. In step S6207, the transition game number counter is set to the value obtained in the competition game number lottery, and in step S6208, the mode game number counter is set to 0. In step S6209, the competition flag is set. Then, in step S6210, a competition command is sent, and this processing ends. Here, the competition command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to execute a competition presentation, and in step S6210, information including the competition game number obtained in the competition game number lottery is sent.

If the current game involves two coins instead of three, or if a rare combination is not won, this process ends without conducting the transition lottery. Also, if it is determined in step S6202 that the showdown flag is set, this means that the lottery for the number of showdown games has already been conducted, meaning that the transition lottery has already been won, so this process ends.

Figure 92 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S6301, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S6302, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S6301, and after sending a zone command in step S6310, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S6303, where it is determined whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, in step S6304, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S6305, it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, an interval command is sent in step S6310, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the showdown flag is cleared in step S6306, and the play mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag in step S6307. In the following step S6308, the transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S6309, the mode game number counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S6310, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If step S6303 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S6310 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, if the transition lottery is won in chance mode, the game will transition to notification mode after three-coin plays have been played the number of times (3 to 5) obtained in the match game number lottery. Note that if the transition lottery is not won in chance mode, the transition game number counter is set to 700 when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone (S1406, see Figure 26), and the game will transition to notification mode after 700 three-coin plays have been played.

In this embodiment, if the transition lottery is won in chance mode, a battle effect is performed for the number of three-coin games obtained in the battle game number lottery (hereinafter also referred to as the "battle game number"). The battle effect is an effect in which a predetermined battle pits the main character of the slot machine 10 against an enemy character, and if the main character wins, an announcement is made that a special benefit, such as a transition to the announcement mode, will be granted. The following describes the various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing the battle effect in chance mode.

Figure 93 is a flowchart showing the competition command processing in chance mode. The competition command processing is initiated when a competition command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S6401, it is determined whether the defeat flag, described below, has been set. If the defeat flag has been set, the defeat flag is cleared in step S6402 and the process proceeds to step S6403. If the defeat flag has not been set, the process proceeds directly to step S6403. In step S6403, a victory flag is set. In step S6404, the number of battle games indicated by the battle command is set in the announcement game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S6405, the effect game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. This process then terminates.

Figure 94 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in chance mode. Lottery result command processing is initiated when a lottery result command transmitted from the main control unit 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game. In a game round in which both a competition command and a lottery result command are received, the competition command is received before the lottery result command is received, and so lottery result command processing is initiated after the competition command processing is completed.

In step S6501, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game, and if it is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, the process ends. If it is a three-coin game, it is determined in step S6502 whether the win flag is set. If the win flag is set, this means that a showdown command has been received, so the showdown presentation process is performed in step S6503 and the process ends.

In the showdown effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, in step S6601, 1 is added to the value of the effect game number counter. In step S6602, it is determined whether the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the announced game number counter. If the value of the effect game number counter does not match the value of the announced game number counter, processing proceeds to step S6603, where a corresponding effect is initiated according to the value of the effect game number counter, and processing ends. The ROM of the display control device 81 pre-stores showdown effect start video data for the first game, showdown effect mid-game video data for games two and beyond when no winner is decided, victory video data in which the main character wins, and defeat video data in which the main character is defeated. In step S6603, if the value of the effect game number counter is 1, control is initiated to output the showdown effect start video data to the auxiliary display unit 65. If the value of the effect game number counter is 2 to 4, control is initiated to output the showdown effect mid-game video data to the auxiliary display unit 65. If it is determined in step S6602 that the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the announcement game number counter, the process proceeds to step S6604, where it determines whether the victory flag is set. If the victory flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6605, where control is initiated to output victory effect video data to the auxiliary display unit 65, and the victory effect begins. Then, in step S6606, the victory flag is cleared, and the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result command processing, if it is determined in step S6502 that the win flag is not set, it is determined in step S6504 whether the defeat flag is set. If the defeat flag is not set, the effect determination process is performed in step S6505, and this processing ends.

In the effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 96, in step S6701, it is determined whether or not a rare role has been won. If a rare role has not been won, this process is terminated. If a rare role has been won, in step S6702, a showdown effect lottery is held to determine whether or not a showdown effect will be executed. In the showdown effect lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the winning role and a random number obtained by the display control device 81. In step S6703, it is determined whether or not the showdown effect lottery has been won. If the showdown effect lottery has not been won, this process is terminated. If the showdown effect lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S6704, where a lottery for the number of showdown games is held. In the showdown game number lottery, a value between 3 and 5 is obtained based on the winning role and the random number obtained by the display control device 81. In step S6705, the value obtained in the showdown game number lottery is set to the announcement game number counter, and in step S6706, the effect game number counter is set to 0. In step S6707, a defeat flag is set. Then, in step S6708, the above-described competition presentation process is performed, and this process ends. In the competition presentation process in step S6708, the value of the presentation game number counter is updated to 1, and control is performed to output competition presentation start video data to the auxiliary display unit 65.

As described above, the display control device 81 independently determines whether to execute a showdown effect when the win flag is not set, i.e., when the player has not won the lottery to transition to the notification mode. If it decides to execute a showdown effect, it sets the defeat flag.

If the defeat flag is set, the lottery result command processing makes a positive determination in step S6504 and performs showdown presentation processing in step S6503, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 94.

In the showdown effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, in step S6601, 1 is added to the value of the effect game number counter. In step S6602, it is determined whether the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the announcement game number counter. If the value of the effect game number counter does not match the value of the announcement game number counter, the process proceeds to step S6603, where a corresponding effect is initiated according to the value of the effect game number counter, and this processing ends. If it is determined in step S6602 that the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the announcement game number counter, the process proceeds to step S6604, where it is determined whether a win flag has been set. If a defeat flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S6607, where control is initiated to output defeat effect video data to the auxiliary display unit 65, and a defeat effect is initiated. Thereafter, in step S6608, the defeat flag is cleared, and this processing ends.

If a competition command is received while the defeat flag is set, i.e., if the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is won during the defeat competition presentation, the competition command processing shown in FIG. 93 is initiated. In the competition command processing, the defeat flag is cleared in step S6402, and the victory flag is set in step S6403. Then, in step S6404, the number of competition games indicated by the competition command is set in the announcement game number counter, and in step S6405, the presentation game number counter is set to 0. As a result, the defeat competition presentation on the auxiliary display unit 65 ends midway, and the victory competition presentation is restarted from the beginning.

Figure 97 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S6801, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S6802, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S6803, where an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the result is determined based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the combination has been won. Incidentally, in the additional lottery, for example, in a setting of 3, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a one-in-five probability that the additional number of games will be won, with either 30, 50, 100, or 300, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a one-in-three probability that the additional number of games will be won, with either 10, 20, 30, or 50. In step S6804, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has not been won, it is determined in step S6805 whether or not the effect flag has been set. If the effect flag is not set, the first effect determination process is performed in step S6806, and then this process ends.

In the first effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, a showdown effect lottery is held in step S6901 to determine whether or not to execute a showdown effect. In the showdown effect lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the role is a win or loss. In step S6902, it is determined whether or not the showdown effect lottery has been won. If the showdown effect lottery has not been won, this process is terminated as is. If the showdown effect lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S6903, where a lottery for the number of showdown games is held. In this showdown game number lottery, a value between 3 and 5 is obtained based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role is a win or loss, just as in the chance mode. In step S6904, the value obtained in the showdown game number lottery is set in the showdown game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S6905, it is determined whether the number of games missing is greater than 0. More specifically, the value obtained by adding 1 to the mode game number counter is subtracted from the value of the transition game number counter to derive the number of remaining games in the notification mode. The reason for subtracting the value obtained by adding 1 to the mode game number counter is that the mode game number counter is updated during the game section processing after the game ends, and therefore the mode game number counter is not updated during the section lottery processing. Once the number of remaining games in the notification mode has been derived, the number of remaining games in the notification mode is subtracted from the value obtained by the competition game number lottery to derive the number of missing games. Therefore, if the number of missing games is greater than 0, this means that if the competition presentation is performed as is, the notification mode will end midway through the competition presentation. In such a case, the number of missing games is added to the value of the transition game number counter in step S6906, and the process proceeds to step S6907. On the other hand, if the number of missing games is 0 or less, this means that the competition presentation can be performed to the end in the notification mode, and the process proceeds to step S6907 without changing the value of the transition game number counter. In step S6907, a presentation flag is set in the interval information storage area 106d. Then, in step S6908, a competition command is sent, and this process ends. In notification mode, the competition command sends information including the number of competition games obtained in the competition game number lottery and the number of additional games obtained in the additional lottery. Note that since the first presentation determination process is performed when the additional lottery is not won, in step S6908, information including a value between 3 and 5 as the number of competition games and 0 as the number of additional games is sent.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process, if it is determined in step S6805 that the effect flag is set, this means that the showdown effect is being executed, and so this process ends without performing the first effect determination process.

If it is determined in step S6804 that the additional lottery has been won, the second presentation determination process is performed to determine the method for announcing the number of additional games, and then this process is terminated.

In the second effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 99, step S7001 determines whether the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, step S7002 executes a showdown effect lottery to determine whether or not to execute a showdown effect. Step S7003 determines whether or not the showdown effect lottery has been won.

If the match presentation lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S7004, where a match presentation number lottery is conducted. In this match presentation number lottery, a value between 3 and 5 is obtained based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is successful, just as in the first presentation determination process. Furthermore, the same lottery table is used to determine the match presentation number in the chance mode, the first presentation determination process, and the second presentation determination process. In step S7005, the value obtained in the match presentation number lottery is set in the match presentation number counter. In step S7006, it is determined whether the number of games in short supply is greater than 0. If the number of games in short supply is greater than 0, this means that if the match presentation is conducted as is, some of the additional games will be consumed under the match presentation. Therefore, in such a case, in step S7007, the number of games in short supply is added to the value of the transition game number counter, and the process proceeds to step S7008. On the other hand, if the number of games insufficient is 0 or less, this means that the showdown effect can be executed to the end without consuming part of the additional games, so the process proceeds to step S7008 without changing the value of the transition game number counter. In step S7008, a display flag is set in the interval information storage area 106d, and in step S7009, a showdown command is sent. Since the second display determination process is performed when the additional game lottery is won, in step S7009, information including a value between 3 and 5 as the number of showdown games and a value of 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or 300 as the number of additional games is sent. In step S7010, a value corresponding to the result of the additional game lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This process then terminates.

If it is determined in step S7003 that the player has not won the showdown effect lottery, an add-on flag is set in step S7011 and an add-on command is sent in step S7012 in order to execute the pseudo-game described in the first embodiment above. Then, in step S7010, a value corresponding to the result of the add-on lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This processing then terminates.

If it is determined in step S7001 that the effect flag is set, this means that a competition effect is being executed, and so a competition command is sent in step S7013. At this time, since the additional lottery has been won but the competition game number lottery has not been held, information including 0 as the number of competition games and one of the following values as the number of additional games: 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or 300 is sent. In step S7010, a value corresponding to the result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This processing then terminates.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process, if the current game involves two coins instead of three, or if a rare combination is not won, the process will end without performing the first effect determination process and the second effect determination process.

Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game determination process.

In the pseudo-game determination process, step S7101 determines whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if it is not the notification mode, the process ends. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S7102, where it determines whether the bonus flag is set. If the bonus flag is set, the bonus flag is cleared in step S7103, and the pseudo-game flag is set in step S7104, and the process ends. If the bonus flag is not set, it determines whether the effect flag is set in step S7105. If the effect flag is set, this means that a showdown effect is being executed, and the process ends. If the effect flag is not set, a pseudo-game lottery is held in step S7106 to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game. In the pseudo-game lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role is a win. In step S7107, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery has not been won, this processing ends. If the pseudo-game lottery has been won, the pseudo-game flag is set in step S7104, and this processing ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, no pseudo-games will be played during the competition presentation.

Figure 101 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S7201, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S7202, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S7201, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S7208.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S7203 adds 1 to the value of the mode game count counter, and step S7204 determines whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, steps S7205 to S7207 are performed to end the favorable zone, and an zone command is sent in step S7208, terminating this processing. In the favorable zone end processing, step S7205 changes the play zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S7206 turns off the zone indicator 66. In step S7207, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the favorable zone. The initialization processing includes processing to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game count counter value, etc.), and processing to clear the effect flag if it is set.

If it is determined in step S7204 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the value of the battle game number counter is decremented by 1 in step S7209, and it is determined in step S7210 whether the value of the battle game number counter has reached 0. If the value of the battle game number counter has reached 0, this means that the battle presentation has ended, so the presentation flag is cleared in step S7211. If the presentation flag has been cleared, or if it is determined in step S7210 that the value of the battle game number counter has not reached 0, an interval command is sent in step S7208, and this processing ends.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing a showdown effect in the notification mode. As explained in the section lottery process in the notification mode, in the notification mode, whether a victory showdown effect or a defeat showdown effect is being executed, the main control device 101 determines whether or not to execute the showdown effect and sends a showdown command.

Figure 102 is a flowchart showing the competition command processing in notification mode.

In step S7301, it is determined whether the number of match games indicated by the match command is 0. If the number of match games indicated by the match command is not 0, this means that a match game number lottery was held in the first effect determination process or the second effect determination process, i.e., it has been decided that the match effect will start from the current game. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S7302, where the number of match games indicated by the match command is set in the announcement game number counter. In step S7303, it is determined whether the number of additional games indicated by the match command is 0. If the number of additional games indicated by the match command is not 0, this means that the additional lottery has been won, so the process proceeds to step S7304, where the number of additional games indicated by the match command is set in the announcement game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. Thereafter, in step S7305, a win flag is set, and in step S7306, the effect game number counter is set to 0, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S7303 that the number of bonus games indicated by the competition command is 0, this means that the main control unit 101 has decided to start the competition presentation without having won the bonus lottery. In this case, a defeat flag is set in step S7307, and the presentation game number counter is set to 0 in step S7306, terminating this processing.

If it is determined in step S7301 that the number of match games indicated by the match command is 0, this means that the additional lottery was won during the match presentation. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S7308, where the number of additional games indicated by the match command is added to the value of the game number counter for notification. In the following step S7309, it is determined whether or not the defeat flag has been set. If the defeat flag has been set, the defeat flag is cleared in step S7310, and the win flag is set in step S7311, and this processing ends. If the win flag has been set instead of the defeat flag, this processing ends as is.

Figure 103 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in notification mode.

In step S7401, it is determined whether the win flag is set. If the win flag is not set, it is determined in step S7402 whether the defeat flag is set. If the win flag or defeat flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7403, where the showdown effect processing described above is performed. Note that if the win effect is started in the showdown effect processing (step S6605, see FIG. 95), after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the value stored in the notification game number counter, i.e., the number of added games, is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the showdown effect processing is performed, or if it is determined in step S7402 that the defeat flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S7404, where it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the process ends. If the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S7405, where the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display the operation sequence that can result in a bell win, and the process ends. At this time, if a showdown effect is being performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, both the showdown effect and the operation sequence that can result in a bell win will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

Some recent slot machines notify players of whether they have won an additional lottery through a series of consecutive effects that are performed across multiple games. While this configuration allows players to anticipate winning the additional lottery across multiple games, there is a concern that the series of effects cannot be performed in situations where the number of games required to perform the series of effects cannot be secured, which could lead to monotony in gameplay.

In view of this, the slot machine 10 is configured to derive the number of games missing when it is decided to execute a showdown effect in the notification mode. If the number of games missing is one or more, the number of games missing is added to the value of the transition game number counter, i.e., the number of games missing is added to the number of games remaining in the notification mode. This configuration makes it possible to configure the notification mode not to end until the showdown effect ends, making it possible to execute the showdown effect even when the number of games remaining in the notification mode is low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous even when the number of games remaining in the notification mode is low, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Here, in a configuration that allows a showdown effect to be executed when there are only a few games remaining in the notification mode, it is possible that the player will be very disappointed if the notification mode ends with the end of a defeat showdown effect, for example. This is because some players may wish the notification mode had ended without the showdown effect if they had not won the additional lottery, or they may think that they lost out because they were hoping to win the additional lottery. However, in a configuration that adds the number of games in shortfall to the number of games remaining in the notification mode, the number of games that can be played in the notification mode increases by the number of games in shortfall, even if the player has not won the additional lottery. This makes it possible to alleviate the player's disappointment.

In addition, by adding the number of games in short supply to the number of games remaining in the notification mode, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration related to the showdown effects while increasing the enjoyment of the game. For example, it is possible to configure the game so that the showdown effects are not executed when the number of games remaining in the notification mode falls below the maximum set number of showdown games (hereinafter referred to as the "maximum number of showdown games"). However, with such a configuration, there is a concern that gameplay may become monotonous after the number of remaining games falls below the maximum number of showdown games, despite the need for processing to check the number of remaining games. To address this concern, it is also possible to configure the game so that other auxiliary effects that are completed in one game are executed after the number of remaining games falls below the maximum number of showdown games. However, with such a configuration, it becomes necessary to store these other auxiliary effects in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity, but also creates the problem of the effects that can be executed being restricted by the number of games remaining. On the other hand, a configuration that adds the number of games in short supply to the number of games remaining in the notification mode can effectively address each of the above concerns.

In the second effect determination process, which is performed when the additional lottery is won, if it is decided to perform a showdown effect, the number of games needed is calculated, and then the number of additional games is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a situation where part of the number of additional games is consumed during the showdown effect.

If the number of games missing is 0 or less, the value of the transition game counter is not changed, meaning the number of games remaining in the notification mode does not change. This configuration makes it possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase as the showdown effect is executed to situations where the number of remaining games is low, i.e., when the end of the notification mode is imminent. As a result, it is possible to provide new gameplay features when the end of the notification mode is near, and to increase interest in the game. The fewer the number of games remaining at the start of the showdown effect, the greater the increase in the number of remaining games as the showdown effect is executed, making it possible to play while building anticipation for the start of the showdown effect itself.

If the match effect lottery is won, the number of match games is set to a value between 3 and 5, regardless of whether the additional lottery is won. This configuration makes it possible to increase interest in the game when the end of the notification mode is approaching. For example, if the match effect is started when the number of remaining games in the notification mode is 4, if the number of match games acquired is 5, the number of remaining games in the notification mode will increase by 1, but if the number of match games acquired is 4 or 3, the number of remaining games in the notification mode will not change. Therefore, when the match effect is started, it is possible to encourage the player to play not only because they have won the additional lottery, but also because they are excited that the match effect will continue for a long time.

The configuration is such that the number of remaining games in the announcement mode is not checked when conducting the showdown effect lottery. As described above, by adding the number of games insufficient to the number of remaining games in the announcement mode, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the effect without being restricted by the number of remaining games in the announcement mode. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration related to the showdown effect while increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the showdown effect lottery is won in the notification mode, the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is set, the showdown effect lottery and the showdown game number lottery are not held. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the number of games for which the showdown effect is executed from being changed midway. As a result, even if the number of games insufficient is added to the number of games remaining in the notification mode, it is possible to avoid an event where the notification mode does not end as a result of the number of games for which the showdown effect is executed being changed midway.

If an additional lottery is won during a defeat showdown effect, the effect switches to a victory showdown effect without changing the length of the showdown effect. This configuration simplifies the processing while preventing the showdown effect from becoming unnecessarily long.

If an additional lottery is won during the victory showdown effect, the number of additional games will be announced all at once without changing the length of the showdown effect. This configuration simplifies the processing while preventing the showdown effect from becoming unnecessarily long.

As described above, when a showdown effect is started in notification mode, the length of the showdown effect is not changed during the showdown effect, thereby preventing the purpose of the showdown effect, which is to notify whether or not a bonus lottery result has been won, from being undermined. In this slot machine 10, which adds the number of games insufficient to the number of games remaining in notification mode, if the length of the showdown effect could be changed during the showdown effect, there is a possibility that the player's interest will be focused on the continuation of the showdown effect rather than the result of the bonus lottery.

In the notification mode, the main control device 101 is configured to decide whether or not to execute the showdown effect, whether or not the additional lottery is won. This configuration makes it possible to execute the showdown effect even when there are only a few games left in the notification mode, and prevents gameplay from becoming monotonous as the notification mode nears its end. For example, if the display control device 81 were configured to decide whether or not to execute the showdown effect, when there are only a few games left in the notification mode, it would not be possible to decide to execute the showdown effect unless the additional lottery is won.

In chance mode, the display control device 81 is configured to decide whether to execute a showdown effect when the transition lottery is not won. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the amount of processing programs pre-stored in the main control device 101, thereby preventing an increase in storage capacity. That is, in notification mode, if the additional lottery is not won, the notification mode may end depending on the number of games remaining in the notification mode. On the other hand, in chance mode, if the transition lottery is not won, the chance mode will continue. Therefore, even if the display control device 81 is configured to decide whether to execute a showdown effect, there is no possibility that the processing configuration for determining whether to execute a showdown effect will become complicated or that restrictions will be placed on the effects that can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing programs pre-stored in the main control device 101, preventing an increase in storage capacity.

When the transition lottery is won in chance mode, the main control unit 101 is configured to set the value obtained in the match game number lottery to the transition game number counter and send a match command to the display control unit 81. The display control unit 81 is then configured to control the execution of the match presentation for the number of games indicated by the match command, and the main control unit 101 is configured to transition to notification mode when three coins have been played corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player of the transition from chance mode to notification mode using the match presentation before actually transitioning to the game mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In chance mode, if the transition lottery is won during a defeat showdown presentation, the defeat showdown presentation ends midway and the victory showdown presentation starts from the beginning, i.e., the number of games to be played during the showdown presentation is changed midway. With this configuration, even if the display control device 81 decides to execute a showdown presentation, it is possible to execute a victory showdown presentation to notify the player that the mode will be changed to the notification mode. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the showdown presentation is restarted from the beginning during the showdown presentation, the transition to the notification mode is confirmed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

(Eighth embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, if the push order bell is won in notification mode, the operation sequence that will result in the bell winning is always notified, but the operation sequence may also be notified with a predetermined probability. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 104 shows the transition of game zones.

In this embodiment, the notification modes are notification mode A and notification mode B, and when the chance mode ends, the system transitions to notification mode A.

Announcement Mode A ends when the player wins the promotion lottery to move to Notification Mode B, or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in Notification Mode. When Notification Mode A ends, if the end was based on winning the promotion lottery, the game will transition to Notification Mode B, or if the end was based on the number of plays, the advantageous zone will also end and the game will transition to the normal zone. In Notification Mode A, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 50% probability will be announced. Therefore, in Notification Mode A, if three coins are played, an increase of approximately 1.3 medals can be expected per game.

Announcement Mode B ends when a predetermined number of plays have been played in this mode. When Announcement Mode B ends, the advantageous zone also ends and the game transitions to the normal zone. In Announcement Mode B, if you win the push order bell, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability is announced. Therefore, in Announcement Mode B, if you play with three coins, you can expect to gain approximately 3.5 coins per game.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S80101, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed.

In step S80102, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process was performed in the termination determination process of step S80101, and after sending a zone command in step S80112, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S80103 to determine whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, add 1 to the value of the mode game number counter in step S80104, and perform navigation counter update processing in step S80105.

In the navigation counter update process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 106, in step S80201, 1 is added to the value of the navigation counter stored in the section information storage area 106d. In step S80202, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is the chance mode, the process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game section processing, in step S80106, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode has been won, so in step S80107 the transition flag is cleared, and in step S80109 the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In step S80110, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S80111, the mode game number counter is set to 0. Then, in step S80112, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S80106 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S80108, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S80112, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, the process proceeds to step S80109, and the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In step S80110, the transition game count counter is set to 100, and in step S80111, the mode game count counter is set to 0. Thereafter, an interval command is sent in step S80112, and the process ends.

If step S80103 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S80112 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, Chance Mode transitions to Notification Mode A if the transition lottery is won or if 700 three-coin plays have been performed in Chance Mode.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S80301, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a two-coin game and not a three-coin game, this process ends as is. If it is a three-coin game, proceed to step S80302 to determine whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has been won, proceed to step S80303 to determine whether the current game mode is notification mode A. If it is notification mode A, proceed to step S80304 to determine whether the value of the mode game number counter is less than 51. If the value of the mode game number counter is less than 51, that is, if a rare role has been won in the first 50 games in notification mode A, proceed to step S80305 to conduct a promotion lottery to determine whether to promote to notification mode B. In the promotion lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been successful. In the promotion lottery, for example, in setting 3, if the watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1/2 chance of winning, and if the cherry is won, there is approximately a 1/3 chance of winning. In step S80306, it is determined whether the promotion lottery has been won, and if the promotion lottery has not been won, this processing ends. If the promotion lottery has been won, in step S80307 the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag B, and this processing ends.

If step S80303 determines that the current mode is not notification mode A but notification mode B, or if step S80304 determines that the value of the mode game count counter is 51 or greater, proceed to step S80308, where an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game count counter. In the additional lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the winning combination is a win. Incidentally, in the additional lottery, for example, in a setting of 3, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a one-in-five chance of winning one of 30, 50, 100, or 300 additional games, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a one-in-three chance of winning one of 10, 20, 30, or 50 additional games. In step S80309, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the additional lottery flag is set in step S80310, and an additional lottery command is sent in step S80311. In step S80312, the value corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery is added to the value of the transition game count counter. Then, this process ends. If the bonus lottery is not won, this process ends without setting the bonus flag.

If it is determined in step S80302 that a rare combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S80313, where it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the process ends as is. If the push order bell has been won, the process ends after performing a navigation determination process in step S80314 to determine whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win.

In the navigation determination process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 108, step S80401 determines whether the current game mode is notification mode B. If it is notification mode A and not notification mode B, a navigation lottery is performed in step S80402. In the navigation lottery, a determination is made as to whether navigation is to be performed based on the winning flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. In step S80403, a determination is made as to whether the navigation lottery has been won. If the navigation lottery has been won, the navigation flag is set in step S80405 and this processing is terminated. Note that the probability of winning the navigation lottery is 1 in 50. If the navigation lottery has not been won, proceed to step S80404 and determine whether the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7. If the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7, the navigation flag is set in step S80405 and this processing is terminated. If the value of the navigation counter is 7 or less, this processing is terminated without setting the navigation flag. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S80401 that the current game mode is notification mode B, the navigation flag is set in step S80405 without performing a navigation lottery, and this processing ends.

Here, the main control unit 101 performs processing to display on the instruction monitor the operation sequence that can result in a bell win during the rotation start processing (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display processing (see FIG. 19). In the first embodiment, the instruction monitor was displayed after determining whether or not the push order bell was won (S603, S802). However, in this embodiment, the instruction monitor is displayed after determining whether or not the navigation flag is set, rather than whether or not the push order bell was won. If the navigation flag is set, the instruction monitor is displayed. In addition, the main control unit 101 sends a lottery result command to the display control unit 81 that includes information indicating whether or not the navigation flag is set. When the display control unit 81 receives a lottery result command that includes information indicating that the navigation flag has been set, the display control unit 81 performs processing to display on the auxiliary display unit 65 the operation sequence that can result in a bell win.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S80501, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S80502, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S80501, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S80509.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, the mode game number counter is incremented by 1 in step S80503, and the navigation counter is updated in step S80504.

In the navigation counter update process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 106, in step S80201, 1 is added to the value of the navigation counter stored in the section information storage area 106d. In step S80202, it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode, and if the current game mode is notification mode, it is determined in step S80203 whether the navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is not set, this process is terminated. If the navigation flag is set, the navigation flag is cleared in step S80204, and the value of the navigation counter is set to 0 in step S80205, and this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game interval processing, in step S80505, it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, an interval command is sent in step S80509, and then this processing is terminated.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous zone end processing shown in steps S80506 to S80508 is performed, and an zone command is sent in step S80509, terminating this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S80506, and the zone display 66 is turned OFF in step S80507. In step S80508, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game number counter value, etc.).

Here, we will explain the gameplay of the notification mode in this embodiment.

When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, notification mode A begins. In notification mode A, if the push order bell is won, there is a 50% chance that the navigation lottery will be won and the operation sequence will be announced. Also, in notification mode A, even if the navigation lottery is not won, the operation sequence will be announced if the navigation counter value is 8 or greater (step S80404, see Figure 108). In notification mode, the navigation counter value is updated by 1 each time a game is played, and is changed to 0 if the navigation flag is set, i.e., when the operation sequence is announced (see Figure 106). Therefore, in notification mode A, if the push order bell is won, there is a higher chance of the operation sequence being announced. In addition, the navigation counter value is updated not only in notification mode but also in chance mode (see Figure 105). Therefore, in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode, the probability of the operation sequence being announced is higher than in the second or subsequent push order bell winning games. If you switch to notification mode after playing three coins seven or more times in chance mode, the operation order will always be announced even if you win the push order bell in the first game of notification mode. The probability of winning the lottery to switch to notification mode is approximately 1 in 250, even with setting 6, which has the highest winning probability. Therefore, in the first game in which you win the push order bell after switching to notification mode, the chances are higher if the navigation counter value is 8 or higher than if the navigation counter value is 7 or lower.

If a rare combination is won between the time the game transitions to notification mode and the 50th game, a promotion lottery is held. If the promotion lottery is won, the game transitions to notification mode B, where the operation order is always announced when the push order bell is won. If notification mode B is entered, notification mode B continues until the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the promotion lottery is not won between the time the game transitions to notification mode and the 50th game, notification mode A continues until the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If a rare combination is won in notification mode B, or if a rare combination is won after the 51st game in notification mode A, an additional lottery is held, and if the additional lottery is won, the value of the transition game count counter increases. Therefore, in the notification mode of this embodiment, the number of medals a player can earn by the end of notification mode will vary greatly depending on whether or not the promotion lottery is won, and further, the timing of the promotion lottery win.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

Some recent slot machines have a game mode that notifies the player of the correct operation order when the push order bell is selected with a probability of less than 100%, such as 50%. In such a configuration, even if the player has entered the game mode, they may still run out of medals in that game mode, which can significantly discourage the player from playing.

In response to this, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the operation order is announced more frequently than not in the first push order bell winning game after switching to notification mode. By adopting this configuration, even if the operation order is not announced when the push order bell is won in notification mode, it is possible to reduce the chances of a player running out of medals in that notification mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The first push order bell winning game after switching to notification mode is configured to have a higher probability of the operation order being announced than the second or subsequent push order bell winning games. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of games required from switching to notification mode until the operation order is first announced.

If the push order bell is won under notification mode A, the operation sequence is announced if the navigation lottery is won. This configuration makes it possible to randomize the interval at which the operation sequence is announced when the push order bell is won. On the other hand, in a configuration where whether or not the operation sequence is announced is determined by lottery, a situation may occur where the operation sequence is not announced at all due to bias in the lottery results. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, the operation sequence is announced not only when the navigation lottery is won, but also when the navigation counter value is 8 or greater. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the interval at which the operation sequence is announced from becoming unnecessarily wide. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of playing.

In notification mode, the navigation counter value is updated regardless of whether two-coin play or three-coin play is being performed. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player of the operation order for the next push order bell winning game, not only if the player repeatedly fails the navigation lottery, but also if the player does not win the push order bell itself, thereby reducing the chances of the player running out of medals in notification mode. For example, it is possible to configure the navigation counter value to be updated when the push order bell is won, but with this configuration, if a player continues to play games in which they do not win the push order bell itself, there is a high chance that the player will run out of medals in notification mode.

When the push order bell is selected in notification mode A, the operation sequence is notified if the navigation counter value is greater than 7. This configuration reduces the chances of the player running out of medals in notification mode while preventing the expected medal payout per game in notification mode A from becoming unnecessarily large. In other words, if the navigation counter is set to a value of 6 or less when determining whether to notify the operation sequence, the smaller the setting, the higher the navigation rate in notification mode A. This means that the difference between notification mode A and notification mode B becomes smaller, which can lead to monotony in gameplay. Conversely, if the navigation counter is set to a value of 8 or more when determining whether to notify the operation sequence, the difference between notification mode A and notification mode B becomes greater, but this leads to an increased chance of the player running out of medals in notification mode. Note that the navigation counter setting of "7" in this embodiment is based on simulation results using the winning probability of the winning combination and the winning probability of the navigation lottery.

When an operation sequence is notified in notification mode, the navigation counter value is reset to 0, i.e., the navigation counter is initialized. This configuration prevents the navigation counter from becoming too large, while also preventing the interval between operation sequence notifications from becoming unnecessarily long with a relatively simple processing configuration. If the navigation counter were not initialized when an operation sequence was notified in notification mode, it would be necessary to ensure that the navigation counter had sufficient capacity to count up to 1,500, the upper limit of the advantageous zone. Furthermore, the navigation counter value when the operation sequence is notified is stored separately, and in step S80404 of the navigation determination process, it is necessary to determine whether the difference between the current navigation counter value and the navigation counter value when the operation sequence was notified is 8 or greater.

The navigation counter value is updated in chance mode as well as notification mode. This configuration makes it possible to suppress the increase in the amount of data pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101, while also making it possible to configure the operation order to be notified more frequently than not in the first push order bell winning game after switching to notification mode.

It is certainly possible to configure the system to set the first flag when transitioning to notification mode A, and if the push order bell is won while the first flag is set, to notify the player of the operation sequence and clear the first flag. Even with this configuration, it is possible to configure the system to notify the player of the operation sequence more frequently than not in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode. However, in this configuration, whether or not the operation sequence is announced in the second or subsequent push order bell winning games depends on the results of the navigation lottery. Therefore, if a player continues to lose the navigation lottery, there is a possibility that the player's medals will run out in notification mode. To address this concern, a navigation counter that is updated only in notification mode can be provided, and the operation sequence can be notified even if the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7. However, this configuration would require the processing configuration related to the first flag and the processing configuration related to the navigation counter to be stored in advance in ROM 105 of the main control unit 101, which would create a new problem: increased data volume. On the other hand, if the navigation counter value is configured to be updated in both the notification mode and the chance mode, as in this embodiment, the processing configuration related to the first flag is unnecessary, and the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

Furthermore, it is generally believed that the soundness of play is ensured when the payout rate after 1,600 plays is 1.5 or less. Because the upper limit for the advantageous zone is 1,500 plays, for example, if the advantageous zone ends when it reaches its upper limit and the player wins the transition lottery in the first game of the next advantageous zone, the payout rate after 1,600 plays may exceed 1.5, potentially jeopardizing the soundness of play. Here, if the initial flag is set, the operation sequence will be announced in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to the notification mode, regardless of the number of games in the chance mode when the transition lottery is won. Therefore, the payout rate after 1,600 plays may exceed 1.5, potentially jeopardizing the soundness of play. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated in chance mode in addition to notification mode, if the sum of the number of games played in chance mode and the number of games played from the transition to notification mode until the first press order bell win is 7 or less, the probability of announcing the operation order is 50%. Therefore, a configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated in chance mode in addition to notification mode can increase the likelihood of ensuring the soundness of the game compared to a configuration in which the first flag is set.

In chance mode, the navigation counter value is updated when three coins are played. This configuration increases the frequency with which the navigation counter value is greater than 7 in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode. For example, it is possible to configure the navigation counter value to be updated when a push order bell is won in chance mode. However, with this configuration, it is possible, for example, to win the lottery to transition to notification mode before winning the push order bell, which reduces the frequency with which the navigation counter value is greater than 7 in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode. On the other hand, with a configuration that updates the navigation counter value when three coins are played, even if the lottery to transition to notification mode is won in the first game in chance mode, the navigation counter value can be updated in that game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the navigation counter value is greater than 7 in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode.

If a rare combination is won within the first 50 games after switching to notification mode, a promotion lottery will be held, and if the promotion lottery is won, the system will transition to notification mode B, where the operation order is always announced when the push order bell is won. This configuration allows players to play in notification mode A while anticipating a transition to notification mode B, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

When transitioning from Chance Mode to Notification Mode, the number of games that can be played in Notification Mode is set to 100. The period from transitioning to Notification Mode until the 50th game is set as the period during which a transition to Notification Mode B can occur. This configuration makes it possible to significantly change the number of medals a player can win by the end of Notification Mode depending on the timing of the transition to Notification Mode B, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Ninth embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing configuration used when outputting sound effects and the like from the speaker 64. This configuration will be described in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment, so only the distinctive features will be described below.

In the first embodiment described above, the display control device 81 was configured to drive and control the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65. In this embodiment, however, the performance control device 201 and LCD control device 251 drive and control the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65.

As shown in the block diagram of Figure 110, the main control device 101 is connected to the performance control device 201, which is connected to the liquid crystal control device 251. The performance control device 201 is equipped with a board that integrates a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and determines the performance content to be executed based on commands such as lottery result commands received from the main control device 101, and sends commands corresponding to the determination results to the liquid crystal control device 251. The liquid crystal control device 251 is equipped with a board that integrates a CPU 252, VDP 253, image ROM 255, etc. The CPU 252 sends internal commands to the VDP 253 to execute performances corresponding to commands input from the performance control device 201. The VDP 253 reads image data and sound data from the image ROM 255 in response to the internal commands input from the CPU 252, and drives and controls the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the LCD control device 251 has 32 channels that allow it to output multiple different sounds simultaneously. CH0 to CH3 are channels responsible for operation sounds. More specifically, CH0 and CH1 output the bet sound when medals are bet, the start sound when the start lever 41 is operated to generate a start command, and the stop sound when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to generate a stop command. CH2 and CH3 output the wait sound when a wait occurs, the winning sound when a win is achieved, and the payout sound when medals are paid out. CH4 to CH7 are channels responsible for background music and jingles. CH4 and CH5 output background music for auxiliary effects such as continuous effects, regular background music for game rounds in which auxiliary effects are not executed, and customer waiting background music for customer waiting effects that are executed when no games are played for a predetermined period of time. CH6 and CH7 output jingles that correspond to the background music output from CH4 and CH5. CH8 to CH13 are channels responsible for sound effects such as warning sounds. CH26 is a channel responsible for push order notification sound effects. When announcing the operation order in a push order bell winning game, CH26 outputs a sound effect before the operation order is announced. CH27 is a channel responsible for push order notification audio. When announcing the operation order in a push order bell winning game, CH27 outputs audio indicating which stop switch 42-44 to operate, such as "left." CH28 and CH29 are channels responsible for general-purpose audio other than push order notification audio. CH30 is a mono backup channel, and CH31 is a channel responsible for error sounds when an abnormality occurs and inspection sounds during inspection.

The RAM 254 of the VDP 253 has seven layers. Each layer is a storage area for storing the volume (volume value) when audio data is output, with each layer storing a volume appropriate for its intended purpose. For example, in the CH4 layer responsible for background music, as shown in FIG. 111(b), layer 0 stores the volume when an error is reported, layer 1 stores the volume when the slot machine 10 is initialized, and layer 2 stores the volume in power-saving mode. Power-saving mode is a mode entered when no play has been performed for a predetermined period of time, more specifically, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting display. In power-saving mode, the brightness of the auxiliary display unit 65 is reduced and the output volume from the speaker 64 is reduced. Returning to the explanation of layers, layer 3 of the CH4 layer stores the volume normally used, and layer 4 stores the volume when the background music is muted. The fifth layer is an area that stores the volume when multiple effects are executed simultaneously, and the sixth layer is an area that stores the volume when the winning sound is output, i.e., the BGM volume when both the BGM and the winning sound are output.

This slot machine 10 is characterized by a change in the volume of the background music when a rare combination is achieved. Therefore, we will first specifically explain the relationship between the background music and the winning sound when a rare combination is achieved, using the example of a watermelon win, which is one of the rare combinations.

In Figure 112(a), before the watermelon win is achieved, i.e., when at least one reel 32L, 32M, or 32R is spinning, the background music is output at 0.0 dB. 0.0 dB is the maximum volume corresponding to the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the amusement facility manager, etc. If the watermelon win is achieved when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the watermelon win sound begins to be output at 0.0 dB at that timing, and the background music output is changed from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. -6.0 dB is approximately half the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the amusement facility manager, etc. The watermelon win sound is output until 2000 msec has elapsed after the watermelon win is achieved, after which it is muted. While the watermelon winning sound is being output, the background music will continue to be output at -6.0 dB. When the output of the watermelon winning sound has finished, the background music output will change from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over the course of 800 msec. After 2800 msec has passed since the watermelon winning sound was achieved, the background music will be output at 0.0 dB.

If a command to start the next game is issued while the BGM output is being changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, the BGM output will be changed to 0.0 dB at the time the start command is issued, as shown in Figure 112 (b). If a start command is issued within 2000 msec of a watermelon winning, i.e., if a start command is issued while the watermelon winning sound is being output, the output of the watermelon winning sound will cease and become silent at that time, and the BGM output will be changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB.

Figure 112(c) shows the relationship between the background music and the winning sound when a watermelon win is achieved in a game in which a muted sound effect is used. The muted sound effect is an effect that can be used when a lottery to transition to the notification mode or an additional lottery is won, and is an effect in which the background music is muted at the timing of when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to spin, when the first stop command is issued, or when the second stop command is issued. If the muted sound effect is initiated before a watermelon win is achieved, the background music output is changed from 0.0 dB to muted. Note that in the muted state, background music data is still being output. If a watermelon win is achieved when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the watermelon win sound begins to be output at 0.0 dB at that timing. At this time, the background music remains muted. The background music output is changed from muted to 0.0 dB when the command to start the next game is issued. Furthermore, if a start command is issued while the watermelon winning sound is being output, the watermelon winning sound will cease outputting at that timing and the background music output will be changed from muted to 0.0 dB.

The following describes in detail the processing performed by the performance control device 201 and the LCD control device 251 when controlling the volume of the above-mentioned background music.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the performance control processing performed by the performance control device 201.

In step S90101, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main control device 101. If a lottery result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S90102, where a performance content determination process is performed. In the performance content determination process, whether or not to execute an auxiliary performance, and the specific performance content of the auxiliary performance if an auxiliary performance is to be executed, are determined based on the result of the role selection, the current game status including the game mode, and a random number obtained by the performance control device 201. If the performance content determination process has been performed, the process proceeds to step S90103, where a performance content command indicating the processing result of the performance content determination process is sent to the LCD control device 251. This process then terminates.

If it is determined in step S90101 that a lottery result command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S90104, where it is determined whether a winning result command has been received from the main control unit 101. If a winning result command has been received, it is determined in step S90105 whether any winning has occurred. If no winning has occurred, the process ends as is. If any winning has occurred, the process ends in step S90106, where a winning sound command indicating a winning combination is sent to the LCD control unit 251, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S90104 that a winning result command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S90107, where it is determined whether a start command has been received from the main control device 101. A start command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when a start command to start the game is issued. If a start command has not been received, the process ends immediately; if a start command has been received, the process ends in step S90108, where a start command indicating that a start command has been issued is sent to the LCD control device 251, and the process ends.

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the LCD control process performed by the CPU 252 of the LCD control device 251.

In step S90201, performance instruction processing is performed. In the performance instruction processing, when a performance content command is received from the performance control device 201, an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to execute a performance corresponding to the performance content command. For example, when a performance content command indicating the execution of a muted performance is received, an internal command is sent instructing the VDP 253 to mute the BGM at the timing when the BGM is to be muted. The internal command sent when issuing a sound-related instruction includes information indicating the type of sound, such as BGM for performance, and information indicating the channel to be controlled.

In step S90202, winning sound instruction processing is performed.

In the winning sound instruction processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 115, in step S90301, it is determined whether a winning sound command has been received from the presentation control device 201. If a winning sound command has been received, in step S90302 it is determined whether a watermelon winning has occurred. If a watermelon winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S90303, where an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to output the watermelon winning sound. The internal command sent at this timing includes information indicating the watermelon winning sound and information indicating the channel on which the watermelon winning sound will be output. If it is determined in step S90302 that a watermelon winning has not occurred, it is determined in step S90306 whether a cherry winning has occurred. In this slot machine 10, watermelon and cherry are set as rare roles. If a cherry winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S90307, where an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to output the cherry winning sound. The internal command sent at this timing includes information indicating the cherry winning sound and information indicating the channel on which the cherry winning sound will be output.

If an internal command to output a watermelon winning sound or a cherry winning sound is sent, a timer is set in step S90304, a fade time is set in step S90305, and this processing ends. In steps S90304 and S90305, if an internal command to output a watermelon winning sound is sent (hereinafter also referred to as a "watermelon winning sound output instruction"), the timer is set to 2000 msec and the fade time is set to 800 msec. Furthermore, if an internal command to output a cherry winning sound is sent (hereinafter also referred to as a "cherry winning sound output instruction"), the timer is set to 1000 msec and the fade time is set to 500 msec in steps S90304 and S90305.

If it is determined in step S90306 that a cherry win has not been achieved, this means that a win other than a rare combination has been achieved, so the process proceeds to step S90308, where an internal command is sent to the VDP253 to output a general win sound. The internal command sent at this time includes information indicating the general win sound and information indicating the channel on which the general win sound will be output. If an internal command to output the general win sound has been sent (hereinafter also referred to as a "general win sound output instruction"), this process is terminated. In other words, if a general win sound output instruction is given, the timer and fade time are not set.

If it is determined in step S90301 that a winning sound command has not been received from the performance control device 201, the process proceeds to step S90309, where it is determined whether or not a timer has been set. As described above, if the timer has been set, this means that an instruction to output a watermelon winning sound or an instruction to output a cherry winning sound has been issued. In such a case, in step S90310 it is determined whether or not the time set in the timer has elapsed. If not, the process terminates. Although detailed explanations are omitted, if a timer has been set in step S90304, the timer is decremented in the timer interrupt process periodically executed by the LCD control device 251. In step S90310, it is determined that the set time has elapsed if the timer reaches 0. If the time set in the timer has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S90311, where an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to perform fade-in control, which gradually increases the volume of the background music. The internal command sent at this timing includes information indicating the channel for which fade-in control is to be performed. If an internal command to perform fade-in control is sent (hereinafter referred to as a "fade-in instruction"), this process will end immediately.

If it is determined in step S90309 that the timer has not been set, i.e., that the timer is at 0, the process proceeds to step S90312, where it is determined whether a fade time has been set. If a fade time has not been set, the process ends as is; if a fade time has been set, a fade-in instruction is issued in step S90313, and then the process ends. A detailed explanation will be omitted, but if a fade time has been set in step S90305, the fade time is subtracted after the timer reaches 0 in the timer interrupt process executed periodically by the liquid crystal control device 251. In step S90312, if the fade time is not 0, it is determined that a fade time has been set; if the fade time is 0, it is determined that a fade time has not been set.

By performing the winning sound instruction process, as shown in FIG. 116, when a watermelon win is achieved, the watermelon winning sound is output for 2000 msec in response to the watermelon winning sound output instruction. After 2000 msec has passed, a fade-in instruction is issued for 800 msec, changing the BGM output from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over 800 msec. When a cherry win is achieved, the cherry winning sound is output for 1000 msec in response to the cherry winning sound output instruction. After 1000 msec has passed, a fade-in instruction is issued for 500 msec, changing the BGM output from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over 500 msec.

Returning to the explanation of the LCD control process, if the winning sound instruction process is performed in step S90202, the initialization instruction process is performed in step S90203, and the process returns to step S90201. In the initialization instruction process, if a start command is received from the performance control device 201, an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to reset the data stored in the RAM 254 of the VDP 253 (for example, the volume values stored in each layer). Also, in the initialization instruction process, a timer and fade time are set in the winning sound instruction process, and if a start command is received from the performance control device 201 when at least one of the timer and fade time is not 0, the timer and fade time are reset to 0.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the BGM output process performed by the VDP 253 of the LCD control device 251 when outputting BGM such as normal BGM. As mentioned above, the channels responsible for BGM output are CH4 and CH5. Therefore, BGM output process can be said to be a process performed when outputting sound from at least one of CH4 and CH5. However, for ease of understanding, the following will be explained using an example where BGM is output from CH4.

In step S90401, processing is performed to read BGM data from the image ROM 255. Note that the BGM data to be read is specified in the internal command sent by the CPU 252 of the LCD control device 251 during the performance instruction processing. In step S90402, volume value setting processing is performed to set a volume value for the layer.

In the volume value setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 118, step S90501 determines whether a mute command has been issued. Specifically, it determines whether an internal command instructing the BGM to be muted has been received from the CPU 252 of the LCD control device 251. If a mute command has been issued, proceed to step S90502, where a volume value of "0" is set for the fourth layer of the CH4 layer. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S90501 that a mute command has not been issued, proceed to step S90503, where it determines whether a rare combination winning sound output command has been issued, i.e., whether a watermelon winning sound output command or a cherry winning sound output command has been issued. If a rare combination winning sound output command has been issued, proceed to step S90504, where a volume value of "64" is set for the sixth layer of the CH4 layer. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S90503 that a rare combination winning sound output command has not been issued, proceed to step S90505, where it determines whether a fade-in command has been issued. If a fade-in command has been received, proceed to step S90506, where 1 is added to the volume value set for layer 6 of the CH4 layers. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S90505 that no fade-in command has been received, proceed to step S90507, where it is determined whether an initialization command has been received. If no initialization command has been received, the process ends as is; if an initialization command has been received, proceed to step S90508, where the volume value is set to the initial value of "128" for layers 0 to 6 of the CH4 layers. Then, the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the BGM output process, when the volume value setting process is complete, proceed to step S90403, where the volume values set for layers 0 to 6 of the CH4 layers are compared. In step S90404, the BGM data is output using the smallest volume value among the volume values set for layers 0 to 6 of the CH4 layers. This process then terminates.

Figure 119 shows the volume value of the CH4 layer when the volume value setting process is performed.

If an initialization command is issued, in step S90508, "128" is set for layers 0 to 6. Under these circumstances, since the volume values set for layers 0 to 6 are all the same "128," BGM is output from CH4 at a volume value of "128." When output at a volume value of "128," the volume becomes the maximum volume (0.0 dB) corresponding to the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the amusement facility manager, etc.

If an instruction to output the sound of a rare winning combination is given, in step S90504, "64" is set for the sixth layer. The volume values for layers 0 to 5 remain at "128." Under these circumstances, the volume value "64" set for the sixth layer is the minimum value, so background music is output from CH4 at a volume value of "64." When output at a volume value of "64," the volume is approximately half (-6.0 dB) of the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the amusement facility manager, etc.

If a fade-in command is issued, in step S90506, 1 is added to the volume value for the sixth layer. The volume values for layers 0 to 5 remain at "128." Under these circumstances, the volume value set for the sixth layer is the minimum, and background music is output from CH4 at the volume value for the sixth layer. The CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 periodically issues 64 fade-in commands until the fade time reaches 0. Therefore, when the watermelon winning sound is output, the volume value for the sixth layer periodically changes from "65" to "128" over the course of 800 msec, and the background music output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over the course of 800 msec. When the cherry winning sound is output, the volume value of the sixth layer will change periodically from "65" to "128" over a period of 500 msec, and the background music output will change from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over a period of 500 msec.

If a mute command is given, in step S90502, "0" is set to layer 4. The volume values for layers 0 to 3, 5, and 6 remain at "128." Under these circumstances, the volume value "0" set to layer 4 is the minimum value, so BGM is output from CH4 at a volume value of "0." When output at a volume value of "0," BGM data is output, but the sound is muted, meaning no sound can be heard.

If a command to mute is issued followed by a command to output the sound of a rare winning combination, layer 4 is set to "0" when the command to mute is issued, and layer 6 is set to "64" when the command to output the sound of a rare winning combination is issued. The volume values of layers 0 to 3 and layer 5 remain at "128". In such a situation, the volume value "0" set for layer 4 is the minimum value, so background music is output from CH4 at a volume value of "0". In other words, if a command to mute is issued, even if a command to output the sound of a rare winning combination is issued afterwards, the process of outputting background music from CH4 at a volume value of "64" will not be performed.

Although not shown in the diagram, if a fade-in command is issued after a mute command, the volume value set for the fourth layer will be the minimum value of "0", just as it would be if a command to output the sound of a rare winning combination was issued after a mute command, and BGM will be output from CH4 at a volume value of "0". In other words, if a mute command is issued, the BGM will not be faded in even if a fade-in command is issued afterwards. The BGM output will return to 0.0 dB when an initialization command is issued, i.e., when a start command to start the next game is issued.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When a rare winning combination is achieved, the rare winning combination sound is output at 0.0 dB, and if background music is being output at 0.0 dB, the volume of the background music is controlled to be lowered to -6.0 dB. This configuration makes it possible to switch the sound output at 0.0 dB from background music to the rare winning combination sound, and also makes the rare winning combination sound easier to hear than background music. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that a player will miss the rare winning combination sound, and to increase the player's interest in the game.

When a rare winning combination is achieved, a rare winning sound is output. This configuration makes it possible to heighten the sense of accomplishment of achieving a rare winning combination and the anticipation of receiving a bonus based on the rare winning combination by outputting the rare winning sound, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Whether or not a rare winning combination is achieved depends not only on whether the corresponding rare combination is won, but also on whether or not the player operates the stop switches 42-44 in an attempt to hit the winning symbol. When a rare winning combination is achieved, it is confirmed that a lottery to transition to notification mode and a lottery for additional winnings have been held.

When the output of the rare winning sound has finished, the background music volume is controlled to fade in to 0.0 dB. This configuration allows players to immerse themselves in the lingering sound of the rare winning sound, compared to a configuration in which the background music volume is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB when the output of the rare winning sound has finished. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

When a watermelon win is achieved, the rare combination winning sound is output for a longer period of time than when a cherry win is achieved. In chance mode, when a watermelon wins, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to notification mode is higher than when a cherry wins. Also, in notification mode, when a watermelon wins, the expected number of additional games is higher than when a cherry wins. Therefore, by configuring the rare combination winning sound to be output for a longer period of time when a watermelon wins than when a cherry wins, it is possible to match the expectation of receiving benefits such as transitioning to notification mode or additional games with the output time of the rare combination winning sound, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The time it takes for the background music volume to return to 0.0 dB after the rare combination winning sound has finished being output is different for a watermelon win and a cherry win. This configuration allows the player to enjoy the sound for different periods of time depending on whether the watermelon win sound is output or the cherry win sound, thereby increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, by configuring the time it takes for the background music volume to return to 0.0 dB longer for a watermelon win, which carries high expectations for a bonus such as transitioning to notification mode or an additional game, than for a cherry win, it is possible to correlate the degree of expectation for a bonus with the time it takes for the background music volume to return to 0.0 dB, thereby increasing interest in the game.

If a start command is issued during fade-in control, the BGM volume is immediately returned to 0.0 dB. This configuration makes it possible to output BGM at 0.0 dB in the next game when a start command to start the next game is issued.

RAM 254 of VDP 253 has seven layers for CH4, which is responsible for background music. The CH4 layers are configured to store volume levels appropriate for each purpose. With this configuration, for example, if an opportunity arises to change the volume output from CH4, it is possible to store information related to the volume before the change and information related to the volume after the change in different layers. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4 and prevent increases in storage capacity.

When a mute command is given to the CH4 layer, the volume value of the fourth layer is changed to 0, and when a command is given to output the sound of a rare winning combination, the volume value of the sixth layer is changed to 64. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether a mute effect is being executed, whether a rare winning combination sound is being output, etc., through the volume values of the fourth and sixth layers. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4 and prevent increases in storage capacity.

When BGM is output, the volume values of each layer are compared and the minimum volume value is used. This configuration eliminates the need to check the volume being output from CH4, simplifying the processing configuration. Furthermore, by outputting BGM from CH4 using the minimum volume value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in situations where the volume of CH4 needs to be kept muted, for example.

In other words, in conventional slot machines that have only one volume value storage area for CH4 in the VDP RAM, it is necessary to store a volume value that defines the volume actually output from CH4 in that volume value storage area, which makes the processing configuration related to sound output complicated.

As a specific example, consider the case where a rare winning combination is achieved while a mute effect is being executed, and an event similar to that of this embodiment occurs; that is, when a rare winning combination is achieved, the background music output remains muted rather than being set to -6.0 dB. To generate such an event, at least one of the effect control device, the CPU of the LCD control device, and the VDP must be configured to be able to determine whether a mute effect is being executed. For example, to configure the CPU of the LCD control device to be able to determine whether a mute effect is being executed, a process is required to set a mute flag indicating that a mute effect has started when a mute effect is initiated, and a storage area for storing the mute flag is required. Furthermore, in the winning sound instruction process, when a rare winning combination is achieved, it is necessary to determine whether a mute effect is being executed based on whether the mute flag is set, and to send different internal commands to the VDP depending on whether a mute effect is being executed or not. This is because if a mute effect is being executed, an internal command must be sent to set 0 to the volume value storage area for CH4, and if a mute effect is not being executed, an internal command must be sent to set 64 to the volume value storage area for CH4. Therefore, the winning sound instruction process requires a process to determine whether a mute effect is being executed, an internal command for when a mute effect is being executed, and an internal command for when a mute effect is not being executed.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which has a CH4 layer in the RAM 254 of the VDP 253, the above-mentioned components are unnecessary. That is, the VDP 254 of this slot machine 10 changes the volume value of the fourth layer to 0 when a mute instruction is received, and changes the volume value of the sixth layer to 64 when a rare winning sound output instruction is received. Because volume values can be stored in different layers depending on the instruction, the CPU 252 of the LCD control device 251 does not need internal commands for when a mute effect is being executed and when a mute effect is not being executed. Accordingly, the process of determining whether a mute effect is being executed in the winning sound instruction process is also unnecessary. Furthermore, because the process of determining whether a mute effect is being executed in the winning sound instruction process is unnecessary, the process of setting a mute flag indicating the start of a mute effect when the mute effect is started and the storage area for storing the mute flag are also unnecessary. Furthermore, because the volume values of each layer are compared and the smallest volume value is used when outputting background music, there is no need for the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 to send an internal command specifying which layer's volume value to use when outputting background music.

As a result of the above, by providing multiple layers in RAM 254 of VDP 253 for CH4, which is responsible for background music, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4.

(Tenth embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the ending effects that can be executed in notification mode. Therefore, this configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment, so only the distinctive features will be explained below.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met in the notification mode, an ending presentation is performed. In the first embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone were that 1,500 games had been played in the advantageous zone and that the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone had reached 2,400. However, in this embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are that 3,000 games had been played in the advantageous zone and that the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone had reached 2,400. In the ending presentation, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, and upper lamp 63 to play an ending movie.

As shown in Figure 120(a), the ending movie is composed of a story part and a music part. In the story part, a digest video that summarizes the story related to the main character of this slot machine 10 in 175 seconds is output over 200 seconds. In the music part, the opening song and video from when a work related to the main character of this slot machine 10 is broadcast is output for 40 seconds. Then, when the output of the story part has finished, the music part is output repeatedly until the notification mode and advantageous zone end.

The ROM of the display control device 81 stores data used to play story parts in seven files. That is, as shown in FIG. 120(b), data from the start of a story part up to 25 seconds is stored in the story part 1 file, data from 26 to 55 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 2 file, data from 56 to 65 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 3 file, data from 66 to 95 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 4 file, data from 96 to 125 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 5 file, data from 126 to 135 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 6 file, and data from 136 to 175 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 7 file. The story part 3 file is composed of 10 seconds of playback data from 56 to 65 seconds of the story part and 10 seconds of pause data. When story part 3 data is output, the story part from 56 seconds to 65 seconds is played, and then the same image (i.e. the image at 65 seconds into the story part) is displayed for 10 seconds along with the word "NEXT." The same is true for story part 6, which is made up of 10 seconds of playback data from 126 seconds to 135 seconds into the story part, and 15 seconds of pause data. When story part 6 data is output, the story part from 126 seconds to 135 seconds is played, and then the same image (i.e. the image at 135 seconds into the story part) is displayed for 15 seconds along with the word "NEXT." The data used to play the music part is stored as 40 seconds of data in a single file.

This section explains the processing performed by the display control device 81 when performing an ending performance.

Figure 121 is a flowchart showing the ED determination process performed by the display control device 81.

In step S100101, it is determined whether an ED start flag, which indicates that the ending presentation has begun, is set. If the ED start flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S100102, where it is determined whether an ED in progress flag, which indicates that the ending movie is currently being played, is set. If neither the ED start flag nor the ED in progress flag is set, the process proceeds to step S100103, where it is determined whether the completion condition has been met. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined whether the sum of the current difference in number of coins and the remaining payout number until the end of the notification mode is greater than 2400. If the sum of the current difference in number of coins and the remaining payout number until the end of the notification mode is 2400 or less, the remaining payout number until the end of the notification mode is divided by 3.5, which is the expected value of the increase in the number of medals per game, to derive the number of required games. It is then determined whether the required number of games is greater than the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone. If the sum of the current difference in coins and the remaining payout number until the end of the notification mode is greater than 2400, or if the number of required games is greater than the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, it is determined that the completion condition has been met. On the other hand, if the current game mode is not notification mode, or if the current game mode is notification mode but the sum of the current difference in coins and the remaining payout number until the end of the notification mode is 2400 or less and the number of required games is less than the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, it is determined that the completion condition has not been met.

If it is determined that the completion condition has been met, the process proceeds to step S100104, where the auxiliary display unit 65 and other devices are driven and controlled to notify the player of the transition to the ending. Specifically, the process displays on the auxiliary display unit 65 that the ending movie will begin from the next game. Then, in step S100105, the ending start flag is set, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S100101 that the ED start flag is set, if it is determined in step S100102 that the ED in progress flag is set, or if it is determined in step S100103 that the completion condition is not met, this processing is terminated.

As mentioned above, if the completion conditions are met by winning the bonus lottery, etc., you will be notified that the ending movie will begin from the next game.

Figure 122 is a flowchart showing the ED processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S100201, it is determined whether the ED start flag is set. If the ED start flag is set, the ending movie start process shown in steps S100202 to S100208 is performed, and this process ends.

In the ending movie start processing, step S100202 determines whether a start command has been issued. If a start command has not been issued, this processing ends. If a start command has been issued, the ED start flag is cleared in step S100203, and the ED in progress flag is set in step S100204. In the following step S100205, the file number storage area provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1, and in step S100206, the data number storage area provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1. In step S100207, data corresponding to the file number and data number is read from data previously stored in the ROM of the display control device 81. That is, in step S100207, the first data stored in the story part 1 file is read. In step S100208, processing is performed to output the read data. This processing then ends.

If it is determined in step S100201 that the ED start flag is not set, proceed to step S100209, where it is determined whether the ED in progress flag is set. If the ED in progress flag is not set, the process ends. If the ED in progress flag is set, the ending movie progression process shown in steps S100210 to S100216 is performed, and the process ends.

In the ending movie progression process, step S100210 determines whether the value stored in the data number storage area is the final data number. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the frame rate of the ending movie is 24 fps. Therefore, the final data number is 600 (= 24 x 25) for story part 1, 720 (= 24 x 30) for story part 2, 480 (= 24 x 20) for story part 3, 720 (= 24 x 30) for story part 4, 720 (= 24 x 30) for story part 5, 600 (= 24 x 25) for story part 6, 960 (= 24 x 40) for story part 7, and 960 (= 24 x 40) for music parts.

If the value stored in the data number storage area is not the final data number, proceed to step S100217, where 1 is added to the value stored in the data number storage area. Then, in step S100214, an error check is performed, and in step S100215, the data corresponding to the file number and data number is read. In step S100216, the read data is output. Then, this process ends.

If the value stored in the data number storage area is the final data number, proceed to step S100211, where 1 is set in the data number storage area. In step S100212, it is determined whether the value stored in the file number storage area is 8. If the value stored in the file number storage area is not 8, proceed to step S100213, where 1 is added to the value stored in the file number storage area. Then, in step S100214, an error checking process is performed, and in step S100215, data corresponding to the file number and data number is read. In step S100216, a process is performed to output the read data. Then, this process ends.

If step S100212 determines that the file number is 8, the value stored in the file number storage area is not changed and an error checking process is performed in step S100214. Then, in step S100215, data corresponding to the file number and data number is read, and in step S100216, the read data is output. This process then ends. File number "8" is music part data. In other words, if the music part data has been output to the end, the music part data is output again from the beginning.

As described above, when an ending movie starts in response to a start command, data for Story Parts 1 to 7 and music part data are output continuously. Then, when the music part data has been output to the end, music part data is output repeatedly until the ED flag is cleared. The ED flag is cleared when a section command indicating the end of the advantageous section is received.

Here, the error confirmation process in step S100214 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 123.

In step S100301, it is determined whether an error has occurred. If no error has occurred, this processing is terminated. If an error has occurred, the processing proceeds to step S100302, where one is added to the value of the error counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S100303, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are driven and controlled to notify the occurrence of the error. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the error type, such as a hopper empty error, indicating that the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 is empty, and an error sound is output from the speaker 64. At this time, the ending movie is interrupted. In step S100304, it is determined whether the error has been resolved. If the error has not been resolved, the error notification continues until the error is resolved. On the other hand, if the error has been resolved, the processing proceeds to step S100305, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are driven and controlled to notify the user of the restart operation. Specifically, processing is performed to display on the auxiliary display unit 65 that the ending movie will resume when a command to start the next game is issued. In step S100306, it is determined whether a resume operation has been performed, and if a resume operation has not been performed, the notification of the resume operation continues until a resume operation is performed. If a resume operation has been performed, the resume process is performed in step S100307, and this process ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 124, the restart process determines in step S100401 whether the file number is 8. If the file number is 8, this means that an error occurred while outputting the music part data. In this case, in step S100402, the data number storage area is set to 1, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S100401 that the file number is not 8, this means that an error occurred while outputting the story part data. In this case, proceed to step S100403, where it is determined whether the value of the error counter is greater than 3. The value of the error counter is changed to 0 when the favorable period ends, and is only updated in step S100302 of the error confirmation process. If the value of the error counter is greater than 3, this means that four or more errors have occurred since the ending movie started, so in step S100404, 1 is added to the value in the file number storage area. Then, in step S100402, 1 is set to the data number storage area, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S100403 that the value of the error counter is 3 or less, the process proceeds to step S100405, where it is determined whether the carry-over condition is met. A carry-over table that defines the correspondence between file numbers and carry-over conditions is stored in the ROM of the display control device 81. The carry-over table defines the number of games in the favorable zone and the difference in number of coins as the carry-over conditions. For file numbers "3" and "6," in addition to the number of games in the favorable zone and the difference in number of coins, the elapsed time is also defined as the carry-over condition. As shown in FIG. 120(b), for file number "1," the number of games in the favorable zone is set to 2920, and the difference in number of coins is set to 2190. For file number "2," the number of games in the favorable zone is set to 2930, and the difference in number of coins is set to 2210. In file number "3", the number of games in the advantageous zone is set to 2940, the difference in coins is set to 2240, and the elapsed time is set to 10 seconds. In file number "4", the number of games in the advantageous zone is set to 2950, and the difference in coins is set to 2260. In file number "5", the number of games in the advantageous zone is set to 2960, and the difference in coins is set to 2290. In file number "6", the number of games in the advantageous zone is set to 2970, the difference in coins is set to 2320, and the elapsed time is set to 10 seconds. In file number "7", the number of games in the advantageous zone is set to 2980, and the difference in coins is set to 2350. In step S100405, if any of the number of games in the favorable zone, the difference in coins, or the elapsed time is greater than the set value, it is determined that the advancement condition is met. If all of the number of games in the favorable zone, the difference in coins, and the elapsed time are equal to or less than the set value, it is determined that the advancement condition is not met. The elapsed time may be determined by measuring the time elapsed since the transition to file number "3" or "6," or by determining whether the data number is greater than 240 (= 24 x 10). If the advancement condition is met, step S100404 adds 1 to the value in the file number storage area. Then, step S100402 sets the data number storage area to 1, and this process ends. If the advancement condition is not met, step S100402 sets the data number storage area to 1 without changing the value in the file number storage area, and this process ends.

As described above, if an error occurs while the ending movie is running, the ending movie will be interrupted. If the error is resolved, a restart operation is notified, and if the restart operation is performed, the ending movie will resume. If the error occurs during a music part, the music part will start from the beginning. If the error occurs during a story part, and the number of errors since the start of the ending movie is three or less and the advance condition is not met, the movie will start from the beginning of the file where the error occurred. On the other hand, if the number of errors since the start of the ending movie is four or more, or if the number of errors since the start of the ending movie is three or less but the advance condition is met, the movie will start from the beginning of the file following the file where the error occurred.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In conventional slot machines that are capable of playing ending movies, if an error occurs during the ending movie, the ending movie would be restarted from the beginning after the error is resolved. As a result, in these slot machines, players would have to watch the ending movie from the beginning every time a hopper empty error occurred, for example, which raised concerns about monotony in gameplay.

In response to this, the slot machine 10 is configured to interrupt the ending movie if an error occurs while the ending movie is being played. Then, once the error is resolved, the ending movie is restarted from where it left off, rather than from the beginning. This configuration makes it possible to avoid restarting the ending movie from the beginning if the progression of the ending movie is interrupted.

As a result of the above, it is possible to avoid the early part of the ending movie being played repeatedly, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The data used when playing the ending movie is stored in eight files: Story Part 1 to Story Part 7 and Music Part. When playing the ending movie, the data of the file corresponding to the value stored in the file number storage area is output. This configuration prevents the processing involved in playing the ending movie from becoming too complicated, and makes it possible to resume the ending movie from the point where it was interrupted if its progress is interrupted.

When an ending movie starts in response to a start command, data for story parts 1 to 7 and data for the music part are output continuously. This configuration makes it possible to run the ending movie independently of the progress of gameplay, even if the data used to run the ending movie is stored in multiple files. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

If an error occurs during the music part, the music part will be restarted from the beginning. Also, if an error occurs during the story part, and the number of errors since the start of the ending movie is three or less and the advance condition is not met, the game will be restarted from the beginning of the file when the error occurred. This configuration makes it possible to replay part of the ending movie that was played before the error occurred, i.e., to overlap part of the ending movie before and after the error occurred, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the error is resolved, the ending movie will resume when a command to start the next game is issued. This configuration allows the player to decide when to resume the ending movie, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. It is certainly possible to configure the ending movie to resume immediately after the error is resolved. However, the error most likely to occur during the ending movie is a hopper empty error. When a hopper empty error occurs, the manager of the gaming facility where the slot machine 10 is installed must perform tasks such as replenishing medals, which may cause the player to leave their seat. Furthermore, if a player leaves their seat due to the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the ending movie may proceed without the player being present. This can significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. Because the completion conditions are not met frequently, i.e., the ending presentation is not executed very often, the average player wants to enjoy the ending movie from start to finish. In this slot machine 10, the ending movie resumes when a command to start the next game is issued, and because the start command is issued by the player's operation, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns and increase the enjoyment of the game.

If the error is resolved, a notification is sent to restart the game. When the restart operation is performed, the ending movie is restarted. This configuration prevents players from feeling uncomfortable when the ending movie does not restart even though the error has been resolved.

In a configuration where the advantageous zone ends when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2400, an ending performance is performed when it is confirmed that the above-mentioned ending condition is met. In such a configuration, the number of games for which the ending movie can be played changes depending on the results of the lottery, etc., so if the ending movie is interrupted and then restarted from the beginning, it may not be possible to play the ending movie to the end. However, if the ending movie is configured to start from the middle when it is interrupted, the above concerns can be suitably alleviated.

If an error occurs during a story part, the ending movie will start from the beginning of the file following the file where the error occurred if the number of errors after the start of the ending movie is four or more, or if the number of errors after the start of the ending movie is three or less but the advance condition is met. In this way, by configuring the ending movie to be restartable by skipping part of it, it is possible to reduce the chances of not being able to play the ending movie to the end if its progress is interrupted.

In addition to 10 seconds of playback data that advances the ending movie, the Story Part 3 and Story Part 6 files are provided with 10 or 15 seconds of pause data. If an error occurs while playing Story Part 3 or Story Part 6 files, a determination is made as to whether 10 seconds have elapsed. If 10 seconds have elapsed, the ending movie starts from the beginning of the next file. In this way, by providing pause data that does not advance the story part, and by omitting the output of that pause data and starting from the next file if an error occurs while outputting the pause data, it is possible to reduce the chances of the ending movie not being able to be played to the end if its progression is interrupted.

(Eleventh embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing performed when setting the winning probability. Therefore, this configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment, so only the distinctive features will be explained below.

In the first embodiment described above, six levels of winning probability were pre-prepared, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." In this embodiment, in addition to the six levels of winning probability from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," a winning probability for "Setting 7" is also pre-prepared.

Figure 125 is a flowchart showing the winning probability setting process for setting the above setting values.

In step S110101, it is determined whether the signal from the front door open sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 is ON, i.e., whether the front door 12 is open. If the front door 12 is open, proceed to step S110102, where it is determined whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is ON, i.e., whether the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. If the signal from the front door open sensor is OFF, or if the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF, this process is terminated.

If the signal from the front door open sensor and the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a are both ON, proceed to step S110103, where interrupt permission processing is performed to allow the timer interrupt processing to be started. In step S110104, interrupt waiting processing is performed to wait until the timer interrupt processing is started. In step S110105, a setting change command is sent to the display control device 81 to inform the user that a setting change will be made. In step S110106, the current setting value is read from the setting value storage area provided in RAM 106. Then, in step S110107, the setting change processing is performed, and this processing ends.

Figure 126 is a flowchart showing the setting change process.

In step S110201, it is determined whether the setting value read in step S110106 is 0. If the setting value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S110202, where it is determined whether the setting value is greater than 7. As described above, the setting value in this embodiment is any of 1 to 7. Therefore, if the setting value is 0, or if the setting value is 8 or greater, this means that the setting value is not appropriate. In such cases, the setting value is changed to 1 in step S110203, and then the process proceeds to step S110204. If the setting value is any of 1 to 7, the process proceeds directly to step S110204. In step S110204, the setting value is saved in a display buffer provided in RAM 106, and in step S110205, the setting value saved in the display buffer is displayed in the dispensed number display unit 62. In step S110206, an interrupt wait process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is activated. In step S110207, an ON edge confirmation process is performed to check whether the signal from the sensor has switched from OFF to ON based on the results of the timer interrupt process, more specifically, the results of the sensor monitoring process (step S107, see Figure 10) performed in the timer interrupt process.

Here, the first sensor buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101 will be explained based on Figure 127.

The first sensor buffer is composed of four areas, Area 0 to Area 3, each of which consists of one byte. Bit 0 of Areas 0 to 3 is an area that stores signal information from the setting key detection sensor 73a. Bit 1 of Areas 0 to 3 is an area that stores signal information from the front door open sensor. Bit 2 of Areas 0 to 3 is an area that stores signal information from the reset detection sensor 72a. Bits 3 and 4 of Areas 0 to 3 are unused areas that always store a 1. Bit 5 of Areas 0 to 3 is an area that stores signal information from the start detection sensor 41a. Bits 6 and 7 of Areas 0 to 3 are an area that stores signal information from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

The sensor monitoring process for the timer interrupt process involves shifting the information in the first area of the first sensor buffer to the third area, and shifting the information in the zero area to the first area. Then, signals from the various sensors listed above are read, and if the signal is an ON signal, a 1 is stored in the corresponding bit in the zero area, and if the signal is an OFF signal, a 0 is stored in the corresponding bit in the zero area.

Therefore, in the first sensor buffer, the 0th area can be said to store the current sensor signal state, the 1st area can be said to store the previous sensor signal state, and the 3rd area can be said to store the sensor signal state two times before that. The 2nd area stores information from the ON edge confirmation process.

In the ON edge confirmation process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 128, in step S110301, the information stored in area 0 of the first sensor buffer is read as the current sensor state. In step S110302, the information stored in area 1 of the first sensor buffer is read as the previous sensor state. In step S110303, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the current sensor state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the changed sensor state. In step S110304, the logical product (AND) of the changed sensor state and the current sensor state is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in area 2 of the first sensor buffer. Then, this process ends.

As a result of the processing in step S110303, in the sensor state change, a "1" is stored in the bit where the previous sensor state is "1" and the current sensor state is "0" and the bit where the previous sensor state is "0" and the current sensor state is "1". Then, as a result of the processing in step S110304, a "1" is stored in the second area of the first sensor buffer in the bit where the previous sensor state is "0" and the current sensor state is "1". In other words, the second area can be said to store information indicating the ON edge where the signal from the sensor switched from OFF to ON.

Returning to the explanation of the setting change process, once the ON edge confirmation process has ended, proceed to step S110208 to determine whether a 1 is stored in the fifth bit of the second area of the first sensor buffer, i.e., whether an ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a has been detected. If an ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a has not been detected, proceed to step S110209 to determine whether a 1 is stored in the second bit of the second area of the first sensor buffer, i.e., whether an ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a has been detected. If an ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a has been detected, i.e., if the reset switch 72 has been operated, the setting value is updated by 1 in step S110210 and then processing returns to step S110202. As a result, in the setting change process, the setting value is updated by 1 each time the reset switch 72 is operated; if the reset switch 72 is operated after the setting value has reached 7, the setting value will return to 1.

When processing returns from step S110209 to step S110202, the process goes through the interrupt wait process of step S110206 and then the ON edge confirmation process of step S110207. In other words, if the previous state was "0" and the current state was "1" during the previous ON edge confirmation process, the previous state has changed to "1" and the current state has changed to "1" during the current ON edge confirmation process due to the interrupt wait process, so the bit in the second area that previously stored "1" will now store "0." This prevents the setting value from being updated multiple times in response to a single operation of the reset switch 72.

Incidentally, the determination of the signal from the front door open sensor in step S110101 and the determination of the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a in step S110102 determine whether a 1 is stored in the corresponding bit (bit 1, bit 0) in area 0, not area 2.

If it is determined in step S110209 that the ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a has not been detected, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S110206. If it is determined in step S110208 that the ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a has been detected, i.e., if it is determined that the start lever 41 has been operated, the change end process is performed in step S110211, and this process ends.

In the change end process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 129, the display of the set value is ended in step S110401. More specifically, the display mode of the dispensed coin count display unit 62 is changed from one of 1 to 7, which indicate the set value, to 0, which is the initial display mode of the dispensed coin count display unit 62. In step S110402, processing is performed to wait for the setting key to be turned off.

In the setting key OFF wait process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 130, interrupt wait processing is performed in step S110501. In step S110502, the information stored in area 0 of the first sensor buffer is read as the current sensor state. In step S110503, the information stored in area 1 of the first sensor buffer is read as the previous sensor state. In step S110504, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the current sensor state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the sensor change state. In step S110505, the logical product (AND) of the sensor change state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the sensor's OFF edge. In contrast to the ON edge confirmation process, in step S110505, a "1" is stored in the bit where the previous sensor state was "1" and the current sensor state was "0."

In step S110506, it is determined whether a 1 is stored in the 0th bit of the OFF edge, i.e., whether the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a has been detected. If the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a has not been detected, the process returns to the interrupt waiting process in step S110501. On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a has been detected, this means that the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 has been switched from ON to OFF after the start lever 41 was operated. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S110507, where the number of interrupts is set to 10. In step S110508, the interrupt waiting process is performed, and in step S110509, it is determined whether a 0 is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer, i.e., whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF. If the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF, it is determined in step S110510 whether the timer interrupt process has been performed 10 times. If the timer interrupt process has not been performed 10 times, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S110508; if the timer interrupt process has been performed 10 times, the process ends. If a 1 is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer before the timer interrupt process has been performed 10 times, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S110501.

As described above, the setting key OFF wait process ends when "1" is stored in bit 0 of area 1 of the first sensor buffer and "0" is stored in bit 0 of area 0 of the first sensor buffer, and then "0" is stored in bit 0 of area 0 of the first sensor buffer ten consecutive times.

Returning to the explanation of the change completion process, when the setting key OFF wait process has ended, proceed to step S110403, where the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area. In step S110404, a change completion command is sent to the display control device 81 to notify the display control device 81 that the setting change has been completed and the newly set setting value. In step S110405, data in RAM 106 other than the setting value storage area is cleared. Incidentally, the setting value storage area is located at the first address (0000H) of RAM 106. For this reason, in step S110405, the second or subsequent address is specified to initialize the data. In step S110406, a front door command is sent to the display control device 81 to notify the display control device 81 of whether the front door 12 is open or closed. In addition to clearing the RAM 106, the front door command is sent to the display control device 81 when the front door 12 switches from a closed state to an open state, when the front door 12 switches from an open state to a closed state, or when the reset switch 72 is operated to reset the error state. When the front door command is sent to the display control device 81, the change end process ends.

This section explains the processing performed by the display control device 81 when the winning probability is set.

Figure 131 is a flowchart showing the front door command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S110601, it is determined whether a front door command has been received, and if a front door command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a front door command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S110602, where it is determined whether the front door 12 is in the open state. If the front door 12 is in the open state, the processing proceeds to step S110603, where it is determined whether the set value for the winning probability is 7. If the set value is not 7 but any of 1 to 6, the processing starts in step S110604 to output a normal opening sound from the speaker 65, and this processing ends. Also, if the set value is 7, the processing starts in step S110605 to output a special opening sound from the speaker 65, and this processing ends. Here, the normal opening sound and special opening sound are audio data output to notify that the front door 12 is open. For the normal opening sound, a female voice saying "The door is open" is output, and for the special opening sound, a male voice saying "The door is open" is output.

If it is determined in step S110602 that the front door 12 is not open, i.e., if the front door 12 is closed, the process proceeds to step S110606, where it is determined whether the set value for the winning probability is 7. If the set value is not 7 but any of 1 to 6, the process of outputting the normal opening sound from the speaker 65 ends in step S110607, and the process ends. If the set value is 7, the process of outputting the special opening sound from the speaker 65 ends in step S110608, and the lighting mode switching process is performed in step S110609, and the process ends. Here, the lighting mode switching process is a process of switching the lighting mode of the upper lamp 63 for a predetermined period of time. More specifically, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, is turned off for 30 seconds, and then turned back on.

Figure 132 is a flowchart showing the setting change command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S110701, it is determined whether a setting change command has been received, and if a setting change command has not been received, this process is terminated. If a setting change command has been received, in step S110702, the process of outputting the normal opening sound or special opening sound from speaker 65 is terminated, and in step S110703, the process of outputting the setting change sound from speaker 65 is initiated, and this process is terminated. Here, the setting change sound is audio data that is output to notify that the setting value for the winning probability can be changed. The setting change sound is a female voice that says, "Settings are being changed."

Figure 133 is a flowchart showing the change end command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S110801, it is determined whether or not an end change command has been received. If an end change command has not been received, this processing ends. If an end change command has been received, in step S110802, the processing of outputting the setting change sound from the speaker 65 ends, and in step S110803, the setting value indicated by the end change command is stored, and this processing ends.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the series of steps performed when setting the winning probability and the notification sound that is announced.

The reset switch 72 and setting key insertion hole 73 used when setting the winning probability are located on the power supply box 70. As shown in Figure 3, the power supply box 70 is located inside the housing 11. Therefore, when setting the winning probability, it is necessary to first open the front door 12 from the housing 11 and expose the power supply box 70 on the open front side of the housing 11. When the front door 12 is opened from the housing 11, the front door command process is carried out, and a normal opening sound is output if the setting value is 1 to 6, and a special opening sound is output if the setting value is 7 (see Figure 131).

The operation for setting the winning probability (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change operation") can be broadly divided into a start operation, a change operation, and an end operation. The start operation corresponds to inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The change operation corresponds to turning the reset switch 72 ON. The end operation corresponds to turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF. Briefly explaining the well-known configuration of the setting key and setting key insertion hole 73, the setting key insertion hole 73 has an ON position where the setting key detection sensor 73a outputs an ON signal, and an OFF position where the setting key detection sensor 73a does not output an ON signal (outputs an OFF signal). The setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 from the OFF position and moved to the ON position by rotating it to the right (ON operation). The setting key insertion hole 73 is configured to hold the setting key in the ON position when the setting key is in the ON position. The setting key can be removed from the setting key insertion hole 73 by rotating the setting key from the ON position to the left to move it to the OFF position, and then pulling it out of the setting key insertion hole 73 (OFF operation).

When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 101 sends a setting change command to the display control unit 81 (step S110105, see Figure 125). As a result, the setting change command is processed on the display control unit 81 side, the output of the normal opening sound or special opening sound is terminated, and the output of the setting change sound is started (see Figure 132). The setting change sound is output continuously while the change operation is being performed.

When the end operation is performed, the main control unit 101 sends a change end command to the display control unit 81 (step S110404, see Figure 129). This causes the display control unit 81 to process the change end command and end the output of the setting change sound (see Figure 133). Furthermore, when the main control unit 101 sends the change end command, it sends a front door command to the display control unit 81 (step S110406, see Figure 129). This causes the display control unit 81 to process the front door command and starts outputting a normal opening sound if the setting value is 1 to 6, or starts outputting a special opening sound if the setting value is 7 (see Figure 131).

When the setting change operation is completed by performing the end operation, the front door 12 is closed. When the front door 12 switches from the open state to the closed state, a front door command is sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81. As a result, the front door command is processed on the display control unit 81 side, and the output of the normal opening sound or special opening sound is terminated (see Figure 131). At this time, if the setting value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, is turned off for 30 seconds.

Figure 134 shows the series of steps performed when setting the winning probability, the relationship between the set values, and the notification sounds that are announced.

For example, if the setting value is changed from 1 to 6 to 7, the notification sound notifying the opening of the front door 12 will change before the setting key is turned ON and after the setting key is turned OFF, i.e., before and after the setting change operation begins and ends. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming facility where the slot machine 10 is installed that the setting value is 7. Furthermore, by notifying the manager when the front door 12 is open, if the manager of the gaming facility wants to change the setting value to a value other than 7, they can do so without having to close and open the front door 12.

When the front door 12 is closed and the setting is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, will be turned off for 30 seconds. This makes it possible to notify the amusement facility manager or other personnel that the setting is 7, even in situations where it is difficult to close the front door 12 and change the setting.

In addition, with this slot machine 10, when the front door 12 is opened, a different opening sound is emitted depending on whether the setting is 7 or any of the settings 1 to 6. Therefore, the manager of the gaming facility can determine whether the setting is 7 by checking whether the special opening sound is emitted, without having to change the setting and check the setting displayed on the payout number display unit 62.

Furthermore, in this slot machine 10, which notifies whether the setting value is 7 by an audible alarm announcing the opening of the front door 12, it is possible to notify whether the setting value is 7 even when an amusement facility manager or the like is not performing a setting change operation. For example, when an error such as a hopper empty error occurs, it is common to open the front door 12 to resolve the error by refilling the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 with medals or operating the reset switch 72. While an audible alarm announcing the occurrence of an error is output when the error is resolved and the reset switch 72 is operated, a front door command is sent to the display control device 81, which causes the normal opening sound or special opening sound to be output.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The system is configured to issue different notifications when the setting value is 7 and when the setting value is any of 1 to 6. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that the setting value is 7 and prompt them to change the setting value to one of 1 to 6 by performing a setting change operation. As a result, it is possible to set setting 7 to, for example, a winning probability for an event sales event, which has a higher payout rate compared to other setting values.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

When the setting value is 7, a special opening sound is output when the setting change operation is completed. This configuration makes it possible to immediately notify that 7 has been stored as the setting value, and also reduces the effort required to change the setting value. For example, it is possible to configure the system to notify that the setting value is 7 after the front door 12 is closed, but this would require the front door 12 to be opened before the setting change operation can be performed.

When a setting change operation is being performed, the system is configured not to notify that the setting value is 7. This configuration makes it possible to avoid issuing a notification every time the reset switch 72 is operated and the setting value becomes 7. As a result, it is possible for the operator performing the setting change work to perform the work without feeling annoyed.

If the setting value is determined to be 7 when the front door 12 is open, a special opening sound is output. This configuration allows the arcade manager or other personnel to determine whether the setting value is 7 by checking whether the special opening sound is output, without having to change the setting and check the setting value displayed on the payout number display unit 62. This makes it easy to check whether the setting value is 7.

When the front door 12 is open, a different opening sound is output depending on whether the setting value is 7 or any of the settings 1 to 6. It is certainly possible to configure a new, independent process for notifying that the setting value is 7, rather than performing the process for notifying that the setting value is 7 in the front door command process as in the present slot machine 10. However, such a configuration raises concerns that the processing configuration may become complicated depending on the timing of starting the notification process and which of other processes is prioritized. However, the present slot machine 10, which notifies whether the setting value is 7 or not by using different opening sounds for the front door 12, makes it possible to notify both that the front door 12 is open and whether the setting value is 7 or not, while minimizing the complexity of the processing configuration.

When the front door 12 switches from an open state to a closed state, if the setting is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, is configured to turn off for 30 seconds. This configuration allows the change in the lighting state of the upper lamp 63 to function as a final means of checking whether the setting is 7. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that an amusement center manager or the like will forget to change the setting from 7. Furthermore, because the upper lamp 63 is configured to return to a lit state after 30 seconds, there is no need to return the upper lamp 63 to a lit state, which reduces the effort required when the setting is set to 7.

The reset switch 72 and setting key insertion hole 73 are provided in the power supply box 70, which is located inside the housing 11, and the open front side of the housing 11 is covered by the front door 12. This configuration makes it difficult to change settings without opening the front door 12, thereby preventing unauthorized changes to setting values.

The termination operation for setting change operations is performed by turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF. By configuring the termination operation to require both the operation of the start lever 41 and the operation of the setting key, it is possible to make fraudulent acts more difficult and reduce the chance of falsely determining that a termination operation has been performed due to noise, etc. Furthermore, by configuring the system to detect the ON edge of the start lever 41 and the OFF edge of the setting key, it is possible to more reliably detect the operation of the setting key than, for example, a configuration that detects the OFF signal of the setting key.

In other words, some conventional setting change operations require the detection of an OFF signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a as a requirement for the termination operation. In such a configuration, the requirement for the termination operation is met even if the setting key is turned ON as the start operation and then immediately removed from the setting key insertion hole 73. This has raised concerns that the requirement of detecting an OFF signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a may not contribute to the termination operation in any way from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activity, etc.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which detects the OFF edge of the setting key, if the setting key is turned ON as a start operation and then immediately removed from the setting key insertion hole 73, it becomes necessary to turn ON the setting key again after turning ON the start lever 41. Therefore, it is possible to effectively eliminate the above-mentioned concern.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to change the setting values correctly, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

The setting key OFF wait process is configured to end when a "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the 1st area of the first sensor buffer and a "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area, and then a "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area ten consecutive times. This configuration makes it possible to avoid false detection of the OFF edge due to noise, etc.

When the setting key OFF wait process ends, i.e., when the end operation is performed, the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area. It is also possible to configure the setting value in the setting value storage area to be updated when the reset switch 72 is operated, but in such a configuration, the setting value in the setting value storage area could be changed without performing the end operation, raising concerns that the setting value could be changed improperly. On the other hand, this configuration, which stores the current setting value in the setting value storage area when the end operation is performed, makes it possible to prevent the setting value stored in the setting value storage area from being changed without the end operation being performed, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

When a change operation is performed, the setting value is saved in the display buffer and the saved setting value is displayed on the dispensed coin count display unit 62. This configuration makes it relatively easy for the operator performing the change operation to select the setting value they intend.

When determining whether an ON edge or OFF edge has been detected, an interrupt wait process is performed prior to the determination, and the system waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether an ON edge or OFF edge has been detected based on the latest signals from the start detection sensor 41a, reset detection sensor 72a, and setting key detection sensor 73a. As a result, it is possible to avoid detecting an ON edge multiple times in response to a single operation of the reset switch 72, for example, and to avoid malfunctions such as updating the setting value multiple times in response to a single operation of the reset switch 72.

(Twelfth embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, if the push order bell is won in notification mode, the operation sequence that will result in the bell winning is always notified, but the operation sequence may also be notified with a predetermined probability. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 135 shows the transition of game zones.

In this embodiment, the notification modes are notification mode A and notification mode B, and when the chance mode ends, the system transitions to notification mode A.

In notification mode A, when playing with three coins, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is selected is always announced. Therefore, in notification mode A, when playing with three coins, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals can be expected per game. Notification mode A ends when a predetermined number of games have been played under notification mode A. When notification mode A ends, the advantageous zone also ends and the game transitions to the normal zone.

Announcement Mode B is a game mode that functions as a so-called specialized zone that increases the number of plays that can be played under Notification Mode A. You will transition to Notification Mode B if you win the additional lottery (transition lottery) held under Notification Mode A. In Notification Mode B, if you are playing with three coins and win the push order bell, the stop switch that must be operated first to achieve a bell win will always be announced. Then, if you are able to achieve a bell win, the number of plays that can be played under Notification Mode A will be increased. Notification Mode B will end when 10 plays have been played under Notification Mode B. When Notification Mode B ends, you will return to Notification Mode A.

Figure 136 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in chance mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S120101, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S120102, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S120101, and after sending a zone command in step S120111, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S120103 to determine whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, add 1 to the value of the mode game number counter in step S120104, and determine whether the transition flag is set in step S120105. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode has been won, so the transition flag is cleared in step S120106, and the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A in step S120108. In the following step S120109, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S120110, the mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, an interval command is sent in step S120111, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S120105 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, proceed to step S120107, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S120111, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, then in step S120108, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In the following step S120109, the transition game count counter is set to 100, and in step S120110, the mode game count counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S120111, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If step S120103 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S120111 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, Chance Mode transitions to Notification Mode A when three coins are played, when the transition lottery is won, or when three coins are played the number of times corresponding to the value of the transition game counter.

Figure 137 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode A. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S120201, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S120202, where it is determined whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S120203, where an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether to transition to notification mode B, which is the additional role mode in this embodiment. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. Incidentally, in the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if a watermelon is won, the probability of winning is approximately one in five, and if a cherry is won, the probability of winning is approximately one in three. In step S120204, it is determined whether the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the additional flag is set in step S120205, and an additional command is sent in step S120206. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to let the player know that they have won the add-on lottery. In step S120207, a transition flag is set. Then, this process ends. If the add-on lottery is not won, this process ends without setting the add-on flag. If the current game is a two-coin game instead of a three-coin game, or if a rare combination is not won, this process ends without conducting the add-on lottery.

If the player wins the bonus lottery and sets the bonus flag, a pseudo game will be played, as described in the first embodiment above. While the first embodiment notified the player whether or not a bonus was added during the pseudo game, in this embodiment, the player is notified whether or not the pseudo game will transition to notification mode B.

Figure 138 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode A. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S120301, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S120302, it is determined whether the current gaming zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current gaming zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S120301, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S120308.

If the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, step S120303 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S120304 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, steps S120305 to S120307 are performed to end the favorable zone, and an interval command is sent in step S120308, terminating this processing. In the favorable zone end processing, step S120305 changes the gaming zone flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S120306 turns off the interval indicator 66. In step S120307, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the favorable zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the interval game number counter value, etc.).

If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, proceed to step S120309 to determine whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the player has won the additional lottery to transition to notification mode B. In this case, the transition flag is cleared in step S120310, and the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag B in step S120311. In step S120312, the notification B game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 0. Then, in step S120308, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends. If the transition flag is not set, this means that the player will not transition to notification mode B, so after the interval command is sent in step S120308, this processing ends.

As described above, in Notification Mode A, if a rare combination is won during three-coin play, an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to Notification Mode B. If the additional lottery is won, a notification is issued that the pseudo-game will transition to Notification Mode B, and the game mode will transition from Notification Mode A to Notification Mode B.

Figure 139 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode B. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S120401, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S120402, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S120403, where an additional game number lottery is conducted to determine the additional value to be added to the value of the transition game number counter, i.e., the additional number of games that can be played under notification mode A. In the additional game number lottery, the number of additional games is determined based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the combination has been successful. In the additional game number lottery based on a rare combination win, as shown in FIG. 140, the number of additional games is determined to be 30 with a 40% probability, 50 with a 40% probability, and 100 with a 20% probability. When the additional game number lottery is completed, the process proceeds to step S120404, where a game number command is sent. Here, the game count command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate the number of additional games. In the following step S120405, a value corresponding to the result of the additional game count lottery is added to the value of the transition game count counter. This process then ends.

If it is determined in step S120402 that a rare role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S120406, where it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S120407, where a full navigation lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win will be announced. In the full navigation lottery, whether or not the above operation sequence will be announced is determined based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won, and there is a probability of winning of approximately one in five regardless of the set value. In step S120408, it is determined whether or not the full navigation lottery has been won. If the full navigation lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S120403, where a lottery for the number of additional games will be conducted. In the lottery for the number of additional games based on all navigation lottery wins, as shown in FIG. 140, there is a 40% chance that the number of additional games will be 10, a 30% chance that the number of additional games will be 30, a 20% chance that the number of additional games will be 50, and a 10% chance that the number of additional games will be 100. When the lottery for the number of additional games has been completed, proceed to step S120404 and send a number of games command. In the following step S120405, a value corresponding to the result of the lottery for the number of additional games is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This process then terminates.

If it is determined in step S120408 that the full navigation lottery has not been won, the partial navigation flag is set in step S120409, and this processing ends.

If step S120401 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, or if step S120406 determines that the push order bell has not been won, this process will be terminated.

As described above, in the section lottery process in notification mode B, the number of games that can be played in notification mode A is increased if a rare combination is won, or if the push order bell and all navigation lottery are won. When the display control device 81 receives a number of games command, it controls the display of the auxiliary display unit 65 to announce the number of added games indicated by the number of games command. Because the section lottery process is performed at the start of the game, if an additional number of games is drawn during the section lottery process, the number of added games will be announced at the start of the game.

Furthermore, if an all-navigation lottery is conducted during the section lottery process, a lottery result command including the lottery result is sent to the display control device 81 (step S310, see FIG. 12). When the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command indicating that the all-navigation lottery has been won, it displays on the auxiliary display unit 65 the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that can result in a bell win. As shown in FIG. 141(a), if the left, center, and right bells are won, "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the left, right, and center bells are won, "1, 3, 2" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the center, left, and right bells are won, "2, 1, 3" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the center, right, and left bells are won, "3, 1, 2" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the right, center, and left bells are won, "3, 2, 1 ...2, 3, 1" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the indicator monitor controlled by the main control device 101 displays "1" if the left, center, right bell is won, "2" if the left, right, center bell is won, "3" if the center, left, right bell is won, "4" if the center, right, left bell is won, "5" if the right, center, left bell is won, and "6" if the right, left, center bell is won.

When a lottery result command indicating that the player did not win all navigation lotteries is received, the display control device 81 displays only the stop switch, which should be operated first, on the auxiliary display unit 65. As shown in FIG. 141(b), if the player wins the left, center, right bell or the left, right, and center bells, "1-?-?" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65; if the player wins the center, left, right, and center bells or the center, right, and left bells, "?-1-?" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65; if the player wins the right, center, left bell or the right, left, and center bells, "?-?-1" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the instruction monitor controlled by the main control device 101 displays "7" if the player wins the left, center, right bell or the left, right, and center bells; "8" if the player wins the center, left, right, and center bells or the center, right, and left bells; and "9" if the player wins the right, center, left bell or the right, left, and center bells.

In addition, if you win the push order bell in notification mode A, the same display control will be performed as if you won the full navigation lottery.

Figure 142 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode B. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S120501, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S120502, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S120501, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S120507.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S120503 performs the process of adding the number of transition games.

In the process of adding the number of transition games, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 143, step S120601 determines whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, this process ends. If the push order bell has been won, proceed to step S120602, where it determines whether the partial navigation flag is set. If the partial navigation flag is set, this means that the player has failed the overall navigation lottery and only the stop switch that should be operated first has been notified. In such a case, proceed to step S120603, where the partial navigation flag is cleared. In the following step S120604, it determines whether the stop switch operated first was a stop switch that can result in a bell win, i.e., whether the stop switch that matches the notification content was operated first. If the stop switch that matches the notification content was operated first, it further determines in step S120605 whether a bell win has been won. If a bell win has been won, proceed to step S120606, where a lottery for the number of additional games is conducted. In the lottery for the number of additional games based on the establishment of a bell win, as shown in FIG. 140, there is a 40% chance that the number of additional games will be determined to be 10, a 30% chance that the number of additional games will be determined to be 30, a 20% chance that the number of additional games will be determined to be 50, and a 10% chance that the number of additional games will be determined to be 100. When the lottery for the number of additional games has been completed, proceed to step S120607 and send a number of games command.

When the display control device 81 receives a game count command, it controls the display of the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the number of added games indicated by the game count command. Since the game interval processing in which the transition game count addition process is performed is processing performed at the end of the game, if a lottery for the number of added games is performed during the transition game count addition process, the number of added games will be notified at the end of the game.

After sending the number of games command, in step S120608, the value of the transition game number counter is added with a value corresponding to the result of the additional game number lottery. Then, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S120605 that a bell win has not been achieved, the process ends without drawing the number of additional games.

If it is determined in step S120604 that the stop switch matching the notification content was not initially operated, the process proceeds to step S120609, where a random drawing is conducted. In the random drawing, a win or loss is determined based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is a win or a loss, with a 50/50 probability of winning regardless of the set value. In step S120610, it is determined whether or not the random drawing has been won. If the random drawing has not been won, the process terminates as is. If the random drawing has been won, the process proceeds to step S120606, where a lottery is conducted for the number of additional games. In the lottery for the number of additional games based on a win in the random drawing, as shown in FIG. 140, the number of additional games is determined to be 10 at a 40% rate, 30 at a 30% rate, 50 at a 20% rate, and 100 at a 10% rate. When the lottery for the number of additional games has been completed, proceed to step S120607 and send a game count command. In the following step S120608, the value of the transition game count counter is added with a value corresponding to the result of the lottery for the number of additional games. Then, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S120602 that the partial navigation flag is not set, this means that the full navigation lottery has been won and the additional game number lottery has already been held, so this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game interval processing, when the transition game number addition processing in step S120503 is completed, step S120504 adds 1 to the value of the notification B game number counter, and step S120505 determines whether the value of the notification B game number counter has reached 10. If the value of the notification B game number counter has not reached 10, step S120507 sends an interval command and then terminates this processing. On the other hand, if the value of the notification B game number counter has reached 10, this means that the termination condition for notification mode B has been met, so step S120506 changes the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to notification flag A. Then, step S120507 sends an interval command and terminates this processing.

As described above, Notification Mode B ends when 10 games have been played under that Notification Mode B. When Notification Mode B ends, the game returns to Notification Mode A.

Here, we will explain the gameplay of the notification mode in this slot machine 10.

When transitioning from Chance Mode to Notification Mode A, the transition game number counter is set to 100. Therefore, when transitioning to Notification Mode A, 100 plays can be played in Notification Mode A. In Notification Mode A, if three coins are played, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is won is always announced. Therefore, in Notification Mode A, if three coins are played, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals can be expected per game. Furthermore, in Notification Mode A, the number of plays that can be played in Notification Mode A is not increased, but if a rare combination is won, an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to Notification Mode B. If the additional lottery is won, the game will transition from Notification Mode A to Notification Mode B.

In Notification Mode B, you can expect the number of games that can be played under Notification Mode A to be increased over a period of 10 games. Specifically, if you win a rare combination, an increase will always be added, with a 40% chance of 30 games, a 40% chance of 50 games, and a 20% chance of 100 games.

Furthermore, if the player wins the push order bell and also wins the all-navigation lottery, which has a winning probability of approximately one in five, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44 required to achieve a bell win is announced, and the number of games available in notification mode A is increased. The breakdown is as follows: 10 games with a 40% probability, 30 games with a 30% probability, 50 games with a 20% probability, and 100 games with a 10% probability. If the all-navigation lottery is not won, only the stop switch that should be operated first is announced. If a bell win is achieved under such circumstances, that is, if the player can guess the operation sequence required to achieve a bell win on their own, the number of games available in notification mode A is increased in the same manner as if the all-navigation lottery were won. In other words, in notification mode B, if the player wins the push order bell and achieves a bell win, the number of games available in notification mode A is increased.

As described above, if a player wins the push order bell but fails to win the full navigation lottery, only the stop switch that should be operated first will be announced. If the player does not initially operate the announced stop switch, a random lottery will be held, with a 50/50 chance of winning. If the random lottery is won, the number of games available for play under announcement mode A will be increased. The breakdown in this case is the same as when the player successfully guesses the operation sequence that will result in a bell win on their own: 10 games with a 40% chance, 30 games with a 30% chance, 50 games with a 20% chance, and 100 games with a 10% chance. Note that in a situation where only the stop switch that should be operated first is announced, the probability of a bell win being achieved if the player first operates the announced stop switch is 50/50. Therefore, in a situation where only the stop switch that should be operated first is notified, if the player does not operate the notified stop switch first, the bell win will not necessarily be achieved, but the expected value will be added to the winnings at the same rate as if the player had operated the notified stop switch first.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, when the mode is switched from notification mode A to notification mode B, the number of medals that can be won in notification mode changes depending on how much the number of games that can be played in notification mode A (hereinafter also referred to as the "notification mode A game count") can be increased in notification mode B, and how often the loop of notification mode A → notification mode B → notification mode A can be generated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

Some conventional slot machines, when a rare combination is won in an AT state such as notification mode, hold a bonus lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of plays that can be played in the AT state. In such a configuration, the player can only determine whether or not a bonus lottery has been held based on the results of the symbols stopping, such as whether or not a rare combination has been won, which raises concerns that gameplay may become monotonous.

In view of this, the slot machine 10 is configured so that, when the push order bell is won in notification mode B, the determination as to whether or not to increase the number of notification mode A games can be made multiple times in that game. This configuration not only makes it possible for the player to operate the start lever 41 while hoping to win the push order bell, but also, after operating the start lever 41 to start the game, it becomes possible to progress through the game while hoping to win the determination as to whether or not to increase the number of notification mode A games. Furthermore, because the determination can be made multiple times, even if the first determination is wrong, the game can be progressed while hoping to win the next determination.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

If the push order bell is selected in notification mode B, a determination is made at the start and end of the game as to whether to increase the number of notification mode A games. By making multiple determinations as to whether to increase the number of notification mode A games based on the game's progress in this way, it is possible to reduce the chances of losing hope for an increase in the number of notification mode A games midway through the game. For example, it is possible to make multiple determinations as to whether to increase the number of notification mode A games at the start of the game. However, in this case, if all of the determinations are incorrect, players will end up operating the stop switches 42-44 in disappointment.

When the push-order bell is won in notification mode B, a full navigation lottery is held, and if the full navigation lottery is won, the number of notification mode A games is increased. With this configuration, if a player wins the full navigation lottery, they can operate the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation sequence to receive not only the medal payout associated with a bell win, but also the bonus of an additional notification mode A game. This increases the player's enjoyment of the game. In other words, in conventional slot machines, during automatic timekeeping (AT) states such as notification mode, there is a high probability of a game in which the push-order bell is won and the stop switch operation sequence is announced. This raised concerns that players might find operating the stop switches in the notified operation sequence cumbersome. However, in this slot machine 10, in which the number of notification mode A games is increased when the full navigation lottery is won, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that would result in a bell win is not announced unless the full navigation lottery is won, and the number of notification mode A games is not increased at this stage. Therefore, if the player wins all navigation lotteries and the operation sequence is announced, a bell win can be achieved and the number of games played in Announcement Mode A will be increased, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

If the All Navigation Lottery is won, an additional game number lottery is held at that time to determine the number of Notification Mode A games to be increased. This configuration makes it possible to announce the number of additional games at any progress status after the game that won the All Navigation Lottery, making it possible to diversify the presentation content and timing of the announcement of the number of additional games.

If all navigation lotteries are won, an additional game number lottery is held at that time to determine the number of Notification Mode A games to be increased, and the number of additional games is announced. This configuration allows the player to know whether the number of Notification Mode A games will be increased at the start of the game. As a result, even if the number of additional games is not announced, the player can operate stop switches 42-44 in the hope of winning the decision on whether or not to increase the next number of Notification Mode A games in that game.

If the player does not win all navigation lotteries under notification mode B, partial navigation is performed to notify the player of the stop switch that should be operated first. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that the push order bell has been won through partial navigation, and to prevent the frequency of bell wins from decreasing more than necessary. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the push order bell is won under notification mode B, it is possible to have the player be notified of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win, or the player be notified of the stop switch that should be operated first. As a result, it is possible to diversify the content of notifications in push order bell winning games, and to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

If a bell win is achieved in a game in which partial navigation is performed, a lottery for the number of additional games is held. This configuration allows the player to operate the stop switch corresponding to the partial navigation when partial navigation is performed, and to carefully select the order in which to operate the other stop switches. This allows players to actively participate in the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, the rate at which the number of games in Announcement Mode A is increased will vary depending on the player's skill in correctly operating the stop switches other than those notified in the partial navigation, i.e., the player's skill in correctly answering the two-choice question. However, by determining whether or not to increase the number of games in Announcement Mode A the first time based on whether or not the full navigation lottery is won, it is possible to eliminate player intervention in the first determination, thereby preventing disparities between players.

If the player does not follow the partial navigation in a game in which partial navigation is performed, a random lottery will be held, and if the random lottery is won, the number of games played in Announcement Mode A will be increased. This configuration allows the player to choose whether to follow the partial navigation and win the random lottery to increase the number of games played in Announcement Mode A, or to ignore the partial navigation and hope to win the random lottery to increase the number of games played in Announcement Mode A. This prevents play in games in which the push order bell is won from becoming monotonous.

It is certainly possible to configure a game in which partial navigation is performed so that a random lottery is not conducted if the player does not follow the partial navigation. However, with such a configuration, if a player repeatedly follows the partial navigation while operating the remaining stop switches in the wrong order in a game in which partial navigation is performed, not only will the medal payout associated with a bell win not be realized, but the number of Notification Mode A games will also not be increased, raising concerns that this could discourage the player from playing. However, if a configuration is used in which a random lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the number of Notification Mode A games when partial navigation is not followed, the player will be given the option of forgoing the medal payout associated with a bell win, but only hoping for an increase in the number of Notification Mode A games played through a random lottery. As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily resolve the above concerns and provide a new gameplay experience in which the player can expect to increase the number of Notification Mode A games played by forgoing the medal payout associated with a bell win.

The configuration is such that the probability of the number of games played in Notification Mode A being added when the partial navigation is followed is equal to the probability of the number of games played in Notification Mode A being added when the partial navigation is not followed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent differences in the frequency with which the number of games played in Notification Mode A is added depending on the player's selection. As a result, for example, if the player repeatedly fails to win a bell even when following the partial navigation, it becomes possible for the player to choose not to follow the partial navigation.

The ratio of the number of additional games selected in the additional game lottery is equal between when a bell win is achieved by following the partial navigation and when the externally-driven lottery is won. This configuration makes it possible to equalize the expected number of additional games when following the partial navigation and when not following the partial navigation, reducing the chances of players hesitating to make a choice that does not follow the partial navigation. Furthermore, the expected number of additional games when following the partial navigation and when not following the partial navigation is 33 games. In notification mode A, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals can be expected, so the expected increase in medals following the additional game lottery is approximately 116 medals. Because the increase in medals when a bell win is achieved is six medals, making the expected increase in medals following the additional game lottery greater than the increase in medals when a bell win is achieved also reduces the chances of players hesitating to make a choice that does not follow the partial navigation.

If the All Navigation Lottery is won, a lottery for the number of additional games to be played will be held in conjunction with the All Navigation Lottery win, but a lottery for the number of additional games to be played in conjunction with the formation of a bell win after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped will not be held. This configuration makes it possible to prevent excessive expectations for the number of games to be played in Notification Mode A from increasing, ensuring the soundness of the game while increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If all navigation lotteries are unsuccessful, a lottery for the number of additional games will be held in response to a bell win or a win in the other lottery. This configuration makes it possible to prevent excessive expectations for the number of games played in Notification Mode A from increasing, ensuring the soundness of the game while increasing interest in the game.

When transitioning to notification mode B, the system is configured to determine whether or not to add to the number of notification mode A games in the push order bell winning game. This configuration makes it possible to make notification mode B a game state in which the number of notification mode A games is added. As a result, it becomes possible to play in notification mode A while anticipating a transition to notification mode B, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In Notification Mode B, when playing with three coins and using the lottery table shown in Figure 13 to determine whether a winning combination will occur, the probability of winning a replay is approximately 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning the push order bell is approximately 1 in 1.5, and the probability of winning a rare combination is approximately 1 in 25. In this way, by configuring the number of Notification Mode A games to be added in games in which the push order bell, which has the highest winning probability, is won, it is possible to reduce the chances of a game not occurring in which a decision is made as to whether to increase the number of Notification Mode A games despite transitioning to Notification Mode B, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(13th embodiment 1)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing performed when setting the winning probability. Therefore, this configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment, so only the distinctive features will be explained below.

Figure 144 is a flowchart showing the winning probability setting process for setting the winning probability setting value.

In step S130101, it is determined whether the signal from the front door open sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 is ON, i.e., whether the front door 12 is open. If the front door 12 is open, it proceeds to step S130102, where it is determined whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is ON, i.e., whether the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. If the signal from the front door open sensor is OFF, or if the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF, this process is terminated.

If the signal from the front door open sensor and the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a are both ON, proceed to step S130103, where interrupt permission processing is performed to allow the timer interrupt processing to be started. In step S130104, interrupt waiting processing is performed to wait until the timer interrupt processing is started. In step S130105, a setting change command is sent to the display control device 81 to inform the user that a setting change will be made. In step S130106, the current setting value is read from the setting value storage area provided in RAM 106. Thereafter, in step S130107, the setting change processing is performed, and this processing ends.

Figure 145 is a flowchart showing the setting change process.

In step S130201, it is determined whether the setting value read in step S130106 is 0. If the setting value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S130202, where it is determined whether the setting value is greater than 6. In this embodiment, the setting value is any of 1 to 6. Therefore, if the setting value is 0, or if the setting value is 7 or greater, this means that the setting value is not appropriate. In such cases, in step S130203, the setting value is changed to 1, and the process proceeds to step S130204. If the setting value is any of 1 to 6, the process proceeds directly to step S130204. In step S130204, the setting value is saved in a display buffer provided in RAM 106, and in step S130205, the setting value saved in the display buffer is displayed in the dispensed number display unit 62. In step S130206, an interrupt wait process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is activated. In step S130207, an ON edge confirmation process is performed to check whether the signal from the sensor has switched from OFF to ON based on the results of the timer interrupt process, more specifically, the results of the sensor monitoring process (step S107, see Figure 10) performed in the timer interrupt process.

Here, the first sensor buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101 will be explained based on Figure 146.

The first sensor buffer is composed of four areas, Area 0 to Area 3, each of which consists of one byte. Bit 0 of Areas 0 to 3 is an area that stores signal information from the setting key detection sensor 73a. Bit 1 of Areas 0 to 3 is an area that stores signal information from the front door open sensor. Bit 2 of Areas 0 to 3 is an area that stores signal information from the reset detection sensor 72a. Bits 3 and 4 of Areas 0 to 3 are unused areas that always store a 1. Bit 5 of Areas 0 to 3 is an area that stores signal information from the start detection sensor 41a. Bits 6 and 7 of Areas 0 to 3 are an area that stores signal information from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

The sensor monitoring process for the timer interrupt process involves shifting the information in the first area of the first sensor buffer to the third area, and shifting the information in the zero area to the first area. Then, signals from the various sensors listed above are read, and if the signal is an ON signal, a 1 is stored in the corresponding bit in the zero area, and if the signal is an OFF signal, a 0 is stored in the corresponding bit in the zero area.

Therefore, in the first sensor buffer, the 0th area can be said to store the current sensor signal state, the 1st area can be said to store the previous sensor signal state, and the 3rd area can be said to store the sensor signal state two times before that. The 2nd area stores information from the ON edge confirmation process.

In the ON edge confirmation process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 147, in step S130301, the information stored in area 0 of the first sensor buffer is read as the current sensor state. In step S130302, the information stored in area 1 of the first sensor buffer is read as the previous sensor state. In step S130303, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the current sensor state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the changed sensor state. In step S130304, the logical product (AND) of the changed sensor state and the current sensor state is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in area 2 of the first sensor buffer. Then, this process ends.

As a result of the processing in step S130303, in the sensor state change, a "1" is stored in the bit where the previous sensor state is "1" and the current sensor state is "0" and in the bit where the previous sensor state is "0" and the current sensor state is "1". Then, as a result of the processing in step S130304, a "1" is stored in the second area of the first sensor buffer in the bit where the previous sensor state is "0" and the current sensor state is "1". In other words, the second area can be said to store information indicating the ON edge where the signal from the sensor switched from OFF to ON.

Returning to the explanation of the setting change process, once the ON edge confirmation process has ended, proceed to step S130208 to determine whether a 1 is stored in the fifth bit of the second area of the first sensor buffer, i.e., whether an ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a has been detected. If an ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a has not been detected, proceed to step S130209 to determine whether a 1 is stored in the second bit of the second area of the first sensor buffer, i.e., whether an ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a has been detected. If an ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a has been detected, i.e., if the reset switch 72 has been operated, the setting value is updated by 1 in step S130210 and then processing returns to step S130202. As a result, in the setting change process, the setting value is updated by 1 each time the reset switch 72 is operated; if the reset switch 72 is operated after the setting value has reached 6, the setting value will return to 1.

When processing returns from step S130209 to step S130202, the process goes through the interrupt wait process of step S130206 and then the ON edge confirmation process of step S130207. In other words, if the previous state was "0" and the current state was "1" during the previous ON edge confirmation process, the current ON edge confirmation process will change the previous state to "1" and the current state to "1" due to the interrupt wait process, and therefore a "0" will be stored in the bit in the second area where a "1" was stored. This prevents the setting value from being updated multiple times in response to a single operation of the reset switch 72.

Incidentally, the determination of the signal from the front door open sensor in step S130101 and the determination of the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a in step S130102 determine whether a 1 is stored in the corresponding bit (bit 1, bit 0) in area 0, not area 2.

If it is determined in step S130209 that the ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a has not been detected, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S130206. If it is determined in step S130208 that the ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a has been detected, i.e., if it is determined that the start lever 41 has been operated, the change end process is performed in step S130211, and this process ends.

In the change end process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 148, in step S130401, the display of the set value is ended. More specifically, the display mode of the dispensed coin count display unit 62 is changed from one of 1 to 6, which indicate the set value, to 0, which is the initial display mode of the dispensed coin count display unit 62. In step S130402, processing is performed to wait for the setting key to be turned off.

In the setting key OFF wait process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 149, interrupt wait processing is performed in step S130501. In step S130502, the information stored in area 0 of the first sensor buffer is read as the current sensor state. In step S130503, the information stored in area 1 of the first sensor buffer is read as the previous sensor state. In step S130504, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the current sensor state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the sensor change state. In step S130505, the logical product (AND) of the sensor change state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the sensor's OFF edge. Conversely to the ON edge confirmation process, in step S130505, "1" is stored in the bit where the previous sensor state was "1" and the current sensor state was "0."

In step S130506, it is determined whether a 1 is stored in the 0th bit of the OFF edge, i.e., whether the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a has been detected. If the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a has not been detected, the process returns to the interrupt waiting process in step S130501. On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a has been detected, this means that the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 has been switched from ON to OFF after the start lever 41 was operated. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S130507, where the number of interrupts is set to 10. In step S130508, the interrupt waiting process is performed, and in step S130509, it is determined whether a 0 is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer, i.e., whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF. If the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF, it is determined in step S130510 whether the timer interrupt process has been performed 10 times. If the timer interrupt process has not been performed 10 times, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S130508; if the timer interrupt process has been performed 10 times, the process ends. If a 1 is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer before the timer interrupt process has been performed 10 times, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S130501.

As described above, the setting key OFF wait process ends when "1" is stored in bit 0 of area 1 of the first sensor buffer and "0" is stored in bit 0 of area 0 of the first sensor buffer, and then "0" is stored in bit 0 of area 0 of the first sensor buffer ten consecutive times.

Returning to the explanation of the change completion process, when the setting key OFF wait process has ended, proceed to step S130403, where the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area. In step S130404, a change completion command is sent to the display control device 81 to notify the display control device 81 that the setting change has been completed and the newly set setting value. In step S130405, data in RAM 106 other than the setting value storage area is cleared. Incidentally, the setting value storage area is located at the first address (0000H) of RAM 106. For this reason, in step S130405, the second or subsequent address is specified to initialize the data. In step S130406, a front door command is sent to the display control device 81 to notify the display control device 81 of whether the front door 12 is open or closed. In addition to clearing the RAM 106, the front door command is sent to the display control device 81 when the front door 12 switches from a closed state to an open state, when the front door 12 switches from an open state to a closed state, or when the reset switch 72 is operated to reset the error state. When the front door command is sent to the display control device 81, the change end process ends.

This section explains the processing performed by the display control device 81 when the winning probability is set.

Figure 150 is a flowchart showing the setting change command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S130601, it is determined whether a setting change command has been received. If a setting change command has not been received, this process is terminated. If a setting change command has been received, the process proceeds to step S130602, where the process of outputting an opening sound from the speaker 65 is terminated. Although detailed description is omitted, when the display control device 81 receives a front door command indicating that the front door 12 is open, it starts the process of outputting an opening sound from the speaker 65. The opening sound is audio data output to notify that the front door 12 is open. When the above process is initiated, the sound "The door is open" is output from the speaker 65. In step S130603, it is determined whether the error notification flag described below has been set. If the error notification flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S130606, where the process of outputting a setting change sound from the speaker 65 is initiated. Here, the setting change sound is audio data output to notify that the winning probability setting value can be changed. The setting change sound is the sound "Settings are being changed." In step S130607, the setting change display is started. Specifically, the display effects, such as the customer waiting display, that have been displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are ended, and the process of displaying the text information "Setting change in progress" is started. If the setting change display has started, the setting change flag is set in step S130608, and this process ends.

Figure 151 is a flowchart showing the change end command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S130701, it is determined whether or not a change end command has been received. If a change end command has not been received, this processing ends. If a change end command has been received, in step S130702, the processing of outputting the setting change sound from the speaker 65 ends, and in step S130703, the setting value indicated by the change end command is stored. In step S130704, the setting change display on the auxiliary display unit 65 ends. Thereafter, in step S130705, the setting change flag is cleared, and this processing ends.

Here, we will explain the series of steps involved in setting the winning probability.

The reset switch 72 and setting key insertion hole 73 used when setting the winning probability are provided on the power supply box 70. As shown in Figure 3, etc., the power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11. Therefore, when setting the winning probability, it is first necessary to open the front door 12 from the housing 11 and expose the power supply box 70 on the open front side of the housing 11. When the front door 12 is opened from the housing 11, a front door command is sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81, and the display control unit 81 begins processing to output an opening sound from the speaker 65.

The operation for setting the winning probability (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change operation") can be broadly divided into a start operation, a change operation, and an end operation. The start operation corresponds to inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The change operation corresponds to turning the reset switch 72 ON. The end operation corresponds to turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF. Briefly explaining the well-known configuration of the setting key and setting key insertion hole 73, the setting key insertion hole 73 has an ON position where the setting key detection sensor 73a outputs an ON signal, and an OFF position where the setting key detection sensor 73a does not output an ON signal (outputs an OFF signal). The setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 from the OFF position and moved to the ON position by rotating it to the right (ON operation). The setting key insertion hole 73 is configured to hold the setting key in the ON position when the setting key is in the ON position. The setting key can be removed from the setting key insertion hole 73 by rotating the setting key from the ON position to the left to move it to the OFF position, and then pulling it out of the setting key insertion hole 73 (OFF operation).

When the start operation is performed, a setting change command is sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81 (step S130105, see Figure 144). As a result, the setting change command is processed on the display control unit 81 side, the output of the opening sound is terminated, and the output of the setting change sound is started (see Figure 150). In addition, the setting change display is started on the auxiliary display unit 65. While the change operation is being performed, the setting change sound is continuously output and the setting change display is continued.

When the end operation is performed, the main control unit 101 sends a change end command to the display control unit 81 (step S130404, see Figure 148). As a result, change end command processing is performed on the display control unit 81 side, the output of the setting change sound is terminated, and the setting change display is terminated (see Figure 151). Furthermore, when the main control unit 101 sends the change end command, it sends a front door command to the display control unit 81 (step S130406, see Figure 148). As a result, the display control unit 81 starts processing to output the opening sound from the speaker 65.

When the setting change operation is completed by performing the end operation, the front door 12 is closed. When the front door 12 switches from an open state to a closed state, a front door command is sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81. This causes the display control unit 81 to end the process of outputting the opening sound from the speaker 65.

In a configuration that performs the above-described processing when setting the winning probability, for example, if there is poor contact in the connector connecting the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81, or if noise or the like occurs on the main control unit 101 side, an event occurs in which the main control unit 101 sends a command to the display control unit 81 but the display control unit 81 fails to receive the command. Furthermore, if the main control unit 101 sends a change completion command to the display control unit 81 but the display control unit 81 does not receive the change completion command, a discrepancy in recognition will occur between the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81. On the main control unit 101 side, the winning probability setting process has ended, so the game can be played. On the display control unit 81 side, the winning probability setting process is not completed, so the display control unit 81 continues to output the setting change sound and display the setting change. If a game is started under such circumstances, the display control unit 81 will receive commands related to the progress of the game round while recognizing that the winning probability setting process has not ended.

Figure 152 is a flowchart showing the bet command processing performed by the display control device 81. The main control device 101 transmits a bet command containing information related to the current number of bets to the display control device 81 when a medal is inserted, or when one of the first credit insertion switch 56 to the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated to insert a virtual medal.

In step S130801, it is determined whether a bet command has been received, and if not, this process is terminated. If a bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S130802, where the number of bets indicated by the bet command is stored. In step S130803, it is determined whether the setting change flag has been set, and if the setting change flag has not been set, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the setting change flag has been set, step S130804 terminates the process of outputting a setting change sound from the speaker 65, and step S130805 starts the process of outputting an error notification sound from the speaker 65. Here, the error notification sound is audio data that is output to notify that a change completion command has not been received. The error notification sound is a sound stating, "The setting change operation has not been completed." Thereafter, in step S130806, the error notification flag is set, and this process is terminated.

Figure 153 is a flowchart showing the start command processing performed by the display control device 81. When a start command is issued, that is, when the start lever 41 is operated while the specified number of medals have been bet, the main control device 101 transmits a start command to the display control device 81, indicating that a game round has begun.

In step S130901, it is determined whether a start command has been received, and if a start command has not been received, this processing ends. If a start command has been received, the game start flag is set in step S130902, and then this processing ends.

Figure 154 is a flowchart showing the lottery result command processing performed by the display control device 81. During the lottery processing, the main control device 101 transmits to the display control device 81 a lottery result command that includes information related to the various results obtained during the lottery processing, specifically, information related to the results of the hand win/loss determination and information related to the lottery results during the section lottery processing (step S310, see Figure 12).

In step S131001, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received. If a lottery result command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a lottery result command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S131002, where the lottery result information indicated by the lottery result command is stored as described above. In step S131003, it is determined whether a setting change flag has been set. If the setting change flag has not been set, the processing proceeds to step S131004, where effect control processing is performed to execute an auxiliary effect according to the lottery result information. In the effect control processing, for example, an auxiliary effect suggesting a rare win is started when a rare win is achieved, or the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced when the push order bell is achieved in notification mode. If effect control processing has been performed, the lottery result command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the setting change flag has been set, this processing is terminated without performing effect control processing.

As described above, in the lottery result command processing, if the setting change flag is not set, the effect control processing is performed, and if the setting change flag is set, the effect control processing is not performed. As a result, if the setting change flag is set, the auxiliary effect corresponding to the lottery result information is not executed, and the setting change display and error alert sound continue. While a detailed explanation will be omitted, the display control device 81 also performs the same processing as the lottery result command processing in command processing that is activated in response to receiving commands indicating the progress of the game, such as the stop enable command processing that is activated when a stop enable command is received, and the all reels stop completion command processing that is activated when an all reels stop completion command is received. In other words, if the setting change flag is not set, processing to execute auxiliary effects corresponding to the progress of the game is performed, and if the setting change flag is set, processing to execute auxiliary effects corresponding to the progress of the game is not performed.

Figure 155 is a flowchart showing the end command processing performed by the display control device 81. When a series of processes in the normal processing (see Figure 11) has ended, more specifically when the BB state processing of step S215 has ended, the main control device 101 transmits an end command to the display control device 81, indicating that the game round has ended.

In step S131101, it is determined whether an end command has been received, and if an end command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If an end command has been received, the game start flag is cleared in step S131102, and then this processing is terminated.

As described above, if a bet command is received when the setting change flag is set, that is, if a bet command is received when the change end command has not yet been received, the setting change display on the auxiliary display unit 65 will continue and an error alert sound will be output from the speaker 65. If a game round is started under such circumstances, the game can be played until the end of the game round, but auxiliary effects based on the lottery result information will not be performed and the setting change display and error alert sound will continue to be output. Note that if the display control device 81 is unable to receive the change end command as well as the bet command due to poor connector contact or the like, and receives commands after the start command, the setting change display and setting change sound will continue to be output. In other words, if the command received after the setting change command is a command related to the start and progress of a game round, such as a start command, no error alert will be output.

If an error notification sound is heard, you will need to change the settings again.

When the start operation of the setting change operation is performed again, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 150, if it is determined in step S130603 that the error notification flag is set, the setting change command processing ends the process of outputting the error notification sound from the speaker 65 in step S130604, and clears the error notification flag in step S130605. In the following step S130606, the processing of outputting the setting change sound from the speaker 65 begins, and in step S130607, the setting change display begins. Thereafter, in step S130608, the setting change flag is set, and this processing ends.

In this way, when an error notification sound is output, the output of the error notification sound can be stopped by repeating the setting change operation. Note that even if the setting change display and output of the setting change sound do not end even after the setting change operation has ended, this means that the display control device 81 has not received the change end command, and the setting change operation must be repeated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a bet command is received when the setting change flag is set, i.e., if a bet command is received when the change end command has not been received, an error alert sound is output from the speaker 65. With this configuration, if the display control device 81 is unable to receive the change end command due to noise or the like, it is possible to indicate through the error alert sound that the change end command has not been received.

Furthermore, by configuring the device to output an error alert sound based on the receipt of a bet command sent when a bet operation related to the start of a game round is performed, it becomes possible to output an error alert sound before a game round starts. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the chances of a game round starting when the display control device 81 recognizes that a setting change operation has not been completed, and to prevent the occurrence of occasions when a game round starts where the display control device 81 is unable to provide auxiliary effects according to the game round or auxiliary effects suggesting setting values.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

If a start command is received when neither a change end command nor a bet command has been received, the error alert sound will not be output. This configuration makes it possible to continue a game round as is if the round has already started. It is certainly possible to output an error alert sound when a start command is received, just as it would when a bet command is received when a change end command has not been received. However, with this configuration, because the bet command has not been received, the error alert sound will not be output when a bet is made, and will be output after the game round has started. For this reason, with this configuration, there is a concern that players may become confused and not know whether they should continue with the game round.

If a command indicating the progress of a game, such as a lottery result command, is received when neither the change end command nor a bet command has been received, the error alert sound will not be output. This configuration makes it possible to continue a game round as is if the game round has already started. It is certainly possible to output an error alert sound when a command indicating the progress of a game is received, just as it would be if a bet command was received when the change end command had not been received. However, with this configuration, since the bet command has not been received, the error alert sound will not be output when a bet is made, but will be output in the middle of the game round. For this reason, with this configuration, there is a concern that players may become confused and not know whether they should continue with the game round.

If a setting change command is received while an error alert sound is being output, the output of the error alert sound will be terminated. This configuration makes it possible to terminate the output of the error alert sound by performing the setting change operation again when an error alert sound is output.

Information related to the setting value is transmitted as part of the change end command. In this configuration, if the display control device 81 is unable to receive the change end command due to noise or other reasons, it may be unable to properly control based on the setting value, such as auxiliary effects that suggest the setting value. However, in a configuration where control is performed to output an error alert sound when a bet command is received without receiving a change end command after receiving a setting change command, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

The display control device 81 is configured to control the start of output of the setting change display and setting change sound when a setting change command is received, and to control the end of output of the setting change display and setting change sound when a change termination command is received. This configuration makes it possible to indicate that the setting value is in a state where it can be changed by outputting the setting change display and setting change sound. However, with this configuration, if the display control device 81 is unable to receive the change termination command due to noise or the like, the display control device 81 will continue to output the setting change display and setting change sound, even though the main control device 101 is in a state where it is possible to start a game round. Therefore, by configuring the device to control the start of output of the error notification sound based on the reception of a bet command transmitted when a bet operation related to the start of a game round is performed, it becomes possible to indicate through the error notification sound that the change termination command has not been received.

If a setting change command is received while the setting change display and setting change sound are being output, the output of the setting change display and setting change sound will be terminated. This configuration makes it possible to terminate the output of the setting change display and setting change sound by performing the setting change operation again if a start command or a command indicating the game progress is received when neither the change end command nor a bet command has been received.

The reset switch 72 and setting key insertion hole 73 are provided in the power supply box 70, which is located inside the housing 11, and the open front side of the housing 11 is covered by the front door 12. This configuration makes it difficult to change settings without opening the front door 12, thereby preventing unauthorized changes to setting values.

The termination operation for setting change operations is performed by turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF. By configuring the termination operation to require both the operation of the start lever 41 and the operation of the setting key, it is possible to make fraudulent acts more difficult and reduce the chance of falsely determining that a termination operation has been performed due to noise, etc. Furthermore, by configuring the system to detect the ON edge of the start lever 41 and the OFF edge of the setting key, it is possible to more reliably detect the operation of the setting key than, for example, a configuration that detects the OFF signal of the setting key.

In other words, some conventional setting change operations require the detection of an OFF signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a as a requirement for the termination operation. In such a configuration, the requirement for the termination operation is met even if the setting key is turned ON as the start operation and then immediately removed from the setting key insertion hole 73. This has raised concerns that the requirement of detecting an OFF signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a may not contribute to the termination operation in any way from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activity, etc.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which detects the OFF edge of the setting key, if the setting key is turned ON as a start operation and then immediately removed from the setting key insertion hole 73, it becomes necessary to turn ON the setting key again after turning ON the start lever 41. Therefore, it is possible to effectively eliminate the above-mentioned concern.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to change the setting values correctly, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

The setting key OFF wait process is configured to end when a "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the 1st area of the first sensor buffer and a "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area, and then a "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area ten consecutive times. This configuration makes it possible to avoid false detection of the OFF edge due to noise, etc.

When the setting key OFF wait process ends, i.e., when the end operation is performed, the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area. It is also possible to configure the setting value in the setting value storage area to be updated when the reset switch 72 is operated, but in such a configuration, the setting value in the setting value storage area could be changed without performing the end operation, raising concerns that the setting value could be changed improperly. On the other hand, this configuration, which stores the current setting value in the setting value storage area when the end operation is performed, makes it possible to prevent the setting value stored in the setting value storage area from being changed without the end operation being performed, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

When a change operation is performed, the setting value is saved in the display buffer and the saved setting value is displayed on the dispensed coin count display unit 62. This configuration makes it relatively easy for the operator performing the change operation to select the setting value they intend.

When determining whether an ON edge or OFF edge has been detected, an interrupt wait process is performed prior to the determination, and the system waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether an ON edge or OFF edge has been detected based on the latest signals from the start detection sensor 41a, reset detection sensor 72a, and setting key detection sensor 73a. As a result, it is possible to avoid detecting an ON edge multiple times in response to a single operation of the reset switch 72, for example, and to avoid malfunctions such as updating the setting value multiple times in response to a single operation of the reset switch 72.

(13th embodiment 2)

In the 13th embodiment 1 above, if a bet command is received without receiving a change end command, an error notification sound is output, but this configuration will be changed. Note that the basic configuration is the same as the 13th embodiment 1 above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 156 is a flowchart showing the setting change command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S131201, it is determined whether a setting change command has been received. If a setting change command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a setting change command has been received, processing proceeds to step S131202, where processing for outputting an opening sound from the speaker 65 is terminated. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the display control device 81 receives a front door command indicating that the front door 12 is open, it starts processing for outputting an opening sound from the speaker 65. The opening sound is audio data output to notify that the front door 12 is open. When the above processing is started, the sound "The door is open" is output from the speaker 65. In step S131203, processing for outputting a setting change sound from the speaker 65 is started. Here, the setting change sound is audio data output to notify that the setting value for the winning probability can be changed. The setting change sound outputs the sound "Settings are being changed." In step S131204, the setting change display is started. Specifically, the display effects, such as the customer waiting effect, that had been displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are terminated, and the process of displaying the text information "Settings being changed" is initiated. In step S131205, the confirmation timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 12000, and in step S131206, the setting change flag is set. This process then terminates.

Figure 157 is a flowchart showing the confirmation timer subtraction process performed by the display control device 81. The confirmation timer subtraction process is performed during timer interrupt processing, which is initiated approximately every 10 msec.

In step S131301, it is determined whether the setting change flag is set, and if the setting change flag is not set, this processing is terminated. If the setting change flag is set, proceed to step S131302, where it is determined whether the value of the confirmation timer is 0. If the value of the confirmation timer is not 0, in step S131303, 1 is subtracted from the value of the confirmation timer, and then the processing proceeds to step S131304. If the value of the confirmation timer is 0, the processing proceeds directly to step S131304. In step S131304, it is determined whether the confirmation flag, described below, is set, and if the confirmation flag is not set, this processing is terminated.

Figure 158 is a flowchart showing the change end command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S131401, it is determined whether or not a change end command has been received. If a change end command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a change end command has been received, the setting values indicated in the change end command are stored in step S131402, and a termination confirmation process is performed in step S131403, after which this processing is terminated.

In the termination confirmation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 159, step S131501 determines whether the value of the confirmation timer is 0. If the value of the confirmation timer is 0, step S131502 ends the process of outputting the setting change sound from the speaker 65, and step S131503 ends the setting change display on the auxiliary display unit 65. Thereafter, step S131504 clears the setting change flag and terminates this process. On the other hand, if the value of the confirmation timer is not 0, step S131505 ends the process of outputting the setting change sound from the speaker 65, and step S131506 starts the process of outputting a standby sound from the speaker 65. Here, the standby sound is sound data output to delay the start or progress of a game round. The standby sound is a sound saying "Please wait." Thereafter, step S131507 sets the confirmation flag and terminates this process.

If the confirmation flag is set, the confirmation timer subtraction process makes a positive determination in step S131304, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 157, and determines whether the value of the confirmation timer is 0 in step S131305. If the value of the confirmation timer is 0, the process of outputting the standby sound from the speaker 65 ends in step S131306, and the setting change display on the auxiliary display unit 65 ends in step S131307. Thereafter, the setting change flag is cleared in step S131308, and the confirmation flag is cleared in step S131309, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the confirmation timer is not 0, this process ends as is.

As mentioned above, the confirmation timer value is decremented by one during the timer interrupt process, which is initiated approximately every 10 msec. Therefore, if the change end command is received 120 seconds after the setting change command is received, i.e., if it takes more than 120 seconds from the start to the end of the setting change operation, the setting change display and output of the setting change sound will end. On the other hand, if the change end command is received before 120 seconds have passed since the setting change command was received, i.e., if the setting change operation was completed within 120 seconds, the setting change display will continue and the standby sound will begin to be output. Then, if 120 seconds have passed since the start of the setting change operation, the setting change display and output of the standby sound will end.

Figure 160 is a flowchart showing the bet command processing performed by the display control device 81. The main control device 101 transmits a bet command to the display control device 81 when a medal is inserted, or when one of the first credit insertion switch 56 to the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated to insert a virtual medal. At this time, in this embodiment, the bet command transmitted includes information related to the current number of bets and information related to the set value.

In step S131601, it is determined whether a bet command has been received, and if a bet command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a bet command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S131602, where the number of bets indicated by the bet command is stored. In step S131603, the setting value indicated by the bet command is stored. In step S131604, it is determined whether a setting change flag has been set, and if the setting change flag has not been set, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the setting change flag has been set, the above-mentioned termination confirmation processing is performed in step S131605, and this processing is terminated.

Figure 161 is a flowchart showing the start command processing performed by the display control device 81. When a start command is issued, that is, when the start lever 41 is operated while the specified number of medals have been bet, the main control device 101 transmits a start command to the display control device 81 indicating that a game round has begun. At this time, in this embodiment, information related to the setting values is included in the start command and transmitted.

In step S131701, it is determined whether a start command has been received, and if a start command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a start command has been received, a game start flag is set in step S131702. In step S131703, the setting value indicated by the start command is stored. In step S131704, it is determined whether a setting change flag has been set, and if the setting change flag has not been set, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the setting change flag has been set, the above-mentioned termination confirmation processing is performed in step S131705, and this processing is terminated.

Figure 162 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing performed by the display control device 81. During the lottery processing, the main control device 101 transmits to the display control device 81 a lottery result command that includes information related to the various results obtained during the lottery processing, specifically, information related to the results of the hand win/loss judgment and information related to the lottery results obtained during the section lottery processing (step S310, see Figure 12). Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the information related to the various results obtained during the lottery processing, information related to the setting values is also included in the lottery result command and transmitted.

In step S131801, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if a lottery result command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a lottery result command has been received, processing proceeds to step S131802, where the lottery result information indicated by the lottery result command as described above is stored. In step S131803, the setting value indicated by the lottery result command is stored. In step S131804, it is determined whether or not a setting change flag has been set, and if the setting change flag has not been set, processing proceeds to step S131805, where performance control processing is performed to execute auxiliary performance according to the lottery result information. If performance control processing has been performed, the lottery result command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the setting change flag has been set, the above-mentioned termination confirmation processing is performed in step S131806, and this processing is terminated.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when the main control device 101 sends a command indicating the progress of a game other than a lottery result command, it also sends the command to the display control device 81 together with information related to the setting values. The display control device 81 also performs the same processing as the lottery result command processing when processing a command that is initiated in response to receiving a command indicating the progress of a game. That is, it stores the setting value indicated by the received command, and performs the above-mentioned termination confirmation processing if the setting change flag is set.

Figure 163 is a flowchart showing the end command processing performed by the display control device 81. When a series of processes in normal processing (see Figure 11) has ended, more specifically when the BB state processing of step S215 has ended, the main control device 101 transmits an end command to the display control device 81 indicating that a round of play has ended. At this time, in this embodiment, information related to the setting values is included in the end command and transmitted.

In step S131901, it is determined whether an end command has been received, and if an end command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If an end command has been received, the game start flag is cleared in step S131102. In step S131903, the setting value indicated by the end command is stored. In step S131904, it is determined whether a setting change flag has been set, and if the setting change flag has not been set, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the setting change flag has been set, the above-mentioned end confirmation processing is performed in step S131905, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to the change end command, information related to the setting values is also transmitted in commands related to the start of a game round, such as a bet command and a start command, and commands related to the progress of a game round, such as a lottery result command and an end command. Therefore, even if the display control device 81 receives a command other than a change end command, such as a bet command, when the setting change flag is set, it can recognize that the setting change operation has ended by storing the setting value indicated by the received command. However, if the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command within 120 seconds of receiving the setting change command, the lottery result command processing performs an end confirmation process rather than an effect control process. Therefore, during such a game round, although the display content on the auxiliary display unit 65 switches from the setting change display to the normal display, the auxiliary effect corresponding to the lottery result information will no longer be displayed.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the main control device 101 has performed the process of sending a change end command but the display control device 81 fails to receive the change end command, the display control device 81 is configured to be able to determine the setting value without having to perform the setting change operation again. This configuration eliminates the need to reset the setting value even if the display control device 81 fails to receive the change end command due to noise or other reasons, thereby reducing the workload of managers of gaming facilities where the slot machine 10 is installed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of occasions where the display control device 81 is unable to perform control according to the set values, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The start command is configured to include information related to the setting value. With this configuration, even if the display control device 81 is unable to receive the change end command due to noise or the like, it can determine the setting value by receiving the start command. Furthermore, with this configuration, when the display control device 81 determines that a game round has started, it can also determine the setting value at that time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display control device 81 from being unable to perform control according to the setting value when a game round has started.

The bet command is configured to include information related to the set value. With this configuration, the display control device 81 can determine the set value by receiving the bet command, even if it is unable to receive the change end command due to noise, etc. Furthermore, with this configuration, the display control device 81 can determine the set value when it determines that the number of bets has been set, i.e., before a game round begins. As a result, even if the display control device 81 is unable to receive the change end command due to noise, etc., it is possible to reduce the chances of a game round starting in a situation where the display control device 81 recognizes that the set value can be changed.

Commands that indicate the progress of a game, such as lottery result commands, are configured to include information related to the setting values. This configuration allows the display control device 81 to grasp the setting values midway through a game, even if it is unable to receive the bet command or start command in addition to the change end command due to noise or other reasons, and to understand that the state in which the setting values can be changed has ended.

In addition to the change end command, commands related to the start of a game, such as bet commands, and commands indicating the progress of play, such as lottery result commands, also include information related to the setting values. This configuration allows the display control device 81 to grasp the setting values by the time the first game round after the setting change operation is completed is completed. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the setting change display and setting change sound continue to be output even after the first game round after the setting change operation is completed, there is a high possibility that the connector connecting the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 has poor contact or is disconnected. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the manager of the gaming facility where the slot machine 10 is installed to check the connection status of the connector, etc.

The display control device 81 is configured to control the start of output of the setting change display and setting change sound when a setting change command is received. This configuration makes it possible to indicate that the setting value can be changed by outputting the setting change display and setting change sound. Furthermore, in addition to the change end command, commands related to the start of a game round, such as a bet command, and commands indicating the progress of the game, such as a lottery result command, also include information related to the setting value. The display control device 81 is configured to control the end of output of the setting change display and setting change sound when information related to the setting value is received. With this configuration, if the main control device 101 has performed processing to send the change end command but the display control device 81 does not receive the change end command, it becomes possible to end output of the setting change display and setting change sound without performing the setting change operation again.

The display control device 81 is configured to set the confirmation timer to 12000 when a setting change command is received, and to control the termination of the setting change display and setting change sound output based on the value of the confirmation timer when other commands such as a change termination command are received. This configuration allows the display control device 81 to decide whether to continue the setting change display and setting change sound output. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of a game being started immediately after a setting change operation is completed.

If information related to the setting value is received before 120 seconds have passed since the setting change command was received, the setting change display will end after 120 seconds have passed. This configuration makes it possible to continue the setting change display for 120 seconds after the setting change operation is initiated, reducing the chances of a game being started immediately after the setting change operation is completed.

If information related to the setting value is received within 120 seconds of receiving the setting change command, the standby sound will begin to be output. This configuration makes it possible to indicate through the standby sound that the state in which the setting value can be changed has ended. As a result, it is possible to avoid confusion for workers who performed setting changes when the setting change display does not end even after the setting change operation has been completed.

If information related to setting values is received 120 seconds after the setting change command is received, the setting change display will end at that time. This configuration makes it possible to immediately end the setting change display if it takes 120 seconds or more from the start to the end of the setting change operation.

(14th embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, the probability of winning the push order bell was set so that the probability of winning the bell was the same when the left stop switch 42 was operated first, when the middle stop switch 43 was operated first, and when the right stop switch 44 was operated first. However, the probability of winning the push order bell may also be set so that the probability of winning the bell differs depending on which stop switch 42-44 is operated first. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 164 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R.

There are ten types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., number 19 on the left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., number 18 on the left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., number 17 on the left reel 32L), "White Star" (e.g., number 16 on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., number 15 on the left reel 32L), "Blue Star" (e.g., number 12 on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., number 11 on the left reel 32L), "White 7" (e.g., number 7 on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., number 6 on the left reel 32L), and "Red Star" (e.g., number 2 on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 164, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three parallel horizontal lines and two diagonally crossing lines, connecting the positions where these nine symbols are visible. More specifically, as shown in Figure 165(a), the horizontal combination lines are an upper line L1 connecting the upper row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a middle line L2 connecting the middle row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a lower line L3 connecting the lower row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, diagonal combination lines include a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols on the right reel 32R, and a upward-sloping line L5 connecting the lower symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols on the right reel 32R. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated combination line, i.e., an active line, a win is achieved, and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 165(b), only the upward-sloping line L5 is set as an active line. The four combined lines of the top line L1, middle line L2, bottom line L3, and downward-sloping line L4 are never set as active lines.

Figures 166 to 168 show the correspondence between the name of the condition device, the winning symbol combination, and the bonus awarded when a winning symbol is obtained.

BB is a conditional device that grants the bonus of transitioning to a gaming state when a winning combination is achieved.

When the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a BB win occurs. When a BB win occurs, the game state transitions to BB state.

The conditional devices that grant the replay bonus when a winning combination is achieved include Replay 1 to Replay 11.

To explain some winning patterns, for example, if the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 1 win will occur. When a Replay 1 win is achieved, the "Replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop on the middle line L2.

If the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 7 win is awarded. If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and any of the "red 7," "BAR," "red star," and "blue star" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 8 win is awarded. When a Replay 8 win is achieved, the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the downward-sloping right line L4. In other words, in this embodiment, if the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on any of the active line combinations, a Replay bonus is awarded, rather than a medal payout bonus.

Replay 9 is awarded when the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R stop on an active line, or when the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R stop on an active line. Replay 10 is awarded when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "White 7" or "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. If the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a replay 11 win will be awarded. In this embodiment, the winning combinations that stop when replay 9 wins through replay 11 wins are considered chance combinations.

The conditional devices that grant the medal payout bonus when a winning combination is achieved are Small Win 1 to Small Win 32.

Minor win 1 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upper line L1 when a win is achieved. Minor win 2 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the downward-sloping line L4 when a win is achieved. Minor win 3 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the middle line L2 when a win is achieved. Minor win 4 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upward-sloping line L4 when a win is achieved. Minor win 5 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the lower line L3 when a win is achieved. Minor win 6 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop in a small mountain shape (bottom, middle, bottom) when a win is achieved. When minor win 1 through minor win 6 are achieved, eight medals are paid out.

Small wins 7 to 27, 31, and 32 function as compensation wins in this embodiment, and one medal will be paid out if a win is achieved.

Small wins 28 to 30 function as cherry wins in this embodiment, and three medals are paid out when a win is achieved.

Figure 169 shows the lottery table selected during a non-BB internal play when the BB winning flag of "Setting 3" is not carried over. The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning role and a point value PV is set. In addition to the correspondence between winning roles, index values IV, and point values PV, Figure 169 also lists the condition devices that make up the winning role, the winning role number of the winning flag that is set when the role lottery is won, and the group number, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the configuration allows play to start only with three coins, and when the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in Figure 169, the winning probability for each combination is as follows: The probability of winning the first replay is approximately 1 in 9.1, the probability of winning the second replay is approximately 1 in 94, the probability of winning the third replay is approximately 1 in 6,600, the probability of winning the first watermelon is approximately 1 in 160, the probability of winning the second watermelon is approximately 1 in 200, the probability of winning the first chance is approximately 1 in 410, the probability of winning the second chance is approximately 1 in 820, and the probability of winning the third chance is approximately 1 in 820. The probability of winning Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2 is approximately 1 in 33. The probability of winning the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell is approximately 1 in 16. The probability of winning a common bell is approximately 1 in 54, the probability of winning a strong bell is approximately 1 in 2,200, the probability of winning a single-piece role is approximately 1 in 260, the probability of winning a weak cherry is approximately 1 in 82, the probability of winning a strong cherry is approximately 1 in 300, the probability of winning a double BB is approximately 1 in 4.8, and the probability of winning a single BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. When not in the BB internal state, there will be no winning events during the internal replay, and there will also be no losing events where no winning combination occurs.

Although not shown in the figure, the lottery table selected during a BB while the BB win flag is carried over differs from the lottery table for non-BB internal periods in that the point value PV for internal replay (IV = 4) and the point value PV for single BB (IV = 32) are different. Specifically, the point value PV for internal replay is set to 4, and the point value PV for single BB is set to 0. Therefore, during a BB, there is a 1 in 16,000 probability of winning a duplicate replay, and a single BB will not be won. Because the winning probability for other roles is the same as during a non-BB internal period, no losses occur during a BB internal period.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the winning combination and the reel stopping results.

In this embodiment, the condition device for creating the winning combination and the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set so that if a combination other than a single BB is won, some kind of winning combination will always be achieved. For example, if the second watermelon is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either Replay 7 or 8 will be achieved, and a replay bonus will be awarded. Similarly, if the strong cherry is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either Small combination 28 to 30 will be achieved, and three medals will be paid out. In the event of a single BB win, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated at a time that allows the BB symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R, to stop on the active line L5, which is the upward-sloping right line, a BB win will be achieved. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated at any other time, a BB win will not be achieved and the BB win flag will be carried over.

Furthermore, if the main control device 101 wins BB and a small winning combination, it sets and modifies the stop information so that the small winning combination takes priority. If the main control device 101 wins BB and a replay combination, it sets and modifies the stop information so that the replay winning combination takes priority. Therefore, for example, if a duplicate BB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the small winning combinations 7-27, 31, or 32 will be won, and one medal will be paid out. If the first replay is won while inside BB, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the replay combinations 1, 2, or 4 will be won, and a replay bonus will be awarded. The same applies if another combination is won while inside BB; regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, a winning combination for a condition device other than BB will be won, and the corresponding bonus will be awarded. As mentioned above, since no losses occur within the BB, in this embodiment, a BB win cannot be achieved in any game other than the one in which a single BB was won. In other words, in the first embodiment, a BB win was avoided by playing two coins to enter the BB2 state and then playing three coins, but in this embodiment, a BB win can be avoided without following the above procedure.

If you win on Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, operating the left stop switch 42, then the centre stop switch 43, and then the right stop switch 44 will result in a win for minor win 1, resulting in the payout of eight medals. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a win for minor win 7, 10, 15, or 18, resulting in the payout of one medal. The same is true for winning on Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Middle-Left-Right Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Middle-Right-Left Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Centre-Left Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2, Right-Left-Centre Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2, Right-Left-Centre Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order corresponding to the winning combination will result in a win for the winning condition device among minor wins 1-6, resulting in the payout of eight medals. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a win for any winning condition device other than minor wins 1-6, resulting in the payout of one medal. If the first special bell is won, operating the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 in this order will result in minor win 3 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 14, or 27 and one medal being paid out. If the second special bell is won, operating the middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 in this order will result in minor win 4 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 14, or 27 and one medal being paid out. If the third special bell is won, operating the right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 in this order will result in minor win 5 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 10 or 23 to 27 and one medal being paid out. If the fourth special bell is won, operating the right stop switch 44 → center stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 in this order will result in minor win 6 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 10 or 23 to 27 and one medal being paid out. In the following, left-center-right Bell 1, left-center-right Bell 2, left-center-left Bell 1, left-center-left Bell 2, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-right-left Bell 1, center-right-left Bell 2, right-center-left Bell 1, right-center-left Bell 2, right-left-center Bell 1, right-left-center Bell 2, and the 1st to 4th special bells are collectively referred to as "push order roles" or "push order bells." In addition, minor roles 1 to 6 are achieved when the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in any combination line or small hill shape. For this reason, in the following, minor roles 1 to 6 are collectively referred to as "bell roles."

We will now explain the game zones in this embodiment. Figure 170 shows the transition of game zones.

The game zone in this embodiment is the same as in the first embodiment above in that it consists of two types of game zones: a normal zone and a favorable zone (see Figure 24). However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment above in that it can only be played with three coins; the favorable zone consists of three types of game modes: chance mode, premonition mode, and notification mode; the chance mode consists of two types of game zones: a normal zone and a challenge zone (CZ); the notification mode ends based on the number of games played in the notification mode rather than the net increase in coins; and the navigation rate, which notifies the operation sequence that can achieve a bell win when the push order bell is hit in the notification mode, can change.

To briefly explain chance mode, chance mode is a game mode in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode. Chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in chance mode. The transition lottery is held when a predetermined combination is won or when the points added in chance mode reach a predetermined value (1000 in this embodiment). Chance mode is made up of two game zones: the normal zone and the challenge zone. When transitioning to the challenge zone, the expected value of points added is higher than in the normal zone. When chance mode ends, the game transitions to notification mode via premonition mode. In chance mode and premonition mode, as in the normal zone, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced if the push order bell is won.

The following explains the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing game zones, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 171 and onwards. To facilitate understanding, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained separately.

First, we will explain the processing during normal intervals.

Figure 171 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process for the normal section. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S140101, it is determined whether a win flag has been set in the win flag storage area 106a, i.e., whether any role has been won. If the win flag has been set, proceed to step S140102, where it is determined whether the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the win role numbers 1 to 31 (see FIG. 169) are stored in the win flag storage area 106a. If the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won, a transition flag is set in step S140103, and the interval indicator 66 is turned ON in step S140104, and this processing ends. If the win flag is not set, or if the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has not been won, i.e., if a single BB has been won, this processing ends immediately.

Figure 172 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in the normal interval. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S140201, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery for this game has been won. In this case, the transition flag is cleared in step S140202. In step S140203, it is determined whether the first stop command has been issued to the left reel 32L, i.e., whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time, the advantageous zone transition processing shown in steps S140204 to S140212 is performed.

In the advantageous zone transition process, in step S140204, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag. In step S140205, the zone game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S140206, the game mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag, and in step S140207, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag. In step S140208, the transition game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 700, and in step S140209, the mode game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In step S140210, the point value counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S140211, the difference number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 0. Then, in step S140212, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends. Here, the interval command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp various information related to the play interval at the time of the end of the game (i.e., the play interval, play mode, play zone, and if it is a favorable interval, the number of plays played in the favorable interval, the number of plays played in the play mode, points, etc.) of the next game. In step S140212, an interval command corresponding to the play interval flag, play mode flag, play zone flag, and various counter values set in the interval information storage area 106d is sent.

If it is determined in step S140203 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, the process proceeds to step S140213 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the process ends after performing the advantageous zone transition process shown in steps S140204 to S140212. On the other hand, if the push order bell has been won, a zone command is sent in step S140212 and the process ends. In other words, if the push order bell is won in the normal zone and the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, even if the transition lottery has been won, the result is invalidated and the game does not transition to chance mode.

If it is determined in step S140201 that the transition flag is not set, an interval command is sent in step S140212, and this processing ends.

As described above, if a role other than a single BB is won during the normal period, the game will transition to the chance mode of the advantageous period. As shown in Figure 169, for example, in "Setting 3," the probability of winning a single BB while not inside a BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first during the normal period, the game will end in almost one game. Also, if the player is inside a BB, a role other than a single BB will always be won, so if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the normal period will end in one game.

Next, we will explain the processing in the chance mode of the advantageous zone. To make it easier to understand, we will first explain the processing in the normal zone.

Figure 173 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S140301, it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. In this embodiment, the first watermelon, second watermelon, first chance, second chance, third chance, strong bell, common bell, weak cherry, and strong cherry are set as rare combinations. Therefore, in step S140301, it is determined whether any of the winning combination numbers 5 to 9, 26, 27, 29, and 30 (see FIG. 169) is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S140302, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to notification mode. In the transition lottery for chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the combination has been won or not. In step S140303, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the transition flag is set in step S140304, and then this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S140303 that the transition lottery has not been won, a point lottery is held in step S140306. In the point lottery, a point value is obtained based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the role is a win or a failure. Figure 174 (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles and obtained point values in the normal zone. In the normal zone, if a rare role is won, there is a 90% chance that 0 points will be obtained, and a 10% chance that 20 points, 50 points, or 100 points will be obtained. For example, if the first or second watermelon is won, there is a 5% chance that 20 points will be obtained, a 3% chance that 50 points will be obtained, and a 2% chance that 100 points will be obtained. If a point lottery has been held, the obtained points are added to the value of the point value counter in step S140307, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S140301 that a rare role has not been won, proceed to step S140305 to determine whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, this process ends; if the push order bell has not been won, a point lottery is conducted in step S140306. If a rare role or push order bell has not been won, i.e., if a replay or 1-coin role has been won, in the normal zone, as shown in Figure 174 (a), 0 points will be acquired 90% of the time, 10 points will be acquired 5% of the time, and 20 points will be acquired 5% of the time. If a point lottery has been conducted, the acquired points are added to the value of the point value counter in step S140307, and this process ends.

Figure 175 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S140401, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S140402, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S140401, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S140411.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S140403 to determine whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first. If it is determined that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, proceed to step S140414 to determine whether the push order bell was won. If the left stop switch 42 was operated first, or if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first without winning the push order bell, step S140404 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S140405 determines whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won. Therefore, step S140406 clears the transition flag, and step S140408 changes the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d to a premonition flag. In the following step S140409, the transition game number counter is set to 10, and in step S140410, the mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, in step S140411, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S140405 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S140407, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to an omen flag in step S140408. In the following step S140409, the transition game number counter is set to 10, and in step S140410, the mode game number counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S140411, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S140414 that the push order bell has been won, i.e., if the left stop switch 42 was not operated initially when the push order bell has been won, or if it is determined in step S140407 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, proceed to step S140412 and perform CZ/point processing related to transition to the challenge zone and point addition.

In the CZ point processing, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 176, in step S140501, it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S140502, where it is determined whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated first. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated first, a point lottery is conducted in step S140503. If the push order bell has been won, in the normal zone, as shown in FIG. 174(a), 0 points are acquired with a 90% probability, 10 points with a 2% probability, 20 points with a 5% probability, 50 points with a 2% probability, and 100 points with a 1% probability. If a point lottery is conducted, the acquired points are added to the value of the point value counter in step S140504, and then the process proceeds to step S140505. On the other hand, if the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the process proceeds to step S140505 without conducting a point lottery.

In step S140505, it is determined whether the current gaming zone is the normal zone. If it is the normal zone, the process proceeds to step S140506, where it is determined whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has not been won, the process ends. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S140507, where a CZ transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the challenge zone. In the CZ transition lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. In step S140508, it is determined whether the CZ transition lottery has been won. If the CZ transition lottery has not been won, the process ends. If the CZ transition lottery has been won, the gaming zone flag is changed to a challenge flag in step S140509, and the CZ game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0 in step S140510. Then, in step S140511, 50 is added to the point value counter, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game section processing, if the CZ/point processing is completed in step S140412, proceed to step S140413 and perform the second transition lottery processing related to the transition to the notification mode based on points.

In the second transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 177, step S140601 determines whether the value of the point value counter is greater than 999, i.e., whether the points have reached 1000. If the points have not reached 1000, this process is terminated. If the points have reached 1000, 1000 is subtracted from the value of the point value counter in step S140602. In the following step S140603, a transition lottery is conducted to determine whether to transition to the notification mode. In the transition lottery based on points, the determination is made based on the random number obtained when determining whether the role is successful. In step S140604, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won, and if the transition lottery has not been won, this process is terminated. If the transition lottery has been won, step S140605 changes the game mode flag to a premonition flag, and step S140606 sets the transition game number counter to 10. Then, in step S140607, the mode game number counter is set to 0, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game zone processing, if the second transition lottery processing is completed in step S140413, an zone command is sent in step S140411, and this processing ends.

Next, we will explain the processing that takes place in the challenge zone.

In the section lottery process in the challenge zone (see Figure 173), the results of the point lottery in step S140306 differ from those in the normal zone. Figure 174 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles and acquired point values in the challenge zone. In the challenge zone, whether you win a rare role, a single-piece role, or a replay, you will always acquire 10, 20, 50, or 100 points. For example, if you win the first or second watermelon, in the normal zone, there is a 90% chance that you will acquire 0 points, but in the challenge zone, there is a 50% chance that you will acquire 20 points, a 30% chance that you will acquire 50 points, and a 20% chance that you will acquire 100 points.

In the game zone processing in the challenge zone (see FIG. 175), processing specific to the CZ point processing in step S140412 is performed. In the CZ point processing shown in FIG. 176, the results of the point lottery in step S140503 are different from those in the normal zone. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174(b), if the push order bell is won, there is a 20% chance of obtaining 10 points, a 50% chance of obtaining 20 points, a 20% chance of obtaining 50 points, and a 10% chance of obtaining 100 points. In other words, in the challenge zone, even if the push order bell is won, a value of 10 points or more is obtained in the point lottery. Then, if it is determined in step S140505 that the current game zone is the challenge zone, 1 is added to the value of the CZ game number counter in step S140512, and it is determined in step S140513 whether the value of the CZ game number counter has reached 5. If the value of the CZ game number counter is not 5, this process ends; if the value of the CZ game number counter is 5, the game zone flag is changed to a normal flag in step S140514, and then this process ends.

Here, we will explain the gameplay in Chance Mode.

When transitioning from the normal zone to the chance mode, the game starts in the normal zone. In the normal zone, if a rare combination is won, a lottery for transition to the notification mode is held at the start of the game. If the lottery for transition to the notification mode is not won, a lottery for points is held at the start of the game, and a lottery for transition to the challenge zone is held at the end of the game. If a rare combination is not won, a lottery for transition to the notification mode and a lottery for transition to the challenge zone are not held, but a lottery for points is held. If a replay or a single-coin combination is won, a lottery for points is held at the start of the game. If the push-order bell is won, a lottery for points is held at the end of the game. However, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first in a game in which the push-order bell is won, a lottery for points is not held. As a result, in the normal zone, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the expected number of points earned per game is approximately 2.8 points. If a stop switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the expected number of points earned per game is approximately 0.9 points. If you win the lottery to move to the Challenge Zone, your gaming zone will move from the normal zone to the Challenge Zone.

In the challenge zone, if a rare role is won, a lottery to transition to notification mode is held at the start of the game, just as in the normal zone. Furthermore, in the challenge zone, 10 or more points are earned regardless of the winning role. However, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first in a game in which the push order bell is won, the point lottery will not be held, just like in the normal zone. As a result, in the challenge zone, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first to play, the expected number of points earned per game is approximately 28 points, and if a switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first to play, the expected number of points earned per game is approximately 9 points. After five plays have been played in the challenge zone, the challenge zone ends and the game returns to the normal zone.

When 1,000 points are reached in the normal zone or challenge zone, a lottery for transition to notification mode is held. As mentioned above, when transitioning to the challenge zone, the expected number of points earned per game increases by approximately 10 times compared to the normal zone. Therefore, in chance mode, if you do not win the lottery for transition to notification mode based on a rare winning combination, transitioning to the challenge zone and earning more points in the challenge zone is a shortcut to transitioning to notification mode. Note that even if you do not win the lottery for transition to notification mode, if the value of the mode game number counter in chance mode reaches 700, you will transition from chance mode to premonition mode, just as if you won the lottery for transition to notification mode.

As described above, the game will transition from chance mode to premonition mode if the player wins the lottery to transition to notification mode or if the value of the mode game number counter reaches 700. Here, if the stop switch 43 or 44 other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first in chance mode, and the push order bell has been won in that game, the player will be at a disadvantage in the following ways. First, regardless of the current game zone, the point lottery will no longer be held. Also, while the value of the interval game number counter, which is related to the end condition of the advantageous zone, is updated, the value of the mode game number counter, which is related to the transition to notification mode, is no longer updated. In addition, if the current game zone is the challenge zone, the value of the CZ game number counter is updated. Therefore, in chance mode, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first.

This embodiment is characterized by the CZ effects that are performed in the challenge zone. Therefore, the following describes the processing related to the auxiliary effects performed by the display control device 81.

Figure 178 shows an example of an auxiliary effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Figure 178(a) shows the display mode in the normal zone, or more specifically, the normal screen in the normal zone. In the normal zone, the young man character walking down the road is displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, the number of games played since transitioning to chance mode is displayed in the upper left of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the point acquisition status (hereinafter also referred to as "display points") is displayed in the upper right of the auxiliary display unit 65. Figure 178(a) displays that the current number of games, or the number of games played if the game has ended, is 341, and also shows that 600 of the 1000 points have been acquired.

Figures 178(b) and 178(c) show the CZ effect performed in the challenge zone. When a game is started in the challenge zone, as shown in Figure 178(b), a young man character holding a mallet and a point image placed on a piece of wood are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, as in the normal zone, the number of games played after transitioning to the chance mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display points are displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. Also, in the challenge zone, the number of games remaining in the challenge zone is displayed below the display points. Figure 178(b) displays that the current number of games is 347, that 610 points out of 1000 points have been acquired, and that 4 games remain in the challenge zone. Thereafter, each time a stop command is issued by operating stop switches 42-44, a cut-in effect is performed in which the young man character swings the mallet and the young man character's facial expression is enlarged. When all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, the display shows the young man character smashing the point image and the piece of wood with a mallet, along with the number of points to be added to the displayed points for the current game. Figure 178(c) shows that 50 points will be added to the displayed points for the current game. Note that the addition to the displayed points occurs after the points currently displayed in the center of the auxiliary display section 65 are hidden.

First, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 in the challenge zone transition game, which transitions from the normal zone to the challenge zone, that are relevant to the present invention.

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the point management processing performed by the display control device 81. The point management processing is initiated when a section command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S140701, it is determined whether the information indicating the play zone included in the interval command is a challenge zone. If it is a challenge zone, the process proceeds to step S140702, where it is determined whether the current game was a challenge zone transition game. Specifically, it is determined whether the play zone flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is a normal flag indicating a normal zone. If the current game was a challenge zone transition game, the process proceeds to step S140703, where the play zone flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a challenge flag. In step S140704, the CZ game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 5. In step S140705, the increased points are calculated. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a total point counter for storing information indicating the value of the point value counter included in the interval command (hereinafter also referred to as "point information value"), a front point counter for storing points to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a back point counter for storing points not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In step S140705, the points gained in this game (increased points) are calculated by subtracting the value of the total points counter from the point information value. In step S140706, it is determined whether the increased points are greater than 0.

As explained in the CZ/point processing performed by the main control unit 101, 50 points are always awarded when transitioning from the normal zone to the challenge zone (step S140511, see Figure 176). Therefore, the increased points calculated in step S140705 are generally positive values. However, if the player reaches 1000 points using the 50 points or points acquired in the point lottery, a lottery is held to transition to the notification mode, and 1000 is subtracted from the value of the point value counter (see Figure 177). Therefore, if the player reaches 1000 points in the challenge zone transition game and does not win the lottery to transition to the notification mode, the increased points will be a negative value.

If it is determined in step S140706 that the increased points are greater than 0, the increased points are added to the value of the hidden point counter in step S140707, and the point information value is set in the total point counter in step S140708, and this processing ends. In this way, if the increased points are a positive value, the value of the front point counter corresponding to the displayed points is not changed. In other words, the increased points are not announced in the challenge zone transition game.

If it is determined in step S140706 that the increased points are 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S140709, where the front point counter is set to 0. This changes the displayed points to 0. In step S140710, the point information value is set in the back point counter. Then, in step S140708, the point information value is set in the total point counter, and this process ends. In this way, when a lottery for transition to notification mode is held in the challenge zone transition game, the remaining points are not notified even if points remain.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 during the first through fourth games in the challenge zone, including those related to the present invention.

Figure 180 is a flowchart showing the CZ effect determination process performed by the display control device 81. The CZ effect determination process is initiated when a lottery result command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S140801, 1 is subtracted from the value of the CZ game number counter, and the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed to the value of the CZ game number counter. In step S140802, 1 is added to the value of the display game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81, and the number of games after transition to chance mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed to the value of the display game number counter. In step S140803, a notification point determination process is performed to determine the points to be notified for the current game. In the notification point determination process, a lottery table corresponding to the value of the back point counter is obtained, and notification points are determined based on the winning role and the random number obtained by the display control device 81.

Figure 181(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles and notification point values when the value of the back point counter is 50 or less, and Figure 181(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles and notification point values when the value of the back point counter is 51 or more. When the value of the back point counter is 50 or less, one of 10 points, 20 points, 30 points, 40 points, or 50 points is acquired. For example, if the first watermelon or the second watermelon is won, 20 points are acquired with a 40% probability, 30 points are acquired with a 30% probability, 40 points are acquired with a 20% probability, and 50 points are acquired with a 10% probability. Furthermore, when the value of the back point counter is 51 or more, one of 10 points, 20 points, 50 points, or 100 points is acquired. For example, if you win the first or second watermelon, there is a 40% chance that you will receive 20 points, a 40% chance that you will receive 50 points, and a 20% chance that you will receive 100 points.

Once the notification points have been determined, proceed to step S140804 to determine whether the acquired notification points are greater than the value of the hidden point counter. If the acquired notification points are greater than the value of the hidden point counter, proceed to step S140805 to perform notification point change processing. In the notification point change processing, determine whether the value of the hidden point counter matches any of the following: 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50. If it matches any of the above values, the notification points are changed to the value of the hidden point counter. If it does not match any of the above values, the notification points are changed to 50. To give a specific example, if the value of the hidden point counter is 40 and you win either the first chance, second chance, or third chance, you will always receive 50 points as notification points, as shown in Figure 181 (a). In this case, since the value of the hidden point counter is only 40, the notification point change processing changes the notification points from 50 to 40. As explained above in the point lottery performed by the main control device 101, if the first, second, or third chance in the challenge zone is won, 50 or 100 points are acquired (see FIG. 174 (b)). The result of this point lottery is sent included in the lottery result command, so at the time of performing the point change process, the display control device 81 is aware that in addition to the hidden points, there are also points acquired in the current game that can be reported. However, in the notification point determination process and notification point change process, the display control device 81 determines and changes the notification points so that they are equal to or less than the value of the hidden point counter.

If it is determined in step S140804 that the notification points are less than or equal to the value of the hidden point counter, or if notification point change processing is performed in step S140805, the process proceeds to step S140806 and the notification points are stored. Then, in step S140807, a performance content determination process is performed to determine the performance content of the CZ performance, and this process ends. In the performance content determination process, the type of cut-in performance to be displayed during the CZ performance is determined based on the stored notification points and a random number obtained by the display control device 81. Figure 182 is a diagram showing the correspondence between notification points and performance content. In this embodiment, three types of cut-in performances are provided: weak cut-in, medium cut-in, and strong cut-in, and the larger the stored notification points, the higher the probability that a strong cut-in will be selected. For example, if the stored notification points are 0 or 10, a weak cut-in will be selected 100% of the time; if the stored notification points are 100, a weak cut-in will be selected 10%, a medium cut-in will be selected 20%, and a strong cut-in will be selected 70% of the time.

Figure 183 is a flowchart showing the stop command processing performed by the display control device 81. When a stop command is issued in response to the operation of a stop switch 42-44, the main control device 101 in this embodiment transmits a stop command to the display control device 81 indicating whether the current stop command is a first stop command, a second stop command, or a third stop command, and which stop switch was operated.

In step S140901, it is determined whether a stop command has been received, and if a stop command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a stop command has been received, processing proceeds to step S140902, where it is determined whether a first stop command has been issued. If a first stop command has been issued, processing proceeds to step S140903, where it is determined whether the operated stop switch is the left stop switch 42. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated and the first stop command has been issued, processing proceeds to step S140904, where a performance progression process is performed to progress the performance content of the auxiliary performance, and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S140903 that the stop switch operated is not the left stop switch 42, i.e., if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated and the first stop command is generated, proceed to step S140905 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, proceed to step S140906 to determine whether the current game mode is not the notification mode. If it is determined that the current game mode is not the notification mode, i.e., if the game is in the normal interval or if the current game mode is the chance mode or the premonition mode, then screen blackout processing is performed in step S140907. In the screen blackout processing, layers above the layers displaying the auxiliary effects and game counts are displayed in gray, thereby reducing the visibility of information such as the content of the auxiliary effects and the game counts. Note that the screen blackout processing may also be configured to reduce the visibility of information such as the content of the auxiliary effects and the game counts by reducing the brightness of the layers displaying the auxiliary effects and game counts. If the screen is blacked out, step S140904 performs effect progression processing to advance the auxiliary effect content, and then this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S140905 that the push order bell has not been won, or if it is determined in step S140906 that the current game mode is the notification mode, even if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated and the first stop command is issued, the screen will not be darkened, and instead the performance progression process will be performed in step S140904 to progress the auxiliary performance content, and this process will end.

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the point management processing performed by the display control device 81. The point management processing is initiated when a section command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S140701, it is determined whether the information indicating the play zone included in the interval command is a challenge zone. If it is a challenge zone, proceed to step S140702, where it is determined whether the current game is a challenge zone transition game. If the current game is not a challenge zone transition game, CZ processing is performed in step S140711, and this processing ends.

In CZ processing, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 184, the increased points are calculated in step S141001. The increased points are calculated by subtracting the value of the total point counter from the point information value. In step S141002, it is determined whether the increased points are 0 or greater.

As explained in the point lottery performed by the main control device 101, in the challenge zone, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, 10 or more points will be acquired regardless of the winning role (see Figure 174 (b)). Therefore, the increased points calculated in step S141001 will generally be a positive value. An event in which the increased points become 0 occurs when a switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first in a game in which the push order bell has been won. An event in which the increased points become a negative value occurs when 1000 points are reached and the lottery to transition to the alarm mode is not won.

If it is determined in step S141002 that the increased points are 0 or greater, the process proceeds to step S141003, where the notification points notified in the current game are subtracted from the value of the hidden point counter. In step S141004, the increased points are added to the value of the hidden point counter. In step S141005, the notification points are added to the value of the front point counter, and the display points displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 are changed to the value of the front point counter. Thereafter, in step S141006, the point information value is set to the total point counter, and this processing ends. In this way, if the increased points are a value of 0 or greater, the notification points, rather than the increased points, are added to the value of the front point counter corresponding to the display points. Because the notification points are determined within the range of the hidden point counter value, it can be said that in the challenge zone, the increased points in the current game are notified from the next game onwards.

If it is determined in step S141002 that the increased points are a negative value, the process proceeds to step S141007, where the front point counter is set to 0 and the display points are changed to 0 points. In step S141008, the point information value is set in the back point counter. Then, in step S141006, the point information value is set in the total point counter, and this process ends. In this way, when a lottery to transition to notification mode is held in the challenge zone, the remaining points are not notified even if points remain.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 in the fifth game, i.e., the final game, of the challenge zone, that are relevant to the present invention.

The CZ effect determination process and stop command process are the same as those for games 1 to 4 in the Challenge Zone, so explanations will be omitted.

In the final game of the challenge zone, the main control device 101 changes the play zone flag from a challenge flag to a normal flag in the CZ/point processing (step S140514, see Figure 176). Accordingly, the section command sent in the final game of the challenge zone will contain information indicating the normal zone rather than information indicating the challenge zone.

In the point management process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 179, in step S140701, it is determined whether the information indicating the play zone included in the section command is a challenge zone. If it is a normal zone and not a challenge zone, normal processing is performed in step S140712, and this process ends.

In normal processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 185, in step S141101, it is determined whether the current game was a normal zone transition game. Specifically, it is determined whether the play zone flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is a challenge flag. If the current game was a normal zone transition game, proceed to step S141102, and change the play zone flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 to a normal flag. Then, in step S141103, the above-mentioned CZ processing is performed, and this processing ends. In other words, if the increased points in the final game of the challenge zone are a value of 0 or more, the increased points in the final game are not announced in the current challenge zone. Furthermore, if a lottery for transition to the announcement mode is held in the final game of the challenge zone, even if points remain, the remaining points are not announced in the current challenge zone.

If it is determined in step S141101 that the current game is not a normal zone transition game, this means that the game was played in the normal zone. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S141104, where the increased points are calculated. The increased points are calculated by subtracting the value of the total point counter from the point information value. In step S141105, it is determined whether the increased points are 0 or greater.

If it is determined that the increased points are 0 or greater, the process proceeds to step S141106, where the increased points are added to the value of the front point counter, and the display points displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are changed to the value of the front point counter. Then, in step S141107, the point information value is set in the total point counter, and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in step S141105 that the increased points are a negative value, the process proceeds to step S141108, where the point information value is set in the front point counter, and the display points are changed to the point information value. In step S141109, the back point counter is set to 0. Then, in step S141107, the point information value is set in the total point counter, and this process ends.

As described above, in the normal zone, if points increase, the increased points are announced in the point increase game. If points decrease after a lottery to transition to notification mode is performed, the decreased points are announced in the point decrease game. Here, in the normal zone, the value of the back point counter is not changed except when points decrease. In other words, if increased points are added to the value of the back point counter in the final game of the challenge zone, or if the challenge zone ends with the value of the back point counter not equal to 0, the points stored in the above back point counter will be announced in the next and subsequent challenge zones, except when a lottery to transition to notification mode is performed and points decrease.

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the main control unit 101 in the favorable zone precursor mode.

In the section lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12) performed at the start of the game, if the game is in premonition mode, the process is terminated. This is because the transition to notification mode is confirmed in premonition mode, so there is no need to perform a lottery for transition to notification mode or a point lottery.

Figure 186 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in the premonition mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S141201, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S141202, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S141201, and after sending a zone command in step S141209, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S141203 to determine whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first. If it is determined that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, proceed to step S141210 to determine whether the push order bell was won. If the left stop switch 42 was operated first, or if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first without winning the push order bell, add 1 to the value of the mode game number counter in step S141204, and determine whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S141205. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, send an interval command in step S141209 and then terminate this processing. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, in step S141206 the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In the following step S141207, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S141208, the mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, in step S141209, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S141210 that the push order bell has been won, i.e., if the left stop switch 42 was not operated first when the push order bell has been won, a section command is sent in step S141209 and this processing ends.

As described above, the premonition mode ends when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. As explained in the game section processing in chance mode, when transitioning from chance mode to premonition mode, the transition game number counter is set to 10 (step S140409, see Figure 175). Therefore, if a game is played by first operating the left stop switch 42, the premonition mode will end after 10 games. On the other hand, if a game is played without first operating the left stop switch 42, the mode game number counter will not be updated if the push order bell is won in that game. Therefore, if a game is played without first operating the left stop switch 42, the end of the premonition mode, i.e., the transition to the notification mode, will be delayed by the number of times the push order bell is won.

This embodiment is characterized by the premonition effects performed in premonition mode. Therefore, the following describes the processing related to the auxiliary effects performed by the display control device 81.

Figure 187 is a flowchart showing the sign confirmation process performed by the display control device 81. The sign confirmation process is initiated when an interval command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S141301, it is determined whether the information indicating the game mode included in the interval command indicates premonition mode. If it is not premonition mode, this processing is terminated. If it is premonition mode, proceed to step S141302, where it is determined whether the current game was a premonition mode transition game. Specifically, it is determined whether the game mode flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is a chance flag indicating chance mode. If the current game is not a premonition mode transition game, this processing is terminated. If the current game is a premonition mode transition game, proceed to step S141303, where the game mode flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a premonition flag. In step S141304, the premonition game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. Then, in step S141305, a 10G performance setting process is performed, and this processing is terminated. As described above, premonition mode ends after 10 games if the game is played by first operating the left stop switch 42. To give an overview of the premonition effects performed in premonition mode, the premonition effects are composed of hype effects performed between games 1 and 7, and showdown effects performed between games 8 and 10. The 10G effect setting process determines the type and content of the hype effects performed between games 1 and 7, and the content of the showdown effects performed between games 8 and 10, and stores the results of these decisions in the RAM of the display control device 81.

Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the premonition effect processing performed by the display control device 81. The premonition effect processing is initiated when a lottery result command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S141401, 1 is added to the value of the display game number counter stored in the RAM of the display control device 81, and the number of games after transition to chance mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed to the value of the display game number counter. In step S141402, 1 is added to the value of the premonition game number counter, and in step S141403, it is determined whether the value of the premonition game number counter is less than 10. If the value of the premonition game number counter is less than 10, proceed to step S141404, and start an auxiliary effect according to the value of the premonition game number counter based on the result of the previous 10G effect setting process. Then, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S141403 that the value of the premonition game number counter is not less than 10, it is determined in step S141405 whether the value of the premonition game number counter is 10. If the value of the premonition game number counter is 10, this means that this is the final game of the premonition effect, so in step S141406 an announcement effect is started and this processing ends. In the announcement effect, an effect is displayed to show victory in the showdown effect that has been running since the 8th game, and "WIN" is displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

If it is determined in step S141405 that the value of the premonition game number counter is not 10, this means that the premonition mode has continued for 11 games or more. In such a case, the final screen of the announcement effect (displaying "WIN") continues to be displayed in step S141407, and "Preparing" is additionally displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S141408, and this processing ends.

The stop command processing that is performed when a stop command is issued in the premonition mode is the same as the stop command processing that is performed in the challenge zone, so an explanation will be omitted. That is, the stop command processing involves performing a performance progression process that advances the auxiliary performance in response to the issuance of a stop command, and also performs a screen blackout process if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first in a game that has won the push order bell (see Figure 183).

As described above, when transitioning from chance mode to premonition mode, the content of the premonition effects to be performed up to the 10th game in the premonition mode transition game is determined. Then, in the premonition effects, an announcement effect is performed in the 10th game to announce the transition to notification mode. If the left stop switch 42 is operated first in each game in premonition mode, or if the push order bell is not won in the game in which a switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first in premonition mode, the premonition mode will end in the 10th game. Therefore, in such cases, the timing of the announcement effect and the timing of the end of premonition mode will coincide. On the other hand, if the push order bell is won in the game in which a switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first in premonition mode, the premonition mode will end in the 11th game or later. In such cases, the announcement effect is performed in the 10th game, and the final screen of the announcement effect and the "Preparing" message will continue to be displayed until the game in which premonition mode ends.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 189 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S141501, it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, proceed to step S141502, where it is determined whether or not a rare role has been won. If a rare role has been won, proceed to step S141503, where an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game count counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won. In the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if the first watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1 in 8 chance of winning either 10, 30, or 50 additional games. In step S141504, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the additional flag is set in step S141505, and an additional command is sent in step S141506. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the add-on lottery and the number of add-on games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S141507, a value corresponding to the result of the add-on lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This processing then ends. If the add-on lottery is not won, this processing ends without setting the add-on flag. If a rare combination is not won, this processing ends without performing the add-on lottery.

If it is determined in step S141501 that the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S141508, where a navigation determination process is performed to determine whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. The navigation determination process determines whether or not to perform navigation based on the set game mode flag, the set winning flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the winning combination has been achieved. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, if any of the following has been won: left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, and if notification mode A is used, it is determined that navigation will be performed 33% of the time. More specifically, there are 1,980 random number values that result in a win for each of the above roles (see FIG. 169 ). Therefore, 660 random number values are set as random number values that are determined to be navigational, and the remaining 1,320 random number values are set as random number values that are determined not to be navigational. If any of the first, second, third, or fourth special bells is won, navigation is determined to occur 100% of the time in notification mode A. In step S141509, it is determined whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. If navigation is to occur, a navigation flag is set in step S141510, and the process ends. If navigation is not to occur, a prediction flag is set in step S141511, and a prediction command is sent in step S141512, and the process ends. Here, the prediction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the user that navigation will not occur for the operation sequence that will result in a bell win.

As described above, in notification mode A, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in the bell winning may or may not be navigated. Therefore, the following describes the processing performed by the main control unit 101 and display control unit 81 when actually navigating the operation sequence.

The main control device 101 performs processing to display on the instruction monitor the operation sequence that can result in a bell win during the rotation start processing (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display processing (see FIG. 19). In the first embodiment, the instruction monitor was displayed after determining whether or not the push order bell was won (S603, S802). However, in this embodiment, the instruction monitor is displayed after determining whether or not the navigation flag is set, rather than whether or not the push order bell was won, and the instruction monitor is displayed if the navigation flag is set.

Figure 191 is a flowchart showing the winning role information creation process. The winning role information creation process is a process for creating winning role information that indicates the result of the role win/loss judgment from the various information that makes up the lottery result command. The winning role information creation process is performed after the section lottery process is completed and before the lottery result command is sent (see Figure 12).

In step S141601, it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the winning role number is set as winning role information in step S141602, and this process ends. If the push order bell has been won, proceed to step S141603, and it is determined whether the navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is set, this means that the current game mode is the notification mode, and it has been decided to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. In this case, the winning role number is set as winning role information in step S141602, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the navigation flag is not set, this means that the current game mode is normal or chance mode, or that the current game mode is notification mode but a decision has been made not to navigate the operation sequence that can result in a bell win. In such cases, a group number is set as winning role information in step S141604, and this processing ends. Specifically, if any of the following is won: left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, group number "1" is set as winning role information. If any of the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, or fourth special bell is won, group number "2" is set as winning role information. When a group number is set, the winning role number is not set as winning role information. Therefore, when the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command including a group number, it can determine that one of the push order bells corresponding to the group number has been selected, but it cannot determine which push order bell has been selected. Note that hereinafter, left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, and right-left-center bell 2 are collectively referred to as "push order group 1." Additionally, the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell are collectively referred to as "push order group 2."

Figure 192 is a flowchart showing the operation navigation process performed by the display control device 81. The operation navigation process is initiated when a lottery result command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S141701, it is determined whether a winning role number has been received. If a winning role number has been received, in step S141702 it is determined whether the winning role is a push order bell, and if it is not a push order bell, this process ends. If a winning role number indicating that the winning role is a push order bell has been received, this means that the main control unit 101 has decided to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. In such a case, in step S141703, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S141701 that a winning combination number has not been received, this means that a group number has been received. In this case, the process proceeds to step S141704, where it is determined whether a prediction command has been received. If a prediction command has not been received, this means that the current play area is the normal area or chance mode, and the process simply ends. If a prediction command has been received, the process displays "???" on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S141705, and the process ends. By displaying "???" on the auxiliary display unit 65, it is possible to notify the player that the push order bell has been won, although it does not guide the player to the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of "???" functions as a promotion suggestion that will increase the navigation rate in subsequent games.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in a game session in which a simulated game is played, the above operation sequence and "???" will be displayed when the simulated game ends and the actual game begins.

Figure 193 is a flowchart showing the promotion determination process performed by the main control device 101. The promotion determination process is performed after the reel control process (S212, see Figure 11) has ended, i.e., after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

In step S141801, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated. If the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined whether the navigation flag is set in step S141802. If the navigation flag is set, it is cleared in step S141803 and then the processing proceeds to step S141804; if the navigation flag is not set, the processing proceeds to step S141804. In step S141804, it is determined whether the prediction flag is set, and if the prediction flag is not set, the processing is terminated.

If the prediction flag is set, the prediction flag is cleared in step S141805, and a determination is made in step S141806 as to whether a bell win has occurred. If a bell win has not occurred, this process ends. If a bell win has occurred, a promotion lottery is held in step S141807 to determine whether or not to increase the navigation rate. The promotion lottery is held based on the set game mode flag, the set win flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role was successful. In step S141808, a determination is made as to whether or not the promotion lottery has been won. If the promotion lottery has been won, this process ends. If the promotion lottery has been won, proceed to step S141809, where a determination is made as to whether or not the set game mode flag is notification flag A. If notification flag A is set, proceed to step S141810, where the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag B.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag B, in subsequent game plays, as shown in Figure 190, if push order group 1 is selected, it will be determined that navigation will occur with a 66% probability, and if push order group 2 is selected, it will be determined that navigation will occur with a 100% probability.

If it is determined in step S141809 that notification flag A is not set, proceed to step S141811 and change the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d to notification flag C.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag C, in subsequent game plays, if the push order bell is selected, navigation will be determined to occur 100% of the time, as shown in Figure 190.

If the game mode flag is changed in step S141810 or step S141811, a promotion command is sent in step S141812, and this processing ends. Here, the promotion command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the promotion lottery. When the display control device 81 receives a promotion command, it executes an effect suggesting that they have won the promotion lottery. In this embodiment, in notification mode A, a daytime image is displayed as the background image, in notification mode B, an evening image is displayed as the background image, and in notification mode C, a nighttime image is displayed as the background image. When the display control device 81 receives a promotion command, it executes processing to switch to the background image corresponding to the notification mode for the next game onwards.

Figure 194 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S141901, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S141902, it is determined whether the current gaming zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current gaming zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S141901, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S141908.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S141903 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S141904 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, step S141908 sends an interval command and then terminates this processing.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous zone end processing shown in steps S141905 to S141907 is performed, and an zone command is sent in step S141908, terminating this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S141905, and the zone display 66 is turned OFF in step S141906. In step S141907, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game number counter value, etc.).

Here, we will explain the gameplay of the notification mode.

The notification mode starts from notification mode A. In notification mode A, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 33% probability is announced for push order group 1, and the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability is announced for push order group 2 (see Figure 190). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in notification mode A is approximately 4.4 medals, and in notification mode A, an increase of approximately 1.4 medals can be expected for each game played.

If the push order bell is won in notification mode A but the operation order is not announced, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display "???" to announce that the push order bell has been won (hereinafter referred to as the "promotion effect"). If a bell win is achieved in that play, a promotion lottery will be held. Then, if the promotion lottery is won, the system will transition from notification mode A to notification mode B (see Figure 193).

In notification mode B, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 66% probability will be announced for push order group 1, and the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability will be announced for push order group 2 (see Figure 190). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in notification mode B is approximately 5.1 medals, and in notification mode B, you can expect to receive an increase of approximately 2.1 medals per game.

If the push order bell is won in notification mode B but the operation order is not announced, a promotion effect will be performed in the same way as in notification mode A. If a bell win is achieved in that play, a promotion lottery will be held. If the promotion lottery is won, the game will transition from notification mode B to notification mode C (see Figure 193).

In Notification Mode C, if you win the push order bell, you will be notified of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability (see Figure 190). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in Notification Mode C is approximately 5.8 medals, and in Notification Mode C, you can expect to receive an increase of approximately 2.8 medals per game.

As mentioned above, in notification mode, the expected number of medals paid out per game changes depending on whether the player is in notification mode A, B, or C. For this reason, players hoping to win more medals should aim to win rare combinations to increase the number of games played when switching to notification mode, while also achieving a bell win in a game with a promotion effect.

Here, the probability of winning Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Middle-Left-Right Bell 1, Middle-Left-Right Bell 2, Middle-Right-Left Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Centre-Left Bell 1, Right-Centre ... which form Push Order Group 1, is approximately 1 in 33. The probability of winning the First Special Bell, Second Special Bell, Third Special Bell, and Fourth Special Bell, which form Push Order Group 2, is approximately 1 in 16.

When the operation order of stop switches 42 to 44 is used as a reference, the probability of achieving a bell win based on the push order bell win is as follows. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center-right operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are left-center-right bell 1 and left-center-right bell 2, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 17. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are left-center-right bell 1 and left-center-right bell 2, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 17. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the center-left-right operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, and the first special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the center-right-left operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, and the second special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the right-left-center operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, and the third special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the right-center-left operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, and the fourth special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1.

As described above, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of left-center-right or left-center-center, i.e., if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the probability of winning a bell is lower than if the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first.

For this reason, in games where a promotion effect is performed, it is possible that the probability of achieving a bell win may be higher if the center stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, as shown in FIG. 169, in push order group 1, the same point value PV is set for each of the six operation sequences, so the probability of winning is equal for each operation sequence. The reason for the lower probability of winning the push order bell, which can achieve a bell win with the left-center-right or left-center operation sequences, is due to push order group 2, which can achieve a bell win with other operation sequences. Furthermore, in notification mode A and notification mode B, if push order group 2 is selected, the operation sequence that has a 100% chance of achieving a bell win is announced. Therefore, in games where a promotion effect is performed, the probability of achieving a bell win is equal regardless of the operation sequence in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The challenge zone is configured to use a CZ effect to announce points. Here, the points announced in the CZ effect are determined at the start of the game. This configuration makes it possible to tailor the effects used before announcing points to suit the points, thereby enabling greater diversity in the CZ effects.

Here, if the push order bell is won, a point lottery is held at the end of the game. In this configuration, if the push order bell is won in the first game in the challenge zone, there is a possibility that the CZ effect will not be able to be executed in that game, or that a CZ effect announcing 0 points will have to be executed. If these events occur, there is a concern that this could reduce the player's motivation to play, as most players play in the challenge zone with the assumption that their points will increase.

In response to this, the slot machine 10 is configured so that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the back point counter in the first game of the challenge zone. This configuration makes it possible to execute a CZ effect that notifies players of 1 or greater points regardless of the winning combination in the first game of the challenge zone, thereby effectively addressing the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

When moving to the Challenge Zone, 50 is added to the value of the hidden point counter even if the player does not win the point lottery. This configuration makes it possible to announce points other than 0 in the CZ presentation during the first game in the Challenge Zone, and to announce points between 10 and 50. As a result, it is possible to diversify the points announced during the first game in the Challenge Zone, and to prevent the CZ presentation during the first game in the Challenge Zone from becoming monotonous.

In the challenge zone, notification points are determined within the range of the hidden point counter value, and the points obtained in the point lottery are notified from the next game onwards. This configuration reduces the chances that the hidden point counter value will reach 0, making it possible to execute the CZ effect in an optimal manner.

When points are acquired in the challenge zone, the notification points are determined and then the acquired points are added to the value of the hidden point counter. This configuration makes it possible for points acquired in the challenge zone to be notified in the next game or later. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the value of the hidden point counter will reach 0, and it is possible to execute notification effects in an optimal manner.

The content of the CZ effect is determined based on the notification points. This configuration allows players to visually recognize the CZ effect while inferring the size of the notification points from the content of the effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When the push order bell is won, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the frequency of the bell winning is lower than if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first. On the other hand, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, no point lottery is held and no points are acquired. This configuration allows the player to choose whether to operate the left stop switch 42 first in the hope of acquiring points, or to operate the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 first to increase the frequency of the bell winning.

Furthermore, in a configuration where no points are acquired depending on the method of operation of the stop switches 42-44, there is a concern that the CZ effect may become monotonous. If the points acquired in a game that executes the CZ effect are announced as is, when the push order bell is won, the CZ effect cannot be started unless it is confirmed that the left stop switch 42 has been operated first. Furthermore, if the CZ effect is started after it is confirmed that the left stop switch 42 has been operated first, the timing of the point announcement would be limited to after the first stop command is issued. To alleviate these concerns, it is possible to configure the CZ effect to start from the start of the game. However, with such a configuration, the content of the presentation, such as the cut-in up until the first stop command is issued, will be unrelated to the points announced. Furthermore, if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first, it would be necessary to announce 0.

On the other hand, if a configuration is applied that determines the points to be announced in the CZ effect within the range of the value of the hidden point counter, it is possible to effectively resolve the above concerns while preventing the processing configuration related to the CZ effect from becoming too complicated, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game.

When a CZ effect is started in a push order bell winning game, the CZ effect is configured to run to the end regardless of whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first. In a configuration in which the notification points are determined within the range of values stored in the back point counter, even if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first and no points are obtained, this does not affect the points notified in the CZ effect. Therefore, it is possible to run the CZ effect to the end regardless of whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first.

If the CZ effect starts in a push order bell winning game and the left stop switch 42 is not operated first, the screen will go dark. This configuration allows the player to see the content of the CZ effect, while the reduced visibility encourages the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first in the next game.

The Challenge Zone is configured to perform a CZ effect every game. With this configuration, there is a higher chance of a CZ effect being performed in a push order bell winning game, and therefore a higher chance that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 will be operated first in a CZ effect execution game. However, if the notification point is determined within the range of values stored in the back point counter, it is possible to reduce the chance of announcing 0 points in the CZ effect even if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, making it possible to perform the CZ effect in an optimal manner.

If points are acquired in the final game of a challenge zone, the acquired points will be notified in the next challenge zone. This configuration makes it possible for the player to anticipate that there are points that have not been notified when the challenge zone ends, and it is possible to maintain the player's motivation to play even after the challenge zone ends. In addition, this slot machine 10 is configured to display the point acquisition status on the auxiliary display unit 65, which can ideally increase the player's motivation to play in situations such as when there are only a few points remaining until the point acquisition status reaches 1,000.

The point lottery in the challenge zone is configured to award 10 or more points regardless of the winning combination. This configuration reduces the chances of the hidden point counter value reaching 0 in the challenge zone, and even if the CZ effect is configured to be performed every game, it is possible to increase the frequency with which 1 or more points are announced in the CZ effect.

When transitioning to premonition mode, the mode game number counter is set to 0. When the value of the mode game number counter reaches 10, the mode transitions to notification mode. Here, the value of the mode game number counter is updated when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, and may not be updated if the left stop switch 42 is not operated for the first time. This configuration makes it possible to prompt players who expect a transition to notification mode to operate the left stop switch 42 first.

Furthermore, when the display control device 81 transitions to premonition mode, it performs a 10G presentation setting process to set a presentation period consisting of 10 games, and controls the execution of premonition presentations based on the value of the premonition game number counter. Here, the value of the premonition game number counter is updated regardless of whether the left stop switch 42 is operated first. This configuration makes it possible to execute auxiliary presentations without interrupting the flow of presentations during the presentation period, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

It is certainly possible to configure the display control device 81 so that if the main control device 101 does not update the value of the mode game number counter, the display control device 81 also does not update the value of the premonition game number counter. However, if such a configuration is used, the same auxiliary effect will be repeatedly executed in the game in which the value of the premonition game number counter was not updated, and in the following game or the previous game, which will stop the flow of auxiliary effects during the effect period. This could lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play if they are forced to repeatedly view the same auxiliary effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

When transitioning to premonition mode, the display control device 81 is configured to perform a 10G presentation setting process to set a presentation period consisting of 10 games. Premonition mode ends after 10 games when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, i.e., if no event occurs in which the value of the mode game number counter is not updated. In this way, if no event occurs in which the value of the mode game number counter is not updated, by setting the presentation period so that the timing of the end of premonition mode and the timing of the end of the premonition presentation coincide, it is possible to notify the transition to notification mode using the premonition presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the premonition effect, an announcement effect is performed in the 10th game to announce the transition to announcement mode, regardless of whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first. This configuration makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while preventing the processing configuration related to the auxiliary effects during the display period from becoming too complicated. For example, if an event occurs in which the value of the mode game number counter is not updated during the premonition effect, it is possible to change the content of the presentation performed in the 10th game to one that does not announce the transition to announcement mode. However, with this configuration, in addition to the process for changing the content of the presentation, a new process is required to determine the timing of the announcement effect execution from the 11th game onwards. Furthermore, the process for determining the timing of the announcement effect execution requires determining whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first, and whether the push order bell was not won if the left stop switch 42 was not operated first, which complicates the processing configuration.

If the value of the mode game number counter is not updated during the premonition effect, "Preparing" will be displayed from the 11th game onwards. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable even if there is a discrepancy between the game in which the announcement effect is executed and the game in which the premonition mode ends (the game in which the announcement mode is transitioned).

When the "Preparing" message is displayed, it will remain displayed until the end of the premonition mode. This configuration prevents the processing structure related to the auxiliary effects from becoming too complicated, while also preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

During the premonition effect processing, if the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 11 or more, control is performed to additionally display "Preparing" on the auxiliary display unit 65. By configuring in this way, even if an event occurs in which the value of the mode game number counter is not updated during the premonition effect, control can be performed to execute the auxiliary effect based on the value of the premonition game number counter, making it possible to simplify the processing configuration related to the auxiliary effect.

The premonition effect processing is configured to control the display of the final screen of the announcement effect if the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 11 or more. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the amount of data related to the auxiliary effects from increasing while also preventing players from feeling uncomfortable. In a configuration where "WIN" is displayed on the final screen of the announcement effect and "Preparing" is displayed from the 11th game onwards, the player understands that they are waiting to switch to announcement mode, so there is no need to prepare new auxiliary effects for the 11th game onwards.

The probability of winning a bell in a push order that can result in a bell win using the left-center-right or left-center operation order is lower than the probability of winning a bell in a push order that can result in a bell win using other operation orders. With this configuration, there is a possibility that the frequency of bell wins will differ between players who are aware of the winning probability of the role and players who are not, raising concerns that fairness between players may not be ensured. However, if the configuration is such that the value of the mode game number counter may not be updated if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first, it will be possible to prompt players to operate the left stop switch 42 first, thereby effectively alleviating the above concern.

When the game enters notification mode, the frequency with which the player is notified of the operation methods that will result in a bell win is at least higher than in premonition mode. This configuration allows for a clearer differentiation between the rate at which medals increase and decrease before and after the game enters notification mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the left stop switch 42 is not operated first in a push-order bell winning game, the value of the mode game number counter will not be updated. This configuration allows the player to choose whether to operate the left stop switch 42 first to update the value of the mode game number counter, or to operate the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 first to increase the frequency of bell winning.

In a game in which a premonition effect is being played, if the push order bell is won and the left stop switch 42 is not operated first, the screen will go dark. This configuration allows the player to see the content of the premonition effect, while the reduced visibility of the effect encourages the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first in the next game.

The probability of winning a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating left-center-right or left-center-center is lower than the probability of winning a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating other push-orders. This configuration makes it possible to vary the probability of achieving a bell win depending on the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

However, in a configuration in which the probability of winning a bell varies depending on the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated, there is a concern that disparities in profits may arise among players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10. In a situation in which the operation order is not announced, a player who knows this fact is likely to operate the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 first, while a player who does not know this fact is likely to operate the left stop switch 42 first, resulting in differences in the probability of winning a bell.

In this slot machine 10, in notification mode A and notification mode B, when a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating the center left/right, center right/left, right/left center, or right/center left operation sequence is won, the operation sequence is announced more frequently than when a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating the left/center right or left/right/center operation sequence is won. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the difference in the probability of winning the former push-order bell and the latter push-order bell when the operation sequence is not announced, thereby reducing the difference in the frequency of bell wins. As a result, it is possible to prevent disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, allowing players to enjoy the game regardless of their level of knowledge.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

(Fifteenth embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the process of checking whether a stop command has been issued after the game has started, and the process performed before the game starts. This configuration will be explained in detail below. The basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment except that it does not have the second credit insertion switch 57 and third credit insertion switch 58, so only the distinctive features will be explained below.

First, we will explain the conventional process of checking whether a stop command has been issued, i.e., step S1008 (see Figure 21) in the stop control process.

Figure 195 is a flowchart showing the conventional stop command confirmation process.

In step S151101, an interrupt wait process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is initiated. In step S151102, 38H (00111000) is stored in the lighting data buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. In step S151103, the rotation information stored in the rotation information buffer is obtained.

The rotation information buffer is a buffer for storing information related to whether the reels are spinning, and is provided in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101. As shown in FIG. 197(a), the rotation information buffer consists of one byte. Bit 0 is an area for storing information related to whether the left reel 32L is spinning, bit 1 is an area for storing information related to whether the center reel 32M is spinning, bit 2 is an area for storing information related to whether the right reel 32R is spinning, and bits 3 to 7 are unused areas. Bits 0 to 2 store a 1 when the corresponding reel is spinning, and a 0 when the corresponding reel is stopped. Bits 3 to 7 always store a 0.

In step S151104, the normal rotation information stored in the normal rotation information buffer is obtained.

The normal rotation information buffer is a buffer for storing information regarding whether the reels are rotating normally (whether they have lost synchronization), and is provided in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101. The normal rotation information buffer consists of one byte, as shown in FIG. 197(b). Bit 0 is an area for storing information regarding whether the left reel 32L is rotating normally, Bit 1 is an area for storing information regarding whether the center reel 32M is rotating normally, Bit 2 is an area for storing information regarding whether the right reel 32R is rotating normally, and Bits 3 to 7 are unused areas. Bits 0 to 2 store a 1 when the corresponding reel is rotating normally, and a 0 when the corresponding reel has lost synchronization. Bits 3 to 7 always store a 0.

In step S151105, the logical product (AND) of the acquired rotation information and normal rotation information is acquired, and the acquired result is stored in a comparison value buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. In step S151106, it is determined whether the comparison value and the rotation information match. As described above, if there is an out-of-step reel, the normal rotation information will have the corresponding position information set to 0. Accordingly, the comparison value will also have the position information corresponding to the out-of-step reel set to 0. Therefore, if the comparison value and rotation information match, this means that all of the rotating reels are rotating normally. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S151107, where a switch status confirmation process is performed to confirm the operating status of stop switches 42-44, etc.

Here, the switch buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101 will be explained based on Figure 197 (c).

The switch buffer consists of three areas, Area 0, Area 1, Area 2, and Area 3. Each of Areas 0, 1, and 2 consists of one byte. Bit 0 of Areas 0, 1, and 2 stores signal information from the left stop detection sensor 42a provided on the left stop switch 42. Bit 1 of Areas 0, 1, and 2 stores signal information from the center stop detection sensor 43a provided on the center stop switch 43. Bit 2 of Areas 0, 1, and 2 stores signal information from the right stop detection sensor 44a provided on the right stop switch 44. Bit 3 of Areas 0, 1, and 2 stores signal information from the start detection sensor 41a provided on the start lever 41. Bit 4 of Areas 0, 1, and 2 stores signal information from the settlement detection sensor 59a provided on the settlement switch 59. Bit 5 of Areas 0, 1, and 2 stores signal information from the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a provided on the first credit insertion switch 56. The sixth bit in areas 0 to 2 is an unused area, and the seventh bit in areas 0 to 2 is an area for storing a power outage signal. Bits 0 to 5 store a 1 when the corresponding switch, such as the left stop switch 42, is operated (when an ON signal is input from the corresponding detection sensor), and a 0 when the corresponding switch is not operated (when an OFF signal is input from the corresponding detection sensor). Bit 6 always stores a 0. Bit 7 stores a 1 when a power outage signal is input, and a 0 when a power outage signal is not input.

Storing information in the switch buffer is performed during the sensor monitoring process S107 of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 10). Briefly, this process involves shifting the information stored in area 0 to area 1. The sensor status corresponding to each bit is then read and stored in area 0. The exclusive OR (XOR) of the information stored in area 0 and area 1 is then taken, and the logical product (AND) of this result and the information stored in area 0 is then taken and stored in area 2. By performing the above process, area 0 of the switch buffer stores information indicating the current switch state, area 1 of the switch buffer stores information indicating the previous switch state, and area 2 of the switch buffer stores information indicating the ON edge at which the signal from the sensor switched from OFF to ON.

Figure 196 is a flowchart showing conventional switch status confirmation processing.

In step S151201, the information stored in area 0 of the switch buffer is stored in the switch status buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. In step S151202, the logical product (AND) of the information stored in area 0 of the switch buffer and 3FH (00111111) is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in the switch status buffer. By performing this processing, a 1 is stored in the bit of the switch status buffer corresponding to the switch to which an ON signal has been input, among the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44, start lever 41, settlement switch 59, and first credit insertion switch 56, and a 0 is stored in the other bits.

In step S151203, the logical sum (OR) of the information stored in the switch state buffer and the rotation information is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in the comparison value buffer. By performing this process, the following information is stored in the comparison value buffer. In bits 0 to 2, 1 is stored in the bits corresponding to the spinning reels and the bits to which an ON signal has been input from the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reels. In bits 3 to 5, 1 is stored in the bits corresponding to the start lever 41, the settlement switch 59, and the first credit insertion switch 56 to which an ON signal has been input. In bits 6 and 7, 0 is stored.

In step S151204, it is determined whether the comparison value matches the rotation information. If the comparison value matches the rotation information, it means that no ON signal has been input from the start lever 41, the settlement switch 59, the first credit insertion switch 56, or the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S151205, and the information stored in the second area of the switch buffer is stored in the switch status 2 buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. In step S151206, it is determined whether the information stored in the switch status buffer matches the information stored in the switch status 2 buffer. If the information stored in the switch status buffer matches the information stored in the switch status 2 buffer, this means that no ON signals have been input from any of the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, right stop switch 44, start lever 41, settlement switch 59, or first credit insertion switch 56, or that ON signals have been input only from the switches that detected the ON edge among the above switches 41-44, 56, and 59. In such cases, the switch status confirmation process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the stop command confirmation process, when the switch state confirmation process is completed, proceed to step S151108, where the logical product (AND) of the information stored in the switch state 2 buffer and the rotation information is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in the stop command buffer provided in the main control unit 101. By performing this process, if an ON edge of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is detected, a 1 is stored in the corresponding bit in the stop command buffer. In step S151109, it is determined whether the information stored in the stop command buffer is 0. If the information stored in the stop command buffer is not 0, this means that an ON edge of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been detected, that is, a stop command has been issued, and therefore this process terminates.

If the information stored in the stop command buffer is 0, this means that a stop command has not been issued, so the process proceeds to step S151110, where lighting data change processing is performed to change the information stored in the lighting data buffer. In the lighting data change processing, the rotation information value is shifted 3 bits to the left, a value is acquired, and the exclusive OR (XOR) of this acquired value and 38H (00111000) is stored in the lighting data buffer. The logical OR (OR) of the information stored in the lighting data buffer and the rotation information is then acquired, and this acquired value is stored in the lighting data buffer. By performing the lighting data change processing, a 1 is stored in the bit corresponding to the currently spinning reel in the lighting data buffer. In step S151111, the information stored in the lighting data buffer is stored in the lighting status buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101, and the LEDs provided inside the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the information stored in the lighting data buffer. Specifically, if a 1 is stored in any of the 0th to 2nd bits, the LED inside the corresponding stop switch is turned on, and if a 0 is stored in any of the 0th to 2nd bits, the LED inside the corresponding stop switch is turned off. Then, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S151101.

If it is determined in step S151106 that the comparison value and the rotation information do not match, this means that at least one of the spinning reels is not spinning normally. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S151111 without checking for a stop command in step S151109, where 38H (00111000) stored in the lighting data buffer is stored in the lighting status buffer, and the LEDs installed inside the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 are controlled to be turned off. Then, the process returns to the interrupt wait process of step S151101.

If it is determined in step S151204 of the switch status confirmation process that the comparison value and rotation information do not match, this means that an ON signal has been input from either the start lever 41, the settlement switch 59, the first credit insertion switch 56, or the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel; in other words, this means that a switch other than a stop switch that can issue a stop command has been operated. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S151111 without confirming the stop command in step S151109, where 38H (00111000) stored in the lighting data buffer is stored in the lighting status buffer, and the LEDs provided inside the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 are controlled to be turned off. Then, the process returns to the interrupt wait process of step S151101.

If it is determined in step S151206 of the switch state confirmation process that the information stored in the switch state buffer does not match the information stored in the switch state 2 buffer, this means that in addition to an ON signal being input from one of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44, start lever 41, settlement switch 59, and first credit insertion switch 56, which has detected an ON edge, an ON signal is also being input from another switch that has not detected an ON edge. In this case, without checking the stop command in step S151109, the process proceeds to step S151111, where 38H (00111000) stored in the lighting data buffer is stored in the lighting state buffer and the LEDs provided inside the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 are controlled to be turned off. Then, the process returns to the interrupt wait process of step S151101.

Next, we will explain the processing that is performed before the game starts, more specifically, the pre-start processing that has traditionally been performed in steps S204 to S206 of the normal processing (see Figure 11).

Figure 198 is a flowchart showing conventional pre-start processing.

In step S151301, it is determined whether a replay win was achieved in the previous game. If a replay win was not achieved, the process proceeds to step S151302, where a medal acceptance permission process is performed to allow the insertion of medals. In the medal acceptance permission process, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to an excited state, thereby enabling the insertion of medals. On the other hand, if a replay win was achieved, the process proceeds to step S151303, where an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet. Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed in the credit display unit 60. In other words, if a replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals.

If the medal acceptance permission process or automatic insertion process has been performed, proceed to step S151304, where the start permission LED is turned off. The start permission LED, not shown, is located in the upper right corner of the payout number display unit 62. In step S151305, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed. In the sensor abnormality confirmation process, the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process S107 of the timer interrupt process are checked for any abnormalities. If an abnormality is detected, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. In step S151306, an interrupt waiting process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is activated. In step S151307, a medal return process is performed. In the medal return process, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a process to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals is performed. In step S151308, a medal insertion process is performed. The medal insertion process determines whether medals have been inserted or the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated, and if either has been done, the number of bets is changed.

In step S151309, the logical product (AND) of the information stored in the 0th area of the switch buffer and 37H (00110111) is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in the judgment value buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. By performing this processing, the judgment value buffer stores 1 in the bit corresponding to the switch that has received an ON signal, among the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44, start lever 41, settlement switch 59, and first credit insertion switch 56, and stores 0 in the other bits. In step S151310, it is determined whether the information stored in the judgment value buffer is 0. If the information stored in the judgment value buffer is 0, this means that an ON signal has not been received from any of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44, start lever 41, settlement switch 59, and first credit insertion switch 56. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S151311, where it is determined whether the number of bets is the specified number. For example, if the configuration allows two-coin and three-coin play, it determines whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. If the number of bets is the specified number, the start permission LED is turned on in step S151312, indicating that a start command can be issued, i.e., that the game can be started. Then, in step S151313, it determines whether the ON edge of the start lever 41 has been detected. More specifically, it obtains the logical product (AND) of the information stored in the second area of the switch buffer and 08H (00001000), and determines whether the obtained result is not 0.

If the ON edge of the start lever 41 is detected, it means that a start command has been issued, and the process ends. If the ON edge of the start lever 41 is not detected, it means that a start command has not been issued, and the process returns to the sensor abnormality confirmation process in step S151305.

If it is determined in step S151311 that the number of bets is not the specified number, the process returns to step S151304 and the start permission LED is turned off.

If it is determined in step S151310 that the information stored in the judgment value buffer is not 0, this means that an ON signal has been input from any of the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, right stop switch 44, start lever 41, settlement switch 59, or first credit insertion switch 56. In such a case, the process returns to step S151304 without checking the ON edge of the start lever 41 in step S151313, and the start permission LED is turned off.

In the configuration for performing the stop command confirmation process illustrated above, in addition to the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel, the system also checks for ON signals from the start lever 41, the settlement switch 59, the first credit insertion switch 56, and the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel. If an ON signal is input from any of the start lever 41, the settlement switch 59, the first credit insertion switch 56, or the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel, the system does not check whether a stop command has been issued. For this reason, in the configuration for performing the stop command confirmation process illustrated above, for example, if the start lever 41 is operated to issue a start command and the start lever 41 is continued to be operated, the stop command may not be issued even if the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated. Furthermore, for example, if the stop switch does not return to its initial position after operation due to deterioration over time, after operating the stop switch to issue a stop command, it may be necessary to operate the stop switch again to return it to its initial position.

Furthermore, in the configuration for performing the pre-start processing illustrated above, in addition to the start lever 41, the presence or absence of an ON signal is also checked from the stop switches 42-44, the settlement switch 59, and the first credit insertion switch 56. If an ON signal is input from any of the stop switches 42-44, the settlement switch 59, or the first credit insertion switch 56, the presence or absence of a start command is not checked. For this reason, in the configuration for performing the pre-start processing illustrated above, for example, if the start lever 41 is operated while any of the stop switches is operated, the game cannot be started even if the number of bets is the specified number. Furthermore, for example, if the first credit insertion switch 56 does not return to its initial position after operation due to deterioration over time, after operating the first credit insertion switch 56 to insert virtual medals, it becomes necessary to operate the first credit insertion switch 56 again to return it to its initial position.

As described above, in the configurations that perform the stop command confirmation processing and pre-start processing exemplified above, it is desirable to improve operability and thereby increase the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 199 is a flowchart showing the stop command confirmation process in this embodiment.

In step S150101, an interrupt wait process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is initiated. In step S150102, 38H (00111000) is stored in the lighting data buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. In step S150103, the rotation information stored in the rotation information buffer is acquired. In step S150104, the normal rotation information stored in the normal rotation information buffer is acquired.

In step S150105, the logical product (AND) of the acquired rotation information and normal rotation information is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in the comparison value buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. In step S150106, it is determined whether the comparison value and the rotation information match. As described above, if there is an out-of-step reel, the normal rotation information will have the corresponding position information set to 0. Accordingly, the comparison value will also have the position information corresponding to the out-of-step reel set to 0. Therefore, if the comparison value and the rotation information match, this means that all of the rotating reels are rotating normally. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S150107, where the logical product (AND) of the comparison value and the information stored in the second area of the switch buffer is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in the stop command buffer. By performing this processing, if an ON edge of the stop switch corresponding to a rotating reel is detected, a 1 is stored in the corresponding bit of the stop command buffer. In step S150108, it is determined whether the information stored in the stop command buffer is 0. If the information stored in the stop command buffer is not 0, this means that the ON edge of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been detected, meaning that a stop command has been issued, and this process ends.

If the information stored in the stop command buffer is 0, this means that a stop command has not been issued, so the process proceeds to step S150109, where lighting data change processing is performed to change the information stored in the lighting data buffer. In the lighting data change processing, the rotation information value is shifted 3 bits to the left, a value is acquired, and the exclusive OR (XOR) of this acquired value and 38H (00111000) is stored in the lighting data buffer. The logical OR (OR) of the information stored in the lighting data buffer and the rotation information is then acquired, and this acquired value is stored in the lighting data buffer. By performing the lighting data change processing, a 1 is stored in the bit corresponding to the currently spinning reel in the lighting data buffer. In step S150110, the information stored in the lighting data buffer is stored in the lighting status buffer provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101, and the LEDs provided inside the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the information stored in the lighting data buffer. Specifically, if a 1 is stored in any of the 0th to 2nd bits, the LED inside the corresponding stop switch is turned on, and if a 0 is stored in any of the 0th to 2nd bits, the LED inside the corresponding stop switch is turned off. Then, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S150101.

If it is determined in step S150106 that the comparison value and the rotation information do not match, this means that at least one of the spinning reels is not spinning normally. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S150110 without checking for a stop command in step S150108, where 38H (00111000) stored in the lighting data buffer is stored in the lighting status buffer, and the LEDs installed inside the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 are controlled to be turned off. Then, the process returns to the interrupt wait process of step S150101.

Figure 200 is a flowchart showing the pre-start processing in this embodiment.

In step S150201, it is determined whether a replay win was achieved in the previous game. If a replay win was not achieved, the process proceeds to step S150202, where a medal acceptance permission process is performed to allow the insertion of medals. In the medal acceptance permission process, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to an excited state, thereby enabling the insertion of medals. On the other hand, if a replay win was achieved, the process proceeds to step S150203, where an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet. Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed in the credit display unit 60. In other words, if a replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals.

If the medal acceptance permission process or automatic insertion process has been performed, proceed to step S150204, where sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed. In the sensor abnormality confirmation process, the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process S107 of the timer interrupt process are checked for any abnormalities. If an abnormality is detected, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. In step S150205, interrupt wait process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is activated. In step S150206, medal return process is performed. In the medal return process, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals. In step S150207, medal insertion process is performed. In the medal insertion process, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated. If either has been performed, the number of bets is changed.

In step S150208, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specified number. For example, if the configuration allows two-coin and three-coin play, it is determined whether the number of bets is two or three. If the number of bets is the specified number, it proceeds to step S150209, where a start permission LED (not shown) located in the upper right corner of the payout number display unit 62 is turned on to indicate that a start command can be issued, i.e., that the game can be started. Then, in step S150210, it is determined whether the ON edge of the start lever 41 has been detected. More specifically, the logical product (AND) of the information stored in the second area of the switch buffer and 08H (00001000) is obtained, and it is determined whether the obtained result is not 0.

If the ON edge of the start lever 41 is detected, this means that a start command has been issued, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ON edge of the start lever 41 is not detected, or if it is determined in step S150208 that the number of bets is not the specified number, the process returns to the sensor abnormality confirmation process in step S150204.

Here, we will explain the operation of the stop command confirmation process and pre-start process in this embodiment.

The stop command confirmation process checks the spinning reel, whether the spinning reel is rotating normally, and whether an ON edge has been detected for the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. It does not check whether an ON signal has been input for the start lever 41, settlement switch 59, first credit insertion switch 56, or the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel. As a result, even if, for example, the start lever 41 is operated to issue a start command and the operation of the start lever 41 is continued thereafter, in this embodiment, a stop command can be issued by operating stop switches 42-44. Furthermore, even if the stop switch that issued the stop command does not return to its initial position due to deterioration over time, for example, in this embodiment, the stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel, without having to operate the stop switch again to return it to its initial position.

The pre-start process checks whether an ON edge has been detected for the start lever 41, but does not check whether ON signals have been input to the stop switches 42-44, the settlement switch 59, or the first credit insertion switch 56. As a result, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 does not return to its initial position due to deterioration over time, in this embodiment, the start lever 41 can be operated to issue a start command without having to operate the first credit insertion switch 56 again to return it to its initial position.

The following describes, as a specific example, the sequence of events that occurs when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to set the number of bets to the specified number, and then the start lever 41 is operated while the left stop switch 42 is operated.

In the pre-start process, if the left stop switch 42 is operated after the specified number of bets has been placed, the start permission LED remains lit. If the start lever 41 is then operated, only the ON edge of the start lever 41 is confirmed, so a start command is issued and the game begins even if the left stop switch 42 has been operated (step S150210).

This section explains what happens when the operation of the start lever 41 is terminated while the operation of the left stop switch 42 is continued. The stop command confirmation process waits in step S150101 until the timer interrupt process is initiated. In the timer interrupt process, the sensor buffer is updated in the sensor monitoring process S107 (see Figure 10), the information indicating the ON edge of the left stop switch 42 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the sensor buffer is set to 40H (01000000). If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating normally, it is determined in step S150106 that the comparison value and the rotation information match, and a stop command is acquired in step S150107. At this time, since the information stored in the second area of the sensor buffer is 40H as described above, the acquired stop command is 00H. In other words, if the operation of the left stop switch 42 is continued, the operation of the left stop switch 42 does not generate a stop command. In the lighting data change process of step S150109, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the lighting data is changed from 38H (00111000) to 07H (00000111). As a result, in step S150110, even if the left stop switch 42 continues to be operated, control is performed to light up the LEDs provided inside the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44, indicating that it is possible to operate each of these switches to issue a stop command.

This section explains what happens when the center stop switch 43 is operated while continuing to operate the left stop switch 42. The stop command confirmation process waits in step S150101 until the timer interrupt process is initiated. During the timer interrupt process, the sensor buffer is updated in the sensor monitoring process S107 (see Figure 10), and 42H (01000010), indicating that the ON edge of the center stop switch 43 has been detected, is stored in the second area of the sensor buffer. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating normally, step S150106 determines that the comparison value and rotation information match, and a stop command is acquired in step S150107. Since the information stored in the second area of the sensor buffer is 42H as described above, the acquired stop command is 02H. In other words, if the center stop switch 43 is operated while continuing to operate the left stop switch 42, a stop command for the center reel 32M is issued. When a stop command is issued, the stop control process (see Figure 21) performs a stop position determination process (step S1009) for the center reel 32M, and in step S1010 determines whether the reel spin count is 0. Because the left reel 32L and right reel 32R are spinning, the process returns to the stop command confirmation process via step S1001, etc.

Some conventional slot machines, after performing the stop position determination process, determine whether the operation of the stop switch has ended, rather than whether the reel spin count is 0, and then return to the stop command confirmation process. In such a configuration, if the center stop switch 43 is operated while continuing to operate the left stop switch 42, the machine cannot return to the stop command confirmation process, i.e., cannot issue the next stop command, unless the operation of both the center stop switch 43 and the left stop switch 42 has ended. On the other hand, in a configuration that determines whether the reel spin count is 0 and then returns to the stop command confirmation process, the machine can return to the stop command confirmation process while continuing to operate the left stop switch 42 and center stop switch 43.

This section explains what happens when the operation of the center stop switch 43 is terminated and the operation of the left stop switch 42 is continued. The stop command confirmation process waits in step S150101 until the timer interrupt process is initiated. In the timer interrupt process, the sensor buffer is updated in the sensor monitoring process S107 (see Figure 10), the information indicating the ON edge of the center stop switch 43 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the sensor buffer is set to 40H (01000000). If the left reel 32L and right reel 32R are rotating normally, it is determined in step S150106 that the comparison value and rotation information match, and a stop command is acquired in step S150107. At this time, as described above, the information stored in the second area of the sensor buffer is 40H, so the acquired stop command is 00H. In other words, if the operation of the left stop switch 42 is continued, the operation of the left stop switch 42 does not generate a stop command. In the lighting data change process of step S150109, if the left reel 32L and right reel 32R are spinning, the lighting data is changed from 38H (00111000) to 05H (00000101). As a result, in step S150110, even if the left stop switch 42 continues to be operated, control is performed to light up the LEDs provided inside the left stop switch 42 and right stop switch 44, indicating that it is possible to operate each of the above switches to issue a stop command.

This section explains what happens when the right stop switch 44 is operated while continuing to operate the left stop switch 42. The stop command confirmation process waits in step S150101 until the timer interrupt process is initiated. In the timer interrupt process, the sensor buffer is updated in the sensor monitoring process S107 (see Figure 10), and 44H (01000100), indicating that the ON edge of the right stop switch 44 has been detected, is stored in the second area of the sensor buffer. If the left reel 32L and right reel 32R are rotating normally, step S150106 determines that the comparison value and rotation information match, and a stop command is acquired in step S150107. Since the information stored in the second area of the sensor buffer is 44H as described above, the acquired stop command is 04H. In other words, if the right stop switch 44 is operated while continuing to operate the left stop switch 42, a stop command for the right reel 32R is issued. When a stop command is issued, the stop control process (see Figure 21) performs a stop position determination process (step S1009) for the right reel 32R, and determines in step S1010 whether the reel spin count is 0. Because the left reel 32L is spinning, the process returns to the stop command confirmation process via step S1001, etc.

This section explains what happens when operation of the right stop switch 44 is terminated and operation of the left stop switch 42 is continued. The stop command confirmation process waits in step S150101 until the timer interrupt process is initiated. In the timer interrupt process, the sensor buffer is updated in the sensor monitoring process S107 (see Figure 10), the information indicating the ON edge of the right stop switch 44 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the sensor buffer is set to 40H (01000000). If the left reel 32L and right reel 32R are rotating normally, step S150106 determines that the comparison value and rotation information match, and a stop command is acquired in step S150107. At this time, as described above, the information stored in the second area of the sensor buffer is 40H, so the acquired stop command is 00H. In other words, if operation of the left stop switch 42 is continued, operation of the left stop switch 42 does not generate a stop command. In the lighting data change process of step S150109, if the left reel 32L is spinning, the lighting data is changed from 38H (00111000) to 01H (00000001). As a result, in step S150110, even if the left stop switch 42 continues to be operated, control is performed to light up the LED provided inside the left stop switch 42, indicating that it is possible to operate each of the above switches to issue a stop command.

To stop the left reel 32L, it is necessary to end operation of the left stop switch 42 and then operate it again. This is because the stop command confirmation process determines that a stop command to stop the left reel 32L has been issued based on information indicating that an ON edge of the left stop switch 42 has been detected, so it is necessary to temporarily turn the ON signal of the left stop switch 42 OFF.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the left stop switch 42 is operated before a start command is issued and the left stop switch 42 continues to be operated after the start command is issued, the left reel 32L cannot be stopped, but the center reel 32M and right reel 32R can be stopped. Similarly, if the center stop switch 43 and right stop switch 44 are operated before a start command is issued and the center stop switch 43 and right stop switch 44 continue to be operated after the start command is issued, the center reel 32M and right reel 32R cannot be stopped, but the left reel 32L can be stopped. Also, in this embodiment, for example, if the center stop switch 43 is operated to issue a stop command and the operation of the center stop switch 43 is continued thereafter, the corresponding reel can be stopped by operating another stop switch that has not issued a stop command.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

After the game has started, even if at least one of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, settlement switch 59, or stop switch corresponding to a stopped reel has been operated, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. This configuration makes it possible to stop the rotation of the reels without terminating the operation of the above switches. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the above switches have not returned to their initial positions due to deterioration over time or the like despite having been operated, it is possible to stop the rotation of the reels without having to operate them again to return them to their initial positions.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the operability when stopping the reel rotation, and increase the enjoyment of the game.

After the game starts, even if none of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, settlement switch 59, or stop switch corresponding to a stopped reel has been operated, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. With this configuration, regardless of whether the above switches have been operated, operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel will stop the reel from spinning. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when stopping the reel's spinning.

Even if the start lever 41 is being operated after the game has started, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. Some players carefully operate the start lever 41 when issuing a start command at a gambling point, and continue to operate the start lever 41 until they are satisfied. For such players, a conventional configuration in which a stop command cannot be issued until the start lever 41 operation is completed poses the problem of being unable to progress through the game at a good pace. However, in this embodiment, the player can continue to operate the start lever 41 until they are satisfied, while operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel to issue a stop command, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

After a game has started, even if a stop switch that issued a stop command is operated, a stop command can be issued by operating another stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. In a conventional configuration in which the next stop command could only be issued after the operation of the stop switch that issued the stop command has been terminated, if the stop switch did not return to its initial position due to aging or other reasons after being operated to issue a stop command, the next stop command would not be issued even if another stop switch was operated to issue the next stop command. To issue the next stop command, the player had to operate the previously operated stop switch again to return it to its initial position, and then operate another stop switch to issue the next stop command. For this reason, when an event occurred in which a stop switch did not return to its initial position, the player's motivation to play was significantly reduced. However, in this embodiment, even if an event occurred in which the stop switch that issued the stop command did not return to its initial position, the stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

The stop command confirmation process is configured so that the switch state confirmation process is not performed. This configuration simplifies the process configuration for the stop command confirmation process and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in ROM 105 created by simplifying the stop command confirmation process, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

Each stop switch 42-44 is equipped with an LED that lights up when a stop command can be issued and turns off when a stop command cannot be issued. This configuration makes it possible to indicate whether a stop command can be issued based on the lighting state of the LED, improving operability when stopping a spinning reel. Furthermore, because the LED remains lit even when at least one of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, settlement switch 59, or stop switch corresponding to a stopped reel is operated, it is possible to actively indicate that a spinning reel can be stopped while the above switches are operated.

Even if the first credit insertion switch 56 and/or at least one of the stop switches 42-44 have been operated after the specified number of bets has been placed, the game can be started by operating the start lever 41. This configuration makes it possible to start the game without having to stop operating the above switches. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the above switches have not returned to their initial positions due to deterioration over time or other reasons despite having been operated, the game can be started without having to operate them again to return them to their initial positions.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve operability when starting a game, and increase the enjoyment of playing.

After a specified number of bets has been placed, the game can be started by operating the start lever 41, even if none of the first credit insertion switch 56 or stop switches 42-44 have been operated. This configuration makes it possible to start a game by operating the start lever 41 after placing a specified number of bets, regardless of whether the above switches have been operated. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when starting a game.

Even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated after a specified number of bets has been placed, the game can be started by operating the start lever 41. In conventional configurations where a start command could not be issued until all switch operations other than the start lever 41 had been completed, if the first credit insertion switch 56 did not return to its initial position due to aging or other reasons after being operated to set the number of bets, the game would not start even if the start lever 41 was operated to issue a start command. To issue a start command, the player had to operate the first credit insertion switch 56 again to return it to its initial position, and then operate the start lever 41 again to issue a start command. For this reason, if the first credit insertion switch 56 did not return to its initial position, the player's motivation to play would be significantly reduced. However, in this embodiment, the start lever 41 can be operated to issue a start command even if the first credit insertion switch 56 did not return to its initial position, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

Even if the stop switches 42-44 have been operated after the specified number of bets has been placed, the game can be started by operating the start lever 41. This configuration makes it possible to operate the start lever 41 while operating the start lever 41 prior to starting the game, thereby increasing the variety of operations that can be used to start the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The pre-start processing is configured not to check the operation status of the stop switches 42-44, not to check the operation status of the first credit insertion switch 56 at times other than during the medal insertion process, and not to check the operation status of the settlement switch 59 at times other than during the medal return process. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration before the game starts and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in ROM 105 created by simplifying the processing configuration before the game starts, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

A start permission LED is provided, and is configured to light up when the number of bets is the specified number, and to turn off when the number of bets is less than the specified number. This configuration makes it possible to notify whether or not a start command can be issued based on the lighting state of the start permission LED, improving operability when starting a game. Furthermore, because the start permission LED remains lit even when at least one of the first credit insertion switch 56 and stop switches 42-44 is operated, it is possible to actively notify the player that the game can be started while the above switches are operated.

The start permission LED remains lit even when the first credit insertion switch 56 is being operated. This configuration eliminates the need to operate the first credit insertion switch 56 again to return it to its initial position if the switch does not return to its initial position due to aging or other reasons, even after the operation of the switch has been completed, thereby improving operability when starting a game.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 or at least one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated while the start permission LED is lit, the process of switching the start permission LED from lit to off is disabled. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration before the game starts and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in ROM 105 created by simplifying the processing configuration before the game starts, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

When a game is started while at least one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, and the operation of the stop switch continues after the game has started, the reel corresponding to the stop switch that is still being operated cannot be stopped, but the corresponding reel can be stopped by operating a stop switch that is not being operated. This configuration makes it possible to stop the reels without ending the operation of the stop switch that is still being operated, improving the ease of operation when stopping the reels and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, some recent slot machines impose a predetermined penalty, such as not holding a lottery to transition to the notification mode, if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first. In such a configuration, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated during a wait period and the middle stop switch 43 is operated after the wait period has ended, the middle stop switch 43 will be deemed to have been operated first, even though the player operated the left stop switch 42 first, significantly reducing the player's motivation to play. In this embodiment, after placing a specified bet, the game can be started by operating the start lever 41 while operating the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, for example, if the start lever 41 is operated while operating the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44, and the operation of the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 continues, the left stop switch 42 will be the only stop switch that can generate a stop command. In this way, this embodiment allows players to devise switches to operate before and after the start of the game to avoid unintentionally inflicting penalties, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When the stop position determination process is completed, the stop control process determines whether the reel spin count is 0. If the reel spin count is not 0, i.e., if there are reels for which a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to the stop command confirmation process. This configuration makes it possible to issue the next stop command without terminating the operation of the stop switch that was initiated before the game started or the operation of the stop switch that issued the stop command.

Furthermore, some players perform a so-called "twisting operation," in which they end operation of the stop switch after making sure that a predetermined effect or the like will occur when the third stop command is issued. For these players, for example, when the operation order of the stop switches is announced or when an operation order is specified to avoid the imposition of a penalty, they are unable to select the stop switch for the twisting operation, which can be frustrating. In this embodiment, the next stop command can be issued without ending operation of the stop switch that was started before the game started or the stop switch that issued the stop command. Therefore, if a situation arises in which the stop switch for the twisting operation cannot be operated last, the player can continue operating the stop switch for the twisting operation while operating another stop switch to issue a stop command, thereby completing operation of the stop switch for the twisting operation last. As a result, the above concerns can be resolved in an optimal manner, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

(16th embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration with an advantageous zone made up of a chance mode and a notification mode was described, but a configuration with an advantageous zone made up of different game modes may also be used. Therefore, such a configuration will be described in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be described below.

Figure 201 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

The game panel 25 is provided with a second auxiliary display unit 165 to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. When a small AT precursor effect, described below, is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the second auxiliary display unit 165 displays the number of games remaining for the small AT precursor effect. In addition, a presentation switch 166 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and to the left of the medal insertion slot 45. The presentation switch 166 is operated when a specified auxiliary effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The second auxiliary display unit 165 and the presentation switch 166 (more specifically, a presentation switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the presentation switch 166) are connected to the display control device 81.

Figure 202 shows the correspondence between the names of condition devices and the benefits awarded when a prize is won.

BB is a conditional device that grants the bonus of transitioning to a gaming state when a winning combination is achieved.

When a BB win is achieved, the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop in the middle row, i.e., the combination of "red 7" symbols will stop on the middle line L2. When a BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to BB state.

The conditional devices that grant the replay bonus when a winning combination is achieved are Replay 1 to Replay 4.

To explain some winning patterns, when a Replay 1 win is achieved, the "Replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop in the middle row, i.e., the "Replay" symbol combination will stop on the middle line L2.

If the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the sloping right line L4, a replay 2 prize will be awarded. In other words, in this embodiment, if the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the sloping right line L4, a replay prize will be awarded instead of a medal payout prize.

If the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M stop on the downward-sloping line L4 to the right, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops in the middle row (the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops in the bottom row), a replay 3 win will be achieved. In this embodiment, the winning combination when a replay 3 win is achieved is a chance combination.

The conditional devices that will grant a medal payout bonus when a winning combination is achieved are Bell 1 to Bell 6 and Small Win 1 to Small Win 14.

Bell 1 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upper line L1 when a winning combination is achieved. Bell 2 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the downward-sloping line L4 when a winning combination is achieved. Bell 3 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the middle line L2 when a winning combination is achieved. Bell 4 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upward-sloping line L5 when a winning combination is achieved. Bell 5 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the lower line L3 when a winning combination is achieved. Bell 6 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop in a small mountain shape (bottom, middle, bottom) when a win is achieved. When Bell 1 win through Bell 6 win is achieved, eight medals are paid out.

In this embodiment, small win 1 functions as a cherry win, and is a conditional device that causes the "cherry" symbol on center reel 32M to stop in the middle row when a win is achieved. Small win 2 is a conditional device that causes a win to be achieved when small win 1 cannot be achieved even if small win 1 is won. Small win 3 is a conditional device that causes the "BAR" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the middle line L2 when a win is achieved. Small win 4 is a conditional device that causes a win to be achieved when small win 3 cannot be achieved even if small win 3 is won. When small win 1 to small win 4 are achieved, three medals are paid out.

Small wins 5 to 14 function as compensation wins in this embodiment, and one medal will be paid out if a win is achieved.

Figure 203 shows the lottery table selected during a non-BB internal state where the BB winning flag of "Setting 3" is not carried over. The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. In addition to the correspondence between winning combinations, index values IV, and point values PV, Figure 203 also lists the condition devices that constitute winning combinations.

In this embodiment, play can only be started with three coins. When the lottery table shown in Figure 203 is used to determine whether a winning combination is successful, the winning probabilities for each combination are as follows: The probability of winning a replay is approximately 1 in 8.3, the probability of winning a watermelon is approximately 1 in 90, and the probability of winning a chance is approximately 1 in 200. The probability of winning a left-center-right bell and a left-center-right bell is approximately 1 in 17. The probability of winning a center-left-right bell, a center-right-left bell, a right-left-center bell, and a right-center-left bell is approximately 1 in 8.1. The probability of winning a common bell is approximately 1 in 52, the probability of winning a one-coin combination is approximately 1 in 260, the probability of winning a cherry is approximately 1 in 64, the probability of winning a fixed combination is approximately 1 in 66,000, the probability of winning a duplicate BB is approximately 1 in 4.8, and the probability of winning a single BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. When not in the BB internal state, there will be no winning events during the internal replay, and there will also be no losing events where no winning combination occurs.

Although not shown in the figure, the lottery table selected during an internal BB when the BB win flag is carried over differs from the above-mentioned non-internal BB lottery table in the point value PV for internal replay (IV = 2) and the point value PV for single BB (IV = 16). Specifically, the point value PV for internal replay is set to 4, and the point value PV for single BB is set to 0. Therefore, during an internal BB, there is a 1 in 16,000 probability of winning an internal replay, and single BB is not won. Because the winning probability for other roles is the same as during a non-internal BB, no losing events occur during an internal BB.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the winning combination and the reel stopping results.

In this embodiment, the condition device for creating the winning combination and the symbol arrangement on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set so that if a combination other than a single BB is won, some kind of win is guaranteed. For example, if a cherry is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44, a win of small combination 1 or small combination 2 is guaranteed, and three medals are paid out. Similarly, if a fixed combination is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44, a win of small combination 3 or small combination 4 is guaranteed, and three medals are paid out. If a single BB is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated at a time that stops the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the middle row, a BB win is guaranteed. However, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated at any other time, a BB win is not guaranteed, and the BB win flag is carried over.

Furthermore, if BB and a small win are won, the main control device 101 sets and changes the stop information so that the small win takes priority; if BB and a replay are won, the main control device 101 sets and changes the stop information so that the replay win takes priority. Therefore, for example, if a duplicate BB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the small wins 5 through 14 will be won, and one medal will be paid out. If an internal replay is won while inside BB, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, either Replay 1 or Replay 4 will be won, and a replay bonus will be awarded. The same applies if another bonus is won while inside BB; regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, a bonus will be awarded for a condition device other than BB. As mentioned above, since no losses occur within the BB, in this embodiment, a BB win cannot be achieved in any game other than the one in which a single BB was won. In other words, in the first embodiment, a BB win was avoided by playing two coins to enter the BB2 state and then playing three coins, but in this embodiment, a BB win can be avoided without following the above procedure.

If the left, center, or right bell is won, operating the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 in this order will result in Bell 1 winning and eight medals being paid out. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in one of minor prizes 5 through 8 winning and one medal being paid out. The same is true for winning the left, center, bell, center, left, right, left bell, center, right, left bell, right, left center bell, or right, center, left bell. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order corresponding to the name of the winning combination, a winning condition device among Bells 2 through 6 will win and eight medals will be paid out. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a winning condition device other than Bells 2 through 6 winning and one medal being paid out. In the following, the left-center-right bell, left-center-right bell, center-left-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-left-center bell, and right-center-left bell will be collectively referred to as "push order roles" or "push order bells." Bell 1 winnings to Bell 6 winnings will also be collectively referred to as "bell winnings."

Figure 204 shows the transition of game zones.

The normal zone is a play zone where a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous zone. In the normal zone, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced. Therefore, in the normal zone, a decrease in medals can be expected with each game. If the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won, the play zone will transition to the advantageous zone.

The advantageous zone is a play zone in which the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 can be announced if the push order bell is won. In other words, the advantageous zone is a play zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone in that the operation order can be announced. The advantageous zone is composed of four play modes: chance mode, small AT precursor mode, small AT mode, and large AT mode. If the player wins the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone in the normal zone, the player will transition to the advantageous zone's chance mode. The advantageous zone ends when 3,000 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, or when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, regardless of the play mode at that time. When the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, more specifically, when the increase in the number of medals owned by the player in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400 without reaching 0. In other words, when the difference in the number of coins from the base point at which the player's medals in the advantageous zone have decreased the most reaches 2,400.

Chance mode is a game mode in which a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to small AT mode or large AT mode. Chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in chance mode. When the transition lottery to small AT mode is won or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in chance mode, the game transitions to small AT precursor mode. When the transition lottery to large AT mode is won, the game transitions directly to large AT mode without going through precursor mode. In chance mode, an assist bonus to be used in small AT mode may be acquired. The assist bonus is acquired when the assist lottery is won or when the points added in chance mode reach a predetermined value (1000 in this embodiment). Chance mode is composed of three types of game zones: the normal zone, the challenge zone (CZ), and the CZ precursor zone. When transitioning to the challenge zone, the expected value of points added is higher than in the normal zone and the CZ precursor zone. In chance mode, just like in the normal section, if you win the push order bell, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 will not be announced. Therefore, in chance mode, you can expect to see a decrease in medals with each game.

The small AT precursor mode is a game mode used to perform small AT precursor effects before transitioning to the small AT mode. The small AT precursor mode ends when a predetermined number of plays are played under the small AT precursor mode. When the small AT mode ends, the game transitions to the small AT mode. In the small AT precursor mode, as in the chance mode, an assist bonus is acquired when the assist lottery is won or when the points added under the small AT precursor mode reach a predetermined value (1000 in this embodiment). The small AT precursor mode consists of three game zones: the normal zone, the challenge zone (CZ), and the CZ precursor zone. When transitioning to the challenge zone, the expected value of points added is higher than in the normal zone and the CZ precursor zone. When transitioning from the chance mode to the small AT precursor mode, the current game zone, the current points, and the acquired assist bonus are carried over. Therefore, for example, when transitioning from the challenge zone in the chance mode to the small AT precursor mode, the small AT precursor mode starts from the challenge zone. Additionally, a lottery for transitioning to the large AT mode is also held in the small AT precursor mode, and if the lottery for transitioning to the large AT mode is won, the game will transition to the large AT mode instead of the small AT mode. In the small AT precursor mode, as in the chance mode, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced. For this reason, in the small AT precursor mode, a decrease in medals can be expected with each game played.

Small AT mode is a game mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44, which will result in a bell win if the push order bell is won, is announced. Therefore, in small AT mode, an increase in medals is expected with each game. In small AT mode, if no assist bonus is acquired, three 50% continuation lotteries are held. If three continuation lotteries are won, the game will transition to large AT mode after the end of small AT mode. If the number of continuation lottery wins is two or less, the advantageous period also ends after the end of small AT mode, and the game will transition to the normal period. Small AT mode ends after 25 games have been played if the number of continuation lottery wins is two or three, after 17 games have been played if the number of continuation lottery wins is one, and after nine games have been played if the number of continuation lottery wins is zero.

Large AT mode is a game mode in which the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44, which will result in a bell win if the push order bell is selected, is announced. Therefore, in small AT mode, an increase in medals is expected with each game. Large AT mode ends when a predetermined number of plays have been played under large AT mode. Large AT mode differs from small AT mode in the number of plays that can be played under the large AT mode. In other words, small AT mode ends after a minimum of 9 plays and a maximum of 25 plays, while large AT mode can be played a minimum of 100 plays. Therefore, transitioning to large AT mode is more advantageous to the player than small AT mode. When large AT mode ends, the advantageous period also ends and the player transitions to the normal period.

As described above, this slot machine 10 has a gameplay feature that allows players to increase their owned medals through the small AT mode and large AT mode.

The following explains the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing game zones, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 205 and onwards. To facilitate understanding, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained separately.

First, we will explain the processing during normal intervals.

Figure 205 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process for the normal section. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S160101, it is determined whether a win flag has been set in the win flag storage area 106a, i.e., whether any role has been won. If the win flag has been set, proceed to step S160102, where it is determined whether the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the winning role numbers 1 to 15 (see Figure 203) corresponding to the index value IV is stored in the win flag storage area 106a. If the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won, a transition flag is set in step S160103, and the interval indicator 66 is turned ON in step S160104, and this processing ends. If the win flag is not set, or if the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has not been won, i.e., if a single BB has been won, this processing ends immediately.

Figure 206 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in the normal interval. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S160201, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery for this game has been won. In this case, the transition flag is cleared in step S160202. In step S160203, it is determined whether the first stop command has been issued to the left reel 32L, i.e., whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time, the advantageous zone transition processing shown in steps S160204 to S160214 is performed.

In the advantageous zone transition process, in step S160204, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag. In step S160205, the zone game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S160206, the game mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag, and in step S160207, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag. In step S160208, a transition game count lottery is performed to determine the value to be set in the transition game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d. In the transition game count lottery, one of 300, 500, or 700 is obtained based on the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination was successful. More specifically, there is a 64/128 probability of obtaining 700, a 48/128 probability of obtaining 500, and a 16/128 probability of obtaining 300. In step S160209, the value obtained by the transition game number lottery is set to the transition game number counter. In step S160210, the mode game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 0. In step S160211, the point value counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 0. In step S160212, the assist counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 0. In step S160213, the difference number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S160214, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends. Here, the interval command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp various information related to the play interval at the end of the game (i.e., the play interval, play mode, play zone, and if it is a favorable interval, the number of plays played in that favorable interval or the number of plays played in that play mode, etc.) and in step S160214, the interval command corresponding to the play interval flag, play mode flag, play zone flag, and various counter values set in the interval information storage area 106d is sent.

If it is determined in step S160203 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, the process proceeds to step S160215 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the process ends after performing the advantageous zone transition process shown in steps S160204 to S160214. On the other hand, if the push order bell has been won, a zone command is sent in step S160214 and the process ends. In other words, if the push order bell is won in the normal zone and the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, even if the transition lottery has been won, the result is invalidated and the game does not transition to chance mode.

If it is determined in step S160201 that the transition flag is not set, an interval command is sent in step S160214, and this processing ends.

As described above, if a role other than a single BB is won during the normal period, the game will transition to chance mode in the advantageous period. As shown in Figure 203, for example, in "Setting 3," the probability of winning a single BB while not inside a BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first during the normal period, the game will end in almost one game. Also, if the player is inside a BB, a role other than a single BB will always be won, so if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the normal period will end in one game.

Next, we will explain the processing in the chance mode of the advantageous zone. To make it easier to understand, we will first explain the processing in the normal zone.

Figure 207 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S160301, it is determined whether or not a fixed role has been won. If a fixed role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S160302, where an assist lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to award an assist bonus.

In the assist lottery process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 208, step S160401 determines whether the value of the assist counter is 5. If the value of the assist counter is not 5, the process proceeds to step S160402, where an assist lottery is conducted based on the random number obtained when determining whether the role was successful. In step S160403, it is determined whether the assist lottery has been won. The probability of winning the assist lottery is approximately 1 in 400. If the assist lottery is not won, the process ends immediately; if the assist lottery is won, the process ends after performing the assist acquisition process in step S160404.

In the assist acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 209, an assist type lottery is conducted in step S160501 to determine the type of assist bonus. Assist bonuses include an up bonus that increases the continuation rate in small AT mode, and a continuation bonus that allows one win in the continuation lottery in small AT mode. In the assist type lottery, an up bonus is determined with a probability of 116 in 128 based on the random number obtained when determining whether the role is correct, and a continuation bonus is determined with a probability of 12 in 128. In step S160502, it is determined whether the result of the assist type lottery is an up bonus. If it is an up bonus, proceed to step S160503, and set the up number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d to 1. In step S160504, a loop rate of 70%, 80%, or 90% is obtained based on the random number obtained when determining whether the role is correct. In step S160505, a loop lottery is conducted based on the obtained loop rate. In step S160506, it is determined whether the loop lottery has been won. If the loop lottery has been won, in step S160507, 1 is added to the value of the up number counter, and the process returns to the loop lottery in step S160505.

If the loop lottery is not won, or if step S160502 determines that the award is a continuation award rather than an increase award, proceed to step S160508, where 1 is added to the assist counter value. In step S160509, the content of the acquired assist award is stored in the assist memory area provided in the section information storage area 106d. More specifically, the assist memory area is composed of five areas, area 1 to area 5. In step S160509, the area corresponding to the assist counter value stores the value of the increase number counter if the award is an increase award, and stores information indicating that it is a continuation award if the award is a continuation award. Then, in step S160510, an assist command is sent to the display control device 81, and this processing ends. By receiving the assist command, the display control device 81 determines the content of the acquired assist award, i.e., whether it is an increase award or a continuation award, and if it is an increase award, the increase number of the continuation rate.

Returning to the explanation of the assist lottery process, if it is determined in step S160401 that the value of the assist counter is 5, this means that five assist bonuses have been acquired and that all five areas of the assist memory area are in use. In such a case, this process ends without conducting an assist lottery or the like.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery processing, when the assist lottery processing is completed, proceed to step S160303 to determine whether or not a cherry has been won. If a cherry has been won, proceed to step S160304 to determine whether or not the current game mode is chance mode. If it is chance mode, proceed to step S160305 to perform a small AT transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to small AT mode based on the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role was successful. In step S160306, it is determined whether or not the small AT transition lottery has been won. The probability of winning the small AT transition lottery is 18 in 128. If the small AT transition lottery has been won, proceed to step S160307 to set the small transition flag. Thereafter, in step S160308, point lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to increase points, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S160303 that the cherry has not been won, the process proceeds to step S160309, where it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, the process ends immediately; if the push order bell has not been won, the process ends after performing a point lottery process in step S160308.

In the point lottery process, a point lottery is conducted in step S160601, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 210. In the point lottery, points are obtained based on the winning flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is successful or not.

Figure 211(a) shows the correspondence between winning roles and points earned in the normal zone. In the normal zone, if you win a watermelon, you will earn 10 points with a 20/128 probability, 20 points with a 60/128 probability, 30 points with a 40/128 probability, and 100 points with an 8/128 probability. If you win a cherry or chance, you will earn 20 points with a 20/128 probability, 30 points with a 60/128 probability, 100 points with a 40/128 probability, and 300 points with an 8/128 probability. If you win a role other than watermelon, cherry, or chance, you will earn 0 points with a 106/128 probability, 5 points with a 20/128 probability, and 10 points with a 2/128 probability.

When the point lottery has ended, step S160602 determines whether the acquired points are 0, and if so, this process terminates. If the acquired points are not 0, proceed to step S160603, where the acquired points are added to the value of the point value counter. In step S160604, a point command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 determines the acquired points by receiving the point command. In step S160605, it determines whether the value of the point value counter is greater than 999, i.e., whether the value of the point value counter has reached 1000. If the value of the point value counter has not reached 1000, this process terminates, and if the value of the point value counter has reached 1000, step S160606 subtracts 1000 from the value of the point value counter.

In step S160607, it is determined whether the value of the assist counter is 5. If the value of the assist counter is not 5, the above-mentioned assist acquisition process is performed in step S160608, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the assist counter is 5, this means that all five areas of the assist memory area are in use, and this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process, if it is determined in step S160301 that a fixed role has been won, the major transition flag is set in step S160310, and this process ends.

Figure 212 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in chance mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S160701, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29). However, in this embodiment, in step S1702, it is determined whether the value of the interval game number counter is 3000, rather than whether it is 1500.

In step S160702, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S160701, and after sending a zone command in step S160706, this process is terminated.

If the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S160703, where it is determined whether the large transition flag is set. If the large transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transition to large AT mode has been won, so the large transition flag is cleared in step S160704, and large AT transition processing is performed to transition to large AT mode in step S160705. After that, an interval command is sent in step S160706, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the large transition flag is not set, proceed to step S160707, and mode transition processing is performed. After that, an interval command is sent in step S160706, and this processing ends.

In the mode transition process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 213, in step S160801, it is determined whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first. If the left stop switch 42 was operated first, the process proceeds to step S160802, where it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, the above-mentioned point lottery process is performed in step S160803. In step S160805, a transition determination process is performed to determine whether to transition the game mode. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S160801 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44, rather than the left stop switch 42, was operated first, the process proceeds to step S160804, where it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the transition determination process is performed in step S160805.

In the transition determination process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 214, it is determined in step S160901 whether the small transition flag is set. If the small transition flag is set, this means that the small AT transition lottery has been won, so the small transition flag is cleared in step S160902, and the small AT precursor transition process shown in steps S160903 to S160906 is performed, and this process ends.

In the small AT precursor transition process, in step S160903, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to the small AT precursor flag. In step S160904, a transition game number lottery is performed to determine the value to be set in the transition game number counter. In the transition game number lottery, one of 17 to 32 is obtained based on the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination was successful. The probability of obtaining a value between 17 and 32 is 8 in 128 for each. In step S160905, the value obtained in the transition game number lottery is set in the transition game number counter. In step 160906, the mode game number counter is set to 0.

If it is determined in step S160901 that the small transition flag is not set, this means that the small AT transition lottery was not won. In such a case, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S160907, and it is determined in step S160908 whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, this processing is terminated. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, it is determined in step S160909 whether the current game mode is chance mode. If it is chance mode, the small AT precursor transition processing shown in steps S160903 to S160906 is performed, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the mode transition process, once the transition determination process has been completed, step S160806 performs the CZ transition determination process to determine whether or not to transition to the challenge zone.

In the CZ transition determination process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 215, step S161001 determines whether the current play zone is the normal zone. If it is the normal zone, proceed to step S161002 to determine whether a combination other than a single BB or cherry has been won. If a single BB or cherry has been won, the process ends. If a single BB or cherry has not been won, proceed to step S161003 to perform a CZ transition lottery to determine whether to transition to the challenge zone based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the combination was successful. Step S161004 determines whether the CZ transition lottery has been won. The winning probability of the CZ transition lottery is 68/128 if a chance win has been won, 38/128 if a watermelon win has been won, 3/128 if a replay or internal replay has been won, and 2/128 if a combination other than the above has been won. If the CZ transition lottery is not won, this process ends; if the CZ transition lottery is won, the CZ precursor transition process shown in steps S161005 to S161008 is performed, and this process ends.

In the CZ premonition transition processing, in step S161005, the game zone flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a CZ premonition flag. In step S161006, a second transition game number lottery is performed to determine the value to be set in the second transition game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d. In the second transition game number lottery, one of 1 to 8 is obtained based on a random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is successful. The probability of obtaining a value of 1 to 8 is 16 in 128 for each. In step S161007, the value obtained in the second transition game number lottery is set in the second transition game number counter. In step 161008, the second mode game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 0.

Returning to the explanation of the mode transition process, if the CZ transition determination process is completed or if it is determined in step S160804 that the push order bell has been won, proceed to step S160807 to determine whether the current play zone is the challenge zone. If the current play zone is the normal zone, then this process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the processing in the CZ premonition zone of Chance Mode.

In the CZ precursor zone, the same processing as in the normal zone is performed in the section lottery processing (see Figure 207). Points are also obtained with the same probability as in the normal zone in the point lottery processing (step S160601, see Figure 210) (see Figure 211 (a)).

During game zone processing, the CZ transition determination process of the mode transition process (step S160806, see Figure 213) performs processing different from that of the normal zone. For other operations, the same processing as the normal zone is performed.

In the CZ transition determination process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 215, step S161001 determines whether the current play zone is a normal zone, and step S161009 determines whether the current play zone is a CZ premonition zone. If it is a CZ premonition zone, a negative determination is made in step S161001 and a positive determination is made in step S161009, and processing proceeds to step S161010. In step S161010, 1 is added to the value of the second mode game number counter, and in step S161011, it is determined whether the value of the second mode game number counter matches the value of the second transition game number counter. If the value of the second mode game number counter does not match the value of the second transition game number counter, processing ends as is. If the value of the second mode game number counter matches the value of the second transition game number counter, the CZ transition process shown in steps S161012 to S161014 is performed, and processing ends.

In the CZ transition process, in step S161012, the game zone flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a CZ flag. In step S161013, the second transition game number counter is set to 11. In step 161014, the second mode game number counter is set to 0.

Next, we will explain the processing in the challenge zone of Chance Mode.

In the challenge zone, the section lottery process (see Figure 207) is the same as the normal zone, except for the point lottery in the point lottery process (step S160601, see Figure 210). In the point lottery in the challenge zone, 10 or more points are obtained regardless of the winning combination.

Figure 211(b) shows the correspondence between winning roles and points earned in the challenge zone. In the challenge zone, if you win a watermelon, you will earn 30 points with a 60/128 probability, 100 points with a 60/128 probability, and 300 points with an 8/128 probability. If you win a cherry or chance, you will earn 30 points with a 20/128 probability, 100 points with an 80/128 probability, 300 points with a 25/128 probability, and 1000 points with a 3/128 probability. If you win a role other than watermelon, cherry, or chance, you will earn 10 points with a 60/128 probability, 20 points with a 50/128 probability, and 30 points with an 18/128 probability.

In game zone processing, the mode transition process (see Figure 213) is performed differently from the normal zone. Otherwise, the same processing is performed as in the normal zone.

In the CZ transition determination process of step S160806, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 215, step S161001 determines whether the current play zone is a normal zone, and step S161009 determines whether the current play zone is a CZ precursor zone. If it is a challenge zone, a negative determination is made in step S161001 and step S161009, and the process is terminated.

In step S160807, it is determined whether the current gaming zone is a challenge zone. If it is a challenge zone, in step S160808, 1 is added to the value of the second mode game number counter, and in step S160809, it is determined whether the value of the second mode game number counter matches the value of the second transition game number counter. If the value of the second mode game number counter does not match the value of the second transition game number counter, this processing is terminated. If the value of the second mode game number counter matches the value of the second transition game number counter, in step S160810, the gaming zone flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag, and this processing is terminated.

Next, we will explain the processing in the small AT precursor mode in the advantageous zone. Note that the basic processing configuration for the zone lottery processing and play zone processing is the same as the zone lottery processing and play zone processing in chance mode. Therefore, the differences will be explained below.

In the section lottery process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 207, a determination is made in step S160304 as to whether the current game mode is chance mode. If it is small AT precursor mode, a negative determination is made, and point lottery processing is performed in step S160308, after which this processing is terminated. Small AT precursor mode is a game mode to which the player transitions when the transition lottery to small AT mode is won. For this reason, in the section lottery process in small AT precursor mode, a small AT transition lottery is not performed. Note that the point lottery process in step S160308 and the assist lottery process in step S160302 perform the same processing as in chance mode.

In the game section processing, the transition determination process for the mode transition process (step S160805, see Figure 213) performs processing that differs from that in chance mode.

In the transition determination process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 214, step S160901 determines whether the small transition flag is set. As described above, in the small AT precursor mode, a small AT transition lottery is not performed, and therefore an event in which the small transition flag is set does not occur. Therefore, in the small AT precursor mode, a negative determination is made in step S160901, and the process proceeds to step S160907. In step S160907, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S160908, it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, this process is terminated. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, step S160909 determines whether the current game mode is chance mode. If it is small AT precursor mode, a negative determination is made in step S160909, and the small AT transition process is performed in step S160910, after which this process is terminated.

In the small AT transition process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 216, in step S161101, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to the small AT flag. In step S161102, the continuation rate counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d is set to 50. In step S161103, the transition game number counter is set to 1, and in step S161104, the mode game number counter is set to 0.

In step S161105, it is determined whether information indicating a continuation bonus (hereinafter also referred to as "continuation bonus information") is stored in any of the first to fifth areas of the assist memory area. If continuation bonus information is stored, one piece of continuation bonus information is erased in step S161106, and 8 is added to the value of the transition game number counter in step S161107. In step S161108, it is determined whether the number of erased continuation bonus information is 3. If the number of erased continuation bonus information is not 3, the process returns to step S161105 and determines whether any continuation bonus information remains. On the other hand, if the number of erased continuation bonus information is 3, this means that the number of wins in the continuation lottery in the small AT mode has reached 3. In such a case, a breakthrough flag is set in step S161109, and a small AT command A is sent to the display control device 81 in step S161110, terminating this processing. By receiving small AT command A, the display control device 81 understands that the small AT mode will continue for 25 games (transition game number counter value = 1 + 8 x 3) and that the continuation lottery has been won three times.

If it is determined in step S161105 that continuation bonus information is not stored, continuation rate change processing is performed in step S161111, and then this processing is terminated.

In the continuation rate change process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 217, in step S161201, it is determined whether an up number is stored in any of the first to fifth areas of the assist memory area. As explained in the assist acquisition process (see FIG. 209), when an up bonus is acquired, the up number that increases the continuation rate is stored in the assist memory area. If an up number is stored, proceed to step S161202, and add the up number in the first area where the up number is stored to the value of the continuation rate counter. For example, if up numbers are stored in the second and third areas, add the up number stored in the second area. In step S161203, the up number in the first area where the up number is stored is erased. In step S161204, it is determined whether the value of the continuation rate counter is greater than 99, i.e., whether the continuation rate has reached 100%. If the continuation rate has not reached 100%, return to step S161201, and determine whether there are any up numbers remaining. On the other hand, if the continuation rate reaches 100%, it means that if a continuation lottery is held, three wins will be guaranteed. In this case, the transition game number counter is set to 25 in step S161205, and the breakthrough flag is set in step S161206. Then, in step S161207, a small AT command A is sent to the display control device 81, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S161201 that the number of ups is not stored, continuation lottery processing is performed in step S161208, and then this processing is terminated.

In the continuation lottery process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 218, in step S161301, a continuation lottery is performed based on the value of the continuation rate counter and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination was successful. In step S161302, it is determined whether the continuation lottery has been won. If the continuation lottery has been won, in step S161303, 8 is added to the value of the transition game counter, and in step S161304, it is determined whether the value of the transition game counter has reached 25. If the value of the transition game counter has not reached 25, the process returns to step S161301 and the continuation lottery is performed again. On the other hand, if the value of the transition game counter reaches 25, this means that the number of wins in the continuation lottery has reached three, including the number of wins based on the continuation bonus. In such a case, in step S161305, a breakthrough flag is set, and in step S161306, a small AT command A is sent to the display control device 81, terminating this process.

If it is determined in step S161302 that the continuation lottery has not been won, proceed to step S161307, where 8 is added to the value of the transition game count counter. In step S161308, it is determined whether the value of the transition game count counter is 25. If the value of the transition game count counter is 25, this means that the continuation lottery has been won twice, so in step S161309, a small AT command B is sent to the display control device 81, and this processing ends. By receiving small AT command B, the display control device 81 determines that the small AT mode will continue for 25 games and that the continuation lottery has been won twice.

If it is determined in step S161308 that the value of the transition game counter is not 25, the process proceeds to step S161310, where it is determined whether the value of the transition game counter is 17. If the value of the transition game counter is 17, this means that the number of wins in the continuation lottery has been 1, so in step S161311, a small AT command C is sent to the display control device 81, and the process ends. By receiving the small AT command C, the display control device 81 determines that the small AT mode will continue for 17 games and that the number of wins in the continuation lottery has been 1. Furthermore, if the value of the transition game counter is not 17, this means that the value of the transition game counter is 9 and the number of wins in the continuation lottery has been 0, so in step S161312, a small AT command D is sent to the display control device 81, and the process ends. By receiving the small AT command D, the display control device 81 determines that the small AT mode will continue for 9 games and that the number of wins in the continuation lottery has been 0.

In the mode transition process (see Figure 213), when the transition determination process described above is completed, the CZ transition determination process of step S160806 and the processes of steps S160807 to S160810 are performed. These processes are the same as those in chance mode. Therefore, the play zone, point value counter value, and assist bonus are carried over from chance mode to small AT precursor mode.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone small AT mode.

In the section lottery process performed at the start of the game, if the small AT mode is selected, no processing is performed and the process is terminated. Note that, as described in the first embodiment above, notification of the operation order when the push order bell is selected is performed in the instruction monitor display process (step S408, see Figure 15) of the reel control process, and not in the section lottery process. Also, in the instruction monitor display process (see Figure 19) in the first embodiment above, the instruction monitor is displayed when the notification mode is selected, but in this embodiment, the instruction monitor is displayed when the small AT mode or large AT mode is selected.

Figure 219 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the small AT mode. Game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S161401, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29). However, in this embodiment, in step S1702, it is determined whether the value of the interval game number counter is 3000, rather than whether it is 1500.

In step S161402, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S161401, and after sending a zone command in step S161409, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S161403 adds 1 to the value of the mode game count counter, and step S161404 determines whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, step S161409 sends an interval command and then terminates this processing. If the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, step S161405 determines whether the breakthrough flag is set. If the breakthrough flag is not set, this means that the number of wins in the continuation lottery is two or less. In such a case, the favorable zone termination processing shown in steps S161406 to S161408 is performed, and step S161409 sends an interval command and then terminates this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, in step S161406, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag, and in step S161407, the zone indicator 66 is turned OFF. In step S161408, initialization processing is executed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, processing is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game number counter value, etc.).

If it is determined in step S161405 that the breakthrough flag is set, this means that the continuation lottery has been won three times. In this case, large AT transition processing is performed in step S161410, and an interval command is sent in step S161409, terminating this processing.

Figure 220 is a flowchart showing the large AT transition process. The large AT transition process is performed not only when the continuation lottery is won three times in the small AT mode, but also when a fixed role is won in the chance mode or small AT precursor mode (step S160705, see Figure 212).

In step S161501, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to the large AT flag. In step S161502, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S161503, the mode game number counter is set to 0. In step S161504, it is determined whether continuation bonus information is stored in any of the first to fifth areas of the assist memory area. If continuation bonus information is stored, this means that four or more pieces of continuation bonus information were stored before transitioning to the small AT mode, or a fixed role was won in a situation where one or more pieces of continuation bonus information were stored. In such a case, one piece of continuation bonus information is erased in step S161505, and 100 is added to the value of the transition game number counter in step S161506. In step S161507, it is determined whether the number of erased continuation bonus information is greater than two. Here, the maximum number of assist bonuses that can be stored in the assist memory area is five, and when transitioning to small AT mode, up to three pieces of continuation bonus information are erased. Therefore, if it is determined in step S161507 that three or more pieces of erased continuation bonus information have been erased, this means that a fixed role has been won in a situation where three or more pieces of continuation bonus information are stored, that is, the player has won the lottery to transition to large AT mode in a situation where transitioning to small AT mode would have confirmed transition to large AT mode. In such a case, proceed to step S161508, where an additional 100 is added to the value of the transition game number counter. Thereafter, or if the number of erased continuation bonus information is two or less, return to step S161504, and determine whether any continuation bonus information remains.

If it is determined in step S161504 that no continuation bonus information is stored, proceed to step S161509 to determine whether an up number is stored in any of the first through fifth areas of the assist memory area. If an up number is stored, this means that the continuation rate reached 100% before all up bonuses were consumed in the continuation rate change process (see FIG. 217) of the small AT transition process, or that a fixed role was won while one or more up bonuses were stored. In such a case, proceed to step S161510 to obtain the number of additional games corresponding to the up number in the first area where the up number is stored. Specifically, if the up number is 1 to 10, 10 is obtained as the number of additional games; if the up number is 11 to 20, 20 is obtained as the number of additional games; and if the up number is 21 or more, 40 is obtained as the number of additional games. In step S161511, the obtained number of additional games is added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S161512, the up number in the first area where the up number is stored is erased. Then, return to step S161509 and determine whether there are any uploads remaining.

If it is determined in step S161509 that the number of uploads is not stored, this process ends.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone, large AT mode.

Figure 221 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the large AT mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S161601, it is determined whether a rare role has been won. In this embodiment, watermelon, chance, and cherry are set as rare roles, so in step S161601, it is determined whether a watermelon, chance, or cherry has been won. If a rare role has not been won, this processing ends as is. If a rare role has been won, proceed to step S161602, where an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the number of additional games is obtained based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won. For example, if a watermelon has been won, there is a 112/128 probability that the number of additional games will be 0, an 8/128 probability that the number of additional games will be 10, a 6/128 probability that the number of additional games will be 30, and a 2/128 probability that the number of additional games will be 50. In step S161603, it is determined whether the number of additional games is 0, and if it is, this processing ends. If the number of additional games is not 0, in step S161604 the number of additional games is added to the value of the transition game number counter, and in step S161605 an additional command is sent to the display control device 81, and this processing ends. Here, the additional command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the additional lottery and the number of additional games that will be added to the value of the transition game number counter.

Figure 222 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in the large AT mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S161701, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed. However, in this embodiment, in step S1702, it is determined whether the value of the interval game number counter is 3000, rather than whether it is 1500.

In step S161702, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S161701, and after sending a zone command in step S161708, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S161703 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S161704 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, step S161708 sends an interval command and then terminates this processing.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous zone end processing shown in steps S161705 to S161707 is performed, and an zone command is sent in step S161708, terminating this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S161705, and the zone indicator 66 is turned OFF in step S161706. In step S161707, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game number counter value, etc.).

Here, we will explain the playability of this slot machine 10.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 203, the winning probability for the center left-right bell, center right-left bell, right-left center bell, and right-center left bell is set higher than the left-center right bell and left-center bell. Therefore, when the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 has not been notified, the probability of achieving a bell win is higher when a switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first than when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. However, if a switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first in a game in which the push order bell has been won, if the play zone at that time is the normal zone, the next game will remain in the normal zone without transitioning to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, in the chance mode and small AT precursor mode, the mode game number counter is not updated and point lottery is not drawn, while the second mode game number counter and the section game number counter are updated. Not updating the mode game number counter means that the transition to the small AT precursor mode or small AT mode is delayed by one game, and not drawing points means that obtaining the assist bonus is further away. Updating the second mode game number counter means that one of the available play times in the challenge zone is wasted, and updating the interval game number counter means that one of the available play times in the advantageous zone is wasted. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, when the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 has not been notified, it is advantageous for the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first.

The game modes in which players can increase their owned medals are small AT mode and large AT mode. Small AT mode lasts for a minimum of nine games and a maximum of 25 games, while large AT mode lasts for a minimum of 100 games. Furthermore, in large AT mode, an additional lottery is held if a rare combination is won, further increasing the number of games that can be played in large AT mode. Therefore, in order for players to significantly increase their owned medals, they must transition to large AT mode. Large AT mode is entered when a player wins a fixed combination in chance mode or small AT precursor mode, or when the player wins the continuation lottery three times in small AT mode. Because the probability of winning a fixed combination is extremely low at approximately 1 in 66,000, the typical route to transition to large AT mode is to break through the small AT mode by winning the continuation lottery three times in small AT mode.

The probability of winning the continuation lottery in small AT mode is 50% if no assist bonus has been obtained in chance mode or small AT precursor mode. If an assist bonus has been obtained in chance mode or small AT precursor mode, if the type of assist bonus is an up bonus, the probability of winning the continuation lottery increases by the number of up bonuses, and if the type of assist bonus is a continuation bonus, the number of wins in the continuation lottery is incremented by one. Therefore, if an up bonus is obtained so that the total number of up bonuses is 50 or more, or if three or more continuation bonuses are obtained, breaking through small AT mode is confirmed. Therefore, to increase the probability of breaking through small AT mode, it is necessary to play with the aim of obtaining as many assist bonuses as possible in chance mode and small AT precursor mode. Note that if, for example, four continuation bonuses have been obtained before transitioning to small AT mode, three continuation bonuses will be used to break through small AT mode, and the unused continuation bonuses will be converted into an additional 100 games in large AT mode. Furthermore, if a fixed role is won while an assist bonus is being acquired, the number of games played will be increased according to the acquired assist bonus, and if three or more continuation bonuses have been acquired, the number of games played will be further increased. Therefore, with this slot machine 10, there will be no situation in which an acquired assist bonus will be wasted.

The small AT mode is entered via the small AT precursor mode when the small AT transition lottery based on a cherry win is won in chance mode, or when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in chance mode. When transitioning from the normal section to chance mode, the transition game number counter is set to 300, 500, or 700. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is first operated to play in chance mode, there is a possibility of transitioning to the small AT precursor mode if a cherry is won, if 300 plays have been played, if 500 plays have been played, or if 700 plays have been played.

In Chance Mode and Small AT Premonition Mode, you can obtain an assist bonus if you win the assist lottery or if you reach 1,000 points. The assist lottery is held when you win a combination other than a fixed combination, and the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 400. The point lottery is held when you operate the left stop switch 42 first or when you win a combination other than a fixed combination. The expected value of points obtained in the point lottery is approximately 2.6 points in the normal zone or CZ premonition zone, and approximately 20 points in the challenge zone. Therefore, to obtain more assist bonuses, you must transition from the play zone to the challenge zone. In the normal zone, if you operate the left stop switch 42 first and win a combination other than a fixed combination, single BB, or cherry, a CZ transition lottery is held. If you win the CZ transition lottery, you transition to the challenge zone via the CZ premonition zone, and after 10 plays in the challenge zone, you return to the normal zone.

As described above, this slot machine 10 aims to increase the excitement of playing in chance mode and small AT precursor mode (hereinafter collectively referred to as "non-AT mode") by creating a gameplay feature in which the ease of breaking through the small AT mode changes depending on the type and number of assist bonuses obtained in chance mode and small AT precursor mode.

Here, we will explain the auxiliary effects performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the second auxiliary display unit 165 when in non-AT mode. Figure 223 is a diagram showing an example of the auxiliary effects performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the second auxiliary display unit 165.

In non-AT mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays one of the following stages: the normal stage, the CZ stage, or the premonition stage.

Figure 223(a) shows an example of the display mode in the normal stage. As will be described in detail later, the normal stage corresponds to the normal zone and CZ precursor zone in the chance mode. In the normal stage, an image of a young man character strolling along a street in town is displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and a treasure chest 650 is displayed in the lower left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. The treasure chest 650 is normally displayed with its top lid closed. When an assist bonus is acquired, the top lid opens and an icon corresponding to the assist bonus pops out of the treasure chest 650. There are five types of icons: a blue icon displayed when an increase bonus of 1 to 10 is acquired; a green icon displayed when an increase bonus of 11 to 20 is acquired; a red icon displayed when an increase bonus of 21 or more is acquired; a victory icon displayed when a continuation bonus is acquired; and an additional icon that confirms the addition of the number of games in the large AT mode. To the right of the treasure chest 650, in the lower center of the auxiliary display unit 65, are five icon display areas 651-655 that display acquired icons. The icon display areas 651-655 are hidden if no assist bonuses have been acquired. The bottom right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the point acquisition status. Furthermore, when points are acquired in a normal stage, the acquired points are displayed near the point acquisition status display, and the point acquisition status is updated after the displayed acquired points are hidden. In Figure 223(a), it is displayed that 200 points out of 1000 points have been acquired, and that 5 points will be added. The second auxiliary display unit 165 is not used in normal stages.

Figure 223(b) shows an example of a display mode in the CZ stage. The CZ stage corresponds to the challenge zone. In the CZ stage, a game zone display area is formed at the top of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the game zone display area displays that the current game zone is the challenge zone and the number of games remaining in the challenge zone. In Figure 223(b), the game zone display area displays that the current game zone is the challenge zone and that the number of games remaining in the challenge zone is 6. Also, in the CZ stage, as in the normal stage, a treasure chest 650 is displayed in the lower left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, and five icon display areas 651 to 655 are provided to the right of the treasure chest 650 in the lower center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the point acquisition status is displayed in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. In Figure 223(b), a blue icon indicating that an up bonus of 1 to 10 has been acquired and that 550 of 1,000 points have been acquired are displayed. In the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, a CZ effect is displayed every game to announce the number of points acquired. The CZ effect shows a young man character smashing a point image marked "Pt" with a mallet, and also shows the points to be added in the current game. Figure 223 (b) shows that 50 points will be added to the displayed points in the current game. Note that the points are added after the points currently displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65 are no longer displayed. In the CZ stage, the second auxiliary display unit 165 is generally not used.

Figure 223(c) shows an example of the display mode in the premonition stage. The premonition stage is a stage for performing premonition effects and corresponds to the small AT premonition mode or chance mode. In the premonition stage, a young man character running through a forest is displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and a number between 0 and 32 is displayed in the second auxiliary display unit 165. If the young man character reaches the female character before the number displayed in the second auxiliary display unit 165 reaches 0, a transition to the small AT mode is announced, the premonition stage ends, and the small AT mode begins from the next game. On the other hand, if the young man character does not reach the female character before the number displayed in the second auxiliary display unit 165 reaches 0, the display in the second auxiliary display unit 165 becomes non-displayable, the premonition stage ends, and the game transitions to the normal stage or CZ stage. In Figure 223(c), if the young man character reaches the female character within 24 games, a transition to the small AT mode is confirmed. In the premonition stage, as in the normal stage and CZ stage, a treasure chest 650 is displayed in the lower left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, and five icon display areas 651-655 are provided to the right of the treasure chest 650 in the lower center of the auxiliary display unit 65, with the point acquisition status displayed in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. In Figure 223(c), a red icon indicating that an increase bonus of 21 or more has been acquired, a red icon indicating that an increase bonus of 11 to 20 has been acquired, a victory icon indicating that a continuation bonus has been acquired, and an icon indicating that 300 points out of 1000 points have been acquired are displayed. Note that, when points are acquired in the premonition stage, the acquired points are displayed near the point acquisition status display, as in the normal stage, and the point acquisition status is updated after the displayed acquired points are hidden.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 in non-AT mode, particularly those related to the presentation control of the auxiliary display unit 65 and second auxiliary display unit 165. As explained in the process performed by the main control device 101, the main control device 101 sends various commands to the display control device 81, such as lottery result commands, section commands, assist commands, and point commands. By receiving the commands sent from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 knows the type of assist bonus determined by the main control device 101, the points acquired, the value of the transition game number counter set when transitioning between game modes, etc.

Figure 224 is a flowchart showing the normal stage processing performed when a normal stage is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The normal stage processing is initiated upon receiving a section command, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S161801, it is determined whether the current game was a small AT premonition transition game. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game mode is chance mode and the game mode for the next game is small AT premonition mode. If it is not a small AT premonition transition game, proceed to step S161802, where it is determined whether the current game was a false premonition transition game. As explained in the processing performed by the main control unit 101, transitions from chance mode to small AT premonition mode occur when a cherry winning game wins the small AT transition lottery, or when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. The values set in the transition game number counter when transitioning to chance mode are 300, 500, or 700. In step S161802, it is determined that the current game was a false premonition transition game if a cherry was won in the current game or if the value of the mode game number counter is 300 or 500.

If the current game is a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game, proceed to step S161803, where the second display game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 32. In step S161804, the value of the second display game number counter (i.e., 32) is displayed on the second auxiliary display unit 165. In step S161805, the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a premonition flag. In step S161806, it is determined whether the current game was a CZ transition game. Specifically, it is determined whether the current play zone is a CZ premonition zone and the play zone for the next game is a challenge zone. If the current game was a CZ transition game, proceed to step S161807, where the CZ game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 10. Thereafter, in step S161808, the CZ suggestion flag provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is turned ON, and this processing ends. If the current game is not a CZ transition game, this process will end.

If it is determined in step S161802 that the current game was not a false premonition transition game, proceed to step S161809, where it is determined whether the current game was a CZ transition game. If the current game was a CZ transition game, the CZ game number counter is set to 10 in step S161810, and the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a CZ flag in step S161811, and this processing ends. If the current game was not a CZ transition game, this processing ends as is.

As described above, if the game mode transitions to the small AT precursor mode, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 transitions to the precursor stage from the next game. Even if the game mode does not transition to the small AT precursor mode, if a cherry is won or if the mode game number counter value reaches 300 or 500, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 transitions to the precursor stage from the next game. If the game zone transitions to the challenge zone without transitioning to the precursor stage, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 transitions to the CZ stage from the next game. If the current game is a small AT precursor transition game or a false precursor transition game, and is also a CZ transition game, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 from the next game will be the precursor stage, not the CZ stage. In such cases, the point acquisition status displayed in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 (see Figure 223 (c)) is illuminated in gold based on the CZ suggestion flag being ON, indicating that it is the challenge zone. The number of remaining games in the challenge zone is not displayed.

Although not shown in the illustration, if the current game is a large AT transition game, i.e., a game that will transition to large AT mode from the next game, the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a large AT flag, and the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 from the next game onwards is set to the large AT stage.

Figure 225 is a flowchart showing the CZ stage processing performed when the CZ stage is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The CZ stage processing is initiated upon receipt of a section command, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S161901, it is determined whether the value of the second display game number counter is 0. If the value of the second display game number counter is 0, proceed to step S161905, where 1 is subtracted from the value of the CZ game number counter. In step S161906, it is determined whether the current game was a small AT precursor transition game. If it was not a small AT precursor transition game, proceed to step S161907, where it is determined whether the current game was a false precursor transition game.

If the current game is a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game, the second display game number counter is set to 32 in step S161908, and the value of the second display game number counter (i.e., 32) is displayed on the second auxiliary display unit 165 in step S161909. At this time, the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is not changed from a CZ flag to a premonition flag. Accordingly, if an event occurs in the next game or later under the CZ stage in which the value of the second display game number counter is not 0 (if step S161901 is YES), proceed to step S161902, subtract 1 from the value of the second display game number counter, and display the subtraction result on the second auxiliary display unit 165. In step S161903, it is determined whether the value of the second display game number counter has reached 0. If the value of the second display game number counter has reached 0, step S161904 hides the second auxiliary display unit 165, and then proceed to step S161905. If the value of the second display game number counter is not 0, proceed directly to step S161905.

If it is determined in step S161907 that the current game is not a false premonition transition game, or if the value of the second displayed game number counter is displayed on the second auxiliary display unit 165 in step S161909, proceed to step S161910, where it is determined whether the value of the CZ game number counter is 0. If the value of the CZ game number counter is 0, proceed to step S161911, where it is determined whether the value of the second displayed game number counter is 0. If the value of the second displayed game number counter is 0, in step S161912, the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a normal flag, and this processing is terminated. If the value of the second displayed game number counter is not 0, in step S161913, the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a premonition flag, and this processing is terminated. If the value of the CZ game number counter is not 0, this processing is terminated as is.

As described above, the CZ stage ends when 10 plays have been played. If a small AT precursor transition game or false precursor transition game occurs during the CZ stage, the CZ stage continues while the second auxiliary display unit 165 begins displaying, suggesting that a transition to small AT mode may occur. If the CZ stage ends while the second auxiliary display unit 165 is displaying, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 will transition to the precursor stage from the next game. If the CZ stage ends without the second auxiliary display unit 165 being displayed, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 will transition to the normal stage from the next game.

Although not shown in the illustration, if the current game is a large AT transition game, i.e., a game that will transition to large AT mode from the next game, the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a large AT flag, and the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 from the next game onwards is set to the large AT stage.

Figure 226 is a flowchart showing the premonition stage processing performed when the premonition stage is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The premonition stage processing is initiated based on the reception of an interval command, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S162001, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second displayed game number counter, and the subtraction result is displayed on the second auxiliary display unit 165. In step S162002, it is determined whether the current game was a small AT premonition transition game. If it was not a small AT premonition transition game, the process proceeds to step S162003, where it is determined whether the current game was a false premonition transition game. If the current game was a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game, the process proceeds to step S161908, where 32 is set to the second displayed game number counter, and the display on the second auxiliary display unit 165 is changed to 32. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S162003 that the current game is not a false premonition transition game, CZ processing is performed in step S162005.

In CZ processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 227, step S162101 determines whether the current game was a CZ transition game. If the current game was a CZ transition game, step S162102 sets the CZ game number counter to 10, and step S162103 turns the CZ suggestion flag ON, and this processing ends. If the current game was not a CZ transition game, step S162104 determines whether the value of the CZ game number counter is 0, and if the value of the CZ game number counter is 0, this processing ends. If the value of the CZ game number counter is not 0, step S162105 subtracts 1 from the value of the CZ game number counter, and step S162106 determines whether the value of the CZ game number counter has become 0. If the value of the CZ game number counter has become 0, step S162107 turns the CZ suggestion flag OFF, and this processing ends. If the CZ game number counter value is not 0, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the premonition stage processing, when the CZ processing has ended, in step S162006 it is determined whether the value of the second display game number counter is 0. If the value of the second display game number counter is 0, in step S162007 the second auxiliary display unit 165 is hidden, and in step S162008 it is determined whether the value of the CZ game number counter is 0. If the value of the CZ game number counter is 0, in step S162009 the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a normal flag, and this processing ends. If the value of the CZ game number counter is not 0, in step S162010 the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a CZ flag, and this processing ends. If the value of the second display game number counter is not 0, this processing ends as is.

As described above, the premonition stage ends when the value of the second display game number counter reaches 0. For example, if a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game occurs during the premonition stage, such as when a transition to a small AT premonition mode occurs during a false premonition effect, the second display game number counter and the second auxiliary display unit 165 are reset to 32. If a CZ transition game occurs during the premonition stage, the premonition stage continues, and the point acquisition status displayed in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 (see Figure 223 (c)) is displayed in gold light based on the CZ suggestion flag being ON, indicating that it is in the challenge zone. The number of games remaining in the challenge zone is not displayed. If the premonition stage ends when a CZ suggestion is being made, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 will transition to the CZ stage from the next game. If the premonition stage ends when a CZ suggestion is not being made, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 will transition to the normal stage from the next game.

The reason why the premonition stage continues if the game changes to a CZ transition game during the premonition stage, and the CZ stage continues if the game changes to a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game during the CZ stage, is as follows: Because players generally play in the hope of increasing their medal holdings, it is assumed that players will be more interested in the premonition stage, where they can expect a transition to the small AT mode, than in the CZ stage, where they can recognize that they are in the challenge zone. Also, as explained in the processing performed by the main control unit 101, the value set in the transition game number counter when transitioning to the small AT premonition mode is between 17 and 32, and the number of games that can be played in the challenge zone is 10. Therefore, if the game changes to a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game during the CZ stage, transitioning to the premonition stage after the CZ stage ends makes it possible to notify the player of the transition to the small AT mode during the premonition stage.

Although not shown in the figures, if the current game is a large AT transition game, i.e., a game that will transition to large AT mode from the next game, the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a large AT flag, and the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 from the next game will be the large AT stage. Also, if the current game is a small AT transition game, i.e., a game that will transition to small AT mode from the next game, the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a small AT flag, and the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 from the next game will be the small AT stage.

Figure 228 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process that determines the auxiliary effects to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65. The effect determination process is initiated based on the reception of a lottery result command, and is performed at the start of the game. As explained in the process performed by the main control unit 101, the lottery result command is sent after the point command and assist command (see Figures 12 and 207). Therefore, at the stage of performing the effect determination process, the display control unit 81 is aware of the lottery results for the winning combination, whether or not an assist bonus has been obtained, and whether or not any points have been obtained.

In step S162201, it is determined whether or not a fixed role has been won. If a fixed role has been won, this means that the player has won the lottery to transition to the large AT mode, so in step S162202 it is decided that a premium effect will be performed, and this processing ends. In the premium effect, a specified video is displayed, and text information such as "Aim for the 'BAR' symbol" is also displayed.

If it is determined in step S162201 that a fixed role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S162203, where it is determined whether or not an assist bonus has been acquired. If an assist bonus has been acquired, the process proceeds to step S162204, where it is determined whether or not points have decreased. If points have decreased, this means that the points have reached 1,000 points and that the reason for acquiring the assist bonus has reached 1,000 points. In such a case, it is determined in step S162205 that a roulette effect will be performed, and in step S162206, the effect flag is set, and this processing ends. In the roulette effect, the icon acquired is announced depending on whether the ball thrown onto the wheel lands in a pocket displayed with a blue icon, a pocket displayed with a green icon, a pocket displayed with a red icon, or a pocket displayed with a win icon. On the other hand, if points have not decreased, this means that the reason for acquiring the assist bonus is that the assist lottery was won. In such a case, a decision is made in step S162207 to perform a treasure chest effect, and the effect flag is set in step S162206, terminating this processing. In the treasure chest effect, the top lid of the treasure chest 650 opens and the acquired icon is displayed popping out from inside the treasure chest 650.

If it is determined in step S162203 that an assist bonus has not been obtained, then in step S162208, a presentation appropriate to the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 is determined, and this processing ends. For example, if it is the CZ stage, it is determined that a CZ presentation will be performed, and if it is the premonition stage, it is determined that a premonition presentation will be performed. Furthermore, if the game transitions to a small AT during the premonition stage, it is determined that a presentation in which the young man character reaches the female character will be performed.

As explained in the processing performed by the main control unit 101, if the push order bell is won, a point lottery process is performed at the end of the game (see Figures 213 and 212). If the number of points reaches 1,000 in this point lottery process and an assist bonus is acquired, a decision is made to perform a roulette effect and the roulette effect begins at the time when an assist command indicating the acquired assist bonus is received (i.e., the time after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped).

Figure 229 is a flowchart showing the icon display process performed when displaying icons on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In step S162301, it is determined whether the effect flag is set, and if the effect flag is not set, this processing is terminated. If the effect flag is set, it means that an assist bonus has been obtained and that a roulette effect or treasure chest effect has started in this game. In such a case, step S162302 is proceeded to and it is determined whether the started roulette effect or treasure chest effect has ended, more specifically, whether the icon acquired in the roulette effect or treasure chest effect has been announced. If the started roulette effect or treasure chest effect has not ended, this processing is terminated. If the started roulette effect or treasure chest effect has ended, step S162303 clears the effect flag, and step S162304 determines whether an icon is displayed in at least one of the icon display areas 651 to 655. If an icon is displayed in at least one of the icon display areas 651 to 655, it is proceeded to and step S162305 shifts the displayed icon to the display area one position to the right. For example, if icons are displayed in first area 651 and second area 652 of the icon display area, the icon displayed in second area 652 is shifted to third area 653, and the icon displayed in first area 651 is shifted to second area 652. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S162304 that no icons are displayed in icon display areas 651-655, processing proceeds to step S162306, where the icon acquired in the current roulette effect or treasure chest effect is displayed in first area 651. In step S162307, it is determined whether the number of icons displayed in icon display areas 651-655 is 1. If the number of icons is 1, this means that this is the first time an icon has been acquired, and processing is terminated. If the number of icons is not 1, i.e., if the icon has been acquired previously, display change processing is performed in step S162308, and processing is terminated.

In the display change process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 230, step S162401 determines whether the currently acquired assist bonus is a continuing bonus. If a continuing bonus has been acquired, proceed to step S162402, where it determines whether the number of victory icons displayed in icon display areas 651-655 is four. If the number of victory icons is not four, proceed to step S162403, where it determines whether a blue icon, green icon, or red icon (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "up icons") is displayed. If no up icons are displayed, this process ends as is. If an up icon is displayed, it determines in step S162404 whether the number of victory icons displayed in icon display areas 651-655 is three. If the number of victory icons is not three, step S162405 moves the currently acquired victory icon to the end of the currently displayed icons, and step S162406 shifts the currently displayed icons to the left, thereby terminating this process. If the number of victory icons is three, proceed to step S162407, where the currently displayed up icon is changed to an add-on icon. Then, in step S162408, the currently displayed add-on icon is moved behind the victory icon, and in step S162409, the currently displayed icon is shifted to the left, terminating this process.

If it is determined in step S162401 that the currently acquired assist bonus is not a continuing bonus, i.e., if the currently acquired assist bonus is an increased bonus, then the process proceeds to step S162410, where it is determined whether the number of victory icons displayed in the icon display areas 651-655 is three. If the number of victory icons is three, then the process proceeds to step S162411, where the currently acquired increased bonus icon is changed to an added bonus icon. Thereafter, in step S162412, the changed added bonus icon is moved to the end of the currently displayed icons, and in step S162413, the currently displayed icons are shifted to the left, and this process ends. If it is determined in step S162402 that the number of victory icons is four, then the process proceeds to step S162411, where the currently acquired victory icon is changed to an added bonus icon. Thereafter, in step S162412, the changed added bonus icon is moved to the end of the currently displayed icons, and in step S162413, the currently displayed icons are shifted to the left, and this process ends. If it is determined in step S162410 that the number of winning icons is not three, the currently displayed up icons are displayed in the order they were acquired in step S162414, and this processing ends.

Here, to make it easier to understand the icon display process, we will explain it using a specific example.

For example, if a blue icon is displayed in the first area 651 of the icon display area and the acquisition of a red icon is announced by a roulette effect or the like, as shown in FIG. 231 (a1), the blue icon is shifted to the second area 652 (step S162305), and the red icon is displayed in the first area 651 (step S162306). Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (a2), the red icon is moved to the second area 652, and the blue icon is moved to the first area 651 (step S162414). In this way, if an up icon is acquired when only an up icon is displayed, the acquired up icon is first displayed in the first area 651, and the subsequently acquired up icon is moved to the end. For further example, when the acquisition of a green icon is notified in the situation shown in FIG. 231 (a2), first a green icon is displayed in the first area 651, a blue icon in the second area 652, and a red icon in the third area 653, and then the blue icon is displayed in the first area 651, the red icon in the second area 652, and the green icon in the third area 653.

When the acquisition of a victory icon is notified in the situation shown in FIG. 231(a2), as shown in FIG. 231(b1), the red icon is shifted to the third area 653 and the blue icon to the second area 652 (step S162305), and the victory icon is displayed in the first area 651 (step S162306). Then, as shown in FIG. 231(b2), the victory icon is moved to the end, third area 653 (step S162405), and the blue icon is shifted to the first area 651 and the red icon to the second area 652 (step S162406). In this way, when a victory icon is acquired in a situation where two or less victory icons and an up icon are displayed, the acquired victory icon is first displayed in the first area 651, and subsequently acquired victory icons are moved to the end. Furthermore, if a victory icon is acquired when no up icon is displayed, up to three icons will be displayed sequentially from the first area 651 to the third area 653 (step S162403 is NO).

If the up icon is acquired in the order of a red icon and a blue icon, and two victory icons have been acquired and the acquisition of a victory icon is notified, as shown in FIG. 231(c1), the two victory icons are shifted to the fifth area 655 and the fourth area 654, the red icon to the third area 653, and the blue icon to the second area 652 (step S162305), and the acquired victory icon is displayed in the first area 651 (step S162306). As explained in the processing performed by the main control unit 101, if three victory icons (i.e., continuation bonuses) are acquired, the breakthrough of the small AT mode is confirmed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 231(c2), the red and blue icons are changed to additional icons (step S162407), and these additional icons are moved to the fourth area 654 and the fifth area 655 behind the victory icons (step S162405). Then, the victory icons displayed in the fourth area 654 and fifth area 655 are shifted to the second area 652 and third area 653 so that victory icons are displayed in the first area 651 to third area 653 (step S162409).

When the acquisition of a victory icon is notified when three victory icons have been acquired, as shown in FIG. 231 (d1), the three victory icons are shifted from the fourth area 654 to the second area 652 (step S162305), and the acquired victory icon is displayed in the first area 651 (step S162306). Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (d2), the victory icon in the first area 651 is changed to an added icon (step S162411), and the added icon is moved to the last area, the fourth area 654 (step S162412). Then, the victory icons displayed in the second area 652 to the fourth area 654 are shifted to the first area 651 to the third area 653 (step S162413). The same applies when the acquisition of an up icon is notified when three victory icons have been acquired. The up icon displayed in the first area 651 is changed to an added icon and moved to the fourth area 654. Then, the victory icons displayed in the second area 652 to the fourth area 654 are shifted to the first area 651 to the third area 653.

Next, we will explain the auxiliary effects that are performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in small AT mode. As described above, when the display control device 81 transitions to small AT mode, it changes the stage flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 to a small AT flag, and sets the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 to the small AT stage.

The small AT stage consists of a one-game continuation rate determination part and an eight-game battle part.

In the continuation rate determination part, auxiliary effects are performed according to the type and number of icons displayed in the icon display areas 651-655. Specifically, if the number of displayed victory icons is three, a young man character and a female character will appear in the auxiliary display section 65, and text information saying "Congratulations on your three wins!" will be displayed. At this time, the displayed victory icons will continue to be displayed as is without being hidden (victory icons are not consumed in the continuation rate determination part). If the number of displayed victory icons is two or less and the number of displayed up icons is zero, text information saying "50% continuation rate" will be displayed in the center of the auxiliary display section 65.

If the number of displayed win icons is two or less and the number of displayed up icons is one, the text information "Continuation rate 50%" is displayed in the center left of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the up icon displayed in the first area 651 moves to the center right of the auxiliary display unit 65. A notification prompting the player to operate the effect switch 166 is then issued. If the effect switch 166 is actually operated or a predetermined time has passed, the up icon breaks up, the number of ups is displayed, and the displayed number of ups is added to the continuation rate. If the number of displayed up icons is two or more, this up number addition effect is performed in the following order: first area 651 → second area 652 → third area 653 → fourth area 654 → fifth area 655. If the continuation rate reaches 100% during the up number addition effect, a young man character and a female character appear in the auxiliary display unit 65, and the text information "Congratulations on three wins!" is displayed. At this time, if any up icons remain unused in the up number addition effect, they will continue to be displayed until the game transitions to the large AT mode. When the number of up-number addition effects performed is the same as the number of up-number icons displayed, the continuation rate displayed in the last up-number addition effect is displayed in the center of the auxiliary display section 65.

In the battle part, a showdown between the young man character and the enemy character is played over eight games. If the young man character wins against the enemy character, the showdown is repeated for a maximum of three sets. If the showdown is won three times, the game moves to the major AT stage. If the young man character is defeated by the enemy character, the advantageous zone ends and the game moves to the normal zone, so the game moves to the preparation stage corresponding to the normal zone. Here, if the number of victory icons displayed is one or more, in the first game of the battle part, the victory icon displayed in the area with the lowest number among the areas where victory icons are displayed is hidden, and the text information "Victory confirmed" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. For example, if the number of victory icons displayed is three, the victory icon in the first area 651 will be hidden in the first game of the first set of the battle part (the second game in small AT mode), the victory icon in the second area 652 will be hidden in the first game of the second set of the battle part (the tenth game in small AT mode), and the victory icon in the third area 653 will be hidden in the first game of the third set of the battle part (the 18th game in small AT mode).

As explained in the icon display process, when the number of victory icons displayed in icon display areas 651-655 is one or two, the victory icon is displayed after the up icon. Also, when the number of victory icons displayed is two or less and multiple up icons are displayed, the up icons are displayed in the order in which they were acquired, starting from the first area 651. In other words, in the icon display process, when a victory icon has not been acquired, the up icons are displayed in the order in which they were acquired, starting from the first area 651, and when a victory icon has been acquired, the acquired icons are rearranged so that they are used in the small AT stage.

When transitioning from the small AT stage to the large AT stage, the display status of the icon display areas 651-655 includes a status where an up icon not used in the up number addition effect remains, and a status where an additional icon is displayed in at least one of the fourth and fifth areas 654 and 655. The status where an additional icon is displayed in at least one of the fourth and fifth areas 654 and 655 occurs when three victory icons are acquired in non-AT mode and used in the battle part, as illustrated in Figures 231(c2) and (d2). In each of the above display statuses, the number of games added effect is performed after the third set of showdown effects ends (more specifically, after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped). In the number of games added effect, text information indicating "100G," the initial number of games in the large AT mode, is displayed in the center left of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the icon displayed in the first of the icon display areas 651-655 moves to the center right of the auxiliary display unit 65. A notification is then issued urging the player to operate the effect switch 166, and when the effect switch 166 is actually operated or a predetermined time has passed, the icon breaks up and the number of added games is displayed, and the displayed number of added games is added to the number of games in the center left. If there are two or more remaining icons, this effect of adding the number of games is performed in the following order: second area 652 → third area 653 → fourth area 654 → fifth area 655.

If a fixed role is won and the game moves directly from non-AT mode to large AT mode, the icons acquired in non-AT mode will remain. In such a case, after the premium effect ends (more specifically, after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped), the game number addition effect will be performed in the following order: first area 651 → second area 652 → third area 653 → fourth area 654 → fifth area 655.

From the above perspective, when an icon is acquired during the icon display process, it can be said that the acquired icons are rearranged in the order in which they will be used in the small AT stage and large AT stage.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In non-AT mode, if you win the assist lottery or if you reach 1,000 points, an assist bonus is awarded that makes it easier to break through small AT mode. This configuration makes it possible to link play in non-AT mode with play in small AT mode. Furthermore, since it is possible to play in non-AT mode while hoping to receive an assist bonus, it is possible to prevent play in non-AT mode from becoming monotonous.

When an assist bonus is awarded, a roulette or treasure chest effect is used to notify the player that an assist bonus has been awarded, and an icon corresponding to the awarded assist bonus is displayed in icon display areas 651-655. This configuration allows the player to understand the status of the assist bonus acquisition, and allows the player to play in non-AT mode while guessing the assist bonus required to confirm success in the small AT mode.

As a result of the above, it is possible to prevent gameplay in non-AT mode from becoming monotonous, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When displaying the icon, a blue icon is displayed when an up bonus with an up number between 1 and 10 is acquired, a green icon is displayed when an up bonus with an up number between 11 and 20 is acquired, and a red icon is displayed when an up bonus with an up number of 21 or more is acquired. This configuration allows players to play up to the continuation rate determination part while guessing the up number from the display color of the up icon, and allows players to visually recognize the up number addition effect while hoping that the continuation rate will reach 100%. As a result, not only does this prevent gameplay in non-AT mode from becoming monotonous, but it also prevents the continuation rate determination part and up number addition effect from being wasted. For example, when an up bonus is awarded, it is possible to display an up icon with the up number written directly on it. However, this configuration would allow players to know what percentage the continuation rate will be in non-AT mode, making the continuation rate determination part and up number addition effect useless.

If a victory icon has not been acquired, the displayed icons are rearranged so that they are arranged in the order in which the up icons were acquired from the first area 651, and if a victory icon has been acquired, the acquired icons are rearranged so that they are used in the small AT stage. In this way, when multiple icons are displayed, the icons can be arranged in either the order of the assist bonuses granted or in an order different from the order of the assist bonuses granted, thereby diversifying the icon display style. It also makes it possible to avoid player confusion due to the difference between the order in which the icons are displayed and the order in which the icons are used in the up number addition effect.

When multiple up icons are displayed side by side, the up icons are displayed in the order in which they were acquired. This configuration allows players to easily understand the order in which they were acquired, at least with regard to the up bonuses.

When victory icons are displayed in icon display areas 651-655 while up icons are being displayed, the victory icons are arranged in a row after the up icons. Up icons are used in the up number addition effect in the continuation rate determination part, and victory icons are used in the first game of each set in the battle part. Therefore, by arranging the victory icons in a row after the up icons, it is possible to arrange the acquired icons in the order in which they will be used in the small AT stage, while allowing the player to easily grasp the number of up icons and victory icons acquired.

If the continuation lottery is won three times in the small AT mode, the system will transition to the large AT mode. If an upgrade bonus is awarded, the probability of winning the continuation lottery increases, and if a continuation bonus is awarded, it is considered that the player has won the continuation lottery once. With this configuration, the player's interest will be drawn to whether the number of wins in the continuation lottery will be three, depending on the number of continuation bonuses acquired. If the number of wins in the continuation lottery does not amount to three based on the acquired continuation bonuses alone, the player's interest will likely be drawn to the number of upgrade bonuses acquired. Therefore, by configuring the system to allow the player to easily grasp the number of upgrade bonuses and continuation bonuses acquired, it is possible to display icons that meet the player's needs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the breakthrough of the small AT mode is confirmed by a continuation bonus, the order of the icons is changed so that the victory icon is displayed first. If the breakthrough of the small AT mode is confirmed by a continuation bonus, it is expected that the player will lose interest in the number of increased bonuses acquired. Therefore, in such cases, by changing the order of the icons so that the victory icon is displayed first, it is possible to display icons in accordance with the player's wishes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When an up icon and a victory icon are displayed side by side and a victory icon is acquired, and the victory icon confirms that the small AT mode has been broken through, the up icon is changed to an added icon. If the up icon continues to be displayed even after the victory icon confirms that the small AT mode has been broken through, it is possible that the player may get the impression that they have wasted their chances every time they see the up icon, and may not be able to concentrate on the game. Therefore, in such cases, changing the up icon to an added icon can effectively alleviate the above concerns.

When an assist bonus is awarded after breakthrough of the small AT mode is confirmed through a continuation bonus, an additional icon is displayed in the icon display areas 651-655 regardless of whether an up bonus or a continuation bonus is awarded. If an icon corresponding to the awarded assist bonus was displayed after breakthrough of the small AT mode was confirmed through a continuation bonus, it is possible that the player may feel as if they have wasted their money and may not be able to concentrate on the game. Therefore, in such cases, the above concern can be resolved by displaying an additional icon instead of the icon corresponding to the acquired assist bonus. Furthermore, with this configuration, it is possible to play in non-AT mode in the hope of receiving another assist bonus even after the number of displayed win icons reaches three, thereby preventing gameplay in non-AT mode from becoming monotonous.

When an add-on icon is displayed, the number of games available for play in the large AT mode is increased. This configuration makes it possible to prevent so-called wasted draws even if an up or continuation bonus is subsequently awarded when a breakthrough into the small AT mode is confirmed by a continuation bonus during non-AT mode. Furthermore, as described above, if a win icon is acquired while an up icon and a victory icon are displayed side by side and breakthrough into the small AT mode is confirmed by the win icon, the up icon is changed to an add-on icon at that time. This configuration makes it possible to change the icon when it is no longer necessary to benefit from an increased continuation rate, reducing the chances that a player will lose interest in playing because they think they have made a so-called wasted draw. As a result, it is possible to prevent play in non-AT mode from becoming monotonous.

If a fixed role is won in non-AT mode, the next game will transition to large AT mode. This configuration makes it possible to provide two transition routes to large AT mode: one that transitions from non-AT mode to small AT mode and then to large AT mode, and one that transitions directly from non-AT mode to large AT mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, in a configuration where an assist bonus for small AT mode is awarded in non-AT mode and an icon corresponding to the awarded assist bonus is displayed, the player will win a fixed role while they are aware of the status of the assist bonus. Therefore, if the fixed role is won while the icon is actually displayed, the player is more likely to think that they have wasted their chances. This can lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play, even though they have won a fixed role and are moving on to large AT mode. However, if the configuration is such that when moving on to large AT mode with icons remaining, the benefit of the remaining icon is changed to a benefit different from the benefit received in small AT mode, the above concerns can be suitably alleviated and interest in the game can be increased.

If a player wins a fixed role while an up icon or victory icon is displayed, instead of the benefit corresponding to the displayed icon, the player is granted a benefit that increases the number of games that can be played in the large AT mode. This configuration prevents the assist benefits that have been acquired up to that point from going to waste, reducing the chances that the player will lose interest in playing.

If a fixed role is won in non-AT mode, the next game will transition to large AT mode. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an assist bonus being awarded in the play count between winning a fixed role and transitioning to large AT mode, reducing the chances of so-called wasted draws.

When a fixed role is won while a continuation bonus is being acquired, if the number of wins is two or less, 100 games are added for each win. If the number of wins is three or more, 100 games are added for each win up to the second win, and 200 games are added for each win from the third win onwards. This configuration makes it possible to provide a benefit that is more advantageous to the player when a fixed role is won when breakthrough of the small AT mode is confirmed by the continuation bonus, compared to when a fixed role is won when breakthrough of the small AT mode is not confirmed by the continuation bonus. Some players may feel that there was no need to win the fixed role at this time, or that all the effort to reach the situation was wasted. However, in this slot machine 10, a benefit that is more advantageous to the player is provided compared to when a fixed role is won when breakthrough of the small AT mode is not confirmed by the continuation bonus, making it possible to avoid the player from having this impression.

In the small AT transition process, assist bonuses are used in the order of continuation bonus → boost bonus, and if breaking through the small AT mode is confirmed, the use of assist bonuses will end at that time. With this configuration, in cases such as when more assist bonuses than are acquired to confirm breaking through the small AT mode are acquired, it is possible to transition to the large AT mode with the acquired assist bonuses remaining. As a result, it is possible to grant a different benefit to the excess assist bonuses than was obtained in the small AT mode, reducing the chances of so-called wasted draws occurring.

When a transition occurs to the Challenge Zone in the normal stage, the game transitions to the CZ stage and a CZ effect is performed. When a transition occurs to the Challenge Zone in the premonition stage, a CZ suggestion is performed without transitioning to the CZ stage. This configuration makes it possible to perform different auxiliary effects for the Challenge Zone when a transition occurs to the Challenge Zone, depending on whether or not a premonition effect is performed.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by diversifying the auxiliary effects.

When the game transitions to the Challenge Zone during the Premonition Stage, the Premonition Stage and Premonition Effects continue, while a CZ suggestion is given. This configuration makes it possible to heighten the player's anticipation for the transition to the small AT mode through the Premonition Effects, while also notifying the player of the transition to the Challenge Zone through a CZ suggestion.

When the game transitions to the challenge zone during the premonition stage, a CZ suggestion is made by displaying the point acquisition status displayed in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 in gold light. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that they have transitioned to the challenge zone without losing interest in the premonition effects. Furthermore, with this configuration, the display area in which the CZ suggestion is made is smaller than the display area in which the premonition effects are made. Therefore, it is possible to make a CZ suggestion without interfering with the premonition effects, and it is possible to notify the player that they have transitioned to the challenge zone without losing interest in the premonition effects.

The CZ stage and CZ effects display the number of games remaining in the Challenge Zone, while the CZ hint does not. When the CZ effect is being performed without a premonition effect, it is assumed that the player will be interested in information related to the Challenge Zone, and when the premonition effect and CZ hint are being performed, it is assumed that the player will be more interested in whether or not there will be a transition to small AT mode than in information related to the Challenge Zone. Therefore, by configuring the CZ effect to display the number of games remaining in the Challenge Zone, while the CZ hint does not display the number of games remaining in the Challenge Zone, it is possible to execute auxiliary effects that are in line with the player's interests, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the premonition stage ends during the challenge zone, the next game will transition to the CZ stage and a CZ effect will be displayed. Generally, when a premonition effect that suggests a transition to small AT mode ends, it is expected that the player's motivation to play will decrease because they did not transition to small AT mode. Therefore, by configuring the game so that the next game will transition to the CZ stage and a CZ effect will be displayed when the premonition effect ends during the challenge zone, it is possible to reduce the player's motivation to play.

If a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game occurs during the CZ stage, the value of the second display game number counter is displayed on the second auxiliary display unit 165 while the CZ stage continues. This configuration allows for auxiliary effects to be implemented in line with the player's wishes, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. For example, if a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game occurs during the CZ stage, it is possible to transition from the CZ stage to the premonition stage and execute the premonition effect. However, with this configuration, if the premonition effect suggests that the game will not transition to the small AT mode, there is a concern that the player may be dissatisfied and wish the CZ effect had remained. To address this concern, it is possible to transition from the CZ stage to the premonition stage only when the game suggests a transition to the small AT mode. However, with this configuration, the transition to the small AT mode is confirmed when the CZ stage transitions to the premonition stage, i.e., when the premonition effect begins instead of the CZ effect, which creates a new problem: the purpose of the premonition effect, which is to increase anticipation for the transition to the small AT mode, is undermined. On the other hand, if the CZ effect continues on the auxiliary display unit 65 while the value of the second display game number counter is displayed on the second auxiliary display unit 165, it is possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

The second auxiliary display unit 165 is provided separately from the auxiliary display unit 65. This configuration makes it possible to display the value of the second display game number counter without reducing the display area for the CZ effect.

If the challenge zone ends while the second auxiliary display unit 165 is displaying, the next game will transition to the premonition stage, and the auxiliary display unit 65 will display a premonition effect. This configuration makes it possible to indicate whether or not the game will transition to the small AT mode through the premonition effect on the auxiliary display unit 65, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The number of plays that can be played in the challenge zone is set to 10, and when transitioning to small AT precursor mode, the transition game number counter is set to either 17 or 32. In this way, by configuring the period spent in small AT precursor mode to be longer than the period spent in the challenge zone, even if any game in the CZ stage becomes a small AT precursor transition game or a false precursor transition game, it is possible to indicate whether or not to transition to small AT mode in the precursor effect after the end of the CZ stage, i.e., after the end of the CZ effect. As a result, there is no need to prepare new data, etc., to indicate whether or not to transition to small AT mode in the CZ effect, which makes it possible to suppress increases in memory capacity.

When the second auxiliary display unit 165 is displaying, the display stage of the auxiliary display unit 65 does not transition from the premonition stage to the CZ stage, i.e., the CZ effect is not executed. However, if the game becomes a small AT premonition transition game or a false premonition transition game in the CZ stage, the second auxiliary display unit 165 starts displaying, i.e., a specified premonition effect starts. This configuration makes it possible to execute both the CZ effect and the specified premonition effect, and also makes it possible to give the specified premonition effect a higher priority than the CZ effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by diversifying the auxiliary effects.

When comparing the small AT mode with the challenge zone, the player can expect to increase the number of medals they own in the small AT mode, so the small AT mode offers a greater advantage to the player. With this configuration, it is expected that the player will be more interested in transitioning to the small AT mode than in the challenge zone. Therefore, by configuring the game so that the CZ effect is not executed when the second auxiliary display unit 165 is displayed, and by configuring the game so that the second auxiliary display unit 165 begins to display when the CZ stage becomes a small AT precursor transition game or a false precursor transition game, it becomes possible to execute auxiliary effects that are in line with the player's interests, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When a small AT premonition transition game or false premonition transition game occurs during the normal stage, the display stage transitions to the premonition stage, and the premonition effect begins on the auxiliary display unit 65. This configuration allows the auxiliary display unit 65 to function as a display unit that displays auxiliary effects such as premonition effects and CZ effects depending on the game situation, allowing the player to focus on the auxiliary display unit 65. For example, the auxiliary display unit 65 could be configured to display auxiliary effects related to the normal stage and CZ stage, and the second auxiliary display unit 165 could be configured to display auxiliary effects related to the premonition stage and premonition effects rather than displaying the value of the second display game number counter. However, with this configuration, when a transition occurs to the challenge zone while in small AT premonition mode, or when a transition occurs to small AT premonition mode while in the challenge zone, the player would need to view the CZ effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the premonition effect on the second auxiliary display unit 165, which could potentially distract the player from the game.

The second auxiliary display unit 165 is configured to display the value of the second display game number counter, i.e., the number of remaining games that may result in a transition to small AT mode. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted when a situation arises in which a CZ effect is being executed on the auxiliary display unit 165 while a specified premonition effect is being executed on the second auxiliary display unit 165. This is because the auxiliary effect on the second auxiliary display unit 165 can be checked at the start or end of the game, etc.

(17th embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing configuration during non-play periods from the end of the game until a medal or virtual medal is inserted. This configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment, so only the distinctive features will be explained below.

Figure 232 is an oblique view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

To the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and to the left of the medal insertion slot 45 are provided an effect switch 67 and selection switches 68a and 68b. The effect switch 67 is operated during a game in which an auxiliary effect prompting the player to operate the effect switch 67 is performed. Furthermore, as will be described in detail below, when the effect switch 67 is operated during non-playing, a menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, or the selection is determined based on the player's selection on the menu screen or the like. The selection switches 68a and 68b are composed of two switches, the right switch 68a and the left switch 68b, and are operated to select desired information from various information displayed on the menu screen or the like, as will be described below. The effect switch 67 (more specifically, the effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 67) and the selection switches 68a and 68b (more specifically, the selection switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the selection switches 68a and 68b) are connected to the display control device 81.

Figure 233 shows an example of a display screen on the auxiliary display unit 65.

When a game ends, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a non-customer waiting effect, as shown in FIG. 233(a). The non-customer waiting effect here refers to auxiliary effects other than the customer waiting effect described below, and includes auxiliary effects performed during the game. More specifically, when a game ends, the auxiliary display unit 65 continues to display the auxiliary effects performed during the game. Therefore, if no auxiliary effects were performed during the game, the auxiliary display unit 65 continues to display the normal screen as a non-customer waiting effect. If, for example, a continuous effect was performed during the game, the auxiliary display unit 65 continues to display the final scene of the continuous effect, such as "NEXT," as a non-customer waiting effect. Furthermore, the lower part of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays information indicating that, when the game ends, a menu screen can be called up by operating the effect switch 67, and that the volume level can be adjusted by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b. While detailed illustrations are omitted, these operation instructions are displayed overlapping the non-customer waiting effect.

When a predetermined time (90 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the game ended, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a customer waiting effect (attract effect) instead of the non-customer waiting effect, as shown in Figure 233 (b). The lower part of the auxiliary display unit 65 continues to display information that a menu screen can be called up by operating effect switch 67, and that the volume level can be adjusted by operating selection switches 68a and 68b. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the display of these operation methods is superimposed on the front and back of the non-customer waiting effect.

If the effect switch 67 is operated while a non-customer waiting effect or a customer waiting effect is being performed, a menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in Figure 233 (c). The menu screen allows the selection of game history, character selection, volume setting, and back, and any of the above information can be selected by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b. In Figure 233 (c), volume setting is selected.

When any of the various information displayed on the menu screen is selected and the effect switch 67 is operated, the corresponding information is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. When the effect switch 67 is operated with the game history selected, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of games played, the number of transitions to the notification mode, and the number of rare wins as a game history screen. When the effect switch 67 is operated with the character selection selected, three characters are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a character selection screen. The player can select one of the characters by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b, and then select the main character to be displayed in the non-customer waiting effect by operating the effect switch 67. When the effect switch 67 is operated with the volume setting selected, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays volume information 1 to 5 as a volume setting screen, as shown in Figure 233(d). In Figure 233(d), volume information 3 is selected. The player can select one of the volume information options by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b, and then select the volume level to be output from the speaker by operating the effect switch 67. If the effect switch 67 is operated while "Back" is selected, the menu screen will close.

When the selection switches 68a and 68b are operated while a non-customer waiting effect or customer waiting effect is being performed, volume information 1 to 5 is displayed in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in Figures 233(e) and 233(f). In Figures 233(e) and 233(f), volume information 3 is selected. At this time, the non-customer waiting effect and customer waiting effect continue to be performed. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the volume information is displayed so that it overlaps the non-customer waiting effect and customer waiting effect in front of and behind the effect. The player selects one of the volume information by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b, and then operates the effect switch 67 to select the volume level to be output from the speaker 64.

The following describes the processing performed by the display control device 81 when controlling the display of the auxiliary display unit 65.

Figure 234 is a flowchart showing non-play processing.

In step S170101, it is determined whether the game has ended, and if the game has not ended, i.e., if the game is still in progress, this processing is terminated. If the game has ended, a timer is started in step S170102, and operation instructions are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S170103. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 233(a), it is displayed that a menu screen can be called up by operating the effect switch 67, and that the volume level can be adjusted by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b. In step S170104, an interrupt waiting process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is started. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the timer interrupt process checks the operation status of the effect switch 67 and selection switches 68a and 68b connected to the display control device 81 (more specifically, the signal input status from the corresponding detection sensors). By performing the processing from step S170105 onwards after the timer interrupt processing has started, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the processing from step S170105 onwards is performed multiple times in response to a single operation of the effect switch 67 or selection switches 68a, 68b.

In step S170105, it is determined whether an information screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, i.e., whether one of the game history screen, character selection screen, or volume setting screen is being displayed. If an information screen is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S170107, where it is determined whether a menu screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the menu screen is not being displayed, this means that a customer waiting effect or a non-customer waiting effect is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, in step S170109, a waiting process for insertion is performed, and the process returns to the waiting process for interruption in step S170104.

In the waiting for insertion process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 235, step S170201 determines whether the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has not been operated, proceed to step S170207, where it determines whether the selection switches 68a and 68b have been operated. If neither the effect switch 67 nor the selection switches 68a and 68b have been operated, proceed to step S170212, where it determines whether a non-customer waiting screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If a non-customer waiting screen is being displayed, proceed to step S170213, where it determines whether 90 seconds have passed since the end of the game. If 90 seconds have passed since the end of the game, proceed to step S170214, where a customer waiting effect is started on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed to the customer waiting screen.

If it is determined in step S170212 that the customer waiting screen is being displayed, if it is determined in step S170213 that 90 seconds have not yet elapsed since the game ended, or if the screen has been changed to the customer waiting screen in step S170214, the process proceeds to step S170215, where it is determined whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is 0, the process terminates. If the number of bets is not 0, this means that medals have been inserted, or that credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated to insert virtual medals. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S170216, where it is determined whether the customer waiting screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the customer waiting screen is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S170217, where a non-customer waiting effect is started on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed to the non-customer waiting screen. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S170216 that the customer waiting screen is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S170218, where a start command waiting process is performed to wait until a start command to start the game is generated. If the number of bets returns to 0 during the start command waiting process, the process proceeds to step S170102 of the non-playing process.

If it is determined in step S170207 that the selection switches 68a and 68b have been operated, the process proceeds to step S170208, where the volume information indicating the volume level is changed. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a volume level storage area that stores the volume level output from the speaker 64, and a volume information storage area that temporarily stores the volume level. In step S170208, if the right switch 68a is operated when the value in the volume information storage area is 0, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value stored in the volume level storage area is stored in the volume information storage area, within the range of 1 to 5. If the left switch 68b is operated when the value in the volume information storage area is 0, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value stored in the volume level storage area is stored in the volume information storage area, within the range of 1 to 5. Furthermore, if the value in the volume information storage area is not 0, when the right switch 68a is operated, 1 is added to the value stored in the volume information storage area within the range of 1 to 5, and when the left switch 68b is operated, 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the volume information storage area within the range of 1 to 5. In step S170209, the operation method displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden, and in step S170210, volume information corresponding to the value stored in the volume information storage area is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the non-customer waiting effect and customer waiting effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 continue to be displayed. In step S170211, a preview sound is output from the speaker 64 at a volume level corresponding to the value stored in the volume information storage area. Then, the program proceeds to step S170212.

If it is determined in step S170201 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S170202, where it is determined whether volume information is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If volume information is being displayed, this means that the player operated the selection switches 68a and 68b to change the volume level, and then operated the effect switch 67. In such a case, the volume information is stored in step S170203. Specifically, the value stored in the volume information storage area is stored in the volume level storage area, and the value stored in the volume information storage area is changed to 0. In step S170204, the volume information displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden, and in step S170205, the operation method is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, the process proceeds to step S170212.

If the effect switch 67 is operated when volume information is not being displayed (if step S170202 returns NO), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed to the menu screen in step S170206, and this processing ends. At this time, the operation method displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden as the screen changes to the menu screen.

Returning to the explanation of non-play processing, if it is determined in step S170107 that a menu screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, menu change processing is performed in step S170108, and processing returns to the interrupt wait processing in step S170104.

In the menu change process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 236, it is determined in step S170301 whether the selection switch 68a or 68b has been operated. If the selection switch 68a or 68b has been operated, the selected information is changed in step S170302 and this process is terminated. When changing the selected information, if the right switch 68a is operated, the currently selected information is changed to the next higher information among "Game History", "Character Selection", "Volume Settings", and "Back", and if the left switch 68b is operated, the currently selected information is changed to the next lower information among "Game History", "Character Selection", "Volume Settings", and "Back".

If it is determined in step S170301 that the selection switches 68a and 68b have not been operated, the process proceeds to step S170303, where it is determined whether the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S170304, where it is determined whether the selected information is "Back." If the selected information is "Back," the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed from the menu screen to the customer waiting screen in step S170305, and this processing ends. If the selected information is not "Back" but one of "Game History," "Character Selection," or "Volume Settings," the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed from the menu screen to the information screen corresponding to the selected information in step S170306, and this processing ends. At this time, if "Volume Settings" is selected and the effect switch 67 is operated, the volume information corresponding to the value stored in the volume level memory area is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. For example, if "3" is stored in the volume level storage area, the volume information "3" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 233(d).

If neither the effect switch 67 nor the selection switches 68a, 68b have been operated, the process proceeds to step S170307, where it is determined whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is 0, the process terminates. If the number of bets is not 0, this means that medals have been inserted, or that a credit insertion switch 56-58 has been operated to insert a virtual medal. In this case, the process proceeds to step S170308, where the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed from the menu screen to a non-customer waiting screen. Then, the process proceeds to step S170309, where a start command waiting process is performed to wait until a start command to start the game is issued.

Returning to the explanation of non-play processing, if it is determined in step S170105 that an information screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, information change processing is performed in step S170106, and processing returns to the interrupt wait processing in step S170104.

The following describes the information change process when "Volume Setting" is selected and the effect switch 67 is operated, i.e., the information change process on the volume setting screen.

In the information change process on the volume setting screen, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 237, step S170401 determines whether the selection switch 68a or 68b has been operated. If the selection switch 68a or 68b has been operated, the volume information is changed in step S170402. In step S170402, if the right switch 68a is operated when the value in the volume information storage area is 0, a value incremented by 1 to the value stored in the volume level storage area is stored in the volume information storage area within the range of 1 to 5. If the left switch 68b is operated when the value in the volume information storage area is 0, a value decremented by 1 from the value stored in the volume level storage area is stored in the volume information storage area within the range of 1 to 5. Furthermore, if the value in the volume information storage area is not 0, if the right switch 68a is operated, a value incremented by 1 to the value stored in the volume information storage area is stored within the range of 1 to 5. If the left switch 68b is operated, a value incremented by 1 to the value stored in the volume information storage area is stored within the range of 1 to 5. The volume information displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is then changed to the volume information corresponding to the value stored in the volume information storage area. In step S170403, the preview sound is output from the speaker 64 at a volume level corresponding to the value stored in the volume information storage area. This process then terminates.

If it is determined in step S170401 that the selection switches 68a and 68b have not been operated, the process proceeds to step S170404, where it is determined whether the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has been operated, the volume information is stored in step S170405. Specifically, the value stored in the volume information storage area is stored in the volume level storage area, and the value stored in the volume information storage area is changed to 0. In step S170406, the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed from the volume setting screen to the menu screen. This process then terminates.

If neither the effect switch 67 nor the selection switches 68a, 68b have been operated, the process proceeds to step S170407, where it is determined whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is 0, the process terminates. If the number of bets is not 0, this means that medals have been inserted, or that virtual medals have been inserted by operating the credit insertion switches 56-58. In this case, the process proceeds to step S170408, where the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed from the volume setting screen to the non-customer waiting screen, and the value stored in the volume information storage area is changed to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S170409, where a start command waiting process is performed to wait until a start command to start the game is issued.

As described above, if a medal is bet on the volume setting screen without operating the effect switch 67, the volume level output from the speaker 64 will not change, even if the volume information is changed by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b. The same is true for the insertion waiting process; if the volume information is changed by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b and a medal is bet without operating the effect switch 67, the volume level output from the speaker 64 will not change (the value stored in the volume information storage area is changed to 0, without changing the value in the volume level storage area). Therefore, it can be said that the effect switch 67 has a calling function that calls up a menu screen when not playing, and a deciding function that determines the player's selection.

Figure 238 shows how the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 changes when the volume level is changed.

Figure 238 (a) shows the flow of changes in the display screen when going through the menu screen. When the game ends, the non-customer waiting screen appears. If 90 seconds have passed while remaining on the non-customer waiting screen, the screen transitions to the customer waiting screen. If the effect switch 67 is operated on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen, the screen transitions to the menu screen. If the selection switches 68a and 68b are operated on the menu screen to select "Volume Setting" and the effect switch 67 is operated to confirm, the screen transitions to the volume setting screen. If the selection switches 68a and 68b are operated on the volume setting screen, the volume information changes according to the operation and a preview sound is output. If a medal is inserted on the volume setting screen, the screen transitions to the non-customer waiting screen. At this time, even if the volume information has been changed on the volume setting screen, the volume level output from the speaker 64 does not change. Furthermore, when a medal is inserted, the operation instructions are not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the effect switch 67 is operated on the volume setting screen to confirm, the screen returns to the menu screen. In this case, if the volume information has been changed on the volume setting screen, the volume level output from the speaker 64 will be changed to a value corresponding to the volume information. If "Back" is selected by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b on the menu screen and then confirmed by operating the effect switch 67, the screen will transition to the customer waiting screen regardless of the amount of time that has elapsed since the end of the game.

Figure 238 (b) shows the flow of changes in the display screen when not going through the menu screen. When the game ends, the non-customer waiting screen appears. If 90 seconds have passed since the non-customer waiting screen was displayed, the screen transitions to the customer waiting screen. If the selection switches 68a and 68b are operated on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen, volume information remains displayed on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen, and a preview sound is output. At this time, operation instructions are not displayed. If the selection switches 68a and 68b are operated on the non-customer waiting screen to display volume information, and 90 seconds have passed since the end of the game, the screen transitions from the non-customer waiting screen to the customer waiting screen while the volume information remains displayed. If a coin is inserted while volume information is displayed, the volume information is not displayed and the screen transitions to the non-customer waiting screen, regardless of whether the display screen was the non-customer waiting screen or the customer waiting screen at that time. At this time, even if the volume information has been changed, the volume level output from the speaker 64 does not change. Furthermore, when a coin is inserted, operation instructions are not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the effect switch 67 is operated and confirmed while volume information is displayed, the volume information will be hidden and operation instructions will be displayed, while the current display screen will remain as is. In this case, if the volume information has been changed, the volume level output from the speaker 64 will be changed to a value corresponding to the volume information.

As described above, when changing the volume level in this slot machine 10, there are two methods: changing the volume level via the menu screen, and changing the volume level without going through the menu screen.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When changing the volume level, there are two methods: one that changes the volume level via the menu screen, and one that changes the volume level without going through the menu screen. This configuration makes it possible to improve operability when changing the volume level.

As a result of the above, improved operability when changing the volume level can be achieved, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Whether changing the volume level via the menu screen or without going through the menu screen, the volume level can be changed by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b. In this way, by configuring the volume level to be changed by the same operation of the selection switches 68a and 68b regardless of the operation method, it is possible to improve operability when changing the volume level.

In addition to "Volume Settings," the menu screen also displays "Game History," "Character Selection," and "Back." With this configuration, for example, a player who wants to change the volume level after checking their game history can do so via the menu screen, while a player who only wants to change the volume level can do so without going through the menu screen. This makes it possible to provide an operation method that meets the player's wishes, improving operability.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the volume level can be changed without going through the menu screen, it is possible to remove the "Volume Setting" item from the menu screen. However, in such a configuration, if the user accidentally operates the effect switch 67 when intending to operate the selection switches 68a and 68b, an additional operation to close the menu screen is required to change the volume level. This could lead to an increased complexity of the operation method for changing the volume level, despite the fact that an operation method that allows the volume level to be changed without going through the menu screen has been provided. On the other hand, in a configuration where the "Volume Setting" item remains on the menu screen, if the user accidentally operates the effect switch 67 when intending to operate the selection switches 68a and 68b, the user can simply switch to the volume setting screen. This makes it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

When the effect switch 67 is operated on the volume setting screen, the volume setting screen returns to the menu screen. This configuration improves operability when checking or changing game history, etc., after changing the volume level.

When the effect switch 67 is operated on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen to call up the menu screen, and "Volume Settings" is selected on the menu screen and effect switch 67 is operated, the screen switches to the volume settings screen and the volume level can be changed. With this configuration, for example, a player who has no plans to check their gaming history may be hesitant to change the volume level even though they want to because the above operation is cumbersome. However, a configuration that includes an operation method that allows the volume level to be changed by operating selection switches 68a, 68b on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen can effectively alleviate the above concerns.

When the selection switches 68a, 68b are operated on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen, the volume information is displayed overlapping the non-customer waiting effect or customer waiting effect. This configuration makes it possible to change the volume level while still visually viewing the non-customer waiting effect or customer waiting effect when the selection switches 68a, 68b are operated on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen.

The volume level of the volume information displayed when the selection switches 68a, 68b are operated on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen is smaller than the volume level of the volume information displayed on the volume setting screen. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the visibility of the non-customer waiting effects and customer waiting effects, even when the volume information is displayed so that it overlaps with the non-customer waiting effects or customer waiting effects.

When "Back" is selected on the menu screen and the effect switch 67 is operated, the screen switches to the waiting screen regardless of the amount of time that has elapsed since the end of the game. Players generally play consecutive games. For this reason, a configuration that displays the waiting effect 90 seconds after the end of a game limits the opportunity for the player to view the carefully prepared waiting effect. However, with this slot machine 10, it is possible to allow the player to view the waiting effect after closing the menu screen, preventing the carefully prepared waiting effect from going to waste and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Selection switches 68a and 68b are positioned adjacent to effect switch 67. This configuration improves the operability of effect switch 67 and selection switches 68a and 68b. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that the user may accidentally operate effect switch 67 while intending to operate selection switches 68a and 68b. However, in a configuration where the operation methods for changing the volume level include an operation method via the menu screen and an operation method without using the menu screen, and where a "Volume Settings" item is displayed on the menu screen, even if the effect switch 67 is accidentally operated, the volume level can still be changed, thereby improving operability when changing the volume level.

When not playing, the non-customer waiting screen and customer waiting screen are configured to display information that indicates that the menu screen can be called up by operating the effect switch 67, and that the volume level can be adjusted by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b. This configuration actively notifies users that there are two ways to change the volume level.

(18th embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 when performing continuous effects and when announcing the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win. This configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment, so only the differences will be explained below.

First, let me explain continuous performances.

In the first embodiment described above, if the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is won in the chance mode or if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game transitions to the notification mode from the next game (see Figures 27 and 28). In this embodiment, if the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is won in the chance mode or if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game transitions to the notification mode after a premonition period of three games. During the premonition period, a continuous effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 for three games. In this continuous effect, a showdown effect is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character face off against each other, and the main character wins in the third game, thereby announcing a transition to the notification mode. In this embodiment, even if a rare combination is won in the chance mode but the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is not won, a showdown effect may be displayed for three games from the next game. In this showdown effect, it is announced that the main character will be defeated in the third game and will not transition to the notification mode.

Next, we will explain the navigation effect that notifies the player of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in a bell win. Figure 240 shows an example of the navigation effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In notification mode, the number of games played since switching to notification mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of coins won in notification mode and the number of coins remaining until the end of notification mode are displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. If the push order bell is won, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in the bell winning is displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65.

For example, if the right, middle, or left bell is won in the notification mode, before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, i.e., at the start of the game, the operation sequence "321" is displayed as shown in Figure 240(a). At this time, the "1" displayed corresponding to the right stop switch 44, which should be operated first, is displayed larger than the "2" displayed corresponding to the middle stop switch 43, which should be operated second, and the "3" displayed corresponding to the left stop switch 42, which should be operated third. Also, in Figure 240(a), the upper left of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that this is the 11th game since the transition to notification mode, and the upper right of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that 33 coins have been won in the notification mode and that 97 coins remain to be won until the end of the notification mode.

If the right stop switch 44 is operated first when the auxiliary display unit 65 is in the display status shown in Figure 240(a), the navigation presentation will proceed as shown in Figure 240(b). That is, the "2" display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43, which should be operated second, will be displayed larger than the "1" display corresponding to the right stop switch 44, which has already been operated, and the "3" display corresponding to the left stop switch 42, which should be operated third.

If the middle stop switch 43 is next operated when the auxiliary display unit 65 is in the display status shown in Figure 240(b), the navigation presentation will proceed as shown in Figure 240(c). That is, the "3" display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 that should be operated third will be displayed larger than the "1" display corresponding to the operated right stop switch 44 and the "2" display corresponding to the operated middle stop switch 43.

If the right stop switch 44 is next operated when the auxiliary display unit 65 is displaying the status shown in Figure 240(c), i.e., if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the navigation effect will progress as shown in Figure 240(d). That is, "GET 9 medals" is displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, indicating that a bell has been won and nine medals will be paid out (hereinafter also referred to as the "GET effect"). In addition, as the game ends, the number of medals won in the notification mode and the number of medals remaining to be won until the end of the notification mode are updated. In Figure 240(d), the number of medals won in the notification mode is updated to 42, and the number of medals remaining to be won until the end of the notification mode is updated to 88.

If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, an incorrect answer effect will be displayed. For example, if the left stop switch 42 or the center stop switch 43 is operated first when the display status of the auxiliary display unit 65 is as shown in Figure 240(a), a cross will be displayed in the displayed operation order, as shown in Figure 240(e). Note that the incorrect answer effect may also be configured to have the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 go dark.

The following describes the performance control process performed by the display control device 81 when controlling the display of the auxiliary display unit 65.

The display control device 81 performs processing based on commands indicating various game information transmitted from the main control device 101. In this embodiment, for ease of understanding, the lottery result command (see FIG. 12), spin start command (see FIG. 18), stop enable command (see FIG. 20), etc. transmitted from the time a start command is generated until a stop command can be generated are collectively referred to as start commands. Furthermore, the stop command (see FIG. 22) transmitted when a stop command is generated includes information indicating whether the current stop command is a first stop command, a second stop command, or a third stop command, and which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command. Additionally, the all reels stop completion command (see FIG. 21), interval commands (see FIGS. 26, 28, 36), etc. transmitted after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped are collectively referred to as end commands.

Figure 241 is a flowchart showing the effect control process performed at the start of the game.

In step S180101, it is determined whether all start commands have been received, and if not, this processing ends. If all start commands have been received, the processing proceeds to step S180102, where it is determined whether a continuous performance flag indicating that continuous performance will be executed has been set. If the continuous performance flag has been set, the processing proceeds to step S180103, where continuous performance according to the value of the scenario number counter, described below, begins.

If it is determined in step S180102 that the continuous effect flag is not set, or if a continuous effect corresponding to the value of the scenario number counter has been started in step S180103, the process proceeds to step S180104, where it is determined whether or not to navigate the operation sequence, i.e., whether or not to start the navigation effect. Specifically, if the current game mode is the notification mode and a lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won is received, it is determined that the navigation effect will be started. If it is determined that the navigation effect will be started, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win is displayed in step S180105, and the navigation flag is set in step S180106. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S180104 that the navigation effect will not be started, the number of games played is updated in step S180107, and this process ends. In the number of games played update process, if the current game mode is the notification mode, the number of games played since the transition to the notification mode, displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, is updated. Specifically, the number of games played since transitioning to the notification mode, which is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, is updated based on the information indicated by the interval command received when the previous game ended (more specifically, the value of the interval game number counter). Note that in a configuration in which the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of games played since transitioning to the chance mode in a chance mode, the number of games played update process can be performed to update the number of games played since transitioning to the chance mode, which is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Figure 242 is a flowchart showing the performance control process that is performed when a stop command is issued.

In step S180201, it is determined whether a stop command has been received, and if not, this processing is terminated. If a stop command has been received, proceed to step S180202 to determine whether it was received correctly. Specifically, if a stop command indicating that a first stop command has been issued (hereinafter also referred to as the "first stop command") is received, it is determined whether all start commands have been received, and if all start commands have been received, it is determined that it was received correctly. If a stop command indicating that a second stop command has been issued (hereinafter also referred to as the "second stop command") is received, it is determined whether all start commands have been received and whether the first stop command has been received, and if all start commands and the first stop command have been received, it is determined that it was received correctly. When a stop command indicating that a third stop command has been issued (hereinafter also referred to as the "third stop command") is received, it is determined whether all start commands have been received, whether the first stop command has been received, and whether the second stop command has been received, and if all start commands, the first stop command, and the second stop command have been received, it is determined that the commands have been received successfully.

If it is determined that the signal was received successfully, the process proceeds to step S180203, where it is determined whether a continuous performance is being executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If a continuous performance is being executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the process proceeds to step S180204, where the continuous performance is continued in accordance with the generated stop command. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S180203 that a continuous performance is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S180205, where it is determined whether a navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is not set, the process ends. If the navigation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S180206, where it is determined whether the operation sequence displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 matches the operation sequence of the stop switch that generated the stop command. If the operation sequence matches, the navigation performance is continued in step S180207, and the process ends. If the operation sequence does not match, the incorrect answer performance is started in step S180208, and the process ends.

If step S180202 determines that the commands were not received correctly, this means that the commands were not received in the following order: start command → first stop command → second stop command → third stop command. In such a case, step S180209 determines whether all start commands have been received, and if no start commands have been received, the process terminates. If all start commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S180210, where it determines whether an abnormality flag has been set. If the abnormality flag has been set, the process terminates. If the abnormality flag has not been set, the abnormality flag is set in step S180211, and an abnormality alert sound is output from the speaker 64 in step S180212, and the process terminates. Note that the abnormality flag is cleared and the abnormality alert sound is stopped when the manager of the gaming facility where the slot machine 10 is installed performs the specified abnormality resolution operation.

Figure 243 is a flowchart showing the presentation control process that is performed at the end of the game.

In step S180301, it is determined whether all end commands have been received, and if not, this process ends. If all end commands have been received, proceed to step S180302, where it is determined whether they have been received successfully. Specifically, it is determined whether all start commands, the first stop command, the second stop command, and the third stop command have been received, and if all of these commands have been received, it is determined that they have been received successfully.

If it is determined that the signal was received successfully, the process proceeds to step S180303, where it is determined whether the continuous performance conditions for starting continuous performance from the next game have been met. Specifically, the continuous performance conditions are met if a rare combination is won in the current game, or if the information indicated by the received interval command matches the value of the interval game number counter and the value of the transition game number counter. If the continuous performance conditions are met, the continuous performance flag is set in step S180304, and a performance scenario is set in step S180305. When setting the performance scenario, a predetermined lottery is conducted depending on whether or not the notification mode has been entered to determine the performance content to be executed in the first game of the continuous performance, the performance content to be executed in the second game of the continuous performance, and the performance content to be executed in the third game of the continuous performance, and the results of this determination are stored in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S180306, the scenario number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1. In addition, during the presentation control process performed at the start of the game described above, continuous presentations are started by reading out the presentation scenario corresponding to the value of the scenario number counter from the presentation scenarios set in step S180305 (step S180103, see Figure 241).

If it is determined in step S180303 that the continuous performance conditions are not met, the process proceeds to step S180307, where it is determined whether continuous performance is being performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If continuous performance is being performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the process proceeds to step S180308, where a scenario update process is performed.

In the scenario update process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 244, in step S180401, 1 is added to the value of the scenario number counter. In step S180402, it is determined whether the value of the scenario number counter has reached 4. If the value of the scenario number counter has reached 4, this means that a continuous performance has been performed for the third game, and so in step S180403, the result of the continuous performance is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. That is, if the mode is to be transitioned to the notification mode, "WIN" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and if the mode is not to be transitioned to the notification mode, "LOSE" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Thereafter, in step S180404, the continuous performance flag is cleared, and this process is terminated. If the value of the scenario number counter has not reached 4, the process proceeds to step S180405, where it is determined whether the current game was the final game of the premonition period, i.e., the notification transition game, based on the information on the interval game number counter indicated by the received interval command. If the game is a notification transition game, "WIN" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S180403, and the continuous effect flag is cleared in step S180404, and this processing ends. If the game is not a notification transition game, the processing proceeds to step S180406, and "NEXT" indicating that the continuous effect will continue is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the following step S180407, it is determined whether the game mode of the next game is notification mode based on the game mode information indicated by the received interval command. If the game mode of the next game is not notification mode, this processing ends. If the game mode of the next game is notification mode, the continuous effect flag is cleared in step S180404, and this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the performance control processing, if the scenario number counter is set to 1 in step S180306, if it is determined in step S180307 that a continuous performance is not being executed, or if scenario update processing is performed in step S180308, the process proceeds to step S180309, where it is determined whether or not the navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S180310, where it is determined whether or not the operation sequence displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 matches the operation sequence of the stop switch that generated the stop command. If the operation sequence matches, the process starts a GET performance in step S180311 and then proceeds to step S180312; if the operation sequence does not match, the process proceeds directly to step S180312. In step S180312, the navigation flag is cleared. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S180309 that the navigation flag is not set, the display number update processing is performed in step S180313, and this processing ends. In the display number update process, if the current game mode is notification mode, the number of coins won and the number of coins remaining won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are updated based on the information on the net increase in coins indicated by the received section command.

If step S180302 determines that reception was not normal, this means that the stop command was received when none of the start command, first stop command, second stop command, or third stop command was received. In such a case, abnormal reception processing is performed in step S180314, and the number of displayed images is updated in step S180313, after which processing ends.

In the abnormality reception processing, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 245, step S180501 determines whether a continuous performance is being executed. If a continuous performance is being executed, proceed to step S180502, where a determination is made as to whether the play mode of the next game is notification mode based on the play mode information indicated in the received section command. If the play mode of the next game is notification mode, proceed to step S180503, where the continuous performance flag is cleared. If the play mode of the next game is not notification mode, step S180504 adds 1 to the value of the scenario number counter, and step S180505 determines whether the value of the scenario number counter has reached 4. If the value of the scenario number counter has reached 4, proceed to step S180503, where the continuous performance flag is cleared.

If it is determined in step S180501 that a continuous performance is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S180506, where it is determined whether the navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is not set, this means that a continuous performance or navigation performance is not being executed, and the process terminates. If the navigation flag is set, the navigation flag is cleared in step S180507.

If the continuous performance flag is cleared in step S180503, if it is determined in step S180505 that the value of the scenario number counter is not 4, or if the navigation flag is cleared in step S180507, the process proceeds to step S180508, where it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag is set. If the abnormality flag is set, the process ends. If the abnormality flag is not set, the abnormality flag is set in step S180509, and an abnormality alert sound is output from the speaker 64 in step S180510, and the process ends. Note that the abnormality flag is cleared and the abnormality alert sound is stopped when the manager of the gaming facility where the slot machine 10 is installed performs the specified abnormality resolution operation.

In a configuration that performs the above-described processing when executing continuous or navigational effects, for example, if the connector connecting the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81 experiences poor contact or disconnection, or if noise or other issues occur on the main control unit 101 side, an event may occur in which the display control unit 81 is unable to receive a command even though the main control unit 101 has sent it to the display control unit 81. Furthermore, if the main control unit 101 sends, for example, a first stop command to the display control unit 81 but the display control unit 81 does not receive the first stop command, a discrepancy in recognition will occur between the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81. This is because the main control unit 101 is in a state where it is able to issue a second stop command, while the display control unit 81 recognizes that the first stop command has not been issued and therefore will not proceed with the continuous or navigational effects. Below, we will explain, using a specific example, how continuous or navigational effects proceed when the display control unit 81 is unable to receive commands.

Figure 246 (a) shows the progression of a continuous effect when commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of the continuous effect is received, and then commands can be received again after the end command for the first game.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received while the continuous effect flag is set, the display control device 81 starts continuous effect with scenario number 1 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When an end command is received without receiving the first through third stop commands, the display control device 81 determines that the reception was not normal and performs abnormal reception processing (step S180314, see FIG. 243). In the abnormal reception processing, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 2, an abnormality flag is set, and an abnormality alarm sound is output (step S180504, see FIG. 245). In such a case, the scenario update processing is not performed, and therefore "NEXT," indicating that the continuous effect will continue in the next game, is not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Furthermore, since the first through third stop commands have not been received, the auxiliary display unit 65 does not proceed with the continuous effect with scenario number 1 in response to the issuance of the stop command. In other words, a continuous performance with one scenario will begin when the first game starts, but the performance will not progress even if the game progresses due to a stop command.

When a start command indicating that the second game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of two scenarios (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of two scenarios is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 3, and "NEXT" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (steps S180401, S180406, see FIG. 244).

When a start command indicating that the third game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous performance of scenario 3 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When a first stop command through a third stop command are received, the performance content of scenario 3 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). At this time, if it is a so-called false continuous performance that does not transition to notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the performance content in which the main character is defeated. If it is a so-called real continuous performance that transitions to notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the performance content in which the main character is victorious. When an end command is received, if it is a false continuous performance, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "LOSE" and clears the continuous performance flag, and if it is a real continuous performance, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "WIN" and clears the continuous performance flag (steps S180403, S180404, see FIG. 244).

When the false continuous effect ends, the game mode does not transition to notification mode and remains in chance mode. In this situation, when a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 returns the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 to the normal chance mode screen.

When this continuous effect ends, the game mode transitions from chance mode to notification mode. If a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received under these circumstances, the display control device 81 starts an opening effect indicating that the game has transitioned to notification mode. The display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 then switches to a notification mode screen indicating that this is the first game in notification mode, the number of coins won in notification mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode.

Figure 246 (b) shows the progression of a continuous effect when commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of the continuous effect is received, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command for the second game.

First, let me explain how the fake sequence works.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received while the continuous performance flag is set, the display control device 81 starts continuous performance for scenario 1 (step S180103, see Figure 241). The first through third stop commands and end command for the first game cannot be received. Therefore, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred until the first game has ended, and does not allow the continuous performance for scenario 1 to proceed.

The start command indicating that the second game has begun cannot be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and does not allow the continuous presentation of scenario 1 to proceed.

When the first stop command for the second game is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception was normal because the first stop command was received after the start command, and proceeds with the presentation content for scenario number 1 (step S180204, see FIG. 242). The same applies when the second stop command and third stop command are received. When an end command is received, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 2, and "NEXT" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (steps S180401, S180406, see FIG. 244).

When a start command indicating that the third game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of two scenarios (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of two scenarios is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 3, and "NEXT" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (steps S180401, S180406, see FIG. 244).

When a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of scenario number 3 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of scenario number 3 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a presentation content in which the main character is defeated. When an end command is received, "LOSE" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the continuous presentation flag is cleared (steps S180403, S180404, see FIG. 244).

When the false continuous effect ends, the game mode does not transition to notification mode and remains in chance mode. In this situation, when a start command indicating that the fifth game has started is received, the display control device 81 returns the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 to the normal chance mode screen.

As described above, if a situation arises where commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of a false continuous effect is received, and then a situation where commands can be received returns from the first stop command for the second game, the number of games in which the false continuous effect is executed will increase by one, as a continuous effect with scenario number 1 will be performed over two games.

Next, we will explain how this continuous performance progresses.

The first and second games are the same as in the fake consecutive performance scenario, with consecutive performance scenario number 1 occurring across two games.

When a start command indicating that the third game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of scenario number 2 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of scenario number 2 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, it is determined that the game was a notification transition game based on the information indicated by the end command, and "WIN" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 instead of "NEXT" (steps S180405, S180403, see FIG. 244). The continuous presentation flag is then cleared.

When a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts an opening effect indicating that the game has transitioned to notification mode. The auxiliary display unit 65 then switches its display screen to a notification mode screen indicating that the game is the first game in notification mode, the number of coins won in notification mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode.

As described above, if commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of this continuous performance is received, and then the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command for the second game, the continuous performance of scenario number 1 will be played for two games, but this continuous performance will end after three games. In this case, the continuous performance of scenario number 3 will be omitted, and the transition to notification mode will be notified through the content of the performance in which the main character wins, but through the WIN display.

Figure 246 (c) shows the progression of a continuous effect when commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of the continuous effect is received, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the second stop command for the second game.

First, let me explain how the fake sequence works.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received while the continuous performance flag is set, the display control device 81 starts continuous performance for scenario 1 (step S180103, see Figure 241). The first through third stop commands and end command for the first game cannot be received. Therefore, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred until the first game has ended, and does not allow the continuous performance for scenario 1 to proceed.

The start command and first stop command indicating that the second game has started cannot be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and does not allow the continuous presentation of scenario number 1 to proceed.

When the second stop command for the second game is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception is not normal because the first stop command has not been received, and sets an abnormality flag and outputs an abnormality alert sound (steps S180211, S180212, see FIG. 242). At this time, the continuous performance with one scenario does not proceed. The same applies when a third stop command is received. When an end command is received, the display control device 81 also determines that the reception is not normal and performs abnormal reception processing (step S180314, see FIG. 243). In the abnormal reception processing, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 2, and an abnormality flag is set and an abnormality alert sound is output (step S180504, see FIG. 245). In such a case, the scenario update processing is not performed, and therefore "NEXT," which indicates that the continuous performance will continue in the next game, is not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

When a start command indicating that the third game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of two scenarios (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of two scenarios is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 3, and "NEXT" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (steps S180401, S180406, see FIG. 244).

When a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of scenario number 3 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of scenario number 3 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a presentation content in which the main character is defeated. When an end command is received, "LOSE" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the continuous presentation flag is cleared (steps S180403, S180404, see FIG. 244).

When the false continuous effect ends, the game mode does not transition to notification mode and remains in chance mode. In this situation, when a start command indicating that the fifth game has started is received, the display control device 81 returns the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 to the normal chance mode screen.

As described above, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of a false continuous performance is received, and the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the second stop command for the second game, the number of games in which false continuous performances are executed will increase by one as the continuous performance of scenario number 1 will be carried out over two games. Note that, compared to the situation in which commands can be received from the first stop command for the second game as shown in Figure 246 (b), the difference is that the continuous performance of scenario number 1 does not progress, and an abnormality flag is set and an abnormality alert sound is output when the second stop command is received.

Next, we will explain how this continuous performance progresses.

The first and second games are the same as in the fake continuous performance scenario, and although the performance content does not progress, a continuous performance with scenario number 1 will be performed over two games.

When a start command indicating that the third game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of scenario number 2 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of scenario number 2 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, it is determined that the game was a notification transition game based on the information indicated by the end command, and "WIN" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 instead of "NEXT" (steps S180405, S180403, see FIG. 244). The continuous presentation flag is then cleared.

When a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts an opening effect indicating that the game has transitioned to notification mode. The auxiliary display unit 65 then switches its display screen to a notification mode screen indicating that the game is the first game in notification mode, the number of coins won in notification mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode.

As described above, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of this continuous performance is received, and the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the second stop command for the second game, the continuous performance of scenario 1 will continue for two games, but this continuous performance will end after three games. In this case, the continuous performance of scenario 3 will be omitted, and the transition to notification mode will be notified through the content of the performance in which the main character wins, but through the WIN display. Note that compared to the situation in which commands can be received from the first stop command for the second game as shown in Figure 246 (b), the continuous performance of scenario 1 will not progress, and an abnormality flag will be set and an abnormality notification sound will be output when the second stop command is received.

Figure 246 (d) shows the progression of a continuous effect when commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of the continuous effect is received, and commands can be received again after the end command for the third game.

First, let me explain how the fake sequence works.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received while the continuous performance flag is set, the display control device 81 starts continuous performance for scenario 1 (step S180103, see Figure 241). The first through third stop commands and end command for the first game cannot be received. Therefore, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred until the first game has ended, and does not allow the continuous performance for scenario 1 to proceed.

The start command, first stop command, third stop command, and end command for the second game are all unable to be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and does not allow the continuous presentation of scenario 1 to proceed.

The start command and the first to third stop commands for the third game cannot be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and does not allow the continuous presentation of scenario 1 to proceed. If an end command is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception was not normal because the first to third stop commands have not been received, and performs abnormal reception processing (step S180314, see Figure 243). In the abnormal reception processing, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 2, an abnormality flag is set, and an abnormality alert sound is output (step S180504, see Figure 245). In this case, the scenario update processing is not performed, and therefore "NEXT," which indicates that the continuous presentation will continue in the next game, is not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

When a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of two scenarios (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of two scenarios is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 3, and "NEXT" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (steps S180401, S180406, see FIG. 244).

When a start command indicating that the fifth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of scenario number 3 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When a first stop command through a third stop command are received, the presentation content of scenario number 3 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a presentation content in which the main character is defeated. When an end command is received, "LOSE" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the continuous presentation flag is cleared (steps S180403, S180404, see FIG. 244).

As described above, if a situation arises where commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of a fake continuous effect is received, and then a situation where commands can be received returns with the end command for the third game, the number of games in which the fake continuous effect is executed will increase by two, as the continuous effect with scenario number 1 will be performed over three games.

Next, we will explain how this continuous performance progresses.

Games 1 through 3 are the same as in the case of the false continuous effect, and although the effect content does not progress, a continuous effect with one scenario is played over three games. However, in the case of this continuous effect, during the abnormal reception processing for game 3, it is determined that the play mode for the next game is notification mode based on the information indicated by the received end command, and the continuous effect flag is cleared (steps S180502, S180503, see Figure 245).

When a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts an opening effect indicating that the game has transitioned to notification mode. The auxiliary display unit 65 then switches its display screen to a notification mode screen indicating that the game is the first game in notification mode, the number of coins won in notification mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode.

As described above, if a situation arises where commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of this continuous performance is received, and then a situation where commands can be received returns from the end command for the third game, the continuous performance of scenario 1 will be performed over three games and then end. In other words, in such a case, the continuous performances of scenarios 2 and 3 will be omitted, and the transition to notification mode will not be notified.

Figure 247 (a) shows the progression of a continuous effect when commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of the continuous effect is received, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command for the fourth game.

First, let me explain how the fake sequence works.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received while the continuous performance flag is set, the display control device 81 starts continuous performance for scenario 1 (step S180103, see Figure 241). The first through third stop commands and end command for the first game cannot be received. Therefore, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred until the first game has ended, and does not allow the continuous performance for scenario 1 to proceed.

The start command, first stop command, third stop command, and end command for the second game are all unable to be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and does not allow the continuous presentation of scenario 1 to proceed.

The start command, first stop command, third stop command, and end command for the third game are all unable to be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and does not allow the continuous presentation of scenario 1 to proceed.

When the first stop command for the fourth game is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception was normal because the first stop command was received after the start command, and proceeds with the presentation content for scenario number 1 (step S180204, see FIG. 242). The same applies when the second stop command and third stop command are received. When an end command is received, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 2, and "NEXT" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (steps S180401, S180406, see FIG. 244).

When a start command indicating that the fifth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of two scenarios (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of two scenarios is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 3, and "NEXT" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (steps S180401, S180406, see FIG. 244).

Although not shown in the figure, when a start command indicating that the sixth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of scenario number 3 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of scenario number 3 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a presentation content in which the main character is defeated. When an end command is received, "LOSE" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the continuous presentation flag is cleared (steps S180403, S180404, see FIG. 244).

As described above, if a situation arises where commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of a false continuous effect is received, and then a situation where commands can be received returns with the first stop command for the fourth game, the number of games in which the false continuous effect is executed will increase by three, as a continuous effect with scenario number 1 will be performed over four games.

Next, we will explain how this continuous performance progresses.

For the first four games, the same as in the case of false continuous effects, continuous effects with one scenario are performed over four games. However, in the case of true continuous effects, in the scenario update process for the fourth game, the game mode for the next game is determined to be notification mode based on the information indicated by the received end command, and the continuous effect flag is cleared (steps S180407, S180404, see Figure 244).

When a start command indicating that the fifth game has started is received, the display control device 81 switches the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 to an announcement mode screen that indicates that this is the second game in announcement mode, the number of coins won in announcement mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of announcement mode. Furthermore, from the information indicated by the end command for the fourth game, the display control device 81 is able to determine that the fifth game is the second game in announcement mode, the number of coins won in announcement mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of announcement mode.

As described above, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of this continuous performance is received, and then a situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the first stop command for the fourth game, the continuous performance of scenario 1 will be performed across four games, including the first game in notification mode, and the continuous performance of scenarios 2 and 3, as well as the WIN display, will be omitted, and this continuous performance will end. Furthermore, in such a case, since the end command (end command for the third game) indicating that this is the notification transition game has not been received, the opening performance indicating the transition to notification mode will also be omitted.

Figure 247 (b) shows the progression of a continuous effect when commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of the continuous effect is received, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the second stop command for the fourth game.

First, let me explain how the fake sequence works.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received while the continuous performance flag is set, the display control device 81 starts continuous performance for scenario 1 (step S180103, see Figure 241). The first through third stop commands and end command for the first game cannot be received. Therefore, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred until the first game has ended, and does not allow the continuous performance for scenario 1 to proceed.

The start command, first stop command, third stop command, and end command for the second game are all unable to be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and does not allow the continuous presentation of scenario 1 to proceed.

The start command, first stop command, third stop command, and end command for the third game are all unable to be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and does not allow the continuous presentation of scenario 1 to proceed.

When the second stop command for the fourth game is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception is not normal because the first stop command has not been received, and sets an abnormality flag and outputs an abnormality alert sound (steps S180211, S180212, see FIG. 242). At this time, the continuous performance with one scenario does not proceed. The same applies when the third stop command is received. When an end command is received, the display control device 81 also determines that the reception is not normal and performs abnormal reception processing (step S180314, see FIG. 243). In the abnormal reception processing, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 2, and an abnormality flag is set and an abnormality alert sound is output (step S180504, see FIG. 245). In such a case, the scenario update processing is not performed, and therefore "NEXT," which indicates that the continuous performance will continue in the next game, is not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

When a start command indicating that the fifth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of two scenarios (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of two scenarios is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, the value of the scenario number counter is updated to 3, and "NEXT" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (steps S180401, S180406, see FIG. 244).

Although not shown in the figure, when a start command indicating that the sixth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of scenario number 3 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of scenario number 3 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a presentation content in which the main character is defeated. When an end command is received, "LOSE" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the continuous presentation flag is cleared (steps S180403, S180404, see FIG. 244).

As described above, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of a false continuous effect is received, and the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the second stop command for the fourth game, the number of games in which false continuous effects are executed will increase by three, as the continuous effect with scenario number 1 will be performed over four games. Note that, compared to the situation in which commands can be received from the first stop command for the fourth game as shown in Figure 247(a), the differences are that the continuous effect with scenario number 1 does not progress, and an abnormality flag is set and an abnormality alert sound is output when the second stop command is received.

Next, we will explain how this continuous performance progresses.

For games 1 through 4, the same as in the case of the false continuous effect, a continuous effect with one scenario is played over four games. However, in the case of this continuous effect, during the abnormal reception processing for game 4, it is determined that the play mode for the next game is notification mode based on the information indicated by the received end command, and the continuous effect flag is cleared (steps S180502, S180503, see Figure 245).

When a start command indicating that the fifth game has started is received, the display control device 81 switches the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 to an announcement mode screen that indicates that this is the second game in announcement mode, the number of coins won in announcement mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of announcement mode. Furthermore, from the information indicated by the end command for the fourth game, the display control device 81 is able to determine that the fifth game is the second game in announcement mode, the number of coins won in announcement mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of announcement mode.

As described above, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received after the start command for the first game of this sequence is received, and the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the second stop command for the fourth game, the sequence of scenario 1 will be performed across four games, including the first game in notification mode, and the sequence of scenarios 2 and 3 and the win display will be omitted, ending this sequence. Furthermore, in this case, because the end command indicating that this is a notification transition game (the end command for the third game) has not been received, the opening effect indicating a transition to notification mode will also be omitted. Compared to the situation in which commands can be received from the first stop command for the second game as shown in Figure 247(a), the sequence of scenario 1 will not proceed, and an abnormality flag will be set and an abnormality notification sound will be output when the second stop command is received.

Figure 248 (a) shows the progression of continuous effects in a situation where commands cannot be received after an end command is received and the continuous effect flag is set, i.e., a situation where commands cannot be received before the game that starts the continuous effect, and a situation where commands can be received is restored from the end command of the third game.

First, let me explain how the fake sequence works.

The start command, first stop command through third stop command, and end command for the first and second games cannot be received. Therefore, the display control device 81 will recognize that the first game has not started until the second game ends, and will not start a continuous performance. Furthermore, because commands cannot be received for the first and second games, the abnormality flag will not be set and the abnormality notification sound will not be output until the second game ends.

The start command and the first to third stop commands for the third game cannot be received. Therefore, even at this point, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first game has not yet started and does not start the continuous performance. If an end command is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception was not normal because the start command and the first to third stop commands have not been received, and performs abnormal reception processing (step S180314, see Figure 243). In the abnormal reception processing, it determines in step S180501 that the continuous performance is not being executed, and determines in step S180506 that the navigation flag is not set, and ends this processing without setting the abnormal flag or outputting the abnormality alert sound.

Since the system is able to receive commands from the start command for the fourth game onwards, we will omit a detailed explanation, but in the fourth game, a continuous performance of scenario number 1 begins, in the fifth game, a continuous performance of scenario number 2 begins, and in the sixth game, a continuous performance of scenario number 3 begins, and "LOSE" is displayed.

As described above, if commands cannot be received before the game that starts the fake continuous effects, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received after the end command of the third game, the fake continuous effects will be played over three games, from the fourth to the sixth.

Next, we will explain how this continuous performance progresses.

For games 1 through 3, the same as in the case of a false continuous effect, the continuous effect will not start, the abnormal flag will not be set, and the abnormal alarm sound will not be output.

When a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts an opening effect indicating that the system has transitioned to notification mode. The auxiliary display unit 65 then switches its display screen to a notification mode screen indicating that the game is the first game in notification mode, the number of coins won in notification mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode. When the display control device 81 receives an end command for the third game, it knows that the fourth game is the first game in notification mode based on the information indicated by the end command. Therefore, when a start command for the fourth game is received, the display control device 81 starts the opening effect after clearing the continuous effect flag.

As described above, if a situation arises where commands cannot be received before the game that starts this continuous performance, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received after the end command of the third game, the continuous performance will not occur.

Figure 248 (b) shows the progression of continuous effects in a situation where commands cannot be received after an end command is received and the continuous effects flag is set, i.e., a situation where commands cannot be received before the game that starts the continuous effects, and a situation where commands can be received is restored from the first stop command of the fourth game.

First, let me explain how the fake sequence works.

The start command, first stop command, third stop command, and end command for the first through third games cannot be received. Therefore, the display control device 81 will recognize that the first game has not started until the third game has ended, and will not start a continuous performance. Furthermore, because commands cannot be received for the first through third games, the abnormality flag will not be set and the abnormality notification sound will not be output until the third game has ended.

The display control device 81 is also unable to receive the start command for the fourth game. Therefore, even when the fourth game starts, the display control device 81 does not start the continuous performance. When the first stop command is received, the display control device 81 does not set the abnormality flag or output the abnormality alert sound because it has not received the start command (see steps S180202, S180209, and FIG. 242). The same applies when the second stop command and the third stop command are received. When the end command is received, the display control device 81 determines that the start command has not been received and therefore determines that the reception has not been normal, and performs abnormal reception processing (see step S180314, and FIG. 243). In the abnormal reception processing, it determines in step S180501 that the continuous performance is not being executed, and determines in step S180506 that the navigation flag is not set, and ends this processing without setting the abnormality flag or outputting the abnormality alert sound.

Since the system is able to receive commands from the start command for the fifth game onwards, we will not go into detail here, but in the fifth game, a continuous performance of scenario number 1 begins, in the sixth game, a continuous performance of scenario number 2 begins, and in the seventh game, a continuous performance of scenario number 3 begins, and "LOSE" is displayed.

As described above, if a situation occurs where commands cannot be received before the game that starts the fake continuous effect, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command in the fourth game, the fake continuous effect will be performed over three games, from the fifth game to the seventh game.

Next, we will explain how this continuous performance progresses.

For games 1 through 4, the same as in the case of a false continuous effect, the continuous effect will not start, the abnormal flag will not be set, and the abnormal alarm sound will not be output.

When a start command indicating that the fifth game has started is received, the display control device 81 clears the continuous effect flag and switches the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 to an announcement mode screen that indicates that this is the second game in announcement mode, the number of coins won in announcement mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of announcement mode. Furthermore, from the information indicated by the end command for the fourth game, the display control device 81 is able to determine that the fifth game is the second game in announcement mode, the number of coins won in announcement mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of announcement mode.

As described above, if a situation arises where commands cannot be received before the game that starts this continuous effect, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command of the fourth game, the continuous effect will not occur.

Figure 248 (c) shows the progression of continuous effects in a situation where commands cannot be received after an end command is received and the continuous effects flag is set, i.e., a situation where commands cannot be received before the game that starts the continuous effects, and a situation where commands can be received is restored from the first stop command of the second game.

First, let me explain how the fake sequence works.

The start command, first stop command, third stop command, and end command for the first game cannot be received. Therefore, the display control device 81 will recognize that the first game has not started until the first game ends, and will not start a continuous performance. Furthermore, because commands cannot be received for the first game, the abnormality flag will not be set and the abnormality notification sound will not be output until the first game ends.

The display control device 81 is also unable to receive the start command for the second game. Therefore, even when the second game starts, the display control device 81 does not start a continuous performance. When the first stop command is received, the display control device 81 does not set the abnormality flag or output the abnormality alert sound because it has not received the start command (see steps S180202, S180209, and FIG. 242). The same applies when the second stop command and the third stop command are received. When an end command is received, the display control device 81 determines that the start command has not been received and therefore determines that the reception has not been normal, and performs abnormal reception processing (see step S180314, and FIG. 243). In the abnormal reception processing, it determines in step S180501 that a continuous performance is not being executed, and determines in step S180506 that the navigation flag has not been set, and ends this processing without setting the abnormality flag or outputting the abnormality alert sound.

Since the system is able to receive commands from the start command for the third game onwards, we will not go into detail here, but in the third game, a continuous performance of scenario number 1 begins, in the fourth game, a continuous performance of scenario number 2 begins, and in the fifth game, a continuous performance of scenario number 3 begins, and "LOSE" is displayed.

As described above, if a situation occurs where commands cannot be received before the game that starts the fake continuous effect, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command in the second game, the fake continuous effect will be performed over three games, from the third game to the fifth game.

Next, we will explain how this continuous performance progresses.

For the first and second games, the same as in the case of a false continuous effect, the continuous effect will not start, the abnormal flag will not be set, and the abnormal alarm sound will not be output.

When a start command indicating that the third game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a continuous presentation of scenario 1 (step S180103, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command through the third stop command are received, the presentation content of scenario 1 is progressed (step S180204, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, it is determined that the game was a notification transition game based on the information indicated by the end command, and "WIN" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 instead of "NEXT" (steps S180405, S180403, see FIG. 244). The continuous presentation flag is then cleared.

When a start command indicating that the fourth game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts an opening effect indicating that the game has transitioned to notification mode. The auxiliary display unit 65 then switches its display screen to a notification mode screen indicating that the game is the first game in notification mode, the number of coins won in notification mode, and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode.

As described above, if a situation occurs where commands cannot be received before the game that starts this continuous performance, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command in the second game, this continuous performance will be performed only in one game, the third game. In this case, the continuous performances for scenario number 2 and scenario number 3 are skipped, so the transition to notification mode will be notified through the content of the performance in which the main character wins, but through the WIN display.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received before the game that starts this continuous performance, and a situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the first stop command in the first game, a continuous performance with scenario number 1 will be performed in the second game, and a continuous performance with scenario number 2 will be performed in the third game, and a win will be displayed. In other words, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received before the game that starts this continuous performance, and a situation returns to one in which a start command can be received by the time of the notification transition game (third game), part of this continuous performance will be executed.

Figure 249 (a) shows the progression of the navigation presentation when, in notification mode, a game in which the left, center, or right bell is won (hereinafter, this game will be referred to as the "first game") is followed by a game in which the right, center, or left bell is won, and after receiving the start command for the first game, commands cannot be received, but the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the start command for the second game.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a navigation effect displaying "123" and sets the navigation flag (steps S180105, S180106, see FIG. 241). The display control device 81 also updates the number of games played since the transition to notification mode, which is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180107, see FIG. 241). If the first stop command through the third stop command cannot be received, the navigation effect will not progress even if the stop switches 42 through 44 are operated in the displayed operation order. Furthermore, since an end command cannot be received, the GET effect will not be performed, and the number of coins won in notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, will not be updated.

When a start command indicating that the second game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a navigation effect displaying "321" and sets the navigation flag (steps S180105, S180106, see FIG. 241). The display control device 81 also updates the number of games played since the transition to the notification mode, which is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180107, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command to the third stop command are received, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, the navigation effect is advanced (step S180207, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, the GET effect is started and the navigation flag is cleared (steps S180311, S180312, see FIG. 243). The display control device 81 also updates the number of coins acquired in the notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the end of the notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180313, see FIG. 243). At this time, the number of coins acquired in the notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the end of the notification mode are updated based on the information indicated in the received end command. Therefore, even if the above numbers are not updated when the first game ends, the above numbers can be corrected to the correct values when the second game ends.

Figure 249 (b) shows the progression of the navigation presentation when, in notification mode, a game in which the left, center, or right bell was won (hereinafter, this game will be referred to as the "first game") is followed by a game in which the right, center, or left bell is won, and after receiving the start command for the first game, commands cannot be received, and the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the second stop command for the first game.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a navigation effect displaying "123" and sets the navigation flag (steps S180105, S180106, see FIG. 241). The display control device 81 also updates the number of games played since the transition to notification mode, which is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180107, see FIG. 241). When a second stop command is received without a first stop command, the display control device 81 determines that the reception was not normal, sets an abnormality flag, and outputs an abnormality notification sound (steps S180211, S180212, see FIG. 242). In this case, the navigation effect does not proceed. The same applies when a third stop command is received. Therefore, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation order, the navigation effect does not proceed, and even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different operation order from the displayed operation order, the incorrect answer effect is not executed. If an end command is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception was not normal and clears the navigation flag in the abnormal reception process (step S180507, see FIG. 245). In such a case, the processes of steps S180309 to S180312 related to the navigation effect are not performed, and therefore the GET effect is not performed even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, i.e., even if a bell win is achieved. The display control device 81 performs a display number update process after the abnormal reception process (step S180313, see FIG. 243). Therefore, while the GET effect is not performed, the number of coins won in the notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of the notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, are updated.

When a start command indicating that the second game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a navigation effect displaying "321" and sets the navigation flag (steps S180105, S180106, see FIG. 241). The display control device 81 also updates the number of games played since the transition to the notification mode, which is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180107, see FIG. 241). When the first stop command to the third stop command are received, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, the navigation effect is advanced (step S180207, see FIG. 242). When an end command is received, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, the GET effect is started and the navigation flag is cleared (steps S180311, S180312, see FIG. 243). In addition, the display control device 81 updates the number of coins acquired in the notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the end of the notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180313, see Figure 243).

Figure 250(a) shows the progression of the navigation presentation when, in notification mode, a game in which the left, center, or right bell is won (hereinafter, this game will be referred to as the "first game") is followed by a game in which the right, center, or left bell is won, and after receiving the start command for the first game, no commands can be received, and then the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the first stop command for the second game.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a navigation effect displaying "123" and sets the navigation flag (steps S180105, S180106, see FIG. 241). The display control device 81 also updates the number of games played since the transition to notification mode, which is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180107, see FIG. 241). If the first stop command through the third stop command cannot be received, the navigation effect will not progress even if the stop switches 42 through 44 are operated in the displayed operation order. Furthermore, since an end command cannot be received, the GET effect will not be performed, and the number of coins won in notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, will not be updated.

The start command indicating that the second game has started cannot be received. Therefore, even when the second game has started, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and continues the navigation effect displaying "123." The number of games played since the transition to notification mode, displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, is not updated because the start command has not been received.

When the first stop command for the second game is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception was normal because the first stop command was received after the start command. Here, when the display control device 81 receives the first stop command indicating that the left stop switch 42 has been operated, it causes the navigation effect to proceed (step S180207, see Figure 242). However, the winning combination for the second game is the right-center-left bell. Therefore, although the navigation effect continues to proceed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the bell win is not achieved.

In this slot machine 10, in addition to the auxiliary display unit 65, the payout number display unit 62 (instruction monitor) also notifies the player of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win. Because the payout number display unit 62 is a display unit controlled by the main control unit 101, when the second game begins, a "6" corresponding to the right, center, and left bells is displayed in the payout number display unit 62 (see FIG. 19). If the player sees the "6" in the payout number display unit 62 and first operates the right stop switch 44, the display control unit 81 receives a first stop command indicating that the right stop switch 44 has been operated. In such a case, since the operation sequence does not match the displayed sequence, an incorrect display is initiated, even though the operation sequence is sufficient to result in a bell win (see step S180208, FIG. 242). The same applies when the second and third stop commands are received. If the stop switches are operated in the displayed operation order, the navigation effect will proceed, and if the stop switches are operated in an order different from the displayed operation order, the incorrect answer effect will begin.

When an end command is received, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, the GET effect will be initiated and the navigation flag will be cleared, even if a bell win has not been achieved (steps S180311, S180312, see FIG. 243). If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in an operation sequence that would result in a bell win, rather than the displayed operation sequence, the navigation flag will be cleared without performing the GET effect, even if a bell win has been achieved (step S180312, see FIG. 243). Regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44, the display control device 81 updates the number of coins won in the notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of the notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180313, see FIG. 243).

In this situation, because the start command for the second game has not been received, there will be a discrepancy of one game between the number of games played since transitioning to notification mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the actual number of games played since transitioning to notification mode. This discrepancy will be corrected when the start command for the third game is received, based on the information indicated by the end command for the second game.

Incidentally, if a player wins the right-center-left bell in the game following a game in which they win the left-center-right bell in notification mode (hereinafter, this game will be referred to as "Game 1"), and is unable to receive commands after receiving the first stop command for Game 1, and then regains the ability to receive commands from the second stop command for Game 2, if stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order shown for both Game 1 and Game 2, the game will proceed in the same way as shown in Figure 250(a) above. That is, the navigation effect will proceed based on the reception of the first stop command for Game 1, the second stop command for Game 2, and the third stop command for Game 2, and the GET effect will begin based on the reception of the end command. If stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order shown for Game 1 and in a order that would result in a bell win in Game 2, a discrepancy with the display order will occur when the third stop command is received, and an incorrect answer effect will be displayed at that timing. The GET effect will not be displayed.

Figure 250(b) shows the progression of the navigation presentation when, in notification mode, a game in which the left, center, or right bell is won (hereinafter, this game will be referred to as the "first game") is followed by a game in which the right, center, or left bell is won, and after receiving the start command for the first game, no commands can be received, and then the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the second stop command for the second game.

When a start command indicating that the first game has started is received, the display control device 81 starts a navigation effect displaying "123" and sets the navigation flag (steps S180105, S180106, see FIG. 241). The display control device 81 also updates the number of games played since the transition to notification mode, which is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (step S180107, see FIG. 241). If the first stop command through the third stop command cannot be received, the navigation effect will not progress even if the stop switches 42 through 44 are operated in the displayed operation order. Furthermore, since an end command cannot be received, the GET effect will not be performed, and the number of coins won in notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, will not be updated.

The start command indicating that the second game has started cannot be received. Therefore, even when the second game has started, the display control device 81 recognizes that the first stop command for the first game has not yet occurred, and continues the navigation effect displaying "123." The number of games played since the transition to notification mode, displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, is not updated because the start command has not been received.

If the display control device 81 receives the second stop command without receiving the first stop command for the second game, it determines that the reception is not normal and sets an abnormality flag and outputs an abnormality alarm sound (steps S180211, S180212, see Figure 242). In this case, the navigation effect does not proceed. The same applies when the third stop command is received. Therefore, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, the navigation effect does not proceed, and even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation sequence that results in a bell winning different from the displayed operation sequence, the incorrect answer effect is not executed. If an end command is received, the display control device 81 determines that the reception is not normal and clears the navigation flag in the abnormal reception processing (step S180507, see Figure 245). In such a case, the processing of steps S180309 to S180312 related to the navigation effect is not performed. For this reason, even if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, the GET effect will not be performed, and even if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in an operation sequence that results in a bell win different from the displayed operation sequence, the GET effect will not be performed. After the abnormal reception process, the display control device 81 performs a display coin count update process (step S180313, see FIG. 243). For this reason, while the GET effect will not be performed, the number of coins won in the notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of the notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, are updated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a situation arises in which commands from the main control unit 101 cannot be received during a game in which a continuous performance has started, the system is configured to perform different control after returning to a situation in which commands can be received from the main control unit 101, depending on whether the actual continuous performance has started or a false continuous performance has started. This configuration makes it possible to proceed with the continuous performance in an appropriate manner in cases such as when a discrepancy occurs between the actual number of games played as managed by the main control unit 101 and the number of games played since the start of the continuous performance as managed by the display control unit 81.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

When the warning period for transitioning to the notification mode begins, the actual continuous performance begins. If the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is not won, a false continuous performance begins. This configuration makes it possible to associate the display of victory effects and WIN displays during the continuous performance with the transition of the game mode to the notification mode, allowing players to play while anticipating the display of victory effects, etc. However, with this configuration, if there is a discrepancy between the actual number of games played managed by the main control unit 101 and the number of games played since the start of the continuous performance managed by the display control unit 81, an event such as a victory effect being displayed after transitioning to the notification mode may occur. Therefore, if a situation arises in which commands from the main control unit 101 cannot be received during a game in which a continuous performance has begun, a configuration is adopted in which different control is performed after the situation returns to one in which commands can be received from the main control unit 101, depending on whether the actual continuous performance begins or a false continuous performance begins. This reduces the chances of the above-mentioned event occurring and enables the continuous performance to proceed in an appropriate manner.

If a situation arises in which a command from the main control unit 101 cannot be received in the game in which this continuous performance started, but a situation arises in which a command from the main control unit 101 can be received in a game subsequent to the game in which this continuous performance started, then part of this continuous performance will be omitted, as shown in Figures 246(b)-(d) and 247. In the case of this continuous performance that includes a victory performance, etc., if there is a discrepancy between the actual number of games played as managed by the main control unit 101 and the number of games played since the start of the continuous performance as managed by the display control unit 81, the victory performance, etc. may become meaningless. This is because performing a victory performance, etc. after switching to notification mode would be meaningless. Therefore, by omitting part of this continuous performance in such cases, it is possible to reduce the chances of victory performance, etc. becoming meaningless.

If a command cannot be received from the main control device 101 in the game that initiated this continuous effect, but at least an end command can be received for the second game, the continuous effect with scenario number 3, i.e., the victory effect, is omitted, as shown in Figures 246(b) and 246(c). This configuration prevents the processing configuration related to continuous effects from becoming too complex and also reduces the amount of data required. For example, instead of performing a continuous effect with scenario number 2 in the third game, it is possible to perform a continuous effect with scenario number 3. However, in this configuration, it is necessary to provide a new start game number counter that stores the number of games played when this continuous effect was initiated in addition to the game number counter that stores the value of the mode game number counter indicated by the interval command (i.e., the number of games played in the current game mode), in the RAM of the display control device 81. Furthermore, if an end command (interval command) is received during the execution of this continuous effect and the value of the scenario number counter is updated, it is necessary to obtain the difference between the value of the mode game number counter indicated by the interval command and the value of the game number counter, and add this result to the value of the scenario number counter. Furthermore, although noise or other factors can cause an event where one command cannot be received, it is extremely rare for an event where multiple commands cannot be received across multiple games to occur. Therefore, rather than complicating the processing configuration related to continuous effects to take into account events that occur infrequently, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by storing data that diversifies the content of continuous effects in the excess ROM area created by not complicating the processing configuration related to continuous effects, for example.

If a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 in the game in which this continuous performance has started, and if a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control device 101 after the end command for the third game, this continuous performance will end without displaying a victory performance or win, as shown in Figures 246(d) and 247. This configuration reduces the chances of player confusion. This is because if a victory performance or the like is displayed after switching to notification mode, there is a possibility that the player will have expectations that a bonus other than switching to notification mode will be awarded.

If a situation arises in which a false continuous effect cannot receive commands from the main control unit 101 in the game that started the false continuous effect, and a situation arises in which a command can be received from the main control unit 101 in a game subsequent to the game in which the false continuous effect started, the content of the false continuous effect will be executed to the end unless the premonition period is in effect. Because the false continuous effect is performed in a situation in which the game does not transition to notification mode, there is no problem even if some of the effects are not omitted as in this continuous effect. Therefore, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the continuous effect from becoming too complicated, and it is also possible to prevent an increase in data volume.

If a situation arises in which commands from the main control unit 101 cannot be received in the game in which the false continuous performance started, and a situation arises in which commands from the main control unit 101 can be received in a game subsequent to the game in which the false continuous performance started, the number of games required to end the false continuous performance will increase unless the premonition period is in effect. Because the false continuous performance is performed in a situation in which the game does not transition to notification mode, no problems arise even if there is a discrepancy between the actual number of games played, as managed by the main control unit 101, and the number of games played since the start of the continuous performance, as managed by the display control unit 81. Therefore, this configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the continuous performance from becoming too complex, and to prevent an increase in data volume.

If stop commands are not received in the order of the first stop command, second stop command, and third stop command while a continuous performance is being executed, the continuous performance will not proceed, as shown in Figure 246 (c). This configuration makes it possible to notify users that a command from the main control device 101 could not be received, as the continuous performance will not proceed even if a stop command is issued.

If a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 after a start command has been received and a continuous performance has begun, but a situation arises in which commands can be received from the first stop command of the next game, the content of the continuous performance will progress as shown in Figure 246 (b). This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101, by showing that the continuous performance that began in a specific game has progressed across the specific game and the next game without any change in the content of the performance.

If a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 after a start command has been received and a continuous performance has begun, but a situation arises in which commands can be received from the end command for that game, then the continuous performance with scenario number 2 will begin in the next game, as shown in Figure 246 (a). With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101, by having the continuous performance with scenario number 2 begin as the next game starts, without the content of the continuous performance with scenario number 1 progressing.

If, after receiving a start command and starting this continuous performance, a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 and an end command is received during this continuous performance, indicating that the game has transitioned to notification mode, as shown in Figure 247, this continuous performance will end in the game in which the end command was received. This configuration allows this continuous performance to continue into the game after the transition to notification mode, reducing the chances of a victory performance or the like being performed during this continuous performance.

If stop commands are not received in the following order during the execution of a continuous performance: first stop command → second stop command → third stop command → end command, an abnormality flag is set and an abnormality alert sound is output from the speaker 64. This configuration makes it possible to notify the user that a command from the main control device 101 could not be received by outputting the abnormality alert sound.

If a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 after a start command has been received and a continuous performance has begun, but a situation arises in which commands can be received from the first stop command of the next game, the abnormality flag will not be set and the abnormality alert sound will not be output. This configuration simplifies the command configuration while preventing the processing configuration related to the continuous performance from becoming too complicated. In order to control the output of the abnormality alert sound in the above situation, for example, the stop command must include information such as whether or not the game is the same as the previously sent start command. This is because, when the display control device 81 receives a stop command, it will be necessary to perform processing to confirm whether or not the game is the same as the start command.

If a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 after a start command has been received and a continuous performance has begun, but a situation arises in which commands can be received from the start command of the next game, the abnormality flag will not be set and the abnormality alert sound will not be output. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to continuous performance from becoming too complicated. In order to control the output of the abnormality alert sound in the above situation, when processing the next game, it would be necessary to perform processing to check whether the start command, first stop command through third stop command, and end command were received in the previous game, for example.

If a situation arises in which a command cannot be received from the main control device 101 before the game that starts the continuous performance, as shown in FIG. 248, different control can be performed after the situation returns to one in which a command can be received from the main control device 101 depending on whether the actual continuous performance was scheduled to start or a false continuous performance was scheduled to start. This configuration makes it possible to proceed with the continuous performance in an appropriate manner in cases such as when a discrepancy occurs between the number of games actually played as managed by the main control device 101 and the number of games managed by the display control device 81.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

If a situation arises in which a command cannot be received from the main control device 101 before the game that starts this continuous performance, but a start command can be received by the third game, which is the game that transitions to the notification, then part of this continuous performance will be omitted, as shown in Figure 248 (c). In the case of this continuous performance that includes a victory performance, etc., if there is a discrepancy between the actual number of games played as managed by the main control device 101 and the number of games played since the start of the continuous performance as managed by the display control device 81, the victory performance, etc. may become meaningless. This is because performing a victory performance, etc. after transitioning to notification mode would be meaningless. Therefore, by omitting part of this continuous performance in such cases, it is possible to reduce the chances of victory performance, etc. becoming meaningless.

If a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 before the game in which this continuous performance begins, and if a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control device 101 after the third game has ended, this continuous performance will not be performed, as shown in Figures 248(a) and (b). This configuration reduces the chances of player confusion. This is because if this continuous performance begins after transitioning to notification mode, there is a possibility that the player will have expectations that they will be awarded a bonus other than transitioning to notification mode.

If a situation arises in which a command cannot be received from the main control unit 101 before the game in which the false continuous performance begins, as shown in FIG. 248, and the premonition period has not yet begun, the false continuous performance will begin in the game in which a command can be received from the main control unit 101 or the next game, and the content of the false continuous performance will be executed to the end. Because the false continuous performance is performed in a situation in which the game does not transition to notification mode, there is no problem even if some of the performance is not omitted as in this continuous performance. Therefore, by using this configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the continuous performance from becoming too complicated, and it is also possible to prevent the amount of data from increasing.

When the first through third stop commands for the next game are received while the navigation effect is being executed, and it is determined that the stop switches 42 through 44 have been operated in the displayed operation sequence, the GET effect is executed, even if a bell win has not been achieved, as shown in Figure 250(a). This configuration prevents the processing configuration related to the navigation effect from becoming too complex and reduces the amount of data required. For example, the main control unit 101 could send an end command containing information regarding whether a bell win has been achieved, and if a bell win has been achieved, the GET effect is executed. However, this configuration would require determining whether a bell win has been achieved in addition to determining the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 through 44, which would complicate the processing configuration related to the navigation effect. Furthermore, if the GET effect is not executed even though no incorrect answer was executed in the navigation effect, there is a concern that players may develop a distrust of the navigation effect. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order indicated by the navigation effects, but the bell win is not achieved and the GET effect is not performed, the player may question whether it is appropriate to operate the stop switches 42-44 in the order indicated by the navigation effects from now on. Furthermore, although an event may occur in which one command cannot be received due to noise or the like, it is extremely rare for an event to occur in which multiple commands cannot be received across multiple games. Therefore, rather than complicating the processing configuration related to the navigation effects to account for events that occur infrequently, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game by storing data for other auxiliary effects in the surplus ROM area created by not complicating the processing configuration related to the navigation effects.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

If a situation arises in which a command from the main control device 101 cannot be received in a game in which a navigation effect has been initiated, the navigation effect may be continued across multiple games. In this configuration, for example, if the lottery results differ between the game in which the navigation effect was initiated and the next game, operating the stop switches 42-44 in the displayed operating sequence in the next game will not result in a bell win. It is possible to configure the system not to perform the GET effect based on the lack of a bell win, but such a configuration raises the concern that players may develop distrust for the navigation effect, as described above. On the other hand, if the system is configured so that the GET effect is performed when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the displayed operating sequence even if a bell win has not been initiated, consistency can be maintained in the navigation effect, in that the GET effect is performed if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the displayed operating sequence. This reduces the chances that players will develop distrust for the navigation effect.

If a situation arises in which a game that has started a navigation effect is unable to receive commands from the main control device 101, and the start command for the next game cannot be received, the navigation effect will continue in the next game. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the navigation effect from becoming too complicated, and also to prevent an increase in data volume.

When the first through third stop commands for the next game are received while the navigation effect is being performed, and it is determined that the stop switches 42 through 44 have been operated in the displayed order, the GET effect will be performed, even if a bell win has not been achieved, as shown in Figure 250(a). This configuration maintains consistency in the navigation effect, in that the GET effect will be performed if the stop switches 42 through 44 are operated in the displayed order, reducing the chances that players will become distrustful of the navigation effect.

If commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 after receiving the first stop command for the game that started the navigation effect, but can be received from the second stop command for the next game, and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 indicated by the first stop command for the game that started the navigation effect and the second and third stop commands for the next game matches the displayed operation sequence, the GET effect will be displayed even if a bell win has not been achieved. This configuration maintains consistency in the navigation effect, in that the GET effect will be displayed if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, reducing the chances that players will become distrustful of the navigation effect.

When the main control device 101 wins the push order bell in notification mode, it is configured to display the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that can result in a bell win on the payout number display unit 62 (instruction monitor). In this way, by providing an instruction monitor controlled by the main control device 101 in addition to the auxiliary display unit 65 controlled by the display control device 81 as a means of notifying the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that can result in a bell win, it is possible to notify the player of the operation sequence via the instruction monitor even if the display control device 81 is unable to receive commands sent from the main control device 101. This reduces the chances of a player being unable to understand the operation sequence.

If the second stop command is received without receiving the first stop command while the navigation effect is being executed, the GET effect will not be executed, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence, as shown in Figures 249(b) and 250(b). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the navigation effect from becoming too complex, and also makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume. If the first stop command is not received, it becomes difficult for the display control device 81 to determine whether the received second stop command was sent from the main control device 101 in the game that started the navigation effect, or, for example, whether it was sent from the main control device 101 in the game following the game in which the navigation effect was started. Furthermore, in order for the display control device 81 to make such a determination, it would be necessary to complicate the processing configuration related to the navigation effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

If the second stop command is received without the first stop command when a navigation effect is being executed, the GET effect will not be executed, even if a bell win is achieved, as shown in Figures 249(b) and 250(b). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the navigation effect from becoming too complex, and also reduces the amount of data. If the first stop command is not received, it becomes difficult for the display control device 81 to determine whether the received second stop command was sent from the main control device 101 in the game that started the navigation effect, or, for example, whether it was sent from the main control device 101 in the game following the game that started the navigation effect. Accordingly, if the configuration were to determine whether the bell win was achieved in the game that started the navigation effect or in a game different from the game that started the navigation effect and then control the GET effect, it would be necessary to complicate the processing configuration related to the notification effect.

When any of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the main control unit 101 is configured to transmit a stop command indicating which of the first, second, and third stop commands has been issued and which stop switch was operated. In this configuration, if the display control unit 81 receives the second stop command without receiving the first stop command, it becomes difficult for the display control unit 81 to determine whether the stop switches 42-44 were operated in the order displayed. Therefore, by configuring the system not to perform the GET effect when the above event occurs, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the navigation effect from becoming too complicated and to prevent an increase in data volume.

If a second stop command is received without a first stop command while a navigation effect is being executed, the navigation effect will be stopped as shown in Figures 249(b) and 250(b). This configuration makes it possible to notify users that a command cannot be received from the main control device 101, as the navigation effect will not proceed even if a stop command is issued.

When a navigation effect is being performed and the second stop command is received without receiving the first stop command, as shown in Figures 249(b) and 250(b), the incorrect answer effect will not be displayed, even if the stop switches 42-44 are not operated in the displayed operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to notify the user that a command from the main control device 101 could not be received by not displaying the incorrect answer effect.

If stop commands are not received in the following order while the navigation performance is being executed: first stop command → second stop command → third stop command → end command, an abnormality flag is set and an abnormality alert sound is output from the speaker 64. This configuration makes it possible to notify the user that a command from the main control device 101 could not be received by outputting the abnormality alert sound.

If a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 after a start command has been received and the navigation effect has begun, but a situation arises in which commands can be received from the first stop command of the next game, the abnormality flag will not be set and the abnormality alert sound will not be output. This configuration simplifies the command structure while preventing the processing structure related to the navigation effect from becoming too complicated. In order to control the output of the abnormality alert sound in the above situation, for example, the stop command must include information such as whether or not the game is the same as the previously sent start command. This is because, when the display control device 81 receives a stop command, it will be necessary to perform processing to confirm whether or not the game is the same as the start command.

If commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 after a start command has been received and the navigation effect has begun, but commands can be received from the start command of the next game, the system is configured not to set the abnormality flag or output the abnormality alert sound. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the navigation effect from becoming too complicated. In order to control the output of the abnormality alert sound in the above situation, when processing the next game, it would be necessary to perform processing to check whether the start command, first stop command to third stop command, and end command were received in the previous game, for example.

In notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of games played since switching to notification mode, and this number changes when a start command is received. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of games played in notification mode.

The main control unit 101 is configured to transmit information indicating the value of the interval game number counter included in the interval command each time a game is played. For example, the main control unit 101 transmits a command indicating a transition to notification mode, and the display control unit 81 resets a specified counter to 0 upon receiving the command and increments the value of the specified counter each time an end command is received. Even if this configuration is used, it is still possible to display the number of games played since transitioning to notification mode on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, with this configuration, if a game occurs for which the end command was not received, the discrepancy between the number of games actually played in notification mode and the number of games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 cannot be corrected until the notification mode ends. On the other hand, if the main control unit 101 transmits information indicating the value of the interval game number counter included in the interval command each time a game is played, it is possible to correct the number of games played since transitioning to notification mode, displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, after receiving the interval command, even if the discrepancy occurs.

In notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of coins won in notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode, and these numbers are changed when an end command is received. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of coins won in notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be won until the end of notification mode.

The main control unit 101 is configured to transmit information indicating the value of the net increase in number counter included in an interval command each time a game is played. With this configuration, even if the display control unit 81 is unable to receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 101, resulting in a discrepancy between the information regarding the number of medals acquired displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the actual number of medals increased in notification mode, it is possible to correct the information regarding the number of medals acquired displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 after receiving the interval command.

(19th embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by its processing in favorable zones. Therefore, this configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 251 shows the transition of game zones.

The normal zone is a game zone where a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous zone. In the normal zone, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced. Therefore, in the normal zone, if two coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game, and if three coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.91 medals is expected for each game. If the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is won, the game zone will transition to the advantageous zone.

The advantageous zone is a game zone in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be announced if the player wins the push order bell. In other words, the advantageous zone is a game zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone in that the operation order can be announced. The advantageous zone is made up of three game modes: chance mode, notification mode, and ending mode. If the player wins the lottery to move to the advantageous zone in the normal zone, the player will move to the chance mode of the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone ends when 4,000 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, or when the difference in the number of medals in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, regardless of the game mode at that time. In the first embodiment described above, the point at which the player's owned medals in the advantageous zone were the lowest was used as the base point to calculate the difference in the number of medals from that base point. However, in this embodiment, the point at which the player moved to the advantageous zone is used as the base point to calculate the difference in the number of medals from that base point. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the lowest number of medals a player owns during the advantageous period is, for example, -500, the advantageous period will end when the player's medals reach 2,900.

Chance mode is a game mode in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode. Chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won, or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in chance mode. When chance mode ends, the game transitions to notification mode. In chance mode, as in the normal section, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced if the push order bell is won. Therefore, in chance mode, if two coins are played, approximately 0.95 medals can be expected to be lost per game, and if three coins are played, approximately 0.91 medals can be expected to be lost per game.

In notification mode, when playing with three coins, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is hit is announced. Therefore, in notification mode, when playing with two coins, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game, while when playing with three coins, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals is expected for each game. Notification mode ends when the number of medals remaining that can be earned in notification mode reaches 0, or when the difference in number of medals after entering the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number. When the number of medals remaining that can be earned in notification mode reaches 0, the notification mode ends, the advantageous zone also ends, and the player transitions to the normal zone. When the difference in number of medals after entering the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number, the player transitions from notification mode to ending mode.

Ending mode is a game mode in which a specified ending movie is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the end of the advantageous zone. In ending mode, similar to notification mode, when playing with three coins, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is hit is announced. Therefore, in ending mode, when playing with two coins, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals can be expected for each game, while when playing with three coins, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals can be expected for each game. Ending mode ends when the difference in the number of medals in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400. When ending mode ends, the advantageous zone also ends and the zone transitions to the normal zone.

As described above, this slot machine 10 allows players to increase their owned medals by playing with three medals in the notification mode and ending mode.

The following explains the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing game zones, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 252 and onwards. To facilitate understanding, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained separately.

First, we will explain the processing during normal intervals.

Figure 252 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process for the normal section. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S190101, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S190102, where it is determined whether a win flag is set in the win flag storage area 106a, i.e., whether any winning combination has been achieved. If a win flag is set, the process proceeds to step S190103, where it is determined whether the win flag was set in the current game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a win on BB2 does not occur in a three-coin game. Therefore, if the only win flag that is set is the BB2 win flag, it is determined that the win flag was not set in the current game. If a win flag other than the BB2 win flag is set, it is determined that the win flag was set in the current game. If the win flag was set in the current game, the transition flag is set in step S190104, and the interval indicator 66 is turned ON in step S190105, and this process ends. If the current game involves two coins, if the win flag is not set, or if the win flag is set but not for the current game, the process will end.

Figure 253 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in the normal interval. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S190201, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery for this game has been won. In this case, the advantageous zone transition process shown in steps S190202 to S190208 is performed.

In the advantageous zone transition process, the transition flag is cleared in step S190202. In step S190203, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag, and in step S190204, the zone game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S190205, the game mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S190206, the transition game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 700. In step S190207, the mode game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S190208, the difference in coins counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 63121. The difference in coins counter is composed of 2 bytes and is configured to be able to store values from 0 to 65535. Details will be provided later, but the value of the difference in number counter, "63121," corresponds to the base value for the difference in number after entering the advantageous zone, i.e., "0."

If it is determined in step S190201 that the transition flag is not set, or if the difference number counter is set to 63121 in step S190208, an interval command is sent in step S190209 and this processing ends. Here, an interval command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp various information related to the play interval at the time the game ends (i.e., the play interval and play mode of the next game, and if it is an advantageous interval, the number of plays played in that advantageous interval and the number of plays played in that play mode, etc.), and in step S190209, an interval command corresponding to the play interval flag, play mode flag, and various counter values set in the interval information storage area 106d is sent.

As described above, if you win any role during three-coin play in the normal zone, you will move to the chance mode in the advantageous zone. As shown in Figure 13, for example, in the case of "Setting 3," if the BB1 win flag and the BB2 win flag are not carried over, there is only a 1 in 13 chance of a miss, and if the BB1 win flag or the BB2 win flag is carried over, there is only a 1 in 6.4 chance of a miss. Therefore, if you play three coins in the normal zone, the game will end in a few games. Note that if you play two coins, you will not move to the advantageous zone, regardless of the result of the role.

Next, we will explain the processing in chance mode during advantageous zones.

Figure 254 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S190301, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S190302, where it is determined whether a rare role has been won. In this slot machine 10, watermelon and cherry are set as rare roles, so in step S190302, it is determined whether the watermelon win flag or the cherry win flag is set. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S190303, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the notification mode. In the transition lottery for chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. In step S190304, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the transition flag is set in step S190305, and the process is terminated. If the transition lottery has not been won, the process is terminated without setting the transition flag. If the current game involves two coins instead of three, or if a rare combination is not won, the process will end without conducting the transition lottery.

Figure 255 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in chance mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S190401, termination determination processing is performed.

In the termination determination process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 256, in step S190501, 1 is added to the value of the interval game number counter, and in step S190502, it is determined whether the value of the interval game number counter has reached 4000. If the value of the interval game number counter has not reached 4000, the process proceeds to step S190506, where it is determined whether a replay win has been achieved. If a replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S190507, where a difference in number of coins adjustment process is performed to change the value of the difference in number of coins counter.

In the difference coin adjustment process, the number of medals bet (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out in the current game, and the result of this subtraction is added to the difference coin counter. It is then determined whether the value of the difference coin counter is 0 or greater. If the value of the difference coin counter is less than 0, the value of the difference coin counter is changed to 0 and the difference coin adjustment process is terminated; if the value of the difference coin counter is 0 or greater, the difference coin adjustment process is terminated as is. The reason the difference coin adjustment process is not performed when a replay win is achieved is that the result of subtracting the number of medals bet from the number of medals paid out in the current game is 0, so there is no need to perform the difference coin adjustment process.

If it is determined in step S190506 that a replay win has been achieved, or if the difference in number of coins adjustment process has been performed in step S190507, step S190508 determines whether the value of the difference in number of coins counter is greater than 65,521. If the value of the difference in number of coins counter is 65,521 or less, this means that the difference in number of coins since entering the advantageous zone is 2,400 (= 65,521 - 63,121) or less, and this process is then terminated.

If step S190502 determines that the value of the interval game number counter is 4000, or if step S190508 determines that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 65521, the advantageous interval end process shown in steps S190503 to S190505 is performed, and this process ends. In the advantageous interval end process, step S190503 changes the play interval flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S190504 turns off the interval indicator 66. In step S190505, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous interval. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the interval game number counter value, etc.).

Returning to the explanation of the game zone processing, in step S190402, it is determined whether the current game zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current game zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S190401, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S190411.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S190403 to determine whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, add 1 to the value of the mode game number counter in step S190404, and determine whether the transition flag is set in step S190405. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery to transition to the notification mode has been won, so the transition flag is cleared in step S190406, and the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag in step S190408. In step S190409, the notification difference number that can be obtained in the notification mode is determined. Specifically, a notification difference number of 100 or 300 is obtained based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the role is a hit or miss. In step S190410, the value obtained in step S190409 is set in the notification difference number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. Then, in step S190411, a section command is sent, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S190405 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, proceed to step S190407, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S190411, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, proceed to step S190408, and the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag. In step S190409, the notification difference number that can be obtained in the notification mode is determined, and in step S190410, the result of this determination is set in the notification difference number counter. Thereafter, in step S190411, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If step S190403 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S190411 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, even if the transition lottery is not won, chance mode transitions to notification mode if three coins are played corresponding to the value of the transition game counter. The value set in the transition game counter when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone is 700. Therefore, the event in which the value of the interval game counter reaches 4000 during the game zone end determination process (step S190502, see FIG. 256) does not occur if three coins are played. Furthermore, because the expected medal gain or loss in chance mode is -0.91 coins (playing three coins) or -0.95 coins (playing two coins), the event in which the value of the difference medal counter exceeds 65521 during the game zone end determination process (step S190508, see FIG. 256) does not occur. In other words, with this slot machine 10, when three coins are played, the advantageous zone ends in chance mode and the game transitions to the normal zone does not occur.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 257 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S190601, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, proceed to step S190602 to determine whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has been won, proceed to step S190603 to conduct an additional lottery to determine whether to increase the value of the notification difference number counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. Incidentally, in the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a one-in-five probability of winning one of the additional numbers of 30, 50, 100, or 300, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a one-in-three probability of winning one of the additional numbers of 10, 20, 30, or 50. In step S190604, it is determined whether the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is won, an additional flag is set in step S190605, and an additional command is sent in step S190606. Here, the additional command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the user that the additional lottery has been won and the additional number of coins to be added to the value of the notification difference number counter. In step S190607, a value corresponding to the result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the notification difference number counter. This processing then ends. If the additional lottery is not won, this processing ends without setting the additional flag. If the current game is a two-coin game instead of a three-coin game, or if a rare combination is not won, this processing ends without conducting the additional lottery.

Figure 258 is a flowchart showing the instruction monitor display process. The instruction monitor display process is performed when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a predetermined constant speed (step S408, see Figure 15), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S190701, it is determined whether three coins are being played, and if so, in step S190702 it is determined whether the current play mode is the notification mode. If the current play mode is the notification mode, proceed to step S190703 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, it is further determined in step S190704 whether the pseudo play flag has been set. If the pseudo play flag has not been set, in step S190705 the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win is displayed on the instruction monitor, and this processing ends. If the current game is a two coin game, if the push order bell has not been won, or if the pseudo play flag is set, this processing ends as is. Furthermore, if the pseudo game flag is set, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that can result in a bell win is displayed on the instruction monitor after the pseudo game ends (step S604, step S1005, see Figures 17 and 21).

Figure 259 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S190801, the above-mentioned termination determination process is performed, and in step S190802, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process was performed in the termination determination process of step S190801, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S190809.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S190803 determines whether or not three coins are being played. If two coins are being played and not three, step S190809 sends a zone command and then terminates this processing. If three coins are being played, proceed to step S190804 and perform the notified difference number update processing, which updates the value of the notified difference number counter.

In the notification difference number update process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 260, step S190901 determines whether a combination other than BB was won. If a combination other than BB was won, proceed to step S190902 to determine whether a miss occurred. In this slot machine 10, a miss can occur when a watermelon or cherry is won. If a miss did not occur, proceed to step S190903 to determine whether a push-order bell was won. If the push-order bell was not won, this means that a replay, watermelon, or cherry was won (see FIG. 13), and the corresponding win has been achieved. Furthermore, when a watermelon win and a cherry win are achieved, the number of medals paid out is three (see FIG. 8). In other words, if a replay win, watermelon win, or cherry win is achieved during three-coin play, the number of medals won in notification mode will not change. Therefore, in such a case, this process simply ends.

If it is determined in step S190903 that the push order bell has been won, proceed to step S190904, where 6 is subtracted from the value of the notification difference number counter. If the push order bell is won, either a bell win will be achieved, increasing the player's medal count by 6 (= 9 - 3), or a compensation win will be achieved, decreasing the player's medal count by 2 (= 3 - 1). In the notification difference number update process, if the push order bell is won, 6 is subtracted from the value of the notification difference number counter, regardless of whether a bell win has been achieved. In step S190905, it is determined whether the value of the notification difference number counter is less than 0, and if the value of the notification difference number counter is greater than or equal to 0, the process ends. If the value of the notification difference number counter is less than 0, the value of the notification difference number counter is changed to 0 in step S190906, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S190901 that no role other than BB has been won, or if it is determined in step S190902 that a miss has occurred, 3 is added to the value of the notification difference number counter in step S190907, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game zone processing, when the notification difference number update processing has ended, proceed to step S190805, where it is determined whether the value of the notification difference number counter has reached 0. If the value of the notification difference number counter has reached 0, the advantageous zone end processing shown in steps S190806 to S190808 is performed, and an interval command is sent in step S190809, terminating this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, the game zone flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S190806, and the interval display 66 is turned OFF in step S190807. In step S190808, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, a process is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the interval game number counter value, etc.). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S190805 that the value of the notification difference counter is not 0, an ending determination process is performed in step S190810, and an interval command is sent in step S190809, terminating this process.

In the ending determination process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 261, step S191001 determines whether the value of the interval game number counter is 3950 or greater. If the value of the interval game number counter is less than 3950, step S191002 determines whether the value of the difference in coins counter is 65,321 or greater. If the value of the interval game number counter is 3950 or greater, or if the value of the difference in coins counter is 65,321 or greater, step S191003 changes the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to an ending flag, and this process ends. If the value of the interval game number counter is less than 3950 and the value of the difference in coins counter is less than 65,321, this process ends as is.

As explained in the game zone processing in chance mode, if three coins are played, the game mode will transition to notification mode after 700 plays, even if the transition lottery is not won. The expected medal gain or loss per game in notification mode is +3.5 coins when three coins are played. Therefore, ending mode can be said to be the game mode that transitions to when the difference in the number of coins after transitioning to the advantageous zone is 2,200 or more coins.

Next, we will explain the processing in the ending mode of the advantageous zone.

In the section lottery process in ending mode, the process ends without any processing. In other words, when transitioning to ending mode, the additional lottery that was performed in notification mode will no longer be performed.

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 258, step S190701 determines whether three coins are being played. If three coins are being played, step S190702 determines whether the current play mode is notification mode. If the current play mode is not notification mode, proceed to step S190706 to determine whether the current play mode is ending mode. If it is not ending mode, the process ends. If it is ending mode, proceed to step S190703 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, step S190704 further determines whether the pseudo play flag has been set. If the pseudo play flag has not been set, step S190705 displays on the instruction monitor the operation sequence of stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win, and the process ends. If the current game is a two-coin game, if the push order bell has not been won, or if the pseudo play flag is set, the process ends. Note that, since no additional lottery is performed in ending mode, an event that determines that the pseudo-game flag is set does not occur in step S190704 (see Figure 16).

Figure 262 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in ending mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S191101, the above-mentioned end determination process is performed, and in step S191102, the interval command is sent. This process then ends. In other words, the ending mode ends when the difference in number of coins since moving to the advantageous interval is 2,400 or more.

This slot machine 10 is characterized by the display mode of the auxiliary display unit 65 in the notification mode and ending mode. Figure 263 shows the display mode of the auxiliary display unit 65.

In the notification mode, as shown in Figure 263(a), notification mode effects are performed, such as displaying the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win. The upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the remaining number of coins that can be won in the notification mode, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of coins that have been won since switching to the notification mode. Figure 263(a) displays that 300 coins can be won in the notification mode, and also displays that 2,500 coins have been won since switching to the notification mode.

If the difference in number of coins between the time you entered the notification mode and the time you won 2,500 coins and the time you entered the advantageous zone is 2,200 coins or more, the next game will transition to ending mode.

When the game transitions to ending mode, an ending movie will start, as shown in Figure 263(b). At this time, the number of coins won since the game transitioned to notification mode continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. Figure 263(b) shows that 2,500 coins have been won since the game transitioned to notification mode. Meanwhile, the remaining number of coins that can be won in notification mode, which was displayed in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, is not displayed. Then, if multiple games are played in ending mode, and 2,650 coins have been won since the game transitioned to notification mode, and the difference in the number of coins since the game transitioned to the advantageous zone is 2,350 or more, then, as shown in Figure 263(c), the remaining number of coins that can be won in ending mode will be displayed in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, showing that there are 50 coins.

The following describes the number display process performed by the display control device 81 when controlling the display of the number of sheets in the auxiliary display unit 65.

Figure 264 is a flowchart showing the number of coins display process performed in the notification mode. The number of coins display process is initiated when an interval command sent from the main control unit 101 is received, and is performed at the end of the game. As described above, the interval command transmits information indicating the play interval (the set play interval flag), information indicating the play mode (the set play mode flag), information indicating the number of games played in the advantageous interval (the value of the interval game number counter), and information indicating the difference in the number of coins since entering the advantageous interval (the value of the difference coin counter). Furthermore, when transmitting information indicating the notification mode, in addition to the various information described above, information indicating the remaining number of coins that can be won in the notification mode (the value of the notification difference coin counter) is also transmitted.

In step S191201, the value of the received notification difference counter is set to the remaining number counter stored in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S191202, it is determined whether the current game was a transition game, i.e., a game transitioning from chance mode to notification mode. Specifically, when information indicating notification mode is received, it is determined whether the game mode flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is a chance flag indicating chance mode. If a chance flag is stored, it is determined that the game was a transition game, and if a notification flag indicating notification mode is stored, it is determined that the game was not a transition game. If it is determined that the game was a transition game, proceed to step S191203, where the value of the received difference counter is set to the initial value counter stored in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S191204, the number of winning coins counter stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S191205, the display start flag is set, and this processing ends. When the display start flag is set and the lottery result command is received, i.e., when the first game in the notification mode starts and the display start flag is set, the display control device 81 clears the display start flag and controls the display of the value of the remaining coin counter in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display of the value of the acquired coin counter in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65.

If it is determined in step S191202 that the game is not a transition game, the process proceeds to step S191206, where the remaining number of coins displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (hereinafter referred to as the "displayed remaining number") is updated to the value of the remaining number counter. Then, in step S191207, an acquired number update process is performed to update the acquired number of coins displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (hereinafter referred to as the "displayed acquired number"), and this process ends.

In the acquired coin count update process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 265, a change value is calculated in step S191301. Specifically, the change value is calculated by subtracting the value of the initial value counter from the value of the received difference coin counter. In step S191302, it is determined whether the calculated change value is 0. If the change value is 0, this means that a replay win, cherry win, or watermelon win has been achieved and the number of medals owned by the player has not changed, and this process ends. If the change value is not 0, it proceeds to step S191303, where it is determined whether the change value is less than 0. If the change value is less than 0, this means that the number of medals owned by the player has decreased, so in step S191304 the value of the received difference coin counter is set to the initial value counter, and in step S191305 the acquired coin count counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S191306 the displayed acquired coin count is updated to the value of the acquired coin count counter, and this process ends.

In this slot machine 10, the change value may be less than 0 if no wins are achieved, or if a compensation win is achieved instead of a bell win in the push-order bell win game. In the notification mode, the operation sequence is announced in the push-order bell win game, so if the player operates the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation sequence, a bell win is achieved. Furthermore, if the push-order bell win is achieved in the notification mode, the main control unit 101 subtracts 6, which corresponds to the bell win, from the value of the notification difference number counter, regardless of whether a bell win is achieved (step S190904, see Figure 260). Therefore, if the player does not operate the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation sequence, an event occurs in which the displayed remaining number of coins decreases even though the displayed number of won coins has not increased.

If it is determined in step S191303 that the change value is not less than 0, this means that the player's owned medals have increased, so proceed to step S191307 and set the change value to the value of the acquired medal counter. Then, in step S191306, the displayed acquired medal count is updated to the value of the acquired medal counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the point at which the player's medal holdings have decreased the most in the advantageous zone is used as the base point, and the increase from that base point is displayed as the number of medals won.

Figure 266 is a flowchart showing the number display process performed in ending mode. The number display process is initiated when an interval command sent from the main control unit 101 is received, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S191401, the change value is calculated. Specifically, the change value is calculated by subtracting the value of the difference number counter received from 65521. As explained in the termination determination process performed by the main control unit 101, 65521 is the determination value used when ending the advantageous period based on the difference number of coins after entering the advantageous period (step S190508, see Figure 251). Therefore, the calculated change value corresponds to the number of coins remaining until the advantageous period ends based on the difference number of coins. Therefore, in step S191402, the calculated change value is set in the remaining number counter.

In step S191403, it is determined whether the current game was a transition game, that is, a game that transitions from notification mode to ending mode. Specifically, when information indicating ending mode is received, it is determined whether the game mode flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is a notification flag. If a notification flag is stored, it is determined that the game was a transition game, and if an ending flag indicating ending mode is stored, it is determined that the game was not a transition game. If it is determined that the game was a transition game, proceed to step S191404, and the number of remaining coins displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden. Then, in step S191405, the above-mentioned acquired coin count update process is performed, and this process is terminated. As a result, when transitioning from notification mode to ending mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 continues to display the number of acquired coins, but no longer displays the number of remaining coins.

If it is determined in step S191403 that the game is not a transition game, the process proceeds to step S191406, where it is determined whether the value of the remaining coin counter is 50 or less. If the value of the remaining coin counter is greater than 50, the above-mentioned acquired coin count update process is performed in step S191405, and this process ends. As a result, if the value of the remaining coin counter is greater than 50, the auxiliary display unit 65 will continue to display the number of acquired coins, while the remaining coins will continue to be hidden.

If it is determined in step S191406 that the value of the remaining number counter is 50 or less, the process proceeds to step S191407, where it is determined whether the displayed flag is set. If the displayed flag is not set, the value of the remaining number counter is displayed in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S191408, and the displayed flag is set in step S191409. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S191407 that the displayed flag is set, the process proceeds to step S191410, where the displayed remaining number is updated to the value of the remaining number counter. Note that if step S191410 is performed following step S191409, the displayed remaining number does not change. If the displayed remaining number has been updated, the above-mentioned acquired number update process is performed in step S191405, and this process ends. As a result, from the time the value of the remaining number counter becomes 50 or less, the auxiliary display unit 65 will continue to display the acquired number and the remaining number.

Here, we will explain the effect of the number display process.

In notification mode, the remaining number of coins is displayed as the value of the notification difference number counter, which is used when determining whether to end notification mode. The value of the notification difference number counter is updated when a three-coin game is played, and is not updated when a two-coin game is played (see Figure 259). Therefore, the remaining number of coins displayed in notification mode only reflects the results of a three-coin game, and does not reflect the results of a two-coin game.

On the other hand, in ending mode, the remaining number of coins is displayed as the value obtained by subtracting 65521 from the value of the difference number counter used when determining whether to end the advantageous period, i.e., the number of coins remaining until the advantageous period ends based on the difference number of coins. The value of the difference number counter is updated whether a three-coin game or a two-coin game is played (see Figures 256 and 262). Therefore, the remaining number of coins displayed in ending mode reflects the results of a two-coin game as well as the results of a three-coin game.

As described above, the remaining number displayed in the notification mode and the remaining number displayed in the ending mode reflect different game results. Furthermore, in this slot machine 10, the decision to transition from notification mode to ending mode is made based on the value of the difference number counter, not the value of the notification difference number counter displayed as the remaining number in the notification mode. Therefore, if the remaining number is displayed from the first game in ending mode, there is a high possibility that it will differ from the remaining number displayed in the final game in the notification mode. Therefore, when transitioning from notification mode to ending mode, the remaining number displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden and is displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 when the remaining number falls to 50 or less. Incidentally, the game transitions to ending mode when the difference number after transitioning to the advantageous zone reaches 2,200 or more coins. Therefore, it takes approximately 43 (= (200 - 50) ÷ 3.5) three-coin games for the remaining number to fall to 50 or less in ending mode.

In the notification mode and ending mode, the number of medals won is displayed as the change in the difference medal counter, starting from the point when the player's medal holdings were the lowest since switching to notification mode. As mentioned above, the value of the difference medal counter is updated whether a three-coin game or a two-coin game is played. Therefore, the number of medals won displayed in the notification mode and ending mode reflects the results of a two-coin game as well as the results of a three-coin game.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In the notification mode, a decision is made as to whether to end the notification mode based on the value of the notification difference number counter, which is updated when a three-coin game is played. In the ending mode, a decision is made as to whether to end the ending mode based on the value of the difference number counter, which is updated whether a three-coin game or a two-coin game is played. This configuration makes it possible to make an appropriate end decision depending on the current game mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the value of the notification difference counter reaches 0 in notification mode, the system transitions to the normal zone and the notification mode and advantageous zone end. This configuration makes it possible to transition the play zone to the normal zone and end the notification mode based on the results of a three-coin game played in notification mode.

In notification mode, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win is announced if three coins are played, but the operation sequence is not announced if two coins are played. In such a configuration, if the system were to determine whether to end the notification mode based on the value of the difference in medals counter, there is a concern that the number of medals that can be won in notification mode will differ depending on the number of times two coins are played, which could lead to a sense of unfairness among players. On the other hand, if the system were to determine whether to end the notification mode based on the value of the notification difference in medals counter, which is updated when three coins are played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns and increase interest in the game.

In the notification difference coin update process performed in notification mode, if the push-order bell is won, the value of the notification difference coin counter is subtracted by 6, which corresponds to the bell win, regardless of whether the bell win is achieved. This configuration allows the player to be prompted to operate the stop switches 42-44 in the notified order when the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win is announced in notification mode. For example, in the notification difference coin update process, if the push-order bell is won and a bell win is achieved, 6 can be subtracted from the value of the notification difference coin counter, and if a bell win is not achieved, 2 (= 3 - 1) can be added to the value of the notification difference coin counter. However, with this configuration, it is possible that a player may intentionally not operate the stop switches 42-44 in the notified order, thereby avoiding the bell win. This concern becomes more pronounced in a configuration in which the notification mode ends based on the value of the notification difference number counter and an additional lottery is held to add to the value of the notification difference number counter while in the notification mode. Specifically, when the value of the notification difference number counter approaches 0, it is possible to extend the life of the notification mode while increasing the number of medals that can be won in the notification mode by avoiding the formation of a bell prize until the additional lottery is won. On the other hand, if the notification difference number counter is configured to subtract 6 when the push order bell is won, regardless of whether the bell prize is won, it is possible to make the action of avoiding the formation of a bell prize unnecessary, thereby effectively alleviating the above concern.

If the difference in number of coins after entering the advantageous zone is 2,200 or more, the system will transition from notification mode to ending mode. This configuration makes it possible to transition to ending mode based on the difference in number of coins after entering the advantageous zone, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The ending mode is configured to end when the difference in number of coins after transitioning to the advantageous zone reaches 2,400 or more. This configuration allows players to play in the notification mode while expecting the notification mode to continue until the difference in number of coins after transitioning to the advantageous zone reaches 2,200 or more, thereby preventing monotony in the notification mode. Furthermore, this configuration allows the number of medals increased in the ending mode to be set at approximately 200, and the expected number of games required to end the ending mode can be calculated as approximately 58 games. Therefore, if data for a 58-game run is prepared in advance as an ending movie to be displayed in the ending mode, it is possible to prevent monotony in the ending mode. For example, it is possible to configure the game to transition to the ending mode when it is determined that the difference in number of coins after transitioning to the advantageous zone will reach 2,400 or more if the notification mode is continued, rather than based on the difference in number of coins after transitioning to the advantageous zone. However, if this configuration were to be used, the number of games required to complete the ending mode would be indefinite, which could lead to the ending movie being displayed repeatedly, or conversely, the ending mode being terminated midway through the ending movie, raising concerns that gameplay in the ending mode could become monotonous.

The notification mode and ending mode share the same gameplay rules in that when an operation sequence is notified, operating the stop switches 42-44 in that sequence will increase the number of medals owned. This allows the ending mode to function as a game mode that allows the player to complete the advantageous zone, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

In notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the remaining number of coins that reflects only the results of three-coin play, and in ending mode, it displays the remaining number of coins that reflects both the results of three-coin play and two-coin play. This configuration makes it possible to provide players with an indication of the number of games and play time required until the end of each play mode, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

When transitioning from notification mode to ending mode, the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden. This configuration reduces the chances of the player becoming confused. It is certainly possible to display the remaining number from the first game in ending mode. However, this configuration increases the likelihood of a discrepancy occurring between the remaining number displayed in the final game of notification mode. For example, if the remaining number drops dramatically when switching from the final game of notification mode to the first game of ending mode, there is a concern that the player will not only be confused but may also develop a sense of distrust.

The configuration is such that after approximately 43 three-coin plays in ending mode, the number of remaining coins is expected to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this way, by configuring the number of remaining coins to be displayed after multiple plays have been played, even if the same unit of information, the number of remaining coins, is displayed in both the notification mode and the ending mode, it is possible to make the player's memory of the last displayed number of remaining coins in the notification mode fade. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player becoming confused.

The system is configured to transition from notification mode to ending mode when the remaining number of coins displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, i.e., the value of the notification difference number counter, is not zero. In this configuration, if the remaining number of coins is displayed from the first game in ending mode, there is a high possibility that there will be a discrepancy between the remaining number displayed in the final game of notification mode and the remaining number displayed in the first game in ending mode, which could confuse the player. However, if the system is configured so that the remaining number of coins is not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 at least in the first game in ending mode, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

The auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display the number of remaining coins in the upper right corner in both the announcement mode and the ending mode. This configuration makes it possible to check the number of remaining coins by directing one's gaze toward the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 in each of the above game modes, improving visibility when checking the number of remaining coins. However, if the number of remaining coins is displayed from the first game in ending mode, there is a high possibility that a discrepancy will occur between the number of remaining coins displayed in the final game in announcement mode and the number of remaining coins displayed in the first game in ending mode, which could confuse the player. However, if the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured so that the number of remaining coins is not displayed in at least the first game in ending mode, this concern can be resolved effectively.

The auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display the number of medals won when switching to notification mode, and to continue displaying the number of medals won when switching from notification mode to ending mode. This configuration allows the player to know the number of medals they have won since switching from notification mode to ending mode, thereby increasing the player's sense of satisfaction in ending mode.

When in notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display the remaining number of medals, which reflects only the results of the three-coin game, and the number of medals won, which reflects both the results of the three-coin game and the two-coin game. This configuration allows the player to understand the change in the number of medals won, even if the player plays two medals instead of three medals in notification mode.

(20th embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing related to game mode transitions and notification thereof. Therefore, this configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 267 shows the transition of game zones.

The normal zone is a game zone where a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous zone. In the normal zone, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced. Therefore, in the normal zone, if two coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game, and if three coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.91 medals is expected for each game. If the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is won, the game zone will transition to the advantageous zone.

The advantageous zone is a game zone in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be announced if the push order bell is won. In other words, the advantageous zone is a game zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone in that the operation order can be announced. The advantageous zone is made up of three game modes: chance mode, announcement mode A, and announcement mode B. If the player wins the lottery to move to the advantageous zone in the normal zone, the player will move to the chance mode of the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone ends when 4,000 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, or when the difference in the number of medals in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, regardless of the game mode at that time. In the first embodiment described above, the point at which the player's owned medals in the advantageous zone were the lowest was used as the base point to calculate the difference in the number of medals from that base point. However, in this embodiment, the point at which the player moved to the advantageous zone is used as the base point to calculate the difference in the number of medals from that base point. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the lowest number of medals a player owns during the advantageous period is, for example, -500, the advantageous period will end when the player's medals reach 2,900.

Chance mode is a game mode in which a transition lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode A. Chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won, or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in chance mode. When chance mode ends, the game transitions to notification mode A. In chance mode, as in the normal section, the operation order of stop switches 42-44 is not announced when the push order bell is won. Therefore, in chance mode, if two coins are played, approximately 0.95 medals can be expected to be lost per game, and if three coins are played, approximately 0.91 medals can be expected to be lost per game.

Announcement Mode A is a game mode in which, in three-coin play, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is selected is announced. Therefore, in announcement mode, when two coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game, while when three coins are played, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals is expected for each game. Furthermore, in announcement Mode A, a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to announcement Mode B. If the transition lottery is won, an additional lottery is held to determine whether to increase the number of games playable under announcement Mode B in subsequent games. Announcement Mode A ends when 50 games have been played under announcement Mode A. If the transition lottery is not won, announcement Mode A ends, the advantageous zone also ends, and the player transitions to the normal zone. If the transition lottery is won, the player transitions from announcement Mode A to announcement Mode B.

Notification Mode B, like Notification Mode A, is a game mode in which, when playing with three coins, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is selected is announced. Therefore, in Notification Mode B, when playing with two coins, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game, while when playing with three coins, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals is expected for each game. Notification Mode B differs from Notification Mode A in that, while Notification Mode A always ends after 50 games, the number of games available for play in Notification Mode B varies depending on the number of games added by winning the bonus lottery under Notification Mode A and the number of games added by winning the bonus lottery under Notification Mode B. The initial number of games in Notification Mode B is 100 if the bonus lottery is not won under Notification Mode A. Notification mode B ends when the maximum number of plays possible under notification mode B has been played. When notification mode B ends, the advantageous period also ends and the game transitions to the normal period.

As described above, this slot machine 10 allows players to increase their owned medals by playing with three medals in notification mode A and notification mode B.

The following explains the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing game zones, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 268 and onwards. To facilitate understanding, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained separately.

The processing performed by the main control unit 101 in the normal zone is the same as in the first embodiment, except that in step S1408 of the game zone processing, the difference number counter is set to 63121 instead of 0. Therefore, in the normal zone, if you win any role when playing three coins, you will have won the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone. For example, in the case of "Setting 3," there is approximately a 1 in 1.2 chance of winning any role, and an approximately 1 in 6.4 chance of losing. Therefore, playing three coins in the normal zone will end in approximately one game. When transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the game starts in chance mode, and the number of transition games is set to 700 (see Figure 26).

In chance mode, the processing performed by the main control unit 101 differs from that of the first embodiment in terms of game section processing.

Figure 268 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in chance mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S200101, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29). However, in step S1702, it is determined whether the value of the interval game count counter is 4000 rather than 1500, and in step S1708, it is determined whether the value of the difference number counter is greater than 65521 rather than 2400. As a result, the advantageous interval will end when 4000 plays have been played in the advantageous interval, or when the difference number of coins in the advantageous interval reaches 2400 (= 65521 - 63121), regardless of the play mode at that time.

In step S200102, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S200101, and after sending a zone command in step S200111, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S200103 to determine whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, in step S200104, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S200105, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to notification mode A has been won, so in step S200106, the transition flag is cleared, and in step S200108, the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In the following step S200109, the transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S200110, the mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, in step S200111, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S200105 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to notification mode A was not won. In this case, proceed to step S200107, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S200111, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, then in step S200108, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In the following step S200109, the transition game count counter is set to 50, and in step S200110, the mode game count counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S200111, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If step S200103 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S200111 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, even if the transition lottery is not won, chance mode transitions to notification mode A if three coins are played corresponding to the value of the transition game counter. The value set in the transition game counter when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone is 700. Therefore, the event in which the value of the interval game counter reaches 4000 during the game zone end determination process (step S1702, see FIG. 29) does not occur if three coins are played. Furthermore, because the expected medal gain or loss in chance mode is -0.91 coins (playing three coins) or -0.95 coins (playing two coins), the event in which the value of the difference medal counter exceeds 65521 during the game zone end determination process (step S1708, see FIG. 29) does not occur. In other words, with this slot machine 10, when three coins are played, the advantageous zone ends in chance mode and the game transitions to the normal zone does not occur.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 269 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode A. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S200201, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, the process ends. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S200202, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won.

In the first embodiment above, cherries and watermelons were set as rare roles, but in this embodiment, the cherries in the first embodiment above are subdivided into strong cherries and weak cherries, and the watermelons are subdivided into strong watermelons and weak watermelons, with these four roles being set as rare roles. In the case of a three-coin game in "Setting 3," the point value PV set for a strong cherry is 311, the point value PV set for a weak cherry is 1000, the point value PV set for a strong watermelon is 511, and the point value PV set for a weak watermelon is 800. When a strong cherry win is achieved and when a weak cherry win is achieved, three medals are paid out, but the winning combinations are different. Specifically, when a strong cherry win occurs, operating the stop switches 42-44 to aim for the "cherry" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R causes the "cherry" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the center line L2. On the other hand, when a weak cherry win occurs, even if operating the stop switches 42-44 to aim for the "cherry" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, only the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L will stop on the center line L2. Similarly, when a strong watermelon win occurs and when a weak watermelon win occurs, three medals are paid out, but the "watermelon" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on different combination lines. Specifically, if a strong watermelon is won, the watermelon symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop on the downward-sloping right line L4, and if a weak watermelon is won, the watermelon symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop on the upper line L1.

If a rare combination is not won, this process ends. If a rare combination is won, proceed to step S200203, where it is determined whether or not the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is not set, proceed to step S200204, where it is determined whether or not a strong cherry has been won. If a strong cherry has been won, proceed to step S200205, where the B game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 100. In the following step S200206, the transition flag is set. Then, in step S200207, a notification command is sent to the display control device 81, and this process ends. By receiving the notification command, the display control device 81 determines the results of this section lottery process - specifically, whether or not the transition flag is set, and whether or not the B additional lottery, described below, has been won and the number of additional games - and executes a notification effect to notify the determination results.

If it is determined in step S200204 that a strong cherry has not been won, the process proceeds to step S200208, where it is determined whether a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon has been won. If a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon has been won, the process proceeds to step S200209, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to notification mode B. In the transition lottery in notification mode A, a win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. In step S200210, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, the probability of winning the transition lottery is approximately 50% regardless of whether a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the B game number counter is set to 100 in step S200211, and the transition flag is set in step S200212. Then, in step S200213, an announcement command is sent to the display control device 81, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S200210 that the transition lottery to notification mode B has not been won, the process proceeds to step S200214, where a pseudo-game lottery is held to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game. In the pseudo-game lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the winning combination has been won. In step S200215, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery has not been won, the process ends. If the pseudo-game lottery has been won, the eye-pressing flag is set in step S200216, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S200208 that neither a strong watermelon nor a weak watermelon has been won, this means that a weak cherry has been won. In such a case, the process ends without a lottery to transition to notification mode B.

As described above, if you win a rare role when the transition flag is not set, that is, if you win a rare role without winning the lottery to transition to Notification Mode B, if the winning role is a strong cherry, there is a 100% chance that you will win the lottery to transition to Notification Mode B, and if the winning role is a strong watermelon or weak watermelon, there is an approximately 50% chance that you will win the lottery to transition to Notification Mode B. If the winning role is a weak cherry, the lottery to transition to Notification Mode B will not be held, and you will not win the lottery to transition to Notification Mode B.

If it is determined in step S200203 that the transition flag is set, i.e., if the transition lottery to notification mode B has been won, the B addition lottery process is performed in step S200217, and then this processing is terminated. The B addition lottery process is a process in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of plays that can be played in notification mode B.

In the B bonus lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 270, a B bonus lottery is performed in step S200301. In the B bonus lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is a win or a loss. Specifically, if a strong cherry is won, there is a 100% chance of winning, 30 bonus games are awarded at an approximately 50% rate, 50 bonus games are awarded at an approximately 30% rate, and 100 bonus games are awarded at an approximately 20% rate. If a strong watermelon is won, there is a 100% chance of winning, 10 bonus games are awarded at an approximately 30% rate, 30 bonus games are awarded at an approximately 50% rate, 50 bonus games are awarded at an approximately 10% rate, and 100 bonus games are awarded at an approximately 10% rate. If you win a weak cherry, you have a 30% chance of winning, approximately 50% chance of winning 10 additional games, approximately 30% chance of winning 30 additional games, approximately 10% chance of winning 50 additional games, and approximately 10% chance of winning 100 additional games. If you win a weak watermelon, you have a 10% chance of winning, approximately 50% chance of winning 50 additional games, and approximately 50% chance of winning 100 additional games.

In step S200302, it is determined whether the B additional lottery has been won, and if the B additional lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S200303, where the acquired number of additional games is added to the value of the B game number counter. In step S200304, it is determined whether a strong cherry or strong watermelon has been won, and if a strong cherry or strong watermelon has been won, a notification command is sent to the display control device 81 in step S200305, and the process ends. If a weak cherry or weak watermelon has been won rather than a strong cherry or strong watermelon, the eye-pressing flag is set in step S200306, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S200302 that the B add-on lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S200307, where a pseudo-game lottery is held to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game. In step S200308, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery has not been won, the process ends. If the pseudo-game lottery has been won, the eye-pressing flag is set in step S200309, and the process ends.

Figure 271 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game determination process. The pseudo game determination process is a process performed in the reel control process (step S401, see Figure 15), and is performed before the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins.

In step S200401, it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode A, and if it is not notification mode A, this processing is terminated. If the current game mode is notification mode A, it is determined in step S200402 whether the eye-pressing flag is set, and if the eye-pressing flag is not set, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the eye-pressing flag is set, this means that the player has won either the transition lottery to notification mode B, the B addition lottery, or the pseudo-game lottery. In such a case, the eye-pressing flag is cleared in step S200403, and the pseudo-game flag is set in step S200404. Thereafter, in step S200405, a pseudo-game command is sent to the display control device 81, and this processing is terminated. By receiving the pseudo-game command, the display control device 81 determines the results of the above-mentioned section lottery process, specifically whether the transition flag is set, whether the B additional lottery was won, and the number of additional games, and executes the pseudo-game presentation.

Here, we will explain the simulated game in this embodiment.

Figure 272 shows an example of the rotation pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display pattern of the auxiliary display unit 65 when a pseudo game is being played.

In notification mode A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of a young man character strolling down a road, and the number of games remaining until notification mode A ends is displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. In Figure 272(a), a bell win was achieved in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that 34 games remain until notification mode A ends. In the case of a pseudo game, when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, as shown in Figure 272(b), a notification urging the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 in order to aim for the "white 7" symbol and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the number of games remaining until notification mode A ends is not displayed. When the "white 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R pseudo-stop on the center line L2, as shown in FIG. 272(c), in addition to an indication that the current game is a pseudo game, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a message that a transition to notification mode B has been confirmed. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in FIG. 272(d), spinning begins with the left reel 32L. At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 ends the indication that the pseudo game is in progress, and displays an image of the young man character strolling down the road, a message that there are 34 games left until notification mode A ends, and the words "B-hit confirmed" in the upper left corner, indicating that a transition from pseudo game to notification mode B has been confirmed, thereby announcing that a transition from pseudo game to main game has been made.

In addition, if you win the B addition lottery instead of the lottery to transition to notification mode B, the number of added games will be displayed in Figure 272 (c) instead of the notification that transition to notification mode B has been confirmed.

Figure 273 shows another example of the rotation pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display pattern of the auxiliary display unit 65 when a pseudo game is being played.

In Figure 273(a), a bell win occurred in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 indicates that 34 games remain until the end of notification mode A. When a pseudo game is being played, as shown in Figure 273(b), when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, a notification urging the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 in order to aim for the "white 7" symbol and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the number of games remaining until the end of notification mode A is not displayed. Furthermore, if the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R does not pseudo-stop on the center line L2, as shown in Figure 273(c), in addition to the notification that the current game is a pseudo game, the word "Sorry..." is displayed. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in Figure 273(d), spinning begins with the left reel 32L. At this time, the notification that the pseudo game is in progress ends on the auxiliary display unit 65, and an image of the young man character strolling down the road and an indication that there are 34 games remaining until the end of notification mode A are displayed, indicating that the pseudo game has been switched to the main game.

The stop position determination process (see Figure 22) for when a simulated game is performed will now be described. In the first embodiment described above, if the additional lottery is won, the slide table was set so that the No. 16 "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R would stop pseudo-stop in the middle row, regardless of the timing of operation of each stop switch 42-44 (see Figure 33). On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the transition lottery to notification mode B or the B additional lottery is won, the slide table is set so that the No. 6 "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R would stop pseudo-stop on the middle line L2 only when each stop switch 42-44 is operated at a timing when the No. 6 "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be pseudo-stopped in the middle row, i.e., when the No. 1 to No. 5 symbols have reached the bottom row. In other words, in the pseudo game of this embodiment, just as in the actual game, it is necessary to operate the stop switches 42-44 while aiming for the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated at any time other than the above, even if the transition lottery to notification mode B or the B-addition lottery is won, the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will not stop in the middle row, and the message "Sorry..." will be displayed. Note that if the transition lottery to notification mode B or the B-addition lottery is not won, a slide table is set in which the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will not stop in the middle row, regardless of the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44. Therefore, if the transition lottery to notification mode B or the B-addition lottery is not won, the message "Sorry..." will be displayed regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44.

Figure 274 is a flowchart showing the instruction monitor display process. The instruction monitor display process is performed when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a predetermined constant speed (step S408, see Figure 15), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S200501, it is determined whether three coins are being played, and if so, in step S200502 it is determined whether the current play mode is notification mode A or notification mode B. If the current play mode is notification mode A or notification mode B, the process proceeds to step S200503, where it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, it is further determined in step S200504 whether the pseudo play flag has been set. If the pseudo play flag has not been set, in step S200505 the operation sequence of stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win is displayed on the instruction monitor, and this processing ends. If the current game is a two-coin game, if the current play mode is not notification mode A or notification mode B, if the push order bell has not been won, or if the pseudo play flag is set, this processing ends as is. Furthermore, if the pseudo game flag is set, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that can result in a bell win is displayed on the instruction monitor after the pseudo game ends (step S604, step S1005, see Figures 17 and 21).

Figure 275 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode A. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S200601, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S200602, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S200601, and after sending a zone command in step S200609, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S200603 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S200604 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, step S200609 sends a zone command and then terminates this processing.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, step S200605 determines whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is not set, steps S200606 to S200608 are performed to end the advantageous zone, and an interval command is sent in step S200609, terminating this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, step S200606 changes the play zone flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S200607 turns off the interval indicator 66. In step S200608, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (such as the interval game number counter value).

If it is determined in step S200605 that the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to notification mode B has been won. In such a case, in step S200610, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag B. In the following step S200611, the value stored in the B game number counter is set in the transition game number counter, and in step S200612, the mode game number counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S200609, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

Figure 276 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode B. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S200701, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S200702, where it is determined whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S200703, where an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under notification mode B. In the additional lottery, the result is determined based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won. In this embodiment, the additional lottery is processed in the same way as the B additional lottery held under notification mode A, but the winning probability and the number of additional games obtained may be different from those in the B additional lottery. In step S200704, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S200705, where the number of additional games obtained in the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. Then, in step S200706, a notification command is sent to the display control device 81, and this process ends. If the current game is a two-coin game instead of a three-coin game, if a rare combination is not won, or if the additional lottery is not won, this process ends immediately.

Figure 277 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode B. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S200801, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S200802, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S200801, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S200808.

If the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, step S200803 adds 1 to the value of the mode game count counter, and step S200804 determines whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, step S200808 sends a zone command and then terminates this processing. If the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, the favorable zone termination processing shown in steps S200805 to S200807 is performed, and a zone command is sent in step S200808, and then this processing terminates. In the favorable zone termination processing, step S200805 changes the gaming zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S200806 turns off the zone indicator 66. Step S200807 executes initialization processing in response to the end of the favorable zone.

This slot machine 10 is characterized by the notification mode when a transition lottery or B additional lottery is won in notification mode A. Therefore, the following describes the processing performed by the display control device 81 when notifying a transition win or B additional win.

As explained in the section lottery processing (see Figure 269) performed by the main control unit 101 in notification mode A, if a strong cherry, strong watermelon, weak cherry, or weak watermelon is won, a transition lottery or B add-on lottery will be held. As shown in Figure 278 (a), if a strong cherry is won, there is a 100% chance of winning regardless of whether a transition lottery or B add-on lottery is held. If a strong watermelon is won, there is a 50% chance of winning the transition lottery, and a 100% chance of winning the B add-on lottery. If a weak cherry is won, there is a 0% chance of winning the transition lottery, and a 30% chance of winning the B add-on lottery. If a weak watermelon is won, there is a 50% chance of winning the transition lottery, and a 10% chance of winning the B add-on lottery. Then, if the transition lottery or B additional lottery is won, or if the pseudo game lottery is won, the main control device 101 sends a notification command or a pseudo game command to the display control device 81.

When the display control device 81 receives a notification command, it performs processing to execute a notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65, and when it receives a pseudo-game command, it performs processing to execute a pseudo-game effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 in accordance with the progress of the pseudo-game.

Figure 278 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations and the auxiliary effects that are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. A circle indicates that the corresponding effect will be displayed, a triangle indicates that the corresponding effect may or may not be displayed, and an cross indicates that the corresponding effect will not be displayed.

If a strong cherry is won, it will always be a win regardless of whether a transition lottery or a B-addition lottery is held, and an announcement effect will be displayed. If a strong watermelon is won, a transition lottery is held, and a pseudo-game effect will be displayed if the transition lottery is won, or if the player loses the transition lottery but wins the pseudo-game lottery. If a B-addition lottery is held when a strong watermelon is won, the B-addition lottery is always won, and an announcement effect will be displayed. If a weak cherry is won, the transition lottery will not be won, so neither an announcement effect nor a pseudo-game effect will be displayed. On the other hand, if a B-addition lottery is held when a weak cherry is won, a pseudo-game effect will be displayed if the B-addition lottery is won, or if the B-addition lottery is lost but the pseudo-game lottery is won. If a weak watermelon is won, a transition lottery is held, and if the transition lottery is won, or if the transition lottery is lost but the pseudo game lottery is won, a pseudo game presentation will be held. Also, if a B-addition lottery is held when a weak watermelon is won, a pseudo game presentation will be held if the B-addition lottery is won, or if the B-addition lottery is lost but the pseudo game lottery is won.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, if a weak cherry win occurs during actual play when a pseudo-game presentation is performed, it is confirmed that the transition lottery has already been won.

Figure 279 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game ending process performed by the display control device 81. The pseudo game ending process is performed when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have come to a pseudo stop in a pseudo game.

In step S200901, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have pseudo-stopped. If at least one reel is spinning, the process ends. Note that if the display control device 81 receives an all-reel-stop completion command (step S1012, see FIG. 21), it determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have pseudo-stopped. If the all-reel-stop completion command is not received, it determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not pseudo-stopped. In step S200902, it determines whether the unannounced flag (described below) is set. If the unannounced flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S200903, where it determines whether the "white 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R have pseudo-stopped on the center line L2, forming a line of sevens, based on the stop position information for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R included in the all-reel-stop completion command. If sevens are lined up, this means that the transition lottery or B additional lottery has been won in this game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S200904, where it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won based on the information indicated in the pseudo-game command received when the pseudo-game presentation began.

To briefly explain the structure of a pseudo-game command, a pseudo-game command includes type information indicating that it is a pseudo-game command, transition lottery information indicating whether the transition lottery was won with 0 or 1 (more specifically, information in a specified bit is 0 or 1), and B add-on lottery information indicating whether the B add-on lottery was won and the number of add-on games with 0 to 100 (more specifically, 00H to 64H). If the transition lottery is won, the pseudo-game command will include 1 as the transition lottery information and 0 as the B add-on lottery information, if the B add-on lottery is won, the pseudo-game command will include 0 as the transition lottery information and any of 10, 30, 50, or 100 as the B add-on lottery information, and if the pseudo-game lottery is won, the pseudo-game command will include 0 as the transition lottery information and 0 as the B add-on lottery information.

If the transition lottery is won, proceed to step S200905, where a B transition notification (strong) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, as shown in FIG. 272 (c), the words "Yay!" and "Entering B mode confirmed!" are displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65. In step S200906, the B game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 100. This processing then ends. If the transition lottery is not won, i.e., if the B additional lottery is won, proceed to step S200907, where the number of additional games obtained in this B additional lottery is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, in step S200908, the number of additional games is added to the value of the B game number counter, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S200903 that there are not seven complete sets, processing is performed to resolve the mismatch in step S200909, after which processing ends.

In the mismatch processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 280, a disappointment notification is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S201001. As a result, the words "Sorry..." are displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 273(c). In step S201002, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won based on the information indicated in the pseudo-game command received when the pseudo-game presentation is started. The reason for determining whether or not the transition lottery has been won even if a seven is not lined up is that, as explained in the pseudo-game section, if the player does not operate the stop switches 42-44 while aiming for the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the seven will not be lined up even if the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the B game number counter is set to 100 in step S201003, and the non-notification flag is set in step S201004, and this processing ends. If the transition lottery is not won, proceed to step S201005, where it is determined whether or not the B additional lottery has been won based on the information indicated in the pseudo game command received when the pseudo game presentation is started. If the B additional lottery has been won, the number of additional games is added to the value of the B game number counter in step S201006, and this processing ends. If the B additional lottery has not been won, this processing ends as is.

As described above, if sevens are not lined up in the pseudo-game when the transition lottery is won, a "buy" message is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the fact that the transition lottery has been won is notified. The same applies if sevens are not lined up in the pseudo-game when the B additional lottery is won; a "buy" message is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of additional games is not announced. The "not-announced" flag is set if sevens are not lined up in the pseudo-game when the transition lottery is won.

Returning to the explanation of the pseudo-game ending processing, if it is determined in step S200902 that the unannounced flag is set, the notification content determination process is performed in step S200910, and then this processing is terminated.

In the notification content determination process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 281, step S201101 determines whether or not sevens have been lined up. If sevens have been lined up, step S201102 determines whether or not a weak cherry has been won. If sevens are lined up in the simulated game when a weak cherry is won, it is confirmed that the B bonus lottery has been won. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S201103, where a composite notification is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "Yay!" and "Entering B mode confirmed!", as well as the number of bonus games obtained in this B bonus lottery, such as "+50G," in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65. In step S201104, the un-notified flag is cleared, and in step S201105, the number of bonus games is added to the value of the B game number counter. This process then ends.

If it is determined in step S201102 that a weak cherry has not been won, this means that a weak watermelon has been won. The unannounced flag being set means that the transition lottery has already been won, and pseudo-game play is performed when the B bonus lottery is won if a weak cherry or a weak watermelon has been won (see Figure 278 (b)). In such a case, the process proceeds to step S201106, and a B transition notification (strong) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In other words, if a weak watermelon has been won, the number of bonus games obtained in this B bonus lottery is not announced. In step S201104, the unannounced flag is cleared, and in step S201105, the number of bonus games is added to the value of the B game number counter. This process then ends.

If it is determined in step S201101 that sevens have not been lined up, a disappointment message is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S201107. In step S201108, it is determined whether the B additional lottery has been won, and if the B additional lottery has been won, the number of additional games is added to the value of the B game number counter in step S201109. After that, or if the B additional lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S201110 to determine whether a weak cherry has been won. If a weak cherry has not been won, the process ends as is, and if a weak cherry has been won, a B transition message (weak) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S201111, and the process ends. By issuing the B transition notification (weak) and the failure notification in step S201107, the words "Sorry..." are displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 273(c), and the words "B strike confirmed" are displayed in small letters in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65.

Although not shown in the figures, if a cancel operation is performed to end the pseudo game while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning (see Figure 21), the display control device 81 will not perform the process of notifying the player of the win, even if the transition lottery and the B additional lottery have been won, and will end the pseudo game presentation. At this time, if the transition lottery has been won, the B game number counter is set to 100 and the unannounced flag is set, and if the B additional lottery has been won, the number of additional games is added to the value of the B game number counter.

Figure 282 is a flowchart showing the notification command processing performed by the display control device 81. The notification command processing is initiated when a notification command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S201201, it is determined whether the unannounced flag is set. If the unannounced flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S201202, where it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won based on the information indicated by the notification command.

To briefly explain the structure of the notification command, the notification command is the same as the pseudo-game command, except that the type information indicates that it is a notification command. Therefore, if the transition lottery is won, the notification command will contain 1 as the transition lottery information and 0 as the B-addition lottery information, and if the B-addition lottery is won, the notification command will contain 0 as the transition lottery information and any of 10, 30, 50, or 100 as the B-addition lottery information.

If the transition lottery is won, proceed to step S201203, where a B transition notification (strong) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, as shown in Figure 272 (c), the words "Yay!" and "Entering B mode confirmed!" are displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that because the announcement effect is performed during actual play, the words "In pseudo-play" in Figure 272 (c) are not displayed. In step S201204, the B game number counter is set to 100. Then, this processing ends. If the transition lottery is not won, this means that the B additional lottery has been won. In this case, proceed to step S201205, where the number of additional games obtained in this B additional lottery is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, in step S201206, the number of additional games is added to the value of the B game number counter, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S201201 that the unannounced flag is set, this means that a notification command has been received indicating that the B additional lottery has been won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S201207, where it is determined whether a strong cherry has been won. If a strong cherry has been won, the process proceeds to step S201208, where a B transition notification (strong) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In other words, if a strong cherry has been won, the number of additional games obtained in this B additional lottery is not announced. In step S201209, the number of additional games is added to the value of the B game number counter, and in step S201210, the unannounced flag is cleared. This process then terminates.

If it is determined in step S201207 that a strong cherry has not been won, this means that a strong watermelon has been won. This is because a notification command is sent when the B bonus lottery is won if a strong cherry has been won or if a strong watermelon has been won (see Figure 270). In such a case, the process proceeds to step S201211, and a combined notification is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In other words, if a strong watermelon has been won, both the fact that the transition lottery has been won and the number of bonus games obtained in this B bonus lottery are notified. In step S201209, the number of bonus games is added to the value of the B game number counter, and in step S201210, the unnotified flag is cleared. This process then terminates.

Figure 283 is a flowchart showing the final game processing performed by the display control device 81. The final game processing is initiated when an interval command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S201301, it is determined whether the current game was the final game of notification mode A. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a game section memory area that stores information on the game section indicated by the section command. The game section memory area is composed of a first area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the current game, and a second area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the previous game. In step S201301, if information indicating notification mode A is stored in the second area and information indicating notification mode B or a normal section is stored in the first area, it is determined that the current game was the final game of notification mode A. If it is not the final game of notification mode A, this processing is terminated as is; if it is the final game of notification mode A, it is determined in step S201302 whether the value of the B game number counter is 0. If the value of the B game number counter is 0, this means that the lottery for transitioning to notification mode B was not won, so proceed to step S201303, display an A end notification on the auxiliary display unit 65 indicating that notification mode A is ending, and end this process.

If it is determined in step S201302 that the value of the B game number counter is not 0, this means that the lottery for transitioning to notification mode B has been won. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S201304, where it is determined whether the not-yet-announced flag is set. If the not-yet-announced flag is set, the not-yet-announced flag is cleared in step S201305, and a B transition notification (strong) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S201306. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S201304 that the not-yet-announced flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S201307, where the value of the B game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. This process then terminates.

Here, we will explain the functions and effects of the announcement effects and simulated game effects.

In the notification effect, the fact that the transition lottery has been won (hereinafter also referred to as a "transition win") or the number of additional games will always be announced. On the other hand, in the pseudo-game effect, if sevens are not lined up, the transition win will not be announced even if the transition lottery has been won. As a result, in this slot machine 10, an event will occur in which the B additional lottery is won even if a transition win has not been announced. When such an event occurs, the correspondence between the winning role when the B additional lottery is won and the announcement content is as follows:

If a strong cherry is won, an announcement effect is displayed as shown in Figure 278 (b). In this announcement effect, the transition win is announced, but the number of additional games is not announced (see step S201208, Figure 282). The reason the number of additional games is not announced is as follows: If the transition lottery is won when a strong cherry is won, an announcement effect is always displayed to announce the transition win. In other words, the above event occurs when the transition lottery is won when a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon is won, and after sevens are not lined up in the pseudo-game based on the transition win, a strong cherry is won. Here, if the announcement effect is configured to announce the number of additional games, it is confirmed that the transition lottery was won when a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon was won at the time the number of additional games was announced. This can lead to a weakening of the player's intention to operate the stop switches 42-44 in order to hit the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R during the simulated game. On the other hand, if the player is configured to notify the player of a transition win using a notification effect, this concern can be effectively resolved. Furthermore, if a player does not win the transition lottery when a strong or weak watermelon is won, but then wins the transition lottery when a strong cherry is won, the player will not get a 7-line in the simulated game when the strong or weak watermelon is won, but will be notified of a transition win in the notification effect when a strong cherry is won. In such a case, the player may have a faint hope that the failure to get a 7-line in the simulated game was due to a mistake in the player's timing, and that they actually won the B bonus lottery when the strong cherry was won.

If a strong watermelon is won, an announcement effect will be displayed, as shown in Figure 278 (b). In this announcement effect, both the transition win and the number of added games will be announced (see step S201211, Figure 282). The reason why both the transition win and the number of added games are announced is as follows: If the transition lottery is won when a strong watermelon is won, a pseudo-game effect will be displayed instead of an announcement effect. For this reason, if an announcement effect is displayed when a strong watermelon is won, it will be confirmed that the transition lottery has already been won and that the B add-on lottery has been won at that point.

When a weak cherry is won, a pseudo game effect is performed, as shown in Figure 278 (b). When sevens are lined up in the pseudo game, both the transition win and the number of additional games are announced (see step S201103, Figure 281). When sevens are not lined up in the pseudo game, a transition win is announced, but the number of additional games is not announced (see step S201111, Figure 282). The reason why a transition win is announced regardless of whether sevens are lined up or not is as follows: When a weak cherry is won, the transition lottery is not won and a pseudo game is not performed. Therefore, when a weak cherry is won and a pseudo game effect is performed, it is confirmed that the transition lottery has already been won at that point.

In addition, if a weak cherry is won, a pseudo game effect will be performed if the pseudo game lottery is won, even if the B additional lottery is not won. In this pseudo game, since the B additional lottery is not won, 7s will not be lined up regardless of the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44. In this case, a transition win will be announced, just as in the case of winning the B additional lottery (step S201111, see Figure 282).

When a weak watermelon is won, a pseudo game presentation is performed as shown in Figure 278 (b). When sevens are lined up in the pseudo game, a transition win is announced, but the number of additional games is not announced (step S201106, see Figure 282). When sevens are not lined up in the pseudo game, neither a transition win nor the number of additional games is announced (negative judgment in step S201110, see Figure 282). The reason why a transition win is announced when sevens are lined up and not announced when sevens are not lined up is as follows: When a weak watermelon is won, there is a 50% chance that the transition lottery will be won, and a pseudo game presentation is performed. Furthermore, even if the transition lottery is not won, a pseudo game presentation is performed if the pseudo game lottery is won. For this reason, unlike when a weak cherry is won, even if a pseudo game presentation is performed when a weak watermelon is won, it is not confirmed that the transition lottery has already been won.

In addition, if you win a weak watermelon, even if you do not win the B-addition lottery, a pseudo-game presentation will be played if you win the pseudo-game lottery. In this pseudo-game, because you did not win the B-addition lottery, 7s will not be lined up regardless of the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44. In this case, as in the case where you win the B-addition lottery, no transition win will be announced (negative judgment in step S201110, see Figure 282).

In this slot machine 10, in addition to the event of winning the B bonus lottery without a transition win being notified, an event also occurs in which none of the above roles are won until the final game of announcement mode A without a transition win being notified. If such an event occurs, at the end of the final game, whether or not there will be a transition to announcement mode B will be announced, and if there will be a transition to announcement mode B, the initial number of games for announcement mode B, which is 100 games, will be announced (final game processing, see Figure 283). Also, for example, if sevens are not intentionally achieved in all of the simulated games, at the end of the final game, whether or not there will be a transition to announcement mode B will be announced, and if there will be a transition to announcement mode B, the total initial number of games for announcement mode B, which is 100 plus the number of bonus games, will be announced.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a player wins the B-addition lottery when a transition win has not yet been notified, the transition win can be notified in response to the B-addition lottery win. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of the transition win notification to the timing of the B-addition lottery win.

As a result of the above, it is possible to diversify the timing of announcing transition wins and the number of additional games, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In notification mode A, if the player does not win the transition lottery to notification mode B, the transition lottery is held, and if the transition lottery is won, the B add-on lottery is held until notification mode A ends. In this configuration, the expected value of winning the B add-on lottery changes depending on the timing of the transition lottery win in notification mode A. Therefore, by configuring the system so that a win in the transition lottery can be notified when the B add-on lottery win is triggered, it is possible to appropriately increase interest in the game.

Announcement Mode A is configured not to end if the player wins the transition lottery or the B-addition lottery. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of the transition win notification, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. For example, if Notification Mode A were configured to end upon winning the B-addition lottery, it would be desirable to notify the player of the transition win as soon as possible, which would impose restrictions on the timing of the transition win notification. To give a specific example, if the player wins the transition lottery and is notified of the transition win early in Notification Mode A, such as in the fifth game, the player is likely to want the B-addition lottery to end in the latter part of Notification Mode A, such as in the 45th game or later. For example, if the player wins the B-addition lottery in the sixth game of Notification Mode A, the player would lose the 44 games that could have been played under Notification Mode A and the associated increase in owned medals. Here, if the transition win is not announced when the transition lottery is won, but both the transition win and the number of added games are announced when the B add-on lottery is won, the emotions that arise in the player between winning the transition lottery and winning the B add-on lottery, such as the desire for notification mode A to continue because the B add-on lottery has not yet been won, or the desire for notification mode A to end soon and win the B add-on lottery, would no longer be felt, and there is a concern that play in notification mode A may become monotonous.

When a rare combination is won in notification mode A, the lottery held consists of a transition lottery to determine whether to transition to notification mode B, and an additional B lottery to determine whether to increase the number of plays available in notification mode B. By configuring the lottery for the bonus to be awarded after notification mode A ends in this way, even if a transition win cannot be announced under notification mode A, it can be announced at the end of the game in notification mode A or when transitioning to notification mode B. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of announcements of transition wins, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If a strong cherry is won and the B bonus lottery is also won, a notification effect will be displayed, announcing the transition win but not the number of bonus games. This configuration makes it possible to delay the timing of the notification of the number of bonus games, making it possible to diversify the timing of not only the transition win but also the number of bonus games.

If the transition lottery is won when a strong cherry is won, a notification effect is displayed to notify the player of the transition win. In this way, when a strong cherry is won, the same notification is made whether the transition lottery is won or the B additional lottery is won. This makes it possible to anticipate that there are additional games yet to be announced when a transition win is announced when a strong cherry is won, preventing gameplay in notification mode A from becoming monotonous.

If the transition lottery is won when a strong watermelon is won, or if the transition lottery is won when a weak watermelon is won, a pseudo-game presentation is performed, and if sevens are lined up, a transition win is announced, and if sevens are not lined up, a transition win is not announced. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing of the transition win announcement depending on whether sevens are lined up, making it possible to diversify the timing of the transition win announcement.

In the simulated game, even if a player wins the transition lottery or the B additional lottery, there is a possibility that sevens will not be lined up depending on the timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44. This configuration allows the player to actively participate in the timing of the notification of the transition win or the number of additional games, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, players who want to save the fun of finding out about the transition win or the number of additional games until the end can intentionally not line up sevens, thereby increasing the chances that the transition win or the number of additional games will remain unannounced until the final game of notification mode A. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the transition win or the number of additional games at a timing that suits the player's wishes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Even if the transition lottery or B-addition lottery is not won, if the pseudo game lottery is won, the pseudo game effect will be performed. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a direct correspondence between the start of the pseudo game effect and winning the transition lottery or B-addition lottery, and allows players to actively participate in the pseudo game. If the pseudo game effect were only performed if the transition lottery or B-addition lottery was won, there would be a concern that players would stop operating the stop switches 42-44 in order to aim for the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

If a player wins the B-addition lottery when they win the Strong Watermelon, a notification effect will be displayed, announcing both the transition win and the number of added games. When a notification effect is displayed when a player wins the Strong Watermelon, it is confirmed that the player has already won the transition lottery and the B-addition lottery. By announcing both of these, it is possible to dramatically increase the player's sense of accomplishment and superiority, and to effectively increase their interest in the game.

If a weak watermelon is won and the B additional lottery is won, a pseudo-game presentation is performed. If sevens are lined up, a transition win is announced but the number of additional games is not announced; if sevens are not lined up, neither the transition win nor the number of additional games is announced. This configuration not only makes it possible to delay the timing of the announcement of the number of additional games, but also makes it possible to further delay the timing of the transition win announcement depending on whether sevens are lined up, making it possible to diversify the timing of announcements of transition wins and the number of additional games.

If a weak cherry is won and the B add-on lottery is won, a pseudo-game presentation is performed. If sevens are lined up, both the transition win and the number of added games are announced. If sevens are not lined up, the transition win is announced but the number of added games is not announced. With this configuration, it is possible to announce a transition win in response to a win in the B add-on lottery, and to change the timing of the announcement of the number of added games depending on whether sevens are lined up, making it possible to diversify the timing of the announcement of the number of added games.

When a weak cherry is won, the transition win is not won. By configuring it this way, if a weak cherry win is achieved in a game where a pseudo-game presentation is performed, it is possible to confirm that a transition win had been won previously. Therefore, in such cases, by configuring the system to notify of a transition win regardless of whether a 7 is lined up or not, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The system is designed so that it is possible to determine whether the transition lottery has already been won based on the winning combination and whether the announcement or simulated game presentation has taken place. This configuration can heighten the player's curiosity about the internal specifications of the slot machine 10, making it possible to make the player want to play in the announcement mode again when announcement mode A and announcement mode B have ended.

When the B add-on lottery is won and the number of add-on games is announced, the number of add-on games acquired in this B add-on lottery is announced. With this configuration, if the B add-on lottery is won and the number of add-on games is not announced, the unannounced number of add-on games can be carried over to the final game of announcement mode A. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that there will be an unannounced number of add-on games until the final game of announcement mode A, and it is possible to prevent play in announcement mode A from becoming monotonous.

(21st embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the process of updating the various information displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the notification mode. This configuration will be described in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment, so only the differences will be described below.

This section explains the differences in the processing performed by the main control unit 101.

In the first embodiment, three medals were paid out when a watermelon or cherry win was achieved, and nine medals were paid out when a bell win was achieved. However, in this embodiment, eight medals are paid out regardless of whether a watermelon, cherry, or bell win is achieved.

In this embodiment, a start command indicating the start of a game round is sent when the 4.1 second wait process (step S211, see Figure 11) begins, and an end command indicating the end of a game round is sent when the BB state process (step S215, see Figure 11) ends. The start command and end command have the same configuration except for the header information indicating the command type, such as the start command. The start command and end command contain information indicating the winning probability setting, information indicating the number of medals bet in the current game, information indicating whether the game is in BB, information indicating the winning combination lottery results, information indicating the game status, information indicating the advantageous zone, information indicating the advantageous zone for the next game, information indicating the value of the zone game count counter, information indicating the value of the transition game count counter, information indicating the value of the mode game count counter, information indicating the value of the difference coin counter, information indicating the value of the net increase coin counter, information indicating the number of coins added in the current game, information indicating the game mode, information indicating the game mode for the next game, and, if an operation sequence is to be notified, information indicating the operation sequence. Note that, at the stage of transmitting the start command, the game mode for the next game or the advantageous zone for the next game has not yet been determined. For such undetermined items, information indicating that they are undetermined (00H in this embodiment) is transmitted.

By making the information included in the start command and the end command the same, it is possible to make the processing performed when creating the start command and the processing performed when creating the end command the same, and by simplifying the processing configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in ROM 105. Furthermore, by configuring the start command and the end command to include the above various information, in this embodiment, the lottery result command (see Figure 12), add-on command (see Figure 30), and interval command (see Figures 26, 28, and 36) that were sent in the first embodiment above are not sent. From this perspective, too, by simplifying the processing configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in ROM 105.

In the first embodiment described above, if the player wins the bonus lottery in the notification mode, the number of bonus coins is notified through a pseudo game and an effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 during the pseudo game. However, in this embodiment, no pseudo game is played, and the number of bonus coins is notified through an effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 during the actual game.

Figure 284 shows an example of an auxiliary effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in notification mode.

In notification mode, the central portion of the auxiliary display unit 65 shows a young man character strolling down a road, and the upper left portion of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of games played since switching to notification mode and the number of medals won since switching to notification mode, and the upper right portion of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of medals remaining until the end of notification mode. For example, in Figure 284(a), the upper left portion of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that this is the 100th game in notification mode and that 500 medals have been won in notification mode, and the upper right portion of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that there are 45 medals remaining until the end of notification mode.

In the situation shown in Figure 284(a), when the next game starts with three coins played and the player wins the bonus lottery in that game, the bonus effect will begin before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, i.e., at the start of the game. Specifically, as shown in Figure 284(b), a young man character holding a mallet and a bonus image placed on a piece of wood are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the number of games played since the transition to notification mode and the number of medals won since the transition to notification mode are continuously displayed in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of medals remaining until the end of notification mode is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. In Figure 284(b), the number of games played since the transition to notification mode is updated to 101, and the number of medals won since the transition to notification mode is updated to 497, while the number of medals remaining until the end of notification mode remains at 45.

After that, each time a stop command is issued by operating stop switches 42-44, a cut-in effect is played in which the young man character is seen brandishing a mallet and the young man character's facial expression is enlarged. When all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, the young man character is shown smashing the added statue and piece of wood with the mallet, and the number of added medals to be added to the remaining number is displayed. Figure 284(c) shows that 20 will be added to the remaining number in the current game. If a cherry win is achieved in the current game, as shown in Figure 284(d), the displayed number of added medals is hidden, and the number of medals paid out in connection with the cherry win (8) is added, updating the number of medals won to 505. The increase of medals in connection with the cherry win (5) is subtracted, and the number of added medals (20) is added, updating the remaining number to 60.

The following describes the processing performed by the display control device 81 when controlling the display of the auxiliary display unit 65.

Figure 285 is a flowchart showing the number of games played display process related to the display control of the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In step S210101, it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode, and if it is not notification mode, this processing is terminated. If the current game mode is notification mode, proceed to step S210102 and determine whether a start command has been received. If a start command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a start command has been received, step S210103 determines whether display flag 1 has been set. If display flag 1 has not been set, step S210104 sets the number of games played counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 to 1, and step S210105 displays the value of the number of games played counter (i.e., "1") on the auxiliary display unit 65. Thereafter, step S210106 sets display flag 1, and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S210103 that display flag 1 is set, this means that the number of games played has been displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, in step S210107, 1 is added to the value of the number of games played counter. In step S210108, the number of games played displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated to the value of the number of games played counter. This process then terminates.

Figure 286 is a flowchart showing the acquired number display process related to the display control of the acquired number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In step S210201, it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode, and if it is not notification mode, this processing ends. If the current game mode is notification mode, it proceeds to step S210202, where it is determined whether a start command has been received.

If a start command is received, the process proceeds to step S210203, where it is determined whether display flag 2 is set. If display flag 2 is not set, the acquired coin counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0 in step S210204. In step S210205, the number of bets for the current game is subtracted from the value of the acquired coin counter. Note that the number of bets for the current game is included in the start command and transmitted from the main control device 101. In step S210206, the value of the acquired coin counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and in step S210107, display flag 2 is set.

If it is determined in step S210203 that display flag 2 is set, this means that the number of coins won has already been displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the process proceeds to step S210208, where the number of bets for this game is subtracted from the value of the won coin counter. In step S210209, the number of coins won displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated to the value of the won coin counter.

If display flag 2 is set in step S210207, if the number of winning coins displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated in step S210209, or if it is determined in step S210202 that a start command has not been received, proceed to step S210210 to determine whether a winning result command has been received. If a winning result command has not been received, the process terminates. If a winning result command has been received, proceed to step S210211 to add the payout amount to the value of the winning coin counter. Specifically, if a small winning combination is achieved, 8 is added to the value of the winning coin counter. If a replay winning combination is achieved, the number of bets for this game is added to the value of the winning coin counter. If no winning combination is achieved, 0 is added to the value of the winning coin counter. In step S210212, the number of winning coins displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated to the value of the winning coin counter. The process then terminates.

Figure 287 is a flowchart showing the remaining number display process related to the display control of the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In step S210301, it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode, and if it is not notification mode, this processing ends. If the current game mode is notification mode, it proceeds to step S210302, where it is determined whether a start command has been received.

If a start command is received, proceed to step S210303, where the value of the net increase number counter on the main control unit 101 side included in the start command is set to the net increase number counter provided in the RAM of the display control unit 81. In step S210304, the additional number included in the start command is set to the notification number counter provided in the RAM of the display control unit 81. In step S210305, it is determined whether display flag 3 is set. If display flag 3 is not set, processing for the first game is performed in step S210306, and if display flag 3 is set, processing for the second game or later is performed in step S210307. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S210302 that a start command has not been received, proceed to step S210308, where it is determined whether a winning result command has been received. If a winning result command is received, step S210309 performs winning update processing and then proceeds to step S210310; if a winning result command is not received, then proceeds directly to step S210310. In step S210310, it is determined whether an end command has been received. If an end command has been received, step S210311 performs end processing and then terminates this processing; if an end command has not been received, then this processing terminates.

Figure 288 is a flowchart showing the first game processing.

In step S210401, it is determined whether the value of the notified number counter is 0. The notified number counter is set to the number of additional coins sent from the main control unit 101, i.e., the result of the additional lottery (step S210304, see Figure 287). Therefore, if the value of the notified number counter is 0, it means that the additional lottery was not won in the current game (the first game in the notification mode). In such a case, proceed to step S210402, and set the value of the net increase number counter to the remaining number counter stored in the RAM of the display control unit 81. In step S210403, the unnotified number counter stored in the RAM of the display control unit 81 is set to 0. In step S210404, the value of the remaining number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and in step S210405, display flag 3 is set. This process then terminates.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S210401 that the value of the notified coin counter is not 0, this means that the player has won the bonus lottery in this game (the first game in the notification mode). In this case, proceed to step S210406, and set the remaining coin counter to the value obtained by subtracting the value of the notified coin counter from the value of the net increase coin counter. In step S210407, set the unnotified coin counter to 0. In step S210408, the value of the remaining coin counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and in step S210409, display flag 3 is set. Thereafter, in step S210410, the bonus effect begins, and this processing ends.

Here's a brief explanation of the processing that occurs when the bonus effect begins.

When an additional effect is initiated, if a stop command is received, it is determined whether the commands were received in the correct order. Specifically, if a stop command indicating that a first stop command has been generated (hereinafter also referred to as the "first stop command") is received, it is determined whether a start command has been received, and if the start command has been received, it is determined that the command was received correctly. If a stop command indicating that a second stop command has been generated (hereinafter also referred to as the "second stop command") is received, it is determined whether the start command and the first stop command have been received, and if the start command and the first stop command have been received, it is determined that the command was received correctly. If a stop command indicating that a third stop command has been generated (hereinafter also referred to as the "third stop command") is received, it is determined whether the start command, the first stop command, and the second stop command have been received, and if the start command, the first stop command, and the second stop command have been received, it is determined that the command was received correctly. In this embodiment, the added effect begins upon receiving a start command, so when the first stop command is received, it is always received normally. If the stop commands are received in the correct order, the added effect proceeds according to the stop command that was issued. For example, when the third stop command is received, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of the young man character smashing the added image and piece of wood with a mallet, and the value of the notification number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the number of added coins.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the commands were not received normally, that is, if the commands were received in an order other than start command → first stop command → second stop command → third stop command, an abnormality flag is set and an abnormality alert sound is output from speaker 64. In this case, the additional effects do not proceed. For example, if the third stop command is received without receiving the second stop command, the reception up to the first stop command is considered normal, and the reception of the third stop command is considered abnormal. In such a case, the additional effects stop progressing with the issuance of the first stop command, and even if the third stop command is issued, the number of additional coins will not be announced. Note that the abnormality flag is cleared and the abnormality alert sound is stopped when the manager of the gaming facility where the slot machine 10 is installed performs the specified abnormality resolution operation.

Figure 289 is a flowchart showing the winning update process.

In step S210501, the number of bets is subtracted from the payout amount to calculate the increase. In step S210502, the increase is subtracted from the value of the remaining number counter. In step S210503, it is determined whether the value of the notified number counter is 0. If the value of the notified number counter is not 0, proceed to step S210504, where the value of the notified number counter is added to the value of the remaining number counter. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S210503 that the value of the notified number counter is 0, the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated to the value of the remaining number counter in step S210505, and this processing ends.

Figure 290 is a flowchart showing the termination process.

In step S210601, it is determined whether the value of the reported number counter matches the number of coins added included in the end command. As explained in the remaining coin display process, the value of the reported number counter is the number of coins added included in the start command (see step S210304, Figure 287). Therefore, if the received start command and the received end command were sent from the main control device 101 during the same game round, the value of the reported number counter will match the number of coins added included in the end command. In such a case, in step S210602, the reported number counter is set to 0, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the reported number counter and the number of coins added included in the end command do not match, proceed to step S210603, where the value of the unreported number counter is added by the number of coins added included in the end command. Then, this process ends. Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the remaining coins displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 reach 0, a one-hit effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the start lever 41. In the one-hit effect, when the player operates the start lever 41, the value of the unannounced coin counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the value of the unannounced coin counter is 0, the notification mode end screen is displayed and the notification mode ends, but if the value of the unannounced coin counter is not 0, the notification mode continues.

Figure 291 is a flowchart showing the processing for the second game and beyond.

In step S210701, the value of the remaining number counter and the value of the unreported number counter are added together to calculate the grasped value grasped by the display control device 81. In step S210702, it is determined whether the value of the reported number counter is 0. The reported number counter is set with the number of added coins sent from the main control device 101, i.e., the result of the added lottery (step S210304, see Figure 287). Therefore, if the value of the reported number counter is 0, it means that the player did not win the added lottery in this game. In such a case, proceed to step S210703 to determine whether the value of the net increase number counter matches the grasped value. If the value of the net increase number counter matches the grasped value, this process ends. If the value of the net increase counter and the grasped value do not match, proceed to step S210704, where the remaining number counter is set to the value obtained by subtracting the value of the unreported number counter from the value of the net increase counter. Then, in step S210705, the remaining number displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated to the value of the remaining number counter, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S210702 that the value of the notified number counter is not 0, this means that the player has won the bonus lottery for this game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S210706, where the value of the notified number counter is subtracted from the value of the net increase number counter to calculate the non-bonus value before the bonus lottery was won. In step S210707, it is determined whether the non-bonus value and the grasped value match. If the non-bonus value and the grasped value do not match, the process proceeds to step S210708, where the remaining number counter is set to the value obtained by subtracting the value of the unnotified number counter from the non-bonus value. Then, in step S210709, the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated to the value of the remaining number counter. If the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated in step S210709, or if it is determined in step S210707 that the non-added value and the grasped value match, the add-on effect is started in step S210710, and this process ends.

In a configuration that performs the above-described processing when displaying the number of games played, the number of coins won, and the number of remaining coins, for example, if there is poor contact or a disconnection in the connector connecting the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81, or if noise or other issues occur on the main control unit 101 side, an event occurs in which the main control unit 101 sends a command to the display control unit 81 but the display control unit 81 is unable to receive the command. Furthermore, if the main control unit 101 sends, for example, a start command to the display control unit 81 but the display control unit 81 does not receive the start command, a discrepancy in recognition will occur between the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81. This is because the main control unit 101 is in a state where it can issue a first stop command upon the start of a game, while the display control unit 81 recognizes that the game has not started and therefore does not update the number of games played or start an additional effect. Below, we will explain, using specific examples, how the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 changes when the display control unit 81 is unable to receive commands.

Figures 292 and 293 show the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when three three-coin games are played in a situation where 500 coins have been won after 100 games in notification mode and 50 coins remain. In the 101st game, the push-order bell is won, a bell prize is awarded, and eight medals are paid out. In the 102nd game, the cherry is won, a cherry prize is awarded, and eight medals are paid out. Also, in the 102nd game, the bonus lottery is won, and 20 medals are added. In the 103rd game, the push-order bell is won, a bell prize is awarded, and eight medals are paid out.

Figure 292 (a) shows the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when all commands are received from the 101st to 103rd games.

When the 101st game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 100 to 101 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs a coin count display process, updating the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 500 to 497 (= 500 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 101st game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 50 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 50, as updated for the 100th game, because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control device 101 (50) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 50 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 497 to 505 (= 497 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 50 to 45 (= 50 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

When the 102nd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 101 to 102 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs an acquired coin count display process, updating the acquired coin count displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 505 to 502 (= 505 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information contained in the start command for the 102nd game indicates that the value of the net increase coin counter is 65 (= 45 + 20), and the number of added coins is 20. Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 45, as updated for the 101st game, because the non-added value (= 65 - 20) determined from the information contained in the start command matches the value determined by the display control device 81 (= 45 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

In the 102nd game, a start command including an additional coin count of 20 is received, so an additional coin count effect is performed (step S210710, see Figure 291). The additional coin count effect progresses as the first stop command through the third stop command are received, and when the third stop command is received, an additional coin count of 20 is announced.

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a cherry win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning number display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 502 to 510 (= 502 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning update process to update the number of remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 45 to 60 (= 45 - 8 + 3 + 20) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

When the 103rd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 102 to 103 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs an acquired coin count display process, updating the acquired coin count displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 510 to 507 (= 510 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 103rd game is that the value of the net increase coin count counter is 60 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the added coin lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 60, as updated for the 102nd game, because the value of the net increase coin count counter sent from the main control device 101 (60) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 60 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 507 to 515 (= 507 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 60 to 55 (= 60 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

Figure 292 (b) shows the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when commands cannot be received after the start command for the 101st game is received, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the start command for the 102nd game.

When the 101st game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 100 to 101 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs an acquired coin count display process, updating the acquired coin count displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 500 to 497 (= 500 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 101st game is that the value of the net increase coin count counter is 50 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the added coin lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 50, as updated for the 100th game, because the value of the net increase coin count counter sent from the main control device 101 (50) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 50 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

In the 101st game, no commands can be received after the start command. Therefore, even if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop and a bell win is achieved, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp this event. As a result, even though a bell win has been achieved, the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 497 and is not updated, and the number of coins remaining displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 50 and is not updated.

When the 102nd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, thereby updating the number of games played displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 101 to 102 (step S210108, see Figure 285). The display control device 81 also performs an acquired coin count display process, thereby updating the acquired coin count displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 497 to 494 (= 497 - 3) (step S210209, see Figure 286).

The information contained in the start command for the 102nd game indicates that the value of the net increase coin counter is 65 (= 45 + 20), and the number of coins added is 20. Meanwhile, the value of the remaining coin counter remains at 50 because the winning result command for the 101st game has not been received. In other words, in the situation shown in Figure 292 (b), in the processing for displaying the remaining coins from the second game onwards, the non-added value (= 65 - 20) determined from the information contained in the start command does not match the value determined by the display control device 81 (= 50 + 0). As a result, the display control device 81 changes the value of the remaining coin counter to the correct value of 45 (= 45 - 0) based on the information contained in the start command, and updates the remaining coins from 50 to 45 (step S210709, see Figure 291).

In the 102nd game, a start command including an additional coin count of 20 is received, so an additional coin count effect is performed (step S210710, see Figure 291). The additional coin count effect progresses as the first stop command through the third stop command are received, and when the third stop command is received, an additional coin count of 20 is announced.

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a cherry win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning number display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 494 to 502 (= 494 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning update process to update the number of remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 45 to 60 (= 45 - 8 + 3 + 20) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

When the 103rd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 102 to 103 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs a coin count display process, updating the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 502 to 499 (= 502 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 103rd game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 60 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 60, as updated for the 102nd game, because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control device 101 (60) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 60 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 499 to 507 (= 499 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 60 to 55 (= 60 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

As described above, in the situation shown in Figure 292 (b), because the winning result command for the 101st game was not received, the number of coins won from the 102nd game onwards remains 8 less than the correct number. On the other hand, the remaining number of coins is corrected to the correct number at the start of the 102nd game, taking into account the number of coins lost due to the bell winning in the 101st game, based on the information contained in the start command for the 102nd game.

Figure 292 (c) shows the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when commands cannot be received after the start command for the 102nd game is received, and then commands can be received again from the start command for the 103rd game.

When the 101st game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 100 to 101 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs a coin count display process, updating the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 500 to 497 (= 500 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 101st game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 50 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 50, as updated for the 100th game, because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control device 101 (50) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 50 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 497 to 505 (= 497 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 50 to 45 (= 50 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

When the 102nd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 101 to 102 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs an acquired coin count display process, updating the acquired coin count displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 505 to 502 (= 505 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information contained in the start command for the 102nd game indicates that the value of the net increase coin counter is 65 (= 45 + 20), and the number of added coins is 20. Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 45, as updated for the 101st game, because the non-added value (= 65 - 20) determined from the information contained in the start command matches the value determined by the display control device 81 (= 45 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

In the 102nd game, a start command including an additional coin count of 20 is received, so the additional coin effect is performed (step S210710, see Figure 291). However, in the 102nd game, no commands after the start command can be received. Therefore, even if the first stop command through the third stop command are issued, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp these events. As a result, even if the first stop command through the third stop command are issued, the additional coin effect does not proceed, and the addition of 20 coins is not announced in the additional coin effect.

Furthermore, in the 102nd game, the winning result command cannot be received. Therefore, even if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop and a cherry winning occurs, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp this event. As a result, even though a cherry winning occurs, the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 502 and is not updated, and the number of coins remaining displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 45 and is not updated.

When the 103rd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, thereby updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 102 to 103 (step S210108, see Figure 285). The display control device 81 also performs a coin count display process, thereby updating the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 502 to 499 (= 502 - 3) (step S210209, see Figure 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 103rd game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 60 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Meanwhile, the value of the remaining coin counter remains at 45 because the winning result command for the 102nd game has not been received. In other words, in the situation shown in Figure 292 (c), in the processing for displaying the remaining number of coins from the second game onwards, the value of the net increase in coin count counter sent from the main control unit 101 (60) no longer matches the value held by the display control unit 81 (= 45 + 0). As a result, the display control unit 81 changes the value of the remaining coin count counter to the correct value of 60 (= 60 - 0) based on the information contained in the start command, and updates the remaining number of coins from 45 to 60 (step S210705, see Figure 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 499 to 507 (= 499 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 60 to 55 (= 60 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

As described above, in the situation shown in Figure 292 (c), because the winning result command for game 102 was not received, the number of coins won from game 103 onwards remains 8 less than the correct number. Furthermore, because the first to third stop commands for game 102 were not received, the bonus effect begins but ends without announcing the number of coins added. Based on the information contained in the start command for game 103, the remaining number of coins is corrected to the correct number at the start of game 103, taking into account the number of coins lost due to the cherry winning in game 102 and the number of coins added that could not be announced in the bonus effect for game 102.

Figure 292 (d) shows the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when commands cannot be received after the start command for the 102nd game is received, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command for the 103rd game.

When the 101st game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 100 to 101 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs a coin count display process, updating the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 500 to 497 (= 500 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 101st game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 50 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 50, as updated for the 100th game, because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control device 101 (50) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 50 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 497 to 505 (= 497 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 50 to 45 (= 50 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

When the 102nd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 101 to 102 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs an acquired coin count display process, updating the acquired coin count displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 505 to 502 (= 505 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information contained in the start command for the 102nd game indicates that the value of the net increase coin counter is 65 (= 45 + 20), and the number of added coins is 20. Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 45, as updated for the 101st game, because the non-added value (= 65 - 20) determined from the information contained in the start command matches the value determined by the display control device 81 (= 45 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

In the 102nd game, a start command including an additional coin count of 20 is received, so the additional coin effect is performed (step S210710, see Figure 291). However, in the 102nd game, no commands after the start command can be received. Therefore, even if the first stop command, second stop command, and third stop command are issued, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp these events. As a result, even if the first stop command, third stop command, and third stop command are issued, the additional coin effect does not proceed, and at the end of the 102nd game, the additional coin effect will no longer announce the addition of 20 coins.

Furthermore, in the 102nd game, the winning result command cannot be received. Therefore, even if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop and a cherry winning occurs, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp this event. As a result, even though a cherry winning occurs, the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 502 and is not updated, and the number of coins remaining displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 45 and is not updated.

The 103rd game returns to a state where it can receive the first stop command. Because it is unable to receive a start command, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp this event even if the 103rd game starts. As a result, even though the 103rd game has started, the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 102 and is not updated, and the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 502 and is not updated.

When the first stop command and the second stop command are received, the display control device 81 proceeds with the additional bonus effect. When the third stop command is received, the additional bonus effect notifies the user that 20 coins have been added.

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 502 to 510 (= 502 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 45 to 60 (= 45 - 8 + 3 + 20) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

Although illustrations and detailed explanations are omitted, when a start command for the 104th game is received, the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated from 102 to 103. The number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated from 510 to 507. If the player does not win the bonus lottery for the 104th game, the information included in the start command is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 55 and the number of coins added is 0. Therefore, the remaining number of coins is updated from 60 to 55 (= 55 - 0) because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control unit 101 (55) does not match the value held by the display control unit 81 (= 60 + 0).

As described above, in the situation shown in Figure 292(d), because the start command for game 103 was not received, the number of games played from game 104 onwards remains one less. As for the number of coins won, because the winning result command for game 102 and the start command for game 103 were not received, the number of coins won from game 104 onwards remains five less than the correct number. As for the bonus effect, because the commands were received in the correct order with the start command for game 102 and the first through third stop commands for game 103, an bonus of 20 coins is announced after the third stop command for game 103 is issued. In other words, in the situation shown in Figure 292(d), the bonus effect is played over two games. The remaining number of coins is corrected to the correct number at the start of game 104, taking into account the number of coins lost due to the cherry winning in game 102, based on the information included in the start command for game 104.

Figure 293 (a) shows the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when commands cannot be received after the start command for the 101st game is received, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command for the 102nd game.

When the 101st game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 100 to 101 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs a coin count display process, updating the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 500 to 497 (= 500 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 101st game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 50 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 50, as updated for the 100th game, because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control device 101 (50) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 50 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

In the 101st game, no commands can be received after the start command. Therefore, even if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop and a bell win is achieved, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp this event. As a result, even though a bell win has been achieved, the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 497 and is not updated, and the number of coins remaining displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 50 and is not updated.

The 102nd game returns to a state where it can receive the first stop command. Because it is unable to receive a start command, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp this event even if the 102nd game starts. As a result, even though the 102nd game has started, the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 101 and is not updated, and the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 497 and is not updated. Furthermore, because the start command could not be received, the bonus effect does not start either.

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a cherry win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning number display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 497 to 505 (= 497 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning update process to update the number of remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 50 to 45 (= 50 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

When the end command for the 102nd game is received, the display control device 81 performs end processing (see Figure 290). The end command for the 102nd game contains a value of 20 added coins. Meanwhile, the value of the reported coin counter, which indicates the added coins kept by the display control device 81, is 0, since it was set when the start command for the 101st game was received. Therefore, the value of the reported coin counter does not match the added coins contained in the end command, and the received added coin number of 20 is set in the unreported coin counter (step S210603).

When the 103rd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, thereby updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 101 to 102 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs an acquired coin count display process, thereby updating the acquired coin count displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 505 to 502 (= 505 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 103rd game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 60 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the added coin lottery). Meanwhile, the value of the remaining coin counter on the display control device 81 side was updated to 45 when the winning result command for the 102nd game was received, and the value of the unreported coin counter was updated to 20 when the end command for the 102nd game was received. In other words, in the situation shown in Figure 293(a), in the processing for displaying the remaining number of coins from the second game onwards, the value of the net increase in coin count counter sent from the main control unit 101 (60) no longer matches the value held by the display control unit 81 (= 45 + 20). As a result, the display control unit 81 changes the value of the remaining coin count counter to the correct value of 40 (= 60 - 20) based on the information contained in the start command, and updates the remaining number of coins from 45 to 40 (step S210705, see Figure 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 502 to 510 (= 502 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 40 to 35 (= 40 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

As described above, in the situation shown in Figure 293(a), because the start command for game 102 was not received, the number of games played from game 103 onwards remains one less. As for the number of coins won, because the winning result command for game 101 and the start command for game 102 were not received, the number of coins won from game 103 onwards remains five less than the correct number. As the start command for game 102 was not received, the bonus effect is not executed. Based on the information included in the start command for game 103, the remaining number is corrected to the correct number at the start of game 103, taking into account the number of coins reduced by the bell winning in game 101. The 20 coins added to game 102 by the main control device 101 are not reflected in the remaining number at the start of game 103, and are instead announced in the one-hit effect that is performed in the game in which the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 reaches zero.

Figure 293 (b) shows the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when commands cannot be received after the end command for the 101st game is received, and then commands can be received again from the start command for the 103rd game.

When the 101st game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 100 to 101 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs a coin count display process, updating the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 500 to 497 (= 500 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 101st game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 50 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 50, as updated for the 100th game, because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control device 101 (50) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 50 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 497 to 505 (= 497 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 50 to 45 (= 50 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

For the 102nd game, the situation is such that it is unable to receive any commands from the start command to the end command. Therefore, the display control device 81 is unable to determine whether the 102nd game has started or ended. As a result, the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 101 and is not updated, the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 505 and is not updated, and the number of coins remaining displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 45 and is not updated. No bonus effects are performed.

When the 103rd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, thereby updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 101 to 102 (step S210108, see Figure 285). The display control device 81 also performs a number of coins acquired display process, thereby updating the number of coins acquired displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 505 to 502 (= 505 - 3) (step S210209, see Figure 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 103rd game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 60, and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Meanwhile, the value of the remaining coin counter on the display control device 81 side is 45, and the value of the unreported coin counter is 0. In other words, in the situation shown in Figure 293 (b), in the processing for displaying the remaining number of coins from the second game onwards, the value of the net increase in coin count counter sent from the main control unit 101 (60) no longer matches the value held by the display control unit 81 (= 45 + 0). As a result, the display control unit 81 changes the value of the remaining coin count counter to the correct value of 60 (= 60 - 0) based on the information contained in the start command, and updates the remaining number of coins from 45 to 60 (step S210705, see Figure 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 502 to 510 (= 502 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 60 to 55 (= 60 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

As described above, in the situation shown in Figure 293 (b), because the start command for game 102 was not received, the number of games played from game 103 onwards remains one less. Because the start command and winning result command for game 102 were not received, the number of coins won from game 103 onwards remains five less than the correct number. Because the start command for game 102 was not received, the bonus effect is not executed. Based on the information contained in the start command for game 103, the remaining number is corrected to the correct number at the start of game 103, taking into account the number of coins lost due to the cherry winning in game 102. At this time, because the start command and end command for game 102 were not received, the display control device 81 is unaware that the bonus lottery has been won. As a result, the 20 coins added to game 102 by the main control device 101 are not announced in the bonus effect or the one-hit effect, and are reflected in the remaining number at the start of game 103.

Figure 293 (c) shows the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when commands cannot be received after the end command for the 101st game is received, and the situation returns to one where commands can be received from the first stop command for the 103rd game.

When the 101st game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 100 to 101 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs a coin count display process, updating the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 500 to 497 (= 500 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 101st game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 50 and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 50, as updated for the 100th game, because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control device 101 (50) matches the value held by the display control device 81 (= 50 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 497 to 505 (= 497 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 50 to 45 (= 50 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

For the 102nd game, the situation is such that it is unable to receive any commands from the start command to the end command. Therefore, the display control device 81 is unable to determine whether the 102nd game has started or ended. As a result, the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 101 and is not updated, the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 505 and is not updated, and the number of coins remaining displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 45 and is not updated. No bonus effects are performed.

The 103rd game returns to a state where it can receive the first stop command. Because it is unable to receive a start command, the display control device 81 is unable to grasp this event even if the 103rd game starts. As a result, even though the 103rd game has started, the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 101 and is not updated, and the number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 remains at 505 and is not updated.

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 505 to 513 (= 505 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 45 to 40 (= 45 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

Although illustrations and detailed explanations are omitted, when a start command for the 104th game is received, the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated from 101 to 102. The number of coins won displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated from 513 to 510. If the player does not win the bonus lottery for the 104th game, the information included in the start command is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 55 and the number of coins added is 0. Therefore, the remaining number of coins is updated from 40 to 55 (= 55 - 0) because the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control unit 101 (55) does not match the value held by the display control unit 81 (= 40 + 0).

As described above, in the situation shown in Figure 293 (c), because the start commands for games 102 and 103 were not received, the number of games played from game 104 onwards remains two fewer than the correct number. As for the number of coins won, because the start command and winning result command for game 102 and the start command for game 103 were not received, the number of coins won from game 104 onwards remains two fewer than the correct number. As the start command for game 102 was not received, the bonus effect is not executed. Based on the information contained in the start command for game 104, the remaining number is corrected to the correct number at the start of game 104, taking into account the number of coins reduced due to the cherry winning in game 102 and the number of coins reduced due to the bell winning in game 103. At this time, because the start command and end command for game 102 were not received, the display control device 81 is unaware that the bonus lottery has been won. As a result, the 20 coins added in the bonus lottery will not be announced in the bonus or one-hit effects, but will be reflected in the remaining number of coins at the start of the 104th game.

Figure 293 (d) shows the change in the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 when the winning result command for the 102nd game is not received.

In the 101st game, all commands can be received. Therefore, the number of games played is updated from 100 to 101 when a start command is received. The number of coins won is updated from 500 to 497 when a start command is received, and from 497 to 505 when a winning result command is received. The number of coins remaining is updated from 50 to 45 when a winning result command is received.

When the 102nd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 101 to 102 (step S210108, see FIG. 285). The display control device 81 also performs an acquired coin count display process, updating the acquired coin count displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 505 to 502 (= 505 - 3) (step S210209, see FIG. 286). Here, the information contained in the start command for the 102nd game indicates that the value of the net increase coin counter is 65 (= 45 + 20), and the number of added coins is 20. Therefore, the remaining number of coins remains at 45, as updated for the 101st game, because the non-added value (= 65 - 20) determined from the information contained in the start command matches the value determined by the display control device 81 (= 45 + 0) (negative judgment in step S210703, see FIG. 291).

In the 102nd game, a start command including an additional coin count of 20 is received, so an additional coin count effect is performed (step S210710, see Figure 291). The additional coin count effect progresses as the first stop command through the third stop command are received, and when the third stop command is received, an additional coin count of 20 is announced.

In the 102nd game, the winning result command cannot be received. As a result, the number of medals won remains at 502 and is not updated, even when a cherry win is achieved. The number of medals won also remains at 45 and is not updated. In other words, in the 102nd game, not only is the increase in medals of 5 due to the cherry win not subtracted, but the additional number of medals of 20 announced in the additional effect is not added either. To explain the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 in more detail, if the winning result command cannot be received, the display screen shown in Figure 284(d) will not appear, and the display screen shown in Figure 284(c) will continue to be displayed until the start command for the 103rd game is received.

When an end command for the 102nd game is received, the display control device 81 performs end processing (see Figure 290). The number of added coins included in the end command for the 102nd game is 20. The value of the reported coin counter, which indicates the number of added coins known by the display control device 81, is 20, as it was set when the start command for the 102nd game was received. Therefore, since the value of the reported coin counter matches the number of added coins included in the end command, in the situation shown in Figure 293 (d), the added number of coins, 20, is not set in the unreported coin counter (step S210602).

When the 103rd game begins and a start command is received, the display control device 81 performs a game count display process, thereby updating the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 102 to 103 (step S210108, see Figure 285). The display control device 81 also performs a number of coins acquired display process, thereby updating the number of coins acquired displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from 502 to 499 (= 502 - 3) (step S210209, see Figure 286). Here, the information included in the start command for the 103rd game is that the value of the net increase coin counter is 60, and the number of added coins is 0 (no win in the add-on lottery). Meanwhile, the value of the remaining coin counter on the display control device 81 side is 45, and the value of the unreported coin counter is 0. In other words, in the situation shown in Figure 293 (d), in the processing for displaying the number of remaining coins from the second game onwards, the value of the net increase coin counter sent from the main control unit 101 (60) no longer matches the value held by the display control unit 81 (= 45 + 0). As a result, the display control unit 81 changes the value of the remaining coin counter to the correct value of 60 (= 60 - 0) based on the information contained in the start command, and updates the number of remaining coins from 45 to 60 (step S210705, see Figure 291).

When a winning result command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and a bell win has been achieved is received, the display control device 81 performs a winning coin count display process to update the number of winning coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 499 to 507 (= 499 + 8) (step S210212, see Figure 286). The display control device 81 also performs a winning coin update process to update the remaining coins displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 from 60 to 55 (= 60 - 8 + 3) (step S210505, see Figure 289).

As described above, in the situation shown in Figure 293 (d), because the winning result command for game 102 was not received, the number of coins won from game 103 onwards remains 8 less than the correct number. Regarding the bonus effect, because the start command through the third stop command for game 102 were received, the number of coins added was announced, but because the winning result command for game 102 was not received, the final screen was not displayed and the game ended prematurely. As a result, in game 102, the number of coins added was not reflected in the remaining number. Based on the information contained in the start command for game 103, the remaining number is corrected to the correct number at the start of game 103, taking into account the number of coins lost due to the cherry winning in game 102 and the number of coins added announced in the bonus effect.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the number of games played displayed on the games played counter and auxiliary display unit 65 becomes unable to receive a start command and a discrepancy occurs between the number of games actually played in notification mode and the number of games played as determined by the display control device 81, the discrepancy in the number of games played will be maintained without correction even if a situation returns to a state where a start command can be received in a subsequent game. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration related to display control of the number of games played and reduces the amount of data pre-stored in the display control device 81. As a result, data for executing specified auxiliary effects can be stored in the free space created in the ROM of the display control device 81, enabling a wider variety of auxiliary effects to be produced.

It is certainly possible to configure the system to correct any discrepancies in the number of games played. However, if such a configuration were adopted, the processing configuration related to commands on the main control unit 101 side would become more complex, and there is a concern that the amount of data to be pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main control unit 101 would increase. Specifically, this would require the main control unit 101 to also have a games played counter, require processing to update the value of the games played counter in notification mode, and require setting information indicating the value of the games played counter in the start command. On the other hand, if a configuration is adopted in which discrepancies in the number of games played are maintained without being corrected, the above components would be unnecessary, making it possible to simplify the processing configuration related to the start command on the main control unit 101 side. As a result, it would be possible to store data related to gameplay in the free space created in the ROM 105 of the main control unit 101.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

The start command is configured not to include information indicating the number of games played. In addition, the main control unit 101 is configured not to have a game counter for storing the number of games played, and is configured not to send information indicating the number of games played with any commands other than the start command. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration related to commands on the main control unit 101 side, and makes it possible to store data related to gameplay in the free space created in the ROM 105 of the main control unit 101.

The number of games played is maintained without correction even if a discrepancy occurs. In this slot machine 10, the notification mode ends based on the net increase in medals during the notification mode. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the number of games played is not highly correlated with the conditions for ending the notification mode. Therefore, even if a discrepancy occurs in the number of games played, the impact on the player can be minimized, reducing the chances of the player becoming distrustful. Furthermore, while noise or other factors can cause an event that prevents the start command from being received, this does not occur very frequently. Therefore, rather than complicating the processing configuration related to display control of the number of games played to account for infrequent events, it is possible to increase the player's interest by storing data for executing auxiliary effects other than bonus effects in the surplus ROM area created by not complicating the processing configuration related to display control of the number of games played, for example. The same is true for the main control device 101; rather than providing a configuration on the display control device 81 side that allows for correction of discrepancies in the number of games played, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by storing data for executing simulated games, for example, in the surplus area of ROM 105 that is created by not providing such a configuration.

Regarding the number of coins displayed on the coin counter and auxiliary display unit 65, if a situation arises in which the start command or the winning result command cannot be received, resulting in a discrepancy between the number of coins actually won in notification mode and the number of coins recognized by the display control device 81, the discrepancy in the number of coins won will be maintained without correction even if a situation returns to a state in which the start command and the winning result command can be received in a subsequent game. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration related to display control of the number of coins won and reduces the amount of data pre-stored in the display control device 81. As a result, data for executing specified auxiliary effects can be stored in the free space created in the ROM of the display control device 81, enabling a wider variety of auxiliary effects to be produced.

It is certainly possible to configure the system to correct any discrepancies in the number of coins won. However, such a configuration would complicate the processing configuration related to commands on the main control unit 101 side, raising concerns that the amount of data to be pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main control unit 101 would increase. Specifically, this would require the main control unit 101 to also have an acquired coin counter, and would require processing to update the value of the acquired coin counter when medals are bet or when a win is achieved, and would require setting information indicating the value of the acquired coin counter in the start command. On the other hand, if a configuration were adopted in which discrepancies in the number of coins won are maintained without being corrected, the above components would be unnecessary, making it possible to simplify the processing configuration related to the start command on the main control unit 101 side. As a result, it would be possible to store data related to gameplay in the free space created in the ROM 105 of the main control unit 101.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

In the winning coin count display process, when a start command is received, the number of bets is subtracted from the value of the winning coin count counter, and when a winning result command is received, the payout amount corresponding to the winning result is added to the value of the winning coin count counter. With this configuration, the main control unit 101 only needs to send information indicating the number of bets in the game for which the command is sent and the condition device for which a win was achieved. This eliminates the need for the main control unit 101 to store the game results up to that point, such as the number of coins won, simplifying the processing configuration related to commands on the main control unit 101 side. As a result, it becomes possible to store data related to gameplay in the free space created in the ROM 105 of the main control unit 101, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The number of coins won is maintained without correction even if a discrepancy occurs. In this slot machine 10, the notification mode ends based on the net increase in medals in the notification mode. In other words, the number of coins won is information that is highly relevant to the conditions for ending the notification mode. In order to maintain this discrepancy in the number of coins won without correction, this slot machine 10 is configured to display the number of remaining coins in addition to the number of coins won on the auxiliary display unit 65. With this configuration, even if a discrepancy occurs in the number of coins won, the player can still understand the number of medals that can be won in the notification mode and the number of games until the notification mode ends from the remaining coins, thereby reducing the chances of the player feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, when comparing the number of medals acquired and the number of medals remaining, the remaining number requires more accuracy. The number of medals acquired is information indicating the number of medals acquired up to that point in the notification mode, i.e., past game results. Therefore, even if a discrepancy occurs in the number of medals acquired, the number of medals actually acquired by the player will be greater than the number of medals displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so the player will not suffer any disadvantage. On the other hand, the number of medals remaining is information indicating the number of medals that can be acquired in the notification mode, i.e., future game content. If a discrepancy in the remaining number were maintained without correction, the notification mode would end with a remaining number of medals greater than 1 if a discrepancy actually occurred in the remaining number. This is because, from the player's perspective, it would mean that they did not acquire the number of medals displayed, which could be disappointing. In addition, although noise or other factors may cause an event in which start commands or other commands cannot be received, this does not occur very frequently. Therefore, rather than complicating the processing configuration related to display control of the number of coins won to take into account events that occur infrequently, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by storing data for executing auxiliary effects other than added effects in the surplus ROM area created by not complicating the processing configuration related to display control of the number of coins won.The same is true for the main control device 101; rather than providing a configuration on the display control device 81 side that allows for correction of discrepancies in the number of coins won, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by storing data for executing pseudo games in the surplus ROM area created by not providing such a configuration.

The remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to be corrected when a situation arises in which at least one of the start command and the winning result command cannot be received, causing a discrepancy between the actual number of remaining coins until the end of the notification mode and the number of remaining coins ascertained by the display control device 81. This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with an accurate number of remaining coins, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

The start command is configured to include information indicating the value of the net increase coin counter and information indicating the number of coins added. With this configuration, if the main control unit 101 wins the add-on lottery, the display control unit 81 can start the add-on effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, if a discrepancy occurs between the information indicating the value of the net increase coin counter included in the start command and the value held by the display control unit 81, the display control unit 81 can determine whether the discrepancy is due to winning the add-on lottery or to not being able to receive the start command or winning result command. As a result, it is possible to appropriately correct any discrepancy in the remaining number of coins while reducing the amount of data pre-stored in the main control unit 101.

In addition to the start command, the end command also includes information indicating the value of the net increase coin counter and information indicating the number of coins added. With this configuration, even if the display control device 81 is unable to receive the start command, as long as it can receive the end command, it can determine whether or not the add-on lottery has been won. Therefore, when correcting discrepancies in the remaining number of coins, it is possible to correct the discrepancy by reflecting the number of coins added, or by correcting the discrepancy without reflecting the number of coins added. By diversifying the timing at which the number of coins added is reflected in the remaining number, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

If a game in which the player has won the bonus lottery is unable to receive a start command but is able to receive an end command, the number of bonus coins will not be announced in the game in which the player has won the bonus lottery, and the addition of the bonus coins to the remaining number of coins will be carried over to the next game or later. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the timing at which the bonus coins are reflected in the remaining number of coins, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

When a start command indicating that the player has won the bonus lottery is received, an add-on effect is performed to notify the player of the number of added coins. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of added coins through the add-on effect and then reflect this in the remaining number of coins, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, if the start command indicating that the player has won the bonus lottery is not received, the add-on effect cannot be started, and the player will miss the opportunity to be notified that they have won the bonus lottery. Therefore, in such a case, if an end command indicating that the player has won the bonus lottery is received, the reflection of the added coins in the remaining number of coins will be carried over to the next game or later, thereby making it possible to appropriately alleviate the above concerns.

In the event that a game in which the player has won the bonus lottery is unable to receive a start command but is able to receive an end command, a one-hit effect will be performed when the remaining number of coins reaches 0 to notify the player of the number of bonus coins added. With this configuration, even if the number of bonus coins cannot be notified through the bonus effect, the number of bonus coins can be notified through the one-hit effect in a game in which the remaining number of coins reaches 0, and the number of bonus coins will be reflected in the remaining number. As a result, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects that notify the number of bonus coins added and the timing of their execution, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

The start command and end command have the same configuration, except for the header information that indicates the command type, such as the start command. This configuration makes it possible to use the same process when creating a start command and the same process when creating an end command, simplifying the processing configuration and reducing the amount of data stored in ROM 105.

The unannounced coin counter is set separately from the remaining coin counter, and if a situation arises in which a start command cannot be received but an end command can be received in a game in which the add-on lottery has been won, the received number of added coins is set in the unannounced coin counter. With this configuration, if a situation arises in which a start command cannot be received but an end command can be received in a game in which the add-on lottery has been won, the number of added coins can be stored separately from the remaining coins until the number of added coins is announced by the one-hit effect.

The notified number counter is set separately from the remaining number counter, and when a start command is received in a game in which the additional coin lottery is won, the received additional coin number is set in the notified number counter. With this configuration, when a start command is received in a game in which the additional coin lottery is won, the additional coin number can be stored separately from the remaining coin number until the additional coin number is announced through the additional coin presentation.

By providing separate counters for the number of coins reported and the number of coins not reported, if a situation arises in which a start command cannot be received in a game in which the player wins the bonus lottery but an end command can be received, and a start command indicating that the player has won the bonus lottery is received in a subsequent game, it becomes possible to separately store the number of coins reported by the bonus effect and the number of coins reported by the one-hit effect.

If a winning result command is not received in a game that has performed an additional effect, the number of added coins will be announced in that game, but will not be reflected in the remaining number. This configuration reduces the chances of players feeling distrustful. It is certainly possible to configure the number of added coins announced in the additional effect to be reflected in the remaining number even if a winning result command is not received. However, with this configuration, if a bell win or similar is achieved in the above game, even though the remaining number has been updated, there will be a discrepancy between the remaining number and the actual number of coins remaining until the announcement mode ends, which could cause players to feel distrustful.

When the player wins the bonus lottery, the number of bonus coins may be reflected in the remaining number without the execution of auxiliary effects such as bonus effects or one-hit effects. This configuration makes it possible to generate an event in which the remaining number of coins increases even when auxiliary effects that notify the player of the number of bonus coins are not executed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the notification methods for notifying the number of bonus coins without increasing the amount of data pre-stored in the display control device 81, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If a game in which the bonus lottery has been won is unable to receive both the start command and the end command, the bonus number is reflected in the remaining number when the start command is received. This configuration simplifies the processing involved in correcting discrepancies in the remaining number, and reduces the amount of data pre-stored in the display control device 81. As a result, data for executing specified auxiliary effects can be stored in the free space created in the ROM of the display control device 81, making it possible to diversify the auxiliary effects.

(22nd embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, the probability of winning the push order bell was set so that the probability of winning the bell was the same when the left stop switch 42 was operated first, when the middle stop switch 43 was operated first, and when the right stop switch 44 was operated first. However, the probability of winning the push order bell may also be set so that the probability of winning the bell differs depending on which stop switch 42-44 is operated first. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 294 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R.

There are ten types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., number 19 on the left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., number 18 on the left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., number 17 on the left reel 32L), "White Star" (e.g., number 16 on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., number 15 on the left reel 32L), "Blue Star" (e.g., number 12 on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., number 11 on the left reel 32L), "White 7" (e.g., number 7 on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., number 6 on the left reel 32L), and "Red Star" (e.g., number 2 on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 294, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three parallel horizontal lines and two diagonally crossing lines, connecting the positions where these nine symbols are visible. More specifically, as shown in Figure 295(a), the horizontal combination lines are an upper line L1 connecting the upper row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a middle line L2 connecting the middle row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a lower line L3 connecting the lower row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, diagonal combination lines include a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols on the right reel 32R, and a upward-sloping line L5 connecting the lower symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols on the right reel 32R. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated combination line, i.e., an active line, a win is achieved, and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 295(b), only the upward-sloping line L5 is set as an active line. The four combination lines of the upper line L1, middle line L2, lower line L3, and downward-sloping line L4 are never set as active lines.

Figures 296 to 298 show the correspondence between the name of the condition device, the winning symbol combination, and the bonus awarded when a winning symbol is obtained.

BB is a conditional device that grants the bonus of transitioning to a gaming state when a winning combination is achieved.

When the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a BB win occurs. When a BB win occurs, the game state transitions to BB state.

The conditional devices that grant the replay bonus when a winning combination is achieved include Replay 1 to Replay 11.

To explain some winning patterns, for example, if the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 1 win will occur. When a Replay 1 win is achieved, the "Replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop on the middle line L2.

If the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 7 win is awarded. If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and any of the "red 7," "BAR," "red star," and "blue star" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 8 win is awarded. When a Replay 8 win is achieved, the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the downward-sloping right line L4. In other words, in this embodiment, if the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on any of the active line combinations, a Replay bonus is awarded, rather than a medal payout bonus.

Replay 9 is awarded when the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R stop on an active line, or when the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R stop on an active line. Replay 10 is awarded when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "White 7" or "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. If the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a replay 11 win will be awarded. In this embodiment, the winning combinations that stop when replay 9 wins through replay 11 wins are considered chance combinations.

The conditional devices that grant the medal payout bonus when a winning combination is achieved are Small Win 1 to Small Win 32.

Minor win 1 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upper line L1 when a win is achieved. Minor win 2 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the downward-sloping line L4 when a win is achieved. Minor win 3 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the middle line L2 when a win is achieved. Minor win 4 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upward-sloping line L4 when a win is achieved. Minor win 5 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the lower line L3 when a win is achieved. Minor win 6 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop in a small mountain shape (bottom, middle, bottom) when a win is achieved. When minor win 1 through minor win 6 are achieved, eight medals are paid out.

Small wins 7 to 27, 31, and 32 function as compensation wins in this embodiment, and one medal will be paid out if a win is achieved.

Small wins 28 to 30 function as cherry wins in this embodiment, and three medals are paid out when a win is achieved.

Figure 299 shows the lottery table selected during a non-BB internal play when the BB winning flag of "Setting 3" is not carried over. The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning role and a point value PV is set. In addition to the correspondence between winning roles, index values IV, and point values PV, Figure 299 also lists the condition devices that make up the winning role, the winning role number of the winning flag that is set when the role lottery is won, and the group number, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the game can only be started with three coins, and when the lottery table shown in Figure 299 is used to determine whether the winning combination will be successful, the winning probabilities for each combination are as follows: The probability of winning the first replay is approximately 1 in 9.1, the probability of winning the second replay is approximately 1 in 94, the probability of winning the third replay is approximately 1 in 6,600, the probability of winning the first watermelon is approximately 1 in 160, the probability of winning the second watermelon is approximately 1 in 200, the probability of winning the first chance is approximately 1 in 410, the probability of winning the second chance is approximately 1 in 820, and the probability of winning the third chance is approximately 1 in 820. The probability of winning Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2 is approximately 1 in 33. The probability of winning the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell is approximately 1 in 16. The probability of winning a common bell is approximately 1 in 54, the probability of winning a strong bell is approximately 1 in 2,200, the probability of winning a single-piece role is approximately 1 in 260, the probability of winning a weak cherry is approximately 1 in 82, the probability of winning a strong cherry is approximately 1 in 300, the probability of winning a double BB is approximately 1 in 4.8, and the probability of winning a single BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. When not in the BB internal state, there will be no winning events during the internal replay, and there will also be no losing events where no winning combination occurs.

Although not shown in the figure, the lottery table selected during a BB while the BB win flag is carried over differs from the lottery table for non-BB internal periods in that the point value PV for internal replay (IV = 4) and the point value PV for single BB (IV = 32) are different. Specifically, the point value PV for internal replay is set to 4, and the point value PV for single BB is set to 0. Therefore, during a BB, there is a 1 in 16,000 probability of winning a duplicate replay, and a single BB will not be won. Because the winning probability for other roles is the same as during a non-BB internal period, no losses occur during a BB internal period.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the winning combination and the reel stopping results.

In this embodiment, the condition device for creating the winning combination and the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set so that if a combination other than a single BB is won, some kind of winning combination will always be achieved. For example, if the second watermelon is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either Replay 7 or 8 will be achieved, and a replay bonus will be awarded. Similarly, if the strong cherry is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either Small combination 28 to 30 will be achieved, and three medals will be paid out. In the event of a single BB win, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated at a time that allows the BB symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R, to stop on the active line L5, which is the upward-sloping right line, a BB win will be achieved. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated at any other time, a BB win will not be achieved and the BB win flag will be carried over.

Furthermore, if the main control device 101 wins BB and a small winning combination, it sets and modifies the stop information so that the small winning combination takes priority. If the main control device 101 wins BB and a replay combination, it sets and modifies the stop information so that the replay winning combination takes priority. Therefore, for example, if a duplicate BB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the small winning combinations 7-27, 31, or 32 will be won, and one medal will be paid out. If the first replay is won while inside BB, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the replay combinations 1, 2, or 4 will be won, and a replay bonus will be awarded. The same applies if another combination is won while inside BB; regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, a winning combination for a condition device other than BB will be won, and the corresponding bonus will be awarded. As mentioned above, since no losses occur within the BB, in this embodiment, a BB win cannot be achieved in any game other than the one in which a single BB was won. In other words, in the first embodiment, a BB win was avoided by playing two coins to enter the BB2 state and then playing three coins, but in this embodiment, a BB win can be avoided without following the above procedure.

If you win on Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, operating the left stop switch 42, then the centre stop switch 43, and then the right stop switch 44 will result in a win for minor win 1, resulting in the payout of eight medals. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a win for minor win 7, 10, 15, or 18, resulting in the payout of one medal. The same is true for winning on Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Middle-Left-Right Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Middle-Right-Left Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Centre-Left Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2, Right-Left-Centre Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2, Right-Left-Centre Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order corresponding to the winning combination will result in a win for the winning condition device among minor wins 1-6, resulting in the payout of eight medals. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a win for any winning condition device other than minor wins 1-6, resulting in the payout of one medal. If the first special bell is won, operating the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 in this order will result in minor win 3 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 14, or 27 and one medal being paid out. If the second special bell is won, operating the middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 in this order will result in minor win 4 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 14, or 27 and one medal being paid out. If the third special bell is won, operating the right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 in this order will result in minor win 5 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 10 or 23 to 27 and one medal being paid out. If the fourth special bell is won, operating the right stop switch 44 → center stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 in this order will result in minor win 6 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 10 or 23 to 27 and one medal being paid out. In the following, left-center-right Bell 1, left-center-right Bell 2, left-center-left Bell 1, left-center-left Bell 2, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-right-left Bell 1, center-right-left Bell 2, right-center-left Bell 1, right-center-left Bell 2, right-left-center Bell 1, right-left-center Bell 2, and the 1st to 4th special bells are collectively referred to as "push order roles" or "push order bells." In addition, minor roles 1 to 6 are achieved when the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in any combination line or small hill shape. For this reason, in the following, minor roles 1 to 6 are collectively referred to as "bell roles."

We will now explain the game zones in this embodiment. Figure 300 shows the transition of game zones.

The normal zone is a play zone where a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous zone. In the normal zone, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced. Therefore, in the normal zone, a decrease in medals can be expected with each game. If the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won, the play zone will transition to the advantageous zone.

The advantageous zone is a game zone in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be announced if the push order bell is won. In other words, the advantageous zone is a game zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone in that the operation order can be announced. The advantageous zone is made up of three game modes: chance mode, premonition mode, and announcement mode. If the player wins the lottery to move to the advantageous zone in the normal zone, the player will move to the chance mode of the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone ends when 4,000 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, or when the difference in the number of medals in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, regardless of the game mode at that time. In the first embodiment described above, the point at which the player's owned medals in the advantageous zone were the lowest was used as the base point to calculate the difference in the number of medals from that base point. However, in this embodiment, the point at which the player moved to the advantageous zone is used as the base point to calculate the difference in the number of medals from that base point. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the lowest number of medals a player owns during the advantageous period is, for example, -500, the advantageous period will end when the player's medals reach 2,900.

Chance mode is a game mode in which a transition lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode. Chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won, or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in chance mode. When chance mode ends, there are cases where the game transitions to notification mode via premonition mode, or where the game transitions directly to notification mode without going through premonition mode. In chance mode, as in the normal section, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced. For this reason, in chance mode, a decrease in medals can be expected with each game played.

Premonition mode is a game mode that provides premonition effects before transitioning to notification mode. Premonition mode ends when a predetermined number of plays have been played in premonition mode. When premonition mode ends, the game transitions to notification mode. In premonition mode, as in chance mode, if you win the push order bell, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced. Therefore, in premonition mode, you can expect a decrease in medals with each game played.

Announcement mode is a game mode in which, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that can result in a bell win is announced with a predetermined probability. In this embodiment, there are three types of announcement modes: announcement mode A, in which the operation sequence is announced with a probability of 33% or more when the push order bell is won; announcement mode B, in which the operation sequence is announced with a probability of 66% or more when the push order bell is won; and announcement mode C, in which the operation sequence is announced with a probability of 100% when the push order bell is won. In announcement mode, regardless of whether it is announcement mode A, B, or C, an increase in medals is expected with each game played. The announcement mode ends when a predetermined number of games have been played in the announcement mode. When the announcement mode ends, the advantageous zone also ends and the player transitions to the normal zone.

As described above, this slot machine 10 allows you to increase the number of medals you own by playing with three medals in notification mode.

To explain the chance mode and premonition mode in more detail, the chance mode and premonition mode are made up of two types of game zones: a normal zone and a challenge zone (CZ). The auxiliary display unit 65 displays one of the following stages: a normal stage, a CZ stage, or a premonition stage, based on the current game mode and game zone.

Figure 301(a) shows an example of the display mode in the normal stage. The normal stage corresponds to the normal zone in the chance mode. In the normal stage, an image of a young man character strolling along a street in town is displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65.

Figure 301(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the CZ stage. The CZ stage corresponds to the challenge zone in the chance mode. In the CZ stage, a game zone display area is formed at the top of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the game zone display area displays that the current game zone is the challenge zone and the number of games remaining in the challenge zone. In Figure 301(b), the game zone display area displays that the current game zone is the challenge zone and that the number of games remaining in the challenge zone is 6.

Figure 301 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the premonition stage. The premonition stage is a stage for performing premonition effects, and corresponds to the premonition mode or chance mode. The premonition stage is composed of a first part in which the young man character is shown running around in a forest over seven games, and a second part in which the young man character performs a predetermined battle effect over three games. If the young man character wins the battle effect, a transition to the notification mode is announced and the premonition stage ends. If the young man character is defeated in the battle effect, a transition to the notification mode is not announced and the game transitions to the normal stage or CZ stage.

If the game zone transitions from the normal zone to the challenge zone during the premonition stage, as shown in Figure 301 (d), a haze in a color different from the background color will be displayed on the outer periphery of the auxiliary display unit 65, indicating that it is a challenge zone. The same applies if the game zone transitions to the premonition stage during the challenge zone. During the premonition stage, the number of games remaining in the challenge zone is not displayed.

In the Challenge Zone, if you win a specific combination such as a weak cherry, a Freeze A effect will be performed on the reels at the start of the next game.

Figure 302 shows an example of the Freeze A effect.

In Figure 302(a), a weak cherry is won with six games remaining in the challenge zone, resulting in the formation of a small win 28. If a command to start the next game is issued in this situation, the Freeze A effect will begin before the operation of each stop switch 42-44 becomes effective. In Figure 302(b), all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin backward, and "???" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. After that, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R comes to a pseudo-stop without the operation of the stop switches 42-44, and the Freeze A effect ends. In Figure 302(c), when a strong cherry is won, the winning combination for small win 29 is formed, and "!!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. When the Freeze A effect ends, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin forward, and the display content on the auxiliary display unit 65 returns to the CZ stage, as shown in Figure 302(d).

As described above, in the challenge zone, if a predetermined combination is won, the stop results are converted in the freeze A effect. Then, in the challenge zone in chance mode, if the predetermined combination is won, the transition lottery is not held based on the winning combination, but rather based on the stop results converted in the freeze A effect. The stop results converted in the freeze A effect have a higher probability of winning the transition lottery than the winning combination that triggered the freeze A effect. Therefore, when transitioning from the normal zone to the challenge zone in chance mode, the probability of winning the transition lottery increases. Furthermore, when transitioning from the normal zone to the challenge zone in premonition mode, the probability of winning the advance lottery, which adds to the number of plays available in the notification mode before transitioning to the notification mode, increases.

The following explains the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing game zones, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 303 and onwards. To facilitate understanding, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained separately.

First, we will explain the processing during normal intervals.

Figure 303 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process for the normal section. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S220101, it is determined whether a win flag has been set in the win flag storage area 106a, i.e., whether any role has been won. If the win flag has been set, proceed to step S220102, where it is determined whether the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the win role numbers 1 to 31 (see FIG. 299) are stored in the win flag storage area 106a. If the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won, a transition flag is set in step S220103, and the interval indicator 66 is turned ON in step S220104, and this processing ends. If the win flag is not set, or if the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has not been won, i.e., if a single BB has been won, this processing ends immediately.

Figure 304 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in the normal interval. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S220201, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery for this game has been won. In this case, the transition flag is cleared in step S220202. In step S220203, it is determined whether the first stop command has been issued to the left reel 32L, i.e., whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time, the advantageous zone transition processing shown in steps S220204 to S220211 is performed.

In the advantageous zone transition process, in step S220204, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag. In step S220205, the zone game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S220206, the game mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag, and in step S220207, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag. In step S220208, the transition game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 700, and in step S220209, the mode game count counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In step S220210, the difference number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. Then, in step S220211, an zone command is sent, and this process ends. Here, the interval command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp various information related to the play interval at the end of the game (i.e., the play interval, play mode, play zone, and if it is a favorable interval, the number of plays played in the favorable interval, the number of plays played in the play mode, the difference in number of coins, etc.) and in step S220211, an interval command indicating the play interval flag, play mode flag, play zone flag, and various counter values set in the interval information storage area 106d is sent.

If it is determined in step S220203 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, the process proceeds to step S220212 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the process ends after performing the advantageous zone transition process shown in steps S220204 to S220211. On the other hand, if the push order bell has been won, a zone command is sent in step S220211 and the process ends. In other words, if the push order bell is won in the normal zone and the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, even if the transition lottery has been won, the result is invalidated and the game does not transition to chance mode.

If it is determined in step S220201 that the transition flag is not set, a section command is sent in step S220211, and this processing ends.

As described above, if a role other than a single BB is won during the normal period, the game will transition to chance mode in the advantageous period. As shown in Figure 299, for example, in the case of "Setting 3," the probability of winning a single BB while not inside a BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first during the normal period, the game will end in almost one game. Also, if the player is inside a BB, a role other than a single BB will always be won, so if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the normal period will end in one game.

Next, we will explain the processing in the chance mode of the advantageous zone. To make it easier to understand, we will first explain the processing in the normal zone.

Figure 305 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S220301, it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. In this embodiment, the first watermelon, second watermelon, first chance, second chance, third chance, strong bell, weak cherry, and strong cherry are set as rare combinations. Therefore, in step S220301, it is determined whether any of the winning combination numbers 5 to 9, 27, 29, and 30 (see FIG. 299) is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. If a rare combination has not been won, this processing is terminated. If a rare combination has been won, it proceeds to step S220302, where it is determined whether or not the current gaming zone is the challenge zone. If the current gaming zone is the normal zone, a negative judgment is made in step S220302, and it proceeds to step S220304, where it is determined whether or not the omission flag has been set. As will be described in detail later, the omission flag is a flag that can be set in the challenge zone but is never set in the normal zone. Therefore, in the normal zone, step S220304 is judged as positive and the process proceeds to step S220305, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode. In the transition lottery in the normal zone of chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won. In step S220306, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won.

By the way, the probability of winning the transition lottery in the normal zone of chance mode is as follows. If you win a weak cherry, you have a 1% chance of winning. If you win the first or second watermelon (hereinafter, these will be collectively referred to as "watermelon"), you have a 2% chance of winning. If you win the first chance, second chance, or third chance (hereinafter, these will be collectively referred to as "chance"), you have a 20% chance of winning. If you win a strong cherry, you have a 30% chance of winning. If you win a strong bell, you have a 50% chance of winning.

If the transfer lottery is not won, this process ends; if the transfer lottery is won, the transfer flag is set in step S220307 and then this process ends.

Figure 306 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in chance mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S220401, termination determination processing is performed.

In the termination determination process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 307, step S220501 adds 1 to the value of the interval game number counter, and step S220502 determines whether the value of the interval game number counter has reached 4000. If the value of the interval game number counter has not reached 4000, the process proceeds to step S220506, where it is determined whether a replay win has been achieved. If a replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S220507, where a difference in number of coins adjustment process is performed to change the value of the difference in number of coins counter.

In the difference coin adjustment process, the number of medals bet (3 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out in the current game, and the result of this subtraction is added to the difference coin counter. After that, it is determined whether the value of the difference coin counter is 0 or greater. If the value of the difference coin counter is less than 0, the value of the difference coin counter is changed to 0 and the difference coin adjustment process is terminated; if the value of the difference coin counter is 0 or greater, the difference coin adjustment process is terminated as is. Note that the difference coin adjustment process is not performed when a replay win is achieved because the result of subtracting the number of medals bet from the number of medals paid out in the current game is 0, so there is no need to perform the difference coin adjustment process.

If it is determined in step S220506 that a replay win has been achieved, or if the difference in number of coins adjustment process has been performed in step S220507, step S220508 determines whether the value of the difference in number of coins counter is greater than 65,521. If the value of the difference in number of coins counter is 65,521 or less, this means that the difference in number of coins since entering the advantageous zone is 2,400 (= 65,521 - 63,121) or less, and this process is then terminated.

If step S220502 determines that the value of the interval game number counter is 4000, or if step S220508 determines that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 65521, the advantageous interval end processing shown in steps S220503 to S220505 is performed, and this processing ends. In the advantageous interval end processing, step S220503 changes the game interval flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S220504 turns off the interval indicator 66. In step S220505, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous interval. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the interval game number counter value, etc.).

Returning to the explanation of the game zone processing, in step S220402, it is determined whether the current game zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current game zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S220401, and after sending a zone command in step S220407, this process is terminated.

If the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S220403 and determine whether the omission flag is set. As mentioned above, the omission flag is never set in the normal zone, so in the normal zone, a positive judgment is made in step S220403 and mode transition judgment processing is performed in step S220404.

In the mode transition determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 308, step S220601 determines whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first. If it is determined that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, proceed to step S220602 to determine whether the push order bell was won. If the left stop switch 42 was operated first, or if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first without winning the push order bell, step S220603 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S220604 determines whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won, so the transition flag is cleared in step S220605. In step S220606, it is determined whether the current game mode is chance mode. If the game is in chance mode, in step S220607, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a premonition flag. In the following step S220608, the transition game number counter is set to 10, and in step S220609, the mode game number counter is set to 0. This process then ends.

If it is determined in step S220604 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, proceed to step S220610, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, this processing is terminated. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, proceed to step S220606, where it is determined whether the current game mode is chance mode. If it is chance mode, in step S220607, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a premonition flag. In the following step S220608, the transition game number counter is set to 10, and in step S220609, the mode game number counter is set to 0. This processing is then terminated.

If it is determined in step S220602 that the push order bell has been won, i.e., if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first when the push order bell has been won, this process ends without updating the mode game number counter, etc.

Returning to the explanation of game section processing, when the mode transition determination process is completed in step S220404, it is determined in step S220405 whether the current game mode is not notification mode. If it is not notification mode but chance mode, CZ transition determination processing is performed in step S220406, and a section command is sent in step S220407, terminating this process.

In the CZ transition determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 309, step S220701 determines whether the current play zone is a challenge zone. If the current play zone is a normal zone, step S220701 is determined to be negative, and the process proceeds to step S220705 to determine whether a replay role has been won. In this embodiment, the first replay, second replay, third replay, and internal replay are set as replay roles, so step S220705 determines whether any of the winning role numbers 1 to 4 is stored in the win flag storage area 106a (see FIG. 299). If a replay role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S220706 to determine whether a rare role has been won. If a replay role or rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S220707 to add 1 to the value of the consecutive number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S220708, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive number counter has reached 3, and if it has not, this processing is terminated. If the value of the consecutive number counter has reached 3, in step S220709, the consecutive number counter is set to 0, and in step S220710, it is determined whether the current gaming zone is a normal zone. If the current gaming zone is a normal zone, proceed to step S220711, where the gaming zone flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a challenge flag. In step S220712, the CZ game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 15. Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in steps S220705 and S220706 that the replay role or rare role has not been won, the consecutive number counter is set to 0 in step S220714, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the normal zone, if you win a replay role or a rare role, 1 is added to the value of the consecutive number of times counter, and if you do not win a replay role or a rare role, the value of the consecutive number of times counter is reset to 0. Then, when the value of the consecutive number of times counter reaches 3, you will transition to the normal zone. In other words, you will transition to the challenge zone if you win a replay role or a rare role three games in a row in the normal zone.

Next, we will explain the processing that takes place in the challenge zone of chance mode.

In the section lottery process in the challenge zone of chance mode (see Figure 305), if it is determined in step S220301 that a rare combination has been won, a positive judgment is made in step S220302, and in step S220303, a combination determination process is performed to determine the winning combination for the freeze A combination.

In the process of determining the effect role, a role change lottery is held in step S220801, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 310. In the role change lottery, the role corresponding to the winning combination in the Freeze A effect is determined based on the winning flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the role is a hit or a miss.

Figure 311 shows the correspondence between winning roles and the conversion roles determined by the role conversion lottery.

In the role change lottery, if a weak cherry is won, the role change is determined to be watermelon with an 80% probability, the role change is determined to be chance with a 15% probability, the role change is determined to be strong cherry with a 3% probability, and the role change is determined to be strong bell with a 2% probability. If a watermelon is won, the role change is determined to be chance with a 60% probability, the role change is determined to be strong cherry with a 30% probability, the role change is determined to be strong bell with a 9% probability, and the role change is determined to be confirmed with a 1% probability. Note that a confirmed role is a stop result in which the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops pseudo-on the center line L2, and is not set as a winning role or a winning symbol combination on the condition device. If a chance is won, the role change is determined to be strong cherry with a 55% probability, the role change is determined to be strong bell with a 40% probability, and the role change is determined to be confirmed with a 5% probability. If you win a Strong Cherry, there is an 80% chance that the conversion role will be a Strong Bell, and a 20% chance that the conversion role will be confirmed. If you win a Strong Bell, there is a 100% chance that the conversion role will be confirmed.

If a role change lottery has been held, the process proceeds to step S220802, where a role change storage process is performed. In the role change storage process, the result of the role change lottery is stored in a role change memory area provided in the section information storage area 106d. The role change memory area is composed of a first memory area and a second memory area. In the role change storage process, if the first memory area is unused, the result of the role change lottery is stored in the first memory area, and if the first memory area is in use, the result of the role change lottery is stored in the second memory area. In this case, if the conversion role is determined to be watermelon, winning role number 5 corresponding to the first watermelon is stored in the conversion role memory area. If the conversion role is determined to be chance, winning role number 8 corresponding to the second chance is stored in the conversion role memory area. If the conversion role is determined to be strong cherry, winning role number 30 is stored in the conversion role memory area. If the conversion role is determined to be strong bell, winning role number 27 is stored in the conversion role memory area. If the conversion role is determined to be a fixed number, the number 77, which is not set as a winning role number, is stored in the conversion role memory area. The conversion role memory area is composed of two memory areas because, since the Freeze A effect is performed in the game following the rare role winning game, it is possible that a rare role will be won in the Freeze A effect execution game under the challenge zone, causing a new conversion role to be stored.

When the conversion role storage process is performed, the freeze flag is set to 0 in step S220803, and a determination is made in step S220804 as to whether or not a fixed number has been stored. If a fixed number has not been stored, the process ends. If a fixed number has been stored, the omission flag is set in step S220805, and the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process shown in Figure 305, when the performance role determination process has ended, proceed to step S220304, where it is determined whether or not the omission flag has been set. If the omission flag has not been set, proceed to step S220305, where a transition lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode. In the transition lottery in the challenge zone of chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the most recent winning role number stored in the conversion role memory area and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won. In step S220306, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won.

By the way, the probability of winning the transition lottery in the Challenge Zone of Chance Mode is the same as the probability of winning the transition lottery in the Regular Zone of Chance Mode. In other words, if the conversion role is watermelon, there is a 2% chance of winning, and if the conversion role is chance, there is a 20% chance of winning. If the conversion role is strong cherry, there is a 30% chance of winning, and if the conversion role is strong bell, there is a 50% chance of winning.

If the transfer lottery is not won, this process ends; if the transfer lottery is won, the transfer flag is set in step S220307 and then this process ends.

If it is determined in step S220304 that the omission flag is set, the process ends without conducting a transition lottery.

During the game section processing in the challenge zone of chance mode (see Figure 306), if a confirmed number is stored in the above-mentioned performance combination determination process, it is determined in step S220403 that the omission flag is set, and the notification mode transition process is performed in step S220408. After that, a section command is sent in step S220407, and this process ends.

In the notification mode transition process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 312, in step S220901, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In step S220902, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S220903, the mode game number counter is set to 0. In step S220904, it is determined whether the value of the front-loading game number counter is not 0. In the challenge zone of chance mode, the value of the front-loading game number counter cannot be a value other than 0, so a negative judgment is made in step S220904, and freeze flag 2 is set in step S220906. This process then terminates.

As described above, when the omission flag is set, the game mode transitions from chance mode to notification mode. The reason why a transition lottery is not conducted in the section lottery process when the omission flag is set is because the game mode transitions from chance mode to notification mode, so there was no need to conduct a transition lottery to notification mode.

Returning to the explanation of game section processing, if it is determined in step S220403 that the omission flag is not set, mode transition determination processing is performed in step S220404, and a positive determination is made in step S220405, and CZ transition determination processing is performed in step S220406. After that, a section command is sent in step S220407, and this processing ends.

In the CZ transition determination process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 309, step S220701 determines whether the current play zone is a challenge zone. If the current play zone is a challenge zone, step S220702 subtracts 1 from the value of the CZ game number counter, and step S220703 determines whether the value of the CZ game number counter has reached 0. If the value of the CZ game number counter has reached 0, step S220704 changes the play zone flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and then the process proceeds to step S220705. If the value of the CZ game number counter is not 0, the process proceeds directly to step S220705.

In step S220705, it is determined whether a replay role has been won. If a replay role has not been won, proceed to step S220706, where it is determined whether a rare role has been won. If a replay role or a rare role has been won, proceed to step S220707, where 1 is added to the value of the consecutive number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S220708, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive number counter has reached 3, and if it has not reached 3, this processing is terminated. If the value of the consecutive number counter has reached 3, in step S220709, the consecutive number counter is set to 0, and in step S220710, it is determined whether the current playing zone is a normal zone. If the current playing zone is a challenge zone, proceed to step S220713, where 15 is added to the value of the CZ game number counter. This processing is then terminated.

If it is determined in steps S220705 and S220706 that the replay role or rare role has not been won, the consecutive number counter is set to 0 in step S220714, and this processing ends.

As mentioned above, in the Challenge Zone, if you win a replay or rare role three games in a row, an additional 15 games will be added.

Here, we will explain the gameplay in Chance Mode.

When transitioning from the normal zone to chance mode, the game starts from the normal zone. In the normal zone, if a rare combination is won, a lottery to transition to notification mode is held based on that rare combination. In addition, if a replay combination or rare combination is won three games in a row, the game zone will transition from the normal zone to the challenge zone.

In the Challenge Zone, if a rare combination is won, a transition lottery to the notification mode is conducted based on the conversion combination, not the winning rare combination. In the role conversion lottery that determines the conversion combination, a combination with a higher probability of winning the transition lottery than the winning rare combination is selected. Therefore, transitioning to the Challenge Zone offers a higher probability of winning the transition lottery than winning a rare combination in the Standard Zone, providing an advantage to the player. Additionally, if a rare combination other than a weak cherry is won in the role conversion lottery, there is a possibility that a fixed combination will be selected. If a fixed combination is selected, the game transitions directly to the notification mode without going through the premonition mode. Since a decrease in medals is expected with each play in the premonition mode, the Challenge Zone can be considered a more advantageous game zone for players than the Standard Zone, given that the game can skip the premonition mode and transition to the notification mode. If 15 plays are played in the Challenge Zone without winning a replay combination or rare combination three times in a row, the Challenge Zone ends and the game returns to the Standard Zone. On the other hand, if you win a replay role or a rare role three times in a row in the challenge zone, the number of plays you can play in the challenge zone will increase by 15.

Even if you do not win the lottery to transition to notification mode, if the value of the mode game number counter in chance mode reaches 700, you will transition from chance mode to premonition mode, just as if you had won the lottery to transition to notification mode.

As described above, chance mode transitions to premonition mode when the transition lottery to notification mode is won or when the value of the mode game number counter reaches 700. If a fixed number is selected as the conversion role, the game transitions to notification mode. Here, if the stop switches 43 and 44 other than the left stop switch 42 are operated first in chance mode, and the push order bell is won in that game, the player will be at a disadvantage in the following respects. First, the value of the interval game number counter, which is related to the end condition of the advantageous zone, is updated, while the value of the mode game number counter, which is related to the transition to notification mode, is no longer updated. In addition, if the game zone at that time is the challenge zone, the value of the CZ game number counter is updated. Therefore, in chance mode, it is advantageous for the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first.

Next, we will explain the processing in the favorable zone precursor mode.

Figure 313 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the premonition mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S221001, it is determined whether or not a rare combination has been won, and if a rare combination has not been won, this process is terminated. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S221002, where it is determined whether or not the current play zone is a challenge zone. If the current play zone is a challenge zone, the process proceeds to step S221003, where the above-mentioned special combination determination process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S221004. If the current play zone is a normal zone, the process proceeds directly to step S221004.

In step S221004, it is determined whether the omission flag is set. If the omission flag is not set, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the omission flag is set, this means that a fixed number has been selected as the conversion role in the performance role determination process. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S221005, where a pre-addition lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to add to the number of plays available in the notification mode in advance. In the pre-addition lottery, the result is determined based on the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role is successful. In step S221006, it is determined whether or not the pre-addition lottery has been won. Incidentally, the probability of winning the pre-addition lottery is 5%, and the number of pre-addition games is determined to be 50 for 50% of that (i.e., 2.5%), and the number of pre-addition games is determined to be 100 for the remaining 50% (i.e., 2.5%). If the pre-addition lottery is not won, this process is terminated. If the player wins the lottery, proceed to step S221007, where the number of games played in the lottery determined by the lottery is set in the game count counter for the lottery, which is provided in the section information storage area 106d. Then, in step S221008, the game count flag is set, and this process ends.

The game section processing in premonition mode (see Figure 306) is the same as that in chance mode, except for the mode transition determination processing in step S220404 and the notification mode transition processing in step S220408.

In the mode transition determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 308, step S220601 determines whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first. If it is determined that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, proceed to step S220602 to determine whether the push order bell was selected. If the left stop switch 42 was operated first, or if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first without selecting the push order bell, step S220603 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S220604 determines whether the transition flag is set. In the premonition mode, since a transition lottery is not performed in the section lottery process, step S220604 determines that the transition flag is not set, and step S220610 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, this process terminates. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, proceed to step S220606 to determine whether the current game mode is chance mode. If it is premonition mode and not chance mode, transition to notification mode is performed in step S220611, and this process ends.

In the notification mode transition process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 312, in step S220901, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In step S220902, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S220903, the mode game number counter is set to 0. In step S220904, it is determined whether the value of the front-added game number counter is not 0. If the value of the front-added game number counter is not 0, this means that a fixed number has been selected as the conversion role in the section lottery process and the front-added lottery has been won. In such a case, proceed to step S220905, and add the value of the front-added game number counter to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, or if the value of the front-added game number counter is 0, in step S220906, freeze flag 2 is set and this process ends.

As described above, the premonition mode transitions to the notification mode when the mode game number counter value reaches 10 or when a confirmed number is selected as the conversion role. Here, if the stop switches 43 and 44 other than the left stop switch 42 are operated first in the premonition mode, and the push order bell has been won in that game, the player will be at a disadvantage in the following respects. First, the value of the interval game number counter, which is related to the end condition of the advantageous zone, is updated, while the value of the mode game number counter, which is related to the transition to the notification mode, is no longer updated. In addition, if the play zone at that time is the challenge zone, the value of the CZ game number counter is updated. Therefore, in the premonition mode, it is advantageous for the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first.

In this embodiment, as described above, if a rare combination is won in the challenge zone, the freeze A effect is performed. The freeze processing performed by the main control device 101 will be explained below based on the flowchart in Figure 314. Although not shown in the figures, the freeze processing is performed after the 4.1 second wait processing has ended and before the reel control processing begins, and is performed before the reels start spinning in response to the issuance of a start command (see Figure 11).

First, we will explain the freeze processing that is performed in a game in which a rare combination is won in the challenge zone. When a rare combination is won in the challenge zone, the freeze flag 0 is set in the special combination determination processing (step S220803, see Figure 310).

In step S221101, it is determined whether freeze flag 1 is set. If freeze flag 1 is not set, the process proceeds to step S221104, where it is determined whether freeze flag 2 is set. If freeze flag 2 is not set, the process proceeds to step S221106, where it is determined whether freeze flag 0 is set. If freeze flag 0 is set, freeze flag 0 is cleared in step S221107, and freeze flag 1 is set in step S221108, and this processing ends.

As described above, the freeze process that is performed in a game in which a rare combination is won in the challenge zone involves changing the set freeze flag 0 to freeze flag 1.

Next, we will explain the freeze process that takes place in the next game after a rare combination is won in the Challenge Zone.

In step S221101, it is determined whether freeze flag 1 is set. If freeze flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S221102, where it is determined whether freeze flag 2 is set. Freeze flag 2 is a flag that is set when there is a transition from chance mode or premonition mode to notification mode (see step S220906, FIG. 312). If freeze flag 2 is not set, i.e., there has not been a transition to notification mode, the process proceeds to step S221103, where freeze A processing is performed to start the freeze A effect.

In the freeze A processing, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 315, an A start command is sent to the display control device 81 in step S221201. Details will be described later, but upon receiving the A start command, the display control device 81 understands that control for executing the freeze A effect has begun on the main control device 101 side, and performs control to start the freeze A effect on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In step S221202, 10 seconds is set in the timer, and in step S221203, the timer is allowed to decrement. As a result, the timer value is periodically decremented in the timer decrement processing of the timer interrupt processing (step S108, see Figure 10). In step S221204, stop result conversion processing is performed.

To briefly explain the stop result conversion process, first, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spun in the reverse direction. Then, the conversion role stored in the first memory area of the conversion role memory area is referenced, and the stop symbol number corresponding to the conversion role is set. If the conversion role is a watermelon, a stop symbol number is set that results in a replay win of 8, i.e., the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stopping on the downward-sloping right line L4. If the conversion role is a chance, a stop symbol number is set that results in a replay win of 10, i.e., the "chance symbol B" stopping on the upward-sloping right line L5. If the conversion role is a strong cherry, a stop symbol number is set that results in a minor win of 29, i.e., the "cherry" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stopping on the upward-sloping right line L5. If the conversion role is a strong bell, a stop symbol number is set that results in a small win 3, i.e., the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stopping pseudo-stop on the center line L2. If the conversion role is a fixed combination, a stop symbol number is set that results in the "white 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stopping pseudo-stop on the center line L2. The pseudo-stop of the reels is performed by the stepping motor control process (step S107, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. The stepping motor control process determines whether the symbol number of the reel's arrival symbol is equal to the stop symbol number, and if so, performs a brake process to pseudo-stop the reels. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been pseudo-stopped, the stop result conversion process ends.

When the stop result conversion process has finished, proceed to step S221205 and perform conversion role shift process. In the conversion role shift process, the conversion role stored in the first memory area of the conversion role memory area is cleared, and the conversion role stored in the second memory area is shifted to the first memory area. In step S221206, the process waits until the timer value reaches 0, and when the timer value reaches 0, in step S221207, freeze flag 1 is cleared. In step S221208, an A end command is sent to the display control device 81 to let the main control device 101 know that control for executing the freeze A effect has finished. This process then ends.

Returning to the explanation of the freeze processing, when the freeze A processing of step S221103 is completed, the process proceeds to step S221104, where it is determined whether or not freeze flag 2 is set. Since the freeze A processing of step S221103 is performed when freeze flag 2 is not set, the process proceeds to step S221106, where it is determined whether or not freeze flag 0 is set. If freeze flag 0 is not set, the process simply ends. If freeze flag 0 is set, this means that a rare role has been won again in a game that performs the freeze A effect, so freeze flag 0 is cleared in step S221107, and freeze flag 1 is set in step S221108, whereupon the process ends.

If it is determined in step S221102 that Freeze Flag 2 is set, this means that a transition to notification mode has occurred, and more specifically, that the Freeze A effect will be executed in the first game of notification mode. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S221109, where it is determined whether the front-loading flag is set. If the front-loading flag is not set, i.e., if the front-loading lottery has not been won, the Freeze A processing described above is executed in step S221110, and Freeze B processing is executed in step S221111. Here, Freeze B processing is processing performed to execute the Freeze B effect, which notifies the transition to notification mode.

In the freeze B processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 316, a B start command is sent to the display control device 81 in step S221301. Although detailed explanations are omitted, upon receiving the B start command, the display control device 81 recognizes that control for executing the freeze B effect has begun on the main control device 101 side, and performs control to start a specified opening movie on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In step S221302, a timer is set to 5 seconds, and in step S221303, the timer is allowed to decrement. As a result, the timer value is periodically decremented in the timer decrement process of the timer interrupt process (step S108, see FIG. 10). In step S221304, the timer value waits until it reaches 0. If the timer value reaches 0, freeze flag 2 is cleared in step S221305. In step S221306, a B end command is sent to the display control device 81 to recognize that control for executing the freeze B effect has ended on the main control device 101 side. This process then ends.

Returning to the explanation of the freeze processing, when the freeze B processing in step S221111 is completed, the process proceeds to step S221104, where it is determined whether freeze flag 2 is set. As described above, in the freeze B processing, freeze flag 2 is cleared in step S221305. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S221106, where it is determined whether freeze flag 0 is set. If freeze flag 0 is not set, the process terminates.

If it is determined in step S221109 that the front-loading flag is set, this means that the front-loading lottery has been won. In such a case, the above-mentioned freeze B processing is performed in step S221112, and the above-mentioned freeze A processing is performed in step S221113. In other words, if the front-loading lottery is won, the order in which the freeze A and freeze B effects are executed is reversed compared to when the front-loading lottery is not won. In step S221114, the front-loading flag is cleared. In the following step S221104, it is determined whether freeze flag 2 is set. As described above, in freeze B processing, freeze flag 2 is cleared in step S221305. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S221106, where it is determined whether freeze flag 0 is set. If freeze flag 0 is not set, this process ends.

This embodiment is characterized by an indication effect that is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the system switches to indication mode (hereinafter, this indication effect will also be referred to as the "main indication effect"), and a freeze A indication that is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 after the main indication effect has started. Therefore, the processing related to the above-mentioned auxiliary effects performed by the display control device 81 will be explained below.

Figure 317 is a flowchart showing this sign confirmation process performed by the display control device 81. This sign confirmation process is initiated when an interval command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S221401, it is determined whether the information indicating the game mode included in the interval command indicates premonition mode. If it is not premonition mode, this processing is terminated. If it is premonition mode, proceed to step S221402, where it is determined whether the current game was a premonition mode transition game. Specifically, it is determined whether the game mode flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is a chance flag indicating chance mode. If the current game is not a premonition mode transition game, this processing is terminated. If the current game is a premonition mode transition game, proceed to step S221403, where the game mode flag stored in the RAM of the display control device 81 is changed to a premonition flag. In step S221404, the premonition game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. Then, in step S221405, a 10-game performance setting process is performed, and this processing is terminated. As described above, in premonition mode, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first and the game is played, it ends after 10 games unless it is converted to a fixed number. The 10G effect setting process determines the type and content of the teasing effect to be performed in the first part of the main premonition effect (games 1 to 7), and the content of the showdown effect to be performed in the second part of the main premonition effect (games 8 to 10), and stores the results of these decisions in the RAM of the display control device 81.

Figure 318 is a flowchart showing the premonition effect processing performed by the display control device 81. This premonition effect processing is initiated when a rotation start command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S221501, 1 is added to the value of the premonition game number counter, and in step S221502, it is determined whether the value of the premonition game number counter is less than 10. If the value of the premonition game number counter is less than 10, proceed to step S221503, and start an auxiliary effect according to the value of the premonition game number counter based on the determination result in the previous 10G effect setting process. Then, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S221502 that the value of the premonition game number counter is not less than 10, then in step S221504 it is determined whether the value of the premonition game number counter is 10. If the value of the premonition game number counter is 10, this means that this is the final game of this premonition effect. In this case, proceed to step S221505 to determine whether the current gaming zone is a challenge zone. If the current gaming zone is a challenge zone, proceed to step S221506 to determine whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has been won, proceed to step S221507 to determine whether the advance lottery has been won. The display control device 81 knows the current gaming zone from the interval command sent from the main control device 101, and knows whether the winning role and the advance lottery have been won from the lottery result command sent from the main control device 101.

If the current gaming zone is the normal zone, if a rare combination is not won in the challenge zone, or if a rare combination is won in the challenge zone and the player also wins the pre-bounce lottery, a victory effect is initiated in step S221508 and this processing ends. The victory effect involves a victory in the challenge effect that has been running since the 8th game, and a "WIN" display is displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. On the other hand, if a rare combination is won in the challenge zone but the player does not win the pre-bounce lottery, a defeat effect is initiated in step S221509 and this processing ends. The defeat effect involves a defeat in the challenge effect that has been running since the 8th game, and a "Sorry" display is displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

If it is determined in step S221504 that the value of the premonition game number counter is not 10, this means that the premonition mode has continued for 11 games or more. In such a case, the final screen of the victory effect (displaying "WIN") continues to be displayed in step S221510, and "Preparing" is additionally displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S221511, and this processing ends.

Figure 319 is a flowchart showing the stop command processing performed by the display control device 81. When a stop command is issued in response to the operation of a stop switch 42-44, the main control device 101 in this embodiment transmits a stop command to the display control device 81 indicating whether the current stop command is a first stop command, a second stop command, or a third stop command, and which stop switch was operated.

In step S221601, it is determined whether a stop command has been received, and if a stop command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If a stop command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S221602, where it is determined whether a first stop command has been issued. If a first stop command has been issued, the processing proceeds to step S221603, where it is determined whether the operated stop switch is the left stop switch 42. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated and the first stop command has been issued, step S221604 performs a performance progression process to progress the auxiliary performance content, and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S221603 that the stop switch operated is not the left stop switch 42, i.e., if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated and the first stop command is generated, proceed to step S221605 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, proceed to step S221606 to determine whether the current game mode is not the notification mode. If it is determined that the current game mode is not the notification mode, i.e., if the game is in the normal mode or if the current game mode is the chance mode or the premonition mode, then screen blackout processing is performed in step S221607. In the screen blackout processing, layers above the layers displaying the auxiliary effects and the number of remaining games are displayed in gray, thereby reducing the visibility of information such as the content of the auxiliary effects and the number of remaining games. Note that the screen blackout processing may also be configured to reduce the visibility of information such as the content of the auxiliary effects and the number of remaining games by reducing the brightness of the layers displaying the auxiliary effects and the number of remaining games. If the screen is blacked out, step S221604 performs effect progression processing to advance the auxiliary effect content, and then this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S221605 that the push order bell has not been won, or if it is determined in step S221606 that the current game mode is the notification mode, even if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated and the first stop command is issued, the screen will not be darkened, and instead the performance progression process will be performed in step S221604 to progress the auxiliary performance content, and this process will end.

The above stop command processing is not limited to when this premonition effect is being performed, i.e., when in premonition mode, but is also performed in the normal zone and challenge zone of chance mode, etc.

As described above, when transitioning from chance mode to premonition mode, the content of the main premonition effect to be performed by the 10th game in the premonition mode transition game is determined. Then, in the main premonition effect, a victory effect is performed in the 10th game to announce the transition to the notification mode. If the left stop switch 42 is operated first in each game in premonition mode, or if the push order bell is not won in the game in which a switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first in premonition mode, the premonition mode will end in the 10th game. Therefore, in such cases, the execution timing of the victory effect and the end timing of the premonition mode will coincide. On the other hand, if the push order bell is won in the game in which a switch other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first in premonition mode, the premonition mode will end in the 11th game or later. In such cases, the victory effect will be performed in the 10th game, and the final screen of the victory effect and the message "Preparing" will continue to be displayed until the game in which premonition mode ends.

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, the display control device 81 may perform processing to execute a premonition effect when the mode has not yet transitioned to premonition mode, i.e., when the transition to notification mode has not been confirmed. Such a premonition effect (hereinafter also referred to as a "fake premonition effect") is initiated with a predetermined probability when a rare combination is won but the transition lottery is not won, and if the transition lottery is not won by the 10th game, the defeat effect is executed in the 10th game and the effect ends.

Figure 320 is a flowchart showing the freeze A effect processing performed by the display control device 81 in the premonition mode. The freeze A effect processing is initiated when an A start command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S221701, it is determined whether or not an A start command has been received, and if an A start command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If an A start command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S221702, where it is determined whether or not the advance lottery has been won. If the advance lottery has not been won, the processing proceeds to step S221703, where it is determined whether or not the value of the premonition game number counter is less than 10. If the value of the premonition game number counter is less than 10, the processing proceeds to step S221704, where the freeze A effect is started and "!!!" is finally displayed, and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S221703 that the value of the premonition game number counter is not less than 10, it is determined in step S221705 whether the value of the premonition game number counter is 10. As explained in the premonition effect, this premonition effect is initiated when a spin start command is received. The freeze A effect process is initiated when an A start command is received, and when executing the freeze A effect, the main control device 101 sends the A start command followed by the spin start command. In other words, when the freeze A effect process is executed, the value of the premonition game number counter has not been updated, and if the value of the premonition game number counter is 10, this means that this is the 11th game of the premonition effect. If this is the 11th game of the premonition effect, a reversal effect is initiated in step S221706, and this process ends. In the reversal effect, an effect is performed in which the main character who lost the showdown effect makes a comeback victory, and "WIN" is displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

If it is determined in step S221705 that the value of the premonition game number counter is not 10, this means that the premonition mode has continued for 12 games or more. In such a case, irregular display is initiated in step S221707, and this processing ends. In irregular display, the auxiliary display unit 65 does not perform auxiliary effects such as those in steps S221704 and S221706 above, and instead displays the text "An irregular reel effect is occurring" on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If it is determined in step S221702 that the player has won the advance lottery, the process proceeds to step S221708, where the freeze A effect is initiated and the final number of advance games is displayed, and the process ends.

Although not shown in the diagram, the freeze A effect processing performed in chance mode involves starting the freeze A effect and displaying the final "!!!" when an A start command is received.

Figure 321 shows the type and order of freeze effects that will be executed when a rare combination is changed during the execution of this premonition effect, and the notification content of the freeze A effect. Note that, below, operating the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 first in a push order bell winning game is referred to as a penalty operation. This is because if such an operation is performed, the mode game number counter will no longer be updated on the main control device 101 side.

If a rare combination is won when the premonition game count counter is between 0 and 9, the freeze effect will be executed in the next game after the rare combination is won.

For example, if a rare combination is won in the fourth game of this premonition effect, and is converted into a combination other than the confirmed combination in the combination determination process, a freeze A effect in which "!!!" is displayed as the final symbol will be executed in the fifth game of this premonition effect. If no penalty operation is performed after this premonition effect has started, a victory effect will be executed in the tenth game of this premonition effect, and the game will transition to notification mode from the eleventh game.

For example, if a rare combination is won in the fourth game of this premonition effect and is converted to a confirmed combination in the performance combination determination process, the notification mode transition process will be performed in the fourth game, and the game will transition to notification mode from the fifth game. In such a case, if the player does not win the pre-addition lottery, a freeze A effect will be executed in the fifth game (the first game in notification mode), with the final display of "!!!", followed by a freeze B effect in which a specified opening movie is displayed. On the other hand, if the pre-addition lottery is won, a freeze B effect will be executed in the fifth game (the first game in notification mode), with the final display of the number of pre-addition games, followed by a freeze A effect in which a specified opening movie is displayed. In these cases, after the freeze effect ends, the notification stage corresponding to the notification mode will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the premonition effect will be omitted from the fifth game onwards.

If you win a rare role when the premonition game counter is at 10, the freeze effect will be executed on the 11th game.

If no penalty operation is performed after the start of this premonition effect, the game will transition to notification mode from the 11th game. If the combination is converted to a role other than the confirmed number during the performance role determination process, or if the combination is converted to a confirmed number but does not win the advance lottery, a defeat effect will be displayed in the 10th game of this premonition effect. Then, in the 11th game (the first game in notification mode), a reversal effect will be displayed in the Freeze A effect, followed by a Freeze B effect in which a specified opening movie is displayed. On the other hand, if the combination is converted to a confirmed number and the advance lottery is won, a victory effect will be displayed instead of a defeat effect in the 10th game of this premonition effect. Then, in the 11th game (the first game in notification mode), a Freeze B effect in which a specified opening movie is displayed will be displayed, followed by a Freeze A effect in which the final number of advance games is displayed.

If a penalty operation is performed after the start of this premonition effect, and the rare combination won in the 10th game does not convert to a fixed combination, the 11th game will remain in premonition mode. In such a case, a defeat effect is displayed in the 10th game of this premonition effect, and a reversal effect is displayed in the Freeze A effect in the 11th game. Because the game has not transitioned to notification mode, the Freeze B effect is not displayed. When the Freeze A effect ends in the 11th game, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "WIN" and "Preparing." If the rare combination won in the 10th game converts to a fixed combination, the game will transition to notification mode from the 11th game. In such a case, a defeat effect is displayed in the 10th game of this premonition effect. Then, in the 11th game (the first game in notification mode), a reversal effect is displayed in the Freeze A effect, followed by a Freeze B effect in which a specified opening movie is displayed. If the rare combination won in the 10th game converts to a fixed combination and wins the advance lottery, a victory effect is displayed instead of a defeat effect in the 10th game of this premonition effect. Then, in the 11th game (the first game in notification mode), a freeze B effect is executed in which a specified opening movie is displayed, followed by a freeze A effect in which the number of games played to date is finally displayed.

If a rare combination is won when the value of the premonition game number counter is 11 or more, the freeze effect will be executed in the game following the rare combination. In such a case, a victory effect will be executed in the 10th game of this premonition effect, and from the 11th game onwards, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display the words "WIN" and "Preparing."

For example, if a rare combination is won in the 14th game of this premonition effect and is converted into a combination other than a confirmed combination in the combination determination process, a freeze A effect will be executed in the 15th game of this premonition effect, displaying the message "An irregular reel combination has occurred." When the freeze A effect ends in the 15th game, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display the words "WIN" and "Preparing." After that, the game will transition to notification mode from the next game when the mode game number counter reaches the value of 10, and a freeze B effect will be executed in which a specified opening movie will be displayed in the first game of notification mode.

For example, if a rare combination is won in the 14th game of this premonition effect and is converted to a confirmed combination in the effect combination determination process, the notification mode transition process will be performed in the 14th game, and the game will transition to notification mode from the 15th game. In such a case, if the player does not win the pre-add lottery, a freeze A effect will be executed in the 15th game (the first game in notification mode), displaying the text "An irregular reel effect has occurred," followed by a freeze B effect in which a specified opening movie is displayed. On the other hand, if the pre-add lottery is won, a freeze B effect will be executed in the 15th game (the first game in notification mode), displaying a specified opening movie, followed by a freeze A effect in which the final number of pre-add games is displayed.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 322 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S221801, it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, proceed to step S221802, where it is determined whether or not a rare role has been won. If a rare role has been won, proceed to step S221803, where an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won. In the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if the first watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1 in 8 chance of winning either 10, 30, or 50 additional games. In step S221804, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the additional flag is set in step S221805, and an additional command is sent in step S221806. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the add-on lottery and the number of add-on games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S221807, a value corresponding to the result of the add-on lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This processing then ends. If the add-on lottery is not won, this processing ends without setting the add-on flag. If a rare combination is not won, this processing ends without performing the add-on lottery.

If it is determined in step S221801 that the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S221808, where a navigation determination process is performed to determine whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. The navigation determination process determines whether or not to perform navigation based on the set game mode flag, the set winning flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the winning combination has been achieved. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 323, if any of the following has been won: left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, and if notification mode A is used, it is determined that navigation will be performed 33% of the time. More specifically, there are 1,980 random number values that result in a win for each of the above roles (see FIG. 299 ). Therefore, 660 random number values are set as random number values that are determined to be navigational, and the remaining 1,320 random number values are set as random number values that are determined not to be navigational. If the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, or fourth special bell is won, navigation is determined to be 100% likely in notification mode A. In step S221809, it is determined whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. If navigation is to be performed, the navigation flag is set in step S221810, and the process ends. If navigation is not to be performed, the prediction flag is set in step S221811, and a prediction command is sent in step S221812, and the process ends. Here, the prediction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the user that navigation will not be performed for the operation sequence that will result in a bell win.

As described above, in notification mode A, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in the bell winning may or may not be navigated. Therefore, the following describes the processing performed by the main control unit 101 and display control unit 81 when actually navigating the operation sequence.

The main control device 101 performs processing to display on the instruction monitor the operation sequence that can result in a bell win during the rotation start processing (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display processing (see FIG. 19). In the first embodiment, the instruction monitor was displayed after determining whether or not the push order bell was won (S603, S802). However, in this embodiment, the instruction monitor is displayed after determining whether or not the navigation flag is set, rather than whether or not the push order bell was won, and the instruction monitor is displayed if the navigation flag is set.

Figure 324 is a flowchart showing the winning role information creation process. The winning role information creation process is a process for creating winning role information that indicates the result of the role judgment from the various information that makes up the lottery result command. The winning role information creation process is performed after the section lottery process is completed and before the lottery result command is sent (see Figure 12).

In step S221901, it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the winning role number is set as winning role information in step S221902, and this process ends. If the push order bell has been won, proceed to step S221903, and it is determined whether the navigation flag has been set. If the navigation flag has been set, this means that the current game mode is the notification mode, and it has been decided to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. In this case, the winning role number is set as winning role information in step S221902, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the navigation flag is not set, this means that the current game mode is normal or chance mode, or that the current game mode is notification mode but a decision has been made not to navigate the operation sequence that can result in a bell win. In such cases, step S221904 sets a group number as winning role information, and this processing ends. Specifically, if any of the following is won: left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, group number "1" is set as winning role information. If any of the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, or fourth special bell is won, group number "2" is set as winning role information. When a group number is set, the winning role number is not set as winning role information. Therefore, when the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command including a group number, it can determine that one of the push order bells corresponding to the group number has been selected, but it cannot determine which push order bell has been selected. Note that hereinafter, left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, and right-left-center bell 2 are collectively referred to as "push order group 1." Additionally, the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell are collectively referred to as "push order group 2."

Figure 325 is a flowchart showing the operation navigation process performed by the display control device 81. The operation navigation process is initiated when a lottery result command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S222001, it is determined whether a winning role number has been received. If a winning role number has been received, in step S222002 it is determined whether the winning role is a push order bell, and if it is not a push order bell, this process ends. If a winning role number indicating that the winning role is a push order bell has been received, this means that the main control unit 101 has decided to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. In such a case, in step S222003, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S222001 that a winning combination number has not been received, this means that a group number has been received. In this case, the process proceeds to step S222004, where it is determined whether a prediction command has been received. If a prediction command has not been received, this means that the current play area is the normal area or chance mode, and the process simply ends. If a prediction command has been received, the process displays "???" on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S222005, and the process ends. By displaying "???" on the auxiliary display unit 65, it is possible to notify the player that the push order bell has been won, although it does not guide the player to the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of "???" functions as a promotion suggestion that will increase the navigation rate in subsequent games.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in a game session in which a simulated game is played, the above operation sequence and "???" will be displayed when the simulated game ends and the actual game begins.

Figure 326 is a flowchart showing the promotion determination process performed by the main control device 101. The promotion determination process is performed after the reel control process (S212, see Figure 11) has ended, i.e., after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

In step S222101, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated. If the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined whether the navigation flag is set in step S222102. If the navigation flag is set, it is cleared in step S222103 and then the processing proceeds to step S222104; if the navigation flag is not set, the processing proceeds to step S222104. In step S222104, it is determined whether the prediction flag is set, and if the prediction flag is not set, the processing is terminated.

If the prediction flag is set, the prediction flag is cleared in step S222105, and a determination is made in step S222106 as to whether a bell win has occurred. If a bell win has not occurred, this process ends. If a bell win has occurred, a promotion lottery is held in step S222107 to determine whether or not to increase the navigation rate. The promotion lottery is held based on the set game mode flag, the set win flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role was successful. In step S222108, a determination is made as to whether or not the promotion lottery has been won. If the promotion lottery has been won, this process ends. If the promotion lottery has been won, proceed to step S222109, where a determination is made as to whether or not the set game mode flag is notification flag A. If notification flag A is set, proceed to step S222110, where the game mode flag stored in section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag B.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag B, in subsequent game plays, as shown in Figure 323, if push order group 1 is selected, it will be determined that navigation will occur with a probability of 66%, and if push order group 2 is selected, it will be determined that navigation will occur with a probability of 100%.

If it is determined in step S222109 that notification flag A is not set, proceed to step S222111, and change the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d to notification flag C.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag C, in subsequent game plays, if the push order bell is selected, navigation will be determined to occur 100% of the time, as shown in Figure 323.

If the game mode flag is changed in step S222110 or step S222111, a promotion command is sent in step S222112, and this processing ends. Here, the promotion command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the promotion lottery. When the display control device 81 receives a promotion command, it executes an effect suggesting that they have won the promotion lottery. In this embodiment, in notification mode A, a daytime image is displayed as the background image, in notification mode B, an evening image is displayed as the background image, and in notification mode C, a nighttime image is displayed as the background image. When the display control device 81 receives a promotion command, it executes processing to switch to the background image corresponding to the notification mode for the next game onwards.

Figure 327 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S222201, the above-mentioned termination determination process is performed, and in step S222202, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S222201, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S222208.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S222203 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S222204 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, step S222208 sends an interval command and then terminates this processing.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous zone end processing shown in steps S222205 to S222207 is performed, and an zone command is sent in step S222208, terminating this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S222205, and the zone display 66 is turned OFF in step S222206. In step S222207, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game number counter value, etc.).

Here, we will explain the gameplay of the notification mode.

The notification mode starts from notification mode A. In notification mode A, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 33% probability is announced for push order group 1, and the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability is announced for push order group 2 (see Figure 323). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in notification mode A is approximately 4.4 medals, and in notification mode A, an increase of approximately 1.4 medals can be expected for each game played.

If the push order bell is won in notification mode A but the operation order is not announced, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display "???" to notify that the push order bell has been won (hereinafter referred to as the "promotion effect"). If a bell win is achieved in that play, a promotion lottery will be held. Then, if the promotion lottery is won, the system will transition from notification mode A to notification mode B (see Figure 326).

In notification mode B, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 66% probability will be announced for push order group 1, and the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability will be announced for push order group 2 (see Figure 323). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in notification mode B is approximately 5.1 medals, and in notification mode B, you can expect to receive an increase of approximately 2.1 medals per game.

If the push order bell is won in notification mode B but the operation order is not announced, a promotion effect will be performed in the same way as in notification mode A. If a bell win is achieved in that play, a promotion lottery will be held. If the promotion lottery is won, the game will transition from notification mode B to notification mode C (see Figure 326).

In Notification Mode C, if you win the push order bell, you will be notified of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability (see Figure 323). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in Notification Mode C is approximately 5.8 medals, and in Notification Mode C, you can expect to receive an increase of approximately 2.8 medals per game.

As mentioned above, in notification mode, the expected number of medals paid out per game changes depending on whether the player is in notification mode A, B, or C. For this reason, players hoping to win more medals should aim to win rare combinations to increase the number of games played when switching to notification mode, while also achieving a bell win in a game with a promotion effect.

Here, the probability of winning Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Middle-Left-Right Bell 1, Middle-Left-Right Bell 2, Middle-Right-Left Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Centre-Left Bell 1, Right-Centre ... which form Push Order Group 1, is approximately 1 in 33. The probability of winning the First Special Bell, Second Special Bell, Third Special Bell, and Fourth Special Bell, which form Push Order Group 2, is approximately 1 in 16.

When the operation order of stop switches 42 to 44 is used as a reference, the probability of achieving a bell win based on the push order bell win is as follows. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center-right operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are left-center-right bell 1 and left-center-right bell 2, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 17. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are left-center-right bell 1 and left-center-right bell 2, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 17. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the center-left-right operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, and the first special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the center-right-left operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, and the second special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the right-left-center operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, and the third special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the right-center-left operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, and the fourth special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1.

As described above, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of left-center-right or left-center-center, i.e., if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the probability of winning a bell is lower than if the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first.

For this reason, in games where a promotion effect is performed, it is possible that the probability of achieving a bell win may be higher if the center stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, as shown in Figure 299, in push order group 1, the same point value PV is set for each of the six operation sequences, so the probability of winning is equal for each operation sequence. The reason for the lower probability of winning the push order bell, which can achieve a bell win with the left-center-right or left-center operation sequences, is due to push order group 2, which can achieve a bell win with other operation sequences. Furthermore, in notification mode A and notification mode B, if push order group 2 is selected, the operation sequence that has a 100% chance of achieving a bell win is announced. Therefore, in games where a promotion effect is performed, the probability of achieving a bell win is equal regardless of the operation sequence in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a rare combination is won in the Challenge Zone, a Freeze A effect will be performed at the start of the next game, converting the winning combination into a stop result with a higher probability of winning the transition lottery than the winning rare combination. This configuration allows players to play while hoping to transition from the Normal Zone to the Challenge Zone in Chance Mode or win a rare combination in the Challenge Zone, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the game in which a rare combination is won and the game in which the Freeze A effect is performed are configured differently, an event may occur in which the game in which the rare combination is won and the game in which the Freeze A effect is performed are different game modes, such as when a rare combination is won in the final game of the premonition mode. Here, it is also possible to configure the game in which the Freeze A effect is performed not to be performed if the game in which the Freeze A effect is performed is in the notification mode. However, with this configuration, if a player is aware that they have won a rare combination in the challenge zone, they will play in the notification mode with lingering resentment over the fact that the Freeze A effect was not performed, and this may prevent the player from enjoying playing in the notification mode.

In this embodiment, the Freeze A effect is therefore configured to be displayed even when the game in which it is displayed is in notification mode. This configuration reduces the chances of players feeling uneasy, and increases their interest in the game.

The Freeze A effect is configured to be performed in the game following a rare combination. This configuration makes it possible to perform the Freeze A effect in the first game of the notification mode if a rare combination is won in the final game of the premonition mode. As a result, players can enjoy playing in the notification mode.

When performing the Freeze A effect, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display different auxiliary effects depending on whether it is the first game in the notification mode or not. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the Freeze A effect and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The main control device 101 is configured to perform a process that simulates stopping each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at a predetermined stop number during the Freeze A effect. This configuration makes it possible to execute the Freeze A effect using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in addition to the auxiliary display unit 65, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The main control device 101 is configured to wait until 10 seconds have passed during the Freeze A effect. This configuration ensures that 10 seconds are available for executing the Freeze A effect, preventing it from being omitted midway. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that a carefully prepared Freeze A effect will be wasted. For example, the Freeze A effect can be configured so that normal game progress processing, such as rotation start processing and stop control processing, is performed on the main control device 101, and a specified auxiliary effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, with this configuration, there is a possibility that a player may issue a stop command without visually recognizing the Freeze A effect, resulting in an instruction to start the next game being issued in the middle of the Freeze A effect.

The main control device 101 is configured to perform the same freeze A processing regardless of the current game mode, etc. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the freeze A effects while suppressing the increase in the amount of data required to execute the freeze A effects, which are pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101.

When a rare combination is won in chance mode, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode. In this configuration, if a rare combination is won in the final game of premonition mode and a freeze A effect is performed in the first game of notification mode, the player may expect to receive a bonus, such as an additional game in notification mode. This is particularly evident in a configuration in which the auxiliary display unit 65 executes this premonition effect when transitioning to premonition mode and a victory effect is displayed in the 10th game of this premonition effect to notify the transition to notification mode. This is because the player may associate the rare combination won in the final game of premonition mode with the victory effect, and associate the freeze A effect with notification mode. However, if the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display different auxiliary effects depending on whether the freeze A effect is being displayed in the first game of notification mode or not, the above concerns can be resolved.

When a rare combination is won in premonition mode, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of games available in notification mode. In this configuration, it is desirable to notify the player that the lottery for adding a rare combination has been won in the game after the transition to notification mode, or in the game after the transition to notification mode has been notified. This is because if the notification is made when the player is not aware that the premonition mode is in effect (that the premonition effect being performed is a real premonition effect, not a false premonition effect), the player may be confused. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lottery for adding a rare combination is held only when the combination is converted to a fixed combination, and when the combination is converted to a fixed combination, the next game will transition to notification mode. With this configuration, when the combination is converted to a fixed combination, it is possible to perform a freeze A effect in the first game in notification mode, and it is possible to notify the number of games added in the freeze A effect, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

In the auxiliary display unit 65, if the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 10 during this premonition effect, a victory effect will be displayed if the player wins a rare combination in the challenge zone and also wins the premonition lottery. The number of premonition games will then be announced in the freeze A effect of the next game. This configuration makes it possible to announce the number of premonition games in the freeze A effect after announcing a transition to the announcement mode through the victory effect, thereby diversifying the freeze A effect and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the auxiliary display unit 65, if the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 10 during this premonition effect, a defeat effect is displayed if the player wins a rare combination in the challenge zone but does not win the premonition lottery. Then, a reversal effect is displayed in the freeze A effect of the next game to notify the player of the transition to the notification mode. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the freeze A effect while avoiding misunderstandings by the player. For example, in the above situation, it is possible to display a victory effect instead of a defeat effect, and display the same "!!!" as before in the freeze A effect of the next game. However, with this configuration, it is possible that the player may mistakenly believe that a special benefit other than the transition to the notification mode will be awarded due to the "!!!" display after the victory effect.

Furthermore, for example, in the above situation, it is possible to display a victory effect instead of a defeat effect, and notify the player that the number of games before the bonus is zero in the freeze A effect of the next game. However, if such a configuration is used, there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed that the number of games before the bonus is zero, even though the game has already transitioned to the bonus mode. On the other hand, if a defeat effect is displayed in the above situation and a reversal effect is displayed in the freeze A effect of the next game, it is possible to dramatically increase the joy of transitioning to the bonus mode. This is because it is possible to make the player worry that the game will not transition to the bonus mode due to the defeat effect, and then notify the player of the transition to the bonus mode with a reversal effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

When the Freeze A effect is performed when the value of the premonition game number counter is greater than 10, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display an irregular display if the player has not won the premonition lottery. The value of the premonition game number counter is greater than 10 because the player has performed a penalty operation in premonition mode. This configuration makes it possible to display or not display an irregular display depending on whether or not the player has performed a penalty operation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The irregular display is configured to display the text "An irregular reel effect is occurring." This configuration makes it clear that this is unrelated to the awarding of a bonus, preventing players from getting too excited about the awarding of a bonus, and encouraging players to refrain from performing penalty operations.

More specifically, the game mode when the irregular display is displayed is the premonition mode. In the premonition mode, if a rare combination is won under the challenge zone, there is a chance of winning the premonition lottery. The probability of winning the premonition lottery is 5% when the combination is converted to a fixed combination. The probability of conversion to a fixed combination is 0% for a weak cherry win, 1% for a watermelon win, 5% for a chance win, 20% for a strong cherry win, and 100% for a strong bell win. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of conversion to a stop combination other than a fixed combination is higher in the freeze A effect, and the opportunity for the freeze A effect to be displayed when the premonition lottery has been won is extremely rare. Here, if the configuration were to display "!!!" instead of the irregular display, the expectation of winning the premonition lottery when the freeze A effect is executed would be lower, and it is possible that players would lose interest in the freeze A effect. On the other hand, if an irregular display is used, it is possible to draw the player's attention not to the fact that they did not win the advance lottery, but to the penalty operations they have performed in the past. As a result, it is possible to encourage players not to perform penalty operations without reducing the interest in the Freeze A effect.

Even if a penalty operation is performed, the irregular display will not be displayed until the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 11 or more. This is because there is a possibility that the premonition effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is a false premonition effect, and it is therefore possible to associate the "!!!" display with the expectation that a winning effect will be displayed.

When the freeze A effect is performed when the premonition game count counter value is less than 10, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display "!!!" if the player has not won the premonition lottery. This configuration makes it possible for the auxiliary display unit 65 to execute different auxiliary effects when the freeze A effect is performed when the premonition game count counter value is less than 10 and when the freeze A effect is performed when the premonition game count counter value is greater than 10, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When the main control device 101 transitions to premonition mode, it sets the transition game number counter to 10, and the display control device 81 is configured to start the premonition effect from the first game in premonition mode and to display the victory effect in the 10th game of the premonition effect. With this configuration, if the player does not perform a penalty operation, the victory effect is executed in the game where premonition mode ends, and the next game can be transitioned to notification mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the left stop switch 42 is not operated first in a push order bell winning game, the screen is configured to go dark. This configuration allows the player to see the content of the auxiliary effects, and the reduced visibility of the effects encourages the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first in the next game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, which uses irregular displays, the player can associate the irregular display with the fact that the screen has gone dark. In other words, the player can understand the cause of the irregular display, making it possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player even when an irregular display is displayed.

During the first game in notification mode, a freeze B effect is performed, in which a specified opening movie is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that they have entered notification mode, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

If the final game in the premonition mode is in the challenge zone and a rare combination is won, both the freeze A effect and the freeze B effect are executed in the first game of the notification mode. This configuration makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game while suppressing the increase in the amount of data pre-stored in the main control unit 101. It is certainly possible to configure one of the freeze effects not to be executed when a freeze A effect is executed in the first game of the notification mode. One such configuration would be to not execute the freeze A effect if the player does not win the pre-addition lottery. However, this configuration requires additional processing to determine whether or not to execute the freeze A effect, which raises concerns about the increase in the amount of data pre-stored in the main control unit 101. Furthermore, the result of implementing this processing is a loss of opportunity to execute the carefully prepared freeze A effect, and the increase in the amount of data pre-stored in the main control unit 101 does not lead to increased player interest.

When performing a freeze A effect and a freeze B effect in the first game in notification mode, if the player has not won the pre-add lottery, the freeze A effect is performed after the freeze B effect. This configuration makes it possible to first perform the freeze A effect, which is based on the result of a game that has not yet transitioned to notification mode, and then perform the freeze B effect, which is based on the transition to notification mode. This increases the player's interest in the game. For example, it is possible to perform a freeze A effect after a freeze B effect, with the freeze A effect displaying the same "!!!" as before. However, this configuration could lead the player to mistakenly believe that an additional bonus or other benefit will be awarded in notification mode due to the "!!!" display after the freeze B effect.

When performing the Freeze A and Freeze B effects in the first game of notification mode, if the player wins the pre-add lottery, the Freeze B effect will be performed first, followed by the Freeze A effect. This configuration makes it possible to determine the execution order of the Freeze A and Freeze B effects depending on whether the player wins the pre-add lottery, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When a freeze B effect is performed in the first game of notification mode, followed by a freeze A effect, the number of games to be played is announced in the freeze A effect. This configuration makes it possible to announce the number of games to be played in the freeze A effect after announcing the transition to notification mode with the freeze B effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When a Freeze B effect is performed after a Freeze A effect in the first game of the notification mode, if the value of the premonition game number counter is between 0 and 9, a "!!!" is displayed in the Freeze A effect. This occurs when a number is converted to a fixed number during the premonition effect but the number does not win the pre-bill lottery. In such a case, the number is converted to a fixed number in the Freeze A effect, a "!!!" is displayed, and the Freeze B effect then begins. No winning effect is performed in the premonition effect. This makes it possible to associate the "!!!" display with the transition to the notification mode, and prevents the player from expecting to win the pre-bill lottery even if a "!!!" is displayed in the first game of the notification mode.

When a Freeze B effect is performed after a Freeze A effect in the first game of the notification mode, if the value of the premonition game number counter is 10, a reversal effect is performed in the Freeze A effect. In this configuration, a defeat effect is performed in the final game of this premonition effect, a reversal effect is performed in the Freeze A effect in the first game of the notification mode, and then a specified opening movie is played in the Freeze B effect. Therefore, the Freeze A effect performed in the first game of the notification mode can be incorporated into a series of auxiliary effects leading from the premonition effect to the Freeze B effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

As described above, when a Freeze B effect is performed after a Freeze A effect in the first game of the notification mode, by configuring the Freeze A effect to perform an auxiliary effect unrelated to the advance lottery, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment for not winning the advance lottery despite having gone to the trouble of switching to notification mode.

(23rd embodiment)

This embodiment is equipped with a complete function that stops when the number of medals added from the lowest number of medals obtained after the power is turned on (hereafter referred to as "MY") reaches 19,000, using the lowest number of medals added from the lowest number of medals obtained after the game results are obtained after the power is turned on. Therefore, the configuration that realizes the complete function will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment above, so only the differences will be explained below.

In this slot machine 10, the various processes performed by the main control device 101 are divided into game control processes and non-game control processes. Details will be described later, but some processes that cumulatively store game results, such as MY in the complete function, are considered non-game control processes, and all processes other than the non-game control processes are considered game control processes. Game control processes include lottery processes (see Figure 12) and reel control processes (see Figure 15) that are activated when a start command is issued.

Figure 328 shows the relationship between addresses and stored contents in ROM 105.

In accordance with the distinction between game control and non-game control processes performed by the main control device 101, ROM 105 clearly distinguishes between addresses where programs and data for game control processes are stored and addresses where programs and data for non-game control processes are stored. Specifically, game control programs are collectively stored in each area of consecutive addresses X(1) through X(k+2), and game control data is collectively stored in each area of consecutive addresses X(k+6) through X(m+2). Between the area where game control programs are stored and the area where game control data is stored, there is provided an unused area of 3 bytes, addresses X(k+3) through X(k+5). Non-game control programs are collectively stored in each area of consecutive addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2), and non-game control data is collectively stored in each area of consecutive addresses X(n+6) to X(p+2). Between the area storing non-game control programs and the area storing non-game control data, there is a 3-byte unused area of addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5). Furthermore, between the area storing game control data and the area storing non-game control programs, there is a 3-byte unused area of addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5). The relationships between the addresses, programs, and data described above are established in both physical addresses in the CPU 102 and logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the CPU 102.

Figure 329 shows the relationship between RAM 106 addresses and temporary storage contents.

In accordance with the distinction between game control and non-game control processes performed by the main control device 101, RAM 106 clearly distinguishes between addresses where work areas and stack areas for game control are set and addresses where work areas and stack areas for non-game control are set. Specifically, the consecutive addresses Y(1) through Y(r+2) are designated as work areas 106iw for game control, and the consecutive addresses Y(r+6) through Y(s+2) are designated as stack areas 106is for game control. Between the area where the game control work area 106iw is set and the area where the game control stack area 106is is set, there is an unused area of 3 bytes, addresses Y(r+3) through Y(r+5). Each area of consecutive addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) is designated as a non-game control work area 106ew, and each area of consecutive addresses Y(t+6) to Y(u+2) is designated as a non-game control stack area 106es. Between the area where the non-game control work area 106ew is set and the area where the non-game control stack area 106es is set, there is a 3-byte unused area of addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5). Furthermore, between the area where the game control stack area 106is is set and the area where the non-game control work area 106ew is set, there is a 3-byte unused area of addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5). The relationship between the addresses, work areas, and stack areas is set both in terms of physical addresses in the CPU 102 and logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the CPU 102.

In the following, focusing on the fact that ROM 105 distinguishes between areas where game control programs and data are stored and areas where non-game control programs and data are stored, game control processing will also be referred to as in-area processing, and non-game control processing will also be referred to as out-area processing. Furthermore, non-game control processing will be clearly stated as non-game control processing or out-area processing, and processing that is not clearly stated will be referred to as game control processing (in-area processing).

Figure 330 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The programs and data for performing normal processing are stored in ROM 105 as programs and data for game control, and during normal processing, various processes described below are performed using the work area iw and stack area is for game control.

In step S230101, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In pre-start processing, processing is performed to wait until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, game management processing shown in steps S230102 to S230119 is performed.

As part of the game management process, in step S230102, the in-game information stored in RAM 106 is cleared. In-game information includes, in the previous game, the win flags (excluding the BB win flag) stored in the win flag storage area 106a (see Figure 9) of RAM 106, the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b (see Figure 9), information indicating the number of bets, etc. The area for storing in-game information such as the win flag storage area 106a is provided in the work area 106iw for game control in RAM 106. If the in-game information has been cleared, the process proceeds to step S230103, where the next timer interrupt is permitted. In step S230104, start wait processing is performed.

When the start waiting process has ended, step S230105 determines whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S230104. If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the process returns to step S230106 to determine whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S230104 to wait for the start.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, as the system is configured so that play can begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In this case, active line setting processing is performed in step S230107, and the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state in step S230108 to prohibit bet acceptance. Subsequently, lottery processing is performed in step S230109, rotation initialization processing is performed in step S230110, 4.1 second wait processing is performed in step S230111, reel control processing is performed in step S230112, medal payout processing is performed in step S230113, and play section processing is performed in step S230114. Note that the active line setting processing in step S230107 through the play section processing in step S230114 are the same as in the first embodiment, so detailed explanations are omitted.

In step S230115, the value of the PSW register, one of the registers in the CPU 102, is saved to the game control stack area 106is in the RAM 106. The PSW register is a register that stores flags indicating the calculation status, such as the carry flag and zero flag, and a flag indicating whether a timer interrupt is enabled or disabled. In step S230116, the next timer interrupt is prohibited. In step S230117, a counting process, which is an out-of-area process, is performed. When the counting process is completed, proceed to step S230118, where the value saved in the game control stack area 106is in the RAM 106 in step S230115 is restored to the PSW register of the CPU 102.

In step S230119, the BB state processing described in the first embodiment above is performed. Then, processing returns to step S230102.

As described above, when performing the tallying process in step S230117, by disabling timer interrupts in the preceding step S230116, it is possible to avoid the need to start timer interrupt processing during the tallying process, which is an out-of-area process. Furthermore, by saving the value of the CPU 102's PSW register to the game control stack area 106is in RAM 106 in step S230115, a step prior to disabling timer interrupts, it is possible to protect the value of the CPU 102's PSW register immediately before the tallying process. When the tallying process is completed, by restoring the value saved in the game control stack area 106is in RAM 106 to the CPU 102's PSW register in step S230118, it is possible to restore the CPU 102's calculation status and whether or not timer interrupts are enabled to the state before the tallying process began. Note that in normal processing, timer interrupts are enabled in step S230103, and the enabled timer interrupt state is stored in the PSW register at the time of step S230115. Therefore, when step S230118 is performed, timer interrupts will be permitted.

To facilitate understanding of the complete function, we will first explain the tallying process of step S230117. Explaining step S230117 in relation to in-area processing and out-of-area processing, normal processing step S230117 consists of processing to obtain the address where the program for performing the tallying process is stored, and processing to actually perform the tallying process. The processing to obtain the address where the program for performing the tallying process is stored is in-area processing, and is stored in ROM 105 as a program for game control. The program and data for actually performing the tallying process are stored in ROM 105 as a program and data for non-game control, and the tallying process performs various processes described below using the work area ew and stack area es for non-game control.

Figure 331 is a flowchart showing the aggregation process.

In step S230201, the value of the stack pointer is saved to the non-game control stack area 106es in RAM 106. In step S230202, the values of all registers of CPU 102 are saved to the non-game control stack area 106es in RAM 106. In step S230203, complete processing is performed.

In the complete processing, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 332, the value of the MY counter is obtained as the setting value in step S230301. The MY counter consists of 2 bytes and is located in the non-game control work area ew of RAM 106. In step S230302, it is determined whether a replay win has been achieved. The determination of whether a replay win has been achieved is made based on whether the value of the replay coin count storage area located in the game control work area iw of RAM 106 is not 0. The value of the replay coin count storage area is set in the medal payout processing (step S230113, see Figure 330), which is an in-area process. If a replay win has not been achieved, 0 is set in the replay coin count storage area. If a replay win has been achieved, the number of bets for the current game is set in the replay coin count storage area.

If it is determined in step S230302 that a replay win has not been achieved, the MY counter update process shown in steps S230303 to S230309 is performed. In the MY counter update process, in step S230303, the value of the payout number counter is obtained as an additional value. The payout number counter is provided in the work area iw for game control in RAM 106. If it is determined that a small win has been achieved in the medal payout process, which is an in-area process, the payout number corresponding to the winning condition device is set. In step S230304, the additional value is added to the set value. In step S230305, the value of the bet number counter is obtained as a subtraction value. The bet number counter is provided in the work area iw for game control in RAM 106. If medals or virtual medals are inserted in the start waiting process, which is an in-area process, the number of inserted medals is added, with a maximum of 3. In step S230306, the subtraction value is subtracted from the set value. In step S230307, it is determined whether the set value is less than 0, and if it is less than 0, in step S230308 the set value is changed to 0. Thereafter, or if it is determined in step S230307 that the set value is greater than or equal to 0, the process proceeds to step S230309, where the set value is set in the MY counter.

As described above, the MY counter update process adds the number of medals increased or decreased in the current game to the MY counter value, and if the result of this process is negative, the MY counter value is reset to 0.

When the MY counter update process is completed or when it is determined in step S230302 that a replay win has occurred, the process proceeds to step S230310, where it is determined whether the set value is greater than 18,500. If the set value is greater than 18,500, a game interruption request signal is output in step S230311, and the process proceeds to step S230312. If the set value is 18,500 or less, the process proceeds to step S230312 without outputting a game interruption request signal. Here, the game interruption request signal is a signal used when conducting a performance test of the slot machine 10. As will be described in detail later, in the slot machine 10, when the MY counter value reaches 19,000, play is stopped and further play is no longer possible. This means that the performance test cannot be continued. Therefore, by outputting a game interruption request signal when the MY counter value reaches 18,500, the performance test can be conducted smoothly.

In step S230312, it is determined whether the set value is 19,000 or greater. If the set value is 19,000 or greater, the complete flag is set in step S230313 and then processing proceeds to step S230314. If the set value is less than 19,000, processing proceeds to step S230314 without setting the complete flag. A complete flag storage area for storing the complete flag is provided in the non-game control work area ew of RAM 106, and in step S230313, the complete flag is set in the non-game control work area ew of RAM 106. In step S230314, an MY command transmission process is performed to transmit an MY command indicating the value of the MY counter to the display control device 81. This process then terminates.

In the MY command transmission process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 333, in step S230401, the value of bit 7, which is the most significant bit of the lower byte of the set value, is set to bit 0, which is the least significant bit of the transmission MY counter. The transmission MY counter consists of one byte and is provided in the non-game control work area ew of RAM 106. Note that the set value is two bytes, as it is the value of the MY counter as described above. In step S230402, a command type information value (9CH (10011100)) indicating that this is an MY command is set in the transmission buffer register provided in CPU 102. The value set in the transmission buffer register is immediately transmitted to the display control device 81. In step S230403, the value of the lower byte of the MY counter is obtained as the output value. In step S230404, the logical product of the output value and 7FH (01111111) is obtained, and the obtained result is used as the new output value. That is, in step S230404, a process is performed to convert the value of bit 7 of the output value to 0. In step S230405, the output value is set in the transmission buffer register. The value set in the transmission buffer register is immediately transmitted to the display control device 81. In step S230406, the value of the upper byte of the MY counter is obtained as the output value. In step S230407, the logical product of the output value and 7FH (01111111) is obtained, and the obtained result is used as the new output value. That is, in step S230407, a process is performed to convert the value of bit 7 of the output value to 0. In step S230408, the output value is set in the transmission buffer register. The value set in the transmission buffer register is immediately transmitted to the display control device 81. In step S230409, the value of the transmission MY counter is obtained as the output value. In step S230410, the logical product of the output value and 7FH (01111111) is obtained, and this obtained result is used as the new output value. That is, in step S230410, processing is performed to convert the value of bit 7 of the output value to 0. In step S230411, the output value is set in the transmission buffer register. The value set in the transmission buffer register is immediately sent to the display control device 81. In step S230412, a command end information value (30H (00110000)) indicating that command transmission has ended is set in the transmission buffer register. The value set in the transmission buffer register is immediately sent to the display control device 81. After that, this processing ends.

As described above, in the MY command transmission process, the following MY commands are transmitted to the display control device 81 in the order described above: the command type information value; the value obtained by changing bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter to 0; the value obtained by changing bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter to 0; the value obtained by changing bit 7 of the transmission MY counter to 0; and the command end information value. While detailed explanations are omitted, the display control device 81 is configured to identify information with a value of 1 for bit 7 as a command header, such as when the command type information value of the MY command is 9CH. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, it is necessary to transmit information indicating bits 0 to 6 of the lower byte of the MY counter and information indicating bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter separately to the display control device 81. The transmission MY counter is a counter for storing the value of bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter (step S230401). Incidentally, the information indicating bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter does not need to be sent to the display control device 81, because an event in which the MY counter value exceeds 32768 (8000H) does not occur.

Returning to the explanation of the tallying process, when the complete process of step S230203 is completed, the process proceeds to step S230204 to perform game result accumulation processing. The non-game control work area ew of RAM 106 contains a cumulative game count counter for storing the number of games played, a feature game count counter for storing the number of games played under BB state, a cumulative winning payout counter for storing the number of medals paid out, a cumulative consecutive feature payout counter for storing the number of medals paid out under BB state, an instruction feature payout counter for storing the game that notified the operation sequence when the push order bell was won and the number of medals paid out under BB state, a 6000 payout counter for storing the number of medals paid out in a predetermined 6000 games, and a 6000 consecutive feature payout counter for storing the number of medals paid out under BB state in a predetermined 6000 games. The game result accumulation process updates the values of the corresponding counters listed above based on the game status of the current game and whether or not a win has been achieved.

In step S230205, a cumulative ratio calculation process is performed to calculate various ratios using the results of the game result accumulation process. Specifically, the value of the 6000 consecutive feature payout coin counter is divided by the value of the 6000 payout coin counter, and the result of this division is stored in a 6000 game consecutive feature payout coin ratio memory area provided in the non-game control work area ew of RAM 106. The value of the cumulative consecutive feature payout coin counter is divided by the value of the cumulative winning payout coin counter, and the result of this division is stored in a cumulative consecutive feature payout coin ratio memory area provided in the non-game control work area ew of RAM 106. The value of the command-based feature payout coin counter is divided by the value of the cumulative winning payout coin counter, and the result of this division is stored in an command-based feature ratio memory area provided in the non-game control work area ew of RAM 106. The value of the reel play count counter is divided by the value of the cumulative play count counter, and the result of this division is stored in the reel play status ratio storage area provided in the non-play control work area ew of RAM 106.

In step S230206, the values of all registers saved in the non-game control stack area 106es of RAM 106 in step S230202 are restored to the corresponding registers of CPU 102. In step S230207, the value of the stack pointer saved in the non-game control stack area 106es of RAM 106 in step S230201 is restored. This process then terminates.

As described above, the tallying process, which is an out-of-area process, first saves the stack pointer and all register values to the non-game control stack area es. This allows data from normal processing, which is an in-area process, to be stored separately, preventing data used in in-area processing from being corrupted during complete processing, etc. Furthermore, when the tallying process is terminated, the separately stored stack pointer and all register values are restored, allowing the stack pointer and all register values to be restored to the state they were in before the tallying process began. In addition, while the tallying process may reference the payout counter value and bet counter value stored in the game control work area iw (steps S230303, S230305, see FIG. 332), the payout counter value and bet counter value are not updated. The tallying process only updates data stored in the non-game control work area ew, such as the MY counter and cumulative play count counter.

Next, we will explain timer interrupt processing.

Figure 334 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The program and data for performing timer interrupt processing are stored in ROM 105 as game control programs and data, and the timer interrupt processing performs various processes described below using the game control work area iw and stack area is.

In step S230501, register save processing is performed. In this register save processing, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 other than the IY register and PSW register are saved to the game control stack area 106is in RAM 106. In step S230502, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, power outage processing is executed in step S230503.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the main control unit 101 receives the power outage signal, it immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in the game control work area 106iw of RAM 106.

During power outage processing, the value of the stack pointer is saved in the game control stack area 106is of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in the input/output port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are set to the off state. A RAM determination value is then calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and the calculation result is saved in the game control work area 106iw of RAM 106, thereby prohibiting further RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for the possibility of a complete power outage and processing being disabled. Note that, in consideration of the possibility that the power outage flag may be erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been resolved, and the system allows writing to RAM 106, resets the power outage flag, and returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the system enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even within the infinite loop, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output. If the power outage signal is no longer being output, the system transitions to the main processing described below.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt processing, if it is determined in step S230502 that the power outage flag is not set, various processes from step S230504 onwards are performed.

In step S230504, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors that drive each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate them, and to brake the corresponding stepping motors to stop the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S230505, the status of various sensors (see Figure 9) connected to the input/output port 104, such as the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a, is read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S230506, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S230507, the value of the PSW register, one of the registers in the CPU 102, is saved to the game control stack area 106is in RAM 106. In step S230508, the next timer interrupt is prohibited. In step S230509, ratio display processing, which is outside the area processing, is performed.

Explaining step S230509 in relation to in-area processing and out-of-area processing, step S230509 of the timer interrupt processing consists of processing to obtain the address where the program for performing the ratio display processing is stored, and processing to actually perform the ratio display processing. The processing to obtain the address where the program for performing the ratio display processing is stored is in-area processing, and is stored in ROM 105 as a program for game control. The program and data for actually performing the ratio display processing are stored in ROM 105 as a program and data for non-game control, and various processes are performed in the ratio display processing using the work area ew and stack area es for non-game control.

In the ratio display process, as in the tallying process, the stack pointer value and the values of all registers of the CPU 102 are saved to the non-game control stack area 106es of the RAM 106. After that, various ratios, such as the ratio of the number of bonus item payouts for 6000 consecutive games obtained in the cumulative ratio calculation process described above, are displayed on a role ratio monitor (not shown) provided in the main control unit 101. When the process of displaying on the role ratio monitor is completed, the stack pointer value and the values of all registers of the CPU 102 saved in the non-game control stack area 106es of the RAM 106 are restored, and the ratio display process ends.

When the ratio display process is completed, proceed to step S230510, and the value saved in the game control stack area 106is of RAM 106 in step S230507 is restored to the PSW register of CPU 102.

In step S230511, counter processing is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121. In step S230512, segment data setting processing is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62. In step S230513, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting processing to each display unit 60-62 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S230514, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S230515, the values of each register saved in the game control stack area 106is of RAM 106 in the previous step S230501 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. The series of timer interrupt processing described above then ends.

As described above, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, step S230509 performs ratio display processing, which is out-of-area processing. In a configuration in which out-of-area processing is performed using timer interrupt processing, if timer interrupts are not prohibited when out-of-area processing is performed, an event may occur in which timer interrupt processing, which is in-area processing, is performed in the middle of tallying processing, which is out-of-area processing, and ratio display processing, which is out-of-area processing different from tallying processing, is performed during that timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if timer interrupts are prohibited when out-of-area processing is performed, it is possible to avoid the above event, i.e., the activation of in-area processing or a different out-of-area processing, in the middle of performing a specified out-of-area processing.

Next, we will explain the start wait process performed in step S230104 of the normal processing.

Figure 335 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process. The program and data for performing the start waiting process are stored in ROM 105 as game control programs and data, and the start waiting process performs various processes described below using the game control work area iw and stack area is.

In step S230601, it is determined whether a replay win was achieved in the previous play based on whether the value of the replay coin count storage area provided in the game control work area iw of RAM 106 is 0. If a replay win was not achieved, the process proceeds to step S230602, where the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to an excited state and bet acceptance is permitted. In step S230603, sensor error processing is performed. In sensor error processing, the sensor error processing checks whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring processing step S230505 of the timer interrupt processing, and if any abnormalities have occurred, error processing described below is performed. If it is determined in sensor error processing that the sensor reading results are normal, the process proceeds to step S230604, where interrupt waiting processing is performed, waiting until one timer interrupt processing is performed.

If it is determined in step S230601 that a replay win has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S230605, where an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert the same number of virtual medals as the value set in the replay insertion number storage area. Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed in the credit display unit 60. In other words, if a replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals.

When the interrupt wait process ends in step S230604, or when the automatic insertion process ends in step S230605, the process proceeds to step S230606, where it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, the process performs a medal return process in which the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out in step S230607, and then proceeds to step S230608. If the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, the process proceeds directly to step S230608. In step S230608, the complete flag storage area provided in the non-game control work area ew of RAM 106 is referenced to determine whether the complete flag is set. If the complete flag is not set, the medal insertion process is performed in step S230609, and the process ends. In the medal insertion process, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated. If either has been performed, the number of bets is changed, etc., up to the specified number.

As shown in Figure 330, when the start waiting process has ended, step S230105 determines whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number, and step S230106 determines whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number or if the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process described above, but in such cases the process returns to the sensor error process of step S230603.

If it is determined in step S230608 that the complete flag is set, the process proceeds to step S230610, where medal return processing is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals. Then, error processing is performed in step S230611.

In error processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 336, an error number is set in step S230701. The game control work area iw of RAM 106 has an error number storage area for storing error numbers. For example, the error number storage area is set to 1 if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the above-mentioned sensor error processing, and set to 2 if a medal payout abnormality occurs in the medal return processing, medal payout processing, etc. Furthermore, if the complete flag is set, the error number storage area is set to 10. In step S230702, an error signal indicating that the slot machine 10 has entered an error state is output to the external centralized terminal board 121. In step S230703, gate OFF processing is performed. In gate OFF processing, the output status of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are set to the OFF state. In step S230704, error display processing is performed to display the error number and corresponding segment data in the remaining payout number display unit 61. In step S230705, an error command indicating the error number is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the error command, the display control device 81 recognizes that an error state has occurred and performs control to cause the auxiliary display unit 65 to display an error corresponding to the error number. In step S230706, it is determined whether the error number is 10.

If the error number is not 10, proceed to step S230707 to determine whether the signal from the door open switch that detects the opening of the front door 12 is ON, i.e., whether the front door 12 is open. If the front door 12 is not open, the process waits until the front door 12 is opened. If the front door 12 is open, proceed to step S230708 to determine whether the reset switch 72 has been operated. If the reset switch 72 has not been operated, the process returns to step S230707. If the reset switch 72 has been operated while the front door 12 is open, error resolution processing is performed in step S230709 to resolve the error state of the slot machine 10, and this processing ends. The error resolution process involves setting the error number storage area to 0, indicating that no abnormality has occurred, terminating the output of the error signal, restoring the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104, terminating the display of the error number in the remaining dispensed number display unit 61, and sending an error resolution command to the display control device 81, indicating that the error resolution operation has been performed. Note that if a positive judgment is made in step S230708 when the abnormality has not been resolved, error resolution process is performed in step S230709 and the error processing is terminated, but the error processing will be restarted.

If it is determined in step S230706 that the error number is 10, i.e., if the complete flag is set, the process enters an infinite loop in step S230706. As a result, if the complete flag is set, i.e., if the MY counter value has reached 19,000, the game will no longer be playable, resulting in a so-called "stop-play" state.

As described above, if the error number does not indicate that the complete flag is set, the error state can be terminated by opening the front door 12, resolving the displayed abnormality, and then operating the reset switch 72. On the other hand, if the error number is 10, which indicates that the complete flag is set, the error state cannot be terminated even if the front door 12 is opened and the reset switch 72 is operated.

Next, we will explain the main processing that starts when the power is turned on.

Figure 337 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The programs and data for performing the main processing are stored in ROM 105 as programs and data for game control, and the main processing performs various processes described below using the work area iw and stack area is for game control.

In step S230801, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, the next timer interrupt is permitted and various initial settings are made to the registers and I/O devices of the CPU 102. In step S230802, a determination is made as to whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is ON, i.e., whether the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. If the setting key has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S230803, where main processing 2 is performed.

In main processing 2, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 338, in step S230901, the value of the PSW register, one of the registers of the CPU 102, is saved to the game control stack area 106is in RAM 106. In step S230902, the next timer interrupt is prohibited. In step S230903, an out-of-area RAM clear process, which is an out-of-area process, is performed.

Explaining step S230903 in relation to the in-area processing and out-area processing, step S230903 of main processing 2 consists of processing to obtain the address where the program for performing the out-area RAM clearing processing is stored, and processing to actually perform the out-area RAM clearing processing. The processing to obtain the address where the program for performing the out-area RAM clearing processing is stored is in-area processing, and is stored in ROM 105 as a program for game control. The program and data for actually performing the out-area RAM clearing processing are stored in ROM 105 as a program and data for non-game control, and various processes are performed in the out-area RAM clearing processing using the work area ew and stack area es for non-game control.

In the out-of-area RAM clearing process, as in the tallying process, the stack pointer value and the values of all registers of the CPU 102 are saved to the non-game control stack area 106es of the RAM 106. After that, all of the non-game control work area 106ew of the RAM 106 are initialized. As a result, the values of the MY counter and the transmission MY counter are set to 0, and if the complete flag is set, the complete flag is cleared. The non-game control stack area 106es of the RAM 106 is not initialized. After that, the stack pointer value and the values of all registers of the CPU 102 saved in the non-game control stack area 106es of the RAM 106 are restored, and the out-of-area RAM clearing process is completed.

When the out-of-area RAM clearing process is completed, proceed to step S230904, where the value saved in the game control stack area 106is of RAM 106 in step S230901 is restored to the PSW register of the CPU 102.

In step S230905, an in-area RAM clear process is performed to initialize all of the work area 106iw for game control in RAM 106. In the in-area RAM clear process, the stack area 106is for game control in RAM 106 is not initialized. In step S230906, a win probability setting process is performed to set the win probability to one of "1" to "6". The win probability setting process includes the process of displaying the current set value (initial value is 1) on the payout number display unit 62 and the process of updating the set value by 1 each time the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reset switch 72 is operated when the set value is 6, the set value returns to 1. The win probability setting process then ends when the start lever 41 is operated. When the win probability setting process has ended, proceed to step S230907 and perform the normal process described above.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing, if it is determined in step S230802 that the setting key has not been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S230803, where it is determined whether the power outage flag is set. If the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S230804, where it is determined whether the RAM judgment value saved during the power outage processing (step S230503, see FIG. 334) is normal. If the RAM judgment value is normal, the process proceeds to step S230806, where it is determined whether the winning probability setting value is normal. If the power outage flag is not set, or if the RAM judgment value or winning probability setting value is abnormal, the next timer interrupt is prohibited in step S230807, and the above-mentioned gate OFF processing is performed in step S230808. Thereafter, in step S230809, an error notification processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, and the process enters an infinite loop. Furthermore, if an error notification process results in an infinite loop, turning the power on with the setting key turned ON will allow the machine to return to normal processing via the out-of-area RAM clear process, the in-area RAM clear process, and the winning probability setting process (see Figure 338).

If the RAM judgment value and winning probability setting values are normal when the power outage flag is set, proceed to step S230810, where the stack pointer value saved during power outage processing is restored. In step S230811, the power outage flag is cleared, and in step S230812, a power restoration command indicating power-on is sent to the display control device 81. In step S230813, power restoration processing is performed to set the data before the power outage in the game control work area 106iw of RAM 106. In step S230814, the value of the PSW register, one of the registers of the CPU 102, is saved in the game control stack area 106is of RAM 106. In step S230815, the next timer interrupt is prohibited. In step S230816, MY clear processing, which is out-of-area processing, is performed.

Explaining step S230816 in relation to in-area processing and out-area processing, step S230816 of the main processing consists of processing to obtain the address where the program for performing the MY clear processing is stored, and processing to actually perform the MY clear processing. The processing to obtain the address where the program for performing the MY clear processing is stored is in-area processing, and is stored in ROM 105 as a program for game control. The program and data for actually performing the MY clear processing are stored in ROM 105 as a program and data for non-game control, and various processes are performed in the MY clear processing using the work area ew and stack area es for non-game control.

Figure 339 is a flowchart showing the MY clear process.

In step S231001, the value of the stack pointer is saved to the non-game control stack area 106es of RAM 106. In step S231002, the values of all registers of CPU 102 are saved to the non-game control stack area 106es of RAM 106. In step S231003, the MY counter is set to 0. In step S231004, the transmission MY counter is set to 0. In step S231005, the values of all registers saved to the non-game control stack area 106es of RAM 106 in step S231002 are restored to the corresponding registers of CPU 102. In step S231006, the value of the stack pointer saved to the non-game control stack area 106es of RAM 106 in step S231001 is restored. This processing then terminates.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing, when the MY clear processing is completed, proceed to step S230817, where the value saved in the game control stack area 106is of RAM 106 in step S230814 is restored to the PSW register of CPU 102. Then, in step S230818, the address before power was cut off is restored.

As described above, if the power is turned on without turning the setting key ON, the MY counter is set to 0 and then returns to the address before the power was turned off. As a result, the MY counter stores the increase from the point when the number of medals was lowest when game results were obtained after the power was turned on. If the power is turned on with the setting key turned ON, all of the non-game control work area 106ew in RAM 106 is initialized, followed by the win probability setting process and normal processing. In other words, if the complete flag is set and an infinite loop occurs, normal processing can be restored, i.e., the error state can be resolved, by changing the settings. Note that if the complete flag is set and an infinite loop occurs, if the power is turned on without turning the setting key ON, the complete flag will not be cleared and the game will return to the infinite loop, making it impossible to resolve the error state.

Here, we will explain the relationship between in-region processing and out-of-region processing. Figure 340 is an illustration showing the relationship between in-region processing and out-of-region processing.

In-area processing is processing performed based on a game control program, and game control data is referenced. The results obtained by in-area processing are stored in the game control work area iw. For example, when a medal is detected during medal insertion processing (step S230609, see FIG. 335), the detection result is added to the bet number counter provided in the game control work area iw. Furthermore, when data is saved during in-area processing, it is saved to the game control stack area is. For example, as shown in step S230814 of the main processing (see FIG. 337), when out-of-area processing is performed, the value of the PSW register is saved to the game control stack area 106is during in-area processing. During in-area processing, data stored in the non-game control work area ew may be referenced, but the data stored in the non-game control work area ew is not updated, as shown in step S230608 of the start wait processing (see FIG. 335).

When an address where a non-game control program is stored is called during in-area processing, out-area processing is initiated.

Out-of-area processing is processing performed based on a program for non-game control, and non-game control data is referenced. The results obtained in out-of-area processing are stored in the work area ew for non-game control. For example, in the complete processing (see Figure 332), the value of the MY counter provided in the work area iw for non-game control is updated, and a complete flag is set in the complete flag storage area provided in the work area iw for non-game control. In addition, when data is saved in the out-of-area processing, it is saved in the stack area es for non-game control. For example, as shown in steps S230201 and S230202 of the aggregation processing (see Figure 331), when the value of the stack pointer or the values of all registers are saved, they are saved in the stack area 106es for non-game control. During out-of-area processing, for example, as shown in step S230305 of the complete processing, data stored in the work area iw for game control may be referenced, but the data stored in the work area iw for game control is not updated.

When out-of-area processing is complete, return to in-area processing.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81, including those related to the complete function.

Figure 341 is a flowchart showing MY command processing. MY command processing is initiated when an MY command is received from the main control device 101, and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S231101, it is determined whether or not an MY command has been received, and if an MY command has not been received, this processing is terminated. If an MY command has been received, processing proceeds to step S231102, where MY composition processing is performed. As explained in the MY command transmission processing performed by the main control unit 101 (see Figure 333), the main control unit 101 transmits the value of the lower byte of the MY counter divided into the value of bits 0 to 6 (the value obtained by changing bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter to 0) and the value of bit 7 (the value of bit 0 of the transmitting MY counter). In the MY composition processing, the value of the lower byte of the MY counter is obtained by shifting the value of bit 0 of the transmitting MY counter to bit 7 and combining the value of bits 0 to 6. In step S231103, information indicating the upper byte of the MY counter included in the MY command and the value of the lower byte of the MY counter obtained during the MY composition process are stored in the HMY counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81.

In step S231104, it is determined whether the value of the HMY counter is less than 19,000. If the value of the HMY counter is less than 19,000, proceed to step S231105, and the value obtained by subtracting the value of the HMY counter from 19,000 is set in the end number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S231106, it is determined whether the value of the end number counter is less than or equal to 500. If the value of the end number counter is less than or equal to 500, i.e., if the value of the MY counter is greater than or equal to 18,500, the advance notification flag is set in step S231107, and proceed to step S231110. If the value of the end number counter is greater than 500, it is determined in step S231108 whether the advance notification flag is set. If the advance notification flag is not set, proceed directly to step S231110; if the advance notification flag is set, clear the advance notification flag in step S231109 and then proceed to step S231110.

In step S231110, it is determined whether the play mode of the current game was the notification mode. As explained in the normal processing performed by the main control unit 101, the tallying process for performing the MY command transmission process is performed after the play section processing (see Figure 330). In the play section processing, a section command indicating various information related to the play section at the time of game end is sent to the display control unit 81, and the display control unit 81 is able to grasp various information related to the play section at the time of game end at the time of performing the MY command processing (see Figures 26, 28, and 36). The play mode information storage area for storing play mode information provided in the RAM of the display control unit 81 is composed of a first area that stores the play mode indicated by the currently received section command (i.e., the play mode of the next game), and a second area that stores the play mode indicated by the previously received section command (i.e., the play mode of the current game). In step S231110, it is determined whether the play mode of the current game was the notification mode based on the information stored in the second area of the play mode information storage area.

If the play mode of the current game is the notification mode, notification mode processing is performed in step S231111, and then this processing is terminated. If the play mode of the current game is not the notification mode, proceed to step S231112, where it is determined whether the advance notification flag is set. If the advance notification flag is not set, this processing is terminated as is. If the advance notification flag is set, an advance notification display is performed in step S231113, and then this processing is terminated. In the advance notification display, control is performed to display on the auxiliary display unit 65 that the activation of the complete function is approaching.

If it is determined in step S231104 that the value of the HMY counter is 19,000 or greater, an end flag is set in step S231114, and a "stop" message is displayed in step S231115, terminating this processing. The "stop" message is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to indicate that the complete function is in operation.

Figure 342 is a flowchart showing the processing during notification mode performed in step S231111 of the MY command processing.

In step S231201, a remaining number update process is performed. In the notification mode, the value of the net increase number counter (see Figure 36), i.e., the number of remaining coins until the notification mode ends, is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the remaining number update process, the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated to the value of the net increase number counter stored when the interval command was received. In step S231202, it is determined whether the value of the net increase number counter is 0. If the value of the net increase number counter is not 0, this means that the notification mode will continue in the next game. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S231203, where it is determined whether the increase in the number of medals owned by the player after switching to the notification mode is the first time that the specified number has been exceeded. Incidentally, in this slot machine 10, the specified number is set to 500, 1000, 1500, or 2000. If it is the first time that the specified number has been exceeded, step S231204 displays the fact that the specified number has been exceeded, and then the process proceeds to step S231205. When displaying the exceeded limit, for example, if it is the first time that 500 has been exceeded, control is performed to display text information saying "500 exceeded!" on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the specified limit has not been exceeded, or if it is not the first time that the specified limit has been exceeded, i.e., if the specified limit that triggered the exceeded limit display has been exceeded, the process proceeds directly to step S231205.

In step S231205, it is determined whether the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2100. As explained in the first embodiment above, the value of the difference number counter is the increase from the base point when the player's owned medals have decreased the most since entering the advantageous zone. If the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2100, it proceeds to step S231206, where it is determined whether the value of the net increase number counter is greater than 300. If the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2100 and the value of the net increase number counter is greater than 300, this means that the value of the difference number counter has reached 2400 and the advantageous zone has ended. In such a case, it proceeds to step S231207, where the result of subtracting the value of the difference number counter from 2400 is set in the completion number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S231208, it is determined whether the value of the end number counter is greater than the value of the completion number counter. If the value of the end number counter is greater than the value of the complete number counter, this means that the advantageous zone and notification mode will end before the complete function is activated. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S231209, where the ending flag is set. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, if a start command is issued when the ending flag is set, the display control device 81 clears the ending flag and sets the ending in progress flag, and controls the display of a specified ending movie on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the advantageous zone and notification mode end. In step S231210, an ending advance notification is performed. In the ending advance notification, control is performed to display text information on the auxiliary display unit 65 saying, "The ending will begin from the next game."

If an ending advance notification is performed, if it is determined in step S231205 that the value of the difference number counter is 2100 or less, or if it is determined in step S231206 that the value of the net increase number counter is 300 or less, the process proceeds to step S231211. Also, if it is determined in step S231208 that the value of the ending number counter is less than or equal to the value of the completion number counter, the process proceeds to step S231211 without setting the ending flag. This is because if the value of the ending number counter is less than or equal to the value of the completion number counter, the complete function will be activated before the end of the advantageous zone and notification mode, and the specified ending movie will not be able to be played to the end.

If it is determined in step S231202 that the value of the net increase counter is 0, this means that the notification mode has ended for this game. In such a case, a notification mode end display is displayed in step S231213, and then processing proceeds to step S231211. The notification mode end display controls the display of the number of games played in notification mode and the increase in the number of medals owned by the player since transitioning to notification mode on the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that the notification mode end display does not display an indication of the limit exceeded, such as "Over 500 medals!", even if it is the first time the limit has been exceeded, but simply displays the increase in the number of medals owned by the player since transitioning to notification mode.

In step S231211, it is determined whether the advance notification flag is set. If the advance notification flag is not set, this processing ends. If the advance notification flag is set, an advance notification is displayed in step S231212, and then this processing ends.

Here, we will explain the effects of the above MY command processing in relation to the flow of the game.

Figure 343(a) shows an example of when a bell win occurs in a specified game in the notification mode. In the notification mode, the number of coins remaining until the end of the notification mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. Figure 343(a) shows that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode.

In the situation shown in Figure 343(a), if three medals are bet and a command to start the next game is issued, and the center left and right bells are won in this game, as shown in Figure 343(b), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will begin to spin, and the operation sequence "213," which can result in a bell win, will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the remaining number of medals is updated from 84 to 87 as three medals have been bet. If the player operates the center stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 in this order, a bell win will be achieved, as shown in Figure 343(c). Since the number of medals to be paid out when a bell win is achieved is 9 (see Figure 8), the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated from 87 to 78 in the remaining number update process of step S231201. Furthermore, if the value of the end number counter reaches 498 at this timing, the advance notification flag is set in step S231107, and an advance notification display is displayed in step S231212. Specifically, advance notification information stating "498 coins remaining until complete activation" is displayed at the top of auxiliary display section 65. Incidentally, advance notification information is displayed on a layer higher than the layer displaying presentation information such as the young man character and background image.

If three medals are bet and a command to start the next game is issued in the situation shown in Figure 343(c), each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will start spinning, as shown in Figure 343(d). At this time, the remaining number of medals is updated from 78 to 81 as three medals are bet, while the final number of medals included in the advance notification information remains at 498. As shown in Figure 344(a), if no winning combination is achieved in the game shown in Figure 343(d), the value of the final number counter becomes 501 (= 498 + 3). As a result, the advance notification flag is cleared in step S231109, and the advance notification information displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden. In this way, the advance notification information is switched between displaying and hiding at the end of the game, not at the start.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 344 (b), if a bell win occurs in the game of Figure 343 (d), the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated from 81 to 72 in the remaining number update process of step S231201. In addition, the advance notification information is updated from 498 to 492 in the advance notification display of step S231212, as the value of the end number counter is changed from 498 to 492 in step S231105.

Incidentally, in this slot machine 10, when a predetermined time (90 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the game ended, a customer waiting effect (attract effect) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the situation shown in Figure 344 (b) was reached, a customer waiting effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in Figure 344 (c). Even when the customer waiting effect is being displayed, advance notification information continues to be displayed. Although not shown in the figure, advance notification information continues to be displayed even when an error message such as a medal payout abnormality is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If the value of the HMY counter becomes 19,000 or greater as a result of a bell winning, an end flag is set in step S231114, and a play-ending message is displayed in step S231115. As a result, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays play-ending information consisting of the text information "Complete function in operation" and the text information "Today's play has ended," as shown in FIG. 344(d).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the MY counter value reaches 19,000, the complete flag is set. And, when the complete flag is set, the game is stopped. This configuration makes it possible to avoid awarding too many medals in a given period, ensuring the integrity of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When a stoppage occurs, the stoppage can be resolved by turning on the power with the setting key turned ON. This configuration makes it difficult to resolve the stoppage during business hours at the amusement facility where the slot machine 10 is installed, ensuring the integrity of play. It is certainly possible to configure the machine so that the stoppage can be resolved simply by turning on the power without turning on the setting key, or so that the stoppage can be resolved by operating the reset switch 72. However, with these configurations, it is possible that the stoppage can be easily resolved during business hours, rendering the function of transitioning to the stoppage state using MY meaningless.

If the power is turned on while the setting key is turned ON, the machine will go through the win probability setting process and then transition to normal processing. This configuration makes it difficult to resolve the stalled state during business hours when customers are present at the amusement facility, ensuring the integrity of play. During the win probability setting process, the set value is displayed on the payout number display unit 62, which could potentially be seen by players playing on this slot machine 10 or other customers.

When the power is turned on with the setting key turned ON, the out-of-area RAM clearing process initializes all of the non-game control work area 106ew in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to resolve the stalled state by changing the settings.

When the power is turned on, the value of the MY counter is set to 0, i.e., the MY counter is initialized. This configuration makes it possible to transition to a stop state based on the value of the MY counter after power is turned on, making it possible to avoid excessive awarding of medals in one business day at an amusement parlor, etc.

The complete flag storage area is not initialized when the power is turned on alone. With this configuration, if the complete flag is set, the power can be turned on with the setting key turned ON; if the complete flag is not set, the power can be turned on alone. Therefore, even when a complete function that stops play based on MY is provided, it is possible to prevent the work before opening at an amusement facility, etc. from becoming too complicated. Furthermore, if MY reaches 19,000 on one business day at an amusement facility, etc., it is expected that the manager of the amusement facility, etc. will change the winning probability for play on the next business day. If the setting key is turned ON when the power is turned on, the winning probability setting process is launched, so from this perspective, it is possible to prevent the work before opening at an amusement facility, etc. from becoming too complicated.

When the complete flag is set, error processing is initiated and the error processing enters an infinite loop. This configuration allows the program and data for executing error processing, more specifically, the processing of steps S230701 through S230705 that put the slot machine 10 into an error state, to be reused when the complete flag is set. As a result, there is no need to prepare new programs and data for putting the machine into a stop state when the complete flag is set, which helps prevent an increase in storage capacity. Furthermore, slot machines that allow medal insertion and payout generally have programs and data for putting the machine into an error state when a medal payout abnormality occurs. Therefore, it is possible to transition to a stop state using existing programs and data, which helps prevent an increase in storage capacity.

When a series of processes that put the slot machine 10 into an error state is performed, the error processing determines whether the complete flag is set, and if the complete flag is set, waits until the complete flag is cleared. This configuration allows for the use of the series of processes that put the slot machine 10 into an error state, while only adding the program and data required to execute the process of determining whether the complete flag is set, thereby minimizing the need for increased storage capacity.

When an error state occurs due to an abnormality, the error state can be resolved by turning on the reset switch 72 with the front door 12 open. When an error state occurs due to the complete flag being set, the error state can be resolved by turning on the power with the setting key turned on. In this way, by configuring the operation to resolve the error state to be different when the error state is entered due to an abnormality and when the error state is entered due to the complete flag being set, it is possible to ensure the convenience of resolving the error state during business hours when a specific abnormality occurs, while making it difficult to resolve the error state during business hours when the error state is entered based on MY. Furthermore, by different operations to resolve the error state, it is possible to give the manager of the amusement facility, etc., a different understanding of the error state and the end-of-play state, even though the same process is executed within the slot machine 10.

The complete processing is configured so that the MY counter is not updated if a replay win is achieved. In a configuration where the MY counter is updated after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and the complete flag is set based on the value of the MY counter, the processing time after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped is longer, which could potentially result in a longer delay between when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and when the next play becomes possible. However, if the MY counter is not updated when a replay win is achieved, it is possible to shorten the processing time when a replay win is achieved, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

The complete process is configured so that after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the value of the payout counter is added to the value of the MY counter, and the value of the bet counter is subtracted from the result of this addition. This configuration allows the MY counter to cumulatively store the difference between the number of medals used in a game and the number of medals paid out. Furthermore, by subtracting the value of the bet counter from the value of the MY counter when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, it is possible to configure the MY counter so that it does not need to be updated when a replay win is achieved. Because the number of bets is determined when a start command is issued, it is also possible to subtract the number of bets from the value of the MY counter at this time. However, this configuration would require the process of adding the number of bets to the value of the MY counter when a replay win is achieved.

The complete process is configured so that if the updated value of the MY counter is a negative value, the MY counter is set to 0. This configuration makes it possible to transition to a limit state based on the increase in the number of medals from the point at which the number of medals has decreased the most when the game results are obtained after the power is turned on.

When a replay win is achieved, the MY counter is not updated, but a determination is made as to whether the MY counter value has reached 19,000. This configuration shortens processing time while making it possible to determine whether the MY counter value has reached 19,000 each time the game ends.

When a game enters a favorable zone, if the difference in the number of coins in that favorable zone reaches 2400, the favorable zone ends regardless of the game mode at that time. With this configuration, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, the difference in coins counter and the MY counter must be updated. This lengthens the processing time after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, which could potentially result in a delay between when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop and when the next game becomes available. However, by configuring the MY counter not to be updated when a replay win is achieved, it is possible to shorten the processing time when a replay win is achieved, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

The termination determination process (see Figure 29) performed in the advantageous zone is configured so that the difference number counter is not updated if a replay win is achieved. This configuration makes it possible to further shorten the processing time when a replay win is achieved.

The difference coin adjustment process performed when updating the difference coin counter is configured to subtract the number of bets from the number of medals paid out and add the result of this subtraction to the difference coin counter. This configuration allows the difference coin counter to cumulatively store the difference between the number of medals used in a game and the number of medals paid out. Furthermore, by subtracting the number of bets from the value of the difference coin counter when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop, it is possible to configure the difference coin counter not to be updated when a replay win is achieved. Because the number of bets is determined when a start command is issued, it is also possible to subtract the number of bets from the value of the difference coin counter at this time. However, with this configuration, it would be necessary to add the number of bets to the value of the difference coin counter when a replay win is achieved.

The difference in number of coins adjustment process is configured so that if the updated result of the difference in number of coins counter is a negative value, the difference in number of coins counter is set to 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to use the point at which the number of coins has decreased the most when the game results after the transition to the advantageous zone are obtained as the base point, and to end the advantageous zone based on the increase in the number of coins from that base point.

When a replay win is achieved, the difference in number of coins counter is not updated, but a determination is made as to whether the value of the difference in number of coins counter has reached 2400. This configuration shortens processing time while making it possible to determine whether the value of the difference in number of coins counter has reached 2400 each time the game ends.

When the MY counter value reaches 18,500, advance notification information is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In a configuration where the game is stopped when MY reaches 19,000, if the game suddenly transitions to the stopped state while the player intends to continue playing, it is possible that the player's motivation to play will be significantly reduced. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, advance notification information is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the MY counter value reaches 18,500. This configuration allows the player to understand through the advance notification that MY will soon reach 19,000, thereby effectively alleviating the above-mentioned concerns. This is because the player can choose whether to continue playing until MY reaches 19,000 or to end play before MY reaches 19,000. Furthermore, if the game suddenly transitions to the stopped state while the player intends to continue playing, it is possible that conflicts may arise between the player and the gaming facility manager, etc. However, if the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display advance warning information, it is possible to reduce the chances of the above problems occurring.

The advance notification information is configured to display the number of medals remaining until the limit is reached. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of medals that can be earned before the limit is reached, and prevents the player from losing significant motivation to play when the limit is reached.

When the MY counter value reaches 18,500, advance notification information continues to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 even when no play is being performed. This configuration makes it possible for not only players who have been playing the slot machine 10, but also players who wish to play the slot machine 10 when the slot machine 10 is vacant, to know that MY will soon reach 19,000. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from losing their motivation to play.

When a customer waiting effect is executed while advance notification information is being displayed, the advance notification information continues to be displayed even while the customer waiting effect is being executed. This configuration allows players who have become interested in the slot machine 10 due to the customer waiting effect to understand that MY will soon reach 19,000. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from losing their motivation to play.

When the MY counter value reaches 18,500, advance notification information continues to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 even after the game has started. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand, while playing the game, that MY will soon reach 19,000. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the player will forget that MY will soon reach 19,000, and to prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Even if an error such as a medal payout abnormality occurs while advance notification information is being displayed and the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an error such as a medal payout abnormality, the advance notification information continues to be displayed. This configuration makes it possible for players to understand that MY will soon reach 19,000 even when they are unable to play. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that players will forget that MY will soon reach 19,000, and to prevent players from losing their motivation to play.

The auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to be able to display both auxiliary effects such as ending movies and customer waiting effects, as well as advance notification information. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will not notice that advance notification information is being displayed, preventing the player from losing interest in playing. This is because, in this slot machine 10, which executes auxiliary effects according to the game situation, it is expected that the player's eyes will be drawn to the auxiliary display unit 65 where the auxiliary effect is being executed.

When the value of the MY counter falls below 18,500 while advance notification information is being displayed, the advance notification information is hidden. This configuration attracts the player's attention when the advance notification information switches from not being displayed to being displayed. This reduces the chance that the player will forget that MY will soon reach 19,000, preventing the player from losing interest in playing. For example, it is possible to configure the advance notification information to be constantly displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, with this configuration, there is a possibility that a player may check the advance notification information when MY has not yet reached 18,500, become relieved that 19,000 is still a long way off, and then stop checking the advance notification information. Furthermore, with this slot machine 10, which displays both auxiliary effects and advance notification information on the auxiliary display unit 65, it is possible to display auxiliary effects in the area where advance notification information was previously displayed, allowing the player to enjoy the auxiliary effects even when MY has not yet reached 18,500.

The remaining number of coins displayed as advance notification information is updated after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. This configuration reduces the chances of players feeling annoyed by the advance notification information switching between display and non-display. For example, it is possible to configure the bet amount to be added to the remaining number when a start command is issued. However, with this configuration, if MY reaches 18501 after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, advance notification information indicating 499 coins remaining will be displayed at that time, and when the start command is issued, MY will reach 18498 and the advance notification information will be hidden. If no winning occurs in that game, the advance notification information will remain hidden, which may lead the player to wonder why the advance notification information was displayed, and if this event occurs repeatedly, the player may feel annoyed.

When the MY counter value reaches 18,500, a game interruption request signal is output. This configuration allows for gameplay to be interrupted when the MY counter value reaches 18,500 when a performance testing machine, rather than a player, is used to play. This allows for a smooth performance test. In other words, if the game interruption request signal were not output, gameplay would continue until the MY counter value reached 19,000, at which point gameplay would cease and further play would be disabled. When gameplay ceases, the power must be turned on with the setting key turned ON. Performing this operation initializes all of the non-game control work area 106ew in RAM 106 during the out-of-area RAM clear process. This resets not only the complete flag and MY counter, but also various ratios, such as the payout ratio for 6,000 consecutive games obtained in the cumulative ratio calculation process, resulting in the inability to obtain performance test data.

This slot machine 10 has a gameplay feature in which the player increases their owned medals in the notification mode, and in the notification mode, the net increase medal counter is incremented. In such a configuration, if advance notification is not provided, an event may occur in which the game suddenly transitions to a limit state midway through the notification mode, which could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. This is because, in a configuration in which the number of medals that can be earned in the notification mode changes depending on the number of wins in the add-on lottery, an event may occur in which the game reaches a limit state with more than the 120 medals set at the time of transition to the notification mode. However, if an advance notification is provided when MY reaches 18,500, the player can be made aware in advance that the game will reach a limit midway through the notification mode, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

In the notification mode, if the number of medals owned by the player after switching to the notification mode exceeds a specified number while the notification mode continues, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display a message indicating that the specified number has been exceeded. This configuration makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing in the notification mode in order to acquire more medals. As a result, by increasing the player's motivation to play, it is possible to prevent play in the notification mode from becoming monotonous.

In games where the notification mode ends, if the increase in the number of medals owned by the player after the transition to notification mode exceeds the specified number, the system is configured not to display the message that the specified number has been exceeded. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play when the notification mode ends. It is also possible to display the message that the specified number has been exceeded when the specified number has been exceeded in games where the notification mode ends, but this configuration could lead to the player becoming satisfied that the specified number has been reached and the notification mode has ended, and simply quitting the game.

The display indicating that the specified number of medals has been exceeded is only displayed the first time the player's medal count exceeds the specified number after switching to notification mode. Notification mode is a game mode in which the player can expect to increase their medal count with each game. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to avoid repeatedly displaying the same display indicating that the specified number of medals has been exceeded each time a game ends after the notification has been displayed.

In a game in which the notification mode ends, if the player's medal count exceeds a predetermined number after transitioning to the notification mode, the notification is not displayed. However, if MY reaches 18,500, advance notification information is displayed. This configuration allows the player to decide whether to continue playing on the slot machine 10 after the notification mode ends based on the advance notification information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from significantly decreasing. Indeed, since the notification mode, in which an increase in medals can be expected with each play, ends, it is possible to configure the game in which the notification mode ends not to display advance notification information if MY reaches 18,500. However, with this configuration, if a so-called consecutive win occurs, in which the game transitions back to the notification mode after a small number of games has elapsed since the notification mode ended, advance notification information may be displayed during the consecutive win notification mode, resulting in a transition to a stop state during the consecutive win notification mode. When a series of consecutive wins occurs, the player's sense of satisfaction generally increases dramatically, so when the above event occurs, it is thought that the player's motivation to play will be significantly reduced compared to when advance notification information is displayed at the end of the notification mode.

When the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400, confirming the end of the notification mode and advantageous zone, a predetermined ending movie is started on the auxiliary display unit 65. This configuration makes it possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority and satisfaction when the ending movie starts, thereby increasing their interest in the game. On the other hand, in a configuration like this slot machine 10 where the game reaches a stop state when MY reaches 19000, there is a possibility that the game will stop midway through the ending movie. If the game actually does stop, there is a concern that the player's sense of superiority and satisfaction may be diminished. Therefore, this slot machine 10 is configured to determine whether or not to play the ending movie based on the value of the difference number counter and the value of the MY counter. This configuration makes it possible to change whether or not to play the ending movie depending on MY, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

When the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400, confirming the end of the notification mode and advantageous period, and the value of the MY counter has not yet reached 19000 when the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400, an ending movie will begin. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a transition to a stop state in the middle of the ending movie, thereby ideally increasing interest in the game.

When the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400, confirming the end of the notification mode and advantageous zone, and the value of the MY counter reaches 19000 before the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400, the ending movie will not start. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a transition to a stop state in the middle of the ending movie, and ideally increases the player's interest in the game. If a transition to a stop state occurs in the middle of the ending movie, the player will not be able to bask in the afterglow after the end of the ending movie and advantageous zone, which will diminish the player's sense of superiority and satisfaction.

If the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400 and it is not yet certain that the notification mode and advantageous period will end, the ending movie will not start regardless of the value of the MY counter. This configuration makes it possible to associate the ending movie with the value of the difference number counter reaching 2400 and the end of the advantageous period. As a result, when the ending movie starts, it is possible to increase the player's sense of superiority and satisfaction, and to increase their interest in the game.

If the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2100, i.e., if there are fewer than 300 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode and advantageous zone, the ending movie may start. Furthermore, if the value of the MY counter is 18500 or greater, i.e., if there are 500 coins or less remaining until the end of the game, advance notification information is displayed. This configuration makes it possible to display advance notification information on the auxiliary display unit 65 in cases where the ending movie does not start when the value of the difference number counter has reached 2400, confirming the end of the notification mode and advantageous zone. This makes it possible for the player to understand that the game will transition to the end of the game before the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the ending movie not starting.

The ending movie may start when there are fewer than 300 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone. The advance notification information is displayed when there are 500 coins or less remaining until the limit state. In this way, by setting the number of coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone, at which the ending movie can start, to a value smaller than the number of coins remaining until the limit state, at which advance notification information is displayed, if the ending movie is started when advance notification information is not being displayed, it is possible to end the notification mode or advantageous zone before the limit state is reached, and the ending movie can be played to the end.

If there are less than 300 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone, and the number of coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone is less than the number of coins remaining until the limit state is reached, the ending movie will start. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to play the ending movie to the end when 2100 coins are reached in notification mode, even when advance notification information is being displayed.

If there are less than 300 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone, or if the number of coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone is equal to or greater than the number of coins remaining until the limit state is reached, the ending movie will not start. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to avoid transitioning to the limit state in the middle of the ending movie if the number of coins reaches 2,100 in notification mode while advance notification information is being displayed.

When the game enters a stop state, stop information is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. This configuration makes it possible to clearly inform customers at the gaming facility that they can no longer play with the slot machine 10.

Game control programs and data, and non-game control programs and data, are stored in consecutive address areas, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls. With this configuration, for example, when checking only game control programs and data, it is only necessary to check the address range area where these game control programs and data are stored. For example, when checking only non-game control programs and data, it is only necessary to check the address range area where these non-game control programs and data are stored. This makes it possible to efficiently check programs and data for game control and non-game control separately. This also makes it possible to efficiently modify programs and data for game control and non-game control separately.

An address range for an unused area where no data is stored is provided between the address range of the area where game control programs and game control data are stored and the address range of the area where non-game control programs and non-game control data are stored. This configuration makes it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for game control and the address range for non-game control when checking.

In each of the address ranges for game control and non-game control, programs and data are stored in different ranges of consecutive address areas, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls. This configuration makes it possible to efficiently check programs and data separately. In addition, an address range for an unused area in which no data is stored is provided between the address range of the area in which programs are stored and the address range of the area in which data is stored. This configuration makes it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range of the program and the address range of the data during the check process.

A separate work area 106iw for game control and a separate work area 106ew for non-game control are provided. This configuration makes it possible to use different areas of RAM 106 when executing in-area processing and when executing out-of-area processing. As a result, it is possible to avoid events such as overwriting data in RAM 106 when executing either in-area processing or out-of-area processing.

A separate stack area 106is is provided for game control, and a separate stack area 106es is provided for non-game control. This configuration makes it possible to use different areas when saving values stored in the CPU 102 registers during in-area processing, and when saving values stored in the CPU 102 registers during out-area processing. As a result, it is possible to avoid events such as erasing the values stored in the CPU 102 registers during in-area processing when saving values in the CPU 102 registers during out-area processing.

When in-area processing is initiated, the values of all registers of CPU 102 are not saved to the game control stack area 106is of RAM 106, whereas when out-area processing is initiated, the values of all registers of CPU 102 are saved to the non-game control stack area 106es of RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to avoid overwriting values stored in registers of CPU 102 during in-area processing when out-area processing is executed, i.e., to prevent values stored in registers of CPU 102 during in-area processing from being corrupted. Furthermore, when out-area processing is terminated, the values of all registers saved to the non-game control stack area 106es of RAM 106 are restored to the corresponding registers of CPU 102. This configuration makes it possible to restore the values of all registers of CPU 102 to the state they were in before the out-area processing was executed when the out-area processing is terminated. In addition, when out-of-area processing is started from a situation where in-area processing is being performed during normal processing, timer interrupts are prohibited in the in-area processing before the out-of-area processing is started, and when the out-of-area processing is terminated and the in-area processing is returned to, timer interrupts are permitted in the returned in-area processing, so that timer interrupt processing is not permitted during out-of-area processing. This configuration makes it possible to prevent timer interrupts from occurring when the values of all registers of CPU 102 have been saved, and also makes it possible to avoid a complicated processing configuration when saving the values of all registers of CPU 102 to the non-game control stack area es in RAM 106.

The in-area processing is configured to execute processing related to the progress of the game, such as lottery processing and reel control processing, while the out-area processing is configured to execute processing to derive information obtained from the game results played over a specified period of time, such as updating the MY counter. This configuration makes it possible to improve the efficiency of debugging work by configuring ROM 105 so that the address range in which the program used to execute the in-area processing is stored is different from the address range in which the program used to execute the out-area processing is stored. For example, when debugging in-area processing, it is sufficient to check the area of a specified contiguous address range in ROM 105, and there is no need to check the area of an address range outside that.

The tallying process, which updates the MY counter, etc., is performed during out-of-area processing. This configuration makes it possible to create free space in the memory area that stores the program used when executing in-area processing. As a result, it becomes possible to store programs for executing processes related to the progress of the game in this free space, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the configuration for realizing the complete function, updating the MY counter and setting the complete flag are performed outside the area, while the process for entering the play-stop state is performed within the area. By configuring the updating of the MY counter and setting the complete flag to be performed outside the area, it is possible to prevent the complete function from overwhelming the memory area storing the program used to execute the in-area process. Furthermore, by configuring the process for entering the play-stop state to be performed within the area, it is possible to ensure the function of executing processes related to the progress of the game within the area. Furthermore, if the process for entering the play-stop state were performed within the area, there would be a concern that it would overwhelming the memory area storing the program used to execute the in-area process. However, this slot machine 10 utilizes error processing to transition to the play-stop state, thereby effectively alleviating this concern.

In-area processing is configured to be able to reference the non-game control work area ew in RAM 106 but not be able to update it, while out-area processing is configured to be able to reference the game control work area iw in RAM 106 but not be able to update it. This configuration makes it possible to avoid corrupting information stored in the non-game control work area ew in RAM 106 when in-area processing is executed, or corrupting information stored in the game control work area iw in RAM 106 when out-area processing is executed.

The timer interrupt process is configured to perform ratio display processing, which is an out-of-area process. In this configuration, if timer interrupts are not prohibited during in-area processing before initiating out-of-area processing, an event may occur in which, for example, timer interrupt processing is started in the middle of tallying processing, which is an out-of-area process, and ratio display processing, which is a different out-of-area process, is executed within the timer interrupt process. This leads to a complicated processing configuration when saving all register values of CPU 102 to the non-game control stack area es in RAM 106. On the other hand, if timer interrupts are prohibited during in-area processing before initiating out-of-area processing, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

The complete processing, which is an out-of-area process, is configured to update the MY counter and perform an MY command transmission process that sends an MY command indicating the value of the MY counter to the display control device 81. This configuration makes it possible to create free space in the memory area that stores the program used when executing the in-area process. As a result, it becomes possible to store programs for executing processes related to the progress of the game in this free space, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, because the series of processes of updating the MY counter, creating an MY command, and sending the MY command can be executed in the out-of-area process, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of debugging work.

The display control device 81 is configured to identify information with a value of 1 in bit 7 as a command header. In this configuration, if the MY counter is configured as two bytes, it becomes necessary to separate at least the information stored in the lower byte of the MY counter into information indicating bits 0 to 6 of the lower byte of the MY counter and information indicating bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter and transmit these to the display control device 81. Accordingly, the process of creating an MY command requires processing to separate at least the information stored in the lower byte of the MY counter into information indicating bits 0 to 6 of the lower byte of the MY counter and information indicating bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter, resulting in a large program for executing the process of creating an MY command. However, if the process of creating an MY command is configured to be executed as an out-of-area process, it becomes possible to prevent the memory area storing the program used for executing in-area processing from being overwhelmed by the program.

In the MY command transmission process, command information indicating bits 0 to 6 of the MY counter's low-order byte is created by taking the logical product of the value of the MY counter's low-order byte and 7FH. Furthermore, the value of bit 7 of the MY counter's low-order byte is set to bit 0 of the transmitting MY counter, and command information indicating bit 7 of the MY counter's low-order byte is created by taking the logical product of the value of the transmitting MY counter and 7FH. In this configuration, the program required to execute the process of creating the MY command is quite large, but if the process of creating the MY command is executed as an out-of-area process, it is possible to prevent the program from taking up space in the memory area where the program used for in-area processing is stored.

In the MY command transmission process, the following MY commands are transmitted to the display control device 81 in the order listed above: a command type information value; an information value indicating bits 0 to 6 of the lower byte of the MY counter; an information value indicating bits 0 to 6 of the upper byte of the MY counter; an information value indicating bits 0 to 6 of the sending MY counter; and a command end information value. This configuration allows the display control device 81 to grasp the value of the MY counter when information with a value of 1 in bit 7 functions as a command header.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented, for example, as follows:

(1) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game immediately transitions to the main game. However, the rotation speed of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be slowed down for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) before returning to a steady rotation speed, and then the game transitions to the main game. With this configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player that the pseudo game is ending through the change in the rotation speed of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game immediately transitions to the main game. However, the game may be transitioned to the main game after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are brought to a pseudo-stop, or after one or two reels are brought to a pseudo-stop.

When the configuration is such that the transition to the actual game occurs after one or two reels have been pseudo-stopped, it is possible to transition from the pseudo game to the actual game more quickly than when the configuration is such that the transition to the actual game occurs after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been pseudo-stopped. Furthermore, with this configuration, the transition to the actual game can be signaled by the pseudo-stopped reels starting to spin again, which prevents the player from becoming confused about whether they are in the pseudo game or the actual game.

(3) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated when at least one reel has come to a pseudo-stop, the pseudo game is terminated after all rotating reels have come to a pseudo-stop. However, the pseudo game may also be terminated without bringing all rotating reels to a pseudo-stop. In such a configuration, it is only necessary to perform processing to start spinning only the pseudo-stopped reels, making it possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the actual game. Furthermore, in such a configuration, the transition to the actual game can be notified by the pseudo-stopped reels starting to spin again, making it possible to avoid the player becoming confused about whether they are playing a pseudo game or an actual game.

(4) In the first embodiment described above, when a rotating reel is pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, the same processing is performed as when a pseudo-stop command is issued. However, a different processing may be performed than when a pseudo-stop command is issued. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the stopping results of the symbols when the stop switches 42-44 are operated to pseudo-stop each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated to pseudo-stop each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the operation of the settlement switch 59 and the operation of the stop switches 42-44, allowing the player to choose which operation to use.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reels are brought to a pseudo-stop immediately at the timing when the settlement switch 59 is operated, regardless of the stopping position of the symbols. With this configuration, it is possible to generate an event such as a symbol stopping at a position half a symbol away from the center line L2.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, even if the bonus lottery is won, the spinning reels will be pseudo-stopped so that the "red 7" symbol combination does not stop on the middle line L2.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the spinning reels are pseudo-stopped at a position that is half the symbol away from the stop position when a pseudo-stop command is issued.

(5) In the first embodiment described above, when the settlement switch 59 is operated during a simulated game, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed. However, this is not limited to the operation of the settlement switch 59, and any operation that does not affect the progress of the game after the start of a game round may be performed. Therefore, it may be configured to determine that a cancel operation has been performed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, or to determine that a cancel operation has been performed when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated. It may also be configured to determine that a cancel operation has been performed when the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated.

Also, instead of or in addition to a configuration that determines whether a cancel operation has been performed, a configuration may be adopted in which the simulated game is terminated if a predetermined time has passed without a pseudo-stop command being issued.

(6) In the first embodiment described above, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel has come to a pseudo-stop, all spinning reels are caused to come to a pseudo-stop. However, it is also possible to have a configuration where only one of the spinning reels is caused to come to a pseudo-stop. In such a configuration, when one reel has come to a pseudo-stop, it is necessary to operate the settlement switch 59 twice to cause all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to come to a pseudo-stop.

(7) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the simulated game is ended immediately, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated when at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped. However, it is acceptable as long as the processing performed when ending the simulated game differs depending on the number of pseudo-stopped reels or the number of pseudo-stop commands issued.

For example, if the settlement switch 59 is operated when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, one reel will be pseudo-stopped, but the pseudo game will end without pseudo-stopping the other two reels. If the settlement switch 59 is operated when one reel is pseudo-stopped, the other two reels will be pseudo-stopped, and then the pseudo game will end. If the settlement switch 59 is operated when two reels are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo game will end without pseudo-stopping the other reel.

(8) In the first embodiment described above, the reel rotation speed in the pseudo game and the reel rotation speed in the actual game are configured to be the same, but the reel rotation speed in the pseudo game and the reel rotation speed in the actual game may also be configured to be different.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, the stop information setting process is performed after the spin start process. However, if the stop information setting process is performed before determining whether a pseudo-stop command has occurred, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the above embodiment. Therefore, the stop information setting process may be performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have begun rotating at a constant speed, or after the instruction monitor display process has been performed.

(10) In the first embodiment described above, a slide table for pseudo stop control in pseudo games based on winning an additional lottery and a slide table for pseudo stop control in pseudo games based on winning a pseudo game lottery were stored in advance, and the slide tables were referenced when a pseudo stop command was issued. However, this configuration will be changed.

In the stop position determination process shown in FIG. 22, if it is determined in step S1103 that the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1104, where if the pseudo game is based on a win in the additional lottery, the stop pattern number is set to "15". If the pseudo game is based on a win in the pseudo game lottery, the stop pattern number is set to "15" if the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the left reel 32L or the center reel 32M, and the stop pattern number is set to "16" if the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the right reel 32R. Once the stop pattern number has been set, the processes of steps S1107 and S1108 are not performed.

With this configuration, in addition to achieving the same effects as the above-mentioned embodiment, it is possible to reduce the amount of data because there is no need to prepare a slide table in advance.

(11) In the first embodiment described above, the pseudo game was configured to allow a maximum of 19 symbols to slide, but it may also be configured to cause the pseudo game to stop within a predetermined time after a pseudo stop command is issued, as in the actual game.

However, if such a configuration is used and pseudo-game stop information is set after a pseudo-stop command is issued, it is possible that the time required to set the pseudo-game stop information may make it impossible to slide four symbols.

Therefore, when configuring a system to perform stop control similar to that of the actual game, the stop information setting process is configured to set stop information for the actual game and stop information for the pseudo game. In this case, the stop information for the actual game is configured to be set in the first area of the stop information storage area 106b, and the stop information for the pseudo game is configured to be set in the second area of the stop information storage area 106b.

With this configuration, although the time required for the stop information setting process will be longer, it will be possible to quickly transition from pseudo-game to actual game because there will be no need to set stop information for actual game when transitioning from pseudo-game to actual game.

In this case, when setting pseudo game stop information based on an additional lottery win, the stop information set when only BB1 is won in the actual game is set as the pseudo game stop information, and when setting pseudo game stop information based on a pseudo game lottery win, the stop information set when the actual game is lost is set as the pseudo game stop information. With this configuration, it becomes possible to share pseudo game stop information and stop information for the actual game, thereby reducing the amount of data that needs to be prepared in advance.

(12) In the first embodiment described above, the stop information setting process was configured not to set pseudo-game stop information, but this configuration will be changed.

Specifically, in the reel control process shown in Figure 15, step S403 determines whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the stop information setting process sets stop information for the pseudo game instead of stop information for the actual game. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the stop information setting process sets stop information for the actual game. At this time, if stop information for the pseudo game is set, that is, after the pseudo game has ended, the stop information for the pseudo game is rewritten with stop information for the actual game. In other words, the memory area in which the stop information for the pseudo game is set and the memory area in which the stop information for the actual game is set are the same area. Step S1104 in the stop position determination process is not performed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the stop information storage area 106b from becoming too large.

In this case, when setting pseudo game stop information based on an additional lottery win, the stop information set when only BB1 is won in the actual game is set as the pseudo game stop information, and when setting pseudo game stop information based on a pseudo game lottery win, the stop information set when the actual game is lost is set as the pseudo game stop information. With this configuration, it becomes possible to share pseudo game stop information and stop information for the actual game, thereby reducing the amount of data that needs to be prepared in advance.

(13) In the first embodiment described above, a slide table for the simulated game is prepared in advance, but it may also be configured to set stop information in the same way as in the actual game.

(14) In the first embodiment described above, when the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R pseudo-stops on the center line L2 during a pseudo game, a bonus is awarded to notify the player that the net increase in coins will increase. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and any bonus different from the bonus awarded when a winning combination such as a medal payout is awarded may be awarded. Typical examples of bonuses different from the bonus awarded when a winning combination is established include, for example, the execution of a setting suggestion effect or a suggestion of a winning combination in the subsequent actual game.

(15) In the first embodiment described above, a pseudo game is played when the additional lottery is won and when the pseudo game lottery is won, but the conditions for playing a pseudo game are arbitrary.

For example, a simulated game can be played in the final game of the notification mode.

For example, if a rare combination is won, a pseudo-game will be played regardless of whether the bonus lottery is won or not.

(16) In the first embodiment described above, if the additional lottery is won, a pseudo game is executed in that game round. However, a pseudo game may also be executed in the next game round after the additional lottery is won. In such a configuration, it is possible to start the next game round after the player has understood that they have won a rare combination, i.e., that an additional lottery has been held. Therefore, it is possible to start the next game round while building anticipation for the start of a pseudo game, which makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Note that a pseudo game may also be executed not in the next game round but in a predetermined number of game rounds, such as after five games.

(17) In the first embodiment described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, no notification is given as to whether or not an additional bonus has been added. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a notification is given as to whether or not an additional bonus has been added.

(18) In the first embodiment described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, no notification is given as to whether or not an additional coin has been added, and if the additional coin lottery is won, the remaining payout number displayed in the main game is updated. However, the remaining payout number displayed in the main game may not be updated even if the additional coin lottery is won. In such a configuration, the unannounced additional coin number may be announced in a subsequent pseudo-game, or may be announced in the final game of the announcement mode.

(19) In the first embodiment described above, the auxiliary display unit 65 was configured to notify the player that a pseudo game was in progress, but this configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it includes a means for notifying the player that a pseudo game is in progress. In other words, a pseudo game lamp that is lit only during a pseudo game may be provided, or the stopped reels may be caused to swing up and down during a pseudo game to notify the player that a pseudo game is in progress.

(20) In the second embodiment, the standby process is configured to wait for 100 msec, but the length of the standby process can be any length that allows the reel oscillation to converge.

(21) In the second embodiment described above, a standby process is performed for 100 msec after determining that the instruction monitor is not currently being displayed or after clearing the instruction monitor. However, this is not limited to this position, and the standby process can be performed at any position after determining that the value of the reel spin counter is 0, i.e., after determining the stop positions of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the closer to the process of determining whether the value of the reel spin counter is 0, the more likely it is that the standby time in the standby process will need to be set to a time longer than 100 msec, which raises concerns that this may result in a longer wait time until the next game can be started.

(22) In the second embodiment described above, after determining that the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 have become unoperated. However, it may also be configured to determine whether the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers after determining that all stop switches 42-44 have become unoperated. Furthermore, in such a configuration, it may also be configured to determine whether the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers after sending an operation end command. In other words, it may be configured to send an all-reel stop completion command after sending an operation end command.

(23) In the second embodiment described above, after the all reels have stopped command was sent, it was determined whether all stop switches 42 to 44 were in an unoperated state. However, the all reels have stopped command may be sent after it is determined that all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In this case, if the operation end command is sent after the all reels have stopped command, it is expected that the same effects as those of the second embodiment described above can be achieved.

(24) In the second embodiment described above, the order of determining whether the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stopped symbol numbers, determining whether all stop switches 42 to 44 have become unoperated, and sending the all-reel stop completion command and operation end command are the same. However, a different order may be used. For example, after determining that the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stopped symbol numbers, a determination is made as to whether all stop switches 42 to 44 have become unoperated, while the command sending order is such that the operation end command is sent followed by the all-reel stop completion command. However, such a configuration may complicate the processing configuration and increase the memory capacity.

(25) In the second embodiment described above, an all-reel stop completion command is sent when the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R match the stop pattern numbers. However, stop completion commands for the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R may be sent individually. More specifically, if it is determined in step S2204 that the left reel 32L and right reel 32R have reached the stop pattern numbers but the center reel 32M has not reached the stop pattern number, a left reel stop completion command and a right reel stop completion command are sent, and the process waits until the center reel 32M reaches the stop pattern number. Then, if the center reel 32M has reached the stop pattern number, the center reel stop completion command is sent and the process proceeds to step S2206. In this configuration, if the display control device 81 is configured to output a third notification sound when it receives all of the left reel stop completion command, center reel stop completion command, and right reel stop completion command, it is expected that the same effects as those of the second embodiment described above will be achieved.

The same applies to operation end commands; the left operation end command, center operation end command, and right operation end command may be sent separately.

(26) In the second embodiment described above, a command to stop all reels and a command to end operation are sent during the actual game. However, in a configuration in which a pseudo game is performed, such as the first embodiment described above, a command to stop all reels and a command to end operation may also be sent during the pseudo game.

(27) In the third embodiment described above, the pseudo-game flag storage area and the header were both configured as one byte, but it goes without saying that they may be configured as two or more bytes.

(28) In the third embodiment described above, the pseudo game flag storage area and the header are configured to occupy the same byte, but they may be configured to occupy different bytes. For example, the pseudo game flag storage area may be configured to occupy one byte, and the header may be configured to occupy two bytes. Even in such a configuration, if the header is created by adding the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area to a predetermined one byte of the header information, the same effect as in the third embodiment described above can be achieved.

(29) In the third embodiment described above, the header information to be transmitted in the event of a game is stored in advance, but this configuration will be changed.

In the third embodiment described above, the fifth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area and the header was left blank, but the fifth bit is configured to function as a real game flag storage bit and a real game identification bit. When clearing the pseudo game flag (step S611, see FIG. 17 or step S1004, see FIG. 21), the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0" and the fifth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "1". When setting the pseudo game flag (step S504, see FIG. 16), the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "1" and the fifth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0".

Even with this configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the third embodiment described above can be achieved.

(30) In the third embodiment described above, the information indicating whether or not a game is a pseudo-game is included in the header, but it may be included in the body or the header. Even in these configurations, if the body to be transmitted is created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the body information, or if the header to be transmitted is created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information, it is clear that the same effects as those of the third embodiment described above will be achieved.

(31) In the third embodiment described above, the header is created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information. However, even if the header is created by performing other predetermined calculations such as subtraction, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be achieved.

(32) In the third embodiment described above, the commands sent in the case of simulated games and the commands sent in the case of actual games were different, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, the command sent when in the BB state is different from the command sent when in the non-BB state. In such a configuration, if a BB state storage area is provided to store information on whether or not the state is in the BB state, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the BB state storage area and header information, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, the configuration could be such that the command sent when the zone is a normal zone is different from the command sent when the zone is a favorable zone. In such a configuration, if a favorable zone storage area is provided to store information on whether the zone is favorable or not, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the favorable zone storage area and the header information, it would be possible to achieve the same effects as the third embodiment described above.

For example, the configuration can be such that the commands sent in the notification mode (AT game) are different from the commands sent in the non-notification mode (non-AT game). In such a configuration, if an notification mode storage area is provided to store information on whether or not the mode is notification mode, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the notification mode storage area to the header information, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, the command sent when three coins are being played can be different from the command sent when two coins are being played. In such a configuration, if a bet number storage area is provided to store information on whether three coins are being played or not, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area and the header information, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, the command sent in the BB1 state (BB state with three coins in play), the command sent in the BB2 state (BB state with two coins in play), and the command sent in the non-BB state can be different. In such a configuration, if a game status storage area is provided that stores information on which game status is in play, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the game status storage area and the header information, it is possible to achieve the same effects as in the third embodiment. Note that in order to include information in the header indicating which of the three game statuses is in this way, it is necessary to provide at least two bits in the game status storage area and header for storing the above information.

Naturally, it is also possible to combine the above configurations. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which pseudo game determination information and information stored in the bet number storage area are added to the header information to create a header that indicates whether or not a pseudo game is being played and whether it is a three-coin game or a two-coin game. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a header that indicates whether or not a pseudo game is being played is created by adding pseudo game determination information to the header information, and a body that indicates whether it is a three-coin game or a two-coin game is created by adding information stored in the bet number storage area to the body information.

(33) In the third embodiment described above, when sending a start rotation command, a stop command, or a stop command, the header is created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information. However, it goes without saying that when sending other commands, such as a lottery result command, the header may also be created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information.

(34) Instead of or in addition to the third embodiment, the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area may be electrically connected to an output port. With such a configuration, when the pseudo game flag is set (a "1" is stored in the sixth bit), an ON signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10, and when the pseudo game flag is cleared (a "0" is stored in the sixth bit), an OFF signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10. Therefore, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area can be given the functions of information used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and information used when outputting a signal indicating that a pseudo game is being executed to the outside of the slot machine 10. As a result, the pseudo game flag storage area can be used effectively, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

(35) In the fourth embodiment described above, the result display is initiated when the effect switch 67 is operated once. However, the above-described effects can be achieved if the result display is initiated based on the operation of the effect switch 67. Therefore, for example, the result display may be initiated when the effect switch 67 is pressed a predetermined number of times, such as 10 times, or when the effect switch 67 is pressed and held for a predetermined period of time, such as 5 seconds.

(36) In the fourth embodiment described above, the push-button display is initiated when an operation end command is received, but it may also be initiated when an all-reel stop completion command is received. It may also be initiated when a section command is received, or when a state command is received. In any of these configurations, the push-button display is initiated after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and therefore the above-described effects can be achieved.

(37) In the fourth embodiment described above, the push-button display is initiated when an operation end command is received. However, the push-button display may also be initiated in the middle of a game round, for example, when it is determined in the effect determination process that a push-button effect will be executed. In such a configuration, the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56 is configured to determine whether or not the completion flag is set in step S3601. In such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation is immediately enabled, just as in the case where a push-button effect is not executed. If the completion flag is not set when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer or the second timer, as described in the fourth embodiment described above.

(38) In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the first timer is set to 1000 after the push display begins. However, the value of the first timer may be set to 1000 when an operation end command is received, or when an all reels stop completion command is received. Furthermore, the value of the first timer may be set to 1000 when a section command is received, or when a state command is received. Even with these configurations, the above-described effects can be achieved because only the start time of the first timer changes.

(39) In the fourth embodiment described above, the second timer is set to 300 when the result display is completed. However, the second timer may be set to 500 when the result display is initiated. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the above-described effects can be achieved.

Note that if the configuration is such that a completion flag is set when the value of the second timer reaches 300 and result display image data is displayed according to the value of the second timer, the display counter used in the fourth embodiment above will be unnecessary.

Furthermore, if step S4104 of the press performance processing shown in FIG. 61 is configured to determine whether the value of the second timer is less than or equal to 300, a completion flag is not necessary.

(40) In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the second timer was set to 300 when the result display was completed, but this configuration will be changed.

Specifically, when the result display is completed, the system determines whether the value of the first timer is 0. If the value of the first timer is not 0, the menu start operation becomes valid when the value of the first timer reaches 0, i.e., the value of the second timer is not referenced, and the result display process ends without setting the value of the second timer to 300. On the other hand, if the value of the first timer is 0, the menu start operation becomes valid when the value of the second timer, not the first timer, reaches 0, and the result display process ends after setting the value of the second timer to 300.

With the above configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, it is possible to configure the second timer not to operate when a menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer not to operate when a menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

(41) In the fourth embodiment described above, a first timer is provided in the display control device 81, and a menu start operation may be enabled based on the value of the first timer. However, a first timer may be provided in the main control device 101, and a time elapsed command may be sent to the display control device 81 when the value of the first timer reaches 0. In such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the display control device 81 receives the time elapsed command, the display control device 81 terminates the press effect processing and enables the subsequent menu start operation. In addition, if the completion flag is not set when the display control device 81 receives the time elapsed command, the display control device 81 terminates the press effect processing and enables the subsequent menu start operation when the value of the second timer reaches 0. In such a configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment described above, the main control device 101 can specify the start timing of the press display and the timing when the menu start operation becomes enabled, thereby reducing the chance of malfunction.

The first timer may be set to 1000 when it is determined in step S3304 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions, or when it is determined in step S3306 that all stop switches 42 to 44 have reached their unoperated states. It may also be set at another time, such as after an operation end command is sent.

(42) In the fourth embodiment described above, the result display executed when the additional lottery is won and the result display executed when the additional lottery is not won are configured to take the same amount of time to complete, but it goes without saying that a different configuration is also possible. Even in such a configuration, if the second timer is set to 300 after the result display is completed, when the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer, it is possible to make the time from when the result display is completed to when the menu start operation becomes enabled constant.

(43) In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the second timer is set to 300, but any value can be set to the second timer. The same applies to the first timer and the standby timer.

(44) In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the standby timer is not set to 18,000 during the press effect processing. However, if the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, the press effect processing may be terminated after the value of the standby timer is set to 18,000. In such a configuration, the customer wait effect will begin approximately 180 seconds after the press effect processing is terminated.

(45) In the fourth embodiment described above, if the press effect is not executed, the menu start operation is immediately enabled. However, even if the press effect is not executed, the menu start operation may be enabled after approximately 10 seconds have elapsed. To achieve this, for example, in the operation end command processing shown in FIG. 55, if it is determined that an operation end command has been received, the standby timer value is set to 18,000 and the first timer value is set to 1,000. In step S3505, the first timer value is not set to 1,000. Then, in the start wait processing shown in FIG. 56, if it is determined that the effect flag has not been set, it is determined whether the first timer value has reached 0. If it is determined that the first timer value has reached 0, the processing shown in step S3603 and subsequent steps is performed.

(46) In the fourth embodiment described above, when a menu start operation is performed, a menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, a menu screen display unit may be provided separately from the auxiliary display unit 65, and the menu screen may be displayed on the menu screen display unit at all times.

(47) In the fourth embodiment described above, the effect switch 67 has the function of progressing the press effect and the function of displaying the menu screen, but an operation switch for displaying the menu screen may also be provided separately from the effect switch 67.

(48) In the fourth embodiment, the selection menu includes game history, payout table, volume adjustment, and clear game history. However, the types and number of selection menus are arbitrary. Therefore, the selection menu may include a payout table and volume adjustment, or only volume adjustment. It goes without saying that in a configuration where only one type of game information is displayed, the game information can be displayed directly rather than the menu screen when the effect switch 67 is operated.

(49) In the fourth embodiment described above, the push-down effect is configured to notify the player of whether or not the additional lottery has been won, but this is not limited to such a configuration. It may also be configured to notify the player of whether or not the transition lottery in chance mode has been won, or to notify the player of the winning combination.

(50) In the fourth embodiment, a configuration using a subtractive timer was described, but it goes without saying that an incrementing timer may also be used.

(51) In the fourth embodiment described above, the first timer was configured to start counting down when the value of the first timer was set to 1000. However, this configuration is modified. The first timer is configured to be set to 1000 at any timing before the start of the push display, such as when a start command is issued. Then, in step S3505 of the operation end command processing (see FIG. 55), the first timer is allowed to count down. Even with this configuration, the first timer is activated when the processing of step S3505 is performed, and therefore the effects described in the fourth embodiment described above can be achieved.

(52) In the fourth embodiment described above, if a bet number command indicating that the bet number has reached 1 or more is received during the press effect processing, the press effect processing may be terminated and the process may proceed to wait for a start command. In such a configuration, the press effect display or result display displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 will end at the time the player bets medals or virtual medals.

(53) In the fourth embodiment described above, the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective when a press effect is executed has been focused on, and the explanation has been given from that perspective. However, it is clear that the same effect as described above can also be achieved with respect to the timing at which the display transitions to the customer waiting display when a press effect is executed. This is because, as is clear from the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the value of the waiting timer has reached 0 after the press effect process has ended.

(54) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the notification mode ends due to the consumption of the transition game number, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game of the notification mode. However, the end screen may also be displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

(55) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the notification mode ends due to the consumption of the transition game number, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game of the notification mode. However, if the end screen is displayed before at least one reel stops, the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be achieved. This is because sufficient time can be secured to display the end screen.

In this case, if the ending screen is configured to be displayed after the two reels have stopped, it will be possible to determine whether or not a bell win has occurred if at least the push order bell is won, and it will be possible to display the difference in the number of coins won at the end of the notification mode as the number of coins displayed on the ending screen.

(56) In the fifth embodiment described above, an ending effect is displayed when the notification mode ends with a difference of 2,400 coins. However, an ending effect may also be displayed when the notification mode ends with a difference of 1,500 games in the interval.

(57) In the fifth embodiment described above, the notification mode is ended based on the number of games played in the notification mode. However, the notification mode may also be ended based on the number of times the operation sequence performed in the notification mode is not notified. Even in such a configuration, the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be achieved by displaying the end screen based on the reception of a lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won, rather than based on the reception of a start command.

(58) In the fifth embodiment described above, only the display control device 81 is configured to know the number of games to be notified, but it is also possible to configure only the main control device 101 to know the number of games to be notified, or to configure both the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 to know the number of games to be notified.

(59) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the player wins the bonus lottery, the number of bonus games is announced in the pseudo game and in the revival effect. However, the number of bonus games may be announced only in the revival effect.

(60) In the fifth embodiment described above, an additional lottery is held when a rare combination is won in the notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and any configuration can be used as long as it is possible to notify the player that the notification mode will continue using a revival effect. For example, the notification mode may be configured to end after one set of 50 games, and a lottery to add to the number of sets (a revival lottery or a continuation lottery) may be held in a specified game, such as when the notification mode is entered or when one set ends.

(61) In the fifth embodiment described above, the conditions for confirming the end of the notification mode due to a difference of 2400 were that the number of games remaining was greater than 50 and that the difference of coins was greater than 2200, but the conditions can be set arbitrarily. Only the number of games remaining or only the difference of coins may be set as a condition.

(62) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the end of the notification mode is confirmed due to a difference of 2400 coins, the ending effect is configured to start from the next game. However, the timing of starting the ending effect is arbitrary. The ending effect may be configured to start from the next game when the difference of coins reaches 2300, or the ending effect may be configured to start from the next game when the difference of coins reaches 2250. In other words, the ending effect may start from the number of games corresponding to the length of the prepared ending video.

(63) In the fifth embodiment described above, the end screen is displayed continuously until the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode occurs. However, the end screen may be displayed only in the first game, and other auxiliary effects may be executed from the second game onwards.

(64) In the fifth embodiment described above, the advantageous zone ends when the notification mode ends, and the event of the advantageous zone ending does not occur in the chance mode. However, the advantageous zone may end in the chance mode. For example, the chance mode may be configured to hold a lottery to determine the end of the advantageous zone in addition to a lottery to transition to the notification mode, or the chance mode may be transitioned to after the notification mode ends.

(65) In the fifth embodiment, the system is configured not to transition from the normal section to the notification mode, but it may be configured to transition to the notification mode.

(66) In the fifth embodiment described above, a suggestion jewel or a fixed jewel is displayed when the lottery for transitioning to chance mode is not won. However, instead of or in addition to this, a suggestion jewel or a fixed jewel may be displayed when the lottery for transitioning to chance mode is won.

(67) In the fifth embodiment, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is suggested or notified by the suggesting jewel or the fixed jewel. However, any other configuration that suggests or notifies advantageous information that is advantageous to the player can achieve the effects described in the fifth embodiment. Representative examples of advantageous information include a configuration that suggests or notifies the destination of the chance mode in a configuration with multiple chance modes that have different winning probabilities for the transition lottery to the notification mode, or a configuration that suggests or notifies the set ceiling game number in a configuration in which multiple ceiling game numbers (transition game numbers) can be set in the chance mode.

(68) In the fifth embodiment, the fixed jewel is displayed from the sixth game onwards in the normal section, but it may also be configured to display the fixed jewel with a predetermined probability in the first to fifth games in the normal section. In other words, it is sufficient that the accuracy of the setting suggestion increases depending on the number of games played in the normal section.

(69) In the fifth embodiment described above, the suggestion jewels and fixed jewels are displayed at the start of the game, but the timing of display is arbitrary. Also, the suggestion jewels and fixed jewels are hidden after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, but they may be continuously displayed until the game transitions to chance mode. Furthermore, in a configuration capable of displaying a menu screen, when the game history is selected, the suggestion jewels and fixed jewels that have been displayed up to that point may be displayed.

(70) In the fifth embodiment, the end screen displayed the fact that the notification mode has ended and the number of medals acquired. However, the end screen may be configured to display only the fact that the notification mode has ended, or may display only the number of medals acquired. Furthermore, the display of the end of the notification mode is not limited to actual text such as "End of notification mode," and may also display the end of the notification mode by a specified action such as a specified character crying and waving its hands.

(71) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the end screen is displayed, the display of the number of medals won is not changed thereafter. However, when the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode, the display of the number of medals won may be changed depending on the game result of the final game (whether or not a win is achieved). Furthermore, the display of the number of medals won may also be changed during the normal interval.

(72) In the sixth embodiment, two winning combinations, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1 and Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, were provided for when a bell win occurs in the left-centre-right operation sequence. However, it goes without saying that only one combination is sufficient. The same applies to left-centre-right bells, centre-left-right bells, centre-right-left bells, right-left-centre bells, and right-centre-left bells.

(73) In the sixth embodiment described above, for example, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of center left and right, the small prize 3 is achieved regardless of whether the winning combination is center left right bell 1, center left left bell 2, or the first special bell. However, the type of bell prize that is achieved may differ depending on the winning combination. For example, if center left left bell 1 is won, small prize 3 is achieved, if center left left bell 2 is won, small prize 4 is achieved, and if the first special bell is won, small prize 1 is achieved. Even with this configuration, the event of achieving a bell prize that results in the payout of eight medals remains unchanged, and therefore the same effects as in the sixth embodiment described above can be achieved.

(74) In the sixth embodiment described above, there are six different operation sequences that can result in a bell win, but the type of operation sequence can be any. For example, there may be three different sequences depending on which of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, or two different sequences depending on whether the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Alternatively, there may be four different sequences, such as center left/right, center right/left, right left/center, and right center left. If, in addition to the above operation sequences, it is also required to operate a specific stop switch at a specific timing, more than six different types of push order bells can be set.

(75) In the sixth embodiment, the left, center, and right bells 1 and 2 and the left, right, and center bells 1 and 2 are included in push order group 1, while the winning combination that results in a bell win in the above operation sequence is not included in push order group 2. However, if the winning combinations in all operation sequences that can result in a bell win are included in push order group 1, and the winning combinations in a specific operation sequence that can result in a bell win are not included in push order group 2, the same effects as those in the sixth embodiment can be achieved.

(76) In the sixth embodiment, the winning probabilities of winning roles belonging to push order group 1 are equal. However, the winning probabilities of winning roles belonging to push order group 1 may be different. For example, in push order group 1, the point value PV of left, center, and right bells 1 and 2 and left, center, and right bells 1 and 2 is 1960, and the point value PV of other push order bells is 1990. Even with this configuration, if the operation order is always notified when push order group 2 is won, the difference in the frequency of bell wins due to the operation order can be reduced when the operation order is not notified in notification mode A and notification mode B. As a result, it is possible to prevent disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, and to allow players to enjoy the game regardless of their level of knowledge.

(77) In the sixth embodiment described above, if push order group 2 is selected in notification mode, the operation sequence is always announced. However, the operation sequence may be announced with a predetermined probability, such as 90%, for example. Even with such a configuration, if the operation sequence is not announced in notification mode A and notification mode B, the difference in the frequency of bell wins depending on the operation sequence can be reduced.

In addition, if the operation sequence is not announced when push order group 2 is selected, it is desirable to display "×??" on the auxiliary display unit 65, indicating that the operation sequence is based on the center or right.

(78) In the sixth embodiment described above, the navigation determination process makes a determination based on the push order group, so that when the operation order is not notified in notification mode, the probability of winning a bell is the same regardless of the operation order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. However, this configuration will be changed.

Figure 90 shows another example of a lottery table. Note that in Figure 90, to facilitate comparison with the sixth embodiment, the first to fourth special bells are listed and the point value PV is set to 0 (no win), but these are unnecessary.

A point value PV of 1980 is set for left-center-right Bell 1, left-center-right Bell 2, left-center-left Bell 1, and left-center-left Bell 2, and a point value PV of 4070 is set for center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-right-left Bell 1, center-right-left Bell 2, right-left-center Bell 1, right-left-center Bell 2, right-center-left Bell 1, and right-center-left Bell 2.

Left-center-right Bell 1, left-center-right Bell 2, left-center-left Bell 1, and left-center-left Bell 2 are the left correct bells, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-right-left Bell 1, and center-right-left Bell 2 are the center correct bells, and right-left-center Bell 1, right-left-center Bell 2, right-center-left Bell 1, and right-center-left Bell 2 are the right correct bells. In this case, the probability of winning the left correct bell is 7920 in 65,535, the probability of winning the center correct bell is 16,280 in 65,535, and the probability of winning the right correct bell is 16,280 in 65,535.

In notification mode A, if the left correct bell is won, it is determined that there is a 0 in 7920 chance of navigation, if the middle correct bell is won, it is determined that there is an 8360 in 16280 chance of navigation, and if the right correct bell is won, it is determined that there is an 8360 in 16280 chance of navigation.

With this configuration, the value for determining that navigation will not be performed will be 7920 regardless of whether the correct left bell, center bell, or right bell is the correct left bell. Therefore, when the operation order is not notified in notification mode, the probability of winning a bell is the same regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

In notification mode B, if the left correct bell is won, there is a 1920/7920 chance of navigation; if the middle correct bell is won, there is a 10280/16280 chance of navigation; and if the right correct bell is won, there is a 10280/16280 chance of navigation.

With this configuration, the value for determining that navigation will not be performed will be 6000 regardless of whether the correct left bell, center bell, or right bell is the correct right bell. Therefore, when the operation order is not notified in notification mode, the probability of winning a bell is the same regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

(79) In the sixth embodiment, the system is configured to have three types of notification modes, A, B, and C, which have different navigation rates. However, the system may be configured to have only notification mode A or B, or may have any two of the three modes. It may also be configured to have four or more notification modes with different navigation rates.

(80) In the sixth embodiment described above, when transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, notification mode A is started, but this is not limited to such a configuration, and notification mode B or C may be started with a predetermined probability.

(81) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the operation sequence is not notified in the notification mode, the promotion effect is always performed, but the promotion effect may also be performed with a predetermined probability.

(82) In the sixth embodiment described above, a promotion lottery is held when a bell win is achieved in a game in which a promotion effect is performed. However, a promotion lottery may be held regardless of whether a bell win is achieved. Furthermore, a point lottery may be held when a bell win is achieved in a game in which a promotion effect is performed, and the navigation rate may be increased when a predetermined point value is reached.

(83) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the operation sequence is not notified in the notification mode, a promotion lottery may be held. However, instead of or in addition to this, a bonus lottery that increases the value of the transition game number counter may be held.

(84) In the sixth embodiment described above, when a rare combination is won in notification mode, an additional lottery is held. However, instead of or in addition to this, a promotion lottery may be held.

(85) In the sixth embodiment, the promotion effect displayed "???" to prompt the player to select one of six possible operation sequences, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, the stop switch to be operated first may be displayed as "1??", "?1?", "??1", and the player may then select the stop switch to be operated second or subsequent times.

Alternatively, the stop switch to be operated last can be displayed as "3??", "?3?", "??3", and the player can select the first and second stop switches to operate.

(86) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal section or chance mode, the result of the transition lottery is invalidated even if the player wins. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, the transition lottery is configured to be held after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set to high, and if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set to low.

For example, the transition lottery may be configured to be held after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the transition lottery will be held, but if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the transition lottery will not be held.

(87) In the sixth embodiment described above, when the push order bell is won, either a bell win in which eight medals are paid out or a win in which one medal is paid out is always achieved. However, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation sequence that does not allow a bell win to be achieved, a missed win in which neither win is achieved may occur.

(88) In the seventh embodiment described above, if 700 three-coin games are played in chance mode without winning the transition lottery, the next game will transition to notification mode. However, similar to when the transition lottery is won, the next game may transition to notification mode after 3 to 5 games of showdown presentation. Also, if 697 three-coin games are played in chance mode without winning the transition lottery, the next game may transition to notification mode after 3 games of showdown presentation.

(89) In the seventh embodiment described above, if the number of games in deficit is one or more, the number of games in deficit is added to the value of the transition game number counter. However, it is also possible to configure it so that this is not added. In such a configuration, if the additional lottery is not won, the notification mode will end in the middle of the showdown presentation, and if the additional lottery is won, part of the additional game number will be consumed during the showdown presentation.

(90) In the seventh embodiment described above, when the bonus lottery is won, the number of bonus games in that game is added to the value of the transition game number counter. However, the number of bonus games may also be added to the value of the transition game number counter when the value of the competition game number counter reaches 0, i.e., after the competition presentation ends.

(91) In the seventh embodiment, if a rare combination is won, a competition effect lottery is held regardless of whether or not the additional lottery is won. However, the competition effect lottery may also be held even if a rare combination is not won.

(92) In the seventh embodiment, a value between 3 and 5 was acquired as the number of match games, but the acquired value can be any value. It may be configured to acquire only 3 as the number of match games, or it may be configured to acquire a value between 2 and 10.

(93) In the seventh embodiment described above, the value obtained in the match game number lottery is the same when the additional lottery is won and when the additional lottery is not won, but this may be configured differently.

For example, if the player wins the bonus lottery, the number of games played will be a value between 3 and 5; if the player does not win the bonus lottery, the number of games played will be a value between 5 and 7. With this configuration, if the competition effect continues for six or more games, the player will not win the bonus lottery, but since the number of games missing increases the chances of the notification mode being extended, it is possible to effectively mitigate the player's disappointment.

(94) In the seventh embodiment, if the match-game lottery is won, a predetermined effect is performed in all games corresponding to the match game number. However, it is also possible to configure some games without an effect, such as a premonition effect. For example, if the match game number is 7, a one-game-long promotional effect is performed in the first and third games, no effect is performed in the second and fourth games, and a match-game effect is performed in the fifth through seventh games.

(95) In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of games in which the competition presentation is executed in the notification mode is configured not to change midway, but it may also be configured so that it can be changed midway.

(96) In the seventh embodiment, the auxiliary effects for notifying the player of whether or not they have won the additional lottery include a competition effect and a simulated game, but the configuration may not include a simulated game.

(97) It goes without saying that the seventh embodiment may be configured to include auxiliary effects that are completed in one game in addition to the duel effects. In this case, the decision as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary effects may be made by the display control device 81, since there will be no shortage of games as in the case of duel effects.

(98) In the seventh embodiment, the notification mode was configured to notify the player of whether or not they had won the additional lottery through a competition presentation, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, in a configuration in which a stock lottery is held in notification mode, the winner of the stock lottery will be notified through a competition effect.

For example, the notification modes may include notification mode A and notification mode B, which can add to the number of games playable in notification mode A with a high probability. If a player wins the transition lottery in notification mode A, the player can play in notification mode B a predetermined number of times, such as 10 times, after which the system will return to notification mode A. In this configuration, the player is notified of whether or not they have won the transition lottery through a showdown presentation.

(99) In the seventh embodiment described above, a configuration was described in which only a showdown effect was provided as an effect that spans multiple games. However, it goes without saying that a configuration may also be used in which effects that span multiple games are provided in addition to the showdown effect. In such a configuration, for example, if effects A and B are provided as effects that span three games, and effects C and D are provided as effects that span four games, the main control device 101 may determine the effect period (3 or 4) for which the effect will be executed, and the display control device 81 may determine which effect to execute depending on the effect period.

(100) In the seventh embodiment described above, it goes without saying that if the display control device 81 decides to execute a defeat showdown effect in chance mode and three coins are played for the 700th time during the defeat showdown effect, the defeat showdown effect may be switched to a victory showdown effect.

(101) In the seventh embodiment described above, if a transition lottery is won during a defeat showdown presentation in chance mode, the defeat showdown presentation ends midway and the victory showdown presentation starts from the beginning. However, as long as the number of games in which the showdown presentation is executed is changed midway, the content of the presentation to be executed is arbitrary. Therefore, in a game in which a victory command is received, i.e., a game in which the transition lottery is won, control may be exercised to output showdown presentation midway video data to the auxiliary display unit 65, rather than control to output showdown presentation start video data to the auxiliary display unit 65.

(102) In the eighth embodiment described above, the navigation counter value is updated when a three-coin play is performed in chance mode. However, as with the notification mode, the navigation counter value may be updated regardless of whether a three-coin play or a two-coin play is performed. In such a configuration, the navigation counter value can be updated each time a single play is performed in the advantageous zone, making it possible to reduce the amount of data compared to a configuration in which the navigation counter is updated according to the play mode. Note that in chance mode, the navigation counter value may be updated when the push order bell is won, or the navigation counter value may be updated when a different role other than the push order bell is won, such as a replay.

(103) In the eighth embodiment described above, the navigation counter value is updated in the notification mode regardless of whether a three-coin play or a two-coin play is performed. However, the navigation counter value may also be updated when a three-coin play is performed, as in the chance mode. In such a configuration, the navigation counter value can be updated each time a play is performed in the advantageous zone, making it possible to reduce the amount of data compared to a configuration in which the navigation counter is updated according to the play mode. Note that the navigation counter value may be updated in the notification mode when the push order bell is won, or when a different role than the push order bell is won, such as a replay. Alternatively, the navigation counter value may be updated in the notification mode when the navigation lottery is lost.

(104) In the eighth embodiment described above, the navigation counter update process is performed during the game section process, i.e., the navigation counter update process is performed at the end of the game, but it may also be performed at the start of the game, such as during lottery processing.

(105) In the eighth embodiment described above, the navigation counter update process is configured to update the navigation counter value in both chance mode and notification mode, but it may also be configured to update the navigation counter value only in chance mode. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the current mode is chance mode is added before step S80201, and if the current mode is chance mode, the process proceeds to step S80201, and if the current mode is notification mode but not chance mode, the process proceeds to step S80203. In this configuration, the frequency with which the operation sequence is announced will be higher than 50% only in the first push order bell winning game after switching to notification mode, and in the second and subsequent push order bell winning games, the operation sequence will be announced 50% of the time unless the current mode is switched to notification mode B.

(106) In the eighth embodiment described above, the navigation counter was used to increase the frequency of notification of the operation sequence in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode. However, this configuration will be changed. When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, the first flag is set. In the navigation determination process, step S80404 determines whether the first flag is set, and if the first flag is set, the first flag is cleared and the navigation flag is set. With this configuration, the frequency of notification of the operation sequence will be higher than 50% only in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode, and in the second and subsequent push order bell winning games, the operation sequence will be notified at a rate of 50% unless transitioning to notification mode B is performed.

(107) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation counter was used to increase the frequency of notification of the operation order in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode. However, this configuration will be changed. In the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode, the probability of winning the navigation lottery will be higher than 50%, for example 80%, and in the second and subsequent push order bell winning games, the probability of winning the navigation lottery will be 50% unless transitioning to notification mode B is made.

(108) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation lottery is configured to have a 50% chance of winning, but the chance of winning the navigation lottery is arbitrary.

(109) In the eighth embodiment, a navigation lottery was performed with a 50% chance of winning, but this configuration can be modified. A loop counter that loops between two values, 0 and 1, is provided, and the value of the loop counter is updated when the push order bell is won. If the loop counter is updated before the navigation determination process, the operation sequence is announced when the loop counter value is 1, and the operation sequence is not announced when the loop counter value is 0. If the loop counter is updated at the end of play, the operation sequence is announced when the loop counter value is 0, and the operation sequence is not announced when the loop counter value is 1. Even with this configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration that announces the operation sequence with a 50% chance.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, the operation order can always be announced in the first push order bell winning game after switching to notification mode, so if the function is limited to increasing the frequency of operation order announcements in the first push order bell winning game after switching to notification mode, the configuration related to the navigation counter in the above eighth embodiment is unnecessary. When the above configuration is combined with the configuration related to the navigation counter, the configuration related to the navigation counter will function as a remedy in cases where the push order bell has not been won in eight or more games.

(110) In the eighth embodiment described above, the navigation determination process is configured to check the value of the navigation counter if the navigation lottery result is unsuccessful. However, the navigation lottery may be performed after the value of the navigation counter is checked.

(111) In the eighth embodiment described above, if the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is won, the game transitions from chance mode to notification mode A. However, the game may also be configured so that there are cases where the game transitions from chance mode to notification mode A and cases where the game transitions from chance mode to notification mode B.

(112) In the eighth embodiment described above, the navigation counter is initialized when the operation sequence is notified in notification mode, but the navigation counter may not be initialized.

(113) In the eighth embodiment described above, the operation sequence is notified when the navigation counter value is greater than 7, but the navigation counter value when notifying the operation sequence is arbitrary. However, if the navigation counter value is made small, the navigation rate in notification mode A will increase, and if the navigation counter value is made large, this will lead to an increased chance that the player will run out of medals in notification mode.

(114) In the eighth embodiment described above, if a rare combination is won between the transition to notification mode and the 50th game, a promotion lottery is held. However, the period for which the promotion lottery is held is arbitrary. The period for which the promotion lottery is held may be from the transition to notification mode until the 30th game, or from the transition to notification mode until notification mode A ends. Furthermore, the promotion lottery may be held from the fulfillment of a specified condition, such as when a bell win is achieved in a push order bell winning game in which the operation order is not announced, until a predetermined number of games, such as 10 games, has elapsed.

(115) In the eighth embodiment described above, if the player did not win the additional lottery, they could play 100 times in total in notification mode A and notification mode B. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, if the player does not win the promotion lottery, 100 plays will be possible in notification mode A; if the player wins the promotion lottery, notification mode A will end for that game, but 100 plays will be possible in notification mode B.

For example, if the promotion lottery is not won, 100 plays will be possible in notification mode A. If the promotion lottery is won, regardless of when the promotion lottery was won, 100 plays will be played in notification mode A, after which the game will switch to notification mode B, and 100 plays will be possible in notification mode B.

(116) The above-mentioned eighth embodiment may be appropriately combined with the above-mentioned sixth embodiment. That is, the symbol arrangement and winning mode in the above-mentioned sixth embodiment may be applied, or a configuration may be adopted in which three notification modes with different navigation rates are provided, as in the above-mentioned sixth embodiment. Also, in the above-mentioned eighth embodiment, a promotion lottery is held when a rare combination is won, but a promotion lottery may also be held when the operation order is not announced in the push order bell winning game.

(117) In the above ninth embodiment, the liquid crystal control device 251 is configured to drive and control the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65. However, it is also possible to configure the liquid crystal control device 251 to drive and control the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65, and the performance control device 201 to drive and control the upper lamp 63. It is also possible to configure the liquid crystal control device 251 to drive and control the auxiliary display unit 65, and the performance control device 201 to drive and control the upper lamp 63 and speaker 64.

(118) In the above ninth embodiment, the BGM output processing is performed by the VDP 253, but it may also be performed by the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251. If the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 is configured to perform the processing, the layer may be provided in the RAM of the liquid crystal control device 251.

(119) In the ninth embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels provided is arbitrary.

(120) In the ninth embodiment, a seven-layer structure is used, but the number of layers may be any number.

(121) In the above ninth embodiment, a layer for CH4 was described, but a configuration in which layers are provided for all channels CH0 to CH31, or a configuration in which layers are provided for some channels, such as CH4 to CH13, may also be used. Furthermore, the number of layers constituting each channel may differ, for example, the layer for CH4 may be configured to consist of seven layers and the layer for CH0 may be configured to consist of four layers.

(122) In the ninth embodiment, when a rare winning combination is achieved, the volume of the background music is reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB, but the amount of reduction is arbitrary. For example, if the volume of the background music is reduced to -12.0 dB, or approximately one-quarter of the original volume, the sixth layer of the CH4 layer should be set to "32" instead of "64." Also, if the volume of the background music is reduced to -2.5 dB, or approximately three-quarters of the original volume, the sixth layer of the CH4 layer should be set to "96" instead of "64."

(123) In the ninth embodiment, when a rare combination is achieved, the rare combination winning sound is output at 0.0 dB. However, if the sound is output at a volume greater than -6.0 dB, it can be output at a volume louder than the background music, and the above-mentioned effects can be expected to be achieved.

(124) In the ninth embodiment described above, when a rare winning combination is achieved, the volume of the background music is reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. However, instead of or in addition to this, when a general winning combination is achieved, the volume of the background music may be reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. Furthermore, the volume of the background music may be reduced to different degrees when a rare winning combination is achieved and when a general winning combination is achieved.

(125) In the ninth embodiment, two types of rare roles, cherry and watermelon, were set as rare roles, but it goes without saying that three or more types of roles may be set as rare roles. In this case, the output time of the rare role winning sound may be configured to differ for each role, or the output time of the rare role winning sound may be configured to differ depending on the degree of expectation for the award of a special prize.

For example, in a configuration with rare symbol A, which has a probability of winning in the lottery to transition to the notification mode with approximately a 1/2 chance, and rare symbol B and rare symbol C, which have a probability of winning in the lottery to transition to the notification mode with approximately a 1/3 chance, if rare symbol A wins, the rare symbol winning sound may be output for 2000 msec, and if rare symbol B or rare symbol C wins, the rare symbol winning sound may be output for 1000 msec.

(126) In the ninth embodiment, the time from when the rare combination winning sound ends until the background music volume returns to 0.0 dB is different for a watermelon winning and a cherry winning, but it may be the same.

Furthermore, if three or more types of roles are set as rare roles, the recovery time until the BGM volume returns to 0.0 dB may be different for each role, or the recovery time may be different depending on the expectation of receiving a special bonus.

For example, in a configuration with rare role A, which has a probability of winning in the lottery to transition to the notification mode with approximately a 1/2 chance, and rare roles B and C, which have a probability of winning in the lottery to transition to the notification mode with approximately a 1/3 chance, if rare role A wins, the volume of the background music may be configured to return to 0.0 dB 800 msec after the output of the rare role winning sound has ended, and if rare role B or rare role C wins, the volume of the background music may be configured to return to 0.0 dB 500 msec after the output of the rare role winning sound has ended.

(127) In the ninth embodiment, the BGM fade-in control is started after the output of the rare winning sound has finished. However, the BGM fade-in control may be started so that the BGM volume returns to 0.0 dB when the output of the rare winning sound has finished.

(128) In the ninth embodiment, the rare winning combination, the time when the winning sound is output, and the time when fade-in control is performed correspond to each other. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, if a rare winning combination is achieved in chance mode, and the lottery for transitioning to notification mode is won, there is an approximately 90% chance that winning sound A will be output, and an approximately 10% chance that winning sound B will be output. If the lottery for transitioning to notification mode is not won, there is an approximately 90% chance that winning sound B will be output, and an approximately 10% chance that winning sound A will be output. Winning sound A is output for 2000 msec, and once the output of winning sound A has finished, the background music volume is returned to 0.0 dB after 800 msec has elapsed. Winning sound B is output for 1000 msec, and once the output of winning sound B has finished, the background music volume is returned to 0.0 dB after 500 msec has elapsed.

With the above configuration, the expectation of transitioning to notification mode changes depending on whether winning sound A or winning sound B is output. Therefore, if the player is unable to determine which winning sound has been output, this could lead to a decrease in anticipation for transitioning to notification mode, raising concerns that this could reduce interest in the game. However, with a configuration in which the volume of the background music is reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB when winning sound A or winning sound B is output, and the volume of the background music is faded in from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB when the output of winning sound A or winning sound B has ended, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns and increase interest in the game.

(129) In the above ninth embodiment, a processing configuration related to the output of background music was described, but it goes without saying that this may also be applied to processing configurations related to the output of other sounds such as sound effects and jingles.

(130) In the ninth embodiment, the fade-in control is initiated when the output of the rare winning sound has finished, but the fade-in control may be initiated at other times.

For example, if a player performs a game start operation in power saving mode, fade-in control will be initiated.

Simply put, when switching to power-saving mode, the second layer of the CH4 layer is set to "64." This means that in power-saving mode, the background music volume will be reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. When a game start operation is performed under these circumstances, fade-in control will be initiated, periodically updating the volume value of the second layer of the CH4 layer up to 128.

This configuration reduces the chances that a player who is about to start a new game will be surprised by the sudden increase in the volume of the background music, which could reduce their motivation to play, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Game start operations include a bet operation by directly inserting medals or by operating the first to third credit insertion switches 56-58, and a start command issuance operation by operating the start lever 41 after a bet operation. However, the fade-in control may be configured to start when a bet operation is performed, or when a start command operation is performed. If the fade-in control is configured to start when a bet operation is performed, fade-in control can be performed before a start command operation is performed, making it possible to return the background music volume to 0.0 dB before a game round begins.

(131) In the ninth embodiment, the rare role was configured to have the function of conducting a lottery to transition to the notification mode and an additional lottery, but this configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it provides a predetermined benefit other than the benefit associated with a winning combination, or provides the expectation of providing a predetermined benefit. Therefore, in a so-called Type A slot machine, a role that can be won in combination with BB may be considered a rare role. When such a rare role win is achieved, a rare role winning sound may be output, and the background music output may be reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB.

(132) In the tenth embodiment described above, when the output of the story part is completed, the music part is repeatedly output until the advantageous section ends. However, it goes without saying that the story part may also be repeatedly output until the advantageous section ends.

(133) In the above tenth embodiment, the value of the data number storage area is changed to 1 when the error is resolved. However, it is also possible to configure the value of the data number storage area not to be changed if the value of the file number storage area is not changed. In such a configuration, when the error is resolved, it becomes possible to resume the ending movie from where it was interrupted.

(134) In the above tenth embodiment, the data used when playing the ending movie is divided and stored into eight files: story parts 1 to 7 and a music part, but the number of divided files is arbitrary. For example, the data may be divided and stored into two files: a story part and a music part, or into four files: three story parts and one music part. If the number of divided files is increased, the time required to play one file can be shortened, and therefore the length of the overlapping ending movie can be shortened when the error is resolved.

(135) In the above tenth embodiment, the data used when playing the ending movie is divided into eight files, Story Part 1 to Story Part 7 and Music Part, and stored. However, it may also be stored in a single file without being divided. However, if such a configuration is used, it is desirable to configure it so that a seconds pointer indicating the elapsed time since the start of the ending movie can be set, and that if an error occurs, the ending movie is resumed from the position corresponding to the seconds pointer.

(136) In the above tenth embodiment, the story part 3 file and the story part 6 file were composed of playback data and pause data, but it goes without saying that they may also be composed of playback data only. Furthermore, pause data may also be provided in files other than those mentioned above.

(137) In the tenth embodiment, if the completion condition is met, the ending movie is configured to start from the next game. However, the conditions for starting the ending movie are arbitrary. For example, the ending movie may be configured to start when the difference in number of coins in the notification mode exceeds a predetermined number, such as 1,000 coins, or when the number of games played in the notification mode exceeds a predetermined number, such as 100 games.

(138) In the above tenth embodiment, the completion conditions were set as the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone reaching 2400 in the notification mode and the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaching 3000 in the notification mode. However, the completion condition may be set only as the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone reaching 2400 in the notification mode, or as the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaching 3000 in the notification mode. Other conditions may also be set as the completion conditions.

(139) In the tenth embodiment, a restart operation is notified when an error is resolved, but the restart operation may not be notified.

(140) In the tenth embodiment described above, the ending movie is configured to resume when the error is resolved or a restart operation is performed, but it may also be configured to resume when the error is resolved. For example, in the case of a hopper empty error, the operation performed by the amusement facility manager or the like to resolve the error includes pressing the reset switch 72 after replenishing medals and closing the front door 12. Therefore, if the ending movie is configured to resume when the error is resolved, it may be configured to resume when the reset switch 72 is pressed, or it may be configured to resume when the front door 12 is closed.

(141) In the tenth embodiment, issuing a command to start the next game was set as the restart operation, but this is not limited to this configuration and any operation that the player can perform may be set as the restart operation. Therefore, in a configuration that includes an effect switch, operating the effect switch, i.e., an operation that does not affect the progress of the game round, may be set as the restart operation, or an operation that affects the progress of the game round, such as betting medals, may be set as the restart operation.

(142) In the tenth embodiment, the advancement conditions were set to the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone, the number of games in the advantageous zone, and the elapsed time. However, it is also possible to set only the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone, or to set only the number of games in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, in a configuration in which the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone and the number of games in the advantageous zone are set as the end conditions of the advantageous zone, the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone and the number of games in the advantageous zone are set as the advancement conditions. The advancement conditions may be configured to set conditions that correspond to the end conditions of the advantageous zone. Therefore, in a configuration in which only the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone is set as the end condition of the advantageous zone, it is sufficient to set only the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone as the advancement condition.

(143) In the tenth embodiment described above, when the ending movie starts, the data for story parts 1 to 7 and the music part data are output consecutively, regardless of the player's operation. However, it is also possible to output specific data based on the player's operation.

For example, an ending movie is composed of story part A, story part B, and a music part. Data for outputting story part A is divided into three files, story part 1 to story part 3, and stored. Data for outputting story part B is divided into four files, story part 4 to story part 7, and stored. Data for outputting the music part is stored in a single file. Story part A is repeatedly output from the time the completion condition is met until the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,240. In other words, data for story part 1 to story part 3 is output continuously regardless of the player's operation, and when the final data for story part 3 is output, the data returns to story part 1. When the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,240, story part B is repeatedly output from the next game, i.e., when a command to start the next game is issued, until the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,350. When the difference in number of coins in the advantageous period reaches 2,350, the music part will be repeatedly output from the next game, i.e., when a command to start the next game is issued, until the advantageous period ends.

Even with this configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the tenth embodiment described above can be achieved.

(144) In the tenth embodiment, if the number of errors after the start of the ending movie is four or more, the ending movie is configured to start from the beginning of the file following the file where the error occurred, but the number of errors before moving on to the next file is arbitrary.

(145) In the above tenth embodiment, the ending movie presentation was configured, but it may also be a presentation during a specific AT that starts under certain conditions, a presentation during consecutive presentations, or a presentation during a big bonus. For example, an episode AT (episode bonus) may be an AT that plays a music part after executing a 200-second movie presentation of story parts 1 to 7, and when the episode AT is interrupted due to an error, the presentation may be played back from the number of the story part that was interrupted.

(146) In the tenth embodiment described above, the ending performance is interrupted when an error occurs. However, an error screen can be displayed on a higher layer of the LCD when an error occurs, with the ending performance itself continuing in the background. When the error screen is displayed on the higher layer, the error information can be displayed on a black screen that completely obscures the ending performance, making it appear as if the ending performance has been interrupted. Alternatively, the error information can be displayed on a translucent gray screen so that the ending performance can be seen to be progressing through the screen. In this case, the file number where the error occurred is stored, and the ending performance itself continues in the background. When the error is resolved, the file number where the error occurred is determined to be the starting point for playback. In this way, when an error screen is displayed on a higher layer of the performance image when an error occurs, the same error screen can be displayed in the same way when an error occurs during the ending performance, thereby achieving standardized error processing. Specifically, in the case of a door open error, the performance at that time continues and the message "Door is open" is displayed on a higher layer of the LCD, allowing error control to be performed using the same common processing as for errors.

(147) In the eleventh embodiment, a configuration with seven levels of winning probability was described, but the number of winning probabilities may be any number.

(148) In the eleventh embodiment described above, a different notification is issued when the setting value is any of 1 to 6 and when the setting value is 7, but this is not limited to such a configuration. It may also be configured to issue different notifications when the setting value is 4 and when the setting value is any of 1 to 3 or 5 to 7, or it may be configured to issue different notifications when the setting value is any of 1 to 3 and when the setting value is any of 4 to 7. It may also be configured to issue different notifications for each setting value.

(149) In the eleventh embodiment described above, the opening sound used to notify that the front door 12 is open is different when the setting value is any of 1 to 6 and when the setting value is 7. However, instead of or in addition to this, different alarm sounds may be used to notify of predetermined errors, such as a reserve tank full error, or different predetermined sounds, such as the sound of medals being dispensed. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to sound, a display may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, or the lighting state of the upper lamp 63, lower panel, etc. may be changed.

(150) In the above eleventh embodiment, the normal opening sound and the special opening sound have the same notification content, that is, that the front door 12 is open, but the gender of the output voice is different. However, the gender of the voice may be the same but the notification content may be different, or both the notification content and the gender of the voice may be different. For example, the normal opening sound may notify the opening of the front door 12 by saying "The door is open," and the special opening sound may be configured to say "Is this okay?", implying that the front door 12 is open and that the set value is 7.

It goes without saying that the opening of the front door 12 can be notified by a specific piece of music, with different music being output for the normal opening sound and the special opening sound.

(151) In the eleventh embodiment, the opening sound was different when the setting value was 7 and when the setting value was any of 1 to 6. However, this configuration will be changed. When notifying that the front door 12 is open, the normal opening sound is output regardless of whether the setting value is 1 to 7. However, when the setting value is 7, a predetermined warning sound is output for a certain period of time before the normal opening sound is output. Note that it is also possible to output both the normal opening sound and the predetermined warning sound using multiple channels.

(152) In the eleventh embodiment described above, a setting change sound is output when a setting change operation is being performed. However, instead of or in addition to this, a normal opening sound or a special opening sound may be output.

(153) In the eleventh embodiment described above, when the front door 12 is closed with the set value at 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally on, is turned off for 30 seconds. However, the lamp may remain off until a predetermined cancellation operation is performed. The predetermined cancellation operation may be the operation of an operating means such as the start lever 41, or the operation of changing the set value to a value other than 7.

(154) In the above eleventh embodiment, the start operation was defined as inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. However, the start operation may also be opening the front door 12 and inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on, or the start operation may be inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on, and then turning the power switch 71 on. Furthermore, an operation other than inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on may also be defined as the start operation.

(155) In the above 11th embodiment, the setting key OFF wait process is configured to end when "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer 10 times in succession after "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the 1st area and "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer. However, the number of times "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area is arbitrary.

(156) In the 11th embodiment, the setting key OFF wait process may be configured to end when the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a is detected.

(157) In the eleventh embodiment described above, the setting value is saved in the display buffer when a change operation is performed, and is stored in the setting value storage area when an end operation is performed. However, the setting value in the setting value storage area may also be changed when a change operation is performed.

(158) In the eleventh embodiment described above, the setting value is displayed on the dispensed coin count display unit 62 when a change operation is performed. However, the setting value may not be displayed, or may be displayed on a display unit other than the dispensed coin count display unit 62. Furthermore, a display unit that displays the setting value may be provided inside the housing 11.

(159) In the above eleventh embodiment, a slot machine 10 with variable winning probabilities was described as an example, but it goes without saying that the present invention may also be applied to a pachinko machine with variable winning probabilities.

(160) In the twelfth embodiment described above, when the push order bell is won in notification mode B, the decision on whether to increase the number of notification mode A games is made up to two times in that game, but it goes without saying that it may be made three or more times.

(161) In the twelfth embodiment, when the push order bell is won in notification mode B, a determination is made at the start and end of the game as to whether to increase the number of notification mode A games. However, if the determination is made based on the progress of the game, it is expected that the same effects as those of the twelfth embodiment can be achieved. Therefore, for example, the determination may be made when the first stop command is issued and when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. Alternatively, the determination may be made before the operation of stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective and when the second stop command is issued. Furthermore, the determination may be made before the operation of stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective and when the first stop command is issued, the second stop command is issued, and the third stop command is issued.

(162) In the 12th embodiment, if the push order bell is won in notification mode B and the all-navigation lottery is won, the number of notification mode A games is increased. However, a lottery to determine whether to increase the number of notification mode A games may be held separately from the all-navigation lottery. In such a configuration, if the lottery to determine whether to increase the number of notification mode A games is lost, a third-party lottery may be held after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, which is expected to achieve the same effects as the 12th embodiment.

(163) In the 12th embodiment described above, if all navigation lotteries are won, a lottery for the number of additional games is held at that time to determine the number of Notification Mode A games to be increased. However, the lottery for the number of additional games may also be held after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. However, if such a configuration is used, the number of additional games cannot be announced at the start of the game. Therefore, it is desirable to output, for example, a predetermined notification sound at the start of the game to indicate that the number of Notification Mode A games will be increased.

(164) In the 12th embodiment described above, if all navigation lotteries are won and an additional game number lottery is held, the number of additional games is announced at the start of the game, but the timing for announcing the number of additional games is arbitrary. The number of additional games may be announced when the first stop command is generated, or when the second stop command is generated.

Alternatively, an alarm sound may be output at the start of the game to indicate that the number of games played in Announcement Mode A will increase, and the number of additional games may be announced after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In this case, if the type of alarm sound output and its selection rate are configured to change depending on the number of additional games, it will be possible to operate the stop switches 42-44 while anticipating how much the number of games played in Announcement Mode A will increase. Needless to say, in addition to the alarm sound, the auxiliary display unit 65 may also be configured to display a predetermined effect according to the number of additional games.

(165) In the twelfth embodiment described above, partial navigation is performed if the full navigation lottery is not won. However, a partial navigation lottery may be performed instead of a full navigation lottery, and partial navigation may be performed if the partial navigation lottery is won. In such a configuration, if the push order bell is won under notification mode B, partial navigation may be performed or none of the stop switches to be operated may be notified. Note that if none of the stop switches to be operated are notified, the configuration may be such that the push order bell has been won is notified by a predetermined effect.

(166) In the twelfth embodiment described above, if the partial navigation is followed and a bell win is achieved, the number of games played in Notification Mode A is increased. However, if the partial navigation is followed but a bell win is not achieved, the number of games played in Notification Mode A may also be increased.

(167) In the twelfth embodiment, a random lottery is conducted if the partial navigation is not followed, but a random lottery may not be conducted. In such a configuration, if the partial navigation is followed and a bell win is achieved, the number of games played in Notification Mode A will be increased.

(168) In the twelfth embodiment described above, the probability that the number of games in Notification Mode A will be increased when the partial navigation is followed is equal to the probability that the number of games in Notification Mode A will be increased when the partial navigation is not followed, but it goes without saying that a different configuration is also possible.

(169) In the 12th embodiment, the ratio of the number of additional games selected in the additional game number lottery was the same when a bell win was achieved according to the partial navigation and when the other-powered lottery was won, but it goes without saying that a different configuration is also possible. The same applies when the full navigation lottery is won.

(170) In the twelfth embodiment described above, when performing partial navigation, the stop switch that should be operated first is notified, but it may also be configured to notify the stop switch that should be operated second, or the stop switch that should be operated third.

(171) In the 12th embodiment, when performing partial navigation, the stop switch that should be operated first is notified, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, the stop switch that should not be operated first can be indicated using "x-?-?", "?-x-?", or "?-?-x". When such an indication is given, the probability of correctly selecting the stop switch that should be operated first is 1/2, and the probability of correctly selecting the stop switch that should be operated second is 1/2, so the probability of achieving a bell win is 1/4. Therefore, if a random drawing is performed in which there is a 1/4 chance of winning if the stop switch corresponding to the "x" display position is operated first, the same effects as those of the twelfth embodiment can be achieved.

(172) In the twelfth embodiment described above, if all navigation lotteries are won, a lottery for the number of additional games is held at that time. However, in addition to this, a lottery for the number of additional games may be held in response to the establishment of a bell win after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In other words, the number of notification mode A games may be added multiple times for each determination to add the number of notification mode A games once.

(173) In the twelfth embodiment described above, when a decision is made to increase the number of games in Announcement Mode A, a lottery is held to select the number of additional games to be played, from 10, 30, 50, or 100. However, when a decision is made to increase the number of games in Announcement Mode A, the number of games in Announcement Mode A may be increased by a fixed number, such as 30 games.

(174) In the 12th embodiment described above, the number of games played in notification mode A is increased under notification mode B. However, instead of or in addition to this, the number of games played in notification mode B may be increased.

(175) In the twelfth embodiment described above, when the push order bell is won, the bell win is determined depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. However, the bell win may be determined depending on the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, or the bell win may be determined depending on the order and timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

If the configuration is such that whether or not a bell win occurs depends on the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44 that can result in a bell win may be notified if all navigation lotteries are won, and if all navigation lotteries are not won, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that can result in a bell win may be notified but the operation timing may not be notified. Even with this configuration, the player must guess the operation timing that will result in a bell win, thereby achieving the same effect as the twelfth embodiment. Furthermore, with this configuration, players with less skill in operating the stop switches at the specified timing can select the other-assisted lottery, so even players with less skill can enjoy the gameplay in notification mode B.

(176) In the twelfth embodiment described above, the number of games played in Announcement Mode A is increased by a full navigation lottery, a third-party lottery, or the like only when the push order bell is won in Announcement Mode B. However, the number of games played in Announcement Mode A may also be increased when the push order bell is won in Chance Mode or Announcement Mode A. In such a configuration, for example, when the push order bell is won in Chance Mode or Announcement Mode A, an increase chance lottery is held, and when the increase chance lottery is won, the same processing as when the push order bell is won in Announcement Mode B is performed. Then, when the increase chance lottery is not won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced in Chance Mode, but the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced in Announcement Mode A.

(177) In the twelfth embodiment, the winning probabilities for the left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell were all equal, but it goes without saying that a different configuration is also acceptable. In this case, the techniques for combinations, push order groups, etc. described in the sixth embodiment may also be applied.

(178) In the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment 1, when the setting change display is started, the display effects, such as the customer waiting display, that had been displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are terminated. However, it is also possible to configure the display effects to continue while displaying the text information "Setting change in progress."

(179) In the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment 1, when a setting change command is received, the setting change display and the output of the setting change sound are initiated. However, it is also possible to configure the device to only initiate the setting change display, or to only initiate the output of the setting change sound.

Alternatively, the system may be configured not to initiate either the setting change display or the output of the setting change sound, i.e., not to notify that the setting value is changeable. Even in such a configuration, if an error notification sound is output based on the failure to receive the change end command, it is possible to notify the user that the change end command was not received by outputting the error notification sound.

(180) In the thirteenth embodiment 1 described above, the configuration was such that the output of an error alert sound was initiated when a bet command was received without a change end command being received. However, instead of or in addition to this, the configuration may be such that the output of an error alert sound was initiated when a start command was received without a change end command being received. If the configuration is such that the output of an error alert sound is initiated in both cases where a bet command was received without a change end command being received and where a start command was received without a change end command being received, the configuration may be such that when a bet command is received, the output of a first error alert sound stating "The setting change operation has not been completed" is initiated, and when a start command is received while the first error alert sound is being output, the output of a second error alert sound stating "Please perform the setting change operation after the game has ended" is initiated.

(181) In the thirteenth embodiment 1 described above, if a command indicating the progress of a game is received when a change end command has not been received, an error notification sound is not output. However, an error notification sound may also be output. However, if such a configuration is used, there is a concern that players may be confused about whether it is okay to continue playing a round. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the error notification sound to start outputting when an end command is received.

(182) In the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment 1, the output of the error notification sound is terminated when a setting change command is received, but the output of the error notification sound may also be terminated when a change termination command is received.

(183) In the above thirteenth embodiment 1, an error notification sound is output to indicate that the change end command has not been received. However, it may also be possible to indicate that the change end command has not been received by displaying a predetermined message such as "Please try the setting change operation again" on the auxiliary display unit 65.

(184) In the above thirteenth embodiment 1, audio information is output as the error notification sound, but it goes without saying that it may also be configured to output a predetermined melody.

(185) In the thirteenth embodiment 1 described above, the change end command includes information related to the setting value. However, the change end command and the setting value command indicating information related to the setting value may be sent separately. Even in such a configuration, the same effects as those of the thirteenth embodiment 1 described above can be expected to be achieved as long as the setting value command and the change end command are sent when the setting change operation is completed. Note that in such a configuration, an error notification sound may be output when a bet command is received without a setting value command being received, or an error notification sound may be output when a bet command is received without a change end command being received.

(186) In the thirteenth embodiment 2 described above, all commands related to the start of a game round, such as bet commands, and all commands related to the progress of a game round, such as lottery result commands, are configured to include information related to the set values. However, it is also possible to configure at least one of the various commands described above to include information related to the set values. Therefore, of the various commands described above, it is also possible to configure only the start command to include information related to the set values, or it is also possible to configure both the start command and the bet command to include information related to the set values.

(187) In the thirteenth embodiment 2 described above, the control to terminate the output of the setting change display and setting change sound is performed based on the value of the confirmation timer. However, it is also possible to configure the control to terminate the output of the setting change display and setting change sound when information related to the setting value is received without providing a confirmation timer.

(188) In the thirteenth embodiment 2 described above, the confirmation timer is set to 12000 when a setting change command is received, and the confirmation timer value is decremented by one in the confirmation timer decrement process. However, the confirmation timer may be set to 0 when a setting change command is received, and the confirmation timer value may be incremented by one in the confirmation timer decrement process. Even with such a configuration, if the setting change display, etc. is terminated when the confirmation timer value reaches 12000, the same effects as those of the thirteenth embodiment 2 described above can be achieved.

(189) In the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment 2, if the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command before 120 seconds have elapsed since receiving the setting change command, the configuration is such that no auxiliary effects are performed according to the lottery result information. However, the configuration may also be such that auxiliary effects are performed according to the lottery result information. Needless to say, the configuration may also be such that auxiliary effects are performed according to the setting value.

(190) In the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment 2, when a setting change command is received, the setting change display and the output of the setting change sound are initiated. However, it is also possible to configure the device to only initiate the setting change display, or to only initiate the output of the setting change sound.

(191) In the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment 2, if information related to a setting value is received before 120 seconds have elapsed since the setting change command was received, a standby voice message saying "Please wait" is output. However, instead of or in addition to this, a predetermined message such as "Please wait" may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

(192) In the thirteenth embodiment 2 described above, if information related to a setting value is received before 120 seconds have elapsed since the reception of the setting change command, a standby sound is output. However, it is also possible to configure the setting change display and setting change sound to continue to be output without outputting the standby sound. However, with such a configuration, there is a concern that an operator who performed a setting change operation may be confused by the fact that the setting change display does not end even after the setting change operation has been completed.

(193) In the above thirteenth embodiments 1 and 2, when the main control device 101 transmits information related to a setting value as part of a command to the display control device 81, the manner in which the information related to the setting value is transmitted is arbitrary. For example, the configuration may be such that the numerical information corresponding to the setting value is transmitted as is, such as transmitting the numerical information "6" (more specifically, "00000110") when the setting is 6, or the configuration may be such that the bit corresponding to the setting value is set to 1, such as transmitting "01000000" (numerical information 64) when the setting is 6.

(194) The configuration described in the eleventh embodiment may be combined with the thirteenth embodiments 1 and 2. The eleventh embodiment is configured to change the notification content depending on whether the set value is a predetermined value (7). Therefore, even when the eleventh embodiment is combined with the thirteenth embodiments 1 and 2, it is clear that the effects described in the eleventh embodiment can be achieved.

(195) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, points are announced after all stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the CZ presentation. However, instead of or in addition to this, points may be announced after one stop switch is operated, or points may be announced after two stop switches are operated. Points may also be announced in a situation where none of the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, i.e., at the start of a game round. In a configuration in which the announcement points are determined at the start of the game, points can be announced at any timing.

(196) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, if the push order bell is won, a point lottery is held at the end of the game. However, if the point lottery is held after the first stop command is generated, the same effect as in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment can be achieved. This is because the requirement for holding a point lottery in the push order bell winning game in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment is to operate the left stop switch 42 and generate the first stop command.

(197) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, if a prize other than the push order bell is won, a point lottery is held at the start of the game. However, a point lottery may also be held at the end of the game, similar to the push order bell.

(198) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, the configuration is such that the increased points are added to the value of the hidden point counter at the end of the game regardless of the winning combination. However, if a combination other than the push order bell is won, the increased points can be added to the value of the hidden point counter at the start of the game, and if the push order bell is won, the increased points can be added to the value of the hidden point counter at the end of the game.

(199) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, the content of the CZ effect is determined based on the notification points. However, if points are acquired at the start of the game, such as when a rare role is won, the content of the CZ effect may be determined based on the acquired points. With such a configuration, even if points different from those acquired in the game that executes the CZ effect are notified, it becomes possible to associate the points acquired in the game that executes the CZ effect with the content of the CZ effect, thereby increasing interest in the game. This is because it becomes possible for the player to guess the size of the points acquired in the current game from the type of cut-in effect performed in the CZ effect.

(200) In the above fourteenth embodiment, notification points are determined based on the winning combination. However, if points are acquired at the start of the game, such as when a rare combination is won, notification points may be determined based on the acquired points. For example, if a watermelon is won, 20, 50, or 100 points are acquired (see FIG. 174 (b)). In this case, if 20 points are acquired, the notification points are determined to be 10 points at a 50% rate and 20 points at a 50% rate. If 50 points are acquired, the notification points are determined to be 20 points at a 40% rate, 30 points at a 30% rate, 40 points at a 20% rate, and 50 points at a 10% rate. If 100 points are acquired, the notification points are determined to be 20 points at a 10% rate, 30 points at a 20% rate, 40 points at a 30% rate, and 50 points at a 40% rate.

With the above configuration, even if the system is configured to notify points different from those acquired in the game that executes the CZ effect, it is possible to associate the points acquired in the game that executes the CZ effect with the notified points, thereby increasing interest in the game. To explain in more detail based on the above example, if 10 points are notified in the watermelon winning game, the points acquired in this game are confirmed to be 20 points, and if 50 points are notified, the points acquired in this game are confirmed to be 50 or 100 points, and the possibility of acquiring 100 points increases. In this way, it is possible for the player to infer the number of points acquired in this game from the notified points.

(201) In the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment, if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first in the push order bell winning game, the point lottery is not conducted. However, it is also possible to conduct a point lottery but invalidate the points acquired in the point lottery. More specifically, as in the case of winning a rare role, the point lottery is conducted at the start of the game even when the push order bell is won. Then, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the points acquired in the point lottery are added to the value of the point value counter, and if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first, the points acquired in the point lottery are not added to the value of the point value counter. Even with this configuration, although the processing configuration related to points is more complex than in the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment, it is expected that the same effects as those of the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment will be achieved.

(202) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, when a CZ effect is started in a push order bell winning game, the CZ effect is executed to the end regardless of whether the left stop switch 42 is operated first or not. However, the CZ effect may also be ended when the left stop switch 42 is not operated first. In this case, the CZ effect may be ended after announcing the points, or the CZ effect may be ended without announcing the points.

(203) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, the CZ effect is configured to be performed every game in the challenge zone, but this is not limited to such a configuration, and any configuration may be used as long as the CZ effect is performed more frequently than in the normal zone. Therefore, the CZ effect may be performed in odd-numbered games in the challenge zone, or in even-numbered games in the challenge zone. Note that the CZ effect may also be performed with a predetermined probability in the normal zone.

(204) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, the value stored in the hidden point counter is used only in the challenge zone, but it may also be used in the normal zone. For example, if points increase in the normal zone, the increased points and at least a portion of the value stored in the hidden point counter are reported together.

(205) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, if points were increased in the last game of the challenge zone, the increased points were announced in the next challenge zone. However, this configuration will be changed.

In the last game of the challenge zone, when the CZ processing shown in Figure 184 ends, it is determined whether the value of the hidden point counter is 0. If the value of the hidden point counter is not 0, the value of the hidden point counter is additionally notified. With this configuration, it is possible to notify all points acquired from the transition to the challenge zone until the end of the challenge zone in the challenge zone.

(206) In the above fourteenth embodiment, when points increase in the normal zone, the increased points are notified in the game. However, there may be a predetermined probability that the increased points are not notified. For example, when points increase in the normal zone, there is a 50% probability that the increased points are added to the value of the front point counter, and a 50% probability that the increased points are added to the value of the back point counter. In such a configuration, when points increase in the normal zone, there is a 50% probability that the increased points are notified in the game, and there is a 50% probability that the notification of the increased points is carried over to the challenge zone.

(207) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, when a player moves to the challenge zone, he or she is guaranteed to receive 10 or more points in the point lottery. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and any configuration may be used in which the player is guaranteed to receive 1 or more points more frequently than in the normal zone.

(208) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, 50 points are added when moving from the normal zone to the challenge zone, but the point value added can be any value. Alternatively, the point value added when moving to the challenge zone can be determined by a predetermined lottery.

(209) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, if 1000 points are reached in the challenge zone and the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is unsuccessful, the challenge zone continues as is. However, it is also possible to configure the auxiliary display unit 65 to start a false premonition display and internally continue processing in the challenge zone.

(210) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, we have explained as an example a challenge zone that increases the probability of obtaining points, which triggers a lottery to transition to the notification mode, and a CZ effect that notifies points under the challenge zone, but we will change this configuration.

For example, in a notification mode, in a configuration that includes a specialized zone where the number of games (or the number of payouts if the game ends with the number of payouts) is added more frequently, and an additional effect that notifies the number of games in the specialized zone, the number of games to be notified in the additional effect is determined within the range of values stored in the hidden game count counter, and 50 is added to the value of the hidden game count counter when transitioning to the specialized zone.

(211) In the above fourteenth embodiment, when transitioning to the premonition mode, the presentation period is set so that the premonition effect is performed over 10 games, but the length of the presentation period for the premonition effect can be arbitrary. Therefore, in a configuration in which the premonition effect is performed over five games, the presentation period for five games can be set at the timing when the fifth game in the premonition mode ends, and in a configuration in which only three consecutive games of premonition effect are performed, the presentation period for three games can be set at the timing when the seventh game in the premonition mode ends.

(212) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, when transitioning to premonition mode, a 10-game performance setting process is performed to determine in advance the content of the auxiliary effects to be performed up to the 10th game. However, the content of the auxiliary effects may also be determined after the start of the game based on the value of the premonition game number counter.

(213) In the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment, when transitioning to premonition mode, the premonition game number counter is set to 0, and 1 is added to the value of the premonition game number counter each time a game is started. However, when transitioning to premonition mode, the premonition game number counter may be set to 10, and 1 may be subtracted from the value of the premonition game number counter each time a game is started. Even with such a configuration, if the configuration is such that when the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 0, control is performed to execute an announcement effect and the announcement completed flag is set, and when the value of the premonition game number counter is 0 and the announcement completed flag is set, control is performed to continue displaying the final screen and control is performed to additionally display "Preparing" then the same effects as those of the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment can be achieved.

(214) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, if the premonition mode continues for 11 games or more, the system is configured to control the display of "Preparing" as an additional display. However, this is not limited to this configuration. The system may also be configured to control the display of the number of games remaining until the system transitions to the notification mode, or to control the display of only the "WIN" display to continue.

(215) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, if the premonition mode continues for 11 games or more, control is performed to continuously display the final screen of the announcement effect. However, it is also possible to perform control to repeat the announcement effect again, or to perform control to start an auxiliary effect different from the announcement effect.

Alternatively, the tenth game in the premonition mode may be configured to have a showdown effect in which the main character is defeated, and when the game transitions to the notification mode, the main character wins after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and a reversal effect is performed to notify the transition to the notification mode. With this configuration, it is possible to play the eleventh and subsequent games in the premonition mode while anticipating the start of the reversal effect.

(216) In the above-mentioned 14th embodiment, if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first in a push order bell winning game, various disadvantages occur, such as not updating the value of the mode game number counter and not conducting a point lottery. However, the above-mentioned various disadvantages may also occur if the left stop switch 42 is not operated first.

(217) In the above fourteenth embodiment, we omitted the explanation of the false premonition effect that notifies the player that the notification mode will not be entered, but it goes without saying that the configuration may also include the false premonition effect.

(218) In the above fourteenth embodiment, when the push order bell is won, either a bell win in which eight medals are paid out or a win in which one medal is paid out is always achieved. However, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation sequence that does not allow for a bell win, a missed win may occur, in which neither win is achieved.

(219) In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, the configuration was such that only the first credit insertion switch 56 was provided as the operating means for inserting virtual medals, but it goes without saying that the configuration may also include a second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58.

(220) In the above fifteenth embodiment, the sixth bit in the switch buffer was an unused area, and the seventh bit was an area in which a power outage signal was stored. However, the sixth bit may be an area in which signal information from the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a provided in the second credit insertion switch 57 is stored, and the seventh bit may be an area in which signal information from the third credit insertion detection sensor 58a provided in the third credit insertion switch 58 is stored.

(221) In the above fifteenth embodiment, the rotation information buffer, normal rotation information buffer, and switch buffer were configured with one byte, but it goes without saying that they may be configured with two or more bytes. If they are configured with two or more bytes, it will be possible to provide the switch buffer with bits indicating the signal input status from other switches, such as the second credit insertion switch 57, third credit insertion switch 58, reset switch 72, and setting key detection sensor 73a, in addition to the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, adjustment switch 59, and stop switches 42-44.

(222) In the stop command confirmation process in the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, the switch state confirmation process is not performed, so that even if at least one of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, settlement switch 59, or stop switch corresponding to a stopped reel is operated, a stop command can be generated by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and any configuration is acceptable as long as a stop command can be generated by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel, even if at least one of the above switches is operated.

For example, the stop command confirmation process may be configured to perform switch state confirmation processing, similar to conventional stop command confirmation processing. However, in the switch state confirmation process, if the comparison value does not match the rotation information (if step S151204 is NO) or if the switch state does not match switch state 2 (if step S151206 is NO), the process may proceed to acquiring stop command information in step S151108, rather than proceeding to lighting data storage processing in step S151111. Even with this configuration, it is not possible to simplify the processing configuration of the stop command confirmation process, but it is possible to improve operability when stopping a spinning reel.

For example, a switch state confirmation process may be performed in the stop command confirmation process, similar to conventional stop command confirmation processes. However, in the switch buffer, bits 3 to 5 are unused areas that always store 0. With this configuration, the operation status of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, and settlement switch 59 does not need to be confirmed, making it possible to issue a stop command while operating at least one of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, and settlement switch 59. Note that with this configuration, a stop command cannot be issued if the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is still being operated. Furthermore, a new sensor buffer must be provided to store the operation status of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, and settlement switch 59, which raises concerns about increased storage capacity.

(223) In the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, even if at least one of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, settlement switch 59, or stop switch corresponding to a stopped reel is operated, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, even when the start lever 41 is being operated, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. However, if the first credit insertion switch 56, the settlement switch 59, or the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is being operated, a stop command cannot be issued even if the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated.

For example, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. If the start lever 41, settlement switch 59, or stop switch corresponding to a stopped reel is operated, a stop command cannot be issued even if the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated.

For example, even if the settlement switch 59 is operated, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. If the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, or the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is operated, a stop command cannot be issued even if the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated.

For example, even if the stop switch corresponding to a stopped reel is operated, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to a spinning reel. If the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, or settlement switch 59 is operated, a stop command cannot be issued even if the stop switch corresponding to a spinning reel is operated.

For example, even if the start lever 41 or first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a stop command can be issued by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. If either the settlement switch 59 or the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is operated, a stop command cannot be issued even if the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated.

(224) In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, even if none of the start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, settlement switch 59, or stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is operated, a stop command can be generated by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that a stop command can be generated by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel when at least one of the above switches is operated.

(225) In the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, the switch state confirmation process is not performed, and therefore it is not confirmed whether an ON signal has been input from the start lever 41, the first credit insertion switch 56, the settlement switch 59, or the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel (step S151204), or whether an ON edge of each of the above switches has been detected (step S151206). However, it is also possible to configure the system to confirm whether an ON signal has been input from each of the above switches, but not to confirm whether an ON edge of each of the above switches has been detected, or to not confirm whether an ON signal has been input from each of the above switches, but to confirm whether an ON edge of each of the above switches has been detected.

If the configuration checks whether an ON signal is being input from each of the above switches but does not check whether an ON edge of each of the above switches has been detected, then, for example, if the start lever 41 is operated to generate a start command and then the operation is continued, a stop command can be generated; but if the start lever 41 is operated to generate a start command, then the operation is stopped and the start lever 41 is operated again, the stop command cannot be generated until the operation of the start lever 41 is stopped. Even with this configuration, it is possible to improve operability in the event that the start lever 41 does not return to its initial position due to deterioration over time, etc.

(226) In the above-described fifteenth embodiment, an LED was provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44, and the LED was configured to light up when a stop command could be issued and to turn off when a stop command could not be issued. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, an LED may be provided inside the stop switches 42-44, and when a stop command can be issued, the LED may light up blue, and when a stop command cannot be issued, the LED may light up red.

For example, instead of providing LEDs inside the stop switches 42-44, the stop switches that can issue a stop command and the stop switches that cannot issue a stop command can be indicated on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

For example, stop switches 42-44 may not have LEDs inside them, and stop switches that can issue a stop command and stop switches that cannot issue a stop command may not be notified.

(227) In the pre-start processing in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, by not determining whether the logical product of the information stored in the 0th area of the switch buffer and 37H is 0, a start command can be generated even when at least one of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. However, this configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration is acceptable as long as a start command can be generated even when at least one of the above switches is operated.

(228) In the above-described fifteenth embodiment, a start command can be issued even when the first credit insertion switch 56 and/or at least one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a start command can be issued by operating the start lever 41. If any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, a start command cannot be issued even if the start lever 41 is operated.

For example, even if at least one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, a start command can be issued by operating the start lever 41. If the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a start command cannot be issued even if the start lever 41 is operated.

For example, even if any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, a start command can be issued by operating the start lever 41. However, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated or if multiple stop switches are operated, a start command cannot be issued even if the start lever 41 is operated.

For example, even if the middle stop switch 43 is operated, a start command can be issued by operating the start lever 41. If the first credit insertion switch 56, left stop switch 42, or right stop switch 44 is operated, a start command cannot be issued even if the start lever 41 is operated.

(229) In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, a start command can be generated by operating the start lever 41 even when none of the first credit insertion switch 56 nor the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. However, a start command can also be generated by operating the start lever 41 when at least one of the above switches is operated.

(230) In the above-described fifteenth embodiment, a start permission LED is provided, and when a start command can be generated, the start permission LED is turned on, and when a start command cannot be generated, the start permission LED is turned off. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, without providing a start permission LED, the auxiliary display unit 65 or a display unit different from the auxiliary display unit 65 can be configured to indicate whether or not a start command can be generated. In this case, if a start command can be generated, the text information "START" is displayed, and if a start command cannot be generated, the text information "START" is not displayed.

(231) In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, when the stop position determination process is completed, if the value of the reel rotation counter is not 0, the process returns to the stop command confirmation process. However, the process may also be configured to return to the stop command confirmation process when the rotation of the reel for which the stop position has been determined stops. Even with such a configuration, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment can be achieved.

Alternatively, the system may be configured to return to the stop command confirmation process when the operation of the stop switch that generated the stop command is completed. Even with this configuration, the system can return to the stop command confirmation process while continuing to operate the start lever 41 or a stop switch that has not generated a stop command, thereby achieving the same effects as the fifteenth embodiment described above.

(232) In the above-described 16th embodiment, when an icon acquired in a roulette or treasure chest effect is displayed, the acquired icon is displayed in the first area 651 and then the display order is rearranged. However, the acquired icon may also be displayed at the end of the icons currently being displayed and then the display order is rearranged.

(233) In the sixteenth embodiment, when an icon acquired through a roulette or treasure chest effect is displayed, the icons may be rearranged in display order and displayed in the icon display areas 651 to 655.

For example, if the acquisition of a green icon is notified in the icon display situation shown in Figure 231 (b2), the green icon is moved to the third area 653, and the victory icon displayed in the third area 653 is moved to the fourth area 654.

For example, when the acquisition of a green icon is notified in the icon display status shown in Figure 231 (b2), white icons of unknown type (or icons that glow white) are displayed in the first area 651 to the fourth area 654 to notify that four icons have been acquired. After that, the white icon in the first area 651 is changed to a blue icon, the white icon in the second area 652 to a red icon, the white icon in the third area 653 to a green icon, and the white icon in the fourth area 654 to a victory icon.

(234) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the continuation bonus is configured to only include a bonus that results in one win in the continuation lottery. However, it goes without saying that instead of or in addition to this, a bonus that results in two wins in the continuation lottery or three wins in the continuation lottery may also be configured to include a bonus that results in two wins in the continuation lottery or three wins in the continuation lottery. If multiple types of continuation bonuses are configured to be included, different victory icons may be displayed depending on the number of wins, as with the up icon, or the same victory icon may be displayed regardless of the number of wins.

(235) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, when displaying an icon, a blue icon is displayed when an upgrade bonus with an upgrade count of 1 to 10 is acquired, a green icon is displayed when an upgrade bonus with an upgrade count of 11 to 20 is acquired, and a red icon is displayed when an upgrade bonus with an upgrade count of 21 or more is acquired. However, it is also possible to display an icon with the upgrade count written directly on it, or to display the same upgrade icon regardless of the upgrade count. A typical example of displaying the same upgrade icon regardless of the upgrade count is to display an icon that reads "Continuation Rate UP."

(236) In the above-described 16th embodiment, the display icons are rearranged so that the acquired icons are in the order of use in the small AT stage. However, the display icons may also be rearranged so that they are in the order that the main control unit 101 uses them in the small AT transition process.

(237) In the above-described 16th embodiment, the main control device 101 is configured to determine whether or not the small AT mode has been broken through and the number of wins in the continuation lottery in the small AT mode transition game. However, it may also be configured to determine these in accordance with the auxiliary effects in the small AT stage. Specifically, the final continuation rate is determined using an up bonus in the first game of the small AT mode, and the continuation bonus is used or a continuation lottery is held in the second, tenth, and eighteenth games of the small AT mode to determine whether or not a win has been made. In such a configuration, the display order of the icons not only matches the order of use in the small AT stage, but also matches the order of use in the main control device 101. This allows players to understand the internal workings of the slot machine 10, and deepening their knowledge of the slot machine 10 can increase their interest in playing.

(238) In the 16th embodiment, the first game in the small AT mode was the part that determined the continuation rate, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, if three or more continuation bonuses are acquired, the first game in the small AT mode will be the continuation rate determination part, and if two or fewer continuation bonuses are acquired, the continuation rate determination part will begin after the same number of battle parts as the acquired continuation bonuses. To give a specific example, if one continuation bonus is acquired, the ninth game in the small AT mode will be the continuation rate determination part. Even with this configuration, if the up icon is arranged after the victory icon in the icon display areas 651-655, it can be expected to achieve the same effects as the sixteenth embodiment described above.

(239) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the small AT mode is configured to transition to the large AT mode when the continuation lottery is won three times, but this configuration is not limited to this, and the conditions for transitioning from the small AT mode to the large AT mode are arbitrary.

For example, if you win the continuation lottery five times in small AT mode, you will transition to large AT mode.

For example, the number of clears in the small AT transition game can be determined to be between 1 and 5, and if the number of wins in the continuation lottery reaches the number of clears, the game will transition to the large AT mode.

For example, the first game in the small AT mode is the continuation role determination part, and if the continuation role is won in the subsequent battle part, the system will transition to the next set of battle parts. If the battle part is successfully completed three times, the system will transition to the large AT mode. In this configuration, instead of the boost bonus, an assist bonus with a specified role type, such as a cherry, can be acquired, and the more assist bonuses acquired, the more types of continuation roles will be available, making it easier to complete the battle part. Even with this configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the 16th embodiment can be achieved.

For example, the first game in the small AT mode is the avoidance role determination part, and if the avoidance role is not won in the subsequent battle part, the system will move on to the next set of battle parts. If the battle part is successfully completed three times, the system will move on to the large AT mode. In this configuration, instead of an up bonus, an assist bonus can be acquired, which specifies a role type such as a cherry. In the avoidance role determination part, the role specified by the acquired assist bonus is excluded from the avoidance role, and the more assist bonuses are acquired, the fewer types of avoidance roles there are, making it easier to complete the battle part. Even with this configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the 16th embodiment can be achieved.

(240) In the above sixteenth embodiment, the assist bonus is configured to include both an up bonus and a continuation bonus, but it may also be configured to include only an up bonus, or only a continuation bonus.

(241) In the sixteenth embodiment described above, if three continuation bonuses are acquired, the next game may be configured to transition to small AT mode or small AT precursor mode. With such a configuration, acquiring three continuation bonuses can hasten the transition to small AT mode, allowing players to play in non-AT mode while hoping that three continuation bonuses will be acquired, thereby preventing gameplay in non-AT mode from becoming monotonous.

(242) In the sixteenth embodiment, the up icon may be configured to be upgraded at a predetermined timing. For example, if an up bonus of 30 ups is awarded, a blue icon is displayed in that game, and the blue icon is changed to a red icon in the next game in which the up bonus is awarded or in the continuation rate determination part.

(243) In the above-described 16th embodiment, when an assist bonus is awarded, a roulette effect or treasure chest effect is performed in the game in question, and the acquired icon is displayed. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and the acquired icon may be displayed by performing a roulette effect or treasure chest effect in a game different from the game in which the assist bonus was awarded.

(244) In the sixteenth embodiment, if three victory icons are displayed, these victory icons may be illuminated in rainbow colors.

(245) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, when the number of displayed victory icons reaches 3, the up icon and the fourth and subsequent victory icons are changed to added icons. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the total number of ups reaches 50, i.e., when it is determined that the continuation rate will reach 100%, the victory icon and subsequent up icons may be changed to added icons.

(246) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, when the number of displayed victory icons reaches three, the up icon and the fourth and subsequent victory icons are changed to additional icons. However, they may be displayed as they are without being changed to additional icons. Even in such a configuration, if the number of games in the large AT mode is increased by the up icon and victory icon that were not used in the small AT mode, it is possible to reduce the chances of so-called wasted draws occurring.

(247) In the sixteenth embodiment, when three continuation bonuses are acquired in non-AT mode, the benefit of the up bonus and the benefit of the fourth and subsequent continuation bonuses is changed to an additional game number in the large AT mode. However, the content of the benefit may remain the same while the timing of its use changes. For example, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in the large AT mode, the game transitions to the revival battle challenge. In the revival battle challenge, if there are no assist bonuses remaining, a revival lottery is held with a 25% chance of winning. If the revival lottery is won, the game returns to the large AT mode. If the revival lottery is not won, the advantageous period ends. If an up bonus remains, the probability of winning the revival lottery is increased by the number of up bonuses, and if there are continuation bonuses remaining, the revival lottery is considered a win.

(248) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, if the system transitions to the large AT mode while an assist bonus remains, the number of games that can be played in the large AT mode is increased. However, if a bonus different from the bonus that was planned to be granted in the small AT mode is granted, it is possible to expect the same effects as those of the above-mentioned 16th embodiment.

For example, an add-on specialized zone is provided in which the number of games in the large AT mode is added for a predetermined number of times, and when the small AT mode ends with an assist bonus remaining, or when a fixed role is won with an assist bonus remaining, the system transitions to the add-on specialized zone before transitioning to the large AT mode. The number of games that can be played in the add-on specialized zone is determined according to the type and number of remaining assist bonuses.

For example, a special zone for adding extra games is provided in which the number of games played in the large AT mode is added a predetermined number of times, and when the large AT mode is entered with an assist bonus remaining, the player is shifted to the special zone for an amount of times corresponding to the type and number of remaining assist bonuses.

For example, in a configuration where the large AT mode is managed by a set number of times (e.g., 40 times), if the large AT mode is switched to with assist bonuses remaining, the number of sets will be stocked for the number of times corresponding to the type and number of remaining assist bonuses.

For example, in a configuration where the large AT mode is managed by the number of payouts rather than the number of games played, if the large AT mode is entered with an assist bonus remaining, the number of payouts will be increased by an amount corresponding to the type and number of remaining assist bonuses.

For example, in a configuration where the game transitions to chance mode after the end of large AT mode, if the game transitions to large AT mode with remaining assist bonuses, points will be increased by an amount corresponding to the type and number of remaining assist bonuses. Alternatively, the rate at which the transition game number counter is set to 300 will increase depending on the type and number of remaining assist bonuses.

(249) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, when transitioning to large AT mode with an assist bonus remaining, the number of games added may be different depending on whether transitioning to large AT mode via small AT mode or transitioning directly from non-AT mode to large AT mode.

Also, if a fixed role is won when breaking through the small AT mode is confirmed, for example when three continuation bonuses have been acquired, three continuation bonuses will be consumed to transition to the large AT mode, and the number of games in the large AT mode may be increased based on the fact that a fixed role has been won (the large transition flag has been set).

(250) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, when a transition to the large AT mode occurs with an assist bonus remaining, the number of games is added in the large AT mode transition game, but the timing of adding the number of games and the timing of announcing the addition of the number of games may be arbitrary.

(251) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, when the game mode is switched to the large AT mode while an assist bonus remains, a different number of games is added depending on the type of remaining assist bonus and the number of bonuses. However, the same number of games may be added regardless of the type of remaining assist bonus and the number of bonuses.

(252) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the CZ indication is made by displaying the point acquisition status displayed in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 in a golden light, but this is not limited to such a configuration, and any configuration may be used as long as it indicates a challenge zone by displaying an auxiliary effect different from the CZ effect.

For example, the text information "In CZ" may be displayed above the point acquisition status displayed in the lower right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65.

For example, the outer periphery of the auxiliary display section 65 may be outlined in a color, such as red, that is different from the background color of the premonition stage and premonition effects, to indicate that it is a challenge zone.

For example, in the premonition stage, a helper character appears in addition to the young man character, suggesting that this is a challenge zone.

(253) In the above 16th embodiment, the number of games remaining in the challenge zone is not displayed in the CZ suggestion, but it may also be configured to display the number of games remaining in the challenge zone.

(254) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, if the premonition stage ends in the middle of the challenge zone, the game transitions to the CZ stage. However, it is also possible to transition to the normal stage and continue the CZ suggestion. In such a configuration, the branching of step S162008 in the premonition stage processing becomes unnecessary, which simplifies the processing configuration and makes it possible to suppress increases in memory capacity.

(255) In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the second auxiliary display unit 165 was provided separately from the auxiliary display unit 65, but it is also possible to provide an area in part of the auxiliary display unit 65 for displaying the value of the second display game number counter.

(256) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, when a small AT precursor transition game or a false precursor transition game occurs, the value of the second display game number counter is displayed on the second auxiliary display unit 165. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, the second auxiliary display unit 165 may be configured to display 32 or more memory marks that are sequentially lit or extinguished, rather than displaying numerical information.

For example, if a small AT precursor transition game or a false precursor transition game occurs during the CZ stage, a flower bud is displayed on the second auxiliary display unit 165. If the bud opens, the game will transition to small AT mode, and if the bud does not open and remains hidden, the game will not transition to small AT mode. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the CZ effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 while notifying the second auxiliary display unit 165 of whether or not the game will transition to small AT mode.

It goes without saying that the above configurations may also be combined.

(257) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the number of plays that can be played in the challenge zone is set to 10, and when transitioning to the small AT precursor mode, the transition game number counter is set to any value between 17 and 32. However, the number of plays that can be played in the challenge zone and the value set in the transition game number counter may be arbitrary. However, if the minimum value set in the transition game number counter is configured to be smaller than the number of plays that can be played in the challenge zone, an event will occur in which the game transitions to the small AT in the middle of the CZ stage. For this reason, in such a configuration, in addition to the CZ effect that notifies acquired points, a separate CZ effect must be provided that notifies not only acquired points but also the transition to the small AT.

(258) In the above-described 16th embodiment, an assist bonus can be acquired in non-AT mode, and an icon corresponding to the acquired assist bonus is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, an assist bonus can also be acquired in an AT mode such as small AT mode or large AT mode, and an icon corresponding to the acquired assist bonus can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

To give a specific example, the AT mode is composed of a 40-game assist bonus acquisition mode and an 8-game battle part, and the assist bonuses acquired in the assist bonus acquisition mode are used in the battle part.

(259) In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the display stages in non-AT mode were configured to include a normal stage, a CZ stage, and a precursor stage, but the display stages in AT mode may also be configured to include a normal stage, a CZ stage, and a precursor stage.

The AT modes that realize this configuration include a normal AT mode, an add-on specialized AT mode in which the number of games is added a predetermined number of times, and a premonition AT mode, which is passed through when transitioning from the normal AT mode to the add-on specialized AT mode. The premonition AT mode is configured to transition when a player wins the transition lottery when a rare combination is hit, or when 1,000 points are reached. The normal AT mode and premonition AT mode each have a normal zone and a challenge zone, and transitioning to the challenge zone results in a higher expected value of points being earned than in the normal zone.

(17-1) In the seventeenth embodiment described above, when changing the volume level, there are two methods of operation: one that goes through the menu screen and one that does not go through the menu screen. However, when checking the game history, there may be two methods of operation: one that goes through the menu screen and one that does not go through the menu screen. Also, when selecting a character, there may be two methods of operation: one that goes through the menu screen and one that does not go through the menu screen.

(17-2) In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the volume information is stored as a volume level when the effect switch 67 is operated. However, the volume information may be stored as a volume level when the selection switches 68a and 68b are operated, and the volume setting screen or the displayed volume information may be hidden when the effect switch 67 is operated. In other words, the effect switch 67 may not have a storage function for storing volume information, but may have a switching function for switching the display screen.

(17-3) In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, when the effect switch 67 is operated on the volume setting screen, the volume setting screen is returned to the menu screen. However, the volume setting screen may be returned to the customer waiting screen, or the volume setting screen may be returned to the non-customer waiting screen.

(17-4) In the seventeenth embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display menu screens, volume information, etc. However, a second auxiliary display unit may be provided in addition to the auxiliary display unit 65, and non-customer waiting effects and customer waiting effects may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, while the menu screens, volume information, etc. may be displayed on the second auxiliary display unit. In such a configuration, it may be possible to change the volume level, etc., during the game.

(17-5) In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the volume level can be changed when not playing, but instead of or in addition to this, the volume level can be changed when playing.

(17-6) In the 17th embodiment described above, the non-customer waiting screen and customer waiting screen during non-playing times were configured to display both that the menu screen can be called up by operating the effect switch 67 and that the volume level can be adjusted by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b. However, the configuration may be such that it only displays that the menu screen can be called up by operating the effect switch 67, or that the volume level can be adjusted by operating the selection switches 68a and 68b.

(17-7) In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, the selection switches 68a and 68b were arranged adjacent to each other on both the left and right sides of the effect switch 67, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, a unit that combines the effect switch and selection switch may be provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 239(a), an operation unit 600 is provided, which is made up of a performance switch 67, an up switch 68c located above the performance switch 67, a down switch 68d located below the performance switch 67, a right switch 68a located to the right of the performance switch 67, and a left switch 68b located to the left of the performance switch 67. The up switch 68c and down switch 68d are switches used to select information on the menu screen.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 239(b), an operation unit 600 may be provided that comprises a performance switch 67, an upper switch 68c provided on the upper periphery of the performance switch 67, a lower switch 68d provided on the lower periphery of the performance switch 67, a right switch 68a provided on the right periphery of the performance switch 67, and a left switch 68b provided on the left periphery of the performance switch 67. The upper switch 68c and lower switch 68d are switches used to select information on the menu screen.

It is also possible to arrange multiple selection switches together and place effect switches near these selection switches.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 239(c), the up switch 68c, down switch 68d, right switch 68a, and left switch 68b are arranged together, with the effect switch 67 located to the right of the right switch 68a. The up switch 68c and down switch 68d are switches used to select information on the menu screen.

A selection unit that integrates multiple selection switches may be arranged, and a performance switch may be arranged adjacent to the selection unit.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 239 (d), a selection unit 680 consisting of an up switch 68c, a down switch 68d, a right switch 68a, and a left switch 68b is arranged, and a performance switch 67 is arranged to the right of the selection unit 680. The up switch 68c and the down switch 68d are switches used when selecting information on the menu screen.

In a configuration that includes an up switch 68c and a down switch 68d in addition to the right switch 68a and left switch 68b as exemplified above, when changing the volume level via the menu screen, the volume level can be changed using the right switch 68a and left switch 68b, and when changing the volume level without going via the menu screen, the volume level can be changed using the up switch 68c and down switch 68d.

In addition, whether the volume level is changed via the menu screen or without going through the menu screen, the volume level can be changed using the right switch 68a and left switch 68b, and the game history can be displayed when the up switch 68c or down switch 68d is operated on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen.

(17-8) In the above-described 17th embodiment, the configuration includes the effect switch 67 and the selection switches 68a and 68b, but it may also be configured to include only the selection switches 68a and 68b. In such a configuration, operating the left switch 68b switches to the menu screen, and operating the right switch 68a displays volume information.

(17-9) In the seventeenth embodiment, the menu screen displayed "Game History," "Character Selection," "Volume Settings," and "Back." However, the items displayed on the menu screen are arbitrary. For example, in a configuration in which the brightness of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 can be changed, "Brightness Settings" may be provided as an item on the menu screen, and in a configuration in which the frequency of auxiliary effects in the game or the content of the effects can be changed, "Effect Settings" may be provided as an item on the menu screen. It goes without saying that the brightness of the display screen, the frequency of auxiliary effects, etc. may also be changed without going through the menu screen.

(17-10) In the seventeenth embodiment described above, when not playing, it was configured so that the menu screen could be called up and the volume level could be changed when the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen was displayed. However, it may also be configured so that the menu screen could be called up and the volume level could be changed when the non-customer waiting screen was displayed, or so that the menu screen could be called up and the volume level could be changed when the customer waiting screen was displayed.

(17-11) In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, when volume information is displayed on the non-customer waiting screen or customer waiting screen, it is displayed smaller than when the volume information is displayed on the volume setting screen. However, the volume information may also be displayed at the same size as the volume setting screen. Specifically, the volume information displayed on the volume setting screen is used as is. In this case, even if the volume information is displayed so that it overlaps with the non-customer waiting effects and customer waiting effects, if the volume information is configured to be transparent, it is possible to configure the non-customer waiting effects and customer waiting effects to be visible through the volume information, making it possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the non-customer waiting effects and customer waiting effects.

(17-12) In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, if the effect switch 67 is operated with "Back" selected on the menu screen, the screen transitions to the customer waiting screen regardless of the amount of time that has elapsed since the end of the game. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, if "Back" is selected on the menu screen and the effect switch 67 is operated, the screen will transition to a non-customer waiting screen regardless of the amount of time that has elapsed since the end of the game. In this configuration, the elapsed time may be reset when the screen transitions to the non-customer waiting screen, and the screen will transition to the customer waiting screen after 90 seconds have elapsed. Note that when the screen transitions from the menu screen to the non-customer waiting screen, the screen may not transition to the customer waiting screen until a medal is inserted.

For example, if "Back" is selected on the menu screen and the effect switch 67 is operated, the screen will transition to a customer waiting screen if 90 seconds have passed since the end of the game, and will transition to a non-customer waiting screen if 90 seconds have not passed since the end of the game. In this configuration, if the screen transitions to a non-customer waiting screen, the elapsed time may be reset at that timing and the screen will transition to the customer waiting screen after 90 seconds have passed, or the screen may transition to the customer waiting screen after 90 seconds have passed since the end of the game without resetting the elapsed time.

(17-13) In the above 17th embodiment, the screen switches from the non-customer waiting screen to the customer waiting screen when 90 seconds have passed since the end of the game, but the timing of switching to the customer waiting screen is arbitrary.

(17-14) In the seventeenth embodiment, the non-customer waiting screen is switched to the customer waiting screen based on the elapsed time since the end of the game, but the timing at which measurement of the elapsed time begins is arbitrary. It may be configured to measure the elapsed time from the time the stop switch is operated to generate the third stop command, or it may be configured to measure the elapsed time from the end of medal payout. It may also be configured to measure the elapsed time from the time all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

(17-15) In the seventeenth embodiment, when a game ends, operations such as calling up a menu screen and changing the volume level are immediately possible. However, the above operations may be possible after a predetermined time, such as five seconds, has elapsed since the game ended.

(18-1) In the above 18th embodiment, the lottery result command, rotation start command, and stop possible command were collectively referred to as the start command, but only the lottery result command may be the start command, or the lottery result command and rotation start command may be the start command. Furthermore, the information indicated by the lottery result command, the information indicated by the rotation start command, and the information indicated by the stop possible command may be transmitted together in a single command. The same applies to the end command.

(18-2) In the above-described 18th embodiment, various information related to the game zone is transmitted as a zone command to the display control device 81 at the end of the game, but it may also be transmitted to the display control device 81 at the start of the game. Even with such a configuration, it is expected that the same effects as those of the above-described 18th embodiment will be achieved.

(18-3) In the above 18th embodiment, if the continuous performance flag is set, the continuous performance is started when all start commands are received. However, the continuous performance may be started when the lottery result command is received, or when the rotation start command is received.

(18-4) In the above-described 18th embodiment, if a rare combination is won in chance mode but the lottery for transitioning to notification mode is not won, a false continuous performance is initiated. However, the conditions for initiating a false continuous performance are arbitrary. For example, if a rare combination is won in chance mode but the lottery for transitioning to notification mode is not won, a predetermined lottery may be conducted to determine whether or not to initiate a false continuous performance. Alternatively, a false continuous performance may be initiated when the number of games played in chance mode reaches a predetermined value, such as 250 or 500.

(18-5) In the above 18th embodiment, if a situation arises in which a command cannot be received from the main control device 101 in the game that started this continuous performance, but a situation arises in which an end command can be received for the game following the game that started this continuous performance, the continuous performance with three scenarios is omitted. However, the continuous performance with two scenarios may also be omitted.

(18-6) In the 18th embodiment, the value of the scenario number counter was updated when an end command was received. However, the value of the scenario number counter may also be updated when a start command is received. With such a configuration, for example, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control device 101 after a start command is received and a continuous performance with one scenario is started, but commands can be received from the start command for the second game, it will be possible to start a continuous performance with two scenarios in the second game.

(18-7) In the above 18th embodiment, a continuous effect is displayed when notifying whether or not a transition to the notification mode has occurred. However, this is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a continuous effect may be displayed when notifying whether or not a transition to the BB state has occurred, or a continuous effect may be displayed when notifying whether or not an increase in the number of net coins or number of games has occurred in the notification mode.

(18-8) In the above 18th embodiment, a continuous effect is performed over three games, but the number of games over which the continuous effect is performed is arbitrary.

(18-9) In the above-described 18th embodiment, the content of the continuous performance progresses when the first stop command through the third stop command are received. However, the content of the continuous performance may also be configured to progress regardless of the issuance of a stop command, such as displaying a specific movie. In such a configuration, the main control device 101 may not send the first stop command through the third stop command.

(18-10) In the above 18th embodiment, the navigation effect is configured to start when all start commands are received, but the continuous effect may be configured to start when a lottery result command is received, or when a rotation start command is received. Also, in a configuration in which a command indicating information related to the operation sequence to be notified is sent from the main control device 101 when a navigation effect is to be performed, the navigation effect may be configured to start when the command is received.

(18-11) In the 18th embodiment described above, if the first stop command to the third stop command for the next game are received while the navigation effect is being executed and it is determined that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the displayed operation sequence, the GET effect is executed even if a bell win has not been achieved. However, the GET effect may not be executed. In such a configuration, the GET effect may be executed if a bell win is achieved, or the GET effect may be executed on the conditions that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the displayed operation sequence and that a bell win has been achieved.

(18-12) In the 18th embodiment described above, if the second stop command is received without the first stop command while the navigation effect is being executed, the GET effect is not performed even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the displayed operation sequence. However, the GET effect may also be performed. In such a configuration, the GET effect may be performed when a bell win is achieved.

(18-13) In the above-described 18th embodiment, the navigation effect progresses when the first stop command through the third stop command are received. However, the navigation effect may not change until the GET effect. In such a configuration, the main control device 101 may not transmit the first stop command through the third stop command.

(18-14) In the above-described 18th embodiment, the first stop command through the third stop command are transmitted each time a stop command is issued. However, it is also possible to transmit the first stop command when the first stop command is issued, transmit the second stop command when the second stop command is issued, and not transmit the third stop command when the third stop command is issued. This is because, if the display control device 81 can determine which stop switch was operated last, even without receiving a command, it can determine which stop switch was operated first and which stop switch was operated second. Note that, in such a configuration, the processing performed when the third stop command is received in the above-described 18th embodiment may be performed when a predetermined end command, such as an all reels have stopped command, is received.

(18-15) In the above 18th embodiment, the number of games played since the transition to notification mode, displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, is updated when a start command is received. However, it may also be updated when an end command is received.

(18-16) In the above 18th embodiment, the number of coins acquired in the notification mode and the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the end of the notification mode, which are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, are updated when an end command is received. However, they may also be updated when a start command is received.

(18-17) In the 18th embodiment, if the push order bell is won in the notification mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win is announced. However, the operation sequence may be announced at a predetermined rate. For example, the notification modes may be configured to include notification mode A, which announces the operation sequence with a 50% probability when the push order bell is won, notification mode B, which announces the operation sequence with a 75% probability when the push order bell is won, and notification mode C, which announces the operation sequence with a 100% probability when the push order bell is won.

(18-18) In the 18th embodiment, the notification mode was configured to end based on the net increase in coins, but it may also be configured to end based on the number of games played.

(18-19) In the above-described 18th embodiment, the main control device 101 may be configured to manage the number of games played since transitioning to notification mode, and to send a command indicating the results of this management to the display control device 81. Specifically, when transitioning to notification mode, the mode game number counter is set to 0, and each time a game ends, the value of the mode game number counter is incremented by 1. Information indicating the value of the mode game number counter is then included in the interval command and sent.

(19-1) In the 19th embodiment described above, when the value of the notification difference counter becomes 0 in notification mode, the game transitions to the normal zone and the notification mode and advantageous zone end. However, the game may also transition to the chance mode and end the notification mode.

(19-2) In the 19th embodiment described above, if a push order bell is won during a three-coin game, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win is always announced in either the notification mode or the ending mode. However, the operation sequence may be announced at a predetermined rate, such as 75%. The rate at which the operation sequence is announced may also differ between the notification mode and the ending mode. For example, the operation sequence may be announced 80% of the time in the notification mode, and 100% of the time in the ending mode.

(19-3) In the 19th embodiment, when the push order bell is won during the notification difference number update process, 6 is subtracted from the value of the notification difference number counter regardless of whether or not a bell win is achieved. However, it is also possible to subtract 6 if a bell win is achieved and add 2 if a bell win is not achieved.

(19-4) In the 19th embodiment, if no winning combination is achieved during the notification difference number update process, the notification difference number counter is incremented by 3. However, the notification difference number update process may be terminated without changing the value of the notification difference number counter.

(19-5) In the 19th embodiment, the notification difference number update process is performed at the end of the game. However, instead, it may be performed at the start of the game, such as during the section lottery process. However, if such a configuration is used, it is necessary to ensure that when a small role or replay is won, a prize corresponding to the winning role is always achieved. Note that if a role that does not result in a miss is won, the notification difference number update process may be performed at the start of the game, and if a role that may result in a miss is won, the notification difference number update process may be performed at the end of the game.

(19-6) In the above 19th embodiment, the ending mode is entered when 3,950 plays are made in the advantageous zone and when the difference in number of coins since transitioning to the advantageous zone is 2,200 or more. However, the conditions for entering the ending mode are arbitrary. For example, the ending mode may be entered when the difference in number of coins since transitioning to the advantageous zone is 2,000 or more, or the transition condition may not require a predetermined number of plays, such as 3,950 plays, in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, the ending mode may be entered when it is determined that the difference in number of coins since transitioning to the advantageous zone will be 2,400 or more if the notification mode is continued. Note that the case where it is determined that the difference in number of coins since transitioning to the advantageous zone will be 2,400 or more if the notification mode is continued refers to the case where the remaining number of coins that can be won in the notification mode (the value of the notification difference number counter) is greater than the remaining number of coins that can be won in the advantageous zone (the value obtained by subtracting the value of the difference number counter from 65,521).

(19-7) In the 19th embodiment described above, the conditions for the advantageous zone to end regardless of the game mode at the time were when 4,000 games had been played and when the difference in the number of coins since entering the advantageous zone was 2,400 or more. However, it may also be configured to only end when the difference in the number of coins since entering the advantageous zone is 2,400 or more. Furthermore, it may also be configured to set a maximum number of games, such as 65,535, at which the advantageous zone will no longer end.

(19-8) In the above 19th embodiment, when the game transitions to ending mode based on 3,950 plays being played in the advantageous zone, the number of remaining games may be displayed in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 instead of the remaining number of coins. Regarding the display of the number of remaining games, since it is not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the notification mode, it may be configured to be displayed from the first game in ending mode.

(19-9) In the 19th embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured not to display the remaining number of coins at least during the first game in ending mode, but it may be configured to display the number from the first game in ending mode. However, if such a configuration is used, it is desirable to indicate that the remaining number of coins displayed in notification mode and the remaining number of coins displayed in ending mode are different.

For example, in notification mode, the remaining number of coins is displayed in the upper left corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, and in ending mode, the remaining number of coins is displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65.

For example, the number of remaining coins displayed in notification mode and the number of remaining coins displayed in ending mode can be displayed in different font sizes.

For example, the remaining number displayed in notification mode and the remaining number displayed in ending mode can be configured to be different colors.

It goes without saying that the above examples may be combined.

(19-10) In the 19th embodiment, the remaining number of coins is not displayed in a game that transitions from notification mode to ending mode. However, the display control device 81 may continue to control the display of the remaining number of coins, while the auxiliary display unit 65 does not display the remaining number of coins until the value of the remaining number counter reaches 50 or less.

(19-11) In the above 19th embodiment, when the value of the notification difference number counter is 0, the system does not transition to ending mode even if the difference number after transitioning to the advantageous zone is 2,200 or more. However, the system may also be configured to transition to ending mode.

(19-12) In the 19th embodiment described above, the notification mode ends based on the difference in the number of coins played after three coins have been played since the notification mode was entered, and the ending mode ends based on the difference in the number of coins played after the game entered the advantageous zone. However, the conditions for ending the notification mode and the ending mode are arbitrary.

For example, the notification mode may be configured to end based on the number of three-coin plays performed under the notification mode.

For example, the notification mode may be configured to end based on the number of three-coin plays and two-coin plays played under the notification mode.

For example, the notification mode may be configured to end based on the number of medals paid out when three medals are played in notification mode.

For example, the notification mode may be configured to end based on the number of medals paid out in notification mode.

For example, the ending mode may be configured to end based on the number of three-coin plays performed in the ending mode.

For example, the ending mode may be configured to end based on the number of three-coin plays and two-coin plays performed in the ending mode.

For example, the ending mode may be configured to end based on the number of medals paid out when three medals are played in the ending mode.

For example, the ending mode may end based on the number of medals paid out in the ending mode.

It goes without saying that the above examples may be combined.

(19-13) In the above 19th embodiment, information related to the number of games played, such as the section game number counter and mode game number counter, was configured to be updated at the end of play, but it may also be configured to be updated at the start of play.

(19-14) In the above-described 19th embodiment, a command indicating whether a three-coin play or a two-coin play has been performed may be sent to the display control device 81.

(19-15) In the above 19th embodiment, a command indicating the value of the difference number counter is sent to the display control device 81. However, the main control device 101 may subtract the value of the difference number counter from 65521 and send a command indicating the result of the subtraction to the display control device 81. In such a configuration, the processing of step S191401 is not necessary in the number display processing in ending mode.

(19-16) In the 19th embodiment, the notification difference number counter is used in the notification mode and the difference number counter is used in the ending mode. However, in addition to these, the main control unit 101 may be provided with an MY counter that is set to its initial value when a RAM clear operation is performed, and the MY counter may be configured to manage the difference number of coins since the RAM clear operation. Then, the notification difference number counter, difference number counter, and MY counter may be used for control depending on whether or not specific conditions are met. Specifically, the game results of both the two-coin game and the three-coin game are reflected in the MY counter, and if the value of the MY counter reaches, for example, +19,000, the game will be stopped until a RAM clear operation is performed, and no further games can be started. In this configuration, if the MY counter value is less than +18,500, the notification difference number counter is used in notification mode, and the difference number counter is used in ending mode. When the MY counter value reaches the MY period of +18,500 to +19,000, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a message saying "There are XX number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated."

(20-1) In the 20th embodiment described above, if the transition lottery is not won in notification mode A, the system transitions to the normal zone and notification mode A and the advantageous zone end. However, the system may also be configured to transition to chance mode and end notification mode A. Furthermore, when notification mode B ends, the system may also be configured to transition to chance mode and end notification mode B.

(20-2) In the 20th embodiment described above, when a push order bell is won during a three-coin game, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win is always announced in either notification mode A or notification mode B. However, the operation sequence may be announced at a predetermined rate, such as 75%, instead. Also, the rate at which the operation sequence is announced may differ between notification mode A and notification mode B. For example, the operation sequence may be announced 50% of the time in notification mode A, and 100% of the time in notification mode B.

(20-3) In the 20th embodiment described above, notification mode A is configured to end based on the number of plays played in notification mode A, but the conditions for ending notification mode A are arbitrary. For example, notification mode A may be configured to end based on the number of three-coin plays played in notification mode A, or notification mode A may be configured to end based on the difference in the number of coins since transitioning to notification mode A. The same applies to notification mode B.

(20-4) In the 20th embodiment described above, a configuration was adopted in which a transition win could be notified in response to a win in the B add-on lottery. However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a win in the next B add-on lottery (e.g., the second time) could be used to notify a player that they have won the previous B add-on lottery (e.g., the first time).

(20-5) In the 20th embodiment, the B add-on lottery is not conducted until the transition lottery is won, but the B add-on lottery may be conducted. For example, in addition to the configuration of the 20th embodiment, if no combination other than BB1 or BB2 is won, the B add-on lottery is won with a predetermined probability. However, if the B add-on lottery is won, the number of add-on games acquired through the win is not announced until the transition win is announced, but is announced in the game in which the transition win is announced or in the final game of announcement mode A. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the 20th embodiment can be achieved.

In addition, if the player wins the B additional lottery but does not win the transition lottery and reaches the final game of notification mode A, notification mode A may be configured to end without transitioning to notification mode B, or notification mode A may be configured to end by transitioning to notification mode B with the acquired additional game as the initial game (i.e., the 100 games set when the transition lottery is won are not added).

(20-6) In the 20th embodiment, notification mode A was configured to end when 50 games have been played, regardless of whether the transition lottery or the B-addition lottery has been won. However, notification mode A may also be configured to end when 50 games have been played or when the B-addition lottery has been won.

(20-7) In the 20th embodiment described above, the final game of notification mode A was configured to notify whether or not there would be a transition to notification mode B, and if there would be a transition to notification mode B, the initial number of games in notification mode B. However, these may not be notified. If a transition win is not notified in the final game of notification mode A, the transition win may be notified at the start of the next game, i.e., at the start of the first game of notification mode B. Furthermore, if there is an additional number of games that has not yet been notified, the win may be notified at any time after transitioning to notification mode B.

(20-8) In the 20th embodiment, if a weak cherry is won, the transition lottery itself is not conducted. However, it is also possible to conduct the transition lottery but always end up with a non-winning result.

(20-9) In the 20th embodiment described above, the announcement effect is performed at the start of the game. However, when an announcement command is received, the display control device 81 may determine whether the announcement effect should be performed at the start of the game, when the first reel stops, when the second reel stops, or when the third reel stops.

The timing of the announcement performance may also be determined by the main control device 101. If the timing is determined by the main control device 101, a so-called freeze process may be performed in conjunction with the execution of the announcement performance, without checking whether a stop command has been issued.

(20-10) In the 20th embodiment described above, a pseudo game is played in the game when the transition lottery or B additional lottery is won, or when the pseudo game lottery is won. However, instead of or in addition to this, the number of latent games may be determined, and the pseudo game may be played after three games corresponding to the determined number of latent games have been played.

(20-11) In the 20th embodiment described above, the configuration includes a notification effect that always notifies at least one of a transition win and the number of additional games, and a pseudo-game effect in which the notification content changes depending on whether or not sevens are lined up. However, the configuration may include only the pseudo-game effect, or a content-changing effect in which the notification content changes depending on whether or not the notification conditions are met.

In addition to the pseudo-game effects in the 20th embodiment, the following examples of content change effects are also possible.

For example, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of right stop switch 44 → middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 to form a winning combination, there is a possibility of a 7-match combination. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a special replay in which the "replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line. If the transition lottery or B-addition lottery is won, a "press the reels backwards to aim for a 7-match combination" effect will be played in the subsequent special replay-winning game. In the "press the reels backwards" effect, if a 7-match combination is achieved, an announcement will be made according to the winning combination when the transition lottery or B-addition lottery was won. If a 7-match combination is not achieved, the transition win and the number of added games will not be announced.

For example, if the transition lottery or B additional lottery is won, a mission such as "Operate the left stop switch 42 within 10 seconds" will be displayed at the start of the game. If the mission is cleared during the mission display, an announcement will be made according to the winning role, but if the mission is unsuccessful, the transition win and the number of additional games will not be announced.

For example, if you win the Transition Lottery or B Bonus Lottery, a command such as "Win a Replay in the next game" will be displayed at the end of the game. If the command is cleared, a notification will be made based on the winning combination in the previous game. If the command is unsuccessful, the Transition Lottery and the number of bonus games will not be announced.

(20-12) In the 20th embodiment described above, the pseudo game effect can be performed both when a transition lottery is held and when a B-addition lottery is held. However, the pseudo game effect may be performed only when a transition lottery is held, and the notification effect may be performed when a B-addition lottery is held. Even with such a configuration, an event can occur in which the B-addition lottery is won even when a transition win has not been notified, so the same effects as those of the 20th embodiment described above can be expected.

(20-13) In the 20th embodiment described above, whether or not a seven has been matched in a simulated game is not managed by the main control device 101, but is managed by the display control device 81 based on whether or not the unannounced flag is set. However, it may also be managed by the main control device 101.

Specifically, the main control unit 101 is configured to set an unannounced flag if sevens are not lined up in the pseudo-game when the transition lottery is won. Then, in the B add-on lottery process (see FIG. 270), when the number of add-on games is added to the value of the B game number counter in step S200303, it is configured to determine whether the unannounced flag is set. If the unannounced flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S200304. If the unannounced flag is set, if a strong cherry is won, a notification command is sent. If a strong watermelon or weak watermelon is won, a pressing flag is set. If a weak cherry is won, the process ends without sending the notification command or setting the pressing flag. If the B add-on lottery is not won, if it is determined in step S200308 that the pseudo-game lottery has been won, it is configured to determine whether a weak cherry has been won. If a weak cherry is won, it is further configured to determine whether the unannounced flag is set. If a weak cherry is not won, or if a weak cherry is won but the unannounced flag is not set, the process ends after setting the eye-pressing flag in step S200309. If a weak cherry is won but the unannounced flag is set, the process ends without setting the eye-pressing flag.

With the above configuration, if the unannounced flag is set, the same effect as when a transition lottery is held will be displayed. Specifically, in the 20th embodiment, if a strong watermelon is won and the B bonus lottery is won, a notification effect will be displayed, but with the above configuration, a pseudo-game effect will be displayed. Also, with the above configuration, if a weak cherry is won and the B bonus lottery is won, neither the notification effect nor the pseudo-game effect will be displayed.

In the above configuration, if a B-addition lottery win occurs when a transition win has not been notified, the correspondence between the winning role at the time of B-addition lottery win and the notification content is as follows:

If you win a Strong Cherry, a notification will be displayed to let you know that you have won, but the number of additional games will not be announced.

If you win the Strong Watermelon, a pseudo-game effect will be played. If 7s are lined up, a transition win will be announced, but the number of additional games will not be announced. If 7s are not lined up, neither a transition win nor the number of additional games will be announced.

If you win with a weak cherry, no announcement or pseudo-game effect will be performed. Therefore, neither a transition win nor the number of additional games will be announced.

If a weak watermelon is won, a pseudo-game effect will be played. If sevens are lined up, a transition win will be announced, but the number of additional games will not be announced. If sevens are not lined up, neither a transition win nor the number of additional games will be announced.

(20-14) In the above 20th embodiment, a configuration was described in which a transition lottery was conducted to determine whether to transition from notification mode A to notification mode B and a B addition lottery was conducted, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be configured to determine whether to award a specified benefit in a specific gaming state.

For example, in chance mode, a transition lottery may be held to determine whether to transition to notification mode A, and an A-addition lottery to determine whether to increase the number of games that can be played in notification mode A. Even with this configuration, it is necessary to play a predetermined number of games after winning the transition lottery before transitioning to notification mode A, and if the notification content changes depending on the winning role if the A-addition lottery is won during this period, it is expected to achieve the same effects as the 20th embodiment above.

For example, in the BB state, a transition lottery may be held to determine whether to transition to the AT state, in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified at a navigation rate of 50% after the BB state ends, and an increase lottery to increase the navigation rate may be held.

(20-15) In the 20th embodiment described above, the conditions for the advantageous zone to end regardless of the game mode at that time were when 4,000 games were played and when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone was 2,400 or more. However, it may also be configured to end only when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone is 2,400 or more. Furthermore, it may also be configured to set a maximum number of games, such as 65,535, beyond which the advantageous zone will no longer end.

(21-1) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the game counter and the number of games played displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 were updated when a start command was received, but they may also be updated when an end command is received, or when a winning result command is received.

(21-2) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the winning number counter and the winning number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are updated when a start command and a winning result command are received, but it may be configured to update only when a winning result command is received, or only when an end command is received. In these configurations, as explained in the winning update process of the remaining number display process, the increase can be calculated by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts, and this increase can be added to the value of the winning number counter.

(21-3) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the number of games played in the notification mode was displayed. However, instead of or in addition to this, the number of games played in the chance mode may be displayed. However, in the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the notification mode is entered when 700 three-coin plays have been performed in the chance mode (see Figures 26 and 28). Since the number of games played in the chance mode is closely related to the conditions for transitioning to the notification mode (conditions for terminating the chance mode), in such a configuration, if a discrepancy occurs in the number of games played in the chance mode, it is desirable to correct the discrepancy in the number of games played in the chance mode based on information indicating the value of the transition game number counter included in the start command.

(21-4) In the above-described 21st embodiment, a winning result command including information indicating the winning condition device is transmitted, but a winning result command including information indicating the payout amount may also be transmitted. Furthermore, information indicating the winning condition device or the payout amount may be transmitted in an end command rather than in a winning result command.

(21-5) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, a negative value can be displayed as the number of coins acquired. However, it is also possible to display 0 as the number of coins acquired when the value of the acquired coin counter is 0 or less, and to display the value of the acquired coin counter as the number of coins acquired when the value of the acquired coin counter is 1 or more.

(21-6) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, any discrepancies in the number of games played are maintained without correction, but it goes without saying that any discrepancies in the number of games played may also be corrected. The same applies to the number of coins won.

(21-7) In the above 21st embodiment, any discrepancy in the remaining number is corrected, but the discrepancy in the remaining number may be maintained without being corrected.

(21-8) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the remaining number of coins displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated when a winning result command is received if there is no discrepancy. However, as with the update of the number of coins won, it may also be configured to be updated when a start command is received and when a winning result command is received.

(21-9) In the above-described 21st embodiment, if there is a discrepancy in the remaining number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, it is corrected when a start command is received. However, it may also be corrected when an end command is received.

(21-10) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, when the bonus lottery is won, the bonus effect is started in the game in which the bonus lottery was won. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and the bonus effect may be started when a predetermined notification condition is met. For example, the bonus effect may be started after a predetermined number of games have been played, such as five games after the game in which the bonus lottery was won, or the bonus effect may be started when a predetermined role, such as a replay, is won in a game after the bonus lottery was won.

(21-11) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the content of the added effect progresses when the first stop command through the third stop command and the winning result command are received. However, the content of the added effect may progress regardless of the issuance of a stop command, such as by displaying a specified movie. Furthermore, the added effect may not start from the start of the game, but may simply notify the number of added coins when the first stop command, second stop command, or third stop command is issued.

(21-12) In the 21st embodiment, the start command includes information indicating the value of the net increase coin counter and information indicating the number of coins added. However, the start command may not include information indicating the number of coins added. Even with this configuration, if the value of the net increase coin counter is greater than the grasped value, it can be determined that the add-on lottery has been won, so it is expected to achieve the same effect as the 21st embodiment. However, with this configuration, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received across multiple games, the frequency of the add-on effect will be lower than in the 21st embodiment.

For example, if a command cannot be received for two games, and the value of the net increase coin counter is decremented by 10 during those two games, but an additional lottery is won and an additional 10 is added, the grasped value and the value of the net increase coin counter will match, and the display control device 81 will not be able to grasp that the additional lottery has been won.

Alternatively, if a command cannot be received for two games, and the value of the net increase coin counter is decremented by 10 during those two games, but an additional 5 is added as a result of winning the additional lottery, the value of the net increase coin counter will be 5 less than the grasped value, and the display control device 81 will not be able to grasp that the additional lottery has been won, and will correct the remaining number of coins to 5 less without executing the additional effect.

(21-13) In the above-described 21st embodiment, the start command and the end command were configured to be identical except for the header information indicating the command type, but they may be configured differently. For example, the start command may include information indicating the number of additional coins, while the end command may not include information indicating the number of additional coins.

(21-14) In the 21st embodiment described above, if a situation arises in which a start command cannot be received in a game in which the player has won the bonus lottery but an end command can be received, a one-hit effect is performed in the game in which the remaining number of coins is 0, and the number of coins added is announced. However, if a specified notification condition is met in a game after the game in which the bonus lottery is won, a specified auxiliary effect is performed to announce the number of coins added, it is expected that the same effect as the 21st embodiment described above will be achieved. Typical examples of specified notification conditions include when the remaining number of coins reaches 10, when a specified combination such as a replay is won, or when a specified combination such as a push order bell is won a specified number of times, such as three times.

(21-15) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, if a situation arises in which a start command cannot be received but an end command can be received in a game in which the bonus lottery has been won, the number of bonus coins may be announced all at once in the next bonus performance.

(21-16) In the above-described 21st embodiment, the display control device 81 is configured to include a remaining number counter, a notified number counter, and an unnotified number counter. However, it may also be configured to include a remaining number counter and a notified number counter, or a remaining number counter and an unnotified number counter.

(21-17) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the auxiliary effects that notify the number of added coins are configured to include an added effect and a one-hit effect. However, it goes without saying that other auxiliary effects may be included instead of or in addition to these. The auxiliary effects that notify the number of added coins may be configured to include a continuous effect that is performed over multiple games, or a pseudo-game effect that performs a pseudo-game.

(21-18) In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, if a situation arises in which neither the start command nor the end command can be received in a game in which the additional lottery has been won, the number of additional coins is reflected in the remaining number when the start command is received. However, if a situation arises in which a start command cannot be received in a game in which the additional lottery has been won, the number of additional coins may be reflected in the remaining number when the situation returns to one in which the start command can be received. In such a configuration, there is no need to include information indicating the number of additional coins in the end command, and there is no need for processing configurations that take into account situations in which a start command cannot be received, such as an unreported coin counter or end-time processing.

(21-19) In the 21st embodiment described above, when the notification mode is entered, the number of games played, the number of coins won, and the number of coins remaining are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, this is not limited to this configuration, and the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to display at least one of the various pieces of information described above.

(21-20) In the 21st embodiment described above, when the notification mode is entered, the number of games played, the number of coins won, and the number of coins remaining are constantly displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, they may also be displayed only when a specified display condition is met.

The number of games played may be displayed, for example, every 10 three-coin games.

Regarding the number of coins acquired, the number may be displayed when it reaches a multiple of 50, for example, or, in addition, the number may be displayed when it reaches a number appropriate to the setting, such as 66 coins when the setting is 6.

The remaining number may be displayed until the notification mode ends when it falls below a predetermined value, such as 30.

(21-21) In the 21st embodiment, as in the first embodiment, it may be configured to send lottery result commands, additional commands, section commands, etc.

(21-22) In the 21st embodiment, the notification mode was configured to end based on the number of medals acquired in the notification mode. However, the notification mode may also be configured to end based on the number of games played or the number of three-coin games played in the notification mode.

In a configuration in which the notification mode ends based on the number of plays, the remaining number of plays displayed in place of the remaining number of coins will decrease by one each time a play is played, unless the bonus lottery is won. Therefore, in such a configuration, even if the start command includes information indicating the remaining number of plays but does not include information indicating the bonus number of plays, it is expected that the same effects as those of the 21st embodiment described above will be achieved. The same applies to the end command.

(22-1) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, when the Freeze A effect is performed, the main control unit 101 is configured to perform control to change the stop combination to one that has a higher probability of winning the transition lottery than the rare combination that was won, but the control performed by the main control unit 101 is optional.

For example, when performing a freeze B effect, the main control device 101 may perform a process of waiting for a predetermined time, and the display control device 81 may control the auxiliary display unit 65 to perform a predetermined auxiliary effect within the predetermined time range.

For example, as in the simulated game in the first embodiment above, a configuration may be adopted in which control is performed to simulate the stopping of a predetermined stop number based on the player's operation of stop switches 42-44. In a configuration with effect switches, control may be performed to simulate the stopping of a predetermined stop number based on the operation of an effect switch instead of stop switches 42-44. Needless to say, the configuration may also be based on the operation of the start lever 41 or other operating means.

(22-2) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, if a rare combination is won in the challenge zone, the freeze A effect is displayed at the start of the next game. However, the main control device 101 may be configured to determine whether the freeze A effect is displayed at the start of the next game, after the first stop command is issued, after the second stop command is issued, or after the third stop command is issued.

(22-3) In the 22nd embodiment described above, if a rare combination is won in the challenge zone, the freeze A effect is displayed at the start of the next game. However, the freeze A effect may be displayed after a predetermined number of plays, such as after two games, or may be displayed when a predetermined combination is won in a replay, etc.

In addition, in a configuration where there is an interval of two or more games between the game in which a rare combination is won and the game in which the Freeze A effect is displayed, the frequency of the game in which the Freeze A effect is displayed increases after the transition to notification mode. Therefore, in such a configuration, if the first game in notification mode occurs while waiting for the conditions for executing the Freeze A effect to be met, the Freeze A effect can be displayed in that first game, achieving the same effects as the 22nd embodiment described above.

To give a specific example, in chance mode and premonition mode, freeze flag 0 is set in the game in which a rare combination is won, and freeze flag 0 is cleared and freeze flag 1 is set in the next game. With this configuration, the freeze A effect is performed two games after the game in which a rare combination is won. The notification mode transition process determines whether freeze flag 0 is set, and if freeze flag 0 is set, freeze flag 0 is cleared and freeze flag 1 is set. With this configuration, if a rare combination is won in the final game of premonition mode and freeze flag 0 is set, the freeze flag will be changed to 1 in the notification mode transition process for that game, and the freeze A effect will be performed in the next game (the first game in notification mode) rather than two games later.

In addition, instead of performing the Freeze A effect in the first game of the notification mode, the Freeze A effect may be performed in the second game or later of the notification mode. In such a configuration, if a message such as "The reel effect that was scheduled to be performed during the premonition effect is now being performed" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the irregular display in the 22nd embodiment.

(22-4) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, if the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 10 while this premonition effect is being performed, and a rare combination is won in the challenge zone but the player does not win the premonition lottery, a defeat effect is displayed. However, a victory effect may also be displayed. In this case, the freeze A effect of the next game may be configured to display "!!!" or an episode movie related to the victory effect. An irregular display may also be displayed.

(22-5) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the auxiliary effects executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 in the freeze A effect were configured to include the "!!!" display, the reversal effect, the irregular display, and the announcement of the number of games played in advance, but it goes without saying that the configuration may be such that auxiliary effects other than these can be executed. Instead of the "!!!" display, the configuration may be such that chance announcements such as "Chance!" or "Chance?" can be executed.

(22-6) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, if the number is converted to a fixed number, the next game will transition to the notification mode. However, if the game is in the chance mode, the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode will be 100% successful, and the next game will transition to the premonition mode.

(22-7) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, in the premonition mode, the advance lottery is conducted only when the number is converted to a fixed number. However, even if the number is not converted to a fixed number, the advance lottery may be conducted with a winning probability according to the conversion result.

(22-8) In the 22nd embodiment described above, in the transition lottery in the challenge zone of chance mode, the winning/losing decision is made based on the most recent winning role number stored in the conversion role memory area and the random number obtained when determining whether the role is a winning or losing role. However, the winning/losing decision may also be made based solely on the random number obtained when determining whether the role is a winning or losing role.

To give a specific example, if the random number that results in a win for a weak cherry is between 1 and 100, in the performance role determination process, if the obtained random number is between 1 and 80, the conversion role is determined to be watermelon; if the obtained random number is between 81 and 95, the conversion role is determined to be chance; if the obtained random number is between 96 and 98, the conversion role is determined to be strong cherry; and if the obtained random number is 99 or 100, the conversion role is determined to be strong bell. In the transition lottery for the challenge zone, if the obtained random number is 1, 2, 81, 82, 83, 96, or 99, it is determined that the transition lottery has been won. In the transition lottery for the normal zone, if the obtained random number is 1, it is determined that the transition lottery has been won. Even with this configuration, the conversion role selection rate and the winning probability of the transition lottery will be the same as in the 22nd embodiment (see Figure 311), so it is expected to achieve the same effects as in the 22nd embodiment.

(22-9) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, if the advance lottery is won, the number of advance games is announced in the freeze A effect that is performed in the next game (the first game in the notification mode). However, instead of announcing the number of advance games, a "!!!" display or a reversal effect may be performed. In such a configuration, the number of advance games may be announced at any timing after transitioning to the notification mode. A typical example of an arbitrary timing is a game in which the number of remaining games displayed reaches 0 in a configuration in which the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of remaining games in the notification mode.

(22-10) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, an irregular display was configured to display the text "An irregular reel effect has occurred." However, it is also possible to display the text "This reel effect does not correspond to the awarding of a bonus," or to display the text "If a penalty operation has not been performed...." Such a configuration that clearly indicates that the effect is unrelated to the awarding of a bonus can be expected to achieve the same effects as the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment.

(22-11) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, when performing the Freeze B effect, the main control device 101 is configured to wait for 5 seconds, but it may also be configured to perform control to pseudo-stop a specified stop result, as in the case of performing the Freeze A effect.

(22-12) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the main control device 101 controls two types of effects: freeze A effect and freeze B effect. However, it goes without saying that the main control device 101 may control three or more types of effects.

For example, in the 22nd embodiment described above, when transitioning from premonition mode to notification mode, the mode transitions to notification mode A. However, the configuration may be such that a predetermined lottery or the like is conducted to transition to either notification mode A, notification mode B, or notification mode C. In such a configuration, in addition to the two types of freeze effects described above, a freeze C effect is provided.

In the Freeze C effect, when the game switches to notification mode A, the "white 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop pseudo-stop on the lower line L3; when the game switches to notification mode B, the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop pseudo-stop on the lower line L3; and when the game switches to notification mode C, the "BAR" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop pseudo-stop on the lower line L3.

When performing the three freeze effects mentioned above in the first game of notification mode, they will be performed in the following order:

If the player does not win the advance lottery, when transitioning to notification mode A or notification mode B, the execution order will be Freeze A effect (reverse effect) → Freeze C effect (notification of transition to notification mode) → Freeze B effect (specified opening movie). When transitioning to notification mode C, the execution order will be Freeze A effect (reverse effect) → Freeze B effect (specified opening movie) → Freeze C effect (notification of transition to notification mode C).

If you win the advance lottery and transition to notification mode A or notification mode B, the execution order will be Freeze C effect (notification of destination notification mode) → Freeze B effect (specified opening movie) → Freeze A effect (notification of number of advance games). If transition to notification mode C occurs, the execution order will be Freeze B effect (specified opening movie) → Freeze C effect (notification of transition to notification mode C) → Freeze A effect (notification of number of advance games).

As described above, even if three or more freeze effects are executed in the first game, if the execution order is changed depending on the conditions, it is expected that the same effects as those of the 22nd embodiment will be achieved.

In addition, if the advance lottery is not won and the game transitions to notification mode B, the execution order may be as follows: victory effect (main premonition effect) → freeze C effect (the "white 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped on the lower line L3 to notify the transition to notification mode A) → freeze A effect (the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped on the lower line L3 to notify the transition to notification mode B) → freeze B effect (specified opening movie).

(22-13) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the length of the premonition mode and the length of the main premonition effect were configured to match when a penalty operation was not performed, but they may not match. For example, the first part of the premonition effect may not be included, and only the three-game showdown effect may be performed.

(22-14) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the content of the effects to be performed up to the 10th game is determined in this premonition confirmation process, but the content of the effects may not be determined. In such a configuration, the content of the effects may be determined based on the value of the premonition game number counter in this premonition effect process.

(22-15) In the 22nd embodiment described above, the effects determined in the 10-game effect setting process are performed in the first to ninth games of this premonition effect. However, instead of or in addition to this, the effects may be performed based on the results of a lottery.

For example, if a rare combination is won in the fourth game of this premonition effect and is converted into a fixed combination, a disappointment effect will be displayed, ending this premonition effect in the fourth game. Then, in the freeze A effect of the next game, instead of displaying "!!!", a congratulatory effect will be displayed to notify the player of the transition to notification mode. Even with this configuration, the flow is disappointment effect → fixed combination and congratulatory effect → specified opening movie, so the same effects as those of the 22nd embodiment can be achieved.

(22-16) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the victory or defeat effect is displayed in the 10th game of this premonition effect, but the victory effect may be displayed in any of the 1st to 9th games. In such a configuration, the number of games for which the victory effect is displayed can be determined in the 10G effect setting process.

(22-17) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the reel transitions to the Challenge Zone when a replay or rare combination is won three games in a row, but the conditions for transitioning to the Challenge Zone are arbitrary.

(22-18) In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the CZ transition determination process is configured to reset the consecutive number counter to 0 when the value reaches 3, but it may also be configured not to reset it to 0. In such a configuration, if a replay role or rare role is won four or more games in a row, 15 will be added to the CZ game number counter each time a replay or rare role is won.

(22-19) In the 22nd embodiment, the game section processing is performed at the end of the game, but it may also be performed at the start of the game.

(22-20) In the 22nd embodiment described above, when the premonition mode ends, the announcement mode starts from the next game. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which an announcement mode transition role is provided, and the announcement mode starts when the announcement mode transition role is won after the premonition mode ends. In such a configuration, a waiting period for the announcement mode to start occurs between the premonition mode and the announcement mode, depending on the result of the role selection. Therefore, if an irregular display is displayed when a freeze A effect is performed during the waiting period for the announcement mode to start, it can be expected that the same effects as those of the 22nd embodiment described above will be achieved.

(23-1) In the above 23rd embodiment, the MY counter reaches a stop state when its value reaches 19,000, but the MY counter value at which the stop state is reached is not limited to 19,000 and can be any value.

(23-2) In the above-described 23rd embodiment, the stop state can be cleared by turning on the power after the setting key has been turned on. However, the stop state may also be cleared by turning on the power after the reset switch 72 has been turned on. Furthermore, the stop state may also be cleared by simply turning on the power, or by operating the reset switch 72.

(23-3) In the 23rd embodiment described above, the MY counter is initialized when the power is turned on only. However, it is also possible to configure the MY counter not to be initialized when a specific operation is performed, even when the power is turned on only. For example, a switch button that can be switched between ON and OFF may be provided, and when the switch button is in the OFF position, the MY counter is initialized when the power is turned on only, and when the switch button is in the ON position, the MY counter is not initialized when the power is turned on only. With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate MY across multiple business days.

(23-4) In the above-described 23rd embodiment, the error processing was used to set the stop state, but a program and data for setting the stop state may be stored in advance in ROM 105, separate from the error processing.

(23-5) In the 23rd embodiment described above, the MY counter is not updated when a replay win is achieved, but the MY counter may be updated even when a replay win is achieved.

(23-6) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, the complete process is configured to add the value of the payout counter to the value of the MY counter and subtract the value of the bet counter from the result of this addition, but this configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the cumulative result of the difference between the number of medals used in the game and the number of medals paid out is stored in the MY counter. Therefore, it is also possible to subtract the value of the bet counter from the value of the MY counter and add the value of the payout counter to the result of this subtraction.

Alternatively, the value of the bet counter may be subtracted from the value of the MY counter at the start of the game, and the value of the payout counter may be added to the value of the MY counter after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. Alternatively, the number of medal changes may be calculated by subtracting the value of the bet counter from the value of the payout counter after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and the number of medal changes may be added to the value of the MY counter.

The same applies to updating the difference counter.

(23-7) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, the initial value of the MY counter was set to 0, and if the updated value of the MY counter was a negative value, the MY counter was set to 0. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, the initial value of the MY counter can be set to a non-zero value such as 32768, and when the MY counter value reaches 51768, the complete flag can be set. With this configuration, the updated result of the MY counter will not become negative until MY reaches -32768, meaning that an event where the updated result of the MY counter becomes negative within one business day will not occur. As a result, the base point for calculating MY can be set to the time when the power is turned on, rather than the time when the number of medals has decreased the most since the power was turned on and the game results were obtained.

In addition, when using the above configuration, bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter is also used. For this reason, in the MY command transmission process, the value of bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter is set to bit 0 of the transmitting MY counter, and the value of bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter is set to bit 1 of the transmitting MY counter, so that the display control device 81 can grasp the value of bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter.

In addition, when using the above configuration, the complete flag may be set when the MY counter value reaches 13768 (when MY reaches -19000) instead of or in addition to when the MY counter value reaches 51768.

As with the MY counter, the initial value of the difference number counter may be a value other than 0. For example, in the game interval processing in the normal interval (see Figure 26), when transitioning to the advantageous interval, the difference number counter is set to 4500 (= 3 x 1500), and the advantageous interval ends when the value of the difference number counter reaches 6900 in the end determination processing (see Figure 29). With this configuration, the value of the difference number counter will no longer become negative until the advantageous interval ends, so it will be possible to end the advantageous interval when the difference number reaches 2400, starting from the time of transition to the advantageous interval.

(23-8) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, the complete processing is configured to determine whether the MY counter value has reached 19,000 regardless of whether a replay win has been achieved. However, it may also be configured not to determine whether the MY counter value has reached 19,000 when a replay win has been achieved. With such a configuration, it is possible to further shorten the processing time when a replay win has been achieved.

The same applies to the end determination process in the advantageous zone, and if a replay win is achieved, it may be configured not to determine whether the value of the difference number counter has reached 2400.

(23-9) In the 23rd embodiment described above, when a transition to the BB state occurs, the number of medals owned by the player decreases in the BB state. However, the number of medals owned by the player may also increase in the BB state.

In a configuration in which a player's owned medals increase during BB state, if the value of the MY counter reaches 19,000 during BB state, the game may be stopped at that time, or the game may be stopped after the BB state ends. The BB state ends when a predetermined number of plays have been played or a predetermined number of medals have been paid out, and there is no increase in the number of plays that can be played or the number of medals that can be earned, as occurs in notification mode. Therefore, even if the game is stopped after the BB state ends, it is possible to prevent the BB state from continuing indefinitely after the value of the MY counter reaches 19,000, ensuring the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the player's medal holdings increase during BB state, the player can estimate the number of medals they will win when they transition to BB state. For this reason, if the system is configured to cap the game midway through BB state, for example, if the cap occurs when the BB state ends with nine medals remaining, the player may think, "It would be nice if the cap occurred after the remaining nine medals have been paid out," which could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. On the other hand, if the system is configured to cap the game after the BB state ends, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

(23-10) In the above-described 23rd embodiment, advance warning information is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,500. However, the timing for displaying advance warning information is arbitrary. Therefore, it may be when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,000, or when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,900. Furthermore, advance warning information may be displayed constantly on the auxiliary display unit 65, regardless of the value of the MY counter.

(23-11) In the above-described 23rd embodiment, when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,500, advance notification information is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, instead of or in addition to this, other notification means may be used to notify the user that the value of the MY counter has reached 18,500.

For example, when the MY counter value reaches 18,500, an alert sound is output from the speaker 64 for a predetermined time, such as 2 seconds. This alert sound is output at least when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, when medals have been bet, or when the customer waiting effect has ended. At this time, the number of coins remaining until the game reaches its limit may also be output as an audio output.

For example, when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,500, the upper lamp 63 is configured to light up in a predetermined color or flash in a predetermined manner. The upper lamp 63 is controlled at least at one of the following times: when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, when medals have been bet, or when the customer waiting effect has ended.

(23-12) In the 23rd embodiment, the advance notification information displayed the number of coins remaining until the limit was reached, but it may also be configured to simply display MY. Even with this configuration, as long as the player can understand that the limit will be reached at 19,000, for example, it is possible to expect the same effects as the 23rd embodiment. Note that the configuration that allows the player to understand that the limit will be reached at 19,000 is not limited to a configuration in which text information such as "End of 19,000" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. It is also possible for an arcade or similar establishment to notify the player that the limit will be reached at 19,000 by posting a notice or making an announcement, etc.

(23-13) In the 23rd embodiment, the value obtained by subtracting MY from 19,000 was displayed as advance notification information, but this is not limited to this configuration. Any configuration may be used that allows the player to estimate the number of coins remaining before the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, if the value obtained by subtracting MY from 19,000 is between 1 and 100, the display may show 100 coins remaining; if the value obtained by subtracting MY from 19,000 is between 1 and 200, the display may show 200 coins remaining. Alternatively, if the value obtained by subtracting MY from 1 is between 1 and 200, the display may show the value obtained by rounding down the ones digit, such as 290 coins remaining, if the value obtained by subtracting MY is between 201 and 300, the display may show the value obtained by rounding down the ones digit, such as 290 coins remaining; and if the value obtained by subtracting MY is between 301 and 500, the display may show the value obtained by rounding down the ones digit and tens digit, such as 400 coins remaining.

(23-14) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to be able to display auxiliary effects such as ending movies and customer waiting effects, as well as advance notification information. However, it is also possible to provide a MY display unit capable of displaying advance notification information separately from the auxiliary display unit 65, and to display advance notification information on the MY display unit while executing auxiliary effects on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Here, the MY display unit may be configured to be controlled by the display control device 81, or by the main control device 101. Furthermore, when controlled by the main control device 101, the remaining payout number display unit 61 may be configured to function as the MY display unit, or a new MY display unit controlled by the main control device 101 may be provided.

It goes without saying that the configuration may not include an auxiliary display unit 65 such as an LCD display device.

(23-15) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, when MY reaches 18,500, the display control device 81 controls the advance notification. However, in addition to this, the main control device 101 may also control the advance notification. A typical example of advance notification control performed by the main control device 101 is to light up a specified LED from one second after it becomes possible to insert a medal until a start command is issued when the MY counter value reaches 18,500.

(23-16) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, when MY reaches 18,500, the advance notification information continues to be displayed until MY falls below 18,500 or until MY reaches 19,000. However, the advance notification information may be hidden in at least one of the following situations: when no game is being played, when a game is being played, when a customer waiting effect is being played, or when an error notification is being played.

(23-17) In the 23rd embodiment, the advance notification information may be displayed in an enlarged format while the customer waiting effect is being performed.

(23-18) In the 23rd embodiment described above, if MY has not reached 18,500, advance notification information is not displayed. However, it is also possible to display MY or the remaining number of coins as advance notification information while the customer waiting effect is being executed, and to hide the advance notification information when the customer waiting effect ends by inserting a coin, etc. Furthermore, in a configuration with a menu function that allows the game history, etc. to be checked by a predetermined operation, the current MY can also be checked from the menu function.

(23-19) In the above-described 23rd embodiment, advance warning information is displayed when MY reaches 18,500, and is hidden when MY does not reach 18,500. However, the timing for switching the displayed advance warning information from display to non-display can be arbitrary. Therefore, the advance warning information may be configured to continue displaying until MY becomes less than 18,450, or may be configured to continue displaying until MY becomes less than 18,000.

(23-20) In the 23rd embodiment, when the value of the MY counter reaches 18,500, a game interruption request signal used in a performance test is output. However, this is not limited to a game interruption request signal, and any other signal indicating that MY has reached 18,500 can be output to the outside of the slot machine 10. For example, the signal can be input to a receiving unit in an amusement facility, etc., and when the signal is input, an announcement such as "Machine number XX will soon be ending" can be played.

(23-21) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, the configuration was such that it was determined whether or not to control the display of a specified ending movie on the auxiliary display unit 65 based on the value of the difference number counter and the value of the MY counter. However, it may also be possible to determine whether or not to execute other auxiliary effects based on the value of the difference number counter and the value of the MY counter.

For example, in a configuration that can execute an additional effect that notifies the number of additional coins in a game when the additional coin lottery is won, if the value of the end coin counter (= 19,000 - MY counter value) is greater than the value of the completed coin counter (= 2,400 - difference coin counter value), the additional effect is executed, and if the value of the end coin counter is equal to or less than the value of the completed coin counter, the additional effect is not executed.

In the above configuration, there will be a discrepancy between the number of coins remaining until the end of the notification mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the value of the net increase coin counter. However, if the notification mode continues even after the number of coins remaining until the end of the notification mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 reaches 0, the remaining number will be displayed as "??? coins remaining." This configuration reduces the chances of a player feeling negative emotions, such as thinking that they could have won XX coins if the notification mode had not reached a limit. Furthermore, in this configuration, if the notification mode is switched to when advance notification information indicating 400 coins remaining is displayed, for example, the value of the completion coin counter at that time will be greater than 400, such as 2400, and therefore the increase effect will not be executed even if the increase lottery is won in the notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide players with two types of game modes depending on their MY: an announcement mode in which an increase is announced and an announcement mode in which an increase is not announced, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(23-22) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, when the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400 and the advantageous period ends, an ending movie may be started. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, if the value of the difference number counter reaches 2100, the notification mode will continue until the value of the difference number counter reaches 2400, regardless of the value of the net increase number counter. With this configuration, when the value of the difference number counter reaches 2100, it is confirmed that the notification mode and advantageous period will end when it reaches 2400. Therefore, if an ending movie can be started when the value of the difference number counter reaches 2100, it can be expected to achieve the same effects as the 23rd embodiment above.

(23-23) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, the ending movie may start when the value of the difference number counter reaches 2100, but the timing of starting the ending movie is arbitrary. Therefore, the ending movie may start when the value of the difference number counter reaches 2300, or when the value of the difference number counter reaches 2000.

(23-24) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, an ending movie may be started when there are fewer than 300 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone, and advance notification information is displayed when there are 500 coins or less remaining until the end of the limit state. However, if the number of coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone at which the ending movie can be started is set to a value smaller than the number of coins remaining until the limit state at which advance notification information is displayed, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment. Note that the number of coins remaining until the end of the notification mode or advantageous zone at which the ending movie can be started may also be set to a value equal to or greater than the number of coins remaining until the limit state at which advance notification information is displayed.

(23-25) In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, when out-of-area processing is started, the value of the PSW register, one of the registers of the CPU 102, is saved to the game control stack area 106is in the RAM 106 during in-area processing. However, if the values of all registers of the CPU 102 are saved to the non-game control stack area 106es during out-of-area processing, the value of the PSW register may not be saved to the game control stack area 106is in the RAM 106. However, if such a configuration is used, when returning from out-of-area processing to in-area processing, instead of restoring the value saved in the game control stack area 106is to the PSW register of the CPU 102, processing to allow the next timer interrupt must be performed.

(23-26) In the 23rd embodiment, the tallying process was configured to be performed outside the area, but it may also be configured to be performed within the area. It goes without saying that at least one of the complete process, game result accumulation process, and accumulation ratio calculation process performed in the tallying process, or some of the processes performed within these processes, such as the MY command transmission process, may also be configured to be performed within the area.

(23-27) In the 23rd embodiment, the MY counter was configured with 2 bytes, but it is not limited to 2 bytes and can have a capacity according to the MY value at which the limit is reached. For example, if the limit is reached when MY reaches 200, the MY counter can be configured with 1 byte, and if the limit is reached when MY reaches 80,000, the MY counter can be configured with 3 bytes.

(23-28) In the 23rd embodiment, the information indicating bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter is not transmitted, but it goes without saying that it can also be transmitted. In such a configuration, the information indicating bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter can be set to bit 1 of the transmitting MY counter in the 23rd embodiment. Alternatively, a transmitting MY counter can be provided in addition to the transmitting MY counter in the 23rd embodiment for setting the information indicating bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter, and the information indicating bit 7 of the upper byte of the MY counter and the information indicating bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter can be transmitted as separate command information.

(23-29) In the 23rd embodiment described above, when the game enters a stop state, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays stop information consisting of the text information "Complete function in operation" and the text information "Today's play has ended." However, instead of or in addition to this, the payout number display unit 62 may be configured to display "CP" to indicate that the complete function is in operation, or a dedicated LED may be provided that lights up when the game enters a stop state.

(A-1) In each of the above embodiments, the transition lottery and additional lottery are conducted only in three-coin games, but the transition lottery and additional lottery may also be conducted in two-coin games.

(A-2) In each of the above embodiments, the notification mode is configured to end when the net increase in coins reaches 120. However, the notification mode may also be configured to end when the number of coins paid out reaches 120, or when the number of games played reaches 50.

(A-3) In each of the above embodiments, a continuation lottery may be conducted in a game that ends the notification mode, or in a game that transitions to the notification mode. A continuation lottery may also be conducted in a specified game in the notification mode. The results of these continuation lotteries may then be announced in a simulated game.

(A-4) In each of the above embodiments, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the push order bell is won in chance mode, but it may be announced with a lower probability than in announcement mode.

(A-5) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous period ends when the notification mode ends, but the advantageous period may not end when the notification mode ends, and the game may transition to chance mode instead.

(A-6) In each of the above embodiments, if a winning combination is achieved during a three-coin game, the game transitions from the normal zone to chance mode, and a loss occurs with a probability of approximately 1 in 6.4. However, the loss probability is arbitrary. However, the more games a player plays in the normal zone, the greater the chance that the player will realize that they are in the normal zone, so it is desirable to configure the game so that the probability of winning a winning combination is higher than the probability of a loss.

(A-7) In the above embodiments, the interval indicator 66 is configured to be located in the lower right corner of the payout number display unit 61, but the interval indicator 66 can be located anywhere. However, to reduce the chances of a player noticing that a game has reached the end of an advantageous interval, it is desirable to locate it in a location away from the auxiliary display unit 65, such as by locating it on the settlement switch 59.

(A-8) In the above embodiments, the condition is that three coins are being played, and processing related to the game mode, such as a transition lottery, is performed. However, the condition may also be that three coins are being played and the game mode is not in the BB state, and processing related to the game mode, such as a transition lottery, is performed.

(A-9) In the above embodiments, the interval indicator 66 is configured to be turned OFF during the game interval processing, but it may also be configured to be turned OFF during the start waiting processing. Even with such a configuration, the interval indicator 66 is configured to be turned OFF after the advantageous interval end game has ended, so it is expected to achieve the same effects as the above embodiments. Similarly, the interval indicator 66 is configured to be turned ON during the interval lottery processing, but it may also be configured to be turned ON after the rotation start processing and before it is determined whether the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated.

(A-10) In each of the above embodiments, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be notified when the game enters a favorable zone, but this configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the operation timing of a specific stop switch is notified, or to have the operation timing and operation method notified. In other words, the favorable zone can be a game zone in which the instruction function of the stop switch can be activated. Furthermore, the normal zone can be a game zone in which the instruction function of the stop switch to achieve a small winning combination does not operate.

(A-11) The symbol combinations that result in winning in each of the above embodiments are examples, and are not limited to these symbol combinations. Furthermore, the number of symbol combinations that result in winning is also arbitrary.

(A-12) In the above embodiments, slot machines with a BB state have been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine without a BB state, or a slot machine with both a BB state and an RB state. It may also be a slot machine with other game states, such as a CB state or an MB state.

(A-13) In each of the above embodiments, the system is configured to determine whether a start command has occurred after three or two medals have been bet, but it goes without saying that it may also be configured to determine whether a start command has occurred after one medal has been bet. It also goes without saying that it may be configured to determine whether a start command has occurred only after three medals have been bet, i.e., to allow only three-coin play.

(A-14) In each of the above embodiments, the awarded benefits include a benefit of changing the game state, a benefit of replaying, and a benefit of paying out medals. However, the invention is not limited to such a configuration, and any benefit may be awarded to the player. For example, instead of a benefit of paying out medals, a prize other than medals may be paid out. Furthermore, in slot machines that do not have the function of inserting actual medals or paying out medals, but instead manage medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the awarding of a benefit.

(A-15) In the above embodiments, slot machines with three reels arranged in parallel and one active line have been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, slot machines with five reels arranged in parallel or five active lines may also be used.

(A-16) In each of the above embodiments, the reel stop position is determined during normal processing, and the reel is stopped during timer interrupt processing. However, a configuration in which the reel stop position is determined during normal processing and the reel is stopped at the same time may be used. Specifically, when the stop symbol number is determined in step S1108 of the stop position determination processing shown in FIG. 22, a process is performed to check whether the arrival symbol number and the stop symbol number match, and if they match, the reel is stopped. Then, the process shown in step S1109 and subsequent steps is performed. In such a configuration, after stopping the reel for which a stop command (pseudo stop command) has been issued, a check is made to see if the next stop command (pseudo stop command) has been issued, making it impossible to issue stop commands (pseudo stop commands) consecutively.

(A-17) In the above embodiments, the reel control process is configured to determine whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached a constant speed (step S407, see FIG. 15). However, if the time it takes for the reels to reach a constant speed after acceleration begins is uniform, a timer corresponding to that time may be set when acceleration begins (step S607, see FIG. 17), and step S407 may wait until the time corresponding to the value of the timer has elapsed. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the above embodiments can be achieved.

(A-18) In the above embodiments, specific examples have been shown of a slot machine 10, but the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the gaming machine may be equipped with ball insertion and ball payout functions like a pachinko machine. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value.

The gaming machine of the present invention will be described below, highlighting its effects as necessary. Note that, for ease of understanding, the configuration corresponding to the above-described embodiment will be indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration indicated in parentheses.

Gaming machine A1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When performing the pseudo game,
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
a pseudo-game first ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) for ending the pseudo-game when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the cyclical display of the patterns of the cyclical display means;
When a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the circulating display means are circulating the patterns, a pseudo game second ending means (a pseudo game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) for ending the pseudo game is executable.
When the control by the pseudo game second ending means is performed, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means.

With this gaming machine, a pseudo game is executed when specific conditions are met. In the pseudo game, the cyclical display of images begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the cyclical display of the image on the corresponding cyclical display means is pseudo-stopped. Then, when all cyclical display means have pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the machine to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute auxiliary effects using the cyclical display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

However, it is possible that some players may find it cumbersome to operate the stop operation means during a pseudo game. Therefore, this gaming machine is designed so that the pseudo game ends if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players who find it cumbersome to operate the stop operation means during a pseudo game from losing their motivation to play once the pseudo game has begun.

Furthermore, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means will not be pseudo-stopped, and the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means will continue, ending the quasi-game. This configuration makes it possible to configure the quasi-stop result of the images in the quasi-game to be unknown unless the stop operation means is operated, making it possible to encourage the player to operate the stop operation means in the quasi-game.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine A2. A gaming machine comprising the above gaming machine A1, but further comprising: second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in the actual game, stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control unit 101) for controlling the circulating display means that pseudo-stopped the circulating display of the symbols in the pseudo game to start circulating the symbols; and second stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 in the actual game, stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control unit 101) for controlling the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the symbols if the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started circulating the symbols; and wherein the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control results of the second stop control means.

With this gaming machine, the cyclical display means that pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images during the pseudo game restarts the cyclical display of images, and when the stop operation means is operated, the cyclical display of images is stopped. A bonus is then awarded based on the result of the stopped images. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event where the cyclical display of images has not stopped when the next game round is started. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images and the pseudo game ends, control can be performed by the second stop control means without going through control by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine A3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine A2, but further characterized by the addition of a pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that a pseudo-game is being executed when the pseudo-game execution means executes the pseudo-game.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is announced that it is a pseudo game. By adopting this configuration, even if the pseudo game ends without the cyclical display of images stopping, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to whether the game is a pseudo game or a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine A4. In the gaming machine A2 or A3 described above, the pseudo-game execution means is characterized by including a deceleration means for decelerating the cyclical display of the symbols for a predetermined time when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of the images will slow down for a predetermined period of time. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that the simulated game is ending by notifying them of the slowdown in the cyclical display speed of the images.

Gaming machine A5. In any of gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game execution means comprises specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 performed via step S1003 of the main control unit 101) that controls the circulating display means that are circulating the images to pseudo-stop all of the circulating display of the images when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means has pseudo-stopped the circulating display of the images.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated when at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is controlled to pseudo-stop all cyclical display of images. With this configuration, a player who wishes to end the cyclical game in the middle of a cyclical game without operating the stop operation means can do so by operating the specific operation means without operating the stop operation means.

Gaming machine A6. In the gaming machine A5, the specific stop control means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols in a different manner from when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated while at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images pseudo-stops the cyclical display of images in a different manner than when the stop operation means is operated. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the cyclical game ends depending on whether the cyclical game is ended by operating a specific operation means or by operating a stop operation means. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the operation of a specific operation means and the operation of a stop operation means, allowing the player to choose which operation means to operate.

Gaming machine A7. In any of gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo game execution means is characterized by including a third pseudo game termination means that, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has cyclically stopped the display of the symbols, terminates the pseudo game without cyclically stopping the display of the symbols by the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of images by the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images. This configuration allows the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images to be controlled by the second stop control means without first being controlled by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from the cyclical game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine A8. In the gaming machine A7 described above, the second start control means controls the cyclical display means that has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of the images to start cyclical display of the images when the quasi-game ends.

With this gaming machine, if there is a cyclical display means that has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images when the quasi-game ends, the cyclical display of the images on that cyclical display means will begin. This configuration makes it possible to play games related to the awarding of bonuses using all cyclical display means.

Gaming machine A9. Any of the gaming machines A2 to A8 described above, characterized in that the cyclical display speed of the symbols when controlled by the start control means is equal to the cyclical display speed of the symbols when controlled by the second start control means.

With this gaming machine, the speed at which images are cyclically displayed in the pseudo game is equal to the speed at which images are cyclically displayed in the game related to the awarding of a bonus. This configuration makes it possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus in cases such as when a specific operating means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are cyclically displaying images.

Gaming machine A10. Any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 described above, further comprising a determination means (main control unit 101's additional lottery win confirmation function S1804) for determining whether to award a specific bonus (an addition to the net increase number counter) different from the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means, and wherein the specific condition is met when the determination means determines that the specific bonus will be awarded.

With this gaming machine, if the bonus awarding means determines that a specific bonus different from the bonus that is actually awarded will be awarded, a specific condition is met and a pseudo-game is executed. This configuration makes it possible to use the pseudo-game as a game to notify the player that a specific bonus will be awarded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine A11. This gaming machine is characterized by comprising award notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that the special bonus will be awarded if the pseudo-stop result of the symbols becomes a specific stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols stopping on the middle line L2) when controlled by the pseudo-stop control means, and does not notify the player that the special bonus will be awarded if the pseudo-stop result of the symbols does not become the specific stop result.

With this gaming machine, if the simulated stopping result of the symbols in the simulated game becomes a specific stopping result, the player is notified that a specific bonus will be awarded. On the other hand, if the simulated stopping result of the symbols in the simulated game does not become a specific stopping result, the player is not notified that a specific bonus will be awarded. This configuration makes it possible to encourage players who want to be notified that a specific bonus will be awarded to operate the stop operation means, while allowing players who do not want to be notified that a specific bonus will be awarded to operate the specific operation means.

Gaming machine A12. The gaming machine A11 described above, further comprising advantageous state transition means (notification mode transition function S1608 of the main control unit 101) for transitioning to an advantageous state (notification mode) advantageous to the player, and number of times information storage means (net increase number counter of the main control unit 101) for storing information relating to the number of times play can be performed in said advantageous state (remaining payout number), wherein the specific benefit is a benefit that increases the number of times play can be performed in said advantageous state.

This gaming machine provides a special bonus that increases the number of plays that can be played under advantageous conditions. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from suffering any disadvantages even when operating specific operating means during simulated play.

Note that "a benefit that increases the number of plays that can be played under an advantageous state" refers to a benefit that increases the number of plays if the advantageous state ends based on the number of plays, and to a benefit that increases the number of gaming media awarded if the advantageous state ends based on the number of gaming media awarded.

Gaming machine A13. Any of the above gaming machines A1 to A12, characterized in that the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

In this gaming machine, the specific operation means is a different operation means from the start operation means and the stop operation means. This configuration reduces the chances of a player unintentionally operating the specific operation means. For example, it is possible to use the start operation means as the specific operation means, but if a player repeatedly presses the start operation means to start a game, this could result in the pseudo-game ending despite the player's intended enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine B1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When performing the pseudo game,
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
a pseudo-game first ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) for ending the pseudo-game when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the cyclical display of the patterns of the cyclical display means;
and a pseudo-game second terminating means (a pseudo-game terminating function based on a cancel operation of the main control device 101) for terminating the pseudo-game when a second specific condition (operation of the settlement switch 59) is established.
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101 in this game) that controls the start of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means that has pseudo-stopped the circulating display of the patterns in the pseudo game;
and a second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101 in this game) for controlling the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the patterns when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circulating display of the patterns.
The second pseudo-game ending means executes different processes depending on the pseudo-stop state of the cyclic display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

With this gaming machine, a pseudo game is executed when specific conditions are met. In the pseudo game, the cyclical display of images begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the cyclical display of the image on the corresponding cyclical display means is pseudo-stopped. Then, when all cyclical display means have pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the machine to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute auxiliary effects using the cyclical display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The pseudo game is also configured to end when a second specific condition is met, and when the second specific condition is met to end the pseudo game, different processing is executed depending on the pseudo-stop status of the cyclical display means when the second specific condition is met. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the pseudo-stop status of the cyclical display means when the second specific condition is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine B2. A gaming machine configured as described above in accordance with the gaming machine B1, in which the second specific condition is met when a specific operation means (adjustment switch 59) is operated, the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control results of the second stop control means, and the pseudo-game second ending means executes different processing depending on the number of stop operation means operated before the specific operation means is operated.

This gaming machine is configured to end the pseudo game even when a specific operation means is operated, and when the specific operation means is operated to end the pseudo game, different processing is executed depending on the number of stop operation means operated before the specific operation means was operated. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the circumstances under which the specific operation means was operated.

Gaming machine B3. In the gaming machine B2, the second pseudo-game ending means ends the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means corresponding to the stop operation means that has not been operated.

With this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated, the simulated game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means corresponding to the unoperated stop operation means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the pseudo-stopped results of the images in the simulated game to be unknown unless the stop operation means is operated, making it possible to encourage the player to operate the stop operation means in the simulated game.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the cyclical display means that cyclically displays the images can be controlled by the second stop control means without first being controlled by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from pseudo-game to game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine B4. The gaming machine B3 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that a pseudo-game is being executed when the pseudo-game execution means executes the pseudo-game.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to whether the game is a pseudo game or a game related to the awarding of a bonus, even if the pseudo game can end without the circulating display of images stopping pseudo.

Gaming machine B5. In the gaming machine B3 or B4 described above, if there are multiple circulating display means that pseudo-stop the circulating display of the symbols in the pseudo game, this gaming machine is characterized by being provided with timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main control device 101) that individually sets timing information (delay time) related to the timing at which the circulating display means that pseudo-stopped the circulating display of the symbols starts circulating the symbols.

With this gaming machine, if there are multiple circulating display means that pseudo-stop the circulating display of symbols in a pseudo game, timing information is individually set regarding when the circulating display means that pseudo-stopped the circulating display of symbols will start circulating the symbols. This configuration reduces the chances that the pseudo-stopped results of symbols in a pseudo game will aid in the operation of the stop operation means in a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming Machine B6. In the gaming machine B5, the timing information setting means sets the timing information by conducting a predetermined lottery.

With this gaming machine, timing information is set by conducting a predetermined lottery. This configuration makes it possible to randomize the time between the end of the simulated game and the start of the circulating display of images. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the results of the images stopping in the simulated game will aid in the operation of the stop operation means in the game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine B7. Any of gaming machines B3 to B6 described above, characterized in that it is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the cyclical display of the symbols for a predetermined time when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of the images will slow down for a predetermined period of time. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that the simulated game is ending by notifying them of the slowdown in the cyclical display speed of the images.

Gaming machine B8. Any of gaming machines B3 to B7 above, characterized in that the cyclical display speed of the symbols when controlled by the start control means is equal to the cyclical display speed of the symbols when controlled by the second start control means.

With this gaming machine, the speed at which images are cyclically displayed in the pseudo game is equal to the speed at which images are cyclically displayed in the game related to the awarding of a bonus. This configuration makes it possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus in cases such as when a specific operating means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are cyclically displaying images.

Gaming machine B9. In the gaming machine B2 described above, the pseudo-game second ending means is characterized by including specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 performed via step S1003 of the main control device 101) that controls the circulating display means that is circulating the images to pseudo-stop all circulating images when the specific operation means is operated while at least one of the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated while at least one stop operation means has been operated, the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the images is controlled to pseudo-stop all cyclical display of images. With this configuration, a player who wishes to end the cyclical game midway through the game without operating the stop operation means can do so by operating the specific operation means without operating the stop operation means.

Gaming machine B10. In the gaming machine B9, the specific stop control means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols in a different manner from when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated while at least one stop operation means has been operated, the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images will stop the cyclical display of the images in a manner different from when the stop operation means is operated. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on whether the specific operation means is operated to end the pseudo game or the stop operation means. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means, allowing the player to choose which operation means to operate.

Gaming machine B11. The gaming machine B9 or B10 described above is characterized in that it is provided with timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main control device 101) that individually sets timing information (delay time) related to the timing at which the circulating display means that has quasi-stopped the circulating display of the patterns will start circulating the patterns when all circulating display means have quasi-stopped the circulating display of the patterns in the quasi-game.

With this gaming machine, when all cyclical display means quasi-stop the cyclical display of symbols in a pseudo game, timing information is individually set regarding when the cyclical display means that quasi-stopped the cyclical display of symbols will start cyclical display of symbols. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the chances that the results of the quasi-stopped symbols in a pseudo game will aid in the operation of the stop operation means in a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine B12. In the gaming machine B11, the timing information setting means sets the timing information by conducting a predetermined lottery.

With this gaming machine, timing information is set by conducting a predetermined lottery. This configuration makes it possible to randomize the time between the end of the simulated game and the start of the circulating display of the images. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the simulated stopping results of the images in the simulated game will aid in the operation of the stop operation means in the game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine B13. Any of gaming machines B2 to B12 above, wherein the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

In this gaming machine, the specific operation means is a different operation means from the start operation means and the stop operation means. This configuration reduces the chances of a player unintentionally operating the specific operation means. For example, it is possible to use the start operation means as the specific operation means, but if a player repeatedly presses the start operation means to start a game, this could result in the pseudo-game ending despite the player's intended enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine C1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When performing the pseudo game,
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
When the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means, the pseudo game ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 have stopped) is configured to be executable.
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101) for controlling the circulating display means that has not started the circulating display of the patterns to start the circulating display of the patterns when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circulating display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game;
A stop operation determination means (a stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the cyclical display of the patterns and the cyclical display of the patterns becomes constant speed;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, a second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101) is provided for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to stop the cyclic display of the pictures,
The bonus granting means is configured to grant the bonus based on a control result by the second stop control means,
The second stop control means controls the plurality of circulating display means so that, when the result of the lottery for the role is a prescribed result (a push order bell win), a prescribed win (a bell win) is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a prescribed operation method (an operation sequence that can achieve a bell win), and the prescribed win is not achieved when the stop operation means is operated in an operation method other than the prescribed operation method;
When the result of the lottery for the role is the specified result, an operation method informing means (instruction monitor, payout number display unit 62) capable of informing the specified operation method is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, it notifies the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated, and when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is executed, it notifies the specified operation method after the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all the cyclical display of the pictures of the cyclical display means in the pseudo game and before the second start control means starts control to start the cyclical display of the pictures.

This gaming machine is configured so that when a prescribed operation method is notified in a game round in which a pseudo game is not being executed, the prescribed operation method is notified before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration makes it possible for a player to operate the stop operation means after understanding the prescribed operation method in a game round in which a pseudo game is not being executed.

In addition, when the prescribed operation method is notified during a game in which a pseudo game is executed, the prescribed operation method is notified after the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means during the pseudo game and before the second start control means begins control to start the cyclical display of images. This configuration makes it possible to avoid operating the stop operation means using the prescribed operation method during a pseudo game, while also making it possible to avoid operating the stop operation means using an operation method different from the prescribed operation method during a game related to the awarding of a bonus after the pseudo game, which would result in the bonus being unavailable for the achievement of a prescribed win.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine C2. In the gaming machine C1 described above, when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method after the cyclic display of all images on the cyclic display means has reached a constant speed.

With this gaming machine, when a prescribed operation method is notified in a game round in which a pseudo game is not being executed, the prescribed operation method is notified after the cyclical display of all images on the cyclical display means has reached a constant speed and before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration makes it possible to differentiate the timing of notification of the prescribed operation method in a game related to the awarding of a bonus between a game round in which a pseudo game is executed and a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed. In this way, by ensuring that the prescribed operation method is notified before the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective, and by configuring the timing of notification of the prescribed operation method in a game related to the awarding of a bonus depending on whether a pseudo game is being executed, it is possible to alert the player to check the operation method notification means.

Gaming machine C3. The gaming machine C1 or C2 described above further comprises: a prescribed determination means (winning role confirmation function S603 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether the result of the lottery for the role is the prescribed result when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of the symbols on all cyclical display means; an announcement execution means (instruction monitor display function S604 of the main control unit 101) for causing the operation method announcement means to announce the prescribed operation method when the regulation determination means determines that the result of the lottery for the role is the prescribed result; and a time information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of the main control unit 101) for setting time information when the announcement execution means has caused the operation method announcement means to announce the prescribed operation method; and the second start control means controls the cyclical display of the symbols to start after a time corresponding to the time information set by the time information setting means has elapsed when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of the symbols on all cyclical display means.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images on all cyclical display means, it determines whether the result of the role lottery is a prescribed result, and when it determines that the result of the role lottery is a prescribed result, it causes the operation method notification means to notify the prescribed operation method, and when it has caused the operation method notification means to notify the prescribed operation method, it sets time information. Then, when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images on all cyclical display means, the second start control means controls the start of cyclical display of images after a time corresponding to the time information has elapsed. With this configuration, when a prescribed operation method is to be announced after all cyclical display means have pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images in a pseudo game, it becomes possible to notify the prescribed operation method before the cyclical display of images begins.

Gaming machine C4. Any of the gaming machines C1 to C3 described above, further comprising at least the pseudo-game execution means, the second start control means, the stop operation determination means, and the second stop control means, a main control means (main control device 101) that manages the game overall, and a secondary control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the main control means, wherein the main control means controls the operation method notification means.

In this gaming machine, the operation method notification means is controlled by the main control means that oversees the game. This configuration reliably avoids the occurrence of an event where the operation method notification means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated before notifying the specified operation method.

Gaming machine C5. In any of gaming machines C1 to C4 above, the pseudo game execution means is equipped with a second pseudo game termination means (a pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the main control unit 101) that terminates the pseudo game when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols; when control is exercised by the second pseudo game termination means, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means, and the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the pseudo-game can be ended. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players who find operating the stop operation means in a pseudo-game from becoming irritated and losing their motivation to play once the pseudo-game has begun.

Furthermore, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means does not stop cyclically, and the quasi-game ends, and the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration allows for a swift transition from the quasi-game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus, while reducing the chances of operating the stop operation means in a game related to the awarding of a bonus using an operation method different from the specified operation method.

Gaming machine D1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When performing the pseudo game,
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
When the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means, the pseudo game ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 have stopped) is configured to be executable.
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101) for controlling the circulating display means that has not started the circulating display of the patterns to start the circulating display of the patterns when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circulating display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game;
A second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101 in this game) controls the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the patterns when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circulating display of the patterns;
A stop information setting means (a pseudo game stop information acquisition function S1104 of the main control device 101) for setting stop information (pseudo game stop information) used when the pseudo stop control means controls;
A second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of the main control device 101) is provided, which sets second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the role,
A gaming machine characterized in that the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the second stop information setting means sets the second stop information during the execution of the pseudo game when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to the awarding of a bonus is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set while the pseudo game is being executed. This configuration allows for a quicker transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine D2. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine D1, further comprising a stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of main control device 101) that determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the images, and the stop information setting means sets the stop information when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated.

According to this gaming machine, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the time required for the stop operation determination means to determine the operation of the stop operation means in the pseudo game, even when the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being executed.

Gaming machine D3. In the gaming machine D2 described above, the stop information setting means sets stop information such that a symbol attached to a predetermined specific position will pseudo-stop at a specified position, regardless of the timing of operation of the stop operation means.

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets stop information that causes a predetermined symbol attached to a specific position to pseudo-stop at a specified position, regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. In this way, by configuring the pseudo-stop result of symbols in a pseudo game to be independent of the operation timing of the stop operation means, even in a configuration in which the stop information is set after the stop operation means is operated, it is possible to prevent a delay between the operation of the stop operation means and the pseudo-stop of the cyclical display of the symbol on the corresponding cyclical display means.

Gaming machine D4. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine D2 or gaming machine D3, characterized in that the second stop control means is configured to control the cyclical display of the symbols to stop within a predetermined time period after the stop operation means is operated, and the pseudo-stop control means is configured to control the cyclical display of the symbols to pseudo-stop after the predetermined time period has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated.

According to this gaming machine, in games involving the awarding of bonuses, control is exercised to stop the cyclical display of images within a predetermined time period after the stop operation means is operated. Meanwhile, in pseudo-games, control can be exercised to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of images after a predetermined time period has elapsed after the stop operation means is operated. This configuration makes it possible to ensure time to set stop information after the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, and time to determine the stop position of the cyclical display means based on the stop information.

Gaming machine D5. In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4 above, the second stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the second stop information after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the symbols and before the pseudo stop control means performs control to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the images and before the pseudo-stop control means performs control to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of the images. This configuration makes it possible to transition from the pseudo-game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus more quickly than a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game has ended.

Gaming machine D6. Any of the gaming machines D1 to D5 described above, further comprising a stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main control device 101) that determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the images, and the second stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the second stop information before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration allows for a quicker transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended.

Gaming machine D7. In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6 above, the pseudo game execution means includes a pseudo game second termination means (a pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the main control unit 101) that terminates the pseudo game when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols, and when control is exercised by the pseudo game second termination means, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

With this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the quasi-game ends without causing the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means to stop. This configuration allows control by the second stop control means to be performed without going through control by the second start control means, making it possible to quickly transition from the quasi-game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it will take time to set the second stop information, which could potentially prevent a swift transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus. However, if the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine D9. In any of gaming machines D1 to D8 above, the pseudo game execution means is characterized by including a third pseudo game termination means that, when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means has quasi-stopped the circulating display of the symbols, terminates the pseudo game without quasi-stopping the circulating display of the symbols by the circulating display means that is circulating the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of images by the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images. This configuration allows the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images to be controlled by the second stop control means without first being controlled by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from the cyclical game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it will take time to set the second stop information, which could potentially prevent a swift transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus. However, if the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine E1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
The pseudo game execution means
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
A stop operation determination means (a pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding circulating display means to pseudo stop the circulating display of the picture;
a pseudo game ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) for ending the pseudo game when the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means,
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101) for controlling the circulating display means that has not started the circulating display of the patterns to start the circulating display of the patterns when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circulating display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game;
A second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101 in this game) controls the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the patterns when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circulating display of the patterns;
A stop information setting means for setting stop information (pseudo game stop information) used when the pseudo stop control means controls;
A second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of the main control device 101) is provided, which sets second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the role,
A gaming machine characterized in that the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control result by the second stop control means, the stop information setting means sets the stop information in a first memory area before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether or not the stop operation means has been operated when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, and the second stop information setting means sets the second stop information in a second memory area different from the first memory area before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether or not the stop operation means has been operated when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to the awarding of a bonus is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set in a first memory area before the stop operation determination means begins to determine whether the stop operation means has been operated, and the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set in a second memory area different from the first memory area before the stop operation determination means begins to determine whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration makes it possible to transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus more quickly than a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine E2. In the gaming machine E1 described above, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result.

In this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets specific second stop information as stop information, which is set by the second stop information setting means when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result. This configuration makes it possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo game and the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus, thereby reducing the amount of data that needs to be prepared in advance.

Gaming machine E3. In the gaming machine E1 or E2 described above, the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the stop information in the first memory area after the start control means starts control of the multiple cyclic display means.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first memory area after the cyclical display of images in the pseudo game has begun. This configuration makes it possible to quickly start the cyclical display of images when executing the pseudo game.

Gaming machine E4. In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3 above, the pseudo game execution means is equipped with a pseudo game second termination means (a pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control unit 101) that terminates the pseudo game when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols, and when control is exercised by the pseudo game second termination means, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

With this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the quasi-game ends without causing the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means to stop. This configuration allows control by the second stop control means to be performed without going through control by the second start control means, making it possible to quickly transition from the quasi-game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it will take time to set the second stop information, which could potentially prevent a swift transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus. However, if the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine E5. In any of gaming machines E1 to E4 above, the pseudo game execution means is characterized by including a third pseudo game termination means that, when a specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has cyclically stopped the display of the symbols, terminates the pseudo game without cyclically stopping the display of the symbols by the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of images by the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images. This configuration allows the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images to be controlled by the second stop control means without first being controlled by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from the cyclical game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it will take time to set the second stop information, which could potentially prevent a swift transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus. However, if the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine F1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When the pseudo game is performed, a start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101) controls the plurality of circulating display means to start circulating display of the images;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
A pseudo game ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) for ending the pseudo game when the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means;
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101) for controlling the circulating display means that has not started the circulating display of the patterns to start the circulating display of the patterns when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circulating display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game;
A second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101 in this game) controls the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the patterns when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circulating display of the patterns;
A stop information setting means for setting stop information (pseudo game stop information) used when the pseudo stop control means controls;
A second stop information setting means for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the winning combination;
a stop operation determination means (a pseudo stop command confirmation function and a stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is executing the cyclic display of the images has been operated;
A gaming machine characterized in that the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control result by the second stop control means, the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the stop information in a first memory area before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, and the second stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the second stop information in the first memory area between the end of the pseudo game and before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether or not the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to the awarding of a bonus is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first memory area before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether the stop operation means has been operated, and the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set in the first memory area after the pseudo game ends and before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, in the pseudo game, the stop information can be used to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of images, and in the game related to the awarding of a bonus, the second stop information can be used to stop the cyclical display of images.

Furthermore, by configuring the second stop information to be set in the first storage area where the stop information is stored, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity that needs to be prepared from increasing.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine F2. In the gaming machine F1 described above, the second stop information setting means rewrites the stop information set in the first memory area with the second stop information.

With this gaming machine, when the simulated game ends, the stop information set in the first memory area is rewritten with the second stop information. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the first memory area from becoming too large.

Gaming machine F3. In the gaming machine F1 or F2 described above, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result.

In this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets specific second stop information as stop information, which is set by the second stop information setting means when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result. This configuration makes it possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo game and the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus, thereby reducing the amount of data that needs to be prepared in advance.

Gaming machine F4. In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3 above, the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the stop information in the first memory area after the start control means starts control of the multiple cyclic display means.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first memory area after the cyclical display of images in the pseudo game has begun. This configuration makes it possible to quickly start the cyclical display of images when executing the pseudo game.

Gaming machine F5. In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4 above, the pseudo game execution means is equipped with a pseudo game second termination means (a pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control unit 101) that terminates the pseudo game when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the circulating display means are circulating the symbols, and when control is exercised by the pseudo game second termination means, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of the symbols on the circulating display means.

With this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means will not cyclically stop, and the quasi-game will end. This configuration allows control by the second stop control means to be performed without going through control by the quasi-stop control means or the second start control means. It is then possible to set the second stop information by utilizing the time required for control by the quasi-stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer necessary. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the quasi-game has ended, it is possible to quickly transition from the quasi-game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine F6. In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the pseudo game execution means is characterized by including a third pseudo game termination means that, when a specific operation means (adjustment switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means has quasi-stopped the circulating display of the symbols, terminates the pseudo game without quasi-stopping the circulating display of the symbols by the circulating display means that is circulating the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while at least one circulating display means has pseudo-stopped the circulating display of images, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of images by the circulating display means that is currently circulating images. This configuration allows the second stop control means to control at least the circulating display means that is currently circulating images without going through control by the pseudo stop control means or second start control means. It is then possible to set the second stop information by utilizing the time that would have been required for control by the pseudo stop control means or second start control means, which is no longer necessary. As a result, even when the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it is possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

The gaming machines A to C may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines D to F may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to C, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine G1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
A stop operation determination means (a stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the image has been operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns has been operated, a stop position determination means (stop pattern number determination function S2305 of the main control device 101) determines the stop position of the circulating display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means;
a stop means (stepping motor control process S106 of the main control device 101) for stopping the circulating display of the patterns by the circulating display means for circulating the patterns when the circulating display means for circulating the patterns reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means;
The stop operation determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulating display means that is circulating the patterns has been operated during the period from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position until when the stop means stops the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns,
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a standby processing execution means (100 msec standby function S2210 of main control unit 101) that performs standby processing to wait for a predetermined time (100 msec) based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the plurality of circulating display means.

This gaming machine determines whether a stop operation means corresponding to a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols has been operated, and if the stop operation means has been operated, determines the stop position of the corresponding cyclical display means. Then, when the cyclical display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the cyclical display of symbols is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means is configured to determine whether a stop operation means corresponding to another cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols has been operated between the time the stop position determination means determines the stop position and the time the stop means stops the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols. This configuration allows a player to operate another stop operation means without waiting for the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that corresponds to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, improving the operability of the stop operation means can increase the enjoyment of the game.

However, if the system were configured to determine whether other stop operation means have been operated without waiting for the cyclical display of images to have stopped, new problems could arise, such as allowing the next round of play to begin before the cyclical display of images has stopped. Therefore, this gaming machine is configured to perform a standby process that waits for a predetermined period of time based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclical display means. This configuration makes it possible for all cyclical display of images to have stopped while the standby process is being performed, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine G2. The gaming machine G1 described above is further equipped with a stop position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of the main control device 101) that determines whether all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means.

This gaming machine is equipped with a stop position determination means that determines whether all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and the standby process execution means performs standby processing after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the standby time during standby processing, and even when a standby process is performed, it is possible to prevent the time until the next game round can be started from being too long.

Gaming machine G3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine G2, characterized in that the stop position determination means is configured to determine, as the stop position, a position different from the cyclic display position of the cyclic display means when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, the cyclical display of images may not stop immediately when the stop operation means is operated. In such a configuration, the time between when the stop operation means is operated and when the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means stops varies. Therefore, if the standby process is configured to take this time into account, there is a concern that it may take a long time before the next round of play can begin. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine G2, it is possible to set the standby time in the standby process without considering the time required for the cyclical display means to reach the stop position, thereby effectively alleviating the above concern.

Gaming machine G4. A gaming machine comprising: a second stop operation determination means (main control device 101 operation completion confirmation function S2206) for determining whether or not all of the stop operation means have been operated when the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means; and a standby process execution means for performing the standby process after the second stop operation determination means determines that none of the stop operation means have been operated.

According to this gaming machine, when the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, a second stop operation determination means is provided for determining whether all of the stop operation means have been operated, and the standby process execution means performs standby processing after the second stop operation determination means determines that none of the stop operation means have been operated. This configuration makes it possible to standardize the time required until the next game round can be started, even when a standby process is performed, thereby improving operability when starting the next game round. For example, it is possible to perform standby processing after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, without providing a second stop operation determination means. However, with this configuration, the time required until the next game round can be started will vary depending on whether the player has completed operation of all of the stop operation means after the standby process has ended or during the standby process. Furthermore, if the time required until the next round can be started changes, an event may occur in which the player's operation to start the next round is not accepted, reducing operability when starting the next round.

Gaming machine G5. Any of the gaming machines G1 to G4 described above, wherein the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing before the bonus awarding means awards the bonus.

With this gaming machine, a standby process is performed before the bonus awarding means awards a bonus. This configuration makes it possible to avoid situations where a bonus is awarded when the cyclical display of images has not stopped.

Gaming machine G6. Any of the gaming machines G1 to G5 described above is equipped with a winning determination means (a payout determination processing function of the main control unit 101) that determines whether a winning combination corresponding to the winning combination obtained in the lottery for the winning combination has been achieved, and the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing before the winning determination means makes the winning determination.

In this gaming machine, a standby process is performed before the winning determination means performs a winning determination. This configuration prevents the processing configuration from becoming too complicated, and makes it possible to create a situation in which all cyclical display of images stops while the standby process is being performed.

Gaming machine G7. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G6 described above, this gaming machine is characterized by comprising: stop control means (stop control processing function S2011 of the main control device 101) that controls the multiple cyclic display means so that, if the result of the lottery for the role is a prescribed result (push order bell win), a prescribed win (bell win) is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a prescribed operation method (an operation sequence that can achieve a bell win), and the prescribed win is not achieved if the stop operation means is operated in an operation method other than the prescribed operation method; and operation method notification means (instruction monitor, payout number display unit 62) that can notify the user of the prescribed operation method when the result of the lottery for the role is the prescribed result.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for a winning combination is a prescribed result, the prescribed operation method may be announced by the operation method announcement means. If the stop operation means is operated in the prescribed operation method at this time, a prescribed win can be achieved. By applying the configuration of any of the gaming machines G1 to G6 described above to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances that a player will unintentionally operate the stop operation means in a manner other than the prescribed operation method.

Gaming machine G8. The gaming machine G7 described above further comprises a notification control means (main control device 101) for controlling the operation method notification means, wherein when the notification control means causes the operation method notification means to notify the specified operation method, the notification control means terminates the notification by the operation method notification means after the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclic display means, and the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the notification control means has terminated the notification by the operation method notification means.

In this gaming machine, when the operation method notification means notifies a specified operation method, the stop position determination means determines the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclic display means, after which the notification by the operation method notification means ends, and then standby processing is performed. This configuration makes it possible to quickly end the notification by the operation method notification means while shortening the waiting time during standby processing.

Gaming machine G9. Any of the gaming machines G1 to G8 described above, comprising normal processing execution means (main control unit 101) that starts up when the power is turned on and repeatedly performs a series of normal processing, and interrupt processing execution means (main control unit 101) that periodically interrupts the normal processing to perform interrupt processing, wherein the normal processing execution means comprises the stop operation determination means, the stop position determination means, and the standby processing execution means, and the interrupt processing execution means comprises the stop means, and wherein the normal processing execution means is not equipped with means for determining whether the predetermined cyclical display means has reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means when the stop position determination means has determined a stop position for a predetermined cyclical display means in a situation where the stop position determination means has not determined stop positions for multiple cyclical display means.

This gaming machine starts up when the power is turned on and performs normal processing repeatedly. This processing determines whether the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means cyclically displaying the images has been operated, and if the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means cyclically displaying the images has been operated, determines the stop position of the cyclical display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means. Meanwhile, in normal processing, if the stop position determination means determines the stop position of a specific cyclical display means when the stop position determination means has not yet determined the stop positions of multiple cyclical display means, no determination is made as to whether the specific cyclical display means has reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means. This configuration allows the player to operate other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclical display of the images of the cyclical display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop.

Gaming machine G10. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G9, the circulating display means comprises a rotating body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that rotates in a circumferential direction and has multiple types of images applied to it in the circumferential direction, and a drive means (stepping motor) that drives the rotating body.

In this gaming machine, the circulating display means comprises a rotating body that rotates in a circumferential direction and has multiple types of pictures applied to it in that circumferential direction, and a drive means for driving the rotating body. In this configuration, when the drive means is stopped, it is possible that the rotating body will continue to swing without immediately ending its rotation. However, if the machine is configured to perform a standby process that waits for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to end the swinging of the rotating body while the standby process is being performed.

Gaming machine H1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages the game;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the master control means,
The main control means
A stop operation determination means (a stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the image has been operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns has been operated, a stop position determination means (stop pattern number determination function S2305 of the main control device 101) determines the stop position of the circulating display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means;
a stop means (stepping motor control process S106 of the main control device 101) for stopping the circulating display of the patterns by the circulating display means for circulating the patterns when the circulating display means for circulating the patterns reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means;
The stop operation determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulating display means that is circulating the patterns has been operated during the period from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position until when the stop means stops the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns,
a stop position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not all of the plurality of cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means after the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclical display means;
a first transmitting means (an all reels stop completion command transmitting function S2205 of the main control device 101) for transmitting first information (an all reels stop completion command) indicating the determination result of the stop position determining means to the slave control means when the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means;
a second stop operation determination means (operation end confirmation function S2206 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second transmission means (operation end command transmission function S2207 of the main control unit 101) that transmits second information (operation end command) indicating the judgment result of the second stop operation judgment means to the slave control means when the second stop operation judgment means determines that none of the stop operation means have been operated.

This gaming machine determines whether a stop operation means corresponding to a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols has been operated, and if the stop operation means has been operated, determines the stop position of the corresponding cyclical display means. Then, when the cyclical display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the cyclical display of symbols is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means is configured to determine whether a stop operation means corresponding to another cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols has been operated between the time the stop position determination means determines the stop position and the time the stop means stops the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols. This configuration allows a player to operate another stop operation means without waiting for the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that corresponds to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, improving the operability of the stop operation means can increase the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the operation determination of other stop operation means is made without waiting for the cyclical display of the symbols to have stopped, new problems may arise, such as the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that determined the second stop position not having finished even though all stop operation means have finished operating, or the cyclical display of symbols of all cyclical display means having finished operating but at least one stop operation means not having finished operating. If such problems arise, problems will arise in the control performed by the slave control means. Therefore, in this gaming machine, the master control means is configured such that, after the stop position determination means determines the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclical display means, it determines whether all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and if it determines that all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, it transmits first information indicating the determination result to the slave control means. Furthermore, after the stop position determination means on the master control means determines the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclic display means, it determines whether the stop operation means has been operated, and if it determines that none of the stop operation means have been operated, it transmits second information indicating the determination result to the slave control means. With this configuration, the slave control means can perform control according to the cyclic display status of the images by receiving the first information, and can perform control according to the operation status of the stop operation means by receiving the second information. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine H2. In the gaming machine H1 described above, the second transmission means transmits the second information after the first transmission means transmits the first information.

In this gaming machine, the second information is transmitted after the first information is transmitted. This configuration allows the slave control means to perform control in response to all of the multiple cyclical display means reaching the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and then to perform control in response to the completion of all operation of the stop operation means. Furthermore, because the main control means includes the stop position determination means, the maximum time required from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position until the cyclical display means actually reaches the stop position can be determined or predicted by the main control means. On the other hand, the time required for all of the stop operation means to reach a state where they are not being operated depends on the player's operation, and therefore cannot be determined or predicted by the main control means. Therefore, by configuring the second information to be transmitted after the first information is transmitted, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between, for example, the timing when all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying images and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the receipt of the first information.

Gaming machine H3. In the gaming machine H2 described above, the second stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration and prevents increases in memory capacity.

Gaming machine H4. In the gaming machine H3 described above, the second stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information. This configuration enables the slave control means to quickly recognize that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, thereby reducing the discrepancy between the timing when all of the multiple cyclic display means have finished cyclically displaying images and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the first information.

Gaming machine H5. In any of gaming machines H2 to H4 above, the secondary control means is characterized in that it includes an effect control means (additional lottery winning function of the display control device 81) that controls the auxiliary effect means (speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) to execute different auxiliary effects (additional notification effects) when a specific condition (additional lottery win) is met, when all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying the images, and when all of the stop operation means have finished operating.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the slave control means controls the auxiliary effect means to execute different auxiliary effects when all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying symbols and when all of the stop operation means have been operated. In this configuration, depending on whether all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying symbols or all of the stop operation means have been operated first, problems may arise, such as being unable to execute one of the carefully prepared auxiliary effects or complicating the processing configuration of the effect control means and increasing memory capacity. However, by configuring the master control means to transmit first information indicating that all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means and second information indicating that none of the stop operation means have been operated, the slave control means can determine that all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying symbols by receiving the first information, and can determine that all of the stop operation means have been operated by receiving the second information. Furthermore, because the master control means transmits the second information after transmitting the first information, the slave control means can control the execution of a predetermined auxiliary effect based on the reception of the first information, and then control the execution of an auxiliary effect different from the predetermined auxiliary effect based on the subsequent reception of the second information. This makes it possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

Gaming Machine H6. In the gaming machine H5 described above, the effect control means controls the auxiliary effect means to execute a first auxiliary effect (third notification sound) when the first information is received, and controls the auxiliary effect means to execute a second auxiliary effect (announcement of the number of additional coins) when the second information is received, when the specific condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the first auxiliary effect is executed when the first information is received, and the second auxiliary effect is executed when the second information is received. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which one of the carefully prepared first and second auxiliary effects cannot be executed.

Gaming machine H7. The gaming machine described above as gaming machine H6, characterized in that the first auxiliary effect and the second auxiliary effect are executed by different devices.

With this gaming machine, the first auxiliary effect and the second auxiliary effect are executed by different devices. This configuration makes it possible to reliably execute the first auxiliary effect even if the interval between receiving the first information and receiving the second information is short.

Gaming machine H8. In any of gaming machines H1 to H7 above, the main control means is equipped with a standby process execution means (100 msec standby function S2210 of the main control device 101) that performs standby process of waiting for a predetermined time (100 msec) based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclical display means, and the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means.

With this gaming machine, a standby process is performed in which the machine waits for a predetermined period of time based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclical display means. This configuration makes it possible for all cyclical display of symbols to stop while the standby process is being performed, thereby avoiding new problems such as the next game being able to start when the cyclical display of symbols has not stopped.

In addition, the standby process execution means performs standby processing after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the standby time during standby processing, and even when standby processing is performed, it is possible to prevent the time until the next game round can be started from being prolonged.

Gaming Machine H9. In the gaming machine H8 described above, the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information to the slave control means and after the second transmission means has transmitted the second information to the slave control means.

According to this gaming machine, the standby process execution means performs standby processing after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information to the slave control means and after the second transmission means has transmitted the second information to the slave control means. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the lag between the timing when all of the multiple cyclic display means have finished cyclically displaying images and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the first information, as well as the lag between the timing when the player has finished operating the stop operation means and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the second information. Furthermore, since the standby time can be set taking into account the time required to transmit the first information, it is possible to shorten the standby time during standby processing.

The gaming machines G group and H group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines G group and H group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group through F group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine I1. A main control means (main control device 101) for managing the game,
In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means,
The main control means
A specific information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing specific information (such as rotation start header information);
A storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) for storing different information depending on whether the game is a specific game (pseudo game) or not;
a command transmission means (command transmission process 3, etc.) for transmitting a command to the slave control means;
A command creation means for creating the command (a header creation function S3002, a body creation function S3005, a footer creation function S3006, etc.) is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the command creation means is equipped with a specified command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) that creates a specified command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, the specified command is created by calculating pre-stored specific information and information stored in a memory area that stores information that differs depending on whether the game is a specific game. This configuration allows the slave control means to determine whether the game is a specific game through the specified command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible for the secondary control means to perform control depending on whether or not a specific game is being played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, with this configuration, there is no need to pre-store commands to send when a specific game is being played and commands to send when a specific game is not being played, which makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which commands to be sent for specific games and commands to be sent for non-specific games are stored in advance, it becomes necessary to perform a process to determine whether or not the game is a specific game when sending a command, which complicates the processing configuration. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, once a specified command is created, the specified command will include information on whether or not the game is a specific game, making the above processing unnecessary. From this perspective, simplifying the processing configuration also makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Gaming machine I2. In the gaming machine I1 described above, the specified command creation means creates a specified command by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area, whether the specific game is being played or not.

With this gaming machine, a specified command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area, regardless of whether the game is a specific game or not. This configuration eliminates the need to determine whether the game is a specific game when sending a command, simplifying the processing configuration and reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine I3. A gaming machine in the above gaming machine I1 or I2, characterized in that the specified command is a header.

With this gaming machine, a header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area. This configuration makes it possible to include information in the header indicating whether or not the game is specific. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundancy in the commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming Machine I4. A gaming machine similar to the above gaming machine I3, characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

With this gaming machine, the header contains information indicating whether or not it is a specific game, and the header is contained in one byte, allowing the slave control means to grasp more information when it receives the header.

Gaming Machine I5. In the gaming machine I3 or I4 described above, the header is configured to include a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a specific game storage bit that stores information indicating whether or not it is the specific game, and the specific game storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit.

In this gaming machine, the header has a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a specific game storage bit that stores information indicating whether it is a specific game. The specific game storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. This configuration makes it possible to store information indicating whether it is a specific game in a bit that would previously have been unused, making it possible to effectively prevent redundancy in commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming Machine I6. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine I5, characterized in that the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific game storage bit is an unused area.

In this gaming machine, the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and all areas other than those corresponding to the specific game storage bit are unused. This configuration makes it possible to avoid changes to information indicating the command type when creating a header by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area.

Gaming Machine I7. Any of the above gaming machines I3 to I6, wherein the specific information is header information including information indicating the command type.

With this gaming machine, a header containing information indicating whether or not a specific game is being played is created by calculating header information containing information indicating the command type and information stored in a memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to pre-store the headers of commands to be sent when a specific game is being played and the headers of commands to be sent when a non-specific game is being played, thereby reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine I8. Any of the above gaming machines I1 to I7, comprising: first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) for storing first information (40H) in the memory area when a first specific condition (win in the additional lottery, win in the pseudo game lottery) is met; second execution means (pseudo game flag clear function S611) for changing the information stored in the memory area to second information (00H) when a second specific condition (end of pseudo game) is met after the first specific condition is met; confirmation means (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.) for confirming the information stored in the memory area; and specific game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing the specific game when the confirmation means confirms that the first information has been stored in the memory area.

According to this gaming machine, when a first specific condition is met, first information is stored in the memory area, and when a second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the memory area is changed to second information. Then, when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the memory area, a specific game is executed. In this way, by configuring the information stored in the memory area to be used not only when creating a specified command but also when determining whether or not to execute a specific game, it is possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming Machine I9. Any of the above gaming machines I1 to I8 is configured such that when information indicating the specific game is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and when information indicating that the game is not the specific game is stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if information indicating a specific game is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and if information indicating a non-specific game is stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine. This configuration makes it possible to give the information stored in the memory area both the function of information used when creating a specified command and the function of information used when outputting a first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make effective use of the memory area and prevent the increase in storage capacity.

Gaming Machine I10. Any of the above gaming machines I1 to I9, characterized in that the specific game is a pseudo-game.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to have the slave control means determine whether or not a game is being played through a specified command.

Gaming Machine I11. Any of the above gaming machines I1 to I9, characterized in that the specific game is a game in a specific game state.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to have the slave control means determine whether or not a game is being played in a specific gaming state through a specified command.

Gaming machine J1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages games;
In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means,
The main control means
A first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) for storing first information (40H) in a memory area (pseudo game flag storage area) when a first specific condition (winning the additional lottery or winning the pseudo game lottery) is established;
When a second specific condition (end of pseudo game) is established after the first specific condition is established, a second execution means (pseudo game flag clear function S611) changes the information stored in the memory area to second information (00H);
A confirmation means (such as a pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903) for confirming the information stored in the storage area;
a control execution means (pseudo game execution function) that executes different controls when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the memory area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the memory area;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a setting means for setting corresponding information (rotation start header) using at least a portion of the information stored in the memory area.

According to this gaming machine, when a first specific condition is met, first information is stored in the memory area, and when a second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the memory area is changed to second information. Different controls are executed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the memory area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the memory area. Furthermore, corresponding information is set using at least a portion of the information stored in the memory area. In this way, by configuring the information stored in the memory area to be used not only for determining when control is executed but also for setting corresponding information, it is possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to store other data related to the game, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine J2. In the gaming machine J1 described above, the control execution means executes a specific game (pseudo game) when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the memory area, and does not execute the specific game when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the memory area.

According to this gaming machine, if it is confirmed that first information is stored in the memory area, a specific game is executed, and if the confirmation means confirms that second information is stored in the memory area, the specific game is not executed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether or not a specific game will be executed based on the information stored in the memory area, and to set corresponding information corresponding to whether or not a specific game will be executed.

Gaming machine J3. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine J1 or J2, further comprising: specific information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing specific information (such as spin start header information); and command transmission means (such as command transmission process 3) for transmitting commands to the slave control means, wherein the setting means comprises specified command creation means (such as header creation function S3002) for creating specified commands (such as stop headers) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, a specified command is created by calculating pre-stored specific information and information stored in a memory area that stores information that differs depending on whether the first and second specific conditions are met. This configuration allows the slave control means to determine whether each specific condition is met through the specified command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible for the secondary control means to perform control depending on whether or not a specific condition is met, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, with this configuration, there is no need to pre-store the commands to be sent when the first information is stored and the commands to be sent when the second information is stored, which makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the command to be sent when first information is stored and the command to be sent when second information is stored are stored in advance, a confirmation process using a confirmation means is required when a command is sent, complicating the processing configuration. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, once a specified command is created, the specified command will include whether first information or second information is stored, making the above confirmation process unnecessary. From this perspective, simplifying the processing configuration also makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Gaming machine J4. In the gaming machine J3 described above, the specified command creation means creates a specified command by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area, whether the first information is stored in the memory area or the second information is stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, whether the first information or the second information is stored in the memory area, a specified command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to determine whether the first information or the second information is stored in the memory area when sending a command, simplifying the processing configuration and making it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Gaming machine J5. A gaming machine in the above gaming machine J3 or J4, characterized in that the specified command is a header.

With this gaming machine, a header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area. This configuration makes it possible to include information in the header indicating whether the first and second specific conditions are met. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundancy in the commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine J6. The gaming machine described above in relation to gaming machine J5, characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

With this gaming machine, the header contains information indicating whether the first and second specific conditions are met, and the header is contained in one byte, allowing the slave control means to grasp more information when it receives the header.

Gaming machine J7. In the gaming machine J5 or J6 described above, the header is configured to include a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a specific condition storage bit that stores information indicating whether the first specific condition and the second specific condition are met, and the specific condition storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit.

According to this gaming machine, the header has a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a specific condition storage bit that stores information indicating whether the first and second specific conditions are met. The specific condition storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. This configuration makes it possible to store information indicating whether each specific condition is met in bits that would previously have been unused, making it possible to effectively prevent redundancy in commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine J8. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine J7, characterized in that the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area.

In this gaming machine, the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and all areas other than those corresponding to the specific condition storage bit are unused. This configuration makes it possible to avoid changes to information indicating the command type when creating a header by calculating specific information and the information stored in the memory area.

Gaming machine J9. Any of the gaming machines J5 to J8 above, wherein the specific information is header information including information indicating the command type.

This gaming machine creates a header containing information indicating whether each specific condition is met by calculating header information containing information indicating the command type and information stored in the memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to pre-store the header to be sent when the first information is stored and the header to be sent when the second information is stored, thereby reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine J10. In any of the gaming machines J1 to J9 above, the setting means outputs a first signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the first information is stored in the memory area, and does not output the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the second information is stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, when first information is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output outside the gaming machine, and when second information is stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output outside the gaming machine. This configuration makes it possible to give the information stored in the memory area both the function of information used when executing control and the function of information used when outputting the first signal outside the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make effective use of the memory area and prevent the increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine K1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages games;
In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means,
The main control means
a command transmission means (command transmission process 3, etc.) for transmitting a command to the slave control means;
an information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing first command information (stop header information, etc.) to be transmitted to the slave control means in the case of a first game (main game);
When a second game (pseudo game) different from the first game is executed, a memory area (pseudo game flag storage area) for storing second game information (40H) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by having a command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) that creates second command information (stop header, etc.) by calculating the first command information and the second game information in the case of the second game.

With this gaming machine, first command information to be sent to the slave control means when the first game is being played is pre-stored, and when a second game different from the first game is being played, second game information is stored in the memory area. Then, when the second game is being played, second command information is created by calculating the first command information and the second game information. This configuration makes it possible to send second command information to the slave control means when the second game is being played, and enables the slave control means to perform control appropriate for either the first game or the second game.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Furthermore, with this configuration, there is no need to store second command information in the main control means in advance, which makes it possible to reduce the amount of data and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine K2. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine K1, but configured such that when the first game is executed, first game information (00H) is stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, when the first game is executed, first game information is stored in the memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to provide a separate memory area for storing first game information, making it possible to prevent increases in memory capacity.

Gaming machine K3. A gaming machine comprising the above-mentioned gaming machine K2, including: first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) for storing the second game information in the memory area when a first specific condition (winning the additional lottery, winning the pseudo game lottery) is met; second execution means (pseudo game flag clear function S611) for changing the information stored in the memory area to the first game information when a second specific condition (end of pseudo game) is met after the first specific condition is met; confirmation means (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.) for confirming the information stored in the memory area; first game execution means (main game execution function) for executing the first game when the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the memory area; and second game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing the second game when the confirmation means confirms that the second game information is stored in the memory area.

According to this gaming machine, if a first specific condition is met, second game information is stored in the memory area, and if a second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the memory area is changed to first game information. If the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the memory area, the first game is executed, and if the confirmation means confirms that the second game information is stored in the memory area, the second game is executed. In this way, by configuring the information stored in the memory area to be used not only when creating second command information but also when determining whether to execute the first game or the second game, it is possible to prevent an increase in memory capacity.

Gaming machine K4. In the gaming machine K2 or K3 described above, the command creation means creates command information by calculating the first command information and the game information stored in the memory area, in both the first game and the second game.

With this gaming machine, in both the first game and the second game, command information is created by calculating the first command information and the game information stored in the memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to determine whether a command is being sent for the first game or the second game, simplifying the processing configuration and reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine K5. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine K4, characterized in that when the command creation means calculates the first command information and the first gaming information, the calculation result does not change from the first command information.

With this gaming machine, when the first command information and the first game information are calculated, the calculation result remains the first command information. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration and makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Gaming machine K6. Any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, characterized in that the first command information is a header.

With this gaming machine, by calculating the first command information and the second game information, it is possible to create the second command information as a header, and to include information in the header indicating whether it is the first game or the second game. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundancy in the commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine K7. The gaming machine described above as gaming machine K6, characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

With this gaming machine, the header contains information indicating whether it is the first game or the second game, and the header is contained in one byte, allowing the slave control means to grasp more information when it receives the header.

Gaming machine K8. In the gaming machine K6 or K7 described above, the header is configured to include a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a game storage bit that stores information indicating whether it is the first game or the second game, and the game storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit.

According to this gaming machine, the header has a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a game storage bit that stores information indicating whether it is the first game or the second game. The game storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. This configuration makes it possible to store information indicating whether it is the first game or the second game in a bit that would previously have been unused, making it possible to effectively prevent redundancy in commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine K9. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine K8, characterized in that the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the game storage bit is an unused area.

In this gaming machine, the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and all areas other than those corresponding to the game storage bits are unused. This configuration makes it possible to avoid changes to information indicating the command type when creating a header by calculating the first command information and the second game information.

Gaming machine K10. Any of the gaming machines K1 to K9 described above is configured such that when the second gaming information is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and when the second gaming information is not stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when second gaming information is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and when second gaming information is not stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine. This configuration makes it possible to give the second gaming information both the function of information used when creating second command information and the function of information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make effective use of the memory area and prevent the increase in memory capacity.

Gaming machine K11. Any of the above gaming machines K1 to K10, characterized in that the second game is a pseudo game and the first game is a game that is not a pseudo game.

With this gaming machine, the slave control means can determine whether or not a pseudo game is being played through the first command information and second command information.

Gaming machine K12. Any of the above gaming machines K1 to K10, wherein the second game is a game in a specific gaming state, and the first game is a game in a gaming state different from the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the slave control means can determine whether or not a game is being played in a specific gaming state through the first command information and second command information.

The gaming machines I through K may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines I through K may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A through H, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine L1. A first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a first effect (press display) that prompts the user to operate the first operating means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the first effect is executed;
a predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for displaying predetermined information (a menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the effect switch 67);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first performance is executed, the specified operation becomes valid if a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is met after the start of the specific performance, and the specified operation becomes valid even if the specific condition is not met after the start of the specific performance.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to display the specified information by performing a specified operation even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of the specified information not being displayed even when the specified operation is performed, reducing the chances of players becoming frustrated.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the specified operation may become effective if a specific condition is met after the start of the specific effect, or may become effective even if the specific condition is not met after the start of the specific effect. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the specified operation becomes effective depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for players to display specified information at the timing they desire, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine L2. A gaming machine similar to the above gaming machine L1, characterized in that the specific condition includes the passage of a specific time (approximately 5 seconds) from the start of the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation may become effective after a specific time has elapsed since the start of the specific effect, or before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the specific effect. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

Gaming machine L3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine L2, but configured such that the specific effect notifies the specific result (whether or not an additional bonus is awarded) within a second specific time (approximately 2 seconds) that is shorter than the specific time.

With this gaming machine, during a special effect, a special result is announced within the second special time, which is shorter than the special time. This configuration reduces the chances that a specific operation will be effective before the special result is announced.

Gaming machine L4. In the gaming machine L3 described above, if a second specific condition (first timer 0, completion flag present) is met after the start of the specific effect, the predetermined operation becomes valid even if the specific condition is not met, and the second specific condition includes the elapse of the second specific time from the start of the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, if a second specific condition is met, including the passage of a second specific time since the start of a specific effect, the specified operation becomes valid even if the specific condition is not met. This configuration makes it possible to make the specified operation valid after the specific result is notified, whether the specified operation becomes valid because the specific condition is met or because the second specific condition is met.

Gaming machine L5. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine L3 or L4, characterized in that the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

In this gaming machine, the first operating means is operated not only when the first effect is executed, but also when the specified information is displayed. In a configuration in which the specific effect is initiated in response to operation of the first operating means, it is possible that the player will operate the first operating means again after the specific result is announced, hoping for further development of the effect. Therefore, by configuring the specific effect to announce the specific result before the second specific time, which is shorter than the specific time, has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the chances of the specified information being displayed in a situation unintended by the player.

Gaming machine L6. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine L5, characterized in that the specific time is at least twice the second specific time.

With this gaming machine, the specific time is set to be at least twice the second specific time, so if the player operates the first operating means again after the specific result has been announced in the hope of further development of the performance, it is possible to avoid the specific information being displayed.

Gaming machine L7. In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6 described above, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes valid if the time elapsed since the specified condition (received operation end command) is met reaches a first specified time (approximately 10 seconds) and the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches a second specified time (approximately 2 seconds), or if the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches a third specified time (approximately 5 seconds) that is longer than the second specified time; if the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time after the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time, or if the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time.

According to this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, if the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time, and the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time, or if the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches a third specified time that is longer than the second specified time, the predetermined operation becomes effective; if the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time and the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time, or if the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time, the predetermined operation becomes effective. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depending on when the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time.

Gaming machine L8. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine L7, characterized in that the specified condition is met when the first performance is initiated.

With this gaming machine, the timing at which the specified operation becomes effective changes depending on the relationship between the time elapsed since the start of the first effect and the timing at which the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time. Because the specific effect is initiated by operating the first operating means, this configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which the specified operation becomes effective depending on the time it takes for the player to operate the first operating means after the start of the first effect.

Gaming machine LL1. A first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a first effect (press display) that prompts the user to operate the first operating means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the first effect is executed;
transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for transitioning to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first performance is executed, there are cases where the machine transitions to the customer waiting state if a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is met after the start of the specific performance, and cases where the machine transitions to the customer waiting state even if the specific condition is not met after the start of the specific performance.

This gaming machine makes it possible to transition to a customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of an event occurring in which the machine does not transition to a customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the machine may transition to a customer waiting state if a specific condition is met after the start of the specific effect, or may transition to a customer waiting state even if the specific condition is not met after the start of the specific effect. This makes it possible to change the timing of the transition to a customer waiting state depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the machine to transition to a waiting state for customers, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The configurations described above for gaming machines L2 to L8 may be combined as appropriate by changing the description "a specified operation becomes effective" to "the machine transitions to a customer waiting state." Even when combined, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Gaming machine M1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages games;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
the master control means includes a specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means
A first performance control means (press display execution function S3504) that controls execution of a first performance (press display) that prompts operation of the first operating means;
a specific effect control means (result display processing function) for controlling execution of a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
A predetermined information control means (menu processing function S3606) that controls the display of predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the effect switch 67);
A gaming machine characterized by having an enabling means (a function that terminates the press-down effect processing and proceeds to S3603) that, when the first effect is executed, makes the subsequent specified operation valid if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to display the specified information by performing a specified operation even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of the specified information not being displayed even when the specified operation is performed, reducing the chances of players becoming frustrated.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent specified operation becomes valid. This makes it possible to determine the timing at which the specified operation becomes valid based on the timing at which the specific command sent from the main control means is received.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for players to display specified information at the timing they desire, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine M2. In the gaming machine M1 described above, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received, a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with second validation means (a function of terminating the press effect processing based on second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) that validates the subsequent predetermined operation after the specific effect has been executed.

With this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent specified operation becomes valid after the specific effect has been executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute the specific effect even if the first operating means is operated after the specific command is received.

Gaming machine M3. In the gaming machine M1 or M2 described above, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received, a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with second validation means (a function of terminating the press effect processing based on second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) that validates the subsequent specified operation after a predetermined specified time (approximately 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific effect was executed.

With this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent specified operation becomes valid a predetermined time after the specific effect has been executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute the specific effect even if the first operating means is operated after the specific command is received. Furthermore, by providing a grace period of a specified time between the execution of the specific effect and the specified operation becoming valid, it is possible to change the timing at which the specified operation becomes valid depending on the timing at which the specific effect is executed, i.e., the timing at which the first operating means is operated, and the timing at which the specific command is received.

Gaming machine M4. Any of the gaming machines M1 to M3 described above, wherein the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

In this gaming machine, the first operating means is operated not only when the first effect is executed, but also when the specified information is to be displayed. In a configuration in which the start of a specific effect is triggered by the operation of the first operating means, it is conceivable that the player may operate the first operating means again after the specific effect has been executed, hoping for further development of the effect. Therefore, by setting the timing at which the specified operation becomes effective not when the specific effect has been executed, but when a specific command is received or after a specified time has passed, it is possible to reduce the chances of the specified information being displayed in a situation unintended by the player.

Amusement machine M5. The gaming machine M4 includes a plurality of cyclical display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that cyclically display a plurality of patterns (designs), a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56-58) that is operated to start the cyclical display of the patterns, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) that draws winning combinations, a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) that are operated to individually stop the cyclical display of the patterns, and a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control unit 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination when a winning combination and a winning design corresponding to the winning combination selected in the winning combination drawing stop in a valid position (valid line) in a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor winning designs), and the predetermined information control means controls the display of the predetermined information when at least all of the cyclical display means have stopped the cyclical display of the patterns.

This gaming machine can achieve the above-mentioned effects in a slot machine that can display predetermined information even when play has not yet begun.

Gaming machine M6. In the gaming machine M5 described above, the main control means is equipped with an operation end command sending means (operation end command sending function S3307) that sends an operation end command to the slave control means when all operations of the stop operation means performed to stop the cyclical display of the images have been completed, and the first effect control means controls the execution of the first effect based on the reception of the operation end command.

With this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when all operations of the stop operation means to stop the cyclical display of images have been completed. In this configuration, when the first operation means is operated, control is either performed to execute a specific effect or to display specified information. Therefore, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the configuration is such that when the first effect is executed, subsequent specified operations are valid, making it possible to avoid malfunctions.

Gaming machine M7. In the gaming machine M6 described above, the specific command transmission means transmits the specific command when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed since all operations of the stop operation means to stop the cyclical display of the images have been completed.

With this gaming machine, a specific command is sent when a predetermined time has elapsed since all operations of the stop operation means to stop the cyclical display of images have been completed. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which a specific operation becomes effective depending on the time elapsed since all operations of the stop operation means to stop the cyclical display of images have been completed, and the timing at which the specific effect has been executed, i.e., the timing at which the first operation means is operated.

Gaming machine M8. In the gaming machine M5 described above, the main control means is equipped with a circulation end command sending means (all reels stopped command sending function S3305) that sends a circulation end command to the slave control means when all of the circulation display means have stopped the cyclical display of the symbols, and the first effect control means controls the execution of the first effect based on the reception of the circulation end command.

With this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when all cyclical display of images has stopped. In this configuration, when the first operating means is operated, control is either performed to execute a specific effect or to display specified information. Therefore, if the first effect is executed and the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent specified operation is considered valid, thereby making it possible to avoid malfunctions.

Gaming machine M9. In the gaming machine M8 described above, the specific command transmission means transmits the specific command when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed since all of the cyclical display means stopped cyclical display of the images.

With this gaming machine, a specific command is sent when a predetermined time has elapsed since all cyclical display of symbols has stopped. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which a specific operation becomes effective depending on the time elapsed since all cyclical display of symbols has ended and the timing at which the specific effect has been executed, i.e., the timing at which the first operating means is operated.

Gaming machine MM1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages games;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
the master control means includes a specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means
A first performance control means (press display execution function S3504) that controls execution of a first performance (press display) that prompts operation of the first operating means;
a specific effect control means (result display processing function) for controlling execution of a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
A transition control means (standby processing function S3607) for controlling transition to a customer waiting state (customer waiting effect display state);
A gaming machine characterized by having a transition enabling means (a function of terminating the press-down effect processing and transitioning to S3603) that enables transition to the customer waiting state after executing the first effect if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received.

This gaming machine makes it possible to transition to a customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of an event occurring in which the machine does not transition to a customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has already been executed when the specific command is received, it is possible to transition to a customer waiting state afterwards. This means that the timing of transitioning to a customer waiting state can be determined by the timing of receiving the specific command sent from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the machine to transition to a waiting state for customers, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine MM2. The gaming machine MM1 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with second transition enabling means (a function that terminates the press effect processing based on second timer 0 and transitions to S3603) that enables transition to the customer waiting state after the specific effect has been executed if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received when the first effect is executed.

With this gaming machine, if the first effect has been executed and the specific command has not yet been received, the machine can transition to a customer waiting state after the specific effect has been executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute the specific effect even if the first operating means is operated after the specific command has been received.

The configurations described in gaming machines M3 to M9 above may be combined as appropriate by changing the phrase "the predetermined operation thereafter is made valid" to "the transition to the customer waiting state is made possible thereafter." Even when combined, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Gaming machine N1. A first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a first effect (press display) that prompts the user to operate the first operating means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the first effect is executed;
a predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for displaying predetermined information (a menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the effect switch 67);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first effect is executed, there are cases in which the predetermined operation becomes effective based on the value of a first timer after the start of the specific effect, and cases in which the predetermined operation becomes effective based on the value of a second timer that is activated after the start of the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to display the specified information by performing a specified operation even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of the specified information not being displayed even when the specified operation is performed, reducing the chances of players becoming frustrated.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation may become effective based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, or based on the value of the second timer, which is activated after the start of the specific effect. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for players to display specified information at the timing they desire, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine N2. The gaming machine N1 described above, further characterized by including an activation means (first timer activation function S3505) that activates the first timer when the first effect starts.

In this gaming machine, the first timer is activated when the first effect starts. This configuration makes it possible to configure the machine so that, when the first effect is executed, a predetermined operation is activated based on the time elapsed since the start of the first effect, or a predetermined operation is activated based on the time elapsed since the start of a specific effect.

Gaming machine N3. The gaming machine N1 or N2 described above, further comprising: a first confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether the value of the first timer is a specified value (0); and an execution confirmation means (completion flag confirmation function S4104) for confirming whether the specific effect has been executed; and a configuration in which the predetermined operation is enabled when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value after the specific effect has been executed.

With this gaming machine, if the value of the first timer reaches a specified value after a specific effect has been executed, a specific operation becomes valid. This configuration makes it possible, when the first effect is executed, to prompt the player to operate the first operating means so that the specific effect is executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, reducing the chance of a long delay between the first effect and the specific effect.

Gaming machine N4. A gaming machine similar to the above-mentioned gaming machine N3, characterized in that if the specific effect has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specified operation becomes effective when the value of the second timer reaches a second specified value (0).

With this gaming machine, if a specific effect has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, a specified operation becomes valid when the value of the second timer reaches a second specified value. With this configuration, if the first operating means is operated so that a specific effect has been executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the length of time from when the specific effect is executed until the specified operation becomes valid varies depending on the operation timing of the first operating means. However, if the first operating means is operated so that a specific effect has been executed after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the length of time from when the specific effect is executed until the specified operation becomes valid can be kept constant.

Gaming machine N5. The gaming machine described above as gaming machine N4, further comprising second activation means (second timer activation function S4212) that activates the second timer when the specific effect has been executed.

This gaming machine is configured to activate the second timer when a specific effect has been executed, making it possible to maintain a constant length of time between the execution of a specific effect and the activation of a specific operation.

Gaming machine N6. In the gaming machine N5 described above, the second activation means does not activate the second timer if the specific effect is executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

With this gaming machine, if a specific effect is executed before the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, the second timer is not activated, but if a specific effect is executed after the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, the second timer is activated. This configuration makes it possible to configure the second timer not to activate when a specific operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer not to activate when a specific operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Gaming machine N7. Any of the gaming machines N3 to N6 described above, characterized in that the operation of the first timer is terminated when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

With this gaming machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches a specified value. This configuration ensures that the second timer does not operate when a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and that the first timer does not operate when a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer.

Gaming machine N8. The gaming machine described above as gaming machine N1, characterized in that the second timer does not operate when the first timer is operating.

This gaming machine is designed so that the second timer does not operate when the first timer is operating, making it possible to change the timing at which a specified operation becomes effective while simplifying the processing configuration.

Gaming machine N9. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine N8, further comprising: confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether the value of the first timer is a specified value (0) when the specific effect has been executed; and second activation means for activating the second timer when the confirmation means confirms that the value of the first timer is the specified value.

With this gaming machine, when a specific effect has been executed, the value of the first timer is checked to see if it is equal to a specified value, and if so, the second timer is activated. This configuration allows the first timer to operate until the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, and after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the second timer can be activated when the specific effect has been executed.

Gaming machine N10. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine N9, characterized in that the operation of the first timer is terminated when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

With this gaming machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches a specified value. This configuration ensures that the second timer does not operate when a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and that the first timer does not operate when a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer.

Gaming machine NN1. A first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a first effect (press display) that prompts the user to operate the first operating means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the first effect is executed;
transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for transitioning to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first effect is executed, there are cases where the machine transitions to the customer waiting state based on the value of a first timer after the start of the specific effect, and cases where the machine transitions to the customer waiting state based on the value of a second timer that is activated after the start of the specific effect.

This gaming machine makes it possible to transition to a customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of an event occurring in which the machine does not transition to a customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the machine may transition to a customer waiting state based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, or may transition to a customer waiting state based on the value of the second timer, which is activated after the start of the specific effect. This makes it possible to change the timing of the transition to the customer waiting state depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the machine to transition to a waiting state for customers, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The configurations described above for gaming machines N2 to N10 may be combined as appropriate by changing the description "a specified operation becomes effective" to "the machine transitions to a customer waiting state." Even when combined, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

The gaming machines L group through N group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines L group through N group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group through K group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine O1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
The game state has an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) can be activated, and a normal state (normal section) in which the instruction function is not activated,
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the first game mode,
When a first termination condition (a difference of 2400) is established, a first termination means (an advantageous period termination function S1703 to S1705 of the main control device 101) terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state;
When a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is established, a second termination means (advantageous period termination function S4505 to S4507 of the main control device 101) terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state;
A control means (display control device 81) for controlling the display of an end screen informing the user that the advantageous state will end,
The control means controls the display of the end screen in the game next to the game in which the first end condition was met when the first end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, and controls the display of the end screen in the game in which the second end condition is met when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends.

This gaming machine has a first and a second termination condition that terminates the advantageous state. If the first termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the next game turn following the one in which the first termination condition was met. If the second termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met. In this way, by varying the game turn in which the termination screen is displayed depending on which termination condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as by executing auxiliary effects according to the termination condition that is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine O2. The gaming machine O1 described above is characterized in that the first termination condition is met when the difference in the number of gaming media from the base point at which the number of gaming media has been reduced the most during the advantageous state reaches an upper limit (2,400 coins).

With this gaming machine, if the difference in the number of coins from the base point at which gaming media have been reduced the most during an advantageous state reaches the upper limit, the end screen is displayed in the next play after the play in which the difference in the number of coins reaches the upper limit. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the end screen being displayed for multiple play times when the advantageous state has not yet ended. For example, it is possible to configure the end screen to be displayed in the play time in which the first end condition is met, but in this case, the play time in which the first end condition is met may differ depending on the results of the winning combination or the operation method of the stop operation means, which could result in the end screen being displayed for multiple play times when the advantageous state has not yet ended.

Gaming machine O3. The gaming machine O2 described above is equipped with a difference in number confirmation means (difference in number confirmation function S4511 of the main control unit 101) for confirming the difference in number of coins, and is configured so that if the difference in number confirmation means confirms that the number of coins has reached a specified number (2,200 coins) that is less than the upper limit, the first end condition is met in the subsequent game round, and the advantageous state ends.

With this gaming machine, if the difference in number confirmation means confirms that the number of coins has reached a specified number that is less than the upper limit, the first end condition is met in the subsequent play, and the advantageous state ends. This configuration allows the player to play in an advantageous state with the goal of the difference in number of coins reaching the specified number. As a result, even if an upper limit is set on the difference in number of coins in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play. Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to know in advance that the first end condition will be met and the advantageous state will end, making it possible to diversify the auxiliary effects that are displayed between the time the difference in number confirmation means confirms that the specified number has been reached and the time the first end condition is met.

Gaming machine O4. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a continuation auxiliary effect control means (ending execution processing function S4711 of the display control device 81) that controls the execution of a continuation auxiliary effect (ending video) that continues until the first game end condition is met, when the difference number confirmation means confirms that the specified number of coins has been reached in the above gaming machine O3.

With this gaming machine, when the difference coin confirmation means confirms that the specified number of coins has been reached, a continuation support effect is executed, which continues until the first end condition is met in a game. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player through the continuation support effect that the first end condition has been met and the advantageous state has ended, and to allow the player to play while feeling a sense of superiority until the first end condition is actually met. Furthermore, because an end screen is displayed in the game following the game in which the first end condition was met, the player can play the next game while still basking in the afterglow. As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine O5. Any of the gaming machines O1 to O4 described above, characterized in that when the termination condition for the second gaming mode is met, the second termination condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when the conditions for ending the second gaming mode are met and the advantageous state ends, an end screen is displayed in the game round in which the conditions for ending the second gaming mode are met. This configuration makes it possible for the player to operate the start operating means to start the next game round while building anticipation that the second gaming mode will continue, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine O6. The gaming machine O5 described above is characterized in that, when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed before the end of the game in which the second end condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed before the end of the round in which the second end condition is met. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the end screen that has been painstakingly prepared from going to waste. It is also possible to configure the end screen to be displayed after the round in question has ended, but in this case, if the player immediately operates the start operating means to start the next round in question, there would not be enough time to display the end screen.

Gaming machine O7. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine O5 or O6 described above, when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed even if at least one cyclic display means in the game in which the second end condition is met has not stopped cyclic display of the images.

With this gaming machine, when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed even if at least one of the cyclical display means for the game in which the second end condition is met has not stopped cyclical display of images. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the carefully prepared end screen from going to waste. It is also possible to configure the end screen to be displayed after all cyclical display means have stopped cyclical display of images, but in this case, if the player immediately operates the start operation means to start the next game, there would not be enough time to display the end screen.

Gaming machine O8. Any of the gaming machines O5 to O7 described above, further comprising a count information storage means (transition game number counter) that stores count information relating to the number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode, and wherein the condition for terminating the second gaming mode is met when the number of games corresponding to the count information has been played.

With this gaming machine, the condition for ending the second gaming mode is met when the number of plays corresponding to the number of plays stored in the number of plays information storage means has been played. This configuration makes it possible to avoid displaying the end screen for multiple games even when the second gaming mode and advantageous state have not yet ended.

Gaming machine O9. The gaming machine O8 described above is characterized by comprising: an increase lottery means (an increase lottery processing function S4403 of the main control unit 101) that conducts an increase lottery (an increase lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode; and a winning notification means (a revival effect on the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that the increase lottery has been won in the next game following the game that displayed the end screen.

With this gaming machine, when an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of plays available in the second gaming mode, the player may be notified that they have won the increase lottery in the next game after the game in which the end screen was displayed. This configuration allows the player to operate the start operating means to start the next game while encouraging them to expect the second gaming mode to continue, thereby increasing their interest in the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, the player can view the end screen in the game in which the end condition for the second gaming mode is met, and then be notified that the number of plays available in the second gaming mode has increased. This can amplify the player's sense of satisfaction at winning the increase lottery.

Gaming machine O10. Any of the gaming machines O1 to O9 described above, characterized in that when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, the end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal state.

With this gaming machine, when switching from the second gaming mode to the normal mode, the end screen is displayed after the first game in the normal mode. This configuration allows the player to play the first game in the normal mode while basking in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine P1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
The game state has an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) can be activated, and a normal state (normal section) in which the instruction function is not activated,
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the first game mode,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an ending screen is displayed on the first play in the normal state to notify that the advantageous state has ended.

With this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal mode, an end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal mode to notify the player that the advantageous state has ended. This configuration allows the player to play the first game in the normal mode while basking in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine P2. The gaming machine P1 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control unit 101) that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, and is configured to continue displaying the end screen until the game play in which the transition determination means determines to transition to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, the end screen continues to be displayed during each game in normal mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed in normal mode, thereby preventing an increase in memory capacity.

Gaming machine P3. The gaming machine P2 described above is characterized by being equipped with a game count notification means (a function of the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the number of games continued) that notifies the player of the number of games played in the first gaming mode.

In this gaming machine, in the first gaming mode, the number of plays played in the first gaming mode is reported. With this configuration, even if a game is played under normal conditions, it does not count as the number of plays played under the first gaming mode, and therefore the number of plays cannot be reported or updated under normal conditions. If the number of plays was not reported or updated under normal conditions, it is possible that the player will perceive playing under normal conditions as meaningless, and lose interest in playing. However, if the configuration is such that the end screen is continuously displayed for each play under normal conditions, it is possible to switch from the end screen to a report of the number of plays played under the first gaming mode, thereby reducing the visual discomfort. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

Gaming machine P4. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P3 described above, further comprising transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, and wherein the transition determination means is configured so that the rate at which it determines to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the rate at which it determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, the rate at which it is determined to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the rate at which it is determined not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of times a game remains in the normal state. As a result, by displaying the end screen during the first game in the normal state, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed in the normal state, and it is possible to suppress an increase in memory capacity. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine P2 or gaming machine P3, it is possible to reduce the number of times the end screen is continuously displayed for an extended period of time, thereby reducing the number of times a player ends play while the end screen is displayed.

Gaming machine P5. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P4 described above, wherein the end screen displays the difference in number of coins from when the gaming media was most reduced in the advantageous state until the advantageous state ended, and the difference in number displayed on the end screen does not reflect the game results in the normal state.

With this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of gaming media from when the number of gaming media was lowest during an advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. The difference in the number of gaming media displayed on this end screen does not reflect the game results during normal play. This configuration makes it possible to accurately notify the player of the number of gaming media acquired by the player during an advantageous state, even when the end screen is displayed during normal play. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the difference in the number of gaming media displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine P6. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P5 described above, characterized in that it comprises transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control device 101) that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, and advantageous information notification means (suggested jewel and confirmed jewel display function of the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player if the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, if the game does not transition from normal mode to the first gaming mode, advantageous information that is beneficial to the player is notified. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from avoiding playing in normal mode.

Gaming machine P7. In the gaming machine P6 described above, the advantageous information notification means, in a game turn in which the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, notifies the advantageous information before all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of the symbols, and does not notify the advantageous information after all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of the symbols.

With this gaming machine, in a game turn in which the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, the advantageous information is announced before all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of images, and is no longer announced after all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of images. This configuration makes it possible for players who want to check the advantageous information to play in normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating in a reduced capacity due to the normal state.

Gaming machine P8. In the gaming machine P6 or P7, the advantageous information notification means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

With this gaming machine, advantageous information is announced based on the number of times the normal state continues. This configuration can reduce the player's loss of motivation to play when the game does not transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of gaming machine P2, it can prevent gameplay in the normal state from becoming monotonous. While continuously displaying the end screen over multiple game plays can raise concerns that the game will become monotonous, this configuration can create expectations in the player that different advantageous information will be announced in the next game play, making it possible to focus the player's attention on the advantageous information.

Gaming machine P9. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P8 described above, characterized in that it is equipped with an end screen control means (display control device 81) that controls the display of the end screen at the end of the game round in which the second game mode ends.

With this gaming machine, an end screen may be displayed during the game round in which the second gaming mode ends. This configuration makes it possible to display the end screen across advantageous and normal states, reducing the chances that the player will realize that they are in the normal state.

Gaming machine P10. The gaming machine P9 described above is characterized by comprising: an increase lottery means (an increase lottery processing function S4403 of the main control unit 101) that conducts an increase lottery (an increase lottery) in the second gaming mode to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode; and a winning notification means (a revival effect on the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that the increase lottery has been won in the next gaming session following the one that displayed the end screen.

With this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of playable rounds in the second gaming mode, the player may be notified that they have won the increase lottery in the next play round following the one in which the end screen was displayed. This configuration allows the player to operate the start operation means to start the next play round when the end screen is displayed, while encouraging the player to anticipate the continuation of the second gaming mode, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, the player can view the end screen in the play round in which the end condition for the second gaming mode is met, and then be notified that the number of playable rounds in the second gaming mode has increased. This increases the player's sense of satisfaction at winning the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to a configuration in which the end screen is displayed under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. For example, if a specific player finishes play while the end screen is displayed, other players can be prompted to operate the start operation means to start the next play round while encouraging the player to anticipate the continuation of the second gaming mode.

Amusement machine P11. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P8 described above includes first termination means (advantageous period termination functions S1703 to S1705 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a first termination condition (a difference in number of coins of 2,400) is met; second termination means (advantageous period termination functions S4505 to S4507 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is met (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter); and control means (display control device 81) that controls the display of an end screen notifying players that the advantageous state will end; wherein the control means controls the display of the end screen in the game turn following the game turn in which the first termination condition was met when the first termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends; and controls the display of the end screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met when the second termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends.

This gaming machine has a first and a second termination condition that terminates the advantageous state. If the first termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the next game turn following the one in which the first termination condition was met. If the second termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met. In this way, by varying the game turn in which the termination screen is displayed depending on which termination condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as by executing auxiliary effects according to the termination condition that is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine Q1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that cyclically display a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
The game state has an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) can be activated, and a normal state (normal section) in which the instruction function is not activated,
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the first game mode,
A transition determination means (a transition lottery function S1303 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an advantageous information notification means (a function for displaying suggested jewels and confirmed jewels on the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player when the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, if the game does not transition from normal mode to the first gaming mode, advantageous information that is beneficial to the player is notified. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from avoiding playing in normal mode, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q2. In the gaming machine Q1 described above, the advantageous information notification means, in a game turn in which the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, notifies the advantageous information before all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of the symbols, and does not notify the advantageous information after all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of the symbols.

With this gaming machine, in a game turn in which the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, the advantageous information is announced before all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of images, and is no longer announced after all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of images. This configuration makes it possible for players who want to check the advantageous information to play in normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating in a reduced capacity due to the normal state.

Gaming machine Q3. In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2 described above, the advantageous information notification means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

With this gaming machine, advantageous information is reported based on the number of times the normal state continues. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play when the game does not transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

Gaming machine Q4. Any of the above gaming machines Q1 to Q3 is configured such that, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an end screen is displayed during the first play in the normal state to notify the player that the advantageous state has ended.

With this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal mode, an end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal mode to notify the player that the advantageous state has ended. This configuration allows the player to play the first game in the normal mode while basking in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q5. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the end screen is continuously displayed until the transition determination means determines that the game should transition to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed during each play in normal mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed in normal mode, thereby preventing increases in memory capacity. However, if the end screen is continuously displayed across multiple play times, there is a concern that play in normal mode may become monotonous. However, with a configuration that notifies advantageous information when the normal mode continues, it is possible to create expectations in the player that, for example, different advantageous information will be announced in the next play time, thereby drawing the player's attention to the advantageous information. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

Gaming machine Q6. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine Q5, but equipped with a game count notification means (a function of the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the number of games played) that notifies the player of the number of games played in the first gaming mode.

In this gaming machine, in the first gaming mode, the number of plays played in the first gaming mode is reported. With this configuration, even if a game is played under normal conditions, it does not count as the number of plays played under the first gaming mode, and therefore the number of plays cannot be reported or updated under normal conditions. If the number of plays was not reported or updated under normal conditions, it is possible that the player will perceive playing under normal conditions as meaningless, and lose interest in playing. However, if the configuration is such that the end screen is continuously displayed for each play under normal conditions, it is possible to switch from the end screen to a report of the number of plays played under the first gaming mode, thereby reducing the visual discomfort. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

Gaming machine Q7. Any of the above gaming machines Q4 to Q6, characterized in that the ending screen displays the difference in the number of coins from when the number of gaming media was lowest in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state, and the difference in the number of coins displayed on the ending screen does not reflect the game results in the normal state.

With this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of gaming media from when the number of gaming media was lowest during an advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. The difference in the number of gaming media displayed on this end screen does not reflect the game results during normal play. This configuration makes it possible to accurately notify the player of the number of gaming media acquired by the player during an advantageous state, even when the end screen is displayed during normal play. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the difference in the number of gaming media displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine Q8. Any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7 above, characterized in that the transition determination means is configured so that the rate at which it determines to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the rate at which it determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, the rate at which it is determined to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the rate at which it is determined not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of times a game remains in the normal state, preventing players from avoiding playing in the normal state. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine Q5, it is possible to reduce the number of times the end screen is displayed continuously for an extended period of time, thereby reducing the number of times a player ends play while the end screen is displayed.

Gaming machine Q9. Any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8 described above, characterized in that it is equipped with an end screen control means (display control device 81) that controls the display of the end screen at the end of the game round in which the second game mode ends.

With this gaming machine, an end screen may be displayed during the game round in which the second gaming mode ends. This configuration makes it possible to display the end screen across advantageous and normal states, reducing the chances that the player will realize that they are in the normal state.

Gaming machine Q10. The gaming machine Q9 described above is characterized by comprising: an increase lottery means (an increase lottery processing function S4403 of the main control unit 101) that conducts an increase lottery (an increase lottery) in the second gaming mode to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode; and a winning notification means (a revival effect on the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that the increase lottery has been won in the next gaming session following the one that displayed the ending screen.

With this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of playable rounds in the second gaming mode, the player may be notified that they have won the increase lottery in the next play round following the one in which the end screen was displayed. This configuration allows the player to operate the start operation means to start the next play round when the end screen is displayed, while encouraging the player to anticipate the continuation of the second gaming mode, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, the player can view the end screen in the play round in which the end condition for the second gaming mode is met, and then be notified that the number of playable rounds in the second gaming mode has increased. This increases the player's sense of satisfaction at winning the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to a configuration in which the end screen is displayed under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. For example, if a specific player finishes play while the end screen is displayed, other players can be prompted to operate the start operation means to start the next play round while encouraging the player to anticipate the continuation of the second gaming mode.

Amusement machine Q11. Any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8 described above includes first termination means (advantageous period termination functions S1703-S1705 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a first termination condition (difference in number of coins: 2400) is met; second termination means (advantageous period termination functions S4505-S4507 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is met (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter); and control means (display control device 81) that controls the display of an end screen notifying players that the advantageous state will end; wherein the control means controls the display of the end screen in the game turn following the game turn in which the first termination condition was met when the first termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends; and controls the display of the end screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met when the second termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends.

This gaming machine has a first and a second termination condition that terminates the advantageous state. If the first termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the next game turn following the one in which the first termination condition was met. If the second termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met. In this way, by varying the game turn in which the termination screen is displayed depending on which termination condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as by executing auxiliary effects according to the termination condition that is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

The gaming machines O group through Q group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines O group through Q group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group through N group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine R1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
The targets to be determined in the lottery for the above roles are:
a first determination object (center left and right bell 1) that can be awarded a first number (8) of game media when the plurality of stop operation means are operated with a first operation method (center left and right), and can be awarded a second number (1) of game media that is less than the first number when the plurality of stop operation means are operated with an operation method different from the first operation method;
a second determination object (first special bell) that can establish a winning event in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by the first operation method, and a winning event in which the second number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the first operation method;
A gaming machine characterized in that a first group is formed by the first judgment object and another predetermined judgment object (left, middle, right bell 1), and a second group is formed by the second judgment object and another predetermined judgment object different from the first group (second special bell).

This gaming machine provides at least one determination target for determining winning combinations: a first determination target in which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using a first operation method, and a second determination target in which a winning combination in which a second number of game media less than the first number is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the first operation method; and a second determination target in which a winning combination in which the first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the first operation method, and a second determination target in which a winning combination in which a second number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the first operation method. This configuration makes it possible to associate multiple lottery results from the lottery means with a single event in which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the first operation method.

Furthermore, the first judgment target forms a first group with other predetermined judgment targets, and the second judgment target forms a second group with other predetermined judgment targets different from the first group. This configuration makes it possible to perform control according to the group.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine R2. The gaming machine R1 described above includes at least the following targets for determination in the winning combination lottery: a third target (right, left, center bell 1) that will result in a winning combination of the first number of game media being awarded if the multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method (right, left, center), and a potential winning combination of the second number of game media being awarded if the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the second operation method; and a fourth target (third special bell) that will result in a winning combination of the first number of game media being awarded if the multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method, and a potential winning combination of the second number of game media being awarded if the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the second operation method; wherein the first group includes at least the first target and the third target, and the second group includes at least the second target and the fourth target.

This gaming machine provides at least the following determination targets for use in the winning combination lottery: a third determination target where a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method, and a winning combination in which a second number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the second operation method; and a fourth determination target where a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method, and a winning combination in which a second number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the second operation method. This configuration makes it possible to associate multiple lottery results from the lottery means with a single event in which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method.

Furthermore, the first group includes at least the first and third determination targets, and the second group includes at least the second and fourth determination targets. By configuring it in this way, even if someone were to guess which group the winning determination target belonged to, it would be possible to prevent the operation method for achieving a win that awards the first number of gaming media from being discovered.

Gaming machine R3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine R2, characterized in that the first operation method and the second operation method have different operating orders for the multiple stop operation means.

According to this gaming machine, the first and second operation methods differ in the order of operation of the multiple stop operation means. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a direct correspondence between which group the winning determination target belongs to and the order of operation required to achieve a winning result in the award of the first number of gaming media.

Gaming machine R4. A gaming machine in the above gaming machine R2 or R3, characterized in that the probability of winning the first judgment subject is equal to the probability of winning the third judgment subject.

With this gaming machine, the probability of winning the first determination target is equal to the probability of winning the third determination target. Therefore, when performing control according to the first group, it is possible to avoid the probability of achieving a prize in which the first number of gaming media is awarded being different when multiple stop operation means are operated using the first operation method and when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method.

Gaming machine R5. Any of the gaming machines R2 to R4 described above, characterized in that the probability of winning the second judgment target is equal to the probability of winning the fourth judgment target.

With this gaming machine, the probability of winning the second determination target is equal to the probability of winning the fourth determination target. Therefore, when performing control according to the second group, it is possible to avoid the probability of achieving a prize in which the first number of gaming media is awarded being different when multiple stop operation means are operated using the first operation method and when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method.

Gaming machine R6. Any of the gaming machines R2 to R5 described above, characterized in that multiple determination targets with equal winning probabilities are grouped together into one group.

With this gaming machine, multiple determination targets with the same winning probability are grouped together, so when control is performed according to the group, it is possible to prevent the probability of achieving a prize that awards the first number of gaming media from differing depending on the operation method.

Gaming machine R7. Any of the gaming machines R1 to R6 described above, characterized in that multiple determination targets for which a win is achieved in which the first number of gaming media is awarded only when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a predetermined operating method are grouped together into one group.

With this gaming machine, multiple determination targets that will result in a win that awards the first number of gaming media only when multiple stop operation means are operated using a specified operation method are grouped together. Therefore, when control is performed according to the group, it is possible to avoid the probability of achieving a win that awards the first number of gaming media varying depending on the operation method.

Gaming machine R8. A gaming machine in any of the gaming machines R1 to R7 described above, wherein the first group includes judgment targets (left, center, right bells 1) that will result in a win to award the first number of gaming media when the multiple stop operation means are operated using a specific operation method (left, center, right), and that will result in a win to award the second number of gaming media when the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the specific operation method; and the second group does not include judgment targets that will result in a win to award the first number of gaming media when the multiple stop operation means are operated using the specific operation method, and that will result in a win to award the second number of gaming media when the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the specific operation method.

According to this gaming machine, the first group includes determination targets that can result in a win in which a first number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated using a specific operation method, and a win in which a second number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated using a method different from the specific operation method. The second group does not include determination targets that can result in a win in which a first number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated using a specific operation method, and a win in which a second number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated using a method different from the specific operation method. This configuration makes it possible to realize, with a relatively simple configuration, a configuration in which the probability of winning a win in which a first number of game media is awarded differs between operating multiple stop operation means using a specific operation method and operating multiple stop operation means using a method other than the specific operation method.

Gaming machine R9. Any of the gaming machines R1 to R8 described above, further comprising: an operation method notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player of an operation method that can result in a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded; and a notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main control unit 101) that determines whether or not to notify the player of the operation method, wherein the notification determination means determines to notify the player of the operation method with different frequency when a player wins on a determination target belonging to the first group and when a player wins on a determination target belonging to the second group.

With this gaming machine, the frequency with which it decides to notify the player of the operation method that will result in a win that awards the first number of gaming media differs between when a player wins on a determination target belonging to the first group and when a player wins on a determination target belonging to the second group. This configuration makes it possible to control the decision on whether to notify the player of the operation method according to the group.

Gaming machine R10. The gaming machine R9 described above, further comprising: a main control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the notification determination means and controlling the progress of the game; and a sub-control means (display control device 81) performing subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means; wherein the main control means, when the notification determination means determines to notify the operation method when a player has won a determination object belonging to the first or second group, transmits information indicating which determination object has been won to the sub-control means; and, when the notification determination means determines not to notify the operation method when a player has won a determination object belonging to the first or second group, transmits information indicating the group to which the winning determination object belongs to the sub-control means, but does not transmit information indicating which determination object has been won to the sub-control means.

This gaming machine includes a main control means having at least a lottery means and a notification determination means, which controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control means which performs subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means. When the notification determination means determines to notify an operation method when a player has won a determination target belonging to the first or second group, the main control means transmits information indicating which determination target has been won to the sub-control means. When the notification determination means determines not to notify an operation method when a player has won a determination target belonging to the first or second group, the main control means transmits information indicating the group to which the winning determination target belongs to the sub-control means, but does not transmit information indicating which determination target has been won to the sub-control means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the sub-control means so that when the notification determination means determines not to notify an operation method when a player has won a determination target belonging to the first or second group, the sub-control means does not know which determination target has been won. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as obtaining the winning determination target from the sub-control means.

Gaming machine S1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
As the objects of determination to be determined in the lottery for the winning combination, specific objects of determination (center left right bell 1, first special bell) are provided for which a winning of a first number (8) of game media is achieved when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence (center left left), and a predetermined object of determination (left center right bell 1) is provided for which a winning of the first number of game media is achieved when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence (left center right), and at least a plurality of the specific objects of determination are provided,
The determination targets for which a winning event in which the first number of game media is awarded is established according to the operation sequence of the plurality of stop operation means are classified into a first group including the specific determination target and the predetermined determination target, and a second group including the specific determination target but not including the predetermined determination target;
an operation sequence notifying means (an instruction monitor, an auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying an operation sequence that can achieve a winning result in which the first number of game media is awarded;
a notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to notify the user of the operation sequence;
The operation sequence notification means is characterized in that, in a specific game state (notification mode A), the frequency of notifying the operation sequence differs between when a judgment object belonging to the first group is won and when a judgment object belonging to the second group is won.

This gaming machine provides two types of targets for determination in the winning combination lottery: a specific target for which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence, and a predetermined target for which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to differentiate the frequency with which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence from when multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

Furthermore, the targets for which a winning combination of a first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation sequence of the multiple stop operation means are classified into a first group including specific targets and predetermined targets, and a second group including specific targets but excluding predetermined targets. In a specific game state, the frequency of notification of the operation sequence differs between when a target belonging to the first group is won and when a target belonging to the second group is won. This configuration makes it possible to control the decision on whether to notify the operation sequence in a specific game state based on the group. As a result, it is possible to realize a specific game state with a relatively simple configuration in which, when a target for which a winning combination of a first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation sequence of the multiple stop operation means is won, the operation sequence is sometimes not notified and the operation sequence is sometimes not notified.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

In addition, in a configuration with, for example, three different operation sequences that can result in a win in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, a third judgment target (right, left, center bell 1) is provided that will result in a win in which the first number of gaming media is awarded when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a third operation sequence (right, left, center), and the results are classified into a first group that includes the specific judgment target, the predetermined judgment target, and the third judgment target, and a second group that includes the specific judgment target and the third judgment target but does not include the predetermined judgment target, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effects. The same applies to configurations with four or more of the above-mentioned operation sequences.

Gaming machine S2. The gaming machine S1 described above, characterized in that the probability of winning one of the specific judgment targets is higher than the probability of winning the predetermined judgment target.

With this gaming machine, the probability of winning one of the specific determination targets is higher than the probability of winning a predetermined determination target. This configuration makes it possible to increase the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence compared to when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence.

Gaming machine S3. In the gaming machine S1 or S2 described above, the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence with a predetermined probability if a determination target belonging to the first group is won in the specific gaming state, and determines to notify the operation sequence without fail if a determination target belonging to the second group is won.

According to this gaming machine, in a specific game state, if a player wins on a determination target belonging to the first group, the system determines that the operation sequence will be announced with a predetermined probability. If a player wins on a determination target belonging to the second group, the system determines that the operation sequence will always be announced. This configuration prevents disparities in player profits due to their level of knowledge about the gaming machine. In other words, if the frequency of a win that awards the first number of game media differs when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence compared to when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence, a difference in the frequency of a win that awards the first number of game media will occur between a player who knows this fact and a player who does not know this fact when the operation sequence is not announced. However, if the system determines that the operation sequence will always be announced when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the difference in the probability of a win that awards the first number of game media when the operation sequence is not announced can be reduced, thereby reducing the difference in the frequency of a win that awards the first number of game media.

Gaming machine S4. The gaming machine S3 described above, characterized in that the winning probabilities of the objects belonging to the first group are set equal.

With this gaming machine, the winning probability of the determination targets belonging to the first group is equal. This configuration makes it possible to avoid differences in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of gaming media depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified in a specific gaming state.

Gaming machine S5. Any of the gaming machines S1 to S4 above is provided with a second specific gaming state (notification mode B) in which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence more frequently than in the specific gaming state, and the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence more frequently in the second specific gaming state if a determination target belonging to the first group is won than in the specific gaming state, and determines to notify the operation sequence at equal frequency in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state if a determination target belonging to the second group is won.

In this gaming machine, the notification determination means determines that if a determination target belonging to the first group is won, the operation sequence will be notified more frequently in the second specific gaming state than in the specific gaming state, and if a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the notification determination means determines that the operation sequence will be notified equally frequently in both the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in player profits due to the amount of knowledge about the gaming machine. In other words, in a configuration in which the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media differs between operating multiple stop operation means in the first operation sequence and operating multiple stop operation means in the second operation sequence, when the operation sequence is not notified, a difference will arise in the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media between a player who is aware of this fact and a player who is unaware of this fact. However, in a configuration in which the frequency of determining whether to notify the operation sequence does not change between the specific game state and the second specific game state when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of winning the specific determination target and the probability of winning the predetermined determination target when the operation sequence is not notified, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of game media.

Gaming machine S6. The gaming machine S5 described above, further comprising transition determination means (promotion lottery function S6007 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether to transition to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means has decided not to notify the operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, whether to transition to the second specific gaming state is determined based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first or second group is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible for the player to play in anticipation of transitioning to the second specific gaming state, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine S7. In the gaming machine S6, the transition determination means determines whether to transition to the second specific gaming state when a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a win that awards the first number of gaming media is achieved, a determination is made as to whether to transition to a second specific gaming state. With this configuration, the probability of transitioning to the second specific gaming state will differ between a player who knows that the frequency of a win that awards the first number of gaming media varies depending on the operation order, and a player who is unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter player losing motivation to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine S5, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of a win that awards the first number of gaming media, thereby making it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine S8. Any of the gaming machines S1 to S7 described above, further comprising a grant determination means for determining whether to grant a bonus related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state, based on the fact that a player wins a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, when a player wins a determination target belonging to the first or second group in a specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence, it determines whether or not to award a bonus related to the number of times a player can play in the specific gaming state. This configuration allows the player to play in the hope of being awarded a bonus related to the number of times a player can play in the specific gaming state, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine S9. In the gaming machine S8 described above, the award determination means determines whether to award a bonus related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state when a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a win that awards a first number of gaming media is achieved, a determination is made as to whether or not to award a bonus related to the number of plays that can be played under a specific gaming state. With this configuration, the probability of awarding the bonus will differ between a player who knows that the frequency of a win that awards a first number of gaming media varies depending on the operation order, and a player who is unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter player losing motivation to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine S8, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of a win that awards a first number of gaming media, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

Gaming machine S10. Any of the gaming machines S1 to S9 described above, further comprising: a predetermined gaming state (chance mode) in which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence less frequently than the specific gaming state; and specific transition means (a game section processing function of the main control unit 101) for transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state, wherein the specific transition means is configured such that when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence without notifying the first operation sequence, the frequency of transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, when multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence without the first operation sequence being notified, the frequency of transition from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the multiple stop operation means in the second operation sequence, while also providing a clear distinction between the increase and decrease of gaming media between the predetermined gaming state and the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine T1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
As the objects to be determined in the lottery for the winning combination, a first object to be determined (center left right bell 1, first special bell) is provided, which will result in a winning of a first number (8) of game media when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence (center left left), and a second object to be determined (left center right bell 1) is provided, which will result in a winning of a first number of game media when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence (left center right),
an operation sequence notifying means (an instruction monitor, an auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying an operation sequence that can achieve a winning result in which the first number of game media is awarded;
a notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to notify the user of the operation sequence;
The probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation sequence notification means is configured so that in a specific gaming state (notification mode A), the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the first judgment target is won is higher than the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the second judgment target is won.

This gaming machine provides two targets for determination in the winning combination lottery: a first target for determining a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence, and a second target for determining a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence. The probability of winning the first target for determination is higher than the probability of winning the second target for determination. This configuration makes it possible to differentiate the frequency of winning the first number of game media when multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence from when multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

Furthermore, in a specific gaming state, the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the first determination target is won is higher than the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the second determination target is won. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in profits between players in a specific gaming state due to their level of knowledge about the gaming machine. In other words, in a configuration in which the frequency of a winning combination that awards the first number of gaming media differs when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence and when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence, a difference will arise in the frequency of a winning combination that awards the first number of gaming media between a player who is aware of this fact and a player who is unaware of this fact when the operation sequence is not notified. However, in a specific gaming state, if the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the first determination target is won is higher than the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the second determination target is won, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of winning the first determination target and the probability of winning the second determination target when the operation sequence is not notified, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency with which a win resulting in the award of the first number of gaming media is achieved.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine T2. A gaming machine in accordance with the gaming machine T1 described above, characterized in that the winning probabilities of the first determination target and the second determination target and the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence are determined so that, when the operation sequence has not been notified under the specific gaming state, the probability of achieving a prize in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is equal when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence and when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

According to this gaming machine, when the operation sequence is not notified in a specific gaming state, the winning probability of the first and second judgment targets and the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence are set so that the probability of achieving a win in which a first number of gaming media is awarded is equal when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence and when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to avoid disparities in profits between players in a specific gaming state due to their level of knowledge about the gaming machine.

Gaming machine T3. The gaming machine T1 or T2 described above, further comprising a grant determination means for determining whether to grant a bonus related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state, based on the first determination target or the second determination target being won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means deciding not to notify the operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, whether or not to award a bonus related to the number of plays available in the specific gaming state is determined based on whether the first or second determination target is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence. With this configuration, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the specific gaming state, it is possible to have the player play in the hope of being awarded a bonus related to the number of plays available in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine T4. In the gaming machine T3 described above, the award determination means determines whether to award a bonus related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state when a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a win that awards a first number of gaming media is achieved, a determination is made as to whether or not to award a bonus related to the number of plays that can be played under a specific gaming state. With this configuration, the probability of awarding the bonus will differ between a player who knows that the frequency of a win that awards a first number of gaming media varies depending on the operation order, and a player who is unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter player losing motivation to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine T3, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of a win that awards a first number of gaming media, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

Gaming machine T5. Any of the gaming machines T1 to T4 described above, further comprising: a predetermined gaming state (chance mode) in which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence less frequently than the specific gaming state; and specific transition means (a gaming section processing function of the main control unit 101) for transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state, wherein the specific transition means is configured such that when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence without notifying the first operation sequence, the frequency of transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, when multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence without the first operation sequence being notified, the frequency of transition from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the multiple stop operation means in the second operation sequence, while also providing a clear distinction between the increase and decrease of gaming media between the predetermined gaming state and the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine T6. Any of the gaming machines T1 to T5 described above has a plurality of first determination targets, and the determination targets for which a win in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved depending on the operation sequence of the plurality of stop operation means are classified into a first group including the first determination target and the second determination target, and a second group including the first determination target but not the second determination target, and the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence with different frequencies when a win is achieved on a determination target belonging to the first group and when a win is achieved on a determination target belonging to the second group in the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, by providing multiple first determination targets, it is relatively easy to achieve a configuration in which the probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target.

Furthermore, the determination targets for which a winning combination of a first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation sequence of the multiple stop operation means are classified into a first group including the first and second determination targets, and a second group including the first determination target but excluding the second determination target. In a specific game state, the frequency of determining whether to notify the operation sequence differs between when a winning combination of a determination target belonging to the first group is selected and when a winning combination of a determination target belonging to the second group is selected. This configuration enables group-specific control when determining whether to notify the operation sequence in a specific game state. As a result, a specific game state in which the operation sequence is sometimes notified and sometimes not notified when a winning combination of a first number of game media is selected depending on the operation sequence of the multiple stop operation means can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

In addition, in a configuration with, for example, three different operation sequences that can result in a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, a third determination target (right, left, center bell 1) is provided that will result in a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a third operation sequence (right, left, center), and the winning combination is classified into a first group that includes the first determination target, the second determination target, and the third determination target, and a second group that includes the first determination target and the third determination target but does not include the second determination target, thereby achieving the above-mentioned advantageous effects. The same applies to configurations with four or more of the above-mentioned operation sequences.

Gaming machine T7. In the gaming machine T6 described above, the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence with a predetermined probability if a determination target belonging to the first group is won in the specific gaming state, and determines to notify the operation sequence without fail if a determination target belonging to the second group is won.

According to this gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, if a determination target belonging to the first group is selected, the operation sequence is determined to be announced with a predetermined probability, and if a determination target belonging to the second group is selected, the operation sequence is determined to be announced without fail. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in profits between players based on their level of knowledge of the gaming machine. In other words, in a configuration in which the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media differs when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence and when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence, when the operation sequence is not announced, a difference will arise in the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media between a player who knows this fact and a player who does not know this fact. However, in a configuration that determines that the operation sequence will always be notified when a win is achieved on a determination target belonging to the second group, it is possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the first determination target and the winning probability of the second determination target when the operation sequence is not notified, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of gaming media.

Gaming machine T8. The gaming machine T7 described above, characterized in that the winning probabilities of the objects to be determined belonging to the first group are set equal.

With this gaming machine, the winning probability of the determination targets belonging to the first group is equal. This configuration makes it possible to avoid differences in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of gaming media depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified in a specific gaming state.

Gaming machine T9. Any of the gaming machines T6 to T8 above is provided with a second specific gaming state (notification mode B) in which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence more frequently than in the specific gaming state, and the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence more frequently in the second specific gaming state if a determination target belonging to the first group is won than in the specific gaming state, and determines to notify the operation sequence at equal frequency in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state if a determination target belonging to the second group is won.

In this gaming machine, the notification determination means determines that if a determination target belonging to the first group is won, the operation sequence will be notified more frequently in the second specific gaming state than in the specific gaming state, and if a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the notification determination means determines that the operation sequence will be notified equally frequently in both the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in player profits due to the amount of knowledge about the gaming machine. In other words, in a configuration in which the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media differs between operating multiple stop operation means in the first operation sequence and operating multiple stop operation means in the second operation sequence, when the operation sequence is not notified, a difference will arise in the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media between a player who is aware of this fact and a player who is unaware of this fact. However, in a configuration in which the frequency of determining whether to notify the operation sequence does not change between the specific game state and the second specific game state when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, it is possible to reduce the difference in the winning probability between the first determination target and the second determination target when the operation sequence is not notified, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of game media.

Gaming machine T10. The gaming machine T9 described above is characterized in that it includes transition determination means (promotion lottery function S6007 of the main control unit 101) that determines whether to transition to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, whether to transition to the second specific gaming state is determined based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first or second group is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible for the player to play in anticipation of transitioning to the second specific gaming state, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine T11. In the gaming machine T10 described above, the transition determination means determines whether to transition to the second specific gaming state when a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a win that awards the first number of gaming media is achieved, a determination is made as to whether to transition to a second specific gaming state. With this configuration, the probability of transitioning to the second specific gaming state will differ between a player who knows that the frequency of a win that awards the first number of gaming media varies depending on the operation order, and a player who is unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter player losing motivation to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine T10, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of a win that awards the first number of gaming media, thereby making it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

The gaming machines R group through T group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines R group through T group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group through Q group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine U1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
The game state has a first game state (chance mode) and a second game state (notification mode) in which the operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) is higher than that of the first game state,
A grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant advantageous benefits (transition to notification mode, additional number of games);
An advantageous benefit granting means (announcement mode transition function S6307 of the main control device 101, an additional game number addition function S7010) that grants the advantageous benefit when the granting determination means determines that the advantageous benefit should be granted;
An effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a suggestion effect (a showdown effect) that suggests whether or not the advantageous benefit will be awarded;
An execution decision means for deciding whether or not to execute the suggestion performance;
a period setting means for setting a plurality of game times as a performance period during which the suggestive performance can be performed when it is determined that the suggestive performance is to be performed;
The execution decision means
A first execution determination means (a competition effect lottery function S6702 of the display control device 81) that determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect in a situation where the award determination means has not determined that the advantageous benefit will be awarded under the first gaming state;
a second execution determination means (a competition effect lottery function S6901 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect in a situation in which the award determination means has not determined that the advantageous benefit will be awarded under the second gaming state;
The period setting means
a first period setting means (a competition game number setting function S6705 of the display control device 81) for setting the performance period when the first execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion performance;
a second period setting means (a competition game number setting function S6904 of the main control device 101) for setting the performance period when the second execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second execution decision means and the second period setting means are provided in a main control means (main control device 101) that manages the overall game, and the first execution decision means and the first period setting means are provided in a secondary control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the main control means.

With this gaming machine, when a suggestive effect is executed to indicate whether or not a special bonus will be awarded, multiple play times are set as the effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. This configuration makes it possible to maintain the anticipation of receiving a special bonus over multiple play times, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the first gaming state, when the award determination means has not determined that an advantageous bonus will be awarded, the decision as to whether or not to execute a suggestive effect is made by the slave control means, and in the second gaming state, when the award determination means has not determined that an advantageous bonus will be awarded, the decision as to whether or not to execute a suggestive effect is made by the master control means. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of processing programs that need to be pre-stored in the master control means, thereby preventing an increase in storage capacity.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine U2. In the gaming machine U1 described above, the main control means manages the gaming state and is equipped with the award determination means and the advantageous bonus awarding means, and the award determination means determines whether to award an advantageous bonus in the second gaming state that will increase the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

In this gaming machine, the award determination means determines, in the second gaming state, whether to award an advantageous benefit that will increase the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state. In this configuration, if the slave control means were to determine whether to execute a suggestive effect when the award determination means has not yet determined to award an advantageous benefit in the second gaming state, the processing configuration for determining whether to execute a suggestive effect could become complicated, or restrictions could be placed on the effects that can be executed. This is because, depending on the remaining number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state, restrictions could be placed on the number of plays in the set effect period, or the suggestive effect itself could not be executed. On the other hand, if the master control means were to determine whether to execute a suggestive effect when the award determination means has not yet determined to award an advantageous benefit in the second gaming state, the above concerns could be resolved effectively.

Gaming machine U3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine U2, but configured so that when the second period setting means sets the effect period, the second gaming state does not end until the effect period ends.

This gaming machine is configured so that the second gaming state does not end until the end of the presentation period set by the second period setting means. Therefore, for example, if it is decided to execute a suggestive presentation in the final play of the second gaming state, the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state will increase by the number of plays set as the presentation period. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment even when a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that no additional bonus will be awarded.

Gaming machine U4. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a comparison means (shortage game number derivation function S6905 of main control unit 101) for comparing the number of plays set by the second period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state when the second execution decision means decides to execute the suggestive effect in the gaming machine U3; and a change means (shortage game number addition function S6906 of main control unit 101) for changing the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the second period setting means when the number of plays set by the second period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state.

In this gaming machine, when the second execution decision means decides to execute a suggestion effect, the number of plays set by the second period setting means is compared with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. If the number of plays set by the second period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state is changed so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the second period setting means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the second gaming state not to end until the effect period has ended.

Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the effects suggesting whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded. For example, it is possible to configure the system so that if the remaining number of plays available in the second game state falls below the maximum number of plays that can be set by the period setting means, the suggestive effects are not executed. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that gameplay may become monotonous after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays, despite the need for a processing configuration to check the remaining number of plays. To alleviate this concern, it is possible to configure the system so that, after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays, a different effect suggesting whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded is executed in one play. However, with this configuration, it becomes necessary to store the other effect in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity but also creates the problem of the effects that can be executed being restricted by the remaining number of plays. On the other hand, if the remaining number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state can be changed so that it becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine U5. In the gaming machine U3 or U4 described above, the change means does not change the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state when the number of games set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state, or when the number of games set by the second period setting means is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state is not changed when the number of plays set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, or when the number of plays set by the second period setting means is less than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to limit opportunities for the remaining number of plays to increase as a result of the execution of suggestive effects to situations where the remaining number of plays is low, i.e., when the end of the second gaming state is approaching. As a result, it is possible to provide new gameplay when the end of the second gaming state is approaching, thereby increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine U6. Any of the gaming machines U3 to U5 described above, characterized in that, in a game from when the second period setting means sets the presentation period until the presentation period ends, if the award determination means determines that the advantageous benefit will be awarded, the length of the presentation period does not change.

With this gaming machine, even if it is determined that a beneficial bonus will be awarded midway through the presentation period, the length of the presentation period does not change. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration while preventing the presentation period from becoming unnecessarily long.

Gaming machine U7. In the gaming machine U6 described above, if the award determination means determines that the advantageous benefit will be awarded during a game from the time the second period setting means sets the award period until the time the award period ends, the effect execution means executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the advantageous benefit will be awarded.

According to this gaming machine, the second period setting means sets a presentation period when the award determination means has not determined that an advantageous perk will be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that an advantageous perk will be awarded during the number of games played up until the end of the presentation period, a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that an advantageous perk will be awarded. This configuration makes it possible to execute suggestive presentations in accordance with the determination results of the award determination means, even when the length of the presentation period is not changed.

Gaming machine U8. In any of the gaming machines U1 to U7, the second execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a suggestive effect regardless of the number of remaining plays that can be played in the second gaming state. This configuration simplifies the processing structure related to suggestive effects while increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine U9. In any of the above gaming machines U1 to U8, the main control means manages the gaming state and is equipped with the award determination means and the advantageous bonus awarding means, and the award determination means determines, in the first gaming state, whether to award an advantageous bonus that will result in a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

In this gaming machine, the award determination means determines whether or not to award an advantageous benefit in the first gaming state, which will result in a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. In this configuration, if the award determination means does not determine that an advantageous benefit will be awarded in the first gaming state, the first gaming state will continue. Therefore, even if the slave control means is configured to determine whether or not to execute a suggestive effect, there is no possibility that the processing configuration for determining whether or not to execute a suggestive effect will become complicated, or that restrictions will be placed on the effects that can be executed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of processing programs that need to be stored in advance in the master control means, and suppresses increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine U10. In the gaming machine U9 described above, the main control means includes a waiting period setting means (transition game number change function S6207 of the main control device 101) that sets a number of game rounds as a waiting period when the award determination means determines that the advantageous award will be awarded in the first gaming state, the advantageous award awarding means transitions the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after the waiting period has elapsed when the award determination means determines that the advantageous award will be awarded in the first gaming state, and the effect execution means, when the waiting period setting means sets the waiting period, executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the advantageous award will be awarded during the waiting period.

In this gaming machine, if the award determination means determines that a favorable bonus will be awarded in the first gaming state, a waiting period of multiple game plays is set. Then, after the waiting period has elapsed, the gaming state transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. At this time, the effect execution means executes a suggestion effect that suggests that a favorable bonus will be awarded during the waiting period. This configuration makes it possible to transition the gaming state after executing a suggestion effect that suggests a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine U11. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine U10 described above, the master control means comprises an information transmission means (a battle command transmission function S6210 of the master control device 101) for transmitting information relating to the setting result of the waiting period to the slave control means, and the slave control means comprises a presentation period change means (a function S6404 of the display control device 81 for changing the number of games to be announced) for changing the length of the presentation period so that the presentation period ends when the information is received from the information transmission means in a game round from when the first period setting means sets the presentation period to when the presentation period ends, so that the presentation period ends when the waiting period ends.

With this gaming machine, the slave control means decides to execute a suggestive effect and sets a presentation period when it has not yet determined that the first gaming state should be transitioned to the second gaming state; if the master control means determines that the first gaming state should be transitioned to the second gaming state during the presentation period, the slave control means changes the length of the presentation period so that the play time at which the standby period ends coincides with the play time at which the presentation period ends. This configuration makes it possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that a favorable bonus will be awarded during the presentation period, even when the slave control means has decided to execute a suggestive effect.

The gaming machine U12. In any of the gaming machines U2 to U11, the execution decision means comprises a third execution decision means (transition lottery function S6204 of the main control unit 101) that decides whether to execute the suggestive effect in a situation in which the award determination means has decided to award the advantageous benefit in the first gaming state, and a fourth execution decision means (confrontation effect lottery function S7002 of the main control unit 101) that decides whether to execute the suggestive effect in a situation in which the award determination means has decided to award the advantageous benefit in the second gaming state, and the third execution decision means and the fourth execution decision means are provided in the main control means.

With this gaming machine, when it is decided to award a favorable bonus, the main control means decides whether to execute a suggestive effect, regardless of whether the game is in the first or second game state. This configuration makes it possible to execute a suggestive effect at the appropriate time when it is decided to award a favorable bonus.

Gaming machine V1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
The game state has a first game state (chance mode) and a second game state (notification mode) in which the operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) is higher than that of the first game state,
A grant determination means (an additional lottery function S6803 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to grant an increased benefit that increases the number of times that can be played under the second gaming state;
and an increased bonus awarding means (an additional game number adding function S7010 of the main control device 101) that awards the increased bonus when the awarding determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded.
A gaming machine characterized in that even when the award determination means determines that the increased benefit will not be awarded, the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state may increase.

In this gaming machine, in the second gaming state, a determination may be made as to whether or not to grant an increased bonus, which will increase the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state. Even if a determination is made not to grant an increased bonus, the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state may increase. This configuration makes it possible to mitigate player disappointment when a determination is made not to grant an increased bonus.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine V2. The gaming machine V1 described above is equipped with an effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a suggestive effect (challenge effect) that suggests whether or not the increased bonus will be awarded, an execution decision means (challenge effect lottery functions S6901, S7002 of the main control unit 101) that decides whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and a period setting means (challenge game number setting functions S6904, S7005 of the main control unit 101) that, when it is decided to execute the suggestive effect, sets a number of game rounds as the effect period in which the suggestive effect can be executed, and is configured so that the second game state does not end until the effect period ends.

This gaming machine may execute a suggestive effect that suggests whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded. When this suggestive effect is executed, multiple play times are set as the effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. This configuration makes it possible for the player to play while anticipating the award of an increased bonus over multiple play times. Furthermore, since the second gaming state does not end until the end of the effect period, if, for example, it is decided to execute a suggestive effect in the last play time of the second gaming state, the number of play times available in the second gaming state will increase by the number of play times set as the effect period. As a result, it is possible to mitigate the player's disappointment even if a suggestive effect that suggests no increased bonus will be awarded is executed.

Gaming machine V3. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a comparison means (main control unit 101's missing number of games derivation function S6905, S7006) for comparing the number of plays set by the period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestive effect in the gaming machine V2; and a change means (main control unit 101's missing number of games addition function S6906, S7007) for changing the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means when the number of plays set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, when the execution decision means decides to execute a suggestion effect, the number of plays set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. If the number of plays set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state is changed so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the second gaming state not to end until the effect period has ended.

Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the effects suggesting whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded. For example, it is possible to configure the system so that if the remaining number of plays available in the second game state falls below the maximum number of plays that can be set by the period setting means, the suggestive effects are not executed. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that gameplay may become monotonous after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays, despite the need for a processing configuration to check the remaining number of plays. To alleviate this concern, it is possible to configure the system so that, after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays, a different effect suggesting whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded is executed in one play. However, with this configuration, it becomes necessary to store the other effect in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity but also creates the problem of the effects that can be executed being restricted by the remaining number of plays. On the other hand, if the remaining number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state can be changed so that it becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine V4. In the gaming machine V3 described above, when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion effect in a situation where the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, the comparison means obtains the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state as the number of games that remain before the increased bonus award means awarded the increased bonus.

According to this gaming machine, when comparing the number of plays set by the period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the increased bonus awarded by the increased bonus awarding means is not taken into consideration. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the increased bonus awarded by the increased bonus awarding means being partially consumed during the presentation period.

Gaming machine V5. In the gaming machine V3 or V4 described above, the change means does not change the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state, or when the number of games set by the period setting means is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state remains unchanged when the number of plays set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, or when the number of plays set by the period setting means is less than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to limit opportunities for the remaining number of plays to increase as a result of the execution of suggestive effects to situations where the remaining number of plays is low, i.e., when the end of the second gaming state is approaching. As a result, it is possible to provide new gameplay when the end of the second gaming state is near, thereby increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine V6. In any of the above gaming machines V2 to V5, the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a suggestive effect regardless of the number of remaining plays that can be played in the second gaming state. This configuration simplifies the processing structure related to suggestive effects while increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine V7. Any of the above gaming machines V2 to V6, characterized in that it does not include a means for changing the length of the effect period between the time when the period setting means sets the effect period and the time when the effect period ends.

With this gaming machine, the length of the presentation period cannot be changed midway. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the second gaming state does not end as a result of the presentation period being extended.

Gaming machine V8. Any of the gaming machines V2 to V7 described above, characterized in that, in a game from when the period setting means sets the presentation period until the presentation period ends, if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, the length of the presentation period does not change.

With this gaming machine, even if it is determined that an additional bonus will be awarded midway through the presentation period, the length of the presentation period does not change. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration while preventing the presentation period from becoming unnecessarily long.

Gaming machine V9. In the gaming machine V7 or V8, the period setting means sets the presentation period under circumstances in which the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will not be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will be awarded during the number of games played up until the end of the presentation period, the presentation execution means executes a suggestion presentation that suggests that the increased bonus will be awarded.

In this gaming machine, the period setting means sets a presentation period when the award determination means determines that an increased bonus will not be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that an increased bonus will be awarded during the number of games played until the end of the presentation period, a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that an increased bonus will be awarded. This configuration makes it possible to execute suggestive presentations in accordance with the determination results of the award determination means, even when the length of the presentation period is not changed.

Gaming machine V10. In any of the above gaming machines V2 to V9, the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the determination result of the award determination means.

With this gaming machine, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a suggestion effect regardless of the result of the decision as to whether or not to award an increased bonus. This configuration makes it possible to create an opportunity for the number of available plays to increase in the second gaming state even when a decision is made not to award an increased bonus, thereby mitigating the player's disappointment when a decision is made not to award an increased bonus.

Gaming machine W1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
The game state has a first game state (chance mode) and a second game state (notification mode) in which the operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) is higher than that of the first game state,
A grant determination means (an additional lottery function S6803 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to grant an increased benefit that increases the number of times that can be played under the second gaming state;
An increased bonus awarding means (an additional game number adding function S7010 of the main control device 101) that awards the increased bonus when the awarding determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded;
An effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a suggestion effect (a showdown effect) that suggests whether or not the additional benefit will be given;
An execution decision means for deciding whether or not to execute the suggestion effect (a showdown effect lottery function S6901, S7002 of the main control device 101);
When it is determined that the suggestive effect is to be executed, a period setting means (a game number setting function S6904, S7005 of the main control device 101) is provided for setting a plurality of game times as an effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is not provided with a means for changing the length of the presentation period set by the period setting means.

This gaming machine may execute a suggestive effect that indicates whether or not an additional bonus will be awarded. When this suggestive effect is executed, multiple play times are set as the effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. This configuration makes it possible for players to play while anticipating the award of an additional bonus over multiple play times.

In addition, once a performance period is set, the length of that performance period will not be changed midway. This configuration simplifies the processing structure while preventing the performance period from becoming unnecessarily long.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine W2. In the gaming machine W1, the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, whether or not to execute a suggestive effect is determined regardless of the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration related to the suggestive effect while enhancing gaming interest. For example, it is possible to configure the system not to execute a suggestive effect if the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state falls below the maximum number of plays that can be set by the period setting means. However, this configuration requires processing to check the remaining number of plays, but there is a concern that gameplay may become monotonous after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays. To address this concern, it is possible to configure the system to execute a different effect that suggests whether or not an additional bonus will be awarded in one play after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays. However, this configuration not only creates the new problem of increased storage capacity due to the need to store the other effect in advance, but also creates the problem of the effects that can be executed being restricted by the remaining number of plays. On the other hand, if the system is configured to determine whether or not to execute a suggestion effect regardless of the number of remaining plays that can be played in the second gaming state, it is possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

Gaming machine W3. In the gaming machine W2, the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the determination result of the award determination means.

With this gaming machine, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a suggestion effect regardless of the result of the judgment as to whether or not to grant an increased bonus. This configuration makes it possible to execute a suggestion effect even when a judgment is made not to grant an increased bonus in a situation where there are few plays remaining, i.e., when the end of the second gaming state is approaching, and prevents gameplay from becoming monotonous when the end of the second gaming state is approaching.

Gaming machine W4. Any of the gaming machines W1 to W3 described above, characterized in that, in a game from when the period setting means sets the presentation period until the presentation period ends, if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, the length of the presentation period does not change.

With this gaming machine, even if it is determined that an additional bonus will be awarded midway through the presentation period, the length of the presentation period does not change. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration while preventing the presentation period from becoming unnecessarily long.

Gaming machine W5. In any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the period setting means sets the presentation period under circumstances in which the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will not be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will be awarded during the number of games played up until the end of the presentation period, the presentation execution means executes a suggestion presentation that suggests that the increased bonus will be awarded.

In this gaming machine, the period setting means sets a presentation period when the award determination means determines that an increased bonus will not be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that an increased bonus will be awarded during the number of games played until the end of the presentation period, a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that an increased bonus will be awarded. This configuration makes it possible to execute suggestive presentations in accordance with the determination results of the award determination means, even when the length of the presentation period is not changed.

Gaming machine W6. Any of the gaming machines W1 to W5 described above, characterized in that the second gaming state does not end until the performance period ends.

This gaming machine is configured so that the second gaming state does not end until the presentation period ends. Therefore, if it is decided to execute a suggestive presentation during the final play of the second gaming state, for example, the number of plays available in the second gaming state will increase by the number of plays set as the presentation period. As a result, even if a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that no additional bonus will be awarded, it is possible to mitigate the player's disappointment.

Gaming machine W7. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a comparison means (main control unit 101's missing number of games derivation function S6905, S7006) for comparing the number of plays set by the period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestive effect in the gaming machine W6; and a change means (main control unit 101's missing number of games addition function S6906, S7007) for changing the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means when the number of plays set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, when the execution decision means decides to execute a suggestion effect, the number of plays set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. If the number of plays set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state is changed so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the second gaming state not to end until the effect period has ended.

Gaming machine W8. In the gaming machine W7 described above, when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion effect in a situation where the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, the comparison means obtains the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state as the number of games that can be played before the increased bonus award means awarded the increased bonus.

According to this gaming machine, when comparing the number of plays set by the period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the increased bonus awarded by the increased bonus awarding means is not taken into consideration. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the increased bonus awarded by the increased bonus awarding means being partially consumed during the presentation period.

Gaming machine W9. In the gaming machine W7 or W8 described above, the change means does not change the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state, or when the number of games set by the period setting means is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state remains unchanged when the number of plays set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, or when the number of plays set by the period setting means is less than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to limit opportunities for the remaining number of plays to increase as a result of the execution of suggestive effects to situations where the remaining number of plays is low, i.e., when the end of the second gaming state is approaching. As a result, it is possible to provide new gameplay when the end of the second gaming state is near, thereby increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine W10. Any of the above gaming machines W1 to W9, characterized in that the number of playable games in the second gaming state may increase even if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will not be awarded.

With this gaming machine, even if a determination is made not to award an increased bonus, the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state may increase. This configuration makes it possible to mitigate the player's disappointment when a determination is made not to award an increased bonus.

The gaming machines U group to W group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines U group to W group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group to T group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine X1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
As game states, there are at least a first game state (chance mode) and a second game state (notification mode A) in which the operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) is higher than that of the first game state,
The bonus awarding means is configured to award gaming media equal to or greater than the number of bets required for one game when the specific winning is achieved,
The second game state is configured such that, when the lottery result of the role is a specific result (push order bell win), the instruction function is activated or the instruction function is not activated;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the first game in which the lottery result for the role in the second game state is the specific result, the frequency with which the instruction function is activated is higher than the frequency with which the instruction function is not activated.

With this gaming machine, the instruction function is activated more frequently than the instruction function is not activated during the first play in which the lottery result for the winning combination in the second gaming state is a specific result. This configuration reduces the chances of a player running out of gaming media in the second gaming state, even if the instruction function is not activated when the lottery result for the winning combination in the second gaming state is a specific result, thereby increasing the player's interest in gaming. If a player runs out of gaming media in the second gaming state, this can significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

Gaming machine X2. The gaming machine X1 described above, characterized in that the instruction function is activated more frequently in the first game in which the lottery result for the role in the second gaming state results in the specific result than in the second game in which the lottery result for the role in the second gaming state results in the specific result.

With this gaming machine, the instruction function is activated more frequently in the first play in which the lottery result for the winning combination in the second gaming state is a specific result than in the second play in which the lottery result for the winning combination is a specific result in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of plays required for the instruction function to be first activated after transitioning to the second gaming state.

Gaming machine X3. The gaming machine X1 or X2 described above, further comprising transition means (notification mode A transition function S80109 of the main control device 101) for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, wherein the first gaming state is configured such that the expected number of gaming media awarded per game is smaller than the number of gaming media required for one game, and the second gaming state is configured such that the expected number of gaming media awarded per game is greater than the number of gaming media required for one game.

With this gaming machine, in the first gaming state, the gaming media owned by the player is expected to decrease with each play, and in the second gaming state, the gaming media owned by the player is expected to increase with each play. In this configuration, if the instruction function is configured to not activate when the lottery result for a specific role in the second gaming state, there is a possibility that the gaming media owned by the player will run out in the second gaming state. If the gaming media owned by the player runs out in the second gaming state, there is a concern that the player's motivation to play will significantly decrease. However, if the instruction function is configured to activate more frequently than not in the first play in which the lottery result for a specific role in the second gaming state is achieved, the above concern can be effectively alleviated.

Gaming machine X4. Any of the gaming machines X1 to X3 described above, comprising: first determination means (navigation lottery function S80402 of the main control unit 101) for conducting a predetermined lottery and determining whether to activate the instruction function when the lottery result for the role in the second gaming state results in the specific result; second determination means (navigation counter confirmation function S80404 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether a specific condition (the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7) has been met when the lottery result for the role in the second gaming state results in the specific result; and specific notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying the user of the operation method for achieving the specific win when the first determination means determines that the instruction function should be activated and when the second determination means determines that the specific condition has been met.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for a role in the second gaming state is a specific result, the instruction function may be activated based on the result of a predetermined lottery, or based on the fulfillment of a specific condition. This configuration makes it possible to randomize the intervals at which the instruction function is activated by the first determination means, while preventing the intervals at which the instruction function is activated by the second determination means from becoming unnecessarily long. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine X5. The gaming machine X4 described above, characterized in that in the first game in which the lottery result for the role in the second gaming state is the specific result, the specific condition is met more frequently than the specific condition is not met.

With this gaming machine, the frequency with which the specific condition is met is higher than the frequency with which the specific condition is not met in the first play in the second gaming state in which the lottery result for the winning combination is a specific result. This configuration makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the instruction function is activated compared to the frequency with which the instruction function is not activated in the first play in the second gaming state in which the lottery result for the winning combination is a specific result.

Gaming machine X6. The gaming machine X4 or X5 described above further comprises a storage means (navigation counter) for storing predetermined information, and an update means (navigation counter update function S80201 of the main control device 101) for updating the predetermined information stored in the storage means, wherein the second determination means is configured to determine that the specific condition has been met when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information (a value of 8 or more).

With this gaming machine, when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information, a specific condition is met and the instruction function is activated. This configuration makes it possible to determine the interval between activations of the instruction function based on the update mode of the update means, and a relatively simple processing configuration can prevent the interval between activations of the instruction function from becoming unnecessarily wide.

Gaming machine X7. The gaming machine described above in connection with the gaming machine X6, further comprising transition means (notification mode A transition function S80109 of the main control device 101) for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, wherein the update means updates the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a predetermined game (three-coin game) is played in the first gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined game is played in the first gaming state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. This configuration makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information in the first gaming session in the second gaming state in which the lottery result for a specific role is achieved. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the frequency with which the instruction function is activated compared to the frequency with which the instruction function is not activated in the first gaming session in the second gaming state in which the lottery result for a specific role is achieved.

Gaming machine X8. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine X7, characterized in that the predetermined game is a game played using gaming media with the maximum number of bets (3) that can be used in a single game.

With this gaming machine, when a game is played using gaming media with the maximum number of bets available for one game, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. This configuration makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information in the first game in which the lottery result for a specific role in the second game state is a specific result. For example, it is possible to configure the predetermined information stored in the storage means to be updated when the lottery result for a specific role in the first game state is a specific result. However, with this configuration, for example, a transition from the first game state to the second game state may occur before the lottery result for a specific role is achieved, which would reduce the frequency with which the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information in the first game in which the lottery result for a specific role in the second game state is a specific result.

Gaming machine X9. Any of the gaming machines X6 to X8 described above, wherein the update means updates the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a second predetermined game (two-coin game, three-coin game) is played in the second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined game is played in the second game state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the intervals at which the instruction function is activated by the second determination means from becoming unnecessarily long, even if the first determination means repeatedly determines not to activate the instruction function.

Gaming machine X10. The gaming machine X9 described above, characterized in that the second predetermined game is a single game.

With this gaming machine, the specified information stored in the storage means is updated each time a game is played. With this configuration, for example, if the interval between activations of the instruction function becomes longer because the result of the lottery for a winning combination does not result in a specific outcome, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function in the next game in which the result of the lottery for a winning combination results in a specific outcome, regardless of the judgment result of the first judgment means. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the instruction function may not be activated if the result of the lottery for a winning combination results in a specific outcome in the second gaming state, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player running out of gaming media in the second gaming state.

Gaming machine X11. Any of the gaming machines X6 to X10 described above, characterized in that it is equipped with a change means (navigation counter reset function S80205 of the main control unit 101) that changes the specified information stored in the storage means to initial information when the instruction function is activated.

With this gaming machine, when the instruction function is activated, the specified information stored in the storage means is changed to initial information. This configuration prevents the storage capacity of the storage means from increasing, while using a relatively simple processing configuration to prevent the activation interval of the instruction function from becoming unnecessarily long.

Gaming machine Y1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
As game states, there are at least a first game state (chance mode) and a second game state (notification mode A) in which the operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) is higher than that of the first game state,
The bonus awarding means is configured to award gaming media equal to or greater than the number of bets required for one game when the specific winning is achieved,
The second game state is configured such that, when the lottery result of the role is a specific result (push order bell win), the instruction function is activated or the instruction function is not activated;
A transition means (announcement mode A transition function S80109 of the main control device 101) for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state;
a storage means (navigation counter) for storing predetermined information;
an updating means for updating the predetermined information stored in the storage means (navigation counter updating function S80201 of the main control device 101);
When the result of the lottery for the role under the second gaming state is the specific result, a specific determination means (a navigation counter confirmation function S80404 of the main control device 101) determines whether a specific condition (the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7) is met;
a specific notification means (an instruction monitor, an auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying an operation method for realizing the specific winning when the specific determination means determines that the specific condition is realized;
The specific determination means determines that the specific condition is met when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information (a value of 8 or more);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the update means updates the predetermined information stored in the memory means when a predetermined game (three-coin game) is played at least in the first game state.

According to this gaming machine, when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information, a specific condition is met and the instruction function is activated. The predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated at least when a predetermined game is played in the first gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information in the first gaming session in the second gaming state in which the lottery result for a role becomes a specific result. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the instruction function is activated compared to the frequency with which the instruction function is not activated in the first gaming session in the second gaming state in which the lottery result for a role becomes a specific result.

As a result of the above, even if the instruction function is configured not to operate if the lottery result for a specific role in the second gaming state, it is possible to reduce the chances that the player will run out of gaming media in the second gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in gaming. This is because if the player runs out of gaming media in the second gaming state, it will lead to a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Gaming machine Y2. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine Y1, characterized in that the predetermined game is a game played using gaming media with the maximum number of bets (3) that can be used in a single game.

With this gaming machine, when a game is played using gaming media with the maximum number of bets available for one game, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. This configuration makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information in the first game in which the lottery result for a specific role in the second game state is a specific result. For example, it is possible to configure the predetermined information stored in the storage means to be updated when the lottery result for a specific role in the first game state is a specific result. However, with this configuration, for example, a transition from the first game state to the second game state may occur before the lottery result for a specific role is achieved, which would reduce the frequency with which the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information in the first game in which the lottery result for a specific role in the second game state is a specific result.

Gaming machine Y3. The gaming machine Y1 or Y2 described above is equipped with a predetermined determination means (navigation lottery function S80402 of the main control unit 101) that, when the lottery result for the role in the second gaming state becomes the specific result, conducts a predetermined lottery to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function, and the specific notification means, when the predetermined determination means determines that the instruction function should be activated, notifies the user of the operation method for achieving the specific win.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for a role in the second gaming state is a specific result, the instruction function may be activated based on the result of a predetermined lottery, or based on the fulfillment of a specific condition. This configuration makes it possible to randomize the intervals at which the instruction function is activated by the predetermined determination means, while preventing the intervals at which the instruction function is activated by the specific determination means from becoming unnecessarily long. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine Y4. In the gaming machine Y3 described above, the update means updates the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a second predetermined game (two-coin game, three-coin game) is played in the second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined game is played in the second game state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the specific determination means from activating the instruction function at intervals that are longer than necessary, even if the predetermined determination means repeatedly determines not to activate the instruction function.

Gaming machine Y5. The gaming machine Y4 described above, wherein the second predetermined game is a single game.

With this gaming machine, the specified information stored in the storage means is updated each time a game is played. With this configuration, for example, if the interval between activations of the instruction function becomes longer because the result of the lottery for a winning combination does not result in a specific outcome, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function in the next game in which the result of the lottery for a winning combination results in a specific outcome, regardless of the judgment result of the specified judgment means. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the instruction function may not be activated if the result of the lottery for a winning combination results in a specific outcome in the second gaming state, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player running out of gaming media in the second gaming state.

Gaming machine Y6. Any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y5 described above, characterized in that it is equipped with a change means (navigation counter reset function S80205 of the main control unit 101) that changes the specified information stored in the storage means to initial information when the instruction function is activated.

With this gaming machine, when the instruction function is activated, the specified information stored in the storage means is changed to initial information. This configuration prevents the storage capacity of the storage means from increasing, while using a relatively simple processing configuration to prevent the activation interval of the instruction function from becoming unnecessarily long.

Gaming machine Y7. Any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y6 described above, characterized in that the instruction function is activated more frequently in the first game in which the lottery result for the role in the second gaming state results in the specific result than in the second game in which the lottery result for the role in the second gaming state results in the specific result.

With this gaming machine, the instruction function is activated more frequently in the first play in which the lottery result for the winning combination in the second gaming state is a specific result than in the second play in which the lottery result for the winning combination is a specific result in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of plays required for the instruction function to be first activated after transitioning to the second gaming state.

Gaming machine Y8. Any of the above gaming machines Y1 to Y7, characterized in that the first gaming state is configured such that the expected number of gaming media awarded per play is smaller than the number of gaming media required for one play, and the second gaming state is configured such that the expected number of gaming media awarded per play is greater than the number of gaming media required for one play.

With this gaming machine, in the first gaming state, the gaming media owned by the player is expected to decrease with each play, and in the second gaming state, the gaming media owned by the player is expected to increase with each play. In this configuration, if the instruction function is configured to not activate when the lottery result for a specific role in the second gaming state, there is a possibility that the gaming media owned by the player will run out in the second gaming state. If the gaming media owned by the player runs out in the second gaming state, there is a concern that the player's motivation to play will significantly decrease. However, if the instruction function is configured to activate more frequently than not in the first play in which the lottery result for a specific role in the second gaming state is achieved, the above concern can be effectively alleviated.

Gaming machine Y9. Any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y8 described above, characterized in that the gaming state is a third gaming state (alert mode B) in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the second gaming state when the lottery result for the role results in the specific result, and the gaming machine is equipped with transition determination means (promotion lottery function S80305 of the main control device 101) that determines whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result, the second gaming state can be transitioned to a third gaming state in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the second gaming state. This configuration allows the player to play in the second gaming state while anticipating a transition to the third gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machines X group to Y group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines X group to Y group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group to W group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 9A1. A specific determination means (main control device 101) for determining whether a specific condition (a rare combination winning) has been established;
When the specific condition is met, a specific sound output control means (VDP253) controls the output of a specific sound (rare winning sound) from a specific channel (CH2, CH3);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a volume reduction control means (VDP253) that, when the specific condition is met while a predetermined sound (normal background music, etc.) is being output from a predetermined channel (CH4, CH5) at a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB), controls the volume of the predetermined sound to be reduced from the first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB).

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if a specific condition is met while a specific sound is being output from a specific channel at a first specific volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first specific volume to a second specific volume. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will miss the specific sound that is output when a specific condition is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 9A2. In the gaming machine 9A1 described above, the volume reduction control means controls the specific sound output control means to reduce the volume to a level lower than the volume at which the specific sound is output.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the predetermined sound is output at a volume lower than the volume of the specific sound. This configuration makes it possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, reducing the chances that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when a specific condition is met.

Gaming machine 9A3. In the gaming machine 9A1 or 9A2 described above, the specific sound output control means controls the specific sound to be output from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume. This configuration makes it possible to switch from the predetermined sound to a specific sound when a specific condition is met, instead of the sound being output at the first predetermined volume. As a result, it becomes possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Gaming machine 9A4. Any of the gaming machines 9A1 to 9A3 described above, comprising: a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs); a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) operated to individually stop the cyclical display of the pictures; a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) for drawing a winning combination; and a bonus award means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control unit 101) for awarding a bonus to a player when a winning combination selected in the combination lottery is achieved; and the specific determination means determines that the specific condition has been met when the result of the combination lottery is a winning combination of a specific combination (rare combination) and a specific win is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a specific win is achieved, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if the specific sound is being output from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume. Whether or not a specific win is achieved depends on the player's operation of multiple stop operation means, so with this configuration, the output of the specific sound can increase the sense of accomplishment of achieving a specific win and the anticipation of receiving a bonus based on the specific win. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9A5. Any of the gaming machines 9A1 to 9A4 described above, characterized in that it is equipped with fade-in control means (VDP253) that controls the volume of the predetermined sound to fade in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound has ended.

With this gaming machine, when the output of a specific sound ends, the volume of the predetermined sound is controlled to fade in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. This configuration allows the player to immerse themselves in the afterglow of the specific sound, compared to a configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming Machine 9A6. In the gaming machine 9A5 described above, the fade-in control means changes the time required for the volume of the specified sound to reach the first specified volume when the output of the first specific sound has ended and when the output of the second specific sound has ended.

With this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs between when the output of the first specific sound has finished and when the output of the second specific sound has finished. This configuration allows the player to enjoy the afterglow for different lengths of time when the first specific sound has been output and when the second specific sound has been output, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9A7. The gaming machine 9A6 described above is equipped with a special benefit granting means (main control device 101) that grants a special benefit (transition to notification mode, additional number of games played), and is configured so that the expected probability of granting the special benefit differs when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output.

With this gaming machine, the expectation of receiving a specific bonus differs depending on whether the first specific sound is output or the second specific sound is output. In this configuration, for example, if a player does not notice that a specific sound has been output or is unable to determine which specific sound has been output, this could lead to a loss of anticipation for receiving the specific bonus, raising concerns that this could decrease interest in the game. However, a configuration in which the volume of a specific sound is reduced from a first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume when a specific sound is output from a specific channel, and the volume of the specific sound fades in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound has ended, can effectively alleviate the above concerns and increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9A8. The gaming machine described above in relation to 9A7, characterized in that when the first specific sound is output, the expectation of receiving the specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and when the output of the first specific sound has ended, it takes longer for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume than when the output of the second specific sound has ended.

With this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the expectation of receiving a specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output. Furthermore, when the output of the first specific sound has ended, it takes longer for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume than when the output of the second specific sound has ended. This configuration makes it possible to correlate the expectation of receiving a specific benefit with the time it takes for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9A9. Any of the gaming machines 9A5 to 9A8 described above, characterized in that it comprises a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that is operated to start a game round, and a volume return control means (VDP253) that, when the start operation means is operated, returns the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume.

With this gaming machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it becomes possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in that next game round.

Gaming machine 9A10. Any of the above gaming machines 9A1 to 9A9, characterized in that it has multiple volume information storage areas (layers 0 to 6) that store volume information related to the volume output from the specified channel.

This gaming machine is provided with multiple volume information storage areas that store volume information related to the volume output from a specified channel. With this configuration, for example, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from a specified channel, it is possible to store volume information related to the volume before the change and volume information related to the volume after the change in separate volume information storage areas. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a specified channel and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9A11. The gaming machine 9A10 described above is characterized by comprising a volume information change means (a volume value setting processing function of the VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in a first volume information storage area (fourth layer) of the volume information storage area when a first change condition (mute instruction) is met, and changes the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area that is different from the first volume information storage area when a second change condition (rare winning sound output instruction) that is different from the first change condition is met.

According to this gaming machine, if a first change condition is met, the volume information stored in a first volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed; if a second change condition different from the first change condition is met, the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether the first change condition or the second change condition is met through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a specified channel and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9A12. The gaming machine 9A11 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a comparison and determination means (volume value comparison function of VDP253) that compares and determines the volume information stored in the multiple volume information storage areas, and is configured to output sound from the specified channel using the volume information that the comparison and determination means compares and determines as the minimum value.

This gaming machine compares volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas, and outputs sound from a specified channel using the volume information that is compared to the minimum value. By configuring the machine to compare volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas and output sound from a specified channel, it is possible to eliminate the need to check the volume being output from a specified channel, simplifying the processing configuration. Furthermore, by configuring the machine to output sound from a specified channel using volume information that is compared to the minimum value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in situations where, for example, the volume of a specified channel needs to be kept muted.

Gaming machine 9A13. Any of the gaming machines 9A10 to 9A12 described above is equipped with specific change means (volume value change function of VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area to specific volume information (64) when the specific condition is met, and is configured so that when sound is output from the specified channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the specified channel becomes the second specified volume.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. Then, when sound is output from a specific channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the specific channel becomes the second specific volume. This configuration makes it possible to achieve control to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first specific volume to the second specific volume with a relatively simple processing configuration when a specific condition is met while the specific sound is being output from the specific channel at the first specific volume.

Gaming machine 9A14. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 9A13, characterized in that when the specific change means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, sound may be output from the specified channel using volume information different from the specific volume information.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a specific channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. This configuration ensures that the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information when a specific condition is met, while also making it possible to control the volume of a specific channel, such as lowering it from a first specific volume to a second specific volume, or not lowering the volume of the specific channel.

Gaming machine 9B1. A specific determination means (main control device 101) for determining whether a specific condition (a rare combination winning) has been established;
When the specific condition is met, a specific sound output control means (VDP253) controls the output of a specific sound (a rare winning sound) from a specific channel (CH2, CH3);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a fade-in control means (VDP253) that controls the volume of a predetermined sound (normal background music, etc.) to fade in from the second predetermined volume to a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB) when the output of the specific sound ends while the predetermined sound (normal background music, etc.) is being output from a predetermined channel (CH4, CH5) at a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB).

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. Then, when the output of the specific sound ends while the specific sound is being output from a specific channel at a second specific volume, control is performed to fade in the volume of the specific sound from the second specific volume to the first specific volume. This configuration allows the player to immerse themselves in the lingering echoes of the specific sound, compared to a configuration in which the volume of the specific sound is changed from the second specific volume to the first specific volume when the output of the specific sound ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9B2. In the gaming machine 9B1 described above, the fade-in control means changes the time required for the volume of the specified sound to reach the first specified volume when the output of the first specific sound has ended and when the output of the second specific sound has ended.

With this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs between when the output of the first specific sound has finished and when the output of the second specific sound has finished. This configuration allows the player to enjoy the afterglow for different lengths of time when the first specific sound has been output and when the second specific sound has been output, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9B3. The gaming machine 9B2 described above is equipped with a special benefit granting means (main control device 101) that grants a special benefit (transition to notification mode, additional number of games played), and is configured so that the expected probability of granting the special benefit differs when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output.

With this gaming machine, the expectation of receiving a specific bonus differs depending on whether the first specific sound is output or the second specific sound is output. In this configuration, for example, if a player does not notice that a specific sound has been output or is unable to determine which specific sound has been output, this could lead to a loss of anticipation for receiving the specific bonus, which could result in a decrease in interest in the game. However, a configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound fades in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound has ended can effectively alleviate the above concerns and increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9B4. The gaming machine 9B3 described above is configured such that when the first specific sound is output, the likelihood of receiving the specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and when the output of the first specific sound has ended, it takes longer for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume than when the output of the second specific sound has ended.

With this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the expectation of receiving a specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output. Furthermore, when the output of the first specific sound has ended, it takes longer for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume than when the output of the second specific sound has ended. This configuration makes it possible to correlate the expectation of receiving a specific benefit with the time it takes for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9B5. Any of the gaming machines 9B1 to 9B4 described above, characterized in that it comprises a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that is operated to start a game round, and a volume return control means (VDP253) that, when the start operation means is operated, returns the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume.

With this gaming machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it becomes possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in that next game round.

Gaming machine 9B6. Any of the above gaming machines 9B1 to 9B5, characterized in that it is equipped with volume reduction control means (VDP253) that, when the specific condition is met while the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, reduces the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume.

With this gaming machine, if a specific condition is met while a specific sound is being output from a specific channel at a first specific volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first specific volume to a second specific volume. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will miss the specific sound that is output when a specific condition is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 9B7. In the gaming machine 9B6 described above, the volume reduction control means controls the specific sound output control means to reduce the volume to a level lower than the volume at which the specific sound is output.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the predetermined sound is output at a volume lower than the volume of the specific sound. This configuration makes it possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, reducing the chances that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when a specific condition is met.

Gaming machine 9B8. In the gaming machine 9B6 or 9B7 described above, the specific sound output control means controls the specific sound to be output from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume. This configuration makes it possible to switch from the predetermined sound to a specific sound when a specific condition is met, instead of the sound being output at the first predetermined volume. As a result, it becomes possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Gaming machine 9B9. Any of gaming machines 9B6 to 9B8 described above, comprising: a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs); a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) operated to individually stop the cyclical display of the pictures; lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) for drawing a winning combination; and bonus granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101, etc.) for granting a bonus to a player when a winning combination selected in the combination lottery is achieved; and the specific determination means determines that the specific condition has been met when the result of the combination lottery is a winning combination of a specific combination (rare combination) and a specific combination is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a specific win is achieved, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if the specific sound is being output from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume. Whether or not a specific win is achieved depends on the player's operation of multiple stop operation means, so with this configuration, the output of the specific sound can increase the sense of accomplishment of achieving a specific win and the anticipation of receiving a bonus based on the specific win. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9B10. Any of the above gaming machines 9B1 to 9B9, characterized in that it has multiple volume information storage areas (layers 0 to 6) that store volume information related to the volume output from the specified channel.

This gaming machine is provided with multiple volume information storage areas that store volume information related to the volume output from a specified channel. With this configuration, for example, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from a specified channel, it is possible to store volume information related to the volume before the change and volume information related to the volume after the change in separate volume information storage areas. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a specified channel and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9B11. The gaming machine 9B10 described above is characterized by comprising a volume information change means (a volume value setting processing function of the VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in a first volume information storage area (fourth layer) of the volume information storage area when a first change condition (mute instruction) is met, and changes the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area that is different from the first volume information storage area when a second change condition (rare winning sound output instruction) that is different from the first change condition is met.

According to this gaming machine, if a first change condition is met, the volume information stored in a first volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed; if a second change condition different from the first change condition is met, the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether the first change condition or the second change condition is met through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a specified channel and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9B12. The gaming machine 9B11 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a comparison and determination means (a volume value comparison function of VDP253) that compares and determines the volume information stored in the multiple volume information storage areas, and is configured to output sound from the specified channel using the volume information that the comparison and determination means compares and determines as the minimum value.

This gaming machine compares volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas, and outputs sound from a specified channel using the volume information that is compared to the minimum value. By configuring the machine to compare volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas and output sound from a specified channel, it is possible to eliminate the need to check the volume being output from a specified channel, simplifying the processing configuration. Furthermore, by configuring the machine to output sound from a specified channel using volume information that is compared to the minimum value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in situations where, for example, the volume of a specified channel needs to be kept muted.

Gaming machine 9B13. Any of the gaming machines 9B10 to 9B12 described above is equipped with specific change means (volume value change function of VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area to specific volume information (64) when the specific condition is met, and is configured so that when sound is output from the specified channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the specified channel becomes the second specified volume.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. Then, when sound is output from a specific channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the specific channel becomes the second specific volume. This configuration makes it possible to achieve control to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first specific volume to the second specific volume with a relatively simple processing configuration when a specific condition is met while the specific sound is being output from the specific channel at the first specific volume.

Gaming machine 9B14. The gaming machine 9B13 described above is characterized in that, when the specific change means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, sound may be output from the specified channel using volume information different from the specific volume information.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a specific channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. This configuration ensures that the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information when a specific condition is met, while also making it possible to control the volume of a specific channel, such as lowering it from a first specific volume to a second specific volume, or not lowering the volume of the specific channel.

Gaming machine 9C1. A predetermined sound output control means (VDP253) that controls the output of a predetermined sound (normal BGM, etc.) from a predetermined channel (CH4, CH5);
a volume information storage area (0th layer to 6th layer) for storing volume information relating to the volume to be output from the predetermined channel;
A gaming machine characterized in that it has multiple volume information storage areas.

This gaming machine is provided with multiple volume information storage areas that store volume information related to the volume output from a specified channel. With this configuration, for example, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from a specified channel, it is possible to store volume information related to the volume before the change and volume information related to the volume after the change in separate volume information storage areas. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a specified channel and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9C2. The gaming machine 9C1 described above is characterized by comprising a volume information change means (a volume value setting processing function of the VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in a first volume information storage area (fourth layer) of the volume information storage area when a first change condition (mute instruction) is met, and changes the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area that is different from the first volume information storage area when a second change condition (rare winning sound output instruction) different from the first change condition is met.

According to this gaming machine, if a first change condition is met, the volume information stored in a first volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed; if a second change condition different from the first change condition is met, the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether the first change condition or the second change condition is met through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a specified channel and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9C3. The gaming machine 9C2 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a comparison and determination means (a volume value comparison function of VDP253) that compares and determines the volume information stored in the multiple volume information storage areas, and is configured to output sound from the specified channel using the volume information that the comparison and determination means compares and determines as the minimum value.

This gaming machine compares volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas, and outputs sound from a specified channel using the volume information that is compared to the minimum value. By configuring the machine to compare volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas and output sound from a specified channel, it is possible to eliminate the need to check the volume being output from a specified channel, simplifying the processing configuration. Furthermore, by configuring the machine to output sound from a specified channel using volume information that is compared to the minimum value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in situations where, for example, the volume of a specified channel needs to be kept muted.

Gaming machine 9C4. Any of the above gaming machines 9C1 to 9C3, characterized in that it comprises: specific determination means (main control device 101) that determines whether a specific condition (a rare winning combination) has been met; specific sound output control means (VDP253) that controls the output of a specific sound (a rare winning combination sound) from a specific channel (CH2, CH3) when the specific condition is met; and volume reduction control means (VDP253) that controls the volume of the specific sound to be reduced from the first specific volume to a second specific volume (-6.0 dB) when the specific condition is met while the specific sound is being output from the specific channel at a first specific volume (0.0 dB).

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if a specific condition is met while a specific sound is being output from a specific channel at a first specific volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first specific volume to a second specific volume. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will miss the specific sound that is output when a specific condition is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 9C5. The gaming machine 9C4 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with specific change means (volume value change function of VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area to specific volume information (64) when the specific condition is met, and is configured so that when sound is output from the specified channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the specified channel becomes the second specified volume.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. Then, when sound is output from a specific channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the specific channel becomes the second specific volume. This configuration makes it possible to achieve control to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first specific volume to the second specific volume with a relatively simple processing configuration when a specific condition is met while the specific sound is being output from the specific channel at the first specific volume.

Gaming machine 9C6. The gaming machine 9C5 described above is characterized in that, when the specific change means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, sound may be output from the specified channel using volume information different from the specific volume information.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a specific channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. This configuration ensures that the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information when a specific condition is met, while also making it possible to control the volume of a specific channel, such as lowering it from a first specific volume to a second specific volume, or not lowering the volume of the specific channel.

Gaming machine 9C7. Any of gaming machines 9C4 to 9C6 above, characterized in that the volume reduction control means controls the specific sound output control means to reduce the volume to a level lower than the volume at which the specific sound is output.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the predetermined sound is output at a volume lower than the volume of the specific sound. This configuration makes it possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, reducing the chances that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when a specific condition is met.

Gaming machine 9C8. In any of gaming machines 9C4 to 9C7 above, the specific sound output control means controls the specific sound to be output from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume. This configuration makes it possible to switch from the predetermined sound to a specific sound when a specific condition is met, instead of the sound being output at the first predetermined volume. As a result, it becomes possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Gaming machine 9C9. Any of gaming machines 9C4 to 9C8 above, comprising: a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols (designs); a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) for individually stopping the cyclical display of the symbols; lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) for drawing a winning combination; and bonus granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101, etc.) for granting a bonus to a player when a winning combination selected in the combination lottery is achieved; and the specific determination means determines that the specific condition has been met when the result of the combination lottery is a winning combination of a specific combination (rare combination) and a specific combination is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a specific win is achieved, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if the specific sound is being output from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume, control is performed to lower the volume of the specific sound from the first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume. Whether or not a specific win is achieved depends on the player's operation of multiple stop operation means, so with this configuration, the output of the specific sound can increase the sense of accomplishment of achieving a specific win and the anticipation of receiving a bonus based on the specific win. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9C10. Any of the gaming machines 9C4 to 9C9 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with fade-in control means (VDP253) that controls the volume of the predetermined sound to fade in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound has ended.

With this gaming machine, when the output of a specific sound ends, the volume of the predetermined sound is controlled to fade in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. This configuration allows the player to immerse themselves in the afterglow of the specific sound, compared to a configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9C11. In the gaming machine 9C10 described above, the fade-in control means changes the time required for the volume of the specified sound to reach the first specified volume when the output of the first specific sound has ended and when the output of the second specific sound has ended.

With this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs between when the output of the first specific sound has finished and when the output of the second specific sound has finished. This configuration allows the player to enjoy the afterglow for different lengths of time when the first specific sound has been output and when the second specific sound has been output, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9C12. The gaming machine 9C11 described above is equipped with a special benefit granting means (main control device 101) that grants a special benefit (transition to notification mode, additional number of games played), and is configured so that the expected probability of granting the special benefit differs when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output.

With this gaming machine, the expectation of receiving a specific bonus differs depending on whether the first specific sound is output or the second specific sound is output. In this configuration, for example, if a player does not notice that a specific sound has been output or is unable to determine which specific sound has been output, this could lead to a loss of anticipation for receiving the specific bonus, raising concerns that this could decrease interest in the game. However, a configuration in which the volume of a specific sound is reduced from a first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume when a specific sound is output from a specific channel, and the volume of the specific sound fades in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound has ended, can effectively alleviate the above concerns and increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9C13. The gaming machine 9C12 described above is configured such that when the first specific sound is output, the likelihood of receiving the specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and when the output of the first specific sound has ended, it takes longer for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume than when the output of the second specific sound has ended.

With this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the expectation of receiving a specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output. Furthermore, when the output of the first specific sound has ended, it takes longer for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume than when the output of the second specific sound has ended. This configuration makes it possible to correlate the expectation of receiving a specific benefit with the time it takes for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9C14. Any of the gaming machines 9C10 to 9C13 described above, characterized in that it comprises a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that is operated to start a game round, and a volume return control means (VDP253) that, when the start operation means is operated, returns the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume.

With this gaming machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it becomes possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in that next game round.

Gaming machine 9D1. A regulation determination means (main control device 101) that determines whether a regulation condition (execution of a start operation) is met;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a fade-in control means (VDP253) that controls the volume of a predetermined sound (normal background music, etc.) to fade in from the second predetermined volume to a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB) when the specified condition is met while a predetermined sound (normal background music, etc.) is being output from a predetermined channel (CH4, CH5) at a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB).

With this gaming machine, if a specified condition is met while a specified sound is being output from a specified channel at a second specified volume, control is performed to fade in the volume of the specified sound from the second specified volume to the first specified volume. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will be surprised by the output of the specified sound, compared to a configuration in which the volume of the specified sound is changed from the second specified volume to the first specified volume when a specified condition is met. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 9D2. The gaming machine 9D1 described above is characterized by being equipped with a second predetermined volume control means (VDP253) that controls the volume at which the predetermined sound is output from the predetermined channel to the second predetermined volume when a specified time has elapsed without a game round being started.

With this gaming machine, if a specified time has passed without a game being played, the volume at which a specified sound is output from a specified channel is controlled to be lowered to a second specified volume. This configuration makes it possible to lower the volume at which a specified sound is output from a specified channel when the gaming machine has not been in operation for the specified time.

Gaming machine 9D3. The gaming machine 9D1 or 9D2 described above is equipped with start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56-58) that are operated to start a game round, and the regulation determination means determines that the regulation condition has been met when the start operation means is operated.

With this gaming machine, when a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a second predetermined volume and the start operation means is operated to start a game, the volume of the predetermined sound is controlled to fade in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a player attempting to start a game from being surprised by the output of the predetermined sound and losing motivation to play.

Gaming machine 9D4. In the gaming machine 9D3 described above, the start operation means is configured to have at least a first start operation means (first to third credit insertion switches 56-58) operated to set the number of bets, and a second start operation means (start lever 41) operated after the number of bets is set, and the specified determination means determines that the specified condition has been met when the first start operation means is operated.

With this gaming machine, when the first start operating means is operated to set the number of bets while a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a second predetermined volume, control is performed to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. This configuration makes it possible to start the fade-in control before the start of a game round, and to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume before the start of a game round.

Gaming machine 9D5. The gaming machine 9D3 or 9D4 described above is equipped with a plurality of cyclical display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that cyclically display a plurality of types of symbols (designs), a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) that are operated to individually stop the cyclical display of the symbols, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) that draws a winning combination, and a bonus awarding means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101, etc.) that awards a bonus to the player when a winning combination is achieved in the winning combination drawing, wherein the game round starts when the start operation means is operated, and the game round ends when all of the plurality of cyclical display means have stopped the cyclical display of the symbols or when the bonus awarding means has awarded the bonus.

This gaming machine, which is used on gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, can prevent players who are about to start playing from being surprised by the output of a specific sound and losing their motivation to play.

Gaming machine 9D6. Any of the gaming machines 9D1 to 9D5 described above, characterized in that it has multiple volume information storage areas (layers 0 to 6) that store volume information related to the volume output from the specified channel.

This gaming machine is provided with multiple volume information storage areas that store volume information related to the volume output from a specified channel. With this configuration, for example, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from a specified channel, it is possible to store volume information related to the volume before the change and volume information related to the volume after the change in separate volume information storage areas. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a specified channel and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9D7. The gaming machine 9D6 described above is characterized by comprising volume information change means (a volume value setting processing function of the VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in a first volume information storage area (fourth layer) of the volume information storage area when a first change condition (mute instruction) is met, and changes the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area (second layer) of the volume information storage area that is different from the first volume information storage area when a second change condition (power saving instruction) that is different from the first change condition is met.

According to this gaming machine, if a first change condition is met, the volume information stored in a first volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed; if a second change condition different from the first change condition is met, the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area within the volume information storage area is changed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether the first change condition or the second change condition is met through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a specified channel and prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 9D8. The gaming machine 9D7 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a comparison/determination means (volume value comparison function of VDP253) that compares and determines the volume information stored in the multiple volume information storage areas, and is configured to output sound from the specified channel using the volume information that the comparison/determination means compares and determines as the minimum value.

This gaming machine compares volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas, and outputs sound from a specified channel using the volume information that is compared to the minimum value. By configuring the machine to compare volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas and output sound from a specified channel, it is possible to eliminate the need to check the volume being output from a specified channel, simplifying the processing configuration. Furthermore, by configuring the machine to output sound from a specified channel using volume information that is compared to the minimum value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in situations where, for example, the volume of a specified channel needs to be kept muted.

Gaming machine 9D9. Any of the above gaming machines 9D6 to 9D8, further comprising a predetermined change means (a volume value change function of VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in the predetermined volume information storage area (second layer) of the volume information storage area to predetermined volume information (64), and is configured so that when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the predetermined volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume.

With this gaming machine, the volume information stored in the predetermined volume information storage area of the volume information storage area may be changed to predetermined volume information. When sound is output from a predetermined channel using the predetermined volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. This configuration makes it possible to control the output of a predetermined sound at the second predetermined volume with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Gaming machine 9D10. The gaming machine 9D9 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a second predetermined change means (a volume value change function of VDP253) that changes the volume information stored in the predetermined volume information storage area until the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the first predetermined volume when the specified condition is met while the predetermined volume information is stored in the predetermined volume information storage area.

According to this gaming machine, if a specified condition is met while specified volume information is stored in the specified volume information storage area, the volume information stored in the specified volume information storage area is changed until the volume of the specified channel reaches the first specified volume. This configuration makes it possible to achieve control to fade in the volume of the specified sound from the second specified volume to the first specified volume using a relatively simple processing configuration when a specified condition is met while a specified sound is being output from a specified channel at a second specified volume.

The gaming machines 9A to 9D may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 9A to 9D may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 10A1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
A specific effect starting means (ending effect starting function S100104 of the display control device 81) that starts a specific effect (ending effect) when a specific condition (completion condition) is met;
A specific effect progression means (ED processing function of the display control device 81) that progresses the specific effect so that it is executed across multiple game times;
An interruption means (error notification function S100303 of the display control device 81) for interrupting the display of the specific effect;
A gaming machine characterized by having a specific effect resuming means (resuming processing function S100307 of the display control device 81) that starts the specific effect from the middle when the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, a special effect begins. The special effect progresses so that it is executed across multiple play sessions. If the display of a special effect is interrupted, it will restart from the middle of the special effect. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the special effect having to start from the beginning if the display of the special effect is interrupted.

As a result of the above, it is possible to avoid the early stages of specific effects being repeatedly executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 10A2. The gaming machine 10A1 described above is further equipped with progress information storage means (RAM of the display control device 81) that stores progress information (file number) related to the progress of the specific effect, and the specific effect restart means starts the specific effect from a position corresponding to the results stored in the progress information storage means.

In this gaming machine, the progress information storage means stores progress information related to the progress of a specific effect. When the interruption means interrupts the display of a specific effect, the specific effect is started from a position corresponding to the result stored in the progress information storage means. This configuration prevents the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific effect from becoming too complicated, and makes it possible to resume the specific effect from a position corresponding to the interruption position when the display of the specific effect is interrupted.

Gaming machine 10A3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 10A2, but configured so that the data used when executing the specific effects is divided into multiple files and stored, and the progress information storage means stores information indicating which of the multiple files to use as the progress information.

According to this gaming machine, the data used when executing a special effect is stored in multiple files. The progress information storage means stores, as progress information, information indicating which of the multiple files to use. This configuration makes it possible to resume a special effect if its display is interrupted using the data in the file corresponding to the information stored in the progress information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to resume a special effect from a position corresponding to the interruption position if its display is interrupted, while minimizing the complexity of the processing configuration related to the execution of the special effect.

Gaming machine 10A4. In the gaming machine 10A3 described above, when all the data in a predetermined file (file numbers "1" to "7") has been used, the specific effect progression means proceeds with the specific effect using the data in the next file, regardless of the player's operation.

With this gaming machine, when all the data in a specified file has been used, the special effect will proceed using the data in the next file, regardless of the player's operation. This configuration makes it possible to proceed with the special effect independently of the progress of the game, even if the data used to execute the special effect is stored in multiple files. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 10A5. In the gaming machine 10A3 or 10A4, the specific effect restart means starts the specific effect from the first data in the file corresponding to the storage results of the progress information storage means.

With this gaming machine, if the display of a special effect is interrupted, the special effect is resumed from the first data in the file corresponding to the results stored in the progress information storage means. This configuration makes it possible to re-execute part of the special effect that was executed before the interruption, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 10A6. In any of gaming machines 10A1 to 10A5, the specific effect restart means starts the specific effect when a specific operation (restart operation) is performed by the player.

With this gaming machine, if the display of a special effect is interrupted, the special effect will resume when the player performs a specific operation. This configuration allows the player to decide when to resume the special effect, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 10A7. The gaming machine 10A6 described above, further characterized by being equipped with a specific operation notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player of the specific operation.

This gaming machine notifies players of specific operations, preventing players from feeling uneasy about specific effects not starting.

Gaming machine 10A8. In any of gaming machines 10A1 to 10A7 above, the interruption means interrupts the display of the specific effect when a specific abnormality (hopper empty error) occurs in the gaming machine.

With this gaming machine, if a specific abnormality occurs in the gaming machine and the display of a specific effect is interrupted, the special effect will be resumed from where it left off. This configuration reduces the chances of an event occurring in which a specific abnormality occurs and the special effect must be terminated midway, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 10A9. Any of gaming machines 10A1 to 10A8 described above, characterized in that it comprises: specific state termination means for terminating a specific state (advantageous zone) when the difference in number of coins in the specific state reaches a specific number (2,400 coins); and specific effect termination means for terminating the specific effect in the game turn in which the specific state ends, regardless of the progress of the specific effect, if the specific state ends while the specific effect is being executed.

With this gaming machine, the special state ends when the difference in the number of coins in the special state reaches a specific number. If the special state ends while a special effect is being executed, the special effect will also end on the play count in which the special state ends, regardless of the progress of the special effect. In this configuration, the number of plays in which a special effect can be executed varies depending on the results of the winning combination, etc., so if the display of a special effect is interrupted and then restarted from the beginning, it may not be possible to execute the special effect to the end. However, with this configuration, which allows the special effect to start from the middle when it is interrupted, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 10A10. In the gaming machine 10A9 described above, the specific state has a first gaming mode (chance mode) and a second gaming mode (alert mode) in which the expected value of awarded gaming value per play is higher than in the first gaming mode, and the gaming machine is further equipped with a determination means for determining whether the difference in number of coins in the specific state in the second gaming mode will be the specific number based on information related to the remaining number of plays that can be played in the second gaming mode, and is configured so that the specific condition is met when the determination means determines that the difference in number of coins in the specific state in the second gaming mode will be the specific number.

With this gaming machine, a determination is made as to whether the difference in the number of coins in a specific state in the second gaming mode will be a specific number based on information related to the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode, and if it is determined that the difference will be a specific number, a specific effect will begin. In this configuration, the number of games that can be played to execute a specific effect changes depending on the results of the winning combination, etc., so if the display of a specific effect is interrupted and then restarted from the beginning, it may not be possible to execute the specific effect to the end. However, with this configuration, which starts the specific effect midway when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 10B1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
A specific effect starting means (ending effect starting function S100104 of the display control device 81) that starts a specific effect (ending effect) when a specific condition (completion condition) is met;
A specific effect progression means (ED processing function of the display control device 81) that progresses the specific effect so that it is executed across multiple game times;
An interruption means (error notification function S100303 of the display control device 81) for interrupting the display of the specific effect;
a specific effect resuming means (a resuming processing function S100307 of the display control device 81) for resuming the specific effect when the interrupting means has interrupted the display of the specific effect;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect restarting means is configured to be able to restart the specific effect by omitting a part of it.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, a special effect begins. The special effect progresses so that it is executed across multiple play sessions. If the display of a special effect is interrupted, it may be resumed with part of the special effect omitted. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the chances that a special effect will not be able to be executed to completion if its display is interrupted.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 10B2. The gaming machine 10B1 described above further comprises: specific state termination means for terminating a specific state (advantageous zone) when a specific termination condition (a difference in number of coins of 2400) is met; specific effect termination means for terminating a specific effect in the game turn in which the specific state ends, regardless of the progress of the specific effect, if the specific state ends while the specific effect is being executed; and specific determination means for determining whether to omit part of the specific effect, based on progress information related to the progress of the specific effect and specific corresponding conditions corresponding to the specific termination condition, if the specific effect resumption means resumes the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, the special state ends when a special end condition is met. If the special state ends while a special effect is being executed, the special effect will also end in the game round in which the special state ends, regardless of the progress of the special effect. In this configuration, if the display of the special effect is interrupted, there is a possibility that the special effect will not be able to be executed to the end. However, in a configuration in which, when the special effect is resumed, a decision is made as to whether to omit part of the special effect based on progress information related to the progress of the special effect and the special response conditions corresponding to the special end condition, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 10B3. In the gaming machine 10B1 or 10B2 described above, this gaming machine is characterized by comprising: specific state termination means for terminating a specific state (advantageous zone) when the difference in the number of coins reaches a specific number (2,400 coins); specific effect termination means for terminating a specific effect in the game turn in which the specific state ends, regardless of the progress of the specific effect, if the specific state ends while the specific effect is being executed; and specific determination means for determining whether to omit part of the specific effect based on progress information related to the progress of the specific effect and the difference in the number of coins in the specific state, if the specific effect resumption means resumes the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, the special state ends when the difference in the number of coins in the special state reaches a specific number. If the special state ends while a special effect is being executed, the special effect will also end on the play count in which the special state ends, regardless of the progress of the special effect. In this configuration, the number of plays in which a special effect can be executed varies depending on the results of the winning combination, etc., so if the display of a special effect is interrupted and the special effect is restarted from the beginning, for example, it may not be possible to execute the special effect to the end. However, a configuration in which, when restarting a special effect, progress information related to the progress of the special effect and the difference in the number of coins in the special state are used to determine whether to omit part of the special effect can be resolved in an effective manner.

Gaming machine 10B4. In gaming machine 10B2 or 10B3, when the number of times the interruption means has interrupted the display of the specific effect exceeds a specified number, the specific effect resumption means resumes the specific effect by omitting part of it.

With this gaming machine, if the number of times the display of a special effect is interrupted exceeds a set number of times, the special effect will be resumed with part of the special effect omitted. This configuration reduces the chances that a special effect will not be able to be completed.

Gaming machine 10B5. Any of gaming machines 10B1 to 10B4 described above, further comprising progress information storage means (RAM of display control device 81) for storing progress information (file number) related to the progress of the specific effect, and wherein the specific effect restart means starts the specific effect from a position corresponding to the results stored in the progress information storage means.

In this gaming machine, the progress information storage means stores progress information related to the progress of a specific effect. When the interruption means interrupts the display of a specific effect, the specific effect is started from a position corresponding to the result stored in the progress information storage means. This configuration prevents the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific effect from becoming too complicated, and makes it possible to resume the specific effect from a position corresponding to the interruption position when the display of the specific effect is interrupted.

Gaming machine 10B6. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 10B5, characterized in that the data used when executing the specific effects is divided into and stored in multiple files, and the progress information storage means stores, as the progress information, information indicating which of the multiple files to use.

According to this gaming machine, the data used when executing a special effect is stored in multiple files. The progress information storage means stores, as progress information, information indicating which of the multiple files to use. This configuration makes it possible to resume a special effect if its display is interrupted using the data in the file corresponding to the information stored in the progress information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to resume a special effect from a position corresponding to the interruption position if its display is interrupted, while minimizing the complexity of the processing configuration related to the execution of the special effect.

Gaming machine 10B7. In the gaming machine 10B6 described above, the specific effect progression means, when all data in a predetermined file (file numbers "1" to "7") has been used, progresses the specific effect using data from the next file, regardless of player operation.

With this gaming machine, when all the data in a specified file has been used, the special effect will proceed using the data in the next file, regardless of the player's operation. This configuration makes it possible to proceed with the special effect independently of the progress of the game, even if the data used to execute the special effect is stored in multiple files. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 10B8. In gaming machine 10B6 or 10B7, the specific effect restart means omits part of the specific effect by not using data in a file corresponding to the storage results of the progress information storage means.

This gaming machine omits some of the special effects by not using the data in the file corresponding to the results stored in the progress information storage means. This configuration prevents the processing configuration related to the execution of special effects from becoming too complicated, and makes it possible to resume the special effects by omitting some of them if their display is interrupted.

Gaming machine 10B9. In any of gaming machines 10B6 to 10B8 above, the specific effect restart means, if the specific effect is not omitted, starts the specific effect from the first data in the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means.

With this gaming machine, if the display of a special effect is interrupted but the special effect is not omitted, the special effect is resumed from the first data in the file corresponding to the storage results in the progress information storage means. This configuration makes it possible to re-execute part of the special effect that was executed before the interruption, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 10B10. In any of gaming machines 10B1 to 10B9, the specific effect restart means starts the specific effect when a specific operation (restart operation) is performed by the player.

With this gaming machine, if the display of a special effect is interrupted, the special effect will resume when the player performs a specific operation. This configuration allows the player to decide when to resume the special effect, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 10B11. In any of gaming machines 10B1 to 10B10 above, the interruption means interrupts the display of the specific effect when a specific abnormality (hopper empty error) occurs in the gaming machine.

With this gaming machine, if a specific abnormality occurs in the gaming machine and the display of a specific effect is interrupted, the specific effect may be resumed with part of the effect omitted. This configuration reduces the chances of an event occurring in which a specific abnormality occurs and the specific effect must be terminated midway, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 10B12. In any of gaming machines 10B1 to 10B11 above, when the interruption means interrupts the display of the special effect, the special effect is resumed from a point after the point where it was interrupted (the beginning of the next file), thereby making it possible to resume the special effect by omitting part of it.

With this gaming machine, if the display of a special effect is interrupted, it is possible to resume the special effect from a point after the interruption, thereby omitting part of the special effect. This configuration reduces the chances that a special effect will not be able to be completed if its display is interrupted.

The gaming machines 10A group and the gaming machines 10B group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 10A group and the gaming machines 10B group may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group to Y group, and the gaming machines 9A group to 9D group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 11A1. Numerical information storage means (a set value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (set values);
A winning/losing determination means (lottery processing function S209 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not a winning event has occurred based on the winning probability corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (a medal payout processing function S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus based on whether the winning or losing decision is made,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to execute different notifications when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value (7) and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value.

This gaming machine is configured to be able to issue different notifications when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means, and to prompt the player to perform a specific operation to store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 11A2. The gaming machine 11A1 described above is equipped with a specific notification execution means (display control device 81, speaker 64) that executes a specific notification, and the specific operation is configured to include a first specific operation (turning the setting key ON) that places the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means in a changeable state where it can be changed, a second specific operation (turning the reset switch 72 ON) that selects the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation (turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF) that ends the changeable state, and the specific notification execution means is configured to execute the specific notification at the timing when the third specific operation is performed if the third specific operation is performed in a situation where the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, a first specific operation is performed to put the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means into a changeable state, where it can be changed, a second specific operation is performed to select the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation is performed to end the changeable state. Here, if the third specific operation is performed when a specific value is being stored in the numerical information storage means, a specific notification is executed at the timing of the third specific operation. This configuration makes it possible to immediately notify the user that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means, and also reduces the effort required to return from the third specific operation to the first specific operation in order to change the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11A3. In the gaming machine 11A2 described above, the specific notification execution means does not execute the specific notification between the time when the first specific operation is performed and the time when the third specific operation is performed.

With this gaming machine, no specific notification is issued between the time the first specific operation is performed and the time the third specific operation is performed. This configuration makes it possible to avoid issuing a specific notification each time a specific value is selected by the second specific operation. As a result, it becomes possible for the operator who changes the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to perform the above task without feeling annoyed.

Gaming machine 11A4. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine 11A2 or 11A3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing the specific notification when the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means.

This gaming machine does not have a means for issuing a specific notification when a specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means, so it is possible to notify the player that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means through a specific notification.

Gaming machine 11A5. Any of gaming machines 11A2 to 11A4 described above, characterized in that it is provided with a switching member (front door 12) that can switch between a first state (front door 12 open state) in which the specific operation is easy to perform, and a second state (front door 12 closed state) in which the specific operation is difficult to perform.

This gaming machine is provided with a switching member that can switch between a first state, in which it is easy to perform a specific operation, and a second state, in which it is difficult to perform a specific operation. This configuration makes it possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the configuration of the gaming machine 11A2 described above, it becomes possible to notify the user that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means prior to switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means, there is no need to switch from the second state to the first state, making it possible to reduce the effort required when returning from the third specific operation to the first specific operation.

Gaming machine 11A6. The gaming machine 11A5 described above, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is configured to execute the specific notification when it is determined that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state.

According to this gaming machine, if it is determined that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means in the first state, a specific notification is executed. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means before a specific operation is performed, making it easy to check whether a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11A7. The gaming machine 11A5 or 11A6 described above is further equipped with a first state notification means (display control device 81, speaker 64) that notifies the player that the first state is being reached, and the first state notification means issues different notifications when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value.

With this gaming machine, when announcing that the first state has been reached, different notifications are issued depending on whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value or not. This configuration makes it possible to notify both that the first state has been reached and whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value, while preventing the processing configuration from becoming more complicated due to the need to notify that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11A8. Any of gaming machines 11A5 to 10A7 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a confirmation means (setting value confirmation function S110606 of display control device 81) that confirms the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means when the first state is switched to the second state, and is configured to perform processing according to the confirmation results of the confirmation means.

When the gaming machine switches from the first state to the second state, it checks the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means and performs processing according to the results of that check. This configuration makes it possible to perform processing to grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means even after switching to the second state.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 11A9. The gaming machine 11A8 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a predetermined notification execution means (display control device 81, upper lamp 63) that executes a predetermined notification (change in lighting mode) at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means.

With this gaming machine, if the confirmation means confirms that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, a predetermined notification is executed at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state.

Gaming machine 11A10. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine 11A8 or gaming machine 11A9, characterized in that it is not equipped with a means for executing the predetermined notification when the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means.

This gaming machine does not have a means for issuing a predetermined notification when a specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means, so it is possible to notify the player that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means through a predetermined notification.

Gaming machine 11A11. In the above-mentioned gaming machine 11A9 or 11A10, the predetermined notification execution means changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification means (upper lamp 63) visible from the front of the gaming machine in the second state from the first notification mode (lit state) to the second notification mode (unlit state), as the predetermined notification.

In this gaming machine, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means visible from the front of the gaming machine in the second state is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode as a predetermined notification. This configuration allows a specific operation to be performed to store numerical information in the numerical information storage means, and when the switching member switches from the first state to the second state, the predetermined notification can be executed as a final means of checking whether a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming Machine 11A12. In the gaming machine 11A11 described above, the predetermined notification execution means is characterized in that, when the notification mode of the predetermined notification means is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, it changes from the second notification mode to the first notification mode after a predetermined time has elapsed.

According to this gaming machine, when the notification mode of the predetermined notification means is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, it is changed from the second notification mode to the first notification mode after a predetermined time has elapsed. This configuration makes it possible to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification means from the second notification mode back to the first notification mode without the need for operation by the manager of the gaming facility where the gaming machine is installed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the effort required when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11A13. Any of gaming machines 11A2 to 11A12 described above, wherein the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification by outputting predetermined sound data.

With this gaming machine, a specific notification is made by outputting predetermined sound data. This configuration makes it possible for managers of the gaming facility where the gaming machine is installed to easily understand that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. It is certainly possible to configure the specific notification to be made by displaying at a predetermined location that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. However, this configuration would require the manager to move to a location where they can see the predetermined location and then check the displayed content, making it more difficult to determine whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value.

Gaming machine 11B1. Numerical information storage means (a set value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (set values);
A winning/losing determination means (lottery processing function S209 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not a winning event has occurred based on the winning probability corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (a medal payout processing function S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus based on whether the winning or losing decision is made,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
a switching member (front door 12) that can switch between a first state (front door 12 open state) in which the specific operation is easy to perform and a second state (front door 12 closed state) in which the specific operation is difficult to perform;
a confirmation means (a setting value confirmation function S110606 of the display control device 81) for confirming the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means when the first state is switched to the second state,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to perform processing according to the confirmation result of said confirmation means.

This gaming machine is provided with a switching member that can switch between a first state, in which it is easy to perform specific operations, and a second state, in which it is difficult to perform specific operations. This configuration makes it possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Furthermore, when switching from the first state to the second state, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is confirmed, and processing is performed according to the confirmation results. This configuration makes it possible to perform processing to ascertain the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means even after switching to the second state.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 11B2. The gaming machine 11B1 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a predetermined notification execution means (display control device 81, upper lamp 63) that executes a predetermined notification (change in lighting mode) at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state when the confirmation means confirms that a specific value (7) is stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, if the confirmation means confirms that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, a predetermined notification is executed at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, it becomes possible to prompt the player at a relatively early stage to perform a specific operation and store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11B3. The gaming machine 11B2 described above, characterized in that it is not equipped with a means for executing the predetermined notification when the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means.

This gaming machine does not have a means for issuing a predetermined notification when a specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means, so it is possible to notify the player that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means through a predetermined notification.

Gaming machine 11B4. In the gaming machine 11B2 or 11B3 described above, the predetermined notification execution means changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification means (upper lamp 63) visible from the front of the gaming machine in the second state from the first notification mode (lit state) to the second notification mode (unlit state) as the predetermined notification.

In this gaming machine, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means visible from the front of the gaming machine in the second state is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode as a predetermined notification. This configuration allows a specific operation to be performed to store numerical information in the numerical information storage means, and when the switching member switches from the first state to the second state, the predetermined notification can be executed as a final means of checking whether a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11B5. In the gaming machine 11B4 described above, the predetermined notification execution means, when changing the notification mode of the predetermined notification means from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, changes the notification mode from the second notification mode to the first notification mode after a predetermined time has elapsed.

According to this gaming machine, when the notification mode of the predetermined notification means is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, it is changed from the second notification mode to the first notification mode after a predetermined time has elapsed. This configuration makes it possible to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification means from the second notification mode back to the first notification mode without the need for operation by the manager of the gaming facility where the gaming machine is installed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the effort required when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11B6. Any of gaming machines 11B2 to 11B5 described above, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to issue different notifications when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value.

This gaming machine is configured to be able to issue different notifications when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means, and to prompt the player to perform a specific operation to store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 11B7. The gaming machine 11B6 described above is further equipped with a specific notification execution means (display control device 81, speaker 64) for executing a specific notification, and the specific operation is configured to include a first specific operation (turning the setting key ON) that places the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means in a changeable state in which it can be changed, a second specific operation (turning the reset switch 72 ON) that selects the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation (turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF) that ends the changeable state, and the specific notification execution means is configured to execute the specific notification at the timing of the third specific operation if the third specific operation is performed when the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, a first specific operation is performed to put the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means into a changeable state, where it can be changed, a second specific operation is performed to select the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation is performed to end the changeable state. Here, if the third specific operation is performed when a specific value is being stored in the numerical information storage means, a specific notification is executed at the timing of the third specific operation. This configuration makes it possible to immediately notify the user that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means, and also reduces the effort required to return from the third specific operation to the first specific operation in order to change the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means.

Furthermore, with this configuration, it is possible to notify the user that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means prior to switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means, there is no need to switch from the second state to the first state, which reduces the effort required when returning from the third specific operation to the first specific operation.

Gaming machine 11B8. In the gaming machine 11B7 described above, the specific notification execution means does not execute the specific notification between the time when the first specific operation is performed and the time when the third specific operation is performed.

With this gaming machine, no specific notification is issued between the time the first specific operation is performed and the time the third specific operation is performed. This configuration makes it possible to avoid issuing a specific notification each time a specific value is selected by the second specific operation. As a result, it becomes possible for the operator who changes the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to perform the above task without feeling annoyed.

Gaming machine 11B9. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine 11B7 or gaming machine 11B8, characterized in that it is not equipped with a means for executing the specific notification when the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means.

This gaming machine does not have a means for issuing a specific notification when a specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means, so it is possible to notify the player that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means through a specific notification.

Gaming machine 11B10. Any of gaming machines 11B7 to 11B9 described above, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is configured to execute the specific notification when it is determined that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state.

According to this gaming machine, if it is determined that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means in the first state, a specific notification is executed. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means before a specific operation is performed, making it easy to check whether a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11B11. Any of gaming machines 11B7 to 11B10 above, wherein the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification by outputting predetermined sound data.

With this gaming machine, a specific notification is made by outputting predetermined sound data. This configuration makes it possible for managers of the gaming facility where the gaming machine is installed to easily understand that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. It is certainly possible to configure the specific notification to be made by displaying at a predetermined location that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. However, this configuration would require the manager to move to a location where they can see the predetermined location and then check the displayed content, making it more difficult to determine whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value.

Gaming machine 11B12. Any of gaming machines 11B2 to 11B11 described above, further comprising first state notification means (display control device 81, speaker 64) for notifying that the first state is in effect, wherein the first state notification means issues different notifications when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value.

With this gaming machine, when announcing that the first state has been reached, different notifications are issued depending on whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value or not. This configuration makes it possible to notify both that the first state has been reached and whether the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value, while preventing the processing configuration from becoming more complicated due to the need to notify that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 11C1. Numerical information storage means (a set value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (set values);
A winning/losing determination means (lottery processing function S209 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not a winning event has occurred based on the winning probability corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (a medal payout processing function S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus based on whether the winning or losing decision is made,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
The specific operation includes a first specific operation (ON operation of the setting key) for setting the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to a changeable state in which the numerical information can be changed, a second specific operation (ON operation of the reset switch 72) for selecting the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation (ON operation of the start lever 41 followed by OFF operation of the setting key) for ending the changeable state,
The requirements for the third specific operation to be performed are as follows:
Detecting that a signal from a first detection means (start detection sensor 41 a) that detects whether or not a first operation means (start lever 41) is operated has switched from a first non-operation signal (OFF signal) that indicates that the first operation means is not operated to a first operation signal (ON signal) that indicates that the first operation means is operated;
A gaming machine characterized by a configuration that at least includes detecting that, after detecting that the signal from the first detection means has switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal, the signal from the second detection means (setting key detection sensor 73a) that detects whether or not the second operation means (setting key) has been operated has switched from a second operation signal (ON signal) indicating that the second operation means has been operated to a second non-operation signal (OFF signal) indicating that the second operation means has not been operated.

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, a first specific operation is required to put the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means into a changeable state where it can be changed, a second specific operation is required to select the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation is required to end the changeable state. Here, the third specific operation is deemed to have been performed when the signal from the first detection means that detects whether the first operation means is being operated has detected that it has switched from a first non-operation signal indicating that the first operation means is not being operated to a first operation signal indicating that the first operation means is being operated, and then the signal from the second detection means that detects whether the second operation means is being operated has detected that it has switched from a second operation signal indicating that the second operation means is being operated to a second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means is not being operated.

By configuring the third specific operation to include at least the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means, it is possible to make fraudulent acts more difficult and reduce the chance of falsely determining that the third specific operation has been performed due to noise, etc. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, by configuring it to detect when the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operating signal to the second non-operation signal, it is possible to more reliably detect the operation of the second operating means than, for example, a configuration that detects the second non-operation signal.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to properly change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 11C2. The gaming machine 11C1 described above, characterized in that the requirement for the first specific operation to be performed includes detection of input of the second operation signal from the second detection means.

According to this gaming machine, the requirement for the first specific operation to be performed includes detecting that the second operation signal has been input. This configuration makes it possible to perform the first specific operation and the third specific operation using the second operation means, thereby simplifying the specific operations.

Furthermore, if the second operating means is operated so that the second non-operation signal is input from the second detection means in the stage prior to operating the first operating means, i.e., in the stage prior to the third specific operation, after operating the first operating means, it becomes necessary to operate the second operating means again so that the second operating signal is input from the second detection means, and to operate the second operating means again so that the second non-operation signal is input from the second detection means. Therefore, it becomes possible to reliably detect the operation of the second operating means.

Gaming machine 11C3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 11C2, but configured so that the second operating means can be maintained in a state in which the second detecting means outputs the second operating signal without the second operating means being operated.

In this gaming machine, the second operating means is configured to be able to maintain a state in which the second detection means outputs a second operating signal without the need to operate the second operating means. With this configuration, if the second operating means is operated to perform the first specific operation, the second operating means can be operated so that the second detection means outputs a second non-operation signal as the third specific operation. This simplifies the specific operations.

Gaming machine 11C4. Any of gaming machines 11C1 to 11C3 described above, characterized in that the requirement for the third specific operation to be performed includes detecting that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal, and then detecting that the second non-operation signal has been input from the second detection means a specified number of times (10 times).

According to this gaming machine, the requirements for the third specific operation to be performed include detecting that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal, and then detecting that the second non-operation signal has been input from the second detection means a specified number of times. This configuration makes it possible to avoid false detection of a switch in the signal from the second detection means due to noise, etc.

Gaming machine 11C5. In the gaming machine 11C4 described above, if the second detection means detects that the second operation signal has been input before the second detection means detects that the second non-operation signal has been input the specified number of times, the gaming machine is configured to again detect that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal.

According to this gaming machine, if the second detection means detects that a second operation signal has been input before the second detection means detects that a second non-operation signal has been input a specified number of times, it re-detects that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal. This configuration makes it possible to avoid erroneous detection of a switch in the signal from the second detection means due to noise, etc.

Gaming machine 11C6. Any of gaming machines 11C1 to 11C5 described above, characterized in that when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information selected by the second specific operation is stored in the numerical information storage means.

With this gaming machine, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information selected by the second specific operation is stored in the numerical information storage means. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means from being changed without the third specific operation being performed.

Gaming machine 11C7. The gaming machine 11C6 described above further comprises: an update means (setting value update function S110210 of the main control unit 101) that updates numerical information when the second specific operation is performed; a storage means (display buffer of RAM 106) that stores the update results of the update means; and a display means (payout number display unit 62) that displays the numerical information stored in the storage means; and a configuration in which, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the storage means is stored in the numerical information storage means.

With this gaming machine, when the second specific operation is performed, the updated numerical information is stored in the storage means and displayed on the display means. Then, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the storage means is stored in the numerical information storage means. By configuring the updated numerical information to be displayed when the second specific operation is performed, it becomes possible for the operator performing the specific operation to relatively easily select the numerical information intended by the operator through the second specific operation. Furthermore, by configuring the numerical information updated when the second specific operation is performed to be stored in a storage means different from the numerical information storage means, it becomes possible to prevent the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means from being changed without the third specific operation being performed.

Gaming machine 11C8. Any of gaming machines 11C1 to 11C7 described above, further comprising: periodic confirmation means (timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 101) that periodically confirms signals from the first detection means and the second detection means; and standby means (interrupt wait processing S110206, S110501 of the main control unit 101) that waits until confirmation is made by the periodic confirmation means, and is configured so that when it is determined whether the third specific operation has been performed, the standby means waits.

According to this gaming machine, when determining whether a third specific operation has been performed, a process of waiting until signals from the first detection means and the second detection means are confirmed by the periodic confirmation means is performed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether a third specific operation has been performed based on the latest status of the signals from the first detection means and the second detection means. As a result, it is possible to avoid, for example, detecting multiple times that the signal from the first detection means has switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal in response to a single operation of the first operation means.

Gaming machine 11C9. Any of gaming machines 11C1 to 11C8 described above, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to issue different notifications when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value (7) and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value.

This gaming machine is configured to be able to issue different notifications when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means, and to prompt the player to perform a specific operation to store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

The gaming machines 11A to 11C may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 11 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, the gaming machines 9, and the gaming machines 10, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 12A1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
A grant determination means (the main control device 101's all-navigation lottery function S120407, the bell winning determination function S120605, and the other-power lottery function S120609) for determining whether or not to grant a special benefit (an additional number of games in the notification mode A);
a special benefit awarding means (an additional game number adding function S120405, S120608 of the main control device 101) for awarding the special benefit when the awarding determination means determines that the special benefit should be awarded;
A gaming machine characterized in that the award determination means is configured to be able to perform the award determination multiple times in a game in which the result of the lottery for the role results in a specific result (push order bell win).

According to this gaming machine, if the award determination means determines that a special bonus will be awarded, the special bonus is awarded. Here, the award determination means is configured to be able to make the award determination multiple times in a game round in which the winning combination lottery result is a specific result. The player can determine whether the winning combination lottery result is a specific result based on the stopping results of the symbols, etc. Therefore, by configuring the award determination to be made in such a game round, not only can the player be made to operate the start operation means while hoping that the winning combination lottery result will be a specific result, but after operating the start operation means to start a game round, it is also possible to progress the game while hoping that the player will win the award determination. Furthermore, because the award determination can be made multiple times, even if the first award determination is unsuccessful, the player can continue the game while hoping that the second or subsequent award determinations will be won.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 12A2. In the gaming machine 12A1 described above, the award determination means, when executing the award determination multiple times, executes the award determination at least when the progress status of the game in which the lottery result for the role resulted in the specific result is a first progress status (start stage) and when the progress status of the game in which the lottery result for the role resulted in the specific result is a second progress status (end stage) that is later than the first progress status.

With this gaming machine, when the award determination is performed multiple times, it is performed at least when the progress status of the game in which the lottery result for the winning combination results in a specific result is a first progress status, and when the progress status of the game in which the lottery result for the winning combination results in a specific result is a second progress status that is later than the first progress status. In this way, by configuring the award determination to be performed multiple times based on the progress status of the game, it is possible to reduce the chances of losing hope for a special bonus being awarded midway through a game.

Gaming machine 12A3. In the gaming machine 12A1 or 12A2, the award determination means performs a first award determination between the time when the lottery result for the role becomes the specific result and before the operation of the multiple stop operation means becomes valid.

With this gaming machine, the first award determination is executed between the time when the winning combination lottery result becomes a specific result and the time when the operation of the multiple stop operation means becomes valid. With this configuration, even if the first award determination is unsuccessful, it is possible to operate the multiple stop operation means in the hope of winning the second or subsequent award determinations. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that a special bonus award is notified, it is possible to notify the player of the special bonus award at any stage in the game if the first award determination is successful.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 12A4. In the gaming machine 12A3, when the award determination means performs the award determination multiple times, the award determination is performed after all of the cyclical display of the symbols has stopped.

With this gaming machine, when the award determination is performed multiple times, the determination is performed before the operation of the multiple stop operation means becomes effective, and after all cyclical display of images has stopped. This configuration makes it possible to maintain the anticipation of a special bonus from the start to the end of a game round, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 12A5. In the gaming machine 12A3 or 12A4, if the award determination means determines in the first award determination that the special award will not be awarded, the gaming machine is characterized in that it executes the award determination after all of the circulating images have stopped being displayed.

With this gaming machine, if it is determined in the first award determination that a special bonus will not be awarded, the award determination is made after all circulating images have stopped displaying. This configuration makes it possible to maintain the anticipation of a special bonus being awarded from the start to the end of a game round, thereby increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, by requiring that a special bonus not be awarded in the first award determination, it is possible to prevent expectations for the award of a special bonus from becoming excessively high, making it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring the soundness of the game.

Gaming machine 12A6. Any of the gaming machines 12A1 to 12A5 described above, characterized in that the award determination means is configured such that, if it determines that the special award will be awarded, the award determination is not executed thereafter in the same game.

With this gaming machine, once it is determined that a special bonus will be awarded, the award determination will no longer be made in the same game session. This configuration makes it possible to prevent excessive expectations for the award of a special bonus, thereby ensuring the integrity of the game while increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine 12A7. In any of gaming machines 12A1 to 12A6, the award determination means determines whether or not to award the special benefit through a predetermined lottery during the first award determination.

With this gaming machine, the first award determination involves a predetermined lottery to determine whether or not to award a special bonus. This configuration eliminates player intervention in the first award determination, making it possible to prevent disparities between players.

Gaming machine 12A8. In the gaming machine 12A7, the award determination means determines whether to award the special benefit based on the operation result of the stop operation means in the second or subsequent award determinations.

With this gaming machine, whether or not to award a special bonus is determined based on the operation result of the stop operation means during the second and subsequent award determinations. This configuration allows players to actively participate in the second and subsequent award determinations, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine 12A9. In the gaming machine 12A8 described above, the award determination means determines whether to award the special bonus through a predetermined lottery when a specific operation (an operation that does not follow partial navigation) is performed on the stop operation means during the second or subsequent award determination.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation is performed on the stop operation means during the second or subsequent award determination, a predetermined lottery is used to determine whether or not to award a special bonus. This configuration allows the player to choose between performing a specific operation and hoping to be awarded a special bonus through a predetermined lottery, or winning the special bonus on their own without performing a specific operation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 12A10. In any of gaming machines 12A1 to 12A9, the special bonus awarding means executes processing to award the special bonus at the timing when the award determination means determines that the special bonus should be awarded.

According to this gaming machine, the special bonus awarding means executes processing to award a special bonus when the award determination means determines that a special bonus should be awarded. With this configuration, if the award determination means determines that a special bonus should be awarded, it becomes possible to notify the player that a special bonus has been awarded at any stage in the game thereafter, making it possible to diversify the content and timing of the notifications.

Gaming machine 12A11. Any of the above gaming machines 12A1 to 12A10, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that issues a notification according to the content of the special benefit when the award determination means determines that the special benefit will be awarded.

In this gaming machine, when the award determination means determines that a special award will be awarded, a notification is made according to the details of the special award. This configuration allows the player to know whether or not they have won the award determination based on whether or not they have received a notification, and even if they lose the first award determination, they can continue playing in the hope of winning the second or subsequent award determinations.

Gaming machine 12A12. Any of the above gaming machines 12A1 to 12A11, comprising special game state transition means (notification mode B transition function S120311 of the main control device 101) for transitioning to a special game state (notification mode B), and wherein the award determination means is configured to execute the award determination with a higher probability when in the special game state compared to when not in the special game state.

With this gaming machine, when in a special gaming state, a reward determination is made with a higher probability than when not in a special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to make the special gaming state a gaming state in which a reward determination is made with a higher probability. As a result, it becomes possible to have players play in gaming states other than the special gaming state while building anticipation of transitioning to the special gaming state, making it possible to prevent monotony in gaming.

Gaming machine 12B1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
A control means (stop control processing function S410 of the main control unit 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means so that when the lottery result of the role is a specific result (push order bell win), if the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a specific operation method, a specific win (bell win) is achieved, and if the plurality of stop operation means are operated in an operation method other than the specific operation method, the specific win is not achieved;
A partial notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying a part of the specific operation method based on the fact that the lottery result of the role has become the specific result;
When an operation corresponding to the content of the notification of the part of the notification means is performed, a first determination means (a bell winning determination function S120605 of the main control device 101) executes a determination as to whether or not to grant a special benefit (an additional number of games in the notification mode A) based on the operation result of the plurality of stop operation means;
A second determination means (another lottery function S120609 of the main control device 101) that executes the award determination by a predetermined lottery when no operation is performed in accordance with the notification content of the partial notification means;
A gaming machine characterized by having a special bonus awarding means (additional game number addition function S120608 of the main control unit 101) that awards the special bonus when a determination is made to award the special bonus.

With this gaming machine, when the lottery result for a specific role is reached, part of a specific operation method is notified. If an operation corresponding to the notified content is performed, a determination is made as to whether or not to grant a special bonus based on the operation results of multiple stop operation means. If an operation corresponding to the notified content is not performed, the determination is made through a predetermined lottery. If a determination is made to grant a special bonus, the special bonus is granted. With this configuration, when part of a specific operation method is notified, the player can choose whether to follow the notified content and win the special bonus on their own, or to ignore the notified content and hope to win the predetermined lottery and be granted the special bonus.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 12B2. In the gaming machine 12B1 described above, the first determination means determines that the special bonus will be awarded when the specific winning combination is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when part of a specific operation method is announced, a special bonus is awarded if multiple stop operation means can be operated using the specific operation method. With this configuration, if multiple stop operation means can be operated using the specific operation method, a special bonus can be awarded in addition to the bonus associated with achieving a specific win. As a result, it is possible to encourage players to guess which specific operation methods were not announced and then operate multiple stop operation means, thereby encouraging players to actively participate in the game.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if a player repeatedly fails to operate multiple stop operation means using the specific operation method while performing operations in accordance with the notification, not only will the player not be awarded the bonus associated with the specific win, but also the special bonus, which could potentially discourage the player from playing. However, with this gaming machine, which determines whether a bonus will be awarded through a predetermined lottery if the player does not perform operations in accordance with the notification, it is possible to provide the player with the option of forgoing the bonus associated with the specific win but instead hoping for the special bonus to be awarded through the predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily resolve the above concerns and provide a new gaming experience in which the player can expect to be awarded a special bonus by forgoing the bonus associated with the specific win.

Gaming machine 12B3. The gaming machine 12B1 or 12B2 described above, characterized in that the probability that the first determination means determines that the special bonus will be awarded is equal to the probability that the second determination means determines that the special bonus will be awarded.

With this gaming machine, there is no difference in the probability of a special bonus being awarded when a player performs an operation in response to the notification content compared to when the player does not perform an operation in response to the notification content, making it possible to avoid differences in the frequency of special bonus awards depending on the player's selection.

Gaming machine 12B4. Any of gaming machines 12B1 to 12B3 described above is characterized in that when the special bonus is awarded, the player is expected to have a greater advantage than if the bonus associated with the specific win had been awarded.

With this gaming machine, when a special bonus is awarded, the player can expect to have a greater advantage than when a bonus associated with a specific win is awarded. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will hesitate to operate multiple stop operation means without following the notification content.

Gaming machine 12B5. Any of the above gaming machines 12B1 to 12B4 is equipped with a notification determination means (full navigation lottery function S120407 of the main control unit 101) that determines whether or not to notify the specific operation method when the lottery result for the role becomes the specific result, and the partial notification means notifies a portion of the specific operation method when the notification determination means determines not to notify the specific operation method.

According to this gaming machine, the notification determination means determines whether or not to notify a specific operation method when the result of the role lottery is a specific result, and the partial notification means notifies a part of the specific operation method when the notification determination means determines not to notify a specific operation method. This configuration makes it possible to create cases where a specific operation method is notified and cases where a part of the specific operation method is notified when the result of the role lottery is a specific result. As a result, it is possible to diversify the content of notifications in game times when the result of the role lottery is a specific result, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 12B6. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine 12B5 described above is equipped with a second special benefit granting means (an additional game number addition function S120405 of the main control device 101) that grants the special benefit when the notification determination means determines to notify the specific operation method.

With this gaming machine, if the notification determination means determines to notify a specific operation method, a special bonus is awarded. With this configuration, when a specific operation method is notified, the player can receive the special bonus in addition to the bonus associated with achieving a specific win by operating the multiple stop operation means in the specific operation method.

Furthermore, with this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result, a determination is made as to whether or not a special bonus will be awarded based on whether or not a specific operation method will be notified by the notification determination means, and if the notification determination means determines not to notify a specific operation method, a determination is made by the first determination means or the second determination means as to whether or not a special bonus will be awarded. In other words, this gaming machine can be configured so that, in a game in which the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result, the determination as to whether or not a special bonus will be awarded can be made multiple times. This makes it possible to continue playing while keeping the player in the hope of winning the second or subsequent determinations, even if the first determination is unsuccessful, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 12B7. In the gaming machine 12B6 described above, the second special benefit granting means executes processing to grant the special benefit at the timing when the notification determination means determines to notify the specific operation method.

According to this gaming machine, the second special bonus awarding means executes processing to award a special bonus at the timing when the notification determination means determines to notify a specific operation method. With this configuration, once the notification determination means determines to notify a specific operation method, i.e., once the awarding of a special bonus is confirmed, it becomes possible to notify the awarding of a special bonus at any stage of progress in the game thereafter, making it possible to diversify the content and timing of notifications regarding the awarding of a special bonus.

Gaming machine 12B8. The gaming machine 12B6 or 12B7 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a notification according to the content of the special bonus at the timing when the notification determination means determines to notify the specific operation method.

According to this gaming machine, a notification is made according to the details of the special bonus when the notification determination means decides to notify a specific operation method. This configuration allows the player to understand whether or not a special bonus will be awarded based on the presence or absence of a notification, and even if a notification of the special bonus is not made, it is possible to continue playing the game while keeping in mind that a special bonus will be awarded based on a subsequent award determination by the first determination means or the second determination means.

Gaming machine 12B9. Any of gaming machines 12B5 to 12B8 above is equipped with special game state transition means (notification mode B transition function S120311 of main control device 101) for transitioning to a special game state (notification mode B), and the notification determination means is configured to determine whether or not to notify the specific operation method with a higher probability when the result of the lottery for the role in the special game state is the specific result, compared to when the result of the lottery for the role is the specific result in a game state other than the special game state.

With this gaming machine, when in a special gaming state, it is determined with a higher probability whether or not to notify a specific operation method compared to when not in a special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to turn the special gaming state into a gaming state in which a bonus award determination is made with a higher probability. As a result, it becomes possible to have the player play in a gaming state other than the special gaming state while building anticipation of transitioning to the special gaming state, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 12B10. In any of gaming machines 12B1 to 12B9, the special bonus awarding means executes processing to award the special bonus at the timing when a determination is made to award the special bonus.

In this gaming machine, the special bonus awarding means executes processing to award a special bonus when a determination is made to award a special bonus. With this configuration, if the awarding determination means determines that a special bonus should be awarded, it becomes possible to notify the awarding of a special bonus at any stage in the game thereafter, making it possible to diversify the content and timing of notifications regarding the awarding of a special bonus.

Gaming machine 12B11. Any of the above gaming machines 12B1 to 12B10, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that issues a notification according to the content of the special benefit when a determination is made to grant the special benefit.

With this gaming machine, when a special bonus award determination is made, a notification is made according to the details of the special bonus. This configuration allows the player to know whether or not the award determination has been successful based on whether or not a notification according to the details of the special bonus is made. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of gaming machine 12B8, when a special bonus is awarded, the player can be made aware of the opportunity to award the bonus, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 12B12. Any of the above gaming machines 12B1 to 12B11, comprising special game state transition means (notification mode B transition function S120311 of the main control device 101) for transitioning to a special game state (notification mode B), and characterized in that the partial notification means is configured to notify a part of the specific operation method with a higher probability when in the special game state compared to when not in the special game state.

With this gaming machine, when in a special gaming state, a portion of a specific operation method is notified with a higher probability than when not in a special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to make the special gaming state a gaming state in which a grant determination is executed with a higher probability. As a result, it becomes possible to have the player play in a gaming state other than the special gaming state while building anticipation of transitioning to the special gaming state, making it possible to prevent monotony in gaming.

The gaming machines 12A to 12B may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machine 12 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, gaming machine 9, gaming machine 10, and gaming machine 12, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 13A1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
a numerical information storage means (a setting value storage area of the RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) for drawing lots for winning combinations with winning probabilities according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) is provided to award a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
In a gaming machine having a main control means (main control device 101) that includes at least the lottery means and the bonus awarding means and controls the progress of a game, and a sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means
a first command transmitting means (a setting change command transmitting function S130105 of the main control device 101) for transmitting a first command (setting change command) to the sub-control means when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means becomes changeable;
a second command transmitting means (a change end command transmitting function S130404 of the main control device 101) for transmitting a second command (a change end command) to the sub-control means when the state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is changed from a changeable state to an unchangeable state;
a prescribed command transmission means (a bet command transmission function of the main control device 101) for transmitting a prescribed command (bet command) to the sub-control means when a prescribed operation (bet operation) relating to the start of a game round is performed;
The sub-control means
A gaming machine characterized by having a specified notification control means (error notification sound output function S130805 of display control device 81) that controls the execution of a specified notification (error notification sound) indicating that the second command has not been received when the specified command is received without receiving the second command after receiving the first command.

According to this gaming machine, when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means becomes changeable, a first command is sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. Then, when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means changes from a changeable state to an unchangeable state, a second command is sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a prescribed operation related to the start of a game round is performed, a prescribed command is sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. Here, if the sub-control means receives a prescribed command without receiving a second command after receiving the first command, it performs control to issue a prescribed notification indicating that the second command has not been received. With this configuration, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, it is possible to indicate through the prescribed notification that the second command has not been received.

Furthermore, by configuring the system to execute a specified notification based on the receipt of a specified command transmitted when a specified operation related to the start of a game round is performed, it is possible to reduce the chances of a game round starting in a situation where the sub-control means recognizes that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the sub-control means being unable to perform control appropriate to the game round when a game round has started.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 13A2. The gaming machine 13A1 described above is configured so that the game round can be started by operating the start operation means after setting the number of bets, and the specified command transmission means transmits the specified command to the sub-control means when a bet number setting operation to set the number of bets is performed.

This gaming machine is configured so that a round of play can be started by operating the start operation means after setting the number of bets. When a bet number setting operation is performed, a specified command is sent to the sub-control means. This configuration makes it possible to control the execution of a specified notification before a round of play begins. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of a round of play starting in a situation where the sub-control means recognizes that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed.

Gaming machine 13A3. In the gaming machine 13A2 described above, the main control means is equipped with a game round start command sending means (start command sending function of the main control device 101) that sends a game round start command (start command) to the sub-control means when starting the game round, and the sub-control means is configured not to control the execution of the specified notification if it receives the game round start command after receiving the first command without receiving the second command and the specified command.

In this gaming machine, when a game round is started, the main control means transmits a game round start command to the sub-control means. If the sub-control means receives the game round start command after receiving the first command but without receiving the second command and the specified command, it does not control the execution of the specified notification. This configuration makes it possible to continue a game round as is if the game round has already started. It is certainly possible to configure the system to control the execution of the specified notification even if the game round start command is received after receiving the first command but without receiving the second command and the specified command. However, this configuration would mean that the specified notification would be executed after the game round has started, which could confuse players and others, as they would not know whether it is okay to continue the game round.

Gaming machine 13A4. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine 13A2 or 13A3, characterized in that the sub-control means is configured not to control the execution of the specified notification if, after receiving the first command, it receives a command related to the progress of a game round from the main control means without receiving the second command and the specified command.

In this gaming machine, if the sub-control means receives a command related to the progress of a game round from the main control means after receiving the first command, but without receiving the second command and the specified command, it does not perform control to execute the specified notification. This configuration makes it possible to continue a game round as is if the game round has already started. It is certainly possible to configure the sub-control means to execute control to execute the specified notification even if a command related to the progress of a game round is received from the main control means after receiving the first command, but without receiving the second command and the specified command. However, this configuration would result in the specified notification being executed in the middle of a game round, which could confuse players and others, as they would not know whether it was okay to continue the game round.

Gaming machine 13A5. In any of gaming machines 13A1 to 13A4 above, the sub-control means is characterized in that it includes a specified notification termination means (error notification sound output termination function S130604 of the display control device 81) that controls the termination of the specified notification when the state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means changes from an unchangeable state to an changeable state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means changes.

According to this gaming machine, when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means changes from an unchangeable state to an changeable state, control is performed to terminate the specified notification. With this configuration, when the specified notification is issued, it is possible to terminate the specified notification by again performing an operation to change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 13A6. Any of gaming machines 13A1 to 13A5 described above, characterized in that the second command includes information indicating the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the second command includes information indicating the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. In such a configuration, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, it may be impossible to properly perform control based on the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, such as auxiliary effects that suggest the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. However, in a configuration in which control is performed to execute a specified notification when a specified command is received without receiving a second command after receiving a first command, the above concerns can be effectively alleviated.

Gaming machine 13A7. In any of gaming machines 13A1 to 13A6 above, the sub-control means comprises: status notification control means (setting change display function S130607 of display control device 81) that, when the first command is received, controls the execution of a status notification (setting change display) indicating that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it is possible to change the numerical information; and status notification termination means (setting change display termination function S130704 of display control device 81) that, when the second command is received, controls the termination of the status notification.

In this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a first command, it controls to execute a status notification indicating that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed, and when the sub-control means receives a second command, it controls to terminate the status notification. This configuration makes it possible to indicate through the status notification that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed. However, with this configuration, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, the sub-control means will continue to issue the status notification even though the main control means is in a state where it is possible to start a game round. Therefore, by configuring the sub-control means to execute a specified notification based on the reception of a specified command transmitted when a specified operation related to the start of a game round is performed, it becomes possible to indicate through the specified notification that the second command has not been received.

Gaming machine 13A8. In any of the gaming machines 13A1 to 13A7, when a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed, and the specific operation includes a first specific operation (turning the setting key ON) that sets the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means in a changeable state in which it can be changed, a second specific operation (turning the reset switch 72 ON) that selects the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation (turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF) that ends the changeable state, and the requirement for the third specific operation to be performed is that a first detection means (start detection sensor) that detects whether or not the first operation means (start lever 41) is operated. a signal from a second detection means (setting key detection sensor 73a) that detects whether a second operation means (setting key) is being operated has switched from a second operation signal (ON signal) that indicates that the second operation means has been operated to a second non-operation signal (ON signal) that indicates that the second operation means has not been operated, after detecting that the signal from the first detection means has switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal.

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, a first specific operation is required to put the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means into a changeable state where it can be changed, a second specific operation is required to select the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation is required to end the changeable state. Here, the third specific operation is deemed to have been performed when the signal from the first detection means that detects whether the first operation means is being operated has detected that it has switched from a first non-operation signal indicating that the first operation means is not being operated to a first operation signal indicating that the first operation means is being operated, and then the signal from the second detection means that detects whether the second operation means is being operated has detected that it has switched from a second operation signal indicating that the second operation means is being operated to a second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means is not being operated.

By configuring the third specific operation to include at least the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means, it is possible to make fraudulent acts more difficult and reduce the chance of falsely determining that the third specific operation has been performed due to noise, etc. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, by configuring it to detect when the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operating signal to the second non-operation signal, it is possible to more reliably detect the operation of the second operating means than, for example, a configuration that detects the second non-operation signal.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to properly change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 13A9. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with gaming machine 13A8, characterized in that the requirement for the first specific operation to be performed includes detection of input of the second operation signal from the second detection means.

According to this gaming machine, the requirement for the first specific operation to be performed includes detecting that the second operation signal has been input. This configuration makes it possible to perform the first specific operation and the third specific operation using the second operation means, thereby simplifying the specific operations.

Furthermore, if the second operating means is operated so that the second non-operation signal is input from the second detection means in the stage prior to operating the first operating means, i.e., in the stage prior to the third specific operation, after operating the first operating means, it becomes necessary to operate the second operating means again so that the second operating signal is input from the second detection means, and to operate the second operating means again so that the second non-operation signal is input from the second detection means. Therefore, it becomes possible to reliably detect the operation of the second operating means.

Gaming machine 13A10. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 13A9, characterized in that the second operating means is configured to be able to maintain a state in which the second detecting means outputs the second operating signal without the second operating means being operated.

In this gaming machine, the second operating means is configured to be able to maintain a state in which the second detection means outputs a second operating signal without the need to operate the second operating means. With this configuration, if the second operating means is operated to perform the first specific operation, the second operating means can be operated so that the second detection means outputs a second non-operation signal as the third specific operation. This simplifies the specific operations.

Gaming machine 13A11. Any of gaming machines 13A8 to 13A10 described above, characterized in that the requirement for the third specific operation to be performed includes detecting that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal, and then detecting that the second non-operation signal has been input from the second detection means a specified number of times (10 times).

According to this gaming machine, the requirements for the third specific operation to be performed include detecting that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal, and then detecting that the second non-operation signal has been input from the second detection means a specified number of times. This configuration makes it possible to avoid false detection of a switch in the signal from the second detection means due to noise, etc.

Gaming machine 13A12. In the gaming machine 13A11 described above, if the second detection means detects that the second operation signal has been input before the second detection means detects that the second non-operation signal has been input the specified number of times, the gaming machine is configured to again detect that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal.

According to this gaming machine, if the second detection means detects that a second operation signal has been input before the second detection means detects that a second non-operation signal has been input a specified number of times, it re-detects that the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal. This configuration makes it possible to avoid erroneous detection of a switch in the signal from the second detection means due to noise, etc.

Gaming machine 13A13. Any of gaming machines 13A8 to 13A12 described above is configured to store the numerical information selected by the second specific operation in the numerical information storage means when the third specific operation is performed.

With this gaming machine, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information selected by the second specific operation is stored in the numerical information storage means. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means from being changed without the third specific operation being performed.

Gaming machine 13A14. The gaming machine 13A13 described above is equipped with an update means (setting value update function S130210 of the main control unit 101) that updates numerical information when the second specific operation is performed, a storage means (display buffer of RAM 106) that stores the update results of the update means, and a display means (payout number display unit 62) that displays the numerical information stored in the storage means, and is configured so that when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the storage means is stored in the numerical information storage means.

With this gaming machine, when the second specific operation is performed, the updated numerical information is stored in the storage means and displayed on the display means. Then, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the storage means is stored in the numerical information storage means. By configuring the updated numerical information to be displayed when the second specific operation is performed, it becomes possible for the operator performing the specific operation to relatively easily select the numerical information intended by the operator through the second specific operation. Furthermore, by configuring the numerical information updated when the second specific operation is performed to be stored in a storage means different from the numerical information storage means, it becomes possible to prevent the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means from being changed without the third specific operation being performed.

Gaming machine 13A15. Any of gaming machines 13A8 to 13A14 above, further comprising: periodic confirmation means (timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 101) for periodically checking signals from the first detection means and the second detection means; and standby means (interrupt wait processing S130206, S130501 of the main control unit 101) for waiting until confirmation is made by the periodic confirmation means, and wherein the standby means is configured to wait when determining whether the third specific operation has been performed.

According to this gaming machine, when determining whether a third specific operation has been performed, a process of waiting until signals from the first detection means and the second detection means are confirmed by the periodic confirmation means is performed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether a third specific operation has been performed based on the latest status of the signals from the first detection means and the second detection means. As a result, it is possible to avoid, for example, detecting multiple times that the signal from the first detection means has switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal in response to a single operation of the first operation means.

Gaming machine 13B1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
a numerical information storage means (a setting value storage area of the RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) for drawing lots for winning combinations with winning probabilities according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) is provided to award a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
In a gaming machine having a main control means (main control device 101) that includes at least the lottery means and the bonus awarding means and controls the progress of a game, and a sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
The main control means
a first command transmitting means (a setting change command transmitting function S130105 of the main control device 101) for transmitting a first command (a setting change command) to the sub-control means when the specific operation is started;
a second command transmitting means (a change end command transmitting function S130404 of the main control device 101) for transmitting a second command (a change end command) including information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to the sub-control means when the specific operation is completed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second command sending means has performed the process of sending the second command but the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command, the sub-control means can grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means without performing the specific operation again.

This gaming machine is configured so that, even if the main control means performs processing to send a second command but the sub-control means fails to receive the second command, the sub-control means can ascertain the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means without having to perform the specific operation again. This configuration eliminates the need to reset the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, even if the sub-control means fails to receive the second command due to noise or other reasons, thereby reducing the workload of managers of gaming facilities where this gaming machine is installed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of occasions where the sub-control means is unable to perform control in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 13B2. In the gaming machine 13B1 described above, the main control means is equipped with a predetermined command transmission means (start command transmission function of the main control device 101) that transmits a predetermined command (start command) to the sub-control means when a predetermined operation related to the start of a game round (operation of the start lever 41 after setting the number of bets) is performed, and the predetermined command is configured to include information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined operation related to the start of a game round is performed, a predetermined command is sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. Here, the predetermined command includes information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. With this configuration, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, it is able to grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means by receiving the predetermined command. As a result, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, there is no need to reset the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, which can reduce the workload of the manager of the gaming facility where this gaming machine is installed.

Furthermore, by configuring the system so that information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is included in the specified command sent when a specified operation related to the start of a game round is performed, it is possible to reduce the chances of a game round starting when the sub-control means does not have knowledge of the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the sub-control means being unable to perform control in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means when a game round starts.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 13B3. The gaming machine 13B2 described above is configured so that the game round can be started by operating the start operation means after setting the number of bets, and the predetermined command transmission means transmits the predetermined command to the sub-control means when the start operation means is operated after setting the number of bets.

This gaming machine is configured so that a game can be started by operating the start operating means after setting the number of bets. When the start operating means is operated after setting the number of bets, a specified command is sent to the sub-control means. With this configuration, when the sub-control means determines that a game has started, it can also determine the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means at that time. As a result, when a game has started, it is possible to prevent the sub-control means from being unable to perform control in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 13B4. Any of gaming machines 13B1 to 13B3 described above is configured so that the game round can be started by operating the start operation means after setting the bet amount, and the main control means is equipped with bet amount command sending means (bet command sending function of main control device 101) that sends a bet amount command (bet command) to the sub-control means when a bet amount setting operation to set the bet amount is performed, and the bet amount command is configured to include information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

This gaming machine is configured so that a game can be started by operating the start operation means after setting the bet amount. When the bet amount setting operation is performed, a bet amount command including information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is sent to the sub-control means. This configuration allows the sub-control means to grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means at the time it determines that the bet amount has been set, i.e., before a game round is started. As a result, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, it is possible to reduce the chances of a game round being started in a situation where the sub-control means recognizes that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed.

Gaming Machine 13B5. In any of gaming machines 13B1 to 13B4 above, the main control means is equipped with progress status command transmission means (such as a lottery result command transmission function of the main control device 101) that transmits progress status commands (such as lottery result commands) indicating information related to the progress of a game session to the sub-control means, and the progress status commands are configured to include information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the progress status command, which indicates information related to the progress of a game round, also includes information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. With this configuration, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command or the specified command due to noise or the like, it is still possible for the sub-control means to grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means during a game round, and to grasp that the state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means could be changed has ended.

Gaming machine 13B6. In any of gaming machines 13B1 to 13B5 above, the sub-control means comprises: status notification control means (setting change display function S130607 of display control device 81) that, when the first command is received, controls the execution of a status notification (setting change display) indicating that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it is possible to change the numerical information; and status notification termination means (setting change display termination function S130704 of display control device 81) that, when information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received, controls the termination of the status notification.

According to this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a first command, it controls to execute a status notification indicating that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed, and when it receives information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, it controls to terminate the status notification. This configuration makes it possible to indicate through the status notification that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed. However, in this configuration, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, the sub-control means will continue to issue the status notification even though the main control means is in a state where it is possible to start a game round. Therefore, by configuring the sub-control means to be able to ascertain the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means without performing a specific operation again when the second command transmission means has processed to transmit the second command but the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming Machine 13B7. In the gaming machine 13B6 described above, the sub-control means includes an elapsed time measurement means (a confirmation timer subtraction processing function of the display control device 81) that measures the elapsed time since receiving the first command, and the status notification termination means controls the termination of the status notification based on the measurement result of the elapsed time measurement means.

With this gaming machine, the status notification ends based on the amount of time that has elapsed since the first command was received. This configuration allows the sub-control means to determine whether the status notification can continue. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of a game being started immediately after a specific operation is completed.

Gaming Machine 13B8. In gaming machine 13B7 above, the status notification termination means controls to terminate the status notification after the specific time (120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the first command if information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received before the specific time (120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the first command.

According to this gaming machine, if information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received before a predetermined specific time has elapsed since the first command was received, control is performed to end the status notification after the specific time has elapsed since the first command was received. This configuration makes it possible to continue the status notification from the start of a specific operation until the specific time has elapsed, reducing the chances of a game being started immediately after the specific operation has ended.

Gaming machine 13B9. In the gaming machine 13B8 described above, the sub-control means is characterized by including a predetermined notification control means (standby audio output function S131506 of the display control device 81) that controls the execution of a predetermined notification (standby audio output) if information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received before the specific time has elapsed since the first command was received.

According to this gaming machine, if the sub-control means receives information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means before a specific time has elapsed since receiving the first command, the sub-control means performs control to execute a specific notification. This configuration makes it possible to indicate, through the specific notification, that the state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed has ended. As a result, it is possible to avoid confusion for workers who have performed a specific operation because the status notification has not ended even after the specific operation has been completed.

Gaming Machine 13B10. In any of gaming machines 13B7 to 13B9 above, the status notification termination means controls to terminate the status notification at the timing when information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received after a predetermined time (120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the first command.

According to this gaming machine, if information related to numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received after a predetermined specific time has elapsed since the first command was received, control is performed to end the status notification at the timing when the information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received. With this configuration, it becomes possible to immediately end the status notification if a specific time or more is required from the start to the end of a specific operation.

Gaming machine 13B11. In any of the gaming machines 13B1 to 13B10 described above, the specific operation is configured to include a first specific operation (turning the setting key ON) that places the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means in a changeable state in which it can be changed, a second specific operation (turning the reset switch 72 ON) that selects the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation (turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF) that ends the changeable state, and the requirement for the third specific operation to be performed is that a signal from a first detection means (start detection sensor 41a) that detects whether the first operation means (start lever 41) is operated or not is detected, and A gaming machine characterized by a configuration that includes at least the following: detecting that a first non-operation signal (OFF signal) indicating that the first operating means has not been operated has switched to a first operating signal (ON signal) indicating that the first operating means has been operated; and, after detecting that the signal from the first detection means has switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operating signal, detecting that a signal from a second detection means (setting key detection sensor 73a) that detects whether a second operating means (setting key) has been operated has switched from a second operating signal (ON signal) indicating that the second operating means has been operated to a second non-operation signal (OFF signal) indicating that the second operating means has not been operated.

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, a first specific operation is required to put the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means into a changeable state where it can be changed, a second specific operation is required to select the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation is required to end the changeable state. Here, the third specific operation is deemed to have been performed when the signal from the first detection means that detects whether the first operation means is being operated has detected that it has switched from a first non-operation signal indicating that the first operation means is not being operated to a first operation signal indicating that the first operation means is being operated, and then the signal from the second detection means that detects whether the second operation means is being operated has detected that it has switched from a second operation signal indicating that the second operation means is being operated to a second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means is not being operated.

By configuring the third specific operation to include at least the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means, it is possible to make fraudulent acts more difficult and reduce the chance of falsely determining that the third specific operation has been performed due to noise, etc. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, by configuring it to detect when the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operating signal to the second non-operation signal, it is possible to more reliably detect the operation of the second operating means than, for example, a configuration that detects the second non-operation signal.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to properly change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The configurations described in any of gaming machines 13A9 to 13A15 may be combined with gaming machine 13B11, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even in this combination.

Gaming machine 13C1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
a numerical information storage means (a setting value storage area of the RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) for drawing lots for winning combinations with winning probabilities according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) is provided to award a bonus to a player when a winning combination selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
In a gaming machine having a main control means (main control device 101) that includes at least the lottery means and the bonus awarding means and controls the progress of a game, and a sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
The main control means
a first command transmitting means (a setting change command transmitting function S130105 of the main control device 101) for transmitting a first command (a setting change command) to the sub-control means when the specific operation is started;
a second command transmitting means (a change end command transmitting function S130404 of the main control device 101) for transmitting a second command (a change end command) including information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to the sub-control means when the specific operation is completed,
The sub-control means
a status notification control means (a setting change display function S130607 of the display control device 81) that, when receiving the first command, performs control to execute a status notification (setting change display) indicating that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a changeable state;
a status notification terminating means (a setting change display terminating function S130704 of the display control device 81) for controlling to terminate the status notification when information relating to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received;
an elapsed time measuring means (a confirmation timer subtraction processing function of the display control device 81) for measuring the elapsed time from receiving the first command,
The status notification terminating means controls the termination of the status notification based on the measurement result of the elapsed time measuring means.

In this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives the first command, it controls to issue a status notification indicating that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed. This configuration makes it possible to indicate through the status notification that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed. Furthermore, the status notification ends based on the time that has elapsed since the first command was received. This configuration makes it possible for the sub-control means to determine whether to continue the status notification. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the chances of a game being started immediately after a specific operation is completed.

As a result of the above, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of occasions where the sub-control means is unable to perform control in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming Machine 13C2. In the gaming machine 13C1 described above, the status notification termination means controls to terminate the status notification after the specific time (120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the first command if information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received before the specific time (120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the first command.

According to this gaming machine, if information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received before a predetermined specific time has elapsed since the first command was received, control is performed to end the status notification after the specific time has elapsed since the first command was received. This configuration makes it possible to continue the status notification from the start of a specific operation until the specific time has elapsed, reducing the chances of a game being started immediately after the specific operation has ended.

Gaming machine 13C3. In the gaming machine 13C2 described above, the sub-control means is characterized by including a predetermined notification control means (standby audio output function S131506 of the display control device 81) that controls the execution of a predetermined notification (standby audio output) if information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received before the specific time has elapsed since the first command was received.

According to this gaming machine, if the sub-control means receives information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means before a specific time has elapsed since receiving the first command, the sub-control means performs control to execute a specific notification. This configuration makes it possible to indicate, through the specific notification, that the state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed has ended. As a result, it is possible to avoid confusion for workers who have performed a specific operation because the status notification has not ended even after the specific operation has been completed.

Gaming Machine 13C4. In any of gaming machines 13C1 to 13C3 above, if information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received after a predetermined time (120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the first command, the status notification termination means controls to terminate the status notification at the timing when the information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received.

According to this gaming machine, if information related to numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received after a predetermined specific time has elapsed since the first command was received, control is performed to end the status notification at the timing when the information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is received. With this configuration, it becomes possible to immediately end the status notification if a specific time or more is required from the start to the end of a specific operation.

Gaming machine 13C5. Any of gaming machines 13C1 to 13C4 described above, characterized in that if the sub-control means fails to receive the second command despite the second command transmission means having performed the process of transmitting the second command, the sub-control means is able to grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means without having to perform the specific operation again.

This gaming machine is configured so that, even if the main control means performs processing to send a second command but the sub-control means fails to receive the second command, the sub-control means can ascertain the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means without having to perform the specific operation again. This configuration eliminates the need to reset the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, even if the sub-control means fails to receive the second command due to noise or other reasons, thereby reducing the workload of managers of gaming facilities where this gaming machine is installed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of occasions where the sub-control means is unable to perform control in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming Machine 13C6. In any of gaming machines 13C1 to 13C5 above, the main control means is equipped with a predetermined command transmission means (start command transmission function of the main control device 101) that transmits a predetermined command (start command) to the sub-control means when a predetermined operation related to the start of a game round (operation of the start lever 41 after setting the number of bets) is performed, and the predetermined command is configured to include information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined operation related to the start of a game round is performed, a predetermined command is sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. Here, the predetermined command includes information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. With this configuration, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, it is able to grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means by receiving the predetermined command. As a result, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, there is no need to reset the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, which can reduce the workload of the manager of the gaming facility where this gaming machine is installed.

Furthermore, by configuring the system so that information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is included in the specified command sent when a specified operation related to the start of a game round is performed, it is possible to reduce the chances of a game round starting when the sub-control means does not have knowledge of the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the sub-control means being unable to perform control in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means when a game round starts.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming Machine 13C7. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 13C6, configured so that the game round can be started by operating the start operation means after setting the number of bets, and characterized in that the predetermined command transmission means transmits the predetermined command to the sub-control means when the start operation means is operated after setting the number of bets.

This gaming machine is configured so that a game can be started by operating the start operating means after setting the number of bets. When the start operating means is operated after setting the number of bets, a specified command is sent to the sub-control means. With this configuration, when the sub-control means determines that a game has started, it can also determine the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means at that time. As a result, when a game has started, it is possible to prevent the sub-control means from being unable to perform control in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

Gaming machine 13C8. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine 13C6 or 13C7, configured such that the game round can be started by operating the start operation means after setting the bet amount, and the main control means is equipped with bet amount command sending means (bet command sending function of main control device 101) that sends a bet amount command (bet command) to the sub-control means when a bet amount setting operation to set the bet amount is performed, and the bet amount command is configured to include information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

This gaming machine is configured so that a game can be started by operating the start operation means after setting the bet amount. When the bet amount setting operation is performed, a bet amount command including information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is sent to the sub-control means. This configuration allows the sub-control means to grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means at the time it determines that the bet amount has been set, i.e., before a game round is started. As a result, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command due to noise or the like, it is possible to reduce the chances of a game round being started in a situation where the sub-control means recognizes that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is in a state where it can be changed.

Gaming Machine 13C9. In any of gaming machines 13C6 to 13C8 above, the main control means is equipped with progress status command sending means (such as a lottery result command sending function of the main control device 101) that sends progress status commands (such as lottery result commands) indicating information related to the progress of a game session to the sub-control means, and the progress status commands are configured to include information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the progress status command, which indicates information related to the progress of a game round, also includes information related to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. With this configuration, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the second command or the specified command due to noise or the like, it is still possible for the sub-control means to grasp the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means during a game round, and to grasp that the state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means could be changed has ended.

Gaming Machine 13C10. In any of gaming machines 13C1 to 13C9, the specific operation includes a first specific operation (turning the setting key ON) that places the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means in a changeable state, in which the numerical information can be changed; a second specific operation (turning the reset switch 72 ON) that selects the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means; and a third specific operation (turning the start lever 41 ON and then turning the setting key OFF) that ends the changeable state. The requirement for the third specific operation to be performed is that a signal from a first detection means (start detection sensor 41a) that detects whether the first operation means (start lever 41) is operated or not is detected. A gaming machine characterized by a configuration including at least the following: detecting that a first non-operation signal (OFF signal) indicating that the first operating means has been operated has switched to a first operating signal (ON signal) indicating that the first operating means has been operated; and, after detecting that the signal from the first detection means has switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operating signal, detecting that a signal from a second detection means (setting key detection sensor 73a) that detects whether a second operating means (setting key) has been operated has switched from a second operating signal (ON signal) indicating that the second operating means has been operated to a second non-operation signal (OFF signal) indicating that the second operating means has not been operated.

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, a first specific operation is required to put the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means into a changeable state where it can be changed, a second specific operation is required to select the numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means, and a third specific operation is required to end the changeable state. Here, the third specific operation is deemed to have been performed when the signal from the first detection means that detects whether the first operation means is being operated has detected that it has switched from a first non-operation signal indicating that the first operation means is not being operated to a first operation signal indicating that the first operation means is being operated, and then the signal from the second detection means that detects whether the second operation means is being operated has detected that it has switched from a second operation signal indicating that the second operation means is being operated to a second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means is not being operated.

By configuring the third specific operation to include at least the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means, it is possible to make fraudulent acts more difficult and reduce the chance of falsely determining that the third specific operation has been performed due to noise, etc. Furthermore, with regard to the second operating means, by configuring it to detect when the signal from the second detection means has switched from the second operating signal to the second non-operation signal, it is possible to more reliably detect the operation of the second operating means than, for example, a configuration that detects the second non-operation signal.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to properly change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The configurations described in any of gaming machines 13A9 to 13A15 may be combined with gaming machine 13C10, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even in this combination.

The gaming machines 13A to 13C may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 13 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 12, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 14A1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) is provided to award a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
In a gaming machine having a main control means (main control device 101) that includes at least the lottery means and the bonus awarding means and controls the progress of a game, and a sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means
a numerical information setting means (a function for setting the number of mode games in the chance mode S140410) for setting numerical information corresponding to the number of premonition games in the numerical information storage means (a mode game number counter) when transitioning to the premonition mode;
a numerical information updating means for updating the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means (a function for updating the number of mode games played in the premonition mode S141204);
A specific transition means (alarm mode transition function S141206) for transitioning to a specific mode (alarm mode) when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means becomes specific numerical information (10),
The sub-control means
When the transition condition to the premonition mode (transition to the premonition mode) is satisfied, a performance period setting means (10G performance setting processing function S141305) sets a performance period consisting of multiple game times;
a number-of-games information storage means (premonition game number counter) for storing number-of-games information relating to the number of games played during the effect period;
a number-of-times information updating means (premonition game number counter updating function S141402) for updating the number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means;
A performance control means (performance execution functions S141404, S141406 to S141408) for controlling the execution of auxiliary performances during the performance period based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means,
When the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a predetermined operation method (an operation method in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first), the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is updated, and when the plurality of stop operation means are not operated in the predetermined operation method, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means may not be updated.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means is updated regardless of whether the plurality of stop operation means are operated by the specified operation method.

According to this gaming machine, when transitioning to a premonition mode, numerical information is set in the numerical information storage means. When the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means becomes specific numerical information, transition to a specific mode occurs. Here, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is updated when multiple stop operation means are operated using a specific operation method, and may not be updated when multiple stop operation means are not operated using the specific operation method. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage players who expect a transition to a specific mode to operate multiple stop operation means using the specific operation method.

Furthermore, when the conditions for transitioning to the premonition mode are met, the sub-control means sets a presentation period consisting of multiple play times and controls the execution of auxiliary presentations based on the number of play times information stored in the number of play times information storage means. Here, the number of play times information stored in the number of play times information storage means is updated regardless of whether the multiple stop operation means are operated using the specified operation method. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the auxiliary presentations without interrupting the flow of the presentation period, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

It is certainly possible to configure the sub-control means so that if the main control means does not update the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, the sub-control means also does not update the number of times stored in the number of times information storage means. However, if such a configuration is used, the same auxiliary effect will be repeatedly executed in the game round in which the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means was not updated, and in the next or previous game round, which will stop the flow of auxiliary effects during the presentation period. This could lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play if they are forced to view the same auxiliary effect repeatedly.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 14A2. In the gaming machine 14A1 described above, the effect period setting means sets the effect period so that, if no event occurs in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated, the effect period ends with the game round in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means becomes the specific numerical information.

With this gaming machine, if no event occurs in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated, the presentation period is set to end with the game turn in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means becomes specific numerical information. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player of the transition to a specific mode through auxiliary presentations during the presentation period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 14A3. In the gaming machine 14A2 described above, the effect control means controls the execution of a transition notification effect (announcement effect) that notifies the player of a transition to the specific mode during the final play of the effect period set by the effect period setting means, regardless of whether the multiple stop operation means are operated using the specified operation method.

With this gaming machine, regardless of whether the multiple stop operation means are operated using the specified operation method, a transition notification effect is executed during the final play of the effect period set by the effect period setting means, notifying the player of a transition to a specific mode. This configuration makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game while preventing the processing configuration related to the auxiliary effects during the effect period from becoming too complicated.

Gaming machine 14A4. In the gaming machine 14A3 described above, the effect control means controls the execution of a specific notification effect (displaying "preparing") in the game play after the transition notification effect is executed if an event occurs during the effect period in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated.

With this gaming machine, if an event occurs during the presentation period in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated, a specific notification effect is executed in the game turn after the transition notification effect is executed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable even if there is a discrepancy between the game turn in which the transition notification effect is executed and the game turn in which the mode transitions to the specific mode (the last game turn in the premonition mode).

Gaming machine 14A5. In the gaming machine 14A4, the presentation control means controls the specific notification presentation to continue until the specific mode is entered.

With this gaming machine, the special notification effect continues until the game switches to a special mode. This configuration prevents the processing configuration related to the auxiliary effects from becoming too complicated, while also preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

Gaming machine 14A6. In gaming machine 14A4 or 14A5, the effect control means controls the execution of the specific notification effect when the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means indicates a value greater than the number of times play is performed during the effect period set by the effect period setting means.

According to this gaming machine, the presentation control means controls the execution of a specific notification presentation when the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means indicates a value greater than the number of times played during the presentation period set by the presentation period setting means. This configuration makes it possible to control the execution of an auxiliary presentation based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means, even if an event occurs during the presentation period in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated, thereby simplifying the processing configuration related to the auxiliary presentation.

Gaming machine 14A7. In any of gaming machines 14A3 to 14A6, the presentation control means controls the display of the final scene of the transition notification presentation to continue until the specific mode is entered.

With this gaming machine, if an event occurs during the presentation period in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated, the final scene of the transition notification presentation will continue to be displayed until the specific mode is transitioned to. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the amount of data related to the auxiliary presentation from increasing while also preventing players from feeling uncomfortable. In particular, when this configuration is combined with the configuration of any of the above gaming machines 14A4 to 14A6, it becomes possible to simplify the specific notification presentation and prevent the storage capacity of the sub-control means from increasing.

Gaming machine 14A8. In any of gaming machines 14A1 to 14A7, when the result of the lottery for the role is the first result (left, center, right bell 1 and 2 win, left, center bell 1 and 2 win), the main control means controls the multiple cyclic display means so that if the multiple stop operation means are operated by the predetermined operation method, a predetermined win (bell win) is achieved, and if the multiple stop operation means are operated by an operation method other than the predetermined operation method, the predetermined win is not achieved, and the lottery for the role is the second result (center left, center, right bell 1 and 2 win, center right, left bell 1 and 2 win, right, left, center bell 1 and 2 win, right, center, left bell 1 and 2 win, first special bell win to fourth special bell win). A gaming machine comprising: a control means (stop control processing function S410) for controlling the multiple cyclic display means so that, when a predetermined winning combination is achieved, if the multiple stop operation means are operated by a method other than the predetermined operation method, the predetermined winning combination is achieved; and if the multiple stop operation means are operated by the predetermined operation method, the predetermined winning combination is not achieved; the bonus awarding means is configured to award game value (medals) equal to or greater than the number required for one game when the predetermined winning combination is achieved; and the probability that the lottery result for the combination will be the second result is higher than the probability that the lottery result for the combination will be the first result.

With this gaming machine, if the winning combination results in the first result, a predetermined win is achieved by operating the multiple stop operation means in a predetermined manner. If the winning combination results in the second result, a predetermined win is achieved by operating the multiple stop operation means in a manner other than the predetermined manner. When a predetermined win is achieved, more game value than is required for one game is awarded. Furthermore, the probability that the winning combination results in the second result is higher than the probability that the winning combination results in the first result. With this configuration, there is a possibility that the frequency of achieving a predetermined win may differ between players who are aware of the winning combination probability and players who are not, raising concerns that fairness between players may not be ensured. However, if a configuration is adopted in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means may not be updated if the multiple stop operation means are not operated in a predetermined manner, it becomes possible to prompt players to operate the multiple stop operation means in a predetermined manner, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

Gaming machine 14A9. The gaming machine 14A8 described above is equipped with a notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player of an operation method that can achieve the predetermined winning when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is the first result or the second result, and is configured so that when the specific mode is entered, the frequency with which the operation method that can achieve the predetermined winning is notified is at least higher than in the premonition mode.

When this gaming machine transitions to the specific mode, the frequency with which operation methods that can result in a predetermined win are notified is at least higher than in the premonition mode. By applying this configuration to the gaming machine 14A8, it is possible to differentiate the rate at which the game value increases or decreases before and after transitioning to the specific mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 14A10. The gaming machine 14A8 or 14A9 is characterized in that, in a game in which the lottery result for the winning combination is the first result or the second result, if the plurality of stop operation means are not operated using the predetermined operation method, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated.

With this gaming machine, if the multiple stop operation means are not operated using the specified operation method in a game in which the winning combination lottery results in the first or second result, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated. This configuration allows the player to choose between operating the multiple stop operation means using the specified operation method to update the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, or operating the multiple stop operation means using an operation method other than the specified operation method to increase the frequency of achieving a predetermined winning combination.

Gaming machine 14A11. In any of gaming machines 14A1 to 14A10 above, the sub-control means is characterized in that it includes reduction control means (screen darkening processing function S140907) that performs control to reduce the visibility of auxiliary effects during game rounds in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated.

This gaming machine reduces the visibility of the auxiliary effects during game turns in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not updated. This configuration allows the player to visually recognize the content of the auxiliary effects, while encouraging them to operate the multiple stop operation means in a predetermined manner from the next game turn, due to the reduced visibility.

Gaming machine 14B1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
Numerical information acquisition means (point lottery functions S140306, S140503 of the main control device 101) for acquiring numerical information (points) based on the lottery results of the winning combination;
a numerical information storage means (a back point counter of the display control device 81) capable of accumulatively storing the numerical information acquired by the numerical information acquisition means;
An announcement effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) that executes an announcement effect (CZ effect) that notifies information corresponding to the numerical information;
A notification information determination means (a notification point determination processing function S140803 and a notification point change processing function S140805 of the display control device 81) for determining the numerical information to be notified in the notification performance is provided,
The numerical information acquisition means can acquire the numerical information after at least one stop operation means is operated when the lottery result of the role is a predetermined result (push order bell win),
The notification information determination means determines numerical information to be notified in the notification performance during the period from the start of a game round until any of the plurality of stop operation means is operated, and determines numerical information to be notified in the notification performance within the range of numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the numerical information storage means is configured to store one or more pieces of numerical information before the notification information determination means determines the numerical information to be notified in the notification performance.

This gaming machine executes a notification effect that notifies numerical information. The numerical information to be notified in the notification effect is determined between the start of a game round and the operation of one of the multiple stop operation means. This configuration makes it possible, for example, to vary the timing of the notification of the numerical information depending on the game round, or to vary the content of the effect performed before the numerical information is notified depending on the numerical information. As a result, it is possible to diversify the notification effects.

Here, the numerical information acquisition means for acquiring numerical information acquires the numerical information after at least one stop operation means is operated if the result of the role lottery is a predetermined result. In this configuration, if the result of the role lottery in the first play of the specified period is a predetermined result, there is a possibility that the notification effect cannot be executed in that play, or that a notification effect announcing 0 must be executed. If these events occur, there is a concern that this may reduce the player's motivation to play.

In response to this, this gaming machine is configured so that one or more pieces of numerical information are stored in the numerical information storage means before the notification information determination means determines the numerical information to be notified in the notification effect. This configuration makes it possible to execute a notification effect that notifies one or more pieces of numerical information regardless of the result of the winning combination during the first play of the specified period, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 14B2. The gaming machine 14B1 described above is characterized by being equipped with a numerical information addition means (increased point addition function S140707 of the display control device 81) that adds a specified number (50) or more of numerical information to the numerical information cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means when the specified period begins.

With this gaming machine, when the game enters a specified period, numerical information equal to or greater than the specified number is added to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. This configuration makes it possible to determine the numerical information to be announced in the notification effect within the range of 1 to the specified number in the first play of the specified period. As a result, it is possible to diversify the numerical information to be announced in the first play of the specified period, and to prevent the notification effect in the first play of the specified period from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 14B3. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine 14B1 or 14B2 described above, when the numerical information acquisition means acquires the numerical information, the acquired numerical information is notified in the next game or later.

In this gaming machine, when the numerical information acquisition means acquires numerical information, the acquired numerical information is announced from the next game onwards. This configuration reduces the chances that the numerical information accumulated and stored in the numerical information storage means will reach zero, making it possible to execute the announcement effect in an optimal manner.

Gaming machine 14B4. Any of gaming machines 14B1 to 14B3 described above is characterized in that, when the numerical information acquisition means acquires the numerical information, the acquired numerical information is cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means after the notification information determination means determines the numerical information to be notified in the notification effect.

In this gaming machine, when the numerical information acquisition means acquires numerical information, the acquired numerical information is cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means after the notification information determination means determines the numerical information to be announced in the notification effect. With this configuration, when the numerical information acquisition means acquires numerical information, the acquired numerical information can be announced from the next game onwards. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the numerical information cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means will reach 0, making it possible to execute the notification effect in an optimal manner.

Gaming machine 14B5. Any of gaming machines 14B1 to 14B4 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with numerical information subtraction means (announcement point subtraction function S141003 of display control device 81) that, when the announcement effect is executed, subtracts the numerical information announced in the announcement effect from the numerical information cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means.

With this gaming machine, when a notification effect is executed, the numerical information notified in the notification effect is subtracted from the numerical information cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means. This configuration allows the numerical information storage means to have the function of cumulatively storing numerical information that has not been notified in the notification effect.

Gaming machine 14B6. Any of gaming machines 14B1 to 14B5 described above, further comprising a presentation content determination means (presentation content determination processing function S140807 of the display control device 81) for determining the presentation content of the notification presentation, wherein the presentation content determination means determines the presentation content of the notification presentation based on the determination result of the notification information determination means.

With this gaming machine, the content of the notification effect is determined based on the numerical information that has been determined to be notified in the notification effect. This configuration allows the player to visually recognize the notification effect while inferring the magnitude of the notified numerical information from the content of the effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 14B7. A gaming machine in any of gaming machines 14B1 to 14B6 above, characterized in that the numerical information acquisition means is configured to acquire the numerical information before any of the plurality of stop operation means is operated if the result of the lottery for the role is a specified result (a rare role win), and the notification information determination means is configured to determine the numerical information to be announced in the notification effect within the range of numerical information cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means, based on the result acquired by the numerical information acquisition means.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the role lottery is a specified result, numerical information is acquired before any of the multiple stop operation means is operated. Then, when a notification effect is executed in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a specified result, the numerical information to be announced is determined based on the acquired numerical information and within the range of numerical information accumulated and stored in the numerical information storage means. This configuration makes it possible to associate the numerical information acquired in the game in which the notification effect is executed with the numerical information announced in the notification effect, even if the configuration is such that numerical information different from the numerical information acquired in the game in which the notification effect is executed is announced, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. This is because it is possible for the player to infer the magnitude of the numerical information acquired in the current game increment from the announced numerical information.

Gaming machine 14B8. Any of gaming machines 14B1 to 14B7 described above is configured such that, in a game in which the result of the lottery for the role results in the predetermined result, if the multiple stop operation means are operated in a predetermined operation method (an operation method in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first), the frequency of achieving a predetermined win (bell win) is lower than if the multiple stop operation means are not operated in the predetermined operation method, and if the multiple stop operation means are not operated in the predetermined operation method, the numerical information acquisition means does not acquire the numerical information.

With this gaming machine, in a game in which the lottery result for the winning combination is a predetermined result, if the multiple stop operation means are operated using the predetermined operation method, the frequency of the predetermined winning combination will be lower than if the multiple stop operation means are not operated using the predetermined operation method. Conversely, if the multiple stop operation means are not operated using the predetermined operation method, the numerical information acquisition means will not acquire numerical information. This configuration allows the player to choose between operating the multiple stop operation means using the predetermined operation method in the hope of acquiring numerical information, or operating the multiple stop operation means using an operation method other than the predetermined operation method in order to increase the frequency of the predetermined winning combination.

Furthermore, in a configuration where an event occurs in which numerical information is not obtained by operating multiple stop operation means, there is a concern that the notification effect may become monotonous. If the configuration were to simply announce the numerical information acquired in the game round in which the notification effect is executed, if the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a predetermined result, the notification effect could not be initiated unless it was confirmed that the multiple stop operation means had been operated in the predetermined operation method. Furthermore, if the notification effect was to be initiated after it was confirmed that the multiple stop operation means had been operated in the predetermined operation method, the timing of the notification of the numerical information would be limited to after the operation in the predetermined operation method. To address these concerns, it is possible to configure the notification effect to start from the start of the game round. However, with such a configuration, the content of the presentation up until it is confirmed that the multiple stop operation means have been operated in the predetermined operation method would be unrelated to the numerical information being announced. Furthermore, if the multiple stop operation means were not operated in the predetermined operation method, it would be necessary to announce numerical information of 0.

On the other hand, if a configuration is applied in which the numerical information to be notified in the notification effect is determined within the range of numerical information cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means, it is possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 14B9. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 14B8, characterized in that when the notification effect is started in a game in which the lottery result for the winning combination results in the predetermined result, the notification effect is executed to the end regardless of whether the multiple stop operation means are operated in the predetermined operation method.

With this gaming machine, when a notification effect is initiated in a game in which the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a predetermined result, the notification effect will be executed to the end, regardless of whether the multiple stop operation means are operated using the predetermined operation method. In a configuration in which the numerical information to be announced in the notification effect is determined within the range of numerical information accumulated and stored in the numerical information storage means, even if the multiple stop operation means are operated using the predetermined operation method and no numerical information is obtained, the numerical information to be announced in the notification effect will not be affected. Therefore, it is possible to execute the notification effect to the end, regardless of whether the multiple stop operation means are operated using the predetermined operation method.

Gaming machine 14B10. The gaming machine 14B9 described above is characterized in that the notification effect is initiated in a game in which the lottery result for the winning combination results in the predetermined result, and if the multiple stop operation means are not operated using the predetermined operation method, control is performed to reduce the visibility of the notification effect.

This gaming machine starts a notification effect in a play round in which the winning combination results in a predetermined outcome, and if the multiple stop operation means are not operated using the predetermined operation method, control is performed to reduce the visibility of the notification effect. This configuration allows the player to visually recognize the content of the notification effect, while encouraging them to operate the multiple stop operation means using the predetermined operation method from the next play round onwards, as the visibility of the notification effect is reduced.

Gaming machine 14B11. Any of the above gaming machines 14B1 to 14B10, characterized in that if the numerical information acquisition means acquires the numerical information in the final game of the specified period, the acquired numerical information is reported in the next game or later.

With this gaming machine, if numerical information is acquired during the final play of a specified period, that acquired numerical information is reported in the next play or later. This configuration makes it possible to make the player expect that there will be unreported numerical information when the specified period ends, thereby maintaining the player's motivation to play even after the specified period ends.

Gaming machine 14B12. Any of gaming machines 14B1 to 14B11 described above, characterized in that when the specified period has been entered, the numerical information acquisition means acquires the numerical information more frequently than when the specified period has not been entered.

According to this gaming machine, when the specified period has been entered, the numerical information acquisition means acquires numerical information more frequently than when the specified period has not been entered. This configuration reduces the chances that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means will be 0 during the specified period, and increases the frequency with which numerical information of 1 or greater is announced in the announcement performance.

Gaming machine 14B13. Any of gaming machines 14B1 to 14B12 described above, characterized in that, in the first game of the specified period, one or more pieces of numerical information are cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means before the notification information determination means determines the numerical information to be notified in the notification effect.

This gaming machine is configured so that, in the first play of a specified period, one or more pieces of numerical information are cumulatively stored in the numerical information storage means before the notification information determination means determines the numerical information to be notified in the notification effect. This configuration makes it possible to execute a notification effect that notifies one or more pieces of numerical information regardless of the result of the winning combination in the first play of a specified period, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

The gaming machines 14A and 14B may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 14 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A through Y, and the gaming machines 9 through 13, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 15A1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56) that is operated to start the circulating display of the images;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when a stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating the images is operated while operating specific operation means (start lever 41, first credit insertion switch 56, settlement switch 59, stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel), the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means is stopped.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating images while operating the specific operation means, the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the circulating display of images on the circulating display means without ending operation of the specific operation means. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the specific operation means does not return to its initial position due to deterioration over time or the like even after operation has ended, it becomes possible to stop the circulating display of images on the circulating display means without having to operate the specific operation means again to return it to its initial position.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the operability when stopping the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 15A2. A gaming machine as described above in connection with gaming machine 15A1, characterized in that when the specific operation means is not being operated and a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means is stopped.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images is operated when the specific operation means is not being operated, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means will stop. With this configuration, regardless of whether the specific operation means is operated, simply operating the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images will stop the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when stopping the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means.

Gaming machine 15A3. A gaming machine in which the specific operation means in the above gaming machine 15A1 or 15A2 is the start operation means.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating images is operated while the start operation means is operated, the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the circulating display of images on the circulating display means without terminating the operation of the start operation means after operating the start operation means to start a game.

Gaming machine 15A4. Any of gaming machines 15A1 to 15A3 above, wherein the specific operation means is a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that stopped the cyclical display of the images.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is currently circulating the images is operated while the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that has stopped the circulating display of the images is operated, the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means will stop. With this configuration, after operating the stop operation means to stop the circulating display of the images on a specific circulating display means, it is possible to stop the circulating display of the images on the circulating display means without terminating the operation of the stop operation means.

Gaming machine 15A5. Any of gaming machines 15A1 to 15A4 described above, further comprising stop command determination means (stop command confirmation processing function of main control device 101) for determining whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images, and wherein the stop command determination means is not equipped with at least the process for determining whether the specific operation means has been operated (switch state confirmation processing).

This gaming machine is equipped with a stop command determination means that determines whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of images by the cyclical display means, and the stop command determination means is equipped with at least the process of determining whether a specific operation means has been operated. This configuration simplifies the processing structure of the stop command determination means and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in the storage means created by the simplification of the stop command determination means, making it possible to increase gaming enjoyment while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 15A6. In the gaming machine 15A5 described above, the stop command determination means is configured to determine that the stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the images has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal, and is not configured to determine whether or not it has detected that the input signal from at least the specific operation means has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal (step S151206 in the conventional switch state confirmation process).

According to this gaming machine, the stop command determination means is configured to determine that a stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the images has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal, and is not configured to determine whether or not it has detected that the input signal from at least the specific operation means has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal. This configuration makes it possible to issue a stop command while operating the specific operation means.

Gaming machine 15A7. In gaming machine 15A5 or 15A6, the stop command determination means is configured to determine that the stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the images has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal, and is not configured to determine whether or not an ON signal has been input from at least the specific operation means (step S151204 in the conventional switch state confirmation process).

In this gaming machine, the stop command determination means is configured to determine that a stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the images has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal, and is configured not to determine whether or not an ON signal has been input from at least the specific operation means. This configuration makes it possible to issue a stop command while operating the specific operation means.

Gaming machine 15A8. Any of gaming machines 15A1 to 15A4 described above, further comprising stop command determination means (stop command confirmation processing function of main control device 101) for determining whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images, and wherein the stop command determination means is not equipped with a process (switch state confirmation processing) for determining whether an operation means other than the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images has been operated.

This gaming machine is equipped with a stop command determination means that determines whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images. The stop command determination means does not include processing to determine whether an operation means other than the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images has been operated. This configuration simplifies the processing structure of the stop command determination means and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in the storage means created by the simplification of the stop command determination means, making it possible to increase gaming enjoyment while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 15A9. In gaming machine 15A8, the stop command determination means is configured to determine that the stop command has been issued when it detects that an input signal from a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the symbols has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal, and is not configured to determine whether or not it has detected that an input signal from an operation means other than the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the symbols has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal (step S151206 in the conventional switch state confirmation process).

According to this gaming machine, the stop command determination means is configured to determine that a stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal, and is not configured to determine whether it has detected that the input signal from an operation means other than the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal. This configuration makes it possible to issue a stop command while operating a specific operation means.

Gaming machine 15A10. In gaming machine 15A8 or 15A9, the stop command determination means is configured to determine that the stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means performing the cyclical display of the symbols has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal, and is not configured to determine whether an ON signal has been input from an operation means other than the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means performing the cyclical display of the symbols (step S151204 in the conventional switch state confirmation process).

According to this gaming machine, the stop command determination means is configured to determine that a stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal, and is not configured to determine whether an ON signal has been input from an operation means other than the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images. This configuration makes it possible to issue a stop command while operating a specific operation means.

Gaming machine 15A11. Any of gaming machines 15A1 to 15A10 described above is equipped with display means (LEDs provided inside stop switches 42-44) that enter a first display mode (lit) when it is possible to stop the circulating display of the patterns on the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns, and enters a second display mode (unlit) when it is impossible to stop the circulating display of the patterns on the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns, and is configured so that if the specific operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, the first display mode continues.

This gaming machine is provided with display means that switches to a first display mode when it is possible to stop the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means that is currently displaying symbols, and a second display mode when it is not possible to stop the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means that is currently displaying symbols. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player through the display mode of the display means whether it is possible to stop the cyclical display of the symbols, improving operability when stopping the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means. Furthermore, because the first display mode continues when the specific operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, it is possible to actively notify the player that it is possible to stop the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means while operating the specific operation means.

Gaming machine 15B1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
a bet amount setting operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) operated to set the bet amount;
a start lever 41 that is operated to start the cyclical display of the images;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) is provided to award a bonus to a player when a winning combination that has been selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
In a gaming machine in which a game is started based on operating the start operating means after setting a specified number (2 or 3) as the bet number,
This gaming machine is configured so that, after the specified number is set as the number of bets, when the start operation means is operated while operating specific operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, stop switches 42 to 44), a game round is started.

With this gaming machine, after setting a specified number as the bet amount, if the start operation means is operated while operating the specific operation means, a game will begin. This configuration makes it possible to start a game without ending operation of the specific operation means. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the specific operation means has not returned to its initial position due to deterioration over time or the like despite having been operated, a game can be started without having to operate the specific operation means again to return it to its initial position.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve operability when starting a game, and increase the player's enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 15B2. The gaming machine 15B1 described above is characterized in that, after the specified number is set as the number of bets, if the start operation means is operated without operating the specific operation means, a game round will begin.

With this gaming machine, if the start operation means is operated without operating the specific operation means after setting the specified number as the bet, a round of play will begin. This configuration makes it possible to start a round of play by operating the start operation means after setting the specified number as the bet, regardless of whether the specific operation means is operated. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when starting a round of play.

Gaming machine 15B3. In the gaming machine 15B1 or 15B2 described above, the specific operation means is the bet amount setting operation means.

With this gaming machine, after setting the specified number of bets, if the start operation means is operated while operating the bet setting operation means, a round of play will begin. This configuration makes it possible to operate the bet setting operation means to set the number of bets, and then start a round of play without having to stop operating the bet setting operation means.

Gaming machine 15B4. Any of gaming machines 15B1 to 15B3 above, wherein the specific operation means is the stop operation means.

With this gaming machine, after setting a specified number as the bet amount, if the start operation means is operated while the stop operation means is being operated, a round of play will begin. This configuration makes it possible to operate the start operation means while operating the stop operation means prior to starting a round of play, thereby increasing the variety of operations that can be used to start a round of play and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 15B5. Any of gaming machines 15B1 to 15B4 described above, comprising specific processing execution means (main control device 101) that executes specific processing (medal insertion processing S150207, medal return processing S150206, stop position determination processing S1009) when the specific operation means is operated, and characterized in that it does not have the processing (steps S151309 and S151310 in the conventional pre-start processing) that determines whether the specific operation means has been operated in a situation where the specific processing execution means does not execute the specific processing.

This gaming machine is equipped with a specific processing execution means that executes a specific process when a specific operation means is operated, and does not include a process that determines whether a specific operation means has been operated in a situation where the specific processing execution means does not execute a specific process. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration before a game round begins and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in the storage means created by simplifying the processing configuration before a game round begins, making it possible to increase gaming enjoyment while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 15B6. Any of gaming machines 15B1 to 15B5 described above, further comprising a display means (start permission LED) that is in a first display mode (lit) when the specified number is set as the bet number, and in a second display mode (unlit) when at least the specified number is not set as the bet number, and is configured so that if the specific operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, the first display mode continues.

This gaming machine is provided with display means that switches to a first display mode when a specified number is set as the number of bets, and to a second display mode when at least a specified number is not set as the number of bets. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player whether or not a round can be started through the display mode of the display means, thereby improving operability when starting a round of play. Furthermore, if the specific operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, the first display mode continues, making it possible to actively notify the player that a round of play can be started while operating the specific operation means.

Gaming machine 15B7. Any of gaming machines 15B1 to 15B6 described above is characterized in that, if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated while the specific operation means is continued after the start of the game round, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means is stopped.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating images is operated while continuing to operate the specific operation means after a game has started, the circulating display of images on the corresponding circulating display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the circulating display of images on the circulating display means without ending operation of the specific operation means. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the specific operation means does not return to its initial position due to deterioration over time or the like even after operation has ended, it is possible to stop the circulating display of images on the circulating display means without having to operate the specific operation means again to return it to its initial position.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the operability when stopping the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 15B8. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with gaming machine 15B7, characterized in that when the specific operation means is not being operated and a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means is stopped.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images is operated when the specific operation means is not being operated, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means will stop. With this configuration, regardless of whether the specific operation means is operated, simply operating the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images will stop the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when stopping the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means.

Gaming machine 15B9. In gaming machine 15B7 or 15B8 above, if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated while continuing to operate the specific operation means even after the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means has stopped, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means will stop.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated while continuing to operate the specific operation means even after the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means has stopped, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the cyclical display of images on multiple cyclical display means without ending operation of the specific operation means.

Gaming machine 15B10. The gaming machine 15B9 described above further comprises: stop command determination means (stop command confirmation processing function of the main control unit 101) for determining whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images; and stop position determination means (stop position determination processing function S1009 of the main control unit 101) for determining the stop position of the cyclical display means for which the stop command has been issued, if the stop command determination means determines that the stop command has been issued; and is configured such that, if the stop position determination means determines the stop position of the cyclical display means for which the stop command has been issued, the gaming machine returns to the stop command determination means without at least determining whether the operation of the specific operation means has ended and whether the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has ended.

With this gaming machine, once it determines that a stop command has been issued and determines the stop position of the cyclical display means for which the stop command was issued, it returns to the stop command determination means without at least determining whether the operation of the specific operation means has ended or whether the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has ended. This configuration makes it possible to stop the cyclical display of images on multiple cyclical display means without ending the operation of the specific operation means or the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command.

Gaming Machine 15B11. In the gaming machine 15B10 described above, when the stop position determination means determines the stop position of the cyclical display means for which the stop command has been issued, it determines whether or not there is a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the pattern, and if there is a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the pattern, the gaming machine is configured to return to the stop command determination means.

With this gaming machine, once the stop position of the cyclical display means for which a stop command has been issued has been determined, a determination is made as to whether or not there is a cyclical display means currently cyclically displaying images. If there is a cyclical display means currently cyclically displaying images, the process returns to the stop command determination means. This configuration makes it possible to return to determining whether or not a stop command has been issued, regardless of whether or not the operation of the specific operation means or the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has been completed.

Gaming machine 15C1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
a bet amount setting operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) operated to set the bet amount;
a start lever 41 that is operated to start the cyclical display of the images;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) is provided to award a bonus to a player when a winning combination selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
In a gaming machine in which a game is started based on operating the start operating means after setting a specified number (2 or 3) as the bet number,
a display means (start permission LED) that is in a first display mode (lighted on) when the specified number is set as the bet number, and in a second display mode (unlit) when at least the specified number is not set as the bet number;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, stop switches 42 to 44) different from the start operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, the first display mode is continued.

This gaming machine is provided with display means that switches to a first display mode when a specified number is set as the number of bets, and to a second display mode when at least the specified number is not set as the number of bets. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player whether or not a round can be started through the display mode of the display means, thereby improving operability when starting a round of play. Furthermore, if a specific operation means other than the start operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, the first display mode continues, making it possible to actively notify the player that a round of play can be started even when a specific operation means is operated.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve operability when starting a game, and increase the player's enjoyment of the game.

Gaming Machine 15C2. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine 15C1, characterized in that the specific operation means is the bet amount setting operation means.

With this gaming machine, if the bet number setting operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, the first display mode will continue. With this configuration, if the bet number setting operation means does not return to its initial position due to deterioration over time or the like even after operation has been completed, it is no longer necessary to operate the bet number setting operation means again to return it to its initial position, thereby improving operability when starting a game.

Gaming machine 15C3. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine 15C1 or 15C2 described above, the means for switching the display means from the first display mode to the second display mode when the specific operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode (the start permission LED extinguishing process S151304 in the conventional pre-start processing) is not provided.

This gaming machine is equipped with a means for switching the display means from the first display mode to the second display mode when a specific operating means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration before a game round begins and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in the storage means created by simplifying the processing configuration before a game round begins, making it possible to increase gaming enjoyment while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 15C4. Any of gaming machines 15C1 to 15C3 described above, characterized in that a game round is started when the start operation means is operated while the specific operation means is operated after the specified number is set as the bet number.

With this gaming machine, after setting a specified number as the bet amount, if the start operation means is operated while operating the specific operation means, a game will begin. This configuration makes it possible to start a game without ending operation of the specific operation means. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the specific operation means has not returned to its initial position due to deterioration over time or the like despite having been operated, a game can be started without having to operate the specific operation means again to return it to its initial position.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve operability when starting a game, and increase the player's enjoyment of the game.

Gaming Machine 15C5. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 15C4, characterized in that a game round is started when the start operation means is operated without operating the specific operation means after the specified number has been set as the bet number.

With this gaming machine, if the start operation means is operated without operating the specific operation means after setting the specified number as the bet, a round of play will begin. This configuration makes it possible to start a round of play by operating the start operation means after setting the specified number as the bet, regardless of whether the specific operation means is operated. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when starting a round of play.

Gaming machine 15C6. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine 15C4 or 15C5 described above is equipped with a specific processing execution means (main control device 101) that executes specific processing (medal insertion processing S150207, stop position determination processing S1009) when the specific operation means is operated, and that it is not equipped with a process for determining whether the specific operation means has been operated in a situation where the specific processing execution means does not execute the specific processing (steps S151309 and S151310 in the conventional pre-start processing).

This gaming machine is equipped with a specific processing execution means that executes a specific process when a specific operation means is operated, and does not include a process that determines whether a specific operation means has been operated in a situation where the specific processing execution means does not execute a specific process. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration before a game round begins and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in the storage means created by simplifying the processing configuration before a game round begins, making it possible to increase gaming enjoyment while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 15C7. Any of gaming machines 15C4 to 15C6 described above is characterized in that, if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated while the specific operation means is continued after the start of the game round, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means is stopped.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating images is operated while continuing to operate the specific operation means after a game has started, the circulating display of images on the corresponding circulating display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the circulating display of images on the circulating display means without ending operation of the specific operation means. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the specific operation means does not return to its initial position due to deterioration over time or the like even after operation has ended, it is possible to stop the circulating display of images on the circulating display means without having to operate the specific operation means again to return it to its initial position.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the operability when stopping the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming Machine 15C8. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with gaming machine 15C7, characterized in that when the specific operation means is not being operated and a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means is stopped.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images is operated when the specific operation means is not being operated, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means will stop. With this configuration, regardless of whether the specific operation means is operated, simply operating the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images will stop the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when stopping the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means.

Gaming machine 15C9. In gaming machine 15C7 or 15C8 above, if the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating the images is operated while continuing to operate the specific operation means even after the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means has stopped, the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means is stopped.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated while continuing to operate the specific operation means even after the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means has stopped, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the cyclical display of images on multiple cyclical display means without ending operation of the specific operation means.

Gaming machine 15C10. The gaming machine 15C9 described above further comprises: stop command determination means (stop command confirmation processing function of the main control unit 101) for determining whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images; and stop position determination means (stop position determination processing function S1009 of the main control unit 101) for determining a stop position for the cyclical display means for which the stop command has been issued, if the stop command determination means determines that the stop command has been issued; and is configured such that, if the stop position determination means determines a stop position for the cyclical display means for which the stop command has been issued, the gaming machine returns to the stop command determination means without at least determining whether the operation of the specific operation means has ended and whether the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has ended.

With this gaming machine, once it determines that a stop command has been issued and determines the stop position of the cyclical display means for which the stop command was issued, it returns to the stop command determination means without at least determining whether the operation of the specific operation means has ended or whether the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has ended. This configuration makes it possible to stop the cyclical display of images on multiple cyclical display means without ending the operation of the specific operation means or the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command.

Gaming Machine 15C11. In the gaming machine 15C10 described above, when the stop position determination means determines the stop position of the cyclical display means for which the stop command has been issued, it determines whether or not there is a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the pattern, and if there is a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the pattern, the gaming machine is configured to return to the stop command determination means.

With this gaming machine, once the stop position of the cyclical display means for which a stop command has been issued has been determined, a determination is made as to whether or not there is a cyclical display means currently cyclically displaying images. If there is a cyclical display means currently cyclically displaying images, the process returns to the stop command determination means. This configuration makes it possible to return to determining whether or not a stop command has been issued, regardless of whether or not the operation of the specific operation means or the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has been completed.

Gaming machine 15C12. Any of gaming machines 15C4 to 15C11 above, wherein the specific operation means is the stop operation means.

With this gaming machine, after setting a specified number as the bet amount, if the start operation means is operated while the stop operation means is being operated, a round of play will begin. This configuration makes it possible to operate the start operation means while operating the stop operation means prior to starting a round of play, thereby increasing the variety of operations that can be used to start a round of play and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 15D1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
a bet amount setting operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) operated to set the bet amount;
a start lever 41 that is operated to start the cyclical display of the images;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) is provided to award a bonus to a player when a winning combination selected in the lottery for the combination is achieved,
In a gaming machine in which a game is started based on operating the start operating means after setting a specified number (2 or 3) as the bet number,
After setting the specified number as the number of bets, if the start operation means is operated while at least one of the stop operation means is operated, a game round is started;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, if the operation of at least one of the stop operation means is continued even after the game round has started, when a stop operation means different from the stop operation means that continued the operation and which corresponds to the circulating display means that is circulating the images is operated, the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means is stopped.

With this gaming machine, after setting a specified number as the bet amount, if the start operation means is operated while at least one of the stop operation means is operated, a round of play will begin. This configuration makes it possible to start a round of play without terminating the operation of the stop operation means. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the stop operation means has not returned to its initial position due to deterioration over time or the like despite having been operated, a round of play can be started without having to operate the stop operation means again to return it to its initial position.

Furthermore, if operation of at least one of the stop operation means continues after a game has started, and a stop operation means different from the stop operation means that continued the operation and that corresponds to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images is operated, the cyclical display of images on the corresponding cyclical display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means without terminating operation of the stop operation means that is still being operated.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve operability when starting a game or stopping the circulating display of images, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 15D2. A gaming machine characterized by the configuration of gaming machine 15D1 described above, wherein when a stop operation means corresponding to a circulating display means that is circulating the images is operated while continuing to operate the stop operation means that continued the operation even after the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means has stopped, the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means stops.

With this gaming machine, if a stop operation means corresponding to a circulating display means that is circulating images is operated while continuing to operate the stop operation means even after the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means has stopped, the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the circulating display of images on multiple circulating display means without terminating the operation of the stop operation means that was started before the start of a game.

Gaming machine 15D3. The gaming machine 15D2 described above further comprises stop command determination means (stop command confirmation processing function of the main control unit 101) for determining whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images, and stop position determination means (stop position determination processing function S1009 of the main control unit 101) for determining a stop position for the cyclical display means for which the stop command was issued, if the stop command determination means determines that the stop command has been issued; and is configured such that, if the stop position determination means determines a stop position for the cyclical display means for which the stop command was issued, the gaming machine returns to the stop command determination means without at least determining whether the operation of the stop operation means that continued the operation has ended or whether the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has ended.

With this gaming machine, once it determines that a stop command has been issued and determines the stop position of the cyclical display means for which the stop command was issued, it returns to the stop command determination means without at least determining whether the operation of the stop operation means that continued operation has ended or whether the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has ended. This configuration makes it possible to stop the cyclical display of images on multiple cyclical display means without terminating the operation of the stop operation means that began operation before the start of a game or the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command.

Gaming Machine 15D4. In the gaming machine 15D3 described above, when the stop position determination means determines the stop position of the cyclical display means for which the stop command has been issued, it determines whether or not there is a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the image, and if there is a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the image, the gaming machine is configured to return to the stop command determination means.

With this gaming machine, once the stop position of the cyclical display means for which a stop command has been issued has been determined, a determination is made as to whether or not there is a cyclical display means currently cyclically displaying images. If there is a cyclical display means currently cyclically displaying images, the process returns to the stop command determination means. This configuration makes it possible to return to determining whether or not a stop command has been issued, regardless of whether or not the operation of the stop operation means that began before the start of a game or the operation of the stop operation means that issued the stop command has been completed.

Gaming machine 15D5. Any of gaming machines 15D1 to 15D4 described above is configured such that, after a game round has started, if the operation of a stop operation means that has been operated before the start of the game round is terminated and the stop operation means is operated again, the cyclical display of the image on the corresponding cyclical display means stops.

With this gaming machine, after a game has started, if the operation of the stop operation means that was operated before the game started is terminated and that stop operation means is operated again, the cyclical display of the corresponding image on the cyclical display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the operations that stop the cyclical display of images, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 15D6. Any of gaming machines 15D1 to 15D5 described above, characterized in that a game round is started when the start operation means is operated without operating any of the stop operation means after the specified number has been set as the number of bets.

With this gaming machine, if the start operation means is operated after the specified number of bets has been set and none of the stop operation means has been operated, a round of play will begin. This configuration makes it possible to start a round of play by operating the start operation means, regardless of whether the stop operation means has been operated or not, after the specified number of bets has been set. As a result, it is possible to improve operability when starting a round of play.

Gaming machine 15D7. Any of gaming machines 15D1 to 15D6 described above, characterized in that the process of determining whether the stop operation means has been operated when the game round has not yet started (steps S151309 and S151310 in the conventional pre-start process) is not performed.

This gaming machine does not include the process of determining whether the stop operation means has been operated when a game has not yet started. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration before a game starts and reduces the number of processing programs. Furthermore, processing programs related to gameplay, etc., can be stored using the free space in the storage means created by simplifying the processing configuration before a game starts, making it possible to increase gaming enjoyment while suppressing increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 15D8. Any of gaming machines 15D1 to 15D7 described above, further comprising a display means (start permission LED) that is in a first display mode (lit) when the specified number is set as the bet number, and in a second display mode (unlit) when at least the specified number is not set as the bet number, and is configured so that if the stop operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, the first display mode continues.

This gaming machine is provided with display means that switches to a first display mode when a specified number is set as the number of bets, and to a second display mode when at least the specified number is not set as the number of bets. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player whether or not a round of play can be started through the display mode of the display means, thereby improving operability when starting a round of play. Furthermore, if the stop operation means is operated while the display means is in the first display mode, the first display mode continues, making it possible to actively notify the player that a round of play can be started while operating the stop operation means.

Gaming machine 15D9. Any of gaming machines 15D1 to 15D8 described above is characterized in that, even if the operation of the start operation means is continued after the game round has started, the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means will stop if the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is operated.

With this gaming machine, if the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating images is operated while the start operation means is continued even after a game has started, the circulating display of the images on the corresponding circulating display means will stop. This configuration makes it possible to stop the circulating display of images on multiple circulating display means without terminating the operation of the start operation means.

Gaming machine 15D10. Any of gaming machines 15D1 to 15D9 described above, further comprising stop command determination means (stop command confirmation processing function of main control device 101) for determining whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of the images of the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images, and wherein the stop command determination means is configured to determine that the stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal.

This gaming machine is equipped with a stop command determination means for determining whether a stop command has been issued to stop the cyclical display of the symbols by the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the symbols. The stop command determination means is configured to determine that a stop command has been issued when it detects that the input signal from the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the symbols has switched from an OFF signal to an ON signal. This configuration makes it possible to determine that a stop command has not been issued for stop operation means that were operated before a game round began, and to determine that a stop command has been issued for stop operation means that were operated after a game round began. As a result, if at least one operation of the stop operation means continues after a game round begins, and if a stop operation means different from the stop operation means that continued the operation is operated and that corresponds to the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the symbols, the cyclical display of the symbols by the corresponding cyclical display means can be stopped.

Gaming Machine 15D11. In the gaming machine 15D10 described above, the stop command determination means is configured not to determine whether or not an ON signal has been input from the stop operation means (step S151204 in the conventional switch state confirmation process).

In this gaming machine, the stop command determination means is configured so as not to determine whether or not an ON signal has been input from the stop operation means. This configuration makes it possible to continue operating the stop operation means that was operated before the start of a game round, while operating another stop operation means to issue a stop command. Furthermore, with this configuration, it is possible to continue operating the stop operation means that issued the stop command, while operating another stop operation means to issue a stop command. Therefore, by providing more variety in the operations that stop the circulating display of images, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 15D12. In gaming machine 15D10 or 15D11 described above, the stop command determination means is configured not to determine whether or not an ON signal has been input from the start operation means (step S151204 in the conventional switch state confirmation processing).

In this gaming machine, the stop command determination means is configured so as not to determine whether or not an ON signal has been input from the start operation means. This configuration makes it possible to stop the cyclical display of images on multiple cyclical display means without terminating the operation of the start operation means.

The gaming machines 15A to 15D may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 15 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 14, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 16A1. Granting/non-granting determination means (main control device 101's assist lottery processing function S160302 and assist acquisition processing function S160404, S160608) for determining whether or not to grant advantageous rights (assist benefits) during a predetermined period (non-AT mode);
When the granting/non-granting determining means determines that the advantageous right should be granted, a suggestion information display means (icon display areas 651 to 655 of the auxiliary display unit 65) displays suggestion information (icons) relating to the granted advantageous right during the predetermined period;
When the granting/non-granting determining means determines that the advantageous right should be granted, the system is provided with an advantage-improving means (small AT transition processing function S160910 of the main control device 101) for increasing the degree of advantage of the player in a specific period (small AT mode) compared to when the granting/non-granting determining means does not determine that the advantageous right should be granted,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestive information display means is configured to, when the granting/non-granting determining means decides to grant the advantageous rights multiple times, display the suggestive information in the order of the advantageous rights granted, or display the suggestive information in an order different from the order of the advantageous rights granted.

With this gaming machine, advantageous rights may be granted during a specified period, and if advantageous rights are granted, the player's degree of advantage during the specified period will be greater than if the advantageous rights were not granted. This configuration makes it possible to associate play during a specified period with play during a specific period. Furthermore, since it is possible to encourage players to play during the specified period while anticipating the granting of advantageous rights, it is possible to prevent play during the specified period from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, when advantageous rights are granted, suggestive information related to the granted advantageous rights is displayed during the specified period. If advantageous rights are granted multiple times, the suggestive information may be displayed in the order of the granted advantageous rights, or in an order different from the order of the granted advantageous rights. This configuration allows players to understand the status of their advantageous rights acquisition through the displayed suggestive information, while diversifying the display format of the suggestive information.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 16A2. The gaming machine 16A1 described above is equipped with a notification effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) that, when the suggestive information display means displays the suggestive information, executes a notification effect (up number addition effect) that notifies the user of the content of the advantageous right corresponding to the suggestive information, and is configured so that, when the grant/non-grant determination means has decided to grant the advantageous right multiple times, the suggestive information display means displays the suggestive information in the order in which it will be used in the notification effect.

With this gaming machine, when suggestive information is displayed, a notification effect is executed to notify the player of the content of the advantageous right corresponding to the suggestive information. With this configuration, when suggestive information is displayed, it is possible to have the player play for a specified period while anticipating the content of the advantageous right, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous over the specified period. Furthermore, if advantageous rights are granted multiple times, the suggestive information is displayed in the order used in the notification effect. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid player confusion due to the difference between the order in which the suggestive information is displayed and the order in which the suggestive information is used in the notification effect.

Gaming machine 16A3. The gaming machine 16A1 or 16A2 described above is equipped with auxiliary effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) that executes auxiliary effects (up number addition effects and effects in the first game of the battle part) using the suggestive information during the specified period when the suggestive information display means displays the suggestive information, and is configured so that the suggestive information display means displays the suggestive information in the order used in the auxiliary effects when the grant/non-grant determination means has decided to grant the advantageous right multiple times.

With this gaming machine, when suggestive information is displayed, an auxiliary effect using the suggestive information is executed for a specific period. This configuration makes it possible to closely associate a predetermined period with a specific period through the auxiliary effect, and to diversify the effects during the specific period. Furthermore, if advantageous rights are granted multiple times, the suggestive information is displayed in the order used in the auxiliary effect. This configuration makes it possible to avoid player confusion due to the difference between the order in which the suggestive information is displayed and the order in which the suggestive information is used in the auxiliary effect.

Gaming machine 16A4. Any of the gaming machines 16A1 to 16A3 described above, characterized in that the suggestion information display means is configured to display the suggestion information in the order of the advantageous rights used by the advantageous means when the grant/non-grant determination means decides to grant the advantageous rights multiple times.

With this gaming machine, if advantageous rights are granted multiple times, suggestive information is displayed in the order in which the advantageous rights are used by the advantageous means. This configuration allows players to understand how the advantageous means work, deepening their knowledge of this gaming machine and increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine 16A5. Any of gaming machines 16A1 to 16A4 above, wherein the grant determination means is configured to determine whether to grant a first advantageous right (upward benefit) or whether to grant a second advantageous right (continuation benefit) of a different type from the first advantageous right, and wherein the suggestive information display means is configured to, when displaying first suggestive information (up icon) suggesting the first advantageous right and second suggestive information (win icon) suggesting the second advantageous right side by side, display the second suggestive information side by side after the first suggestive information, regardless of the order in which the first advantageous right and the second advantageous right were granted.

With this gaming machine, when first suggestion information suggesting a first advantageous right and second suggestion information suggesting a second advantageous right are displayed side by side, the second suggestion information is displayed side by side after the first suggestion information, regardless of the order in which the first advantageous right and second advantageous right were granted. With this configuration, for example, when multiple pieces of first suggestion information and one piece of second suggestion information are displayed side by side, it is possible to display the second suggestion information after the first suggestion information is displayed consecutively. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the number of first advantageous rights and the number of second advantageous rights that have been acquired.

Gaming machine 16A6. The gaming machine 16A5 described above, characterized in that the suggestive information display means, when displaying multiple pieces of first suggestive information in a row, displays them in the order in which the first advantageous rights were granted.

With this gaming machine, when multiple pieces of first suggestive information are displayed side by side, they are displayed in the order in which the first advantageous rights were granted. This configuration makes it possible for the player to easily understand the order in which the first advantageous rights were granted, at least with regard to the first advantageous rights.

Gaming machine 16A7. The gaming machine 16A5 or 16A6 described above is equipped with special period transition means (large AT transition processing function S161410 of the main control unit 101) that transitions to a special period (large AT mode) when a specific condition (winning the continuation lottery) is met a specific number of times (three times) during the specific period, and is configured so that when the first advantageous right is granted, the probability of the specific condition being met is higher than when the first advantageous right is not granted, and when the second advantageous right is granted, the specific condition is deemed to have been met a specific number of times (one time).

This gaming machine transitions to a special period if a specific condition is met a specific number of times during a specific period. When a first advantageous right is granted, the probability of the specific condition being met is higher than when the first advantageous right is not granted, and when a second advantageous right is granted, the specific condition is met a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, the player's interest will be drawn to whether the number of times the specific condition is met will reach a specific number depending on the number of second advantageous rights acquired. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the number of times the specific condition is met will not reach a specific number with only the acquired second advantageous right, the player's interest will likely be drawn to the number of first advantageous rights acquired. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that the player can easily grasp the number of first advantageous rights and the number of second advantageous rights acquired, it is possible to display suggestive information that meets the player's needs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 16A8. In the gaming machine 16A7 described above, when the grant determination means determines to grant the second advantageous right while the first suggestive information and the second suggestive information are displayed side by side, and it is determined that the specific condition will be met the specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the gaming machine is characterized by including an order change means for changing the order of the suggestive information so that the second suggestive information appears first.

With this gaming machine, if it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the order of the suggestive information is changed so that the second suggestive information is listed first. If it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, it is expected that the player will lose interest in the number of first advantageous rights acquired. Therefore, in such a case, by changing the order of the suggestive information so that the second suggestive information is listed first, it is possible to display suggestive information that meets the player's needs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 16A9. In the gaming machine 16A7 or 16A8, when the first suggestive information and the second suggestive information are displayed side by side and the grant determination means determines to grant the second advantageous right, and when it is determined that the specific condition will be met the specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising suggestive information change means (additional icon change function S162407 of the display control device 81) that changes the first suggestive information to third suggestive information (additional icon).

With this gaming machine, when it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the displayed first suggestive information is changed to the third suggestive information. If the first suggestive information continues to be displayed even after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, it is possible that the player may get the impression that they have wasted their money every time they see the first suggestive information, and may lose interest in the game. Therefore, in such cases, the above concerns can be effectively resolved by changing the first suggestive information to the third suggestive information.

Gaming machine 16A10. Any of gaming machines 16A7 to 16A9 described above, characterized in that after it is determined that the specific condition will be met the specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, if the grant determination means decides to grant the advantageous right, if it decides to grant the first advantageous right, or if it decides to grant the second advantageous right, the gaming machine is configured so that third suggestive information (additional icon) is displayed on the suggestive information display means.

With this gaming machine, if the first or second advantageous right is granted after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times with the second advantageous right, the third suggestive information will be displayed regardless of which advantageous right is granted. If the configuration were to display suggestive information corresponding to the granted advantageous right after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times with the second advantageous right, it is possible that the player might get the impression that they have wasted their money and lose interest in the game. Therefore, in such cases, the above concerns can be resolved effectively by displaying the third suggestive information instead of the suggestive information corresponding to the advantageous right that has been acquired.

Gaming machine 16A11. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine 16A9 or 16A10 is provided with a special bonus granting means (game number addition functions S161506, S161508, S161511 of the main control device 101) that grants a special bonus (addition to the number of games) during the special period when the third suggestive information is displayed on the suggestive information display means.

With this gaming machine, when the third suggestion information is displayed, a special bonus is awarded during a special period. This configuration makes it possible to prevent so-called wasted draws when it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times with the second advantageous right during a specified period, even if the first advantageous right or second advantageous right is subsequently awarded. As a result, it is possible to prevent gameplay during the specified period from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 16B1. Granting/non-granting determination means (main control device 101's assist lottery processing function S160302 and assist acquisition processing function S160404, S160608) for determining whether or not to grant advantageous rights (assist benefits) during a predetermined period (non-AT mode);
When the granting/non-granting determining means determines that the advantageous right should be granted, the system is provided with an advantage-improving means (small AT transition processing function S160910 of the main control device 101) for increasing the degree of advantage of the player in a specific period (small AT mode) compared to when the granting/non-granting determining means does not determine that the advantageous right should be granted,
A gaming machine characterized in that the benefit of the advantageous right can be changed depending on the grant status of the advantageous right.

With this gaming machine, advantageous rights may be granted for a specified period of time, and if advantageous rights are granted, the player's degree of advantage in the specified period will be greater than if the advantageous rights were not granted. This configuration makes it possible to associate play in a specified period with play in a specific period of time. Furthermore, since it is possible to have players play in a specified period with the expectation that advantageous rights will be granted, it is possible to prevent play in a specified period from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, the benefits of advantageous rights may change depending on the status of the advantageous rights. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the chances of so-called wasted withdrawals when a decision is made to grant advantageous rights, and to reduce the chances of players losing their motivation to play.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 16B2. A gaming machine characterized by being configured such that, when the status of the granting of the advantageous right reaches a predetermined status (a status in which three continuous benefits have been acquired), the benefit of transitioning to the specific period or the benefit of transitioning to the specific period after playing a predetermined game is added.

With this gaming machine, when the status of granting advantageous rights reaches a predetermined state, the benefit of transitioning to a specific period is added, or the benefit of transitioning to a specific period after playing a predetermined game. This configuration makes it possible to play during the predetermined period while hoping that the status of granting advantageous rights will reach a predetermined state, and prevents play during the predetermined period from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 16B3. The gaming machine 16B1 or 16B2 described above is equipped with special period transition means (large AT transition processing function S161410 of the main control unit 101) for transitioning from the specific period to a special period (large AT mode), and is configured such that if the grant status of the advantageous right is a predetermined status (a situation in which three continuous benefits have been obtained) and the grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous right, the benefit for the special period is granted in place of the benefit for the specific period based on the granted advantageous right.

With this gaming machine, if a new advantageous right is granted when the advantageous right granting status is in the first status, a special period benefit is granted in place of the benefit for the specific period based on the granted advantageous right. This configuration makes it possible for a player to play for a specified period in the hope of being granted further advantageous rights even after the advantageous right granting status has changed to the first status, thereby preventing play for the specified period from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 16B4. Any of gaming machines 16B1 to 16B3 above, wherein the grant/non-grant determination means is configured to determine whether to grant a first advantageous right (upward benefit) or whether to grant a second advantageous right (continuation benefit) of a different type of benefit from the first advantageous right, and wherein the grant status of the advantageous right changes when the grant/non-grant determination means determines to grant the second advantageous right after deciding to grant the first advantageous right and reaches a predetermined status (a situation in which three continuation benefits have been acquired), in which case the benefit of the granted first advantageous right is changed.

With this gaming machine, if a second advantageous right is granted while a first advantageous right has been granted and a predetermined situation occurs, the benefit of the granted first advantageous right will change. This configuration makes it possible to change the benefit of the first advantageous right, for example, when a predetermined situation occurs and the benefit of the first advantageous right is no longer necessary, thereby reducing the chances of so-called wasted withdrawals.

Gaming machine 16B5. Any of gaming machines 16B2 to 16B4 above, characterized in that the specified situation is a situation in which the player's degree of advantage during the specific period is maximized by the benefit of the granted advantageous rights.

With this gaming machine, the benefits granted are changed when the player's degree of advantage over a specific period is maximized by the benefits of the granted advantageous rights. This configuration makes it possible to change the benefits of advantageous rights when there is no longer a need to receive them over a specified period, reducing the chances of so-called wasted draws.

Gaming machine 16B6. Any of the gaming machines 16B1 to 16B5 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with suggestion information display means (icon display areas 651 to 655 of the auxiliary display unit 65) that displays suggestion information (icons) suggesting information related to the benefits of the granted advantageous rights during the specified period when the grant/non-grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous rights.

With this gaming machine, when an advantageous right is granted, suggestive information is displayed for a specified period of time, suggesting information related to the benefits of the granted advantageous right. This configuration allows the player to understand the status of obtaining the advantageous right through the suggestive information, and prevents the game from becoming monotonous over the specified period of time.

Gaming machine 16B7. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the present invention, characterized in that the suggestive information display means is configured to, when the grant/non-grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous rights multiple times, display the suggestive information in the order of the advantageous rights granted, or display the suggestive information in an order different from the order of the advantageous rights granted.

With this gaming machine, when advantageous rights are granted multiple times, the suggestive information may be displayed in the order of the granted advantageous rights, or in an order different from the order of the granted advantageous rights. This configuration allows the player to understand the status of advantageous rights acquisition through the displayed suggestive information, while also diversifying the display format of the suggestive information.

Gaming machine 16B8. In gaming machine 16B6 or 16B7, the grant determination means is configured to determine whether to grant a first advantageous right (upward benefit) or whether to grant a second advantageous right (continuation benefit) of a different type of benefit from the first advantageous right, and the suggestive information display means is configured to, when displaying first suggestive information (up icon) suggesting the first advantageous right and second suggestive information (win icon) suggesting the second advantageous right side by side, display the second suggestive information side by side after the first suggestive information, regardless of the order in which the first advantageous right and the second advantageous right were granted.

With this gaming machine, when first suggestion information suggesting a first advantageous right and second suggestion information suggesting a second advantageous right are displayed side by side, the second suggestion information is displayed side by side after the first suggestion information, regardless of the order in which the first advantageous right and second advantageous right were granted. With this configuration, for example, when multiple pieces of first suggestion information and one piece of second suggestion information are displayed side by side, it is possible to display the second suggestion information after the first suggestion information is displayed consecutively. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the number of first advantageous rights and the number of second advantageous rights that have been acquired.

Gaming machine 16B9. The gaming machine 16B8 described above is equipped with special period transition means (large AT transition processing function S161410 of the main control unit 101) that transitions to a special period (large AT mode) when a specific condition (winning the continuation lottery) is met a specific number of times (three times) during the specific period, and is configured so that when the first advantageous right is granted, the probability of the specific condition being met is higher than when the first advantageous right is not granted, and when the second advantageous right is granted, the specific condition is deemed to have been met a specific number of times (one time).

This gaming machine transitions to a special period if a specific condition is met a specific number of times during a specific period. When a first advantageous right is granted, the probability of the specific condition being met is higher than when the first advantageous right is not granted, and when a second advantageous right is granted, the specific condition is met a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, the player's interest will be drawn to whether the number of times the specific condition is met will reach a specific number depending on the number of second advantageous rights acquired. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the number of times the specific condition is met will not reach a specific number with only the acquired second advantageous right, the player's interest will likely be drawn to the number of first advantageous rights acquired. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that the player can easily grasp the number of first advantageous rights and the number of second advantageous rights acquired, it is possible to display suggestive information that meets the player's needs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 16B10. In the gaming machine 16B9 described above, the grant determination means determines to grant the second advantageous right when the first suggestive information and the second suggestive information are displayed side by side, and when it is determined that the specific condition will be met the specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the gaming machine is characterized by including suggestive information change means (additional icon change function S162407 of the display control device 81) that changes the first suggestive information to third suggestive information (additional icon).

With this gaming machine, when it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the displayed first suggestive information is changed to the third suggestive information. If the first suggestive information continues to be displayed even after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, it is possible that the player may get the impression that they have wasted their money every time they see the first suggestive information, and may lose interest in the game. Therefore, in such cases, the above concerns can be effectively resolved by changing the first suggestive information to the third suggestive information.

Gaming machine 16B11. In the above gaming machine 16B9 or 16B10, if it is determined that the specific condition will be met the specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, and the granting/non-granting determination means decides to grant the advantageous right, or if it decides to grant the first advantageous right, or if it decides to grant the second advantageous right, the gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestive information display means is configured to display third suggestive information (an added icon).

With this gaming machine, if the first or second advantageous right is granted after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times with the second advantageous right, the third suggestive information will be displayed regardless of which advantageous right is granted. If the configuration were to display suggestive information corresponding to the granted advantageous right after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times with the second advantageous right, it is possible that the player might get the impression that they have wasted their money and lose interest in the game. Therefore, in such cases, the above concerns can be resolved effectively by displaying the third suggestive information instead of the suggestive information corresponding to the advantageous right that has been acquired.

Gaming machine 16B12. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine 16B10 or 16B11 described above is provided with a special bonus granting means (game count addition functions S161506, S161508, S161511 of the main control unit 101) that grants a special bonus (addition to the number of games) during the special period when the third suggestive information is displayed on the suggestive information display means.

With this gaming machine, when the third suggestion information is displayed, a special bonus is awarded during a special period. This configuration makes it possible to prevent so-called wasted draws when it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times with the second advantageous right during a specified period, even if the first advantageous right or second advantageous right is subsequently awarded. As a result, it is possible to prevent gameplay during the specified period from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 16C0. A first transition means (large AT transition processing function S161410 of the main control device 101) that transitions to a special period (large AT mode) as a benefit when a specific condition (three continuous benefits are acquired) is met;
A second transition means (large AT transition processing function S160705 of the main control device 101) that transitions to the special period by the benefit when a special condition (winning a fixed role) is established,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the special condition is fulfilled before the transition to the special period in a situation where the specific condition is fulfilled, the benefit when the specific condition is fulfilled or the benefit when the special condition is fulfilled can be changed to a different benefit.

With this gaming machine, a transition to the special period may occur due to a benefit provided when a specific condition is met, or due to a benefit provided when a special condition is met. If a special condition is met before the transition to the special period occurs when a specific condition is met, the benefit provided when the specific condition is met or the benefit provided when the special condition is met may be changed to a different benefit. This configuration makes it possible to prevent specific conditions that have been met from being wasted, reducing the chances of players losing interest in playing.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 16C1. Granting/non-granting determination means (main control device 101's assist lottery processing function S160302 and assist acquisition processing function S160404, S160608) for determining whether or not to grant advantageous rights (assist benefits) during a predetermined period (non-AT mode);
When the granting/non-granting determining means determines that the advantageous right is to be granted, advantage-improving means (small AT transition processing function S160910 of the main control device 101) increases the degree of advantage of the player in a specific period (small AT mode) compared to when the granting/non-granting determining means does not determine that the advantageous right is to be granted;
A first transition means (large AT transition processing function S161410 of the main control device 101) for transitioning from the specific period to the special period (large AT mode);
If a special condition (winning a fixed role) is established during the predetermined period, a second transition means (large AT transition processing function S160705 of the main control device 101) is provided to transition to the special period without passing through the specific period,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the special period begins with the granted advantageous rights remaining, the benefits of the remaining advantageous rights are changed to benefits different from those obtained in the specific period.

With this gaming machine, advantageous rights may be granted during a specified period. If advantageous rights are granted, the player's degree of advantage during the specific period will be greater than if the advantageous rights were not granted. This configuration makes it possible to associate play during a specified period with play during a specific period. Furthermore, since it is possible to encourage players to play during the specified period while anticipating the granting of advantageous rights, it is possible to prevent play during the specified period from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, there are cases where a transition to a special period occurs from a specific period, and cases where a transition occurs from a specified period without passing through a specific period. If a transition to a special period occurs while the granted advantageous rights remain, the benefit of the remaining advantageous rights is changed to a benefit different from the benefit obtained during the specific period. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the acquired advantageous rights from being wasted, for example, when special conditions are met while the advantageous rights have been acquired, and reduces the opportunity for players to lose interest in playing.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 16C2. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 16C1, characterized in that if the special condition is met during the specified period, the special period begins from the next game.

With this gaming machine, if a special condition is met during a specified period, the special period will begin from the next play. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the situation where the granting/non-granting determination means decides to grant advantageous rights in a play after the special condition is met, thereby reducing the chances of so-called unnecessary withdrawals.

Gaming machine 16C3. A gaming machine characterized in that, in gaming machine 16C1 or 16C2 described above, if the special condition is met when the transition from the specific period to the special period has been confirmed due to the benefit of the granted advantageous right, the player is granted a benefit that is more advantageous to the player (an additional 100 games) than if the special condition were met when the transition from the specific period to the special period had not been confirmed.

With this gaming machine, if a special condition is met when the transition from a specific period to a special period has been confirmed due to the benefit of the granted advantageous rights, the player is granted a benefit that gives a greater advantage than if the special condition were met when the transition from the specific period to the special period had not been confirmed. Some players may feel that when a special condition is met when the transition from a specific period to a special period has been confirmed due to the benefit of the granted advantageous rights, the special condition did not need to be met at this time, or that all the effort required to reach the situation was wasted. However, with this gaming machine, a benefit that gives a greater advantage to the player is granted compared to if the special condition is met when the transition from the specific period to the special period has not been confirmed, making it possible to prevent players from having the above impression.

Gaming machine 16C4. Any of gaming machines 16C1 to 16C3 described above, characterized in that the advantage-improving means is configured to use the granted advantageous rights in a specified order (continuation benefit → up-benefit) when multiple advantageous rights have been granted, and to terminate the use of the granted advantageous rights when the transition to the special period has been confirmed.

With this gaming machine, if multiple advantageous rights are granted during the specific period, the granted advantageous rights are used in a specified order. Then, when the transition to the special period is confirmed, the use of the granted advantageous rights is terminated. With this configuration, for example, if more advantageous rights than the number required to confirm the transition from the specific period to the special period are acquired, it is possible to transition to the special period with the acquired advantageous rights remaining. As a result, it is possible to grant a different benefit to the excess advantageous rights acquired than the benefit obtained during the specific period, reducing the chances of so-called wasted withdrawals occurring.

Gaming machine 16C5. Any of gaming machines 16C1 to 16C4 described above is characterized in that, when the special period begins with the granted advantageous rights remaining, a special benefit (additional number of games) is granted during the special period as a benefit of the remaining advantageous rights.

With this gaming machine, if the special period begins while the granted advantageous rights remain, a special bonus will be granted during the special period as a benefit of the remaining advantageous rights. This configuration makes it possible to configure a system where, if advantageous rights are granted during a specified period, the benefits of the advantageous rights can be enjoyed during a subsequent specific or special period, reducing the chances of so-called wasted withdrawals.

Gaming machine 16C6. Any of the gaming machines 16C1 to 16C5 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with suggestion information display means (icon display areas 651 to 655 of the auxiliary display unit 65) that displays suggestion information (icons) suggesting information related to the benefits of the granted advantageous rights during the specified period when the grant/non-grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous rights.

With this gaming machine, when an advantageous right is granted, suggestive information is displayed for a specified period of time, suggesting information related to the benefits of the granted advantageous right. This configuration allows the player to understand the status of the advantageous right acquisition through the suggestive information, preventing monotony in gameplay over the specified period. However, with this configuration, the special condition is met while the player is aware of the status of the advantageous right acquisition. Therefore, if the special condition is met while the advantageous right has been acquired, the player is more likely to think that they have wasted their money. This can lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play, even though the special condition has been met and the special period has begun. However, if the system is configured so that when the special period begins while the granted advantageous right remains, the benefit of the remaining advantageous right is changed to a benefit different from the benefit obtained during the specified period, this concern can be resolved and interest in the game can be increased.

Gaming machine 16C7. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 16C6, characterized in that the suggestive information display means is configured to, when the grant/non-grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous rights multiple times, display the suggestive information in the order of the advantageous rights granted, or display the suggestive information in an order different from the order of the advantageous rights granted.

With this gaming machine, when advantageous rights are granted multiple times, the suggestive information may be displayed in the order of the granted advantageous rights, or in an order different from the order of the granted advantageous rights. This configuration allows the player to understand the status of advantageous rights acquisition through the displayed suggestive information, while also diversifying the display format of the suggestive information.

Gaming machine 16C8. In gaming machine 16C6 or 16C7 above, the grant determination means is configured to determine whether to grant a first advantageous right (upward benefit) or whether to grant a second advantageous right (continuation benefit) of a different type of benefit from the first advantageous right, and the suggestive information display means is configured to, when displaying first suggestive information (up icon) suggesting the first advantageous right and second suggestive information (win icon) suggesting the second advantageous right side by side, display the second suggestive information side by side after the first suggestive information, regardless of the order in which the first advantageous right and the second advantageous right were granted.

With this gaming machine, when first suggestion information suggesting a first advantageous right and second suggestion information suggesting a second advantageous right are displayed side by side, the second suggestion information is displayed side by side after the first suggestion information, regardless of the order in which the first advantageous right and second advantageous right were granted. With this configuration, for example, when multiple pieces of first suggestion information and one piece of second suggestion information are displayed side by side, it is possible to display the second suggestion information after the first suggestion information is displayed consecutively. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the number of first advantageous rights and the number of second advantageous rights that have been acquired.

Gaming Machine 16C9. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine 16C8 described above, the first transition means is configured to transition to the special period if a specific condition (winning the continuation lottery) is met a specific number of times (three times) during the specific period, and when the first advantageous right is granted, the probability of the specific condition being met becomes higher compared to when the first advantageous right is not granted, and when the second advantageous right is granted, the specific condition is deemed to have been met a predetermined number of times (one time).

This gaming machine transitions to a special period if a specific condition is met a specific number of times during a specific period. When a first advantageous right is granted, the probability of the specific condition being met is higher than when the first advantageous right is not granted, and when a second advantageous right is granted, the specific condition is met a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, the player's interest will be drawn to whether the number of times the specific condition is met will reach a specific number depending on the number of second advantageous rights acquired. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the number of times the specific condition is met will not reach a specific number with only the acquired second advantageous right, the player's interest will likely be drawn to the number of first advantageous rights acquired. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that the player can easily grasp the number of first advantageous rights and the number of second advantageous rights acquired, it is possible to display suggestive information that meets the player's needs, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 16C10. In the gaming machine 16C9 described above, the grant determination means determines to grant the second advantageous right when the first suggestive information and the second suggestive information are displayed side by side, and when it is determined that the specific condition will be met the specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the gaming machine is characterized by including suggestive information change means (additional icon change function S162407 of the display control device 81) that changes the first suggestive information to third suggestive information (additional icon).

With this gaming machine, when it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the displayed first suggestive information is changed to the third suggestive information. If the first suggestive information continues to be displayed even after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, it is possible that the player may get the impression that they have wasted their money every time they see the first suggestive information, and may lose interest in the game. Therefore, in such cases, the above concerns can be effectively resolved by changing the first suggestive information to the third suggestive information.

Gaming machine 16C11. In gaming machine 16C9 or 16C10, if the grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous right after it has been determined that the specific condition will be met the specific number of times due to the second advantageous right, the suggestion information display means displays third suggestion information (an added icon) regardless of whether the grant determination means determines to grant the advantageous right, the first advantageous right, or the second advantageous right.

With this gaming machine, if the first or second advantageous right is granted after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times with the second advantageous right, the third suggestive information will be displayed regardless of which advantageous right is granted. If the configuration were to display suggestive information corresponding to the granted advantageous right after it is determined that a specific condition will be met a specific number of times with the second advantageous right, it is possible that the player might get the impression that they have wasted their money and lose interest in the game. Therefore, in such cases, the above concerns can be resolved effectively by displaying the third suggestive information instead of the suggestive information corresponding to the advantageous right that has been acquired.

Gaming machine 16D1. Auxiliary effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing auxiliary effects;
A determination means (premonition stage transition function S161805, S161913 of the display control device 81) for determining whether or not to execute a premonition effect indicating whether or not to transition to a specific period (small AT mode);
a first control means (a premonition effect control function S162208 of the display control device 81) for controlling the auxiliary effect execution means to execute the premonition effect based on the determination by the determination means to execute the premonition effect;
A specific game state transition means (CZ transition processing function S161012 to S161014 of the main control device 101) for transitioning to a specific game state (challenge zone);
When the specific game state is entered, a second control means (CZ effect and CZ suggestion control function S161808, S162103, S162208 of the display control device 81) that controls the execution of specific effects (CZ effect, CZ suggestion) by the auxiliary effect execution means is provided,
This gaming machine is configured such that, when the specific game state is entered without the premonition effect being executed, a first specific effect corresponding to the specific game state is executed, and, when the specific game state is entered while the premonition effect is being executed, a second specific effect corresponding to the specific game state and different from the first specific effect is executed.

With this gaming machine, if a transition to a specific gaming state occurs without the execution of a premonition effect that indicates whether or not a transition to a specific period will occur, a first premonition effect corresponding to the specific gaming state will be executed; if a transition to a specific gaming state occurs while a premonition effect is being executed, a second premonition effect corresponding to the specific gaming state and different from the first premonition effect will be executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute different premonition effects depending on whether or not a premonition effect has been executed when a transition to a specific gaming state occurs.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by diversifying the auxiliary effects.

Gaming machine 16D2. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 16D1, characterized in that when the specific game state is entered while the premonition effect is being executed, the second specific effect is executed while the premonition effect is continued.

With this gaming machine, if a transition to a specific game state occurs while a premonition effect is being executed, a second specific effect is executed while the premonition effect continues. This configuration makes it possible to heighten the player's anticipation for the transition to the specific period through the premonition effect, while notifying the player of the transition to the specific game state through the second specific effect.

Gaming machine 16D3. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 16D2, characterized in that the second specific effect is an effect in which the display mode of a predetermined display area (point acquisition status) within the display area in which the premonition effect is displayed changes.

With this gaming machine, if a transition to a specific game state occurs while a premonition effect is being performed, the display mode of a predetermined display area within the display area where the premonition effect is displayed changes. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a transition to a specific game state has occurred without losing their interest in the premonition effect.

Gaming machine 16D4. The gaming machine 16D2 or 16D3 described above is characterized in that the first specific effect displays information related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state, and the second specific effect does not display information related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the first specific effect displays information related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state, while the second specific effect does not display information related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state. When the first specific effect is being performed without a premonition effect, it is expected that the player will be interested in information related to the specific gaming state, and when the premonition effect and the second specific effect are being performed, it is expected that the player will be more interested in whether or not there will be a transition to a specific period than in information related to the specific gaming state. Therefore, by configuring the first specific effect to display information related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state, while the second specific effect does not display information related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute auxiliary effects that are in line with the player's interests, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 16D5. Any of gaming machines 16D2 to 16D4 described above is characterized in that, if a premonition effect indicating that the game will not transition to the specific period ends during the specific game state, the second specific effect continues until the specific game state ends.

With this gaming machine, if a premonition effect indicating that the game will not transition to a specific period ends during a specific game state, the second specific effect continues until the specific game state ends. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration and prevents increases in memory capacity.

Gaming machine 16D6. Any of gaming machines 16D2 to 16D4 described above is configured to execute the first specific effect instead of the second specific effect from the next play until the specific game state ends when a premonition effect indicating that the game will not transition to the specific period ends during the specific game state.

With this gaming machine, if the premonition effect suggesting that a transition to a specific period will not occur ends during the specific gaming state, the first specific effect is executed instead of the second specific effect from the next play until the specific gaming state ends. Generally, when the premonition effect suggesting that a transition to a specific period will not occur ends, it is expected that the player's motivation to play will decrease because the transition to the specific period has not occurred. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that the first specific effect is executed instead of the second specific effect from the next play until the specific gaming state ends when the premonition effect ends during the specific gaming state, it is possible to reduce the player's motivation to play.

Gaming machine 16D7. Any of the above gaming machines 16D2 to 16D6, characterized in that the display area in which the second specific effect is executed in the auxiliary effect execution means is smaller than the display area in which the premonition effect is executed.

In this gaming machine, the display area in the auxiliary effect execution means where the second specific effect is executed is smaller than the display area where the premonition effect is executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute the second specific effect without interfering with the premonition effect, and to notify the player that they have entered the specific gaming state without losing interest in the premonition effect.

Gaming machine 16D8. Any of the above gaming machines 16D2 to 16D7 is configured such that, when the decision means determines to execute the premonition effect while the first specific effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means continues the first specific effect while the second auxiliary effect execution means (second auxiliary display unit 165) executes a predetermined premonition effect (display of the number of remaining games).

According to this gaming machine, if the determination means determines to execute a premonition effect while the first specific effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means continues the first specific effect, while the second auxiliary effect execution means executes a predetermined premonition effect. This configuration allows for the execution of auxiliary effects in line with the player's wishes, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. For example, if the determination means determines to execute a premonition effect while the first specific effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means can execute a premonition effect instead of the first specific effect. However, with this configuration, if the premonition effect suggests that a transition to a specific period will not occur, there is a concern that the player will be dissatisfied and would have preferred to remain with the first specific effect if a transition to a specific period does not occur. To address this concern, it is possible to implement a configuration in which a premonition effect is executed instead of the first specific effect only when a transition to a specific period is indicated. However, with this configuration, the transition to the specific period is confirmed when the premonition effect is initiated in place of the first specific effect, which creates a new problem: the purpose of the premonition effect, which is to increase anticipation for the transition to the specific period, is undermined. On the other hand, if the auxiliary effect execution means continues the first specific effect while the second auxiliary effect execution means executes a predetermined premonition effect, it is possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

Gaming machine 16D9. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 16D8, characterized in that the auxiliary effect execution means and the second auxiliary effect execution means are separate display devices.

With this gaming machine, the auxiliary effect execution means and the second auxiliary effect execution means are separate display devices, making it possible to execute the specified precursor effect without reducing the display area of the first specific effect.

Gaming machine 16D10. In the gaming machine 16D8 or 16D9 described above, if the specific game state ends while the predetermined premonition effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means executes the premonition effect from the next game turn until the predetermined premonition effect ends.

With this gaming machine, if the specific game state ends while a predetermined premonition effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means will execute the premonition effect from the next game turn until the predetermined premonition effect ends. This configuration makes it possible to indicate whether or not a transition to a specific period will occur through the premonition effect executed by the auxiliary effect execution means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming Machine 16D11. The gaming machine 16D10 described above, characterized in that the number of games played from the time the determination means decides to execute the premonition effect until the time the determination means indicates whether or not to transition to the specific period is greater than the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the number of plays from the time the determination means decides to execute a premonition effect until it indicates whether or not a transition to a specific period occurs is greater than the number of plays that can be played in a specific gaming state. With this configuration, if the determination means decides to execute a premonition effect while the first specific effect is being executed, regardless of the timing of the decision, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a transition to a specific period occurs in the premonition effect after the end of the specific gaming state, i.e., after the end of the first specific effect. As a result, there is no need to prepare new data, etc., to indicate whether or not a transition to a specific period occurs in the first specific effect, which makes it possible to suppress increases in memory capacity.

Gaming machine 16E1. Auxiliary effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing auxiliary effects;
When indicating whether or not there is a transition to a specific period (small AT mode), a presentation determination means (second auxiliary display unit display functions S161804, S161909 of the display control device 81) determines to execute a predetermined premonition presentation (display of the number of remaining games on the second auxiliary display unit 165) that is executed over multiple game rounds;
A specific game state transition means (CZ transition processing function S161012 to S161014 of the main control device 101) for transitioning to a specific game state (challenge zone);
When the specific game state is entered, the auxiliary effect execution means controls the execution of a specified effect (CZ effect) corresponding to the specific game state (CZ effect control function S162208 of the display control device 81),
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to execute the prescribed performance when the prescribed premonition performance is being executed, and is configured to execute the prescribed premonition performance when the prescribed performance is being executed.

With this gaming machine, when a predetermined precursor effect, which is executed when there is a possibility of transitioning to a specific period, is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means does not execute the predetermined effect corresponding to the specific gaming state, while when a predetermined effect is being executed, the predetermined precursor effect may be executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute both the predetermined effect and the predetermined precursor effect, and also makes it possible to give the predetermined precursor effect a higher priority than the predetermined effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by diversifying the auxiliary effects.

Gaming machine 16E2. The gaming machine 16E1 described above is characterized in that, when the specific period is entered, the player's degree of advantage is greater than when the specific gaming state is entered.

With this gaming machine, when the game transitions to a specific period, the player has a greater advantage than when the game is in a specific gaming state. With this configuration, it is expected that the player will be more interested in the transition to a specific period than in the specific gaming state. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that a prescribed effect is not executed when a prescribed precursor effect is being executed, but so that a prescribed precursor effect can be executed when a prescribed effect is being executed, it becomes possible to execute auxiliary effects that are in line with the player's interests, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 16E3. In the gaming machine 16E1 or 16E2 described above, when the predetermined premonition effect is executed while the standard effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means executes the predetermined premonition effect while continuing the standard effect.

With this gaming machine, when a specified premonition effect is executed while a specified effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means continues the specified effect while executing the specified premonition effect. This configuration allows the player to continue to understand that they are in a specific gaming state through the specified effect, while also understanding that they may be transitioning to a specific period through the specified premonition effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 16E4. Any of the above gaming machines 16E1 to 16E3, characterized in that a second auxiliary effect execution means (second auxiliary display unit 165) that executes the specified premonition effect is provided separately from the auxiliary effect execution means.

In this gaming machine, the predetermined premonition effect is executed by a second auxiliary effect execution means provided separately from the auxiliary effect execution means. This configuration allows for the execution of auxiliary effects tailored to the player's wishes, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. For example, when a predetermined premonition effect is executed while a predetermined premonition effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means can be configured to execute the predetermined premonition effect instead of the predetermined premonition effect. However, with this configuration, if the predetermined premonition effect indicates that a transition to a specific period will not occur, there is a concern that the player may be dissatisfied and wish the default premonition effect had remained. To address this concern, for example, it is possible to execute the predetermined premonition effect instead of the predetermined premonition effect only when a transition to a specific period is indicated. However, with this configuration, a transition to a specific period is confirmed as soon as the predetermined premonition effect is initiated in place of the predetermined premonition effect, thereby creating a new problem: the purpose of the predetermined premonition effect, which is to heighten anticipation for the transition to the specific period, is undermined. On the other hand, if the auxiliary effect execution means continues the specified effect while the second auxiliary effect execution means executes the specified precursor effect, it is possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

Gaming machine 16E5. The gaming machine 16E4 described above is characterized in that, when the specified precursor effect is executed in a situation where the specified effect is not being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means executes a precursor effect indicating whether or not there will be a transition to the specific period.

With this gaming machine, when a specified precursor effect is executed when a prescribed effect is not being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means executes a precursor effect that indicates whether or not a transition to a specific period will occur. This configuration allows the auxiliary effect execution means to function as a means for executing auxiliary effects such as precursor effects and prescribed effects depending on the game situation, allowing the player to focus their attention on the auxiliary effect execution means.

Gaming machine 16E6. In the gaming machine 16E5 described above, if the specific game state ends while the predetermined premonition effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means executes the premonition effect from the next game turn until the predetermined premonition effect ends.

With this gaming machine, if the specific game state ends while a predetermined premonition effect is being executed, the auxiliary effect execution means will execute the premonition effect from the next game turn until the predetermined premonition effect ends. This configuration makes it possible to indicate whether or not a transition to a specific period will occur through the premonition effect executed by the auxiliary effect execution means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming Machine 16E7. The gaming machine 16E6 described above, characterized in that the number of games played from the time the effect determination means decides to execute the specified premonition effect until the time the means indicates whether or not to transition to the specific period is greater than the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the number of plays from when the effect determination means decides to execute a specified premonition effect until it indicates whether or not a transition to a specific period occurs is greater than the number of plays that can be played in a specific gaming state. With this configuration, if the effect determination means decides to execute a specified premonition effect while a specified effect is being executed, regardless of the timing of the decision, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a transition to a specific period occurs in the premonition effect after the end of the specific gaming state, i.e., after the end of the specified effect. As a result, there is no need to prepare new data, etc., to indicate whether or not a transition to a specific period occurs in the specified effect, which makes it possible to suppress increases in memory capacity.

Gaming machine 16E8. Any of gaming machines 16E5 to 16E7 described above is configured so that, when the specific game state is entered while the auxiliary effect execution means is executing the premonition effect, the auxiliary effect execution means continues the premonition effect while executing a suggestive notification (CZ suggestion) indicating that the specific game state has been entered.

With this gaming machine, if a transition to a specific game state occurs while the auxiliary effect execution means is executing a premonition effect, the premonition effect continues while the auxiliary effect execution means executes a suggestive notification indicating that the specific game state has been entered. This configuration makes it possible to heighten the player's anticipation for the transition to a specific period through the premonition effect, while notifying the player of the transition to the specific game state through the suggestive notification.

Gaming Machine 16E9. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 16E8, characterized in that the suggestive notification is an effect in which the display mode of a predetermined display area (point acquisition status) within the display area in which the premonition effects are displayed changes.

With this gaming machine, if a transition to a specific game state occurs while a premonition effect is being performed by the auxiliary effect execution means, the display mode of a predetermined display area within the display area where the premonition effect is displayed changes. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that the transition to the specific game state has occurred without losing interest in the premonition effect.

Gaming Machine 16E10. Any of gaming machines 16E4 to 16E9 described above, characterized in that the predetermined precursor effect is an effect that notifies information regarding the number of games remaining until the transition to the specific period can occur.

In this gaming machine, the predetermined precursor effect notifies the player of information regarding the number of remaining plays until the transition to the specific period is possible. This configuration prevents the player's attention from being distracted when the auxiliary effect execution means executes a prescribed effect while the second auxiliary effect execution means executes a predetermined precursor effect. This is because the predetermined precursor effect can be checked at the start or end of a play session, etc.

The gaming machines 16A to 16E may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machine 16 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 15, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 17A0. A first operation method that allows confirmation or change of specific information (volume level, game history, etc.) by performing a first specific operation (operating the effect switch 67, selecting and deciding on "volume setting", and then changing the volume level);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a second operation method (an operation method of operating selection switches 68a, 68b on a non-customer waiting screen or a customer waiting screen) that allows the specific information to be confirmed or changed using an operation method different from the first specific operation.

This gaming machine has a first operation method that allows the specific information to be confirmed or changed by performing a first specific operation, and a second operation method that allows the specific information to be confirmed or changed by an operation method different from the first specific operation. This configuration makes it possible to improve operability when confirming or changing specific information.

As a result of the above, improved operability when checking or changing specific information can be achieved, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 17A1. A first operation method that allows confirmation or change of specific information (volume level, game history, etc.) by performing a first specific operation (an operation of selecting and deciding on "volume setting" after operating the effect switch 67);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a second operation method (an operation method of operating selection switches 68a, 68b on a non-customer waiting screen or a customer waiting screen) that enables confirmation or change of the specific information without performing the first specific operation.

This gaming machine has a first operation method that allows the specific information to be confirmed or changed by performing a first specific operation, and a second operation method that allows the specific information to be confirmed or changed without performing the first specific operation. This configuration makes it possible to improve operability when confirming or changing specific information.

As a result of the above, improved operability when checking or changing specific information can be achieved, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 17A2. A gaming machine as described above in connection with gaming machine 17A1, characterized in that in the first operation method, the specific information can be confirmed or changed by performing the first specific operation followed by a second specific operation (a selection operation for operating selection switches 68a, 68b and a decision operation for operating effect switch 67), and in the second operation method, the specific information can be confirmed or changed by performing the second specific operation.

With this gaming machine, in the first operation method, the specific information can be confirmed or changed by performing a first specific operation followed by a second specific operation, and in the second operation method, the specific information can be confirmed or changed by performing the second specific operation. In this way, by configuring the machine so that the specific information can be confirmed or changed by performing the same operation, the second specific operation, regardless of the operation method, it is possible to improve operability when confirming or changing the specific information.

Gaming machine 17A3. In gaming machine 17A1 or 17A2, when the first specific operation is performed, the specified display screen (menu screen) switches to a specific information display screen (volume setting screen) on which the specific information is displayed, and the specified display screen displays at least a specific item ("volume setting") corresponding to the specific information display screen, and a specific item ("character selection") corresponding to a specific information display screen (character selection screen) on which the specific information (character) can be confirmed or changed.

This gaming machine is configured so that when a first specific operation is performed, the specified display screen switches to a specific information display screen that displays specific information. The specified display screen displays at least the specific items corresponding to the specific information display screen and the specific items corresponding to the specific information display screen on which the specific information can be confirmed or changed. With this configuration, for example, a player who wishes to confirm or change the specific information after confirming or changing the specific information can do so using the first operation method, while a player who only wants to confirm or change the specific information can do so using the second operation method. This makes it possible to provide an operation method that meets the player's wishes, thereby improving operability.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the specific information can be confirmed or changed using the second operating method, it is possible to eliminate the configuration where the specific information can be confirmed or changed using the first operating method, i.e., to remove the specific item from the default display screen. However, in such a configuration, if a user mistakenly performs the first operating method when intending to perform the second operating method, an additional operation to close the default display screen is required to confirm or change the specific information. This could lead to an increase in the complexity of the operating method that allows the specific information to be confirmed or changed, despite the second operating method being provided. On the other hand, in a configuration where the specific item remains on the default display screen, if a user mistakenly performs the first operating method when intending to perform the second operating method, the user can simply switch to the specific information display screen. This makes it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 17A4. The gaming machine 17A3 described above is further equipped with a switching operation means (effect switch 67) that is operated to switch from the specified display screen to the specific information display screen, and is configured so that when the switching operation means is operated on the specific information display screen, the specific information display screen switches to the specified display screen.

With this gaming machine, when the switching operation means is operated on the specific information display screen, the specific information display screen switches to the default display screen. This configuration improves operability when checking or changing the predetermined information after checking or changing the specific information.

Gaming machine 17A5. The gaming machine 17A4 described above is equipped with a display means (auxiliary display unit 65) that displays a predetermined auxiliary effect during a game round and a customer waiting effect when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the game round, and is configured so that when the predetermined auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means after the end of a game round, or when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, the display screen of the display means switches to the specified display screen when the switching operation means is operated.

With this gaming machine, if a predetermined auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means after a round of play has ended, or if a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, and the switching operation means is operated, the display screen of the display means will switch to the specified display screen. This configuration makes it possible to confirm or change specific information after the round of play has ended, i.e., when no play is being played.

Gaming machine 17A6. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 17A5, characterized in that the first specific operation is configured by operating the switching operation means when the specified auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means after the end of a game round, or when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, and by operating the switching operation means with the specific item selected on the specified display screen.

With this gaming machine, when a predetermined auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means after a round of play has ended, or when a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, it is possible to confirm or change the specific information by operating the switching operation means, or by operating the switching operation means with a specific item selected on the specified display screen. In this configuration, for example, a player who has no plans to confirm or change the specific information may be hesitant to do so because the above operation is cumbersome, even though they want to confirm or change the specific information. However, a configuration equipped with a second operation method that makes it possible to confirm or change the specific information without performing the first specific operation can effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 17A7. In gaming machine 17A5 or 17A6 described above, when the second operation method is performed, the specific information is displayed on the display screen of the display means so as to overlap the predetermined auxiliary effect or the customer waiting effect.

With this gaming machine, when the second operation method is performed, specific information is displayed on the display screen of the display means so that it overlaps with a predetermined auxiliary effect or customer waiting effect. This configuration makes it possible to confirm or change the specific information while visually viewing the predetermined auxiliary effect or customer waiting effect when the second operation method is performed.

Gaming machine 17A8. The gaming machine 17A7 described above is characterized in that the size of the specific information displayed when the second operation method is performed is smaller than the size of the specific information displayed on the specific information display screen.

With this gaming machine, the size of the specific information displayed when the second operation method is performed is smaller than the size of the specific information displayed on the specific information display screen. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the visibility of the specified auxiliary effects and customer waiting effects, even when the specific information is displayed so that it overlaps with the specified auxiliary effects or customer waiting effects.

Gaming machine 17A9. Any of gaming machines 17A5 to 17A8 above is configured such that the specified display screen displays an end option ("Back") that ends the specified display screen, and when the switching operation means is operated with the end option selected on the specified display screen, the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means regardless of the amount of time that has elapsed since the end of the game round.

In this gaming machine, the specified display screen displays an end option that ends the specified display screen, and when the switching operation means is operated with an end option selected on the specified display screen, a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, regardless of the amount of time that has elapsed since the end of a game round. Players generally play consecutive game rounds. For this reason, in a configuration in which a customer waiting effect is displayed when a predetermined amount of time has passed since the end of a game round, the player has limited opportunities to view the carefully prepared customer waiting effect. However, in this gaming machine, it is possible to allow the player to view the customer waiting effect after the specified display screen is ended, preventing the carefully prepared customer waiting effect from going to waste and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 17A10. Any of gaming machines 17A5 to 17A9 described above, characterized in that a change operation means (selection switches 68a, 68b) operated to change the specific information is arranged adjacent to the switching operation means.

In this gaming machine, the change operation means operated to change the specific information is positioned adjacent to the switching operation means. This configuration makes it possible to improve the operability of the change operation means and the switching operation means. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that a player may accidentally operate the switching operation means when intending to operate the change operation means. However, in a configuration that includes a first operation method and a second operation method as operation methods that allow the specific information to be confirmed or changed, and in which specific items are displayed on the specified display screen, even if the switching operation means is accidentally operated, the specific information can still be confirmed or changed, thereby improving operability when confirming or changing the specific information.

Gaming machine 17A11. Any of the above gaming machines 17A1 to 17A10, characterized in that, in a situation where the first operation method and the second operation method can be performed, information related to the first operation method and information related to the second operation method are both displayed.

With this gaming machine, in situations where both the first and second operation methods are possible, information related to the first and second operation methods is displayed together. This configuration makes it possible to proactively notify the player that there are two types of operation methods that allow specific information to be confirmed or changed.

Gaming machine 17B1. Equipped with a display means (auxiliary display unit 65) that can display a customer waiting effect when a predetermined time has elapsed since a predetermined trigger (end of game),
When a predetermined operation means (effect switch 67) is operated at least when a predetermined auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means and when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, the display screen of the display means can be switched to a specified display screen (menu screen),
The specified display screen is configured to display at least a specific information display screen (volume setting screen) on which specific information (volume level, game history, etc.) and corresponding specific items ("volume setting,""gamehistory," etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for displaying the customer waiting effect on the display screen of the display means when a predetermined operation is performed to end the display of the specified display screen while the specified display screen is being displayed after the specified trigger, even if the specified time has not elapsed.

With this gaming machine, if a specified operation is performed to end the display of the specified display screen while it is being displayed after a specified trigger, a customer waiting effect will be displayed on the display screen of the display means, even if the specified time has not yet passed. Players generally play games in succession. For this reason, in configurations where a customer waiting effect can be displayed when a specified time has passed since a specified trigger, opportunities for players to view the carefully prepared customer waiting effect are limited. However, with this gaming machine, it is possible to allow players to view the customer waiting effect after the specified display screen has been ended, preventing the carefully prepared customer waiting effect from going to waste and increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine 17B2. In the gaming machine 17B1 described above, the specified display screen displays a specified information display screen (character selection screen) that allows the player to confirm or change specified information (characters) and a corresponding specified item ("character selection"), and when the specified operation means (selection switches 68a, 68b) is operated while the specified auxiliary effect is being displayed on the display screen of the display means, the specified information can be confirmed or changed without going through the specified display screen.

With this gaming machine, in addition to being able to confirm or change specific information on the specific information display screen, it is also possible to confirm or change specific information by operating the specific operation means even when a specified auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means. With this configuration, for example, a player who wishes to confirm or change specific information after confirming or changing the specified information can simply go through the specified display screen and then confirm or change the specific information on the specific information display screen. A player who only wants to confirm or change specific information can confirm or change the specific information when a specified auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means. This makes it possible to provide an operation method that meets the player's wishes, improving operability when confirming or changing specific information.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which specific information can be confirmed or changed while a specific auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, it is also possible to remove the specific item from the default display screen. However, in such a configuration, if a user accidentally operates a specific operation means when intending to operate a specific operation means, an additional operation to close the default display screen is required to confirm or change the specific information. This could lead to a complicated operation method for confirming or changing the specific information, even though the configuration is in which specific information can be confirmed or changed while a specific auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the specific item remains on the default display screen, if a user accidentally operates a specific operation means when intending to operate a specific operation means, the user can simply switch to the specific information display screen. This makes it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 17B3. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 17B2, characterized in that when the specific operation means is operated while the specified auxiliary effect is being displayed on the display screen of the display means, the specific information is displayed on the display screen of the display means so as to overlap the specified auxiliary effect.

With this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated while a specific auxiliary effect is being displayed on the display screen of the display means, specific information is displayed on the display screen of the display means so that it overlaps with the specific auxiliary effect. This configuration makes it possible to confirm or change the specific information while still visually viewing the specific auxiliary effect when the specific operation means is operated while a specific auxiliary effect is being displayed on the display screen of the display means.

Gaming machine 17B4. In any of gaming machines 17B1 to 17B3 above, the specified display screen displays a specified information display screen (character selection screen) on which specified information (characters) can be confirmed or changed, and a corresponding specified item ("character selection"), and when the specific operation means (selection switches 68a, 68b) is operated while the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, the specific information can be confirmed or changed without going through the specified display screen.

With this gaming machine, in addition to being able to confirm or change specific information on the specific information display screen, it is also possible to confirm or change specific information by operating the specific operation means even when a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means. With this configuration, for example, a player who wishes to confirm or change specific information after confirming or changing predetermined information can simply go through the prescribed display screen and confirm or change the specific information on the specific information display screen, while a player who only wants to confirm or change specific information can confirm or change the specific information while a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means. This makes it possible to provide an operation method that meets the player's wishes, improving operability when confirming or changing specific information.

Furthermore, in a configuration where specific information can be confirmed or changed while the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, it is possible to remove specific items from the default display screen. However, in such a configuration, if a player accidentally operates a predetermined operation means when intending to operate a specific operation means, an additional operation to close the default display screen is required to confirm or change the specific information. This could lead to a complicated operation method for confirming or changing the specific information, even though the configuration allows specific information to be confirmed or changed while the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means. On the other hand, in a configuration where specific items remain on the default display screen, if a player accidentally operates a predetermined operation means when intending to operate a specific operation means, the player can simply switch to the specific information display screen. This makes it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 17B5. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the present invention, characterized in that when the specific operation means is operated while the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, the specific information is displayed on the display screen of the display means so as to overlap with the customer waiting effect.

With this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated while a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, specific information is displayed on the display screen of the display means so that it overlaps with the customer waiting effect. This configuration makes it possible to confirm or change the specific information while viewing the customer waiting effect when a specific operation means is operated while a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means.

Gaming machine 17B6. Any of gaming machines 17B2 to 17B5 described above, characterized in that the size of the specific information displayed when the specific operation means is operated is smaller than the size of the specific information displayed on the specific information display screen.

With this gaming machine, the size of the specific information displayed when the specific operation means is operated is smaller than the size of the specific information displayed on the specific information display screen. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the visibility of the specified auxiliary effects and customer waiting effects, even when the specific information is displayed so that it overlaps with the specified auxiliary effects or customer waiting effects.

Gaming machine 17B7. Any of gaming machines 17B2 to 17B6 described above, characterized in that the specific operation means is arranged adjacent to the predetermined operation means.

In this gaming machine, the specific operation means is positioned adjacent to the predetermined operation means. This configuration makes it possible to improve the operability of the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that a player may accidentally operate the predetermined operation means when intending to operate the specific operation means. However, in a configuration in which the operation methods that allow the player to check or change specific information include an operation method that goes via the predetermined display screen and an operation method that does not go via the predetermined display screen, and in which specific items are displayed on the predetermined display screen, even if the predetermined operation means is accidentally operated, the player can still check or change the specific information, thereby improving operability when checking or changing specific information.

Gaming machine 17B8. Any of gaming machines 17B2 to 17B7 described above is characterized in that, when the specified auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means and when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, a method of operation for switching the display screen of the display means to the specified display screen and a method of operation for confirming or changing the specific information are both displayed.

With this gaming machine, when a specified auxiliary effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, and when a customer waiting effect is displayed on the display screen of the display means, both an operation method that allows the display screen of the display means to switch to the specified display screen and an operation method that allows the specific information to be confirmed or changed are displayed. This configuration makes it possible to actively notify the player that there are two types of operation methods that allow the specific information to be confirmed or changed.

The gaming machines 17A and 17B may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 17 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A through Y, and the gaming machines 9 through 16, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 18A1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine equipped with a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls a presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that can execute continuous presentations over multiple game rounds based on commands transmitted from the main control means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the sub-control means is configured to perform different controls after a situation in which it is possible to receive a command from the main control means occurs in two cases: when a situation in which it is unable to receive a command from the main control means occurs in a game round in which a first consecutive performance (real consecutive performance) that makes a specific notification (victory performance, WIN display) has started, and when a situation in which it is unable to receive a command from the main control means occurs in a game round in which a second consecutive performance (fake consecutive performance) that does not make the specific notification has started.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means is configured to perform different controls after it becomes able to receive commands from the main control means in the case where it is unable to receive commands from the main control means during a game in which a first consecutive performance that issues a specific notification has started, and in the case where it is unable to receive commands from the main control means during a game in which a second consecutive performance that does not issue a specific notification has started. This configuration makes it possible to progress the consecutive performance in an appropriate manner in cases such as when a discrepancy occurs between the number of games played as managed by the main control means and the number of games played since the start of the consecutive performance as managed by the sub-control means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

A typical example of a "situation in which commands from the main control means cannot be received" is when there is a poor contact or disconnection in the connector or other connection means that connects the main control means and the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 18A2. The gaming machine 18A1 described above is characterized in that if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control means in the game turn in which the first consecutive performance started, and if a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control means in a game turn after the game turn in which the first consecutive performance started, a portion of the first consecutive performance is omitted.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control means in the game turn in which the first consecutive performance started, but a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control means in a game turn after the game turn in which the first consecutive performance started, part of the first consecutive performance will be omitted. Because a specific notification is issued during the first consecutive performance, if there is a discrepancy between the number of games played managed by the main control means and the number of games played since the start of the consecutive performance managed by the sub-control means, the specific notification may become meaningless. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that part of the first consecutive performance is omitted in such cases, it is possible to reduce the chances of the specific notification becoming meaningless.

Gaming machine 18A3. In the gaming machine 18A1 or 18A2 described above, the first consecutive performance is configured to end when a specific number of plays (three plays) have been played if a command from the main control means is available for reception, and if a command from the main control means cannot be received during the play that started the first consecutive performance, and if a command from the main control means can be received after the specific number of plays, including the play that started the first consecutive performance, have been played, the first consecutive performance is configured to end without issuing the specific notification.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control means during the game that started the first consecutive performance, and if a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control means after a specific number of games have been played, including the game that started the first consecutive performance, the first consecutive performance will end without issuing a specific notification. If a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control means after a specific number of games have been played, including the game that started the first consecutive performance, there is a high possibility that the main control means has already executed control corresponding to the specific notification. Therefore, by configuring the first consecutive performance to end without issuing a specific notification in such cases, it is possible to reduce the chances of player confusion.

Gaming machine 18A4. Any of the above gaming machines 18A1 to 18A3, characterized in that the first continuous performance can be initiated when it has been determined that the main control means will transition the gaming state to a special gaming state (announcement mode), and the second continuous performance can be initiated when it has not been determined that the main control means will transition the gaming state to the special gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the first consecutive performance may be initiated when the main control means has confirmed that the gaming state will transition to a special gaming state, and the second consecutive performance may be initiated when the main control means has not confirmed that the gaming state will transition to a special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to associate the issuance of a specific notification during a consecutive performance with the transition of the gaming state to a special gaming state, allowing the player to play while anticipating the issuance of a specific notification. However, with this configuration, if a discrepancy occurs between the number of games played, as managed by the main control means, and the number of games played since the start of the consecutive performance, as managed by the sub-control means, an event such as a specific notification being issued after the transition to the special gaming state may occur. Therefore, by configuring the sub-control means to perform different control when it is unable to receive commands from the main control means in the game round where the first continuous performance begins, and when it is unable to receive commands from the main control means in the game round where the second continuous performance begins, once it is able to receive commands from the main control means, it is possible to reduce the chances of the above-mentioned events occurring and allow the continuous performances to proceed in an appropriate manner.

Gaming machine 18A5. In the gaming machine 18A4 described above, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control means in the game turn in which the second consecutive performance started, and a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control means in a game turn after the game turn in which the second consecutive performance started, the gaming machine is configured to execute the content of the second consecutive performance to the end, unless the situation has changed to one in which it is determined that the main control means will transition the gaming state to the special gaming state.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control means in the game turn in which the second consecutive performance started, and a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control means in a game turn after the game turn in which the second consecutive performance started, the content of the second consecutive performance will be executed to the end unless the situation has changed to one in which the main control means has confirmed that the game state will transition to a special game state. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the consecutive performance from becoming too complicated, and also makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume.

Gaming machine 18A6. In gaming machine 18A4 or 18A5, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control means in the game turn in which the second consecutive performance started, but a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control means in a game turn after the game turn in which the second consecutive performance started, and if the situation does not change to one in which it is determined that the main control means will transition the gaming state to the special gaming state, this gaming machine is characterized by being configured to increase the number of games required to end the second consecutive performance.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which commands cannot be received from the main control means in the game turn that starts the second consecutive performance, and a situation arises in which commands can be received from the main control means in a game turn after the game turn that started the second consecutive performance, the number of games required to end the second consecutive performance will increase unless the situation changes to one in which the main control means has confirmed that the game state will transition to a special game state. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the consecutive performance from becoming too complicated, and to prevent an increase in data volume.

Gaming machine 18A7. In any of the above gaming machines 18A1 to 18A6, when a specific condition (continuous performance flag exists) is met and the sub-control means receives a first command (start command) sent from the main control means based on the start of a game round, the sub-control means includes a start means (continuous performance start function S180103) that starts the continuous performance, and a second progress command (stop command) that progresses the content of the continuous performance when the sub-control means receives a first progress command (stop command) sent from the main control means based on the progress status of the game round reaching a first progress status (occurrence of a stop command). A gaming machine comprising: first progression means (continuous performance progression function S180103); second progression means (scenario update processing function S180308) for progressing the content of the continuous performance when a second progression command (end command) sent from the main control means is received based on the progress of the game round changing from the first progress status to a second progress status (end of game); and change means (continuous performance start function for scenario number 2 or more S180103) for changing the content of the continuous performance when the first command is received after the continuous performance has started.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met and the sub-control means receives a first command from the main control means based on the start of a game round, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation; when the sub-control means receives a first progression command from the main control means based on the game round progress changing to the first progression state, the sub-control means advances the content of the continuous presentation; when the sub-control means receives a second progression command from the main control means based on the game round progress changing from the first progression state to the second progression state, the sub-control means advances the content of the continuous presentation; and when the sub-control means receives a first command after the continuous presentation has started, the sub-control means changes the content of the continuous presentation. In this configuration, if the sub-control means is unable to receive commands from the main control means, a discrepancy will occur between the progress of the game round and the progress of the continuous presentation. Therefore, by applying this configuration to any of the configurations of gaming machines 18A1 to 18A6 described above, it is possible to progress the continuous presentation in an appropriate manner.

Gaming Machine 18A8. In the gaming machine 18A7 described above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and if the sub-control means receives the second progress command without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined game round, the sub-control means does not cause the second progress means to progress the content of the continuous performance.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and does not progress the content of the continuous presentation if it receives a second progress command without receiving a first progress command for the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to notify players that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received, by preventing the content of the continuous presentation from progressing even if the progress status of the predetermined game round has reached the first progress status or the second progress status.

Gaming Machine 18A9. In gaming machine 18A7 or 18A8, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and causes the first progression means to progress the content of the continuous performance when the sub-control means receives the first progression command for the next game round after the predetermined game round without receiving the first progression command for the predetermined game round, the second progression command, and the first command for the next game round after the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and progresses the content of the continuous presentation if it receives the first progress command for the game round following the predetermined game round without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined game round, the second progress command, and the first command for the game round following the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received, by having the continuous presentation started in the predetermined game round progress across the predetermined game round and the next game round without changing the content of the presentation.

Gaming Machine 18A10. In any of gaming machines 18A7 to 18A9 above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and causes the changing means to change the content of the continuous performance if the sub-control means receives the first command for the game round following the predetermined game round without receiving the first progress command and the second progress command for the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and changes the content of the continuous performance if it receives the first command for the next game round without receiving the first and second progress commands for the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received, by changing the content of the continuous performance that started in the predetermined game round without progressing, as the content of the continuous performance changes with the start of the next game round.

Gaming Machine 18A11. In any of gaming machines 18A7 to 18A10, at least one of the first command and the second progress command includes information indicating whether the gaming state is in a special gaming state (alert mode), and the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the first consecutive performance based on the reception of a first command indicating that a predetermined gaming round has started, and if a command including information indicating that the gaming state is in the special gaming state is received during the first consecutive performance, ends the first consecutive performance in the gaming round in which the command including information indicating that the gaming state is in the special gaming state was received.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts the first consecutive performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a specific game round has started, and if a command containing information indicating that the game state is in a special game state is received during the first consecutive performance, the sub-control means ends the first consecutive performance on the game round in which the command was received. This configuration allows the first consecutive performance to continue until the game round after the transition to the special game state, reducing the chances of a specific notification being issued during the first consecutive performance.

Gaming Machine 18A12. In any of gaming machines 18A7 to 18A11 above, the sub-control means is characterized in that it includes means for controlling the start means to start the continuous performance based on the reception of a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and for controlling the output of an abnormality occurrence sound (abnormality notification sound) when the second progress command is received without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and controls the output of an abnormality sound if a second progress command is received without receiving a first progress command for the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received by outputting an abnormality sound.

Gaming Machine 18A13. In any of gaming machines 18A7 to 18A12 above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and does not control the output of an abnormality occurrence sound (abnormality notification sound) if the sub-control means receives the first progress command for the predetermined game round without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined game round, the second progress command, and the first command for the game round following the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined play round has started, and does not control the output of an abnormality sound if it receives the first progress command for the play round following the predetermined play round without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined play round, the second progress command, and the first command for the play round following the predetermined play round. This configuration simplifies the command configuration while preventing the processing configuration related to the continuous presentation from becoming too complicated. To control the output of an abnormality sound in the above situation, for example, the first progress command needs to include information such as whether the play round is the same as the predetermined play round. This is because, when the sub-control means receives the first progress command, it needs to perform processing to confirm whether the play round is the same as the first command.

Gaming Machine 18A14. In any of gaming machines 18A7 to 18A13 above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and if the sub-control means receives the first command for the game round following the predetermined game round without receiving the first progress command and the second progress command for the predetermined game round, the sub-control means does not control the output of an abnormality occurrence sound (abnormality notification sound).

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and does not control the output of an abnormality sound if it receives the first command for the next game round without receiving the first and second progress commands for the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the continuous presentation from becoming too complicated. This is because, in order to control the output of an abnormality sound in the above situation, when controlling the next game round, it becomes necessary to perform processing to confirm whether the first command, first progress command, and second progress command were received in the predetermined game round (previous game round), for example.

Gaming machine 18B1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine equipped with a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls a presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that can execute continuous presentations over multiple game rounds based on commands transmitted from the main control means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the sub-control means is configured to be able to perform different controls after a situation arises in which it is possible to receive a command from the main control means, in two cases: when it is unable to receive a command from the main control means before the start of a game round that starts a first consecutive presentation (real consecutive presentation) that makes a specific notification (victory presentation, WIN display), and when it is unable to receive a command from the main control means before the start of a game round that starts a second consecutive presentation (fake consecutive presentation) that does not make the specific notification.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means is configured to perform different control operations after it is able to receive commands from the main control means in two cases: when it is unable to receive commands from the main control means before the start of a game turn that starts a first continuous performance that issues a specific notification, and when it is unable to receive commands from the main control means before the start of a game turn that starts a second continuous performance that does not issue a specific notification. This configuration makes it possible to progress the continuous performance in an appropriate manner in cases such as when a discrepancy occurs between the number of games played managed by the main control means and the number of games managed by the sub-control means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

A typical example of a "situation in which commands from the main control means cannot be received" is when there is a poor contact or disconnection in the connector or other connection means that connects the main control means and the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 18B2. A gaming machine as described above in connection with gaming machine 18B1, characterized in that the first consecutive performance is configured to end when a specific number of plays (three plays) have been played if a command from the main control means can be received, and that if a command from the main control means cannot be received before the start of a play round to start the first consecutive performance, and if a command from the main control means can be received between the start of a play round and the end of a play round that is less than the specific number of plays, a portion of the first consecutive performance is omitted.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which a command cannot be received from the main control means before the start of a game turn that initiates the first consecutive performance, and if a situation arises in which a command can be received from the main control means between the start of a game turn and the end of a game turn that is less than a specific number of times, part of the first consecutive performance is omitted. Because a specific notification is issued during the first consecutive performance, if there is a discrepancy between the number of times the game has been played as managed by the main control means and the number of times the game has been played as managed by the sub-control means, the specific notification may become meaningless. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that part of the first consecutive performance is omitted in such cases, it is possible to reduce the chances of the specific notification becoming meaningless.

Gaming machine 18B3. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the present invention, characterized in that the first consecutive performance is configured to end when a specific number of plays (three plays) have been played if a command from the main control means can be received, and the first consecutive performance is not performed if a command from the main control means cannot be received before the start of a play session to start the first consecutive performance, and if a command from the main control means can be received after the specific number of plays or more have been played.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which a command cannot be received from the main control means before the start of a game turn that initiates the first consecutive performance, and if a situation arises in which a command can be received from the main control means after a specific number of plays have been played, the first consecutive performance will not be performed. If a situation arises in which a command can be received from the main control means after a specific number of plays have been played, there is a high possibility that the main control means has already executed control corresponding to the specific notification. Therefore, by configuring the machine not to perform the first consecutive performance in such cases, it is possible to reduce the chances of player confusion.

Gaming machine 18B4. Any of the above gaming machines 18B1 to 18B3 is configured to be capable of starting the first continuous performance when it has been determined that the main control means will transition the gaming state to a special gaming state (announcement mode), and is configured to be capable of starting the second continuous performance when it has not been determined that the main control means will transition the gaming state to the special gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the first consecutive performance may be initiated when the main control means has confirmed that the gaming state will transition to a special gaming state, and the second consecutive performance may be initiated when the main control means has not confirmed that the gaming state will transition to a special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to associate the issuance of a specific notification during the consecutive performance with the transition of the gaming state to a special gaming state, allowing the player to play while anticipating the issuance of a specific notification. However, with this configuration, if a discrepancy occurs between the number of games played managed by the main control means and the number of games played managed by the sub-control means, an event such as a specific notification being issued after the transition to the special gaming state may occur. Therefore, by configuring the sub-control means to be able to perform different controls after it becomes possible to receive commands from the main control means in cases where it is unable to receive commands from the main control means before the start of a game round that starts the first continuous performance, and in cases where it is unable to receive commands from the main control means before the start of a game round that starts the second continuous performance that does not issue a specific notification, it is possible to reduce the chances of the above-mentioned events occurring and to allow the continuous performance to proceed in an appropriate manner.

Gaming machine 18B5. In the above gaming machine 18B4, if a situation arises in which a command cannot be received from the main control means before the start of a game turn that starts the second consecutive performance, and the main control means has not changed to a situation in which it has been determined that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state, the second consecutive performance will begin from the game turn in which a command from the main control means can be received or the next game turn in which a command from the main control means can be received, and the content of the second consecutive performance will be executed to the end.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which a command cannot be received from the main control means before the start of the game turn that initiates the second consecutive performance, and the main control means has not yet transitioned to a situation in which it is confirmed that the game state will be transitioned to a special game state, the second consecutive performance will begin from the game turn in which a command from the main control means can be received, or from the next game turn in which a command from the main control means can be received, and the performance contents of the second consecutive performance will be executed to the end. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the consecutive performances from becoming too complicated, and to prevent an increase in data volume.

Gaming machine 18B6. In any of the above gaming machines 18B1 to 18B5, when the sub-control means receives a first command (start command) sent from the main control means based on the start of a game round under a situation where a specific condition (there is a continuous performance flag) is met, the sub-control means includes a start means (continuous performance start function S180103) that starts the continuous performance, and a second progress command (stop command) that progresses the performance content of the continuous performance when the sub-control means receives a first progress command (stop command) sent from the main control means based on the progress status of the game round reaching a first progress status (occurrence of a stop command). A gaming machine comprising: first progression means (continuous performance progression function S180103); second progression means (scenario update processing function S180308) for progressing the content of the continuous performance when a second progression command (end command) sent from the main control means is received based on the progress of the game round changing from the first progress status to a second progress status (end of game); and change means (continuous performance start function for scenario number 2 or more S180103) for changing the content of the continuous performance when the first command is received after the continuous performance has started.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met and the sub-control means receives a first command from the main control means based on the start of a game round, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation; when the sub-control means receives a first progression command from the main control means based on the game round progress changing to the first progression status, the sub-control means advances the content of the continuous presentation; when the sub-control means receives a second progression command from the main control means based on the game round progress changing from the first progression status to the second progression status, the sub-control means advances the content of the continuous presentation; and when the sub-control means receives the first command after the continuous presentation has started, the sub-control means changes the content of the continuous presentation. In this configuration, if the sub-control means is unable to receive commands from the main control means, a discrepancy will occur between the progress of the game round and the progress of the continuous presentation. Therefore, by applying this configuration to any of the configurations of gaming machines 18B1 to 18B5 described above, it is possible to progress the continuous presentation in an appropriate manner.

Gaming Machine 18B7. In the gaming machine 18B6 described above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and if the sub-control means receives the second progress command without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined game round, the sub-control means does not cause the second progress means to progress the content of the continuous performance.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and does not progress the content of the continuous presentation if it receives a second progress command without receiving a first progress command for the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to notify players that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received, by preventing the content of the continuous presentation from progressing even if the progress status of the predetermined game round has reached the first progress status or the second progress status.

Gaming Machine 18B8. In gaming machine 18B6 or 18B7 described above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and causes the first progression means to progress the content of the continuous performance when the sub-control means receives the first progression command for the next game round after the predetermined game round without receiving the first progression command for the predetermined game round, the second progression command, and the first command for the next game round after the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and progresses the content of the continuous presentation if it receives the first progress command for the game round following the predetermined game round without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined game round, the second progress command, and the first command for the game round following the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received, by having the continuous presentation started in the predetermined game round progress across the predetermined game round and the next game round without changing the content of the presentation.

Gaming Machine 18B9. In any of gaming machines 18B6 to 18B8 above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and causes the changing means to change the content of the continuous performance if the sub-control means receives the first command for the game round following the predetermined game round without receiving the first progress command and the second progress command for the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and changes the content of the continuous performance if it receives the first command for the next game round without receiving the first and second progress commands for the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received, by changing the content of the continuous performance that started in the predetermined game round without progressing, as the content of the continuous performance changes with the start of the next game round.

Gaming Machine 18B10. Any of gaming machines 18B6 to 18B9 above is configured such that at least one of the first command and the second progress command includes information indicating whether the gaming state is in a special gaming state (alert mode), and the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the first consecutive performance based on the reception of a first command indicating that a predetermined gaming round has started, and if a command including information indicating that the gaming state is in the special gaming state is received during the first consecutive performance, ends the first consecutive performance in the gaming round in which the command including information indicating that the gaming state is in the special gaming state was received.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts the first consecutive performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a specific game round has started, and if a command containing information indicating that the game state is in a special game state is received during the first consecutive performance, the sub-control means ends the first consecutive performance on the game round in which the command was received. This configuration allows the first consecutive performance to continue until the game round after the transition to the special game state, reducing the chances of a specific notification being issued during the first consecutive performance.

Gaming Machine 18B11. In any of gaming machines 18B6 to 18B10 above, the sub-control means is characterized in that it includes means for controlling the starting means to start the continuous performance based on the reception of a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and for controlling the output of an abnormality occurrence sound (abnormality notification sound) when the second progress command is received without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and controls the output of an abnormality sound if a second progress command is received without receiving a first progress command for the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received by outputting an abnormality sound.

Gaming Machine 18B12. In any of gaming machines 18B6 to 18B11 above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and does not control the output of an abnormality occurrence sound (abnormality notification sound) if the sub-control means receives the first progress command for the predetermined game round without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined game round, the second progress command, and the first command for the game round following the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined play round has started, and does not control the output of an abnormality sound if it receives the first progress command for the play round following the predetermined play round without receiving the first progress command for the predetermined play round, the second progress command, and the first command for the play round following the predetermined play round. This configuration simplifies the command configuration while preventing the processing configuration related to the continuous presentation from becoming too complicated. To control the output of an abnormality sound in the above situation, for example, the first progress command needs to include information such as whether the play round is the same as the predetermined play round. This is because, when the sub-control means receives the first progress command, it needs to perform processing to confirm whether the play round is the same as the first command.

Gaming Machine 18B13. In any of gaming machines 18B6 to 18B12 above, the sub-control means causes the starting means to start the continuous performance upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and does not control the output of an abnormality occurrence sound (abnormality notification sound) if the sub-control means receives the first command for the game round following the predetermined game round without receiving the first progress command and the second progress command for the predetermined game round.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means starts a continuous presentation upon receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round has started, and does not control the output of an abnormality sound if it receives the first command for the next game round without receiving the first and second progress commands for the predetermined game round. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the continuous presentation from becoming too complicated. This is because, in order to control the output of an abnormality sound in the above situation, when controlling the next game round, it becomes necessary to perform processing to confirm whether the first command, first progress command, and second progress command were received in the predetermined game round (previous game round), for example.

Gaming machine 18C1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game and establishes a specified winning (bell winning) when the lottery result of the role is a specified result (push order bell winning) and multiple stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) are operated in a specified operation method,
In a gaming machine equipped with a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls a presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that can execute a notification presentation (navigation presentation) that notifies the user of the specified operation method based on a command transmitted from the main control means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the sub-control means determines that the multiple stop operation means have been operated in the specified operation method based on a command sent from the main control means while the notification effect is being executed, it controls the effect means to perform a specified notification (GET effect) corresponding to the specified winning, even if the specified winning has not been achieved.

In this gaming machine, when the sub-control means determines, based on commands sent from the main control means, that multiple stop operation means have been operated in a specified manner while a notification effect is being executed, it controls the effect means to issue a specified notification corresponding to the specified win, even if the specified win has not been achieved. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the notification effect from becoming too complex, and also to prevent an increase in data volume.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to store data related to other auxiliary effects in unused areas of the memory area, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 18C2. In the gaming machine 18C1 described above, if the sub-control means is unable to receive a command from the main control means during the game in which the notification effect was initiated, the sub-control means may continue to notify the specified operation method notified during the notification effect over multiple game times.

In this gaming machine, if the sub-control means is unable to receive commands from the main control means during a game in which a notification effect is initiated, the sub-control means may continue to notify the specified operation method notified in the notification effect across multiple game increments. In this configuration, for example, if the winning combination results differ between the game in which the notification effect was initiated and the next game increment, operating the multiple stop operation means using the specified operation method in the next game increment will not result in a specified winning combination. While it is possible to configure the machine so that the specified notification is not issued based on the failure to achieve a specified winning combination, such a configuration raises concerns that players may develop distrust for the notification effect. If the multiple stop operation means are operated using the specified operation method notified in the notification effect, but the specified winning combination is not achieved and the specified notification is not issued, the player may question whether it is appropriate to operate the multiple stop operation means using the specified operation method notified in the notification effect from the next time. On the other hand, if the system is configured to issue a specified notification when it is determined that multiple stop operation means have been operated in a specified operation method based on a command sent from the main control means, even if a specified win has not been achieved, it is possible to maintain consistency in the notification presentation, in that the specified notification will be issued if multiple stop operation means are operated in the notified specified operation method. This makes it possible to reduce the chances that players will become distrustful of the notification presentation.

A typical example of a "situation in which commands from the main control means cannot be received" is when there is a poor contact or disconnection in the connector or other connection means that connects the main control means and the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 18C3. In the gaming machine 18C2 described above, if the sub-control means is unable to receive a command from the main control means during the game turn in which the notification effect has started, and is unable to receive the first command (start command) sent from the main control means based on the start of the next game turn, the sub-control means continues to notify the specified operation method notified during the notification effect during the next game turn.

According to this gaming machine, if the sub-control means is unable to receive a command from the main control means during the game turn in which the notification effect has started, and is unable to receive the first command sent from the main control means based on the start of the next game turn, the sub-control means continues to notify the specified operation method notified during the notification effect during the next game turn. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the notification effect from becoming too complicated, and also to prevent an increase in data volume.

Gaming Machine 18C4. In the gaming machine 18C3 described above, if the sub-control means is unable to receive a command from the main control means in the game turn in which the notification effect was initiated, but is able to receive a second command (stop command) sent from the main control means in the next game turn based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the operation method of the plurality of stop operation means in the next game turn is the specified operation method, the sub-control means controls the effect means to perform the specified notification even if the specified winning has not been achieved.

In this gaming machine, if the sub-control means is unable to receive commands from the main control means in the game turn that initiated the notification effect, but is able to receive a second command sent from the main control means in the next game turn based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the operation method of the multiple stop operation means in the next game turn is a specified operation method, the sub-control means controls the presentation means to issue a specified notification even if a specified win has not been achieved. This configuration maintains consistency in the notification effect, in that the specified notification is issued if the multiple stop operation means are operated in the notified specified operation method, reducing the chances that players will become distrustful of the notification effect.

Gaming Machine 18C5. In gaming machine 18C3 or 18C4 described above, if the sub-control means is unable to receive commands from the main control means after receiving a first stop command (first stop command) transmitted from the main control means based on the first operation of one of the plurality of stop operation means in the game turn that started the notification effect, and then becomes able to receive a second stop command (second stop command) transmitted from the main control means based on the second operation of one of the plurality of stop operation means in the next game turn, and the operation methods of the stop operation means that was first operated in the game turn that started the notification effect and the stop operation means that is operated second or later in the next game turn are the specified operation methods, even if the specified winning has not been achieved, this gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to this gaming machine, if the sub-control means receives a first stop command transmitted from the main control means based on the first operation of one of the multiple stop operation means in the game turn that initiated the notification effect, but then becomes unable to receive commands from the main control means, and then becomes able to receive a second stop command transmitted from the main control means based on the second operation of one of the multiple stop operation means in the next game turn, then, if the operation methods of the stop operation means first operated in the game turn that initiated the notification effect and the stop operation means operated second or later in the next game turn are specified operation methods, the sub-control means controls the presentation means to issue a specified notification even if a specified win has not been achieved. This configuration maintains consistency in the notification effect, in that the specified notification is issued when the multiple stop operation means are operated using the notified specified operation method, reducing the opportunity for players to become distrustful of the notification effect.

Gaming machine 18C6. Any of gaming machines 18C1 to 18C5 described above, further comprising an operation method notification means (instruction monitor) capable of notifying the specified operation method when the result of the lottery for the winning combination matches the specified result, and wherein the operation method notification means is controlled by the main control means.

This gaming machine is equipped with an operation method notification means capable of notifying the player of a specified operation method when the result of the lottery for a winning combination matches a specified result, and the main control means controls this operation method notification means. In this way, by providing an operation method notification means controlled by the main control means in addition to the presentation means controlled by the sub-control means as a means for notifying the player of a specified operation method, it is possible to notify the player of the specified operation method via the operation method notification means even if the sub-control means is unable to receive commands sent from the main control means. This reduces the chances of a player becoming unaware of the specified operation method.

Gaming machine 18C7. Any of gaming machines 18C1 to 18C6 described above, further comprising a display means (auxiliary display unit 65) that displays the number of plays played in a special game state (alert mode), and wherein the sub-control means changes the number of plays displayed on the display means when it receives a first command (start command) sent from the main control means based on the start of a game.

According to this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a first command transmitted from the main control means based on the start of a game, it changes the number of games played in the special game state displayed on the display means. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of games played in the special game state.

Gaming Machine 18C8. In the gaming machine 18C7 described above, the main control means transmits a command including information indicating the number of games played under the special gaming state to the sub-control means each time a game is played under the special gaming state.

In this gaming machine, the main control means transmits a command containing information indicating the number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state to the sub-control means each time a game is played in the special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to correct the number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state displayed on the display means after receiving a command containing information indicating the number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the command transmitted from the main control means, resulting in a discrepancy between the number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state displayed on the display means and the actual number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state.

Gaming machine 18C9. Any of gaming machines 18C1 to 18C8 above is equipped with a display means (auxiliary display unit 65) that displays the number of game values (number of medals) that has increased in a special game state (alert mode), and the sub-control means changes the number of game values displayed on the display means when it receives a predetermined command (end command) sent from the main control means based on the end of a game round.

According to this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a predetermined command sent from the main control means based on the completion of a game round, it changes the number of game values that has increased under the special game state, as displayed on the display means. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of game values that has increased under the special game state.

Gaming Machine 18C10. In the gaming machine 18C9 described above, the main control means transmits a command including information indicating the number of play values increased under the special gaming state to the sub-control means each time a game is played under the special gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the main control means transmits a command including information indicating the number of play values increased under the special gaming state to the sub-control means each time a game is played under the special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to correct the number of play values increased under the special gaming state displayed on the display means after receiving a command including information indicating the number of play values increased under the special gaming state, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the command transmitted from the main control means, resulting in a discrepancy between the number of play values increased under the special gaming state displayed on the display means and the number of play values actually increased under the special gaming state.

Gaming machine 18D1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game and establishes a specified winning (bell winning) when the lottery result of the role is a specified result (push order bell winning) and multiple stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) are operated in a specified operation method,
In a gaming machine equipped with a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls a presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that can execute a notification presentation (navigation presentation) that notifies the user of the specified operation method based on a command transmitted from the main control means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the sub-control means receives a second status command (second stop command) sent from the main control means without receiving a first status command (first stop command) sent from the main control means while the notification effect is being executed, it does not cause the effect means to perform a specified notification (GET effect) corresponding to the specified winning, even if the multiple stop operation means are operated using the specified operation method.

According to this gaming machine, if the sub-control means receives a second status command from the main control means without receiving a first status command from the main control means while a notification effect is being executed, the sub-control means will not cause the effect means to issue a prescribed notification corresponding to a prescribed win, even if multiple stop operation means are operated using a prescribed operation method. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the notification effect from becoming too complex, and also makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume. If the first status command from the main control means is not received, it becomes difficult for the sub-control means to determine whether the received second status command was sent from the main control means in the game round that started the notification effect, or, for example, whether it was sent from the main control means in the game round following the game round that started the notification effect. Furthermore, making such a determination on the sub-control means would require the processing configuration related to the notification effect to become more complex.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to store data related to other auxiliary effects in unused areas of the memory area, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 18D2. In the gaming machine 18D1 described above, if the sub-control means receives the second status command without receiving the first status command while the notification effect is being executed, the sub-control means does not cause the effect means to execute the specified notification even if the specified win is achieved.

In this gaming machine, if the sub-control means receives a second status command without receiving a first status command while the notification effect is being executed, it will not cause the effect means to issue a prescribed notification, even if a prescribed winning combination is achieved. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the notification effect from becoming too complex, and also reduces the amount of data required. If the first status command sent from the main control means is not received, it becomes difficult for the sub-control means to determine whether the received second status command was sent from the main control means in the game round that started the notification effect, or, for example, in the game round following the game round that started the notification effect. Accordingly, if the configuration were to determine whether the prescribed winning combination was achieved in the game round that started the notification effect, or in a game round different from the game round that started the notification effect, and then control the execution of the prescribed notification, it would be necessary to complicate the processing configuration related to the notification effect.

Gaming machine 18D3. In the gaming machine 18D1 or 18D2 described above, the main control means transmits the first status command to the sub-control means when any of the plurality of stop operation means is operated for the first time.

In this gaming machine, the main control means transmits a first status command to the sub-control means when one of the multiple stop operation means is operated first. In this configuration, if the sub-control means receives a second status command without receiving the first status command, it becomes difficult for the sub-control means to determine whether the multiple stop operation means have been operated in a specified manner. Therefore, by configuring the presentation means not to issue a specified notification corresponding to a specified win when the above event occurs, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the notification presentation from becoming too complex and to prevent an increase in data volume.

Gaming machine 18D4. In the gaming machine 18D3 described above, when the sub-control means receives the second status command after receiving the first status command while the notification effect is being executed, the sub-control means controls the progress of the notification effect, and when the sub-control means receives the second status command without receiving the first status command, the sub-control means does not control the progress of the notification effect.

According to this gaming machine, if the sub-control means receives a second status command after receiving a first status command while a notification effect is being executed, it controls the progress of the notification effect's presentation content, but if it receives a second status command without receiving the first status command, it does not control the progress of the notification effect's presentation content. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a situation has arisen in which commands from the main control means cannot be received, by the notification effect's presentation content not progressing.

Gaming Machine 18D5. In gaming machine 18D3 or 18D4 above, the sub-control means is provided with means for controlling the presentation means to issue a mismatch notification (incorrect presentation) if it receives the first status command while the notification presentation is being executed and the first status command indicates that the stop operation means has been operated in a manner different from the specified operation method, and the gaming machine is characterized in that if it receives the second status command without receiving the first status command while the notification presentation is being executed, it does not cause the presentation means to issue the mismatch notification, even if the multiple stop operation means have been operated in a manner different from the specified operation method.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means receives a first status command while a notification effect is being executed, and if the first status command indicates that the stop operation means has been operated using a method different from the specified operation method, the sub-control means controls the effect means to issue a mismatch notification. On the other hand, if the sub-control means receives a second status command without receiving the first status command while a notification effect is being executed, the sub-control means does not cause the effect means to issue a mismatch notification, even if multiple stop operation means have been operated using a method different from the specified operation method. This configuration makes it possible to notify the user that a command from the main control means could not be received, by preventing a mismatch notification.

Gaming machine 18D6. In any of gaming machines 18D1 to 18D5 above, the sub-control means is characterized in that it includes means for controlling the output of an abnormality occurrence sound (abnormality notification sound) when the second status command is received without receiving the first status command while the notification effect is being executed.

In this gaming machine, if the sub-control means receives a second status command without receiving a first status command while a notification effect is being executed, it controls the output of an abnormality sound. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a command from the main control means cannot be received through the output of the abnormality sound.

Gaming machine 18D7. In any of gaming machines 18D1 to 18D6 above, the sub-control means does not control the output of an abnormality occurrence sound (abnormality notification sound) when, after starting the notification effect based on receiving a first command indicating that a predetermined game round (push order bell winning game) has started, it is unable to receive a command from the main control means, and when, based on the first command indicating that the next game round after the predetermined game round has started, it is able to receive a command from the main control means.

In this gaming machine, if the sub-control means is unable to receive commands from the main control means after initiating a notification effect based on receiving a first command indicating the start of a predetermined game round, and is then able to receive commands from the main control means based on the first command indicating the start of a game round following the predetermined game round, the sub-control means will not perform control to output an abnormality sound. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the notification effect from becoming too complicated. In order to perform control to output an abnormality sound in the above situation, when performing control for the next game round, it would be necessary to perform processing to confirm whether the first command, first status command, and second status command were received in the predetermined game round (previous game round), for example.

A typical example of a "situation in which commands from the main control means cannot be received" is when there is a poor contact or disconnection in the connector or other connection means that connects the main control means and the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 18D8. Any of gaming machines 18D1 to 18D7 above, further comprising a display means (auxiliary display unit 65) that displays the number of plays played in a special game state (alert mode), and wherein the sub-control means changes the number of plays displayed on the display means when it receives a first command (start command) sent from the main control means based on the start of a game.

According to this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a first command transmitted from the main control means based on the start of a game, it changes the number of games played in the special game state displayed on the display means. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of games played in the special game state.

Gaming Machine 18D9. In the gaming machine 18D8 described above, the main control means transmits a command including information indicating the number of games played under the special gaming state to the sub-control means each time a game is played under the special gaming state.

In this gaming machine, the main control means transmits a command containing information indicating the number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state to the sub-control means each time a game is played in the special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to correct the number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state displayed on the display means after receiving a command containing information indicating the number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the command transmitted from the main control means, resulting in a discrepancy between the number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state displayed on the display means and the actual number of times a game has been played in the special gaming state.

Gaming machine 18D10. Any of the above gaming machines 18D1 to 18D9 is equipped with a display means (auxiliary display unit 65) that displays the number of game values (number of medals) that has increased in a special game state (alert mode), and the sub-control means changes the number of game values displayed on the display means when it receives a predetermined command (end command) sent from the main control means based on the end of a game round.

According to this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a predetermined command sent from the main control means based on the completion of a game round, it changes the number of game values that has increased under the special game state, as displayed on the display means. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of game values that has increased under the special game state.

Gaming Machine 18D11. In the gaming machine 18D10 described above, the main control means transmits a command including information indicating the number of play values increased under the special gaming state to the sub-control means each time a game is played under the special gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the main control means transmits a command including information indicating the number of play values increased under the special gaming state to the sub-control means each time a game is played under the special gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to correct the number of play values increased under the special gaming state displayed on the display means after receiving a command including information indicating the number of play values increased under the special gaming state, even if the sub-control means is unable to receive the command transmitted from the main control means, resulting in a discrepancy between the number of play values increased under the special gaming state displayed on the display means and the number of play values actually increased under the special gaming state.

The gaming machines 18A to 18D may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 18 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 17, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 19A1. A gaming machine capable of playing a first game in which a first bet number (3 coins) is set and a second game in which a second bet number (2 coins) is set,
In the first gaming state (announcement mode), it is possible to determine whether or not to end the first gaming state using first result information (the value of the announcement difference number counter) based only on the gaming result of the first game,
A gaming machine characterized in that in a second game state (ending mode), it is possible to determine whether or not to end the second game state using second result information (value of the difference number counter) based on the game results of the first game and the game results of the second game.

This gaming machine is configured so that, in the first gaming state, it is possible to determine whether to end the first gaming state using first result information based solely on the gaming results of the first game, and in the second gaming state, it is possible to determine whether to end the second gaming state using second result information based on the gaming results of the first game and the second game. This configuration makes it possible to make an appropriate end decision depending on the gaming state at that time, thereby increasing gaming enjoyment.

Gaming machine 19A2. The gaming machine 19A1 described above, further comprising: first storage means (a reported difference number counter of the main control device 101) for storing the first result information; first update means (a reported difference number update processing function of the main control device 101) for updating the first result information stored in the first storage means when the first game is played in the first gaming state, and not updating the first result information stored in the first storage means when the second game is played in the first gaming state; and first termination means (advantageous period termination functions S190806 to S190808 of the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming period to a first gaming period (normal period) and terminating the first gaming state when the first result information stored in the first storage means becomes first specified result information (0).

This gaming machine is equipped with first storage means for storing first result information, first update means for updating the first result information stored in the first storage means when a first game is played in the first gaming state and not updating the first result information stored in the first storage means when a second game is played in the first gaming state, and first termination means for transitioning the gaming period to the first gaming period and terminating the first gaming state when the first result information stored in the first storage means becomes first specified result information. This configuration makes it possible to transition the gaming period to the first gaming period and terminate the first gaming state based on the gaming results of the first game played in the first gaming state.

Gaming machine 19A3. A gaming machine as described above, comprising: notification control means (the operation sequence notification control function of the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81) that controls notification of a predetermined operation method that can achieve a predetermined win (bell win) when the result of the lottery for the role in the gaming machine 19A2 is a predetermined result (push order bell win); and the notification control means is configured to control notification of the predetermined operation method when the first game is started in the first gaming state, but not to control notification of the predetermined operation method when the second game is started in the first gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, in the first gaming state, if the lottery result for a role during the first game is a predetermined result, a predetermined operation method for achieving a predetermined win may be announced, whereas if the lottery result for a role during the second game is a predetermined result, no predetermined operation method is announced. In such a configuration, if the second result information is used to determine whether to end the first gaming state, there is a concern that the number of gaming values awarded in the first gaming state will differ depending on the number of times the second game is played, which could lead to a sense of unfairness among players. On the other hand, if the first result information based solely on the gaming results of the first game is used to determine whether to end the first gaming state, this concern can be effectively alleviated, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming Machine 19A4. A gaming machine according to the above gaming machine 19A3, characterized in that the first update means is configured to update the first result information stored in the first storage means based on the result of the lottery for the winning combination when the first game is played, and when the notification control means controls to notify the predetermined operation method, the update is performed in accordance with the establishment of the predetermined winning combination, regardless of whether the predetermined winning combination has been established.

According to this gaming machine, the first result information stored in the first storage means is updated based on the lottery results for the winning combination when the first game is played, and when the notification control means controls to notify a predetermined operation method, the first result information is updated in response to the achievement of a predetermined win, regardless of whether the predetermined win is achieved. This configuration makes it possible to prompt the player to operate using the predetermined operation method when the predetermined operation method is notified in the first gaming state. For example, when the notification control means controls to notify a predetermined operation method, it is possible to configure the first result information to be updated differently when the predetermined win is achieved and when the predetermined win is not achieved. However, with this configuration, it is possible that the player may intentionally not operate using the predetermined operation method, thereby avoiding the achievement of the predetermined win.

Gaming machine 19A5. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the above gaming machine 19A4, if the lottery result for the role when the first game is played in the first gaming state is a specified result (a rare role win), the number of gaming values that can be acquired in the first gaming state can be increased.

According to this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for a role when playing the first game in the first gaming state is a specified result, the number of game values that can be acquired in the first gaming state may increase. When applying a configuration that updates the first result information based on the result of the lottery for a role, there is a concern that, for example, as the end of the first gaming state approaches, the player may intentionally avoid achieving a predetermined winning result until the number of game values that can be acquired in the first gaming state increases. However, if the notification control means controls to notify a predetermined operation method and updates the information in response to the achievement of a predetermined winning result, regardless of whether the predetermined winning result has been achieved, it is possible to make the attempt to avoid the achievement of a predetermined winning result useless, thereby effectively alleviating the above-mentioned concern.

Gaming machine 19A6. Any of the above gaming machines 19A2 to 19A5 is equipped with notification control means (the operation sequence notification control function of the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81) that controls notification of a predetermined operation method that can achieve a predetermined win (a bell win) when the result of the role lottery is a predetermined result (a push order bell win), and is configured so that when the first game is played in the first gaming state, if the predetermined operation method is notified and the predetermined operation method is performed, it can be expected that a gaming value greater than the first bet amount will be awarded.

With this gaming machine, when a first game is played in the first gaming state, if a predetermined operation method is notified and the player performs the predetermined operation method, the player can expect to be awarded a gaming value greater than the first bet amount. This configuration makes it possible to turn the first gaming state into a gaming state in which the player's gaming value increases, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 19A7. Any of gaming machines 19A2 to 19A6 above, comprising: transition means (favorable zone transition function S190203 of main control unit 101) for transitioning from the first gaming period to a second gaming period (favorable zone) having at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state; second storage means (difference number counter of main control unit 101) for storing the second result information; second update means (difference number update processing function of main control unit 101) for updating the second result information stored in the second storage means when the first game is played during the second gaming period and when the second game is played during the second gaming period; and second termination means (ending mode transition function S191003 of main control unit 101) for transitioning to the second gaming state and terminating the first gaming state when the second result information stored in the second storage means becomes second specified result information (65321).

This gaming machine includes transition means for transitioning from a first gaming period to a second gaming period having at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state; second storage means for storing second result information; second update means for updating the second result information stored in the second storage means when a first game is played during the second gaming period and when a second game is played during the second gaming period; and second termination means for transitioning to the second gaming state and terminating the first gaming state when the second result information stored in the second storage means becomes second specified result information. This configuration makes it possible to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the gaming results of the first and second games played during the second gaming period.

Gaming Machine 19A8. A gaming machine according to the above gaming machine 19A7, characterized in that the second update means is configured to update the second result information stored in the second storage means based on the set number of bets and the number of gaming values awarded.

In this gaming machine, the second result information stored in the second storage means is updated based on the set number of bets and the number of gaming values awarded. This configuration makes it possible to transition to the second gaming state based on the amount of change in gaming value since the transition to the second gaming period, thereby increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine 19A9. The gaming machine 19A8 described above is further equipped with third ending means (advantageous zone ending function S190503-S190505 in the ending mode of the main control device 101) that transitions to the first gaming period and ends the second gaming state when the second result information stored in the second storage means becomes third specified result information (65521), and is configured so that when the second result information stored in the second storage means becomes the third specified result information, the number of gaming values owned by the player increases compared to when the second result information stored in the second storage means becomes the second specified result information.

With this gaming machine, when the second gaming state ends, the number of gaming values owned by the player increases compared to when the game state transitioned from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible, when the game state transitions to the first gaming state, for the player to play in the first gaming state while expecting that the first gaming state will continue until the second result information stored in the second storage means becomes the second specified result information, thereby preventing the game in the first gaming state from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 19A10. Any of gaming machines 19A7 to 19A9 described above is characterized in that, when the maximum number of gaming values (2,400) that can be awarded during the second gaming period is reached, the gaming machine transitions to the first gaming period and the second gaming state ends.

With this gaming machine, when the maximum number of game values that can be awarded in the second game period is reached, the game transitions to the first game period and the second game state ends. This configuration allows the player to play in the first game state while anticipating the transition to the second game state and the end of the first game state, rather than transitioning to the first game period and the end of the first game state, when the game state transitions to the first game state, making it possible to prevent play in the first game state from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 19A11. The gaming machine 19A10 described above is equipped with a notification control means (the operation sequence notification control function of the main control unit 101 and the display control unit 81) that controls notification of a predetermined operation method that can achieve a predetermined win (bell win) when the result of the role lottery is a predetermined result (push order bell win), and is configured so that the notification control means can control notification of the predetermined operation method when the first game is started in the first game state and when the first game is started in the second game state, but does not control notification of the predetermined operation method when the second game is started in the first game state and when the second game is started in the second game state.

According to this gaming machine, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, if the result of the lottery for a role during the first game is a predetermined result, a predetermined operation method for achieving a predetermined win can be announced, whereas if the result of the lottery for a role during the second game is a predetermined result, the predetermined operation method is not announced. By adopting this configuration, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, it is possible to play in the second gaming state without changing the game rules of following an operation method when one is announced. As a result, it is possible to make the second gaming state function as a gaming state in which the second gaming period can be completed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 19A12. A gaming machine capable of playing a first game with a first bet number (3 coins) and a second game with a second bet number (2 coins),
In the first gaming state (announcement mode), it is possible to determine whether or not to end the first gaming state using first result information (the value of the announcement difference number counter) based only on the gaming result of the first game,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game that satisfies specific conditions (ending mode, MY period), it is possible to determine whether or not to end the first game state using second result information (value of the difference number counter, value of the MY counter) based on the game results of the first game and the game results of the second game.

This gaming machine is configured so that, in the first gaming state, it is possible to determine whether to end the first gaming state using first result information based solely on the gaming results of the first game, and in a game that satisfies specific conditions, it is possible to determine whether to end the first gaming state using second result information based on the gaming results of the first game and the second game. This configuration makes it possible to make an appropriate end decision depending on the game at that time, thereby increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine 19B1. A gaming machine capable of playing a first game with a first bet number (3 coins) and a second game with a second bet number (2 coins),
A gaming machine characterized by having a predetermined control means (a remaining number display function of a display control device 81) that, in a first gaming state (announcement mode), performs control to reflect the gaming results of the first game, and, in a second gaming state (ending mode), performs control to reflect both the gaming results of the first game and the gaming results of the second game.

With this gaming machine, in the first gaming state, control is performed to reflect the gaming results of the first game, and in the second gaming state, control is performed to reflect both the gaming results of the first game and the second game. This configuration makes it possible to reflect the gaming results appropriately according to the gaming state at that time, thereby increasing the gaming enjoyment.

Gaming machine 19B2. In the gaming machine 19B1 described above, the predetermined control means controls the display means (auxiliary display unit 65) to display first remaining information (number of remaining coins) until the end of the first gaming state when in the first gaming state, and controls the display means to display second remaining information (number of remaining coins) until the end of the second gaming state when in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, when in the first gaming state, control is performed to cause the display means to display first remaining information until the end of the first gaming state, and when in the second gaming state, control is performed to cause the display means to display second remaining information until the end of the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with an estimate of the number of plays and playing time required until the end of each gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 19B3. The gaming machine 19B2 described above is characterized in that it includes state transition means (ending mode transition function S191003 of the main control device 101) for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and is configured so that the second remaining information is not displayed on the display means at least during the first gaming session after transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, at least during the first game turn after transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, the second remaining information is not displayed on the display means until the second game state ends. This configuration reduces the chances of the player becoming confused. It is certainly possible to configure the display means to display the second remaining information from the first game turn after transitioning from the first game state to the second game state. However, with this configuration, it is conceivable that the player may become confused when the first remaining information is switched to the second remaining information. Furthermore, particularly when the units of the first remaining information and the second remaining information are the same, there is a concern that the player may not only be confused but also develop a sense of distrust if the second remaining information displayed at the beginning of the second game state is less than the first remaining information displayed at the end of the first game state.

Gaming Machine 19B4. In the gaming machine 19B3 described above, the predetermined control means controls the display means to display the second remaining information when a specific condition (remaining number of coins: 50 or less) that can be met by playing multiple times in the second gaming state is met.

With this gaming machine, the second remaining information is displayed when a specific condition is met that can be realized by playing multiple times in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible for multiple games to be played between the time the first remaining information is displayed and the time the second remaining information is displayed, reducing the chances of the player becoming confused.

Gaming machine 19B5. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine 19B3 or 19B4, characterized in that the unit of the first remaining information and the unit of the second remaining information are the same.

In this gaming machine, because the units of the first remaining information and the second remaining information are the same, there is a concern that the player may be confused if the second remaining information is displayed from the next play after the first remaining information is displayed when transitioning from the first play state to the second play state. However, if the second remaining information is configured not to be displayed on the display means at least in the first play after transitioning from the first play state to the second play state, the above concern can be suitably alleviated.

Gaming machine 19B6. The gaming machine 19B5 described above is characterized in that, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the first remaining information does not become 0 in the final gaming round of the first gaming state.

With this gaming machine, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the first remaining information does not become 0 in the final play of the first gaming state. In this configuration, if the second remaining information is displayed from the first play of the second gaming state, there is a high possibility that a discrepancy will occur between the first remaining information displayed in the final play of the first gaming state and the second remaining information displayed in the first play of the second gaming state, which could confuse the player. However, if the configuration is such that the second remaining information is not displayed on the display means at least in the first play of the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 19B7. The gaming machine 19B6 described above is characterized by including first gaming state termination means (advantageous period termination functions S190806 to S190808 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the first gaming state without transitioning to the second gaming state when the first remaining information becomes 0.

With this gaming machine, when the first remaining information reaches 0, the first gaming state ends without transitioning to the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to play in the first gaming state while encouraging the player to expect a transition to the second gaming state before the first remaining information reaches 0, thereby preventing play in the first gaming state from becoming monotonous.

Gaming Machine 19B8. Any of gaming machines 19B5 to 19B7 above, characterized in that the first remaining information and the second remaining information are displayed in the same position on the display means.

With this gaming machine, the first remaining information and the second remaining information are displayed in the same position on the display means. This configuration makes it possible to check the remaining information by directing one's gaze toward a predetermined position on the display means in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, thereby improving visibility when checking the remaining information. However, if the second remaining information is displayed from the first game turn in the second gaming state, there is a high possibility that a discrepancy will occur between the first remaining information displayed in the last game turn in the first gaming state and the second remaining information displayed in the first game turn in the second gaming state, which could confuse the player. However, if the second remaining information is not displayed on the display means at least in the first game turn after transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, this concern can be resolved effectively.

Gaming machine 19B9. Any of gaming machines 19B2 to 19B8 above is provided with an increase information display control means that, when in the first gaming state, controls the display means to display increase information related to the increase in gaming value since transitioning to the first gaming state, and the increase information display control means controls the display means to continue displaying the increase information when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, when in the first gaming state, increase information relating to the increase in gaming value since transitioning to the first gaming state is displayed on the display means. Then, when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the increase information continues to be displayed on the display means. This configuration allows the player to grasp the number of gaming values they have acquired since transitioning to the first gaming state when transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, thereby increasing the player's satisfaction in the second gaming state.

Gaming Machine 19B10. In the gaming machine 19B9, the increase information display control means controls the display means to display a result that reflects both the game results of the first game and the game results of the second game as the increase information.

With this gaming machine, the results reflecting both the results of the first game and the results of the second game are displayed on the display means as increase information, so even if the second game is played instead of the first game in the first gaming state, the player can understand the change in the number of game values they have acquired.

Gaming Machine 19B11. Any of gaming machines 19B2 to 19B10 described above is configured such that, in the first gaming state, it is possible to determine whether to terminate the first gaming state using first result information based only on the gaming result of the first game, and in the second gaming state, it is possible to determine whether to terminate the second gaming state using second result information based on the gaming result of the first game and the gaming result of the second game.

This gaming machine is configured so that, in the first gaming state, it is possible to determine whether to end the first gaming state using first result information based solely on the gaming results of the first game, and in the second gaming state, it is possible to determine whether to end the second gaming state using second result information based on the gaming results of the first game and the second game. This configuration makes it possible to make an appropriate end decision depending on the gaming state at that time, thereby increasing gaming enjoyment.

Gaming machine 19B12. A gaming machine capable of playing a first game with a first bet number (3 coins) and a second game with a second bet number (2 coins),
A gaming machine characterized by having a predetermined control means (remaining number display function of the display control device 81) that performs control to reflect the game results of the first game in a first game state (alert mode), and performs control to reflect both the game results of the first game and the game results of the second game in a game that satisfies specific conditions (ending mode, MY period).

With this gaming machine, in the first gaming state, control is performed to reflect the gaming results of the first game, and in a game that meets specific conditions, control is performed to reflect both the gaming results of the first game and the second game. This configuration makes it possible to reflect the appropriate gaming results depending on the gaming state at that time, thereby increasing gaming enjoyment.

The gaming machines 19A to 19B may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 19 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 18, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 20A1. A grant determination means (a transition flag setting function S200206, S200212 and an additional game number addition function S200303 of the main control device 101) for determining whether to grant a predetermined benefit (transition to notification mode B, additional game number addition function S200303) in a specific game state (notification mode A);
a notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying the result of the determination made by the granting decision means to grant the predetermined benefit;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the award decision means decides to award the specified benefit in the first game round (transition lottery winning game) and the second game round (B additional lottery winning game) after the first game round, the notification means is configured to be able to notify the decision result in the first game round in response to the decision of the award decision means in the second game round.

In this gaming machine, if the award determination means determines to award a specified bonus in a first game round and a second game round that follows the first game round, the decision to award the specified bonus in the second game round may trigger an announcement of the decision result for the first game round. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of announcement of the decision result for the first game round to the timing when the award determination means next decides to award the specified bonus.

As a result of the above, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the award determination means's decision results are announced, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20A2. In the gaming machine 20A1 described above, the award decision means, when determining to award a first specific benefit (transition to notification mode B) in the first game round, determines to award a second specific benefit (addition to the number of games played in notification mode B) of a different type from the first specific benefit in the second game round.

With this gaming machine, if the award decision means decides to award a first specific benefit in a first game, it decides to award a second specific benefit of a different type from the first specific benefit in a second game. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of notification that the first specific benefit will be awarded to the timing of the decision to award the second specific benefit.

Gaming machine 20A3. In the gaming machine 20A2 described above, the award decision means does not decide to award the second specific benefit until it has decided to award the first specific benefit.

In this gaming machine, the award decision means does not decide to award the second specific benefit until it has decided to award the first specific benefit. In this configuration, the expected value of the decision to award the second specific benefit changes depending on the timing in the specific gaming state at which the decision to award the first specific benefit is made. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that the decision to award the first specific benefit can be notified based on the decision by the award decision means in the second gaming session, it is possible to effectively increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20A4. The gaming machine 20A3 described above, characterized in that the specific gaming state does not end when the award determined to be awarded by the award determination means is granted.

With this gaming machine, the specific gaming state does not end when the awarding of the benefit determined by the award determination means is triggered. This configuration makes it possible to delay the timing of notification that the first specific benefit has been awarded, thereby increasing gaming interest. For example, if the specific gaming state were to end when the second specific benefit was awarded, it would be desirable to notify the player as soon as possible that a decision to award the first specific benefit had been made, which would impose restrictions on the timing of notification that a decision to award the first specific benefit had been made.

Gaming machine 20A5. The gaming machine 20A4 described above, wherein the first specific benefit and the second specific benefit are benefits that are awarded after the specific gaming state ends.

According to this gaming machine, the first and second specific benefits are awarded after the specific gaming state has ended. In this configuration, even if it is not possible to notify the player that a decision to award the first specific benefit has been made during the specific gaming state, the notification can be made after the specific gaming state has ended, etc. This makes it possible to diversify the timing at which the decision made by the award determination means is notified, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20A6. In any of gaming machines 20A1 to 20A5 above, if the award decision means decides to award the specified bonus in a first game (transition lottery winning game), but the notification means does not notify the result of the decision made by the award decision means in the first game, and the award decision means decides to award the specified bonus in a second game (B additional lottery winning game) after the first game, the notification means can notify the result of the decision made in the first game, triggered by the decision made by the award decision means in the second game.

According to this gaming machine, if the award decision means determines to award a specified bonus in a first game round, but the notification means does not notify the result of the decision made by the award decision means in the first game round, and the award decision means decides to award the specified bonus in a second game round that follows the first game round, the notification means may notify the result of the decision made in the first game round in response to the decision made by the award decision means in the second game round. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of notification of the result of the decision made in the first game round to the timing when the award decision means next decides to award the specified bonus.

Gaming machine 20A7. In the gaming machine 20A6 described above, when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game round is the first specified result (a strong cherry win), the notification means notifies the result of the determination in the first game round, triggered by the decision of the award determination means in the second game round, but does not notify the result of the determination in the second game round.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for the role in the second game round is the first specified result, the result of the first game round is announced in response to the decision made by the award decision means in the second game round, but the result of the second game round is not announced. This configuration makes it possible to postpone the timing of announcement of the result of the second game round, thereby diversifying the timing of announcement of the result of the award decision means.

Gaming machine 20A8. In the gaming machine 20A7 described above, when the result of the lottery for the role in the first game round is the first specified result, the notification means notifies the result of the determination in the first game round in response to the determination by the award determination means in the first game round.

According to this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for the role in the first play is the first specified result, the result of the first play is announced in response to the decision made by the award decision means in the first play. In other words, if the award decision means decides to award a specified benefit in a play in which the result of the lottery for the role is the first specified result, the same announcement is made in response to that decision as if the decision made by the award decision means in the second play. With this configuration, when the result of the lottery for the role is the first specified result and the decision made by the award decision means is announced, it is possible to create anticipation that there are unannounced results, making it possible to prevent play in a specific game state from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine 20A9. In any of gaming machines 20A6 to 20A8 above, when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game round is a second specified result (a weak watermelon win), if a specific notification condition (a 7-match in a pseudo game) triggered by the determination of the award determination means in the second game round is met, the notification means will not notify the result of the determination in the first game round but will not notify the result of the determination in the second game round, and if the specific notification condition is not met, will not notify the result of the determination in either the first game round or the second game round.

According to this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for the second game turn is the second specified result, and if the specific notification conditions triggered by the decision of the award determination means in the second game turn are met, the result of the first game turn is announced, but the result of the second game turn is not announced; if the specific notification conditions are not met, neither the result of the first game turn nor the result of the second game turn is announced. This configuration not only makes it possible to delay the timing of the notification of the result of the second game turn, but also makes it possible to further delay the timing of the notification of the result of the first game turn depending on whether the specific notification conditions are met, making it possible to diversify the timing of the notification of the result of the award determination means.

Gaming machine 20A10. In the gaming machine 20A9 described above, when the result of the lottery for the role in the first game round is the second specified result, if the specific notification condition triggered by the determination of the award determination means in the first game round is met, the notification means notifies the result of the determination in the first game round, and if the specific notification condition is not met, the notification means does not notify the result of the determination in the first game round.

According to this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for the role in the first game round is the second specified result, and the specific notification condition triggered by the decision of the award decision means in the first game round is met, the result of the decision in the first game round is announced; if the specific notification condition is not met, the result of the decision in the first game round is not announced. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing of the announcement of the result of the decision in the first game round depending on whether the specific notification condition is met, making it possible to diversify the timing of the announcement of the result of the decision by the award decision means.

Gaming machine 20A11. In gaming machine 20A9 or 20A10, the specific notification condition is met when multiple stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) are operated using a specific operation method (a method of operating stop switches 42-44 at the timing when the "white 7" symbol pseudo-stops on center line L2), and the specific notification condition is not met when the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method other than the specific operation method.

With this gaming machine, whether or not a specific notification condition is met is determined by the player's operation of multiple stop operation means, allowing the player to actively participate in the timing of notification of the decision result in the first game round, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20A12. In any of gaming machines 20A6 to 20A11 above, when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game round is a third specified result (a weak cherry win), if a specific notification condition (a 7-match in a pseudo game) triggered by the determination of the award determination means in the second game round is met, the notification means notifies the result of the determination in the first game round and the result of the determination in the second game round; and if the specific notification condition is not met, the notification means notifies the result of the determination in the first game round but does not notify the result of the determination in the second game round.

According to this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for the role in the second game round is the third specified result, and if the specific notification condition triggered by the decision of the award determination means in the second game round is met, both the result of the first game round and the result of the second game round are announced; if the specific notification condition is not met, the result of the first game round is announced, but the result of the second game round is not announced. With this configuration, it is possible to announce the result of the first game round triggered by the decision of the award determination means in the second game round, while changing the timing of announcement of the result of the second game round depending on whether the specific notification condition is met. As a result of the above, it is possible to diversify the timing of announcement of the result of the award determination means.

Gaming machine 20A13. The gaming machine 20A12 described above, characterized in that an event does not occur in which the game turn in which the lottery result for the role results in the third specified result becomes the first game turn.

According to this gaming machine, the award determination means does not decide to award the specified bonus in a game in which the winning combination lottery result is the third specified result until after the award determination means has decided to award the specified bonus. In this configuration, if the award determination means decides to award the specified bonus in a game in which the winning combination lottery result is the third specified result, and a notification is made in response to this decision, it becomes clear that the award determination means had previously decided to award the specified bonus. Therefore, in such cases, by configuring the machine to notify the result of the decision in the first game in which the winning combination lottery result is the third specified result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20A14. In gaming machine 20A12 or 20A13, the specific notification condition is met when multiple stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) are operated using a specific operation method (a method of operating stop switches 42-44 at the timing when the "white 7" symbol pseudo-stops on center line L2), and the specific notification condition is not met when the multiple stop operation means are operated using a method other than the specific operation method.

With this gaming machine, whether or not a specific notification condition is met is determined by the player's operation of multiple stop operation means, allowing the player to actively participate in the timing of notification of the decision result in the second game round, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20B1. A grant determination means (a transition flag setting function S200206, S200212 and an additional game number addition function S200303 of the main control device 101) for determining whether to grant a predetermined benefit (transition to notification mode B, additional game number addition function S200303) in a specific game state (notification mode A);
a notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying the result of the determination made by the granting decision means to grant the predetermined benefit;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the award decision means decides to award the specified benefit to the first game round (transition lottery winning game) and the second game round (B additional lottery winning game) after the first game round, the notification means is configured to be able to notify both the decision result for the first game round and the decision result for the second game round.

With this gaming machine, if the award determination means determines to award a specified bonus in a first game round and in a second game round that follows the first game round, the determination results for the first game round and the determination results for the second game round may both be announced. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of the announcement of the determination result for the first game round to the timing when the award determination means next decides to award the specified bonus.

As a result of the above, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the award determination means's decision results are announced, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20B2. A gaming machine as described above in connection with gaming machine 20B1, characterized in that the notification means is configured to notify the determination results of both the first game round and the second game round in response to a decision made by the award determination means in the second game round.

In this gaming machine, if the award determination means determines to award a specified bonus in a first game round and a second game round that follows the first game round, the decision to award the specified bonus in the second game round may trigger an announcement of both the decision result for the first game round and the decision result for the second game round. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of announcement of the decision result for the first game round to the timing when the award determination means next decides to award the specified bonus.

Gaming machine 20B3. In the gaming machine 20B2 described above, the award decision means, when determining to award a first specific benefit (transition to notification mode B) in the first game round, determines to award a second specific benefit (addition to the number of games played in notification mode B) of a different type from the first specific benefit in the second game round.

With this gaming machine, if the award decision means decides to award a first specific benefit in a first play, it decides to award a second specific benefit of a different type from the first specific benefit in a second play. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of the notification that the first specific benefit will be awarded to the timing of the decision to award the second specific benefit. Furthermore, by configuring the machine so that multiple different types of benefits can be notified at the same time, it is possible to dramatically increase the player's sense of accomplishment and superiority, and to effectively increase their interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20B4. In the gaming machine 20B3 described above, the award decision means does not decide to award the second specific benefit until it decides to award the first specific benefit.

In this gaming machine, the award decision means does not decide to award the second specific benefit until it has decided to award the first specific benefit. In this configuration, the expected value of the decision to award the second specific benefit changes depending on the timing in the specific gaming state at which the decision to award the first specific benefit is made. Therefore, by configuring the machine so that the decision to award the first specific benefit can be notified based on the decision by the award decision means in the second gaming session, it is possible to effectively increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20B5. The gaming machine 20B4 described above is characterized in that the specific gaming state does not end when the award determined to be awarded by the award determination means is granted.

With this gaming machine, the specific gaming state does not end when the awarding of the benefit determined by the award determination means is triggered. This configuration makes it possible to delay the timing of notification that the first specific benefit has been awarded, thereby increasing gaming interest. For example, if the specific gaming state were to end when the second specific benefit was awarded, it would be desirable to notify the player as soon as possible that a decision to award the first specific benefit had been made, which would impose restrictions on the timing of notification that a decision to award the first specific benefit had been made.

Gaming machine 20B6. In the gaming machine 20B5 described above, the first specific benefit and the second specific benefit are benefits that are awarded after the specific gaming state ends.

According to this gaming machine, the first and second specific benefits are awarded after the specific gaming state has ended. In this configuration, even if it is not possible to notify the player that a decision to award the first specific benefit has been made during the specific gaming state, the notification can be made after the specific gaming state has ended, etc. This makes it possible to diversify the timing at which the decision made by the award determination means is notified, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 20B7. In any of gaming machines 20B1 to 20B6 above, if the award decision means determines to award the specified bonus in a first game round (transition lottery winning game), while the notification means does not notify the result of the decision made by the award decision means in the first game round, and the award decision means determines to award the specified bonus in a second game round (B additional lottery winning game) after the first game round, the notification means can notify both the result of the decision made in the first game round and the result of the decision made in the second game round, triggered by the decision made by the award decision means in the second game round.

According to this gaming machine, if the award decision means determines to award a predetermined bonus in a first game round, but the notification means does not notify the result of the decision made by the award decision means in the first game round, and the award decision means decides to award the predetermined bonus in a second game round that comes after the first game round, the notification means may notify both the result of the decision made in the first game round and the result of the decision made in the second game round in response to the decision made by the award decision means in the second game round. This configuration makes it possible to shift the timing of notification of the result of the decision made in the first game round to the timing when the award decision means next decides to award the predetermined bonus.

Gaming machine 20B8. In the gaming machine 20B7 described above, when the result of the lottery for the role in the second game round is a specific result (a strong watermelon win), the notification means notifies the result of the determination in the first game round and the result of the determination in the second game round, triggered by the decision of the award determination means in the second game round.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for the role in the second play is a specific result, the result of the lottery for the first play and the result of the second play are both announced in response to the decision made by the award decision means in the second play. This configuration makes it possible to announce both the result of the lottery for the role in the first play and the result of the second play in response to the result of the lottery for the role in the second play, thereby diversifying the timing at which the result of the decision made by the award decision means is announced.

Gaming machine 20B9. In the gaming machine 20B8 described above, when the result of the lottery for the role in the first game round is the specific result, the notification means notifies the result of the first game round if a specific notification condition (a set of sevens in a pseudo game) triggered by the determination of the award determination means in the first game round is met, and does not notify the result of the first game round if the specific notification condition is not met.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for the role in the first play is a specific result, and the specific notification condition triggered by the decision of the award determination means in the first play is met, the result of the first play is announced; if the specific notification condition is not met, the result of the first play is not announced. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing of the notification of the result of the first play depending on whether the specific notification condition is met, thereby diversifying the timing of the notification of the result of the award determination means.

Gaming machine 20B10. In the gaming machine 20B9 described above, the specific notification condition is met when multiple stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) are operated using a specific operation method (a method of operating stop switches 42-44 at the timing when the "white 7" symbol pseudo-stops on the center line L2), and the specific notification condition is not met when the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method other than the specific operation method.

With this gaming machine, whether or not a specific notification condition is met is determined by the player's operation of multiple stop operation means, allowing the player to actively participate in the timing of notification of the decision result in the first game round, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machines 20A to 20B may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machine 20 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 19, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 21A1. A display means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of displaying specific game information (for example, the number of games played) related to a game played under a specific game state (announcement mode),
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls the display means based on commands transmitted from the main control means,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, if a situation arises in which the specific command (start command) sent from the main control means cannot be received and a discrepancy occurs between the game actually played under the specific game state and the specific game information grasped by the sub-control means, the discrepancy in the specific game information is maintained without being corrected even if the situation returns to a state in which the specific command can be received in a subsequent game round.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which the specific command sent from the main control means cannot be received and a discrepancy occurs between the game actually played under the specific game state and the specific game information held by the sub-control means, the discrepancy in the specific game information will be maintained without correction, even if a situation returns to a state in which the specific command can be received in a subsequent game. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration related to the display control of the specific game information and reduces the amount of data pre-stored in the sub-control means. As a result, data for executing specified auxiliary effects can be stored in the free space created in the memory capacity of the sub-control means, enabling a wider variety of auxiliary effects to be produced.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

A typical example of a "situation in which a specific command sent from the main control means cannot be received" is when there is a poor contact or disconnection in the connector or other connection means that connects the main control means and the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 21A2. In the above gaming machine 21A1, the sub-control means comprises storage means (games played counter) for storing the specific gaming information, update means (games played counter value change function S210104, S210107) for updating the specific gaming information stored in the storage means when the specific command is received, and control means (games played display function S210105, S210108) for controlling the display of the specific gaming information on the display means when a display condition (transition to notification mode) is met; and a gaming machine characterized in that, if the specific command cannot be received in a specified number of games, but the specific command can be received in the next game after the specified number of games, the play of the specified number of games is not reflected in the specific gaming information.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which a specific command cannot be received during a given game round, but a situation arises in which a specific command can be received during the next game round, the play of the given game round will not be reflected in the specific game information. This configuration eliminates the need to include information indicating the play of the next game round corresponding to the specific game information in the specific command, which not only simplifies the processing configuration related to display control of specific game information on the sub-control means side, but also simplifies the processing configuration related to specific commands on the main control means side.

Gaming machine 21A3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 21A2, but configured so that the specific command does not include information corresponding to the specific game information.

With this gaming machine, the specific commands do not contain information corresponding to the specific game information, which simplifies the processing configuration related to the specific commands on the main control means side. As a result, it becomes possible to store data related to gameplay in the free space created in the main control means' memory capacity, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 21A4. A gaming machine according to the above gaming machine 21A3, characterized in that the main control means is configured not to send commands containing information corresponding to the specific game information to the sub-control means.

With this gaming machine, commands containing information corresponding to specific game information are not sent from the main control means to the sub-control means, which simplifies the processing configuration related to commands on the main control means side. As a result, data related to gameplay can be stored in the free space created in the main control means' memory capacity, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 21A5. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with gaming machine 21A4, characterized in that the specific gaming information is different from information relating to the conditions for ending the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the specific game information is different from the information related to the conditions for ending the specific game state, so even if a discrepancy occurs in the specific game information, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling uncomfortable.

Gaming machine 21A6. Any of gaming machines 21A2 to 21A5 above, wherein the specific gaming information is information indicating the number of games played under the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the specific game information indicates the number of plays played under the specific game state, so even if a discrepancy occurs in the specific game information, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling uncomfortable. It is certainly possible for the specific game information to be information indicating the number of plays remaining until the specific game state ends. However, with this configuration, if a discrepancy occurs in the specific game information, the specific game state will end with a value of 1 or greater being displayed as the specific game information, which could be a concern as to the player feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the specific game information is information indicating the number of plays played under the specific game state, it means that more plays have been played under the specific game state than the displayed specific game information indicates, so it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concern.

Gaming machine 21A7. In the above gaming machine 21A6, the specific gaming state is characterized in that it ends based on the number of gaming values awarded under the specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the specific gaming information indicates the number of plays played in a specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state ends based on the number of play values awarded in that specific gaming state. With this configuration, there is little correlation between the specific gaming information and the conditions for ending the specific gaming state, so even if a discrepancy occurs in the specific gaming information, the impact on the player can be kept minimal. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration related to the display control of the specific gaming information, while also diversifying the auxiliary effects by storing data for executing specified auxiliary effects in the free space created in the memory capacity of the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 21A8. In the above gaming machine 21A1, the sub-control means comprises storage means (acquired coin counter) for storing the specific gaming information, update means (acquired coin counter value change function S210205, S210208) for updating the specific gaming information stored in the storage means when the specific command is received, and control means (acquired coin display function S210206, S210209) for controlling the display of the specific gaming information on the display means when a display condition (transition to notification mode) is met; and a gaming machine characterized in that, if the specific command cannot be received in a specified number of games, but the specific command can be received in the game following the specified number of games, the play of the specified number of games is not reflected in the specific gaming information.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which a specific command cannot be received during a given game round, but a situation arises in which a specific command can be received during the next game round, the play of the given game round will not be reflected in the specific game information. This configuration eliminates the need to include information indicating the play of the next game round corresponding to the specific game information in the specific command, which not only simplifies the processing configuration related to display control of specific game information on the sub-control means side, but also simplifies the processing configuration related to specific commands on the main control means side.

Gaming Machine 21A9. A gaming machine according to the above gaming machine 21A8, characterized in that the specific command is configured to include result information indicating the specific game result (number of bets) of the game in which the specific command is sent, and the update means is configured to, when the specific command is received, update the specific game information stored in the storage means based on the result information.

According to this gaming machine, the specific command contains result information indicating the specific game result of the game round in which the specific command is sent. When the sub-control means receives the specific command, it updates the specific game information stored in the storage means based on the result information included in the received specific command. This configuration eliminates the need for the main control means to store the specific game result of the previous game round, making it possible to simplify the processing configuration related to specific commands on the main control means side. As a result, it becomes possible to store data related to gameplay in the free space created in the main control means' storage capacity, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 21A10. The gaming machine 21A9 described above, wherein the specific gaming information is different from information relating to the conditions for ending the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the specific game information is different from the information related to the conditions for ending the specific game state, so even if a discrepancy occurs in the specific game information, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling uncomfortable.

Gaming machine 21A11. Any of gaming machines 21A8 to 21A10 above, wherein the specific gaming information is information indicating the number of gaming values acquired under the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the specific gaming information indicates the number of gaming values acquired in the specific gaming state, which reduces the chances of the player feeling uncomfortable even if a discrepancy occurs in the specific gaming information. It is certainly possible for the specific gaming information to be information indicating the number of gaming values remaining to be acquired before the specific gaming state ends. However, with such a configuration, if a discrepancy occurs in the specific gaming information, the specific gaming state will end with a value of 1 or greater displayed as the specific gaming information, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the specific gaming information is information indicating the number of gaming values acquired in the specific gaming state, it means that more gaming value has been acquired in the specific gaming state than indicated by the displayed specific gaming information, thereby effectively eliminating the above-mentioned concern.

Gaming machine 21A12. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 21A11, characterized in that the specific gaming state is configured to end based on the number of gaming values awarded in the specific gaming state, and the display means is configured to display remaining number information (remaining number of coins) indicating the number of remaining gaming values that can be acquired in the specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the specific gaming state ends based on the number of gaming values awarded in the specific gaming state, and the display means is capable of displaying remaining number information indicating the number of remaining gaming values that can be acquired in the specific gaming state. This configuration allows the player to grasp the remaining number of games that can be played in the specific gaming state through the remaining number information, even if a discrepancy occurs in the specific gaming information, thereby reducing the chances of the player feeling uncomfortable.

The configuration of the gaming machine 21A2 and the configuration of the gaming machine 21A8 may be combined, provided that the wording is consistent. Specifically, the configuration of the gaming machine 21A2 would include first specific gaming information, a first updating means, etc., and the configuration of the gaming machine 21A8 would include second specific gaming information, a second updating means, etc. Even with such a configuration, the above-mentioned effects can be expected to be achieved.

Gaming machine 21B1. Display means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of displaying regulation game information (remaining number of coins) related to a game under a specific game state (announcement mode);
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a sub-controller (display control device 81) that controls the display means based on commands transmitted from the main control means;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, if a situation arises in which the specified command (start command) sent from the main control means cannot be received and a discrepancy occurs between the game actually played under the specific gaming state and the specified gaming information grasped by the sub-control means, the discrepancy in the specified gaming information is corrected when the situation returns to one in which the specified command can be received in a subsequent gaming round.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which the specified command sent from the main control means cannot be received, resulting in a discrepancy between the game actually played under a specific gaming state and the specified gaming information held by the sub-control means, the discrepancy in the specified gaming information will be corrected if the situation returns to a state in which the specified command can be received in a subsequent game. This configuration makes it possible to provide accurate specified gaming information to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A typical example of a "situation in which the specified command sent from the main control means cannot be received" is when there is a poor contact or disconnection in the connector or other connection means that connects the main control means and the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 21B2. In the gaming machine 21B1 described above, the specified game information is information indicating the number of remaining balls until the specific game state ends.

In this gaming machine, the prescribed game information indicates the number of times remaining until the specific game state ends. In this configuration, if a discrepancy occurs in the prescribed game information due to a situation in which the prescribed command sent from the main control means cannot be received, and the discrepancy is maintained without being corrected, the specific game state will end with a value of 1 or greater displayed as the prescribed game information, which could be disappointing to the player. On the other hand, if the discrepancy in the prescribed game information is corrected when a situation in which the prescribed command can be received is restored in a subsequent game round, the above-mentioned concern can be resolved effectively.

Gaming machine 21B3. In the gaming machine 21B2 described above, the main control means comprises: end information storage means (net increase coin counter) that stores end information (value of the net increase coin counter) used when determining whether to end the specific gaming state; end means (alert mode end processing functions S1905-S1907) that ends the specific gaming state when the end information reaches a specified value (0); determination means (function for winning an add-on lottery) that determines whether to grant a specified benefit (addition to the net increase coin counter) that increases the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state; and end information change means (add-on coin addition function S1807) that changes the end information in accordance with the determination result of the determination means; and the specified command is configured to include information indicating the end information for the game round in which the specified command is sent and information indicating the determination result of the determination means for the game round in which the specified command is sent.

In this gaming machine, the specified command includes information indicating the end information for the game round in which the specified command is sent, and information indicating the decision result of the decision means for the game round in which the specified command is sent. This configuration allows the sub-control means to control the execution of an auxiliary effect that notifies the decision result when the main control means decides to award a specified bonus, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, if a discrepancy occurs between the information indicating the end information included in the specified command and the specified game information held by the sub-control means, the sub-control means can determine whether the discrepancy occurred as a result of the decision to award a specified bonus or because the specified command could not be received. This makes it possible to appropriately correct any discrepancy in the specified game information while reducing the amount of data pre-stored in the main control means.

Gaming machine 21B4. In the gaming machine 21B3 described above, the sub-control means is characterized by including an effect control means (additional effect execution function S210710) that, when receiving a specified command including information indicating a determination result of granting the specified bonus, performs control to execute a notification effect (additional effect) that notifies the determination result.

In this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a specified command containing information indicating a decision result that a specified bonus will be awarded, it performs control to execute a notification effect that notifies the player of the decision result. This configuration allows the player to understand through the notification effect that a specified bonus will be awarded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that "performing control to execute a notification effect" not only refers to a configuration that performs control to execute a notification effect in the game in which the specified command is received, but also includes a configuration that sets flags, counters, etc. to execute a notification effect in a specified game in the following game.

Gaming machine 21B5. A gaming machine according to the above gaming machine 21B4, characterized in that the main control means is configured to transmit the specified command and a second specified command (end command) to the sub-control means in one game round, and the second specified command is configured to include information indicating end information for the game round in which the second specified command is transmitted and information indicating the determination result of the determination means in the game round in which the second specified command is transmitted.

In this gaming machine, the main control means transmits information indicating the end of a game and information indicating the determination result of the determination means twice per game using a specified command and a second specified command. With this configuration, even if the sub-control means fails to receive the specified command, it can grasp the determination result of the determination means as long as it receives the second specified command. Therefore, when correcting a discrepancy in the specified game information, it is possible to correct the discrepancy by reflecting the determination result of the determination means, or to correct the discrepancy without reflecting the determination result of the determination means. By diversifying the timing at which the determination result of the determination means is reflected in the specified game information, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 21B6. In the gaming machine 21B5 described above, if a situation arises in which both the specified command and the second specified command cannot be received during a specified number of play times in which the determination means has determined that the specified bonus should be awarded, and if a situation returns to one in which the specified command can be received during the next play time after the specified number of play times, the result of the determination made by the determination means during the specified number of play times is reflected in the specified game information during the next play time after the specified number of play times.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which neither the specified command nor the second specified command can be received during a specified number of play times in which the determination means has determined that a specified bonus will be awarded, and if a situation returns to one in which the specified command can be received during the next play time after the specified number of play times, the determination result of the determination means during the specified number of play times will be reflected in the specified game information during the next play time after the specified number of play times. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration related to correcting discrepancies in the specified game information and reduces the amount of data pre-stored in the sub-control means. As a result, data for executing specified auxiliary effects can be stored in the free space created in the memory capacity of the sub-control means, enabling a wider variety of auxiliary effects to be produced.

Gaming machine 21B7. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 21B6, characterized in that if a situation arises in which neither the specified command nor the second specified command can be received during the specified number of play times, and if a situation returns to one in which the specified command can be received during the next play time following the specified number of play times, the auxiliary effect that notifies the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means during the specified number of play times is not executed.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which neither the specified command nor the second specified command can be received during a specified number of play times, and if a situation returns to a state in which the specified command can be received during the next play time after the specified number of play times, an auxiliary effect that notifies the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means during the specified number of play times will not be executed. This configuration makes it possible to generate an event in which the specified game information increases even though an auxiliary effect that notifies the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means has not been executed, when a situation arises in which neither the specified command nor the second specified command can be received during a specified number of play times, and if a situation returns to a state in which the specified command can be received during the next play time after the specified number of play times. This makes it possible to diversify the notification modes for notifying the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means without increasing the amount of data pre-stored in the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 21B8. Any of gaming machines 21B5 to 21B7 described above is characterized in that, if the specified command cannot be received but the second specified command can be received during a specified number of play times in which the determination means has determined that the specified bonus should be awarded, the determination result of the determination means during that specified number of play times is not reflected in the specified game information, at least for that specified number of play times.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which the specified command cannot be received during the specified number of play times but the second specified command can be received, the determination result of the determination means during that specified number of play times will not be reflected in the specified game information, at least for the specified number of play times. If the specified command cannot be received during the specified number of play times, control to execute the notification effect cannot be performed. Therefore, by using this configuration, it is possible to reflect the determination result of the determination means during the specified number of play times in the specified game information at the appropriate time.

Gaming machine 21B9. In the gaming machine 21B8 described above, the sub-control means is configured to include: a determination result storage means (unannounced coin count counter) that stores the determination result of the determination means included in the second specified command when the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command during the specified play round but is able to receive the second specified command; and a second presentation control means (one-hit presentation execution control function) that controls the execution of a specified notification presentation (one-hit presentation) that notifies the determination result stored in the determination result storage means when the specified notification presentation notifies the determination result stored in the determination result storage means; and the determination result stored in the determination result storage means is reflected in the specified play information when the specified notification presentation notifies the determination result stored in the determination result storage means.

According to this gaming machine, when the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command during a specified game round but is able to receive a second specified command, and receives the second specified command, the sub-control means is equipped with a decision result storage means for storing the decision result of the decision means included in the second specified command, and a second effect control means for controlling the execution of a specified notification effect that notifies the player of the decision result stored in the decision result storage means when a specified notification condition is met during a game round after the specified game round. When the decision result stored in the decision result storage means is notified during the specified notification effect, the decision result stored in the decision result storage means is reflected in the specified game information. With this configuration, when a decision result for granting a specified bonus cannot be notified through a notification effect, the decision result can be notified through a specified notification effect during a game round when the specified notification condition is met, and reflected in the specified game information. This makes it possible to diversify the auxiliary effects that notify the player of the decision result of the decision means and the timing of their execution, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 21B10. In any of gaming machines 21B5 to 21B9 above, the specified gaming information is information indicating the remaining number of gaming values that can be acquired before the specific gaming state ends, and in a gaming turn in which the notification effect notifies the determination result of the determination means, if a third specified command (winning result command) including information related to the number of gaming values awarded in that gaming turn is received, the determination result of the determination means is reflected in the specified gaming information; and if the third specified command is not received, the determination result of the determination means is not reflected in the specified gaming information, at least in a gaming turn in which the notification effect notifies the determination result of the determination means.

According to this gaming machine, the prescribed game information indicates the remaining number of game values that can be acquired before the specific game state ends. If a third prescribed command containing information related to the number of game values awarded for a game turn in which the determination result of the determination means is not received in a game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result, the determination result of the determination means is not reflected in the prescribed game information, at least in the game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result. This configuration reduces the chances of players feeling distrustful. Indeed, even if the third prescribed command is not received, it is possible to configure the prescribed game information to reflect the determination result of the determination means in the game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result. However, with this configuration, if game values were awarded in the above game turn, even if the prescribed game information has been updated, there will be a discrepancy between the prescribed game information and the actual remaining number of game values that can be acquired before the specific game state ends, raising concerns that this could lead to players feeling distrust.

Gaming machine 21C1. Display means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of displaying regulation game information (remaining number of coins) indicating the number of coins remaining until the specific game state (announcement mode) ends;
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a sub-controller (display control device 81) that controls the display means based on commands transmitted from the main control means;
The main control means
End information storage means (net increase number counter) for storing end information (value of net increase number counter) used when determining whether or not to end the specific game state;
Termination means (announcement mode termination processing functions S1905 to S1907) for terminating the specific game state when the termination information becomes a specified value (0);
A decision means (a function of winning the bonus lottery) for deciding to grant a specified bonus (a bonus on the net increase number counter) that will increase the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state;
An end information changing means (additional number adding function S1807) for changing the end information according to the determination result of the determining means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command (start command) sent from the main control means during a specified number of play rounds in which the decision means has made a decision to grant the specified bonus, the sub-control means may not reflect the decision result of the decision means during the specified number of play rounds in the specified game information until the specified notification condition (remaining number of coins: 0) is met during a play round after the specified number of play rounds.

With this gaming machine, if the specified command sent from the main control means cannot be received during a specified number of play rounds in which the determination means has made a decision to award a specified bonus, the result of the determination made by the determination means during the specified number of play rounds may not be reflected in the specified game information until the specified notification condition is met during a play round after the specified number of play rounds. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the timing at which the result of the determination made by the determination means is reflected in the specified game information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A typical example of a "situation in which the specified command sent from the main control means cannot be received" is when there is a poor contact or disconnection in the connector or other connection means that connects the main control means and the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 21C2. In the gaming machine 21C1 described above, the sub-control means is characterized in that it includes an effect control means (additional effect execution function S210710) that, when receiving a specified command including information indicating a determination result that the specified bonus will be awarded, performs control to execute a notification effect (additional effect) that notifies the determination result.

In this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a specified command containing information indicating a determination result that a specified bonus will be awarded, it performs control to execute a notification effect that notifies the player of the determination result. This configuration allows the player to understand that a specified bonus will be awarded through the notification effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, if the specified command containing information indicating a determination result that a specified bonus will be awarded is not received, the effect control means will be unable to control the game, resulting in the loss of a valuable opportunity to be notified that a specified bonus will be awarded. Therefore, in such cases, the above concerns can be resolved by configuring the game so that the determination result of the determination means in the specified play round is not reflected in the specified play information until the specified notification condition is met in a play round after the specified play round.

Note that "performing control to execute a notification effect" not only refers to a configuration that performs control to execute a notification effect in the game in which the specified command is received, but also includes a configuration that sets flags, counters, etc. to execute a notification effect in a specified game in the following game.

Gaming machine 21C3. In the gaming machine 21C2 described above, the sub-control means is equipped with second presentation control means (one-hit presentation execution control function) that controls the execution of a specified notification presentation (one-hit presentation) that notifies the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means in the specified number of play times when the specified notification condition is met, and is configured so that when the specified notification presentation notifies the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means in the specified number of play times, the result of the determination made by the determination means in the specified number of play times is reflected in the specified game information.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means is equipped with second effect control means that, when a specified notification condition is met, controls the execution of a specified notification effect that notifies the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means in a specified number of play rounds. When the specified notification effect notifies the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means in a specified number of play rounds, the result of the determination made by the determination means in the specified number of play rounds is reflected in the specified game information. With this configuration, when the result of the determination that will grant a specified bonus cannot be notified by the notification effect, it is possible to notify the result of the determination made through the specified notification effect in the play round in which the specified notification condition is met and have it reflected in the specified game information. As a result, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects that notify the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means and the timing of their execution, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment in the game.

Gaming machine 21C4. A gaming machine according to the above gaming machine 21C3, characterized in that the main control means is configured to transmit the specified command and a second specified command (end command) to the sub-control means in one game round, and the second specified command is configured to include information indicating the determination result of the determination means in the game round in which the second specified command is transmitted.

In this gaming machine, the main control means transmits information indicating the determination result of the determination means twice per game using a specified command and a second specified command. With this configuration, even if the sub-control means fails to receive the specified command, it can still ascertain the determination result of the determination means as long as it receives the second specified command. This makes it possible to diversify the timing at which the determination result of the determination means is reflected in the specified game information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming Machine 21C5. In the gaming machine 21C4 described above, the sub-control means performs control using the second presentation control means when a situation arises in which the specified command cannot be received during the specified game round but the second specified command can be received.

With this gaming machine, if the specified command cannot be received during the specified number of play times but the second specified command can be received, control is performed to execute a specified notification effect that notifies the player of the decision result made by the decision means during the specified number of play times if the specified notification condition is met. With this configuration, if the specified command can be received during the specified number of play times, the notification effect can notify the player that a specified bonus will be awarded. Even if the specified command cannot be received during the specified number of play times, if the second specified command can be received, the notification effect can notify the player that a specified bonus will be awarded. This can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

Gaming machine 21C6. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 21C5, characterized in that the specified command and the second specified command contain the same type of information, except for information indicating the command type.

In this gaming machine, the specified command and the second specified command contain the same types of information, except for the information indicating the command type. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration when creating the specified command and the second specified command in the main control means, and makes it possible to reduce the amount of data pre-stored in the main control means.

Gaming machine 21C7. In the gaming machine 21C6 described above, when the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command during the specified game round but is able to receive the second specified command, and when the second specified command is received, the sub-control means is provided with a determination result storage means (unreported coin number counter) that stores the determination result of the determination means included in the second specified command, separate from the specified game information storage means (remaining coin number counter) that stores the specified game information.

According to this gaming machine, when the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command during the specified number of play rounds but is able to receive the second specified command, and receives the second specified command, a determination result storage means is provided separately from the specified game information storage means that stores the determination result of the determination means included in the second specified command. This configuration makes it possible to store the determination result of the determination means during the specified number of play rounds separately from the specified game information until the specified notification effect notifies the player that a specified bonus will be awarded.

Gaming Machine 21C8. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine 21C7, characterized in that the sub-control means, when receiving the specified command, includes a second determination result storage means (notified coin number counter) that stores the determination result of the determination means included in the specified command, separate from the specified game information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means is provided with a second determination result storage means, which stores the determination result of the determination means included in the specified command when the specified command is received, separately from the specified game information storage means, which stores the specified game information. With this configuration, when the specified command is received during the specified game round, the determination result of the determination means during the specified game round can be stored separately from the specified game information until the notification effect notifies the player that the specified bonus will be awarded.

Gaming machine 21C9. A gaming machine according to the above gaming machine 21C8, characterized in that the sub-control means is equipped with the decision result storage means and the second decision result storage means separately.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means is provided with a separate determination result storage means for storing the determination result of the determination means included in the second specified command, and a second determination result storage means for storing the determination result of the determination means included in the specified command. This configuration makes it possible to separately store the specified bonus notified by the notification effect and the specified bonus notified by the specified notification effect.

Gaming Machine 21C10. In the gaming machine 21C9 described above, the specified gaming information is information indicating the remaining number of gaming values that can be acquired before the specific gaming state ends, and if a third specified command (winning result command) including information related to the number of gaming values awarded in a gaming turn in which the notification effect notifies the determination result of the determination means is received, the determination result of the determination means is reflected in the specified gaming information; and if the third specified command is not received, the determination result of the determination means is not reflected in the specified gaming information, at least in the gaming turn in which the notification effect notifies the determination result of the determination means.

According to this gaming machine, the prescribed game information indicates the remaining number of game values that can be acquired before the specific game state ends. If a third prescribed command containing information related to the number of game values awarded for a game turn in which the determination result of the determination means is not received in a game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result, the determination result of the determination means is not reflected in the prescribed game information, at least in the game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result. This configuration reduces the chances of players feeling distrustful. Indeed, even if the third prescribed command is not received, it is possible to configure the prescribed game information to reflect the determination result of the determination means in the game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result. However, with this configuration, if game values were awarded in the above game turn, even if the prescribed game information has been updated, there will be a discrepancy between the prescribed game information and the actual remaining number of game values that can be acquired before the specific game state ends, raising concerns that this could lead to players feeling distrust.

Gaming machine 21C11. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine 21C10 described above, if the third specified command is received in a game turn in which the result of the determination by the determination means is notified in the specified notification effect, the result of the determination by the determination means is reflected in the specified game information, and if the third specified command is not received, the result of the determination by the determination means is not reflected in the specified game information, at least in a game turn in which the result of the determination by the determination means is not notified in the specified notification effect.

With this gaming machine, if the third specified command is not received in a game turn in which the determination result of the determination means is notified in the specified notification effect, the determination result of the determination means will not be reflected in the specified game information, at least in the game turn in which the determination result of the determination means is notified in the specified notification effect. This configuration reduces the opportunity for players to feel distrustful. Indeed, it is possible to configure the specified game information to reflect the determination result of the determination means in the game turn in which the determination result is notified in the specified notification effect, even if the third specified command is not received. However, with this configuration, if game value has been awarded in the above game turn, even though the specified game information has been updated, there will be a discrepancy between the specified game information and the actual remaining amount of game value that can be earned before the specific game state ends, which could cause players to feel distrustful.

Gaming machine 21D1. A display means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of displaying specified game information (remaining number of coins) indicating the number of coins remaining until the specific game state (announcement mode) ends;
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls the display means based on commands transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means
End information storage means (net increase number counter) for storing end information (value of net increase number counter) used when determining whether or not to end the specific game state;
Termination means (announcement mode termination processing functions S1905 to S1907) for terminating the specific game state when the termination information becomes a specified value (0);
A decision means (a function of winning the bonus lottery) for deciding to grant a specified bonus (a bonus on the net increase number counter) that will increase the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state;
An end information changing means (additional number adding function S1807) for changing the end information according to the determination result of the determining means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the decision means makes a decision to grant the specified benefit, the sub-control means may reflect the decision result of the decision means in the specified game information without executing an auxiliary effect to notify the decision result of the decision means.

In this gaming machine, when the determination means makes a decision to award a specified bonus, the sub-control means may reflect the decision result of the determination means in the specified game information without executing an auxiliary effect to notify the decision result. This configuration makes it possible to generate an event in which the specified game information increases even though an auxiliary effect to notify the decision result of the determination means is not executed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the notification modes for notifying the decision result of the determination means without increasing the amount of data pre-stored in the sub-control means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 21D2. In the gaming machine 21D1 described above, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command (start command) sent from the main control means during a specified game round in which the determination means has made a decision to award the specified bonus, the sub-control means may reflect the decision made by the determination means in the specified game information without executing an auxiliary effect that notifies the decision made by the determination means.

According to this gaming machine, if the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command sent from the main control means during a specified play round in which the determination means has made a decision to award a specified bonus, the sub-control means may reflect the result of the determination means's decision in the specified play information without executing an auxiliary effect that notifies the result of the determination means. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration to accommodate situations in which the specified command cannot be received, while also diversifying the notification modes for notifying the result of the determination means's decision.

A typical example of a "situation in which the specified command sent from the main control means cannot be received" is when there is a poor contact or disconnection in the connector or other connection means that connects the main control means and the sub-control means.

Gaming machine 21D3. In the gaming machine 21D2 described above, the sub-control means is characterized by including an effect control means (additional effect execution function S210710) that, when receiving a specified command including information indicating a determination result of granting the specified bonus, performs control to execute a notification effect (additional effect) that notifies the determination result.

In this gaming machine, when the sub-control means receives a prescribed command containing information indicating a determination result that a prescribed bonus will be awarded, it performs control to execute a notification effect that notifies the player of the determination result. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand that a prescribed bonus will be awarded through the notification effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, if the prescribed command containing information indicating a determination result that a prescribed bonus will be awarded is not received, the effect control means will be unable to control the game, and the opportunity to notify the player that a prescribed bonus will be awarded will be lost. Therefore, in such cases, the determination result of the determination means may be reflected in the prescribed game information without executing an auxiliary effect that notifies the player of the determination result, thereby simplifying the processing configuration to accommodate situations where the prescribed command cannot be received.

Note that "performing control to execute a notification effect" not only refers to a configuration that performs control to execute a notification effect in the game in which the specified command is received, but also includes a configuration that sets flags, counters, etc. to execute a notification effect in a specified game in the following game.

Gaming machine 21D4. A gaming machine according to the above gaming machine 21D3, characterized in that the main control means is configured to transmit the specified command and a second specified command (end command) to the sub-control means in one game round, and the second specified command is configured to include information indicating the decision result of the decision means in the game round in which the second specified command is transmitted.

In this gaming machine, the main control means transmits information indicating the determination result of the determination means twice per game using a specified command and a second specified command. With this configuration, even if the sub-control means fails to receive the specified command, it can still ascertain the determination result of the determination means as long as it receives the second specified command. This reduces the chances of missing an opportunity to notify the player that a specified bonus will be awarded.

Gaming machine 21D5. In the gaming machine 21D4 described above, if the sub-control means is unable to receive both the specified command and the second specified command during the specified game round, and returns to a state where it can receive the specified command during the game round following the specified game round, the sub-control means reflects the result of the determination made by the determination means in the specified game information during the game round following the specified game round, without executing an auxiliary effect that notifies the player of the result of the determination made by the determination means.

According to this gaming machine, if the sub-control means is unable to receive both the specified command and the second specified command during a specified play round in which the determination means has determined that a specified bonus will be awarded, and then returns to a state in which it can receive the specified command during the play round following the specified play round, the determination result of the determination means is reflected in the specified play information during the play round following the specified play round, without executing an auxiliary effect that notifies the player of the determination result of the determination means. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration related to correcting discrepancies in the specified play information, and reduces the amount of data pre-stored in the sub-control means. As a result, data for executing specified auxiliary effects can be stored in the free space in the sub-control means' memory, enabling a wider variety of auxiliary effects to be produced.

Gaming machine 21D6. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 21D5, characterized in that, if the specified command cannot be received during the specified number of play times but the second specified command can be received, the determination result of the determination means during that specified number of play times is not reflected in the specified game information, at least for that specified number of play times.

With this gaming machine, if a situation arises in which the specified command cannot be received during the specified number of play times but the second specified command can be received, the determination result of the determination means during that specified number of play times will not be reflected in the specified game information, at least for the specified number of play times. If the specified command cannot be received during the specified number of play times, control to execute the notification effect cannot be performed. Therefore, by using this configuration, it is possible to reflect the determination result of the determination means during the specified number of play times in the specified game information at the appropriate time.

Gaming machine 21D7. In the gaming machine 21D6 described above, the sub-control means is configured to include: a determination result storage means (unannounced coin count counter) that stores the determination result of the determination means included in the second specified command when the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command during the specified game round but is able to receive the second specified command; and a second presentation control means (one-hit presentation execution control function) that controls the execution of a specified notification presentation (one-hit presentation) that notifies the determination result stored in the determination result storage means when the specified notification presentation notifies the determination result stored in the determination result storage means; and the determination result stored in the determination result storage means is reflected in the specified game information when the specified notification presentation notifies the determination result stored in the determination result storage means.

According to this gaming machine, when the sub-control means is unable to receive the specified command during a specified game round but is able to receive a second specified command, and receives the second specified command, the sub-control means is equipped with a decision result storage means for storing the decision result of the decision means included in the second specified command, and a second effect control means for controlling the execution of a specified notification effect that notifies the player of the decision result stored in the decision result storage means when a specified notification condition is met during a game round after the specified game round. When the decision result stored in the decision result storage means is notified during the specified notification effect, the decision result stored in the decision result storage means is reflected in the specified game information. With this configuration, when a decision result for granting a specified bonus cannot be notified through a notification effect, the decision result can be notified through a specified notification effect during a game round when the specified notification condition is met, and reflected in the specified game information. This makes it possible to diversify the auxiliary effects that notify the player of the decision result of the decision means and the timing of their execution, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 21D8. In the gaming machine 21D7 described above, the sub-control means is characterized in that the determination result storage means (unreported coin counter) is provided separately from the specified gaming information storage means (remaining coin counter) that stores the specified gaming information.

In this gaming machine, the sub-control means has a determination result storage means that is separate from the specified game information storage means that stores the specified game information. With this configuration, if a situation arises in which the specified command cannot be received during the specified game round but the second specified command can be received, the determination result of the determination means during the specified game round can be stored separately from the specified game information until the specified notification effect notifies the player that the specified bonus will be awarded.

Gaming machine 21D9. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine 21D8, characterized in that the sub-control means, when receiving the specified command, includes a second determination result storage means (notified coin number counter) that stores the determination result of the determination means included in the specified command, separate from the specified game information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means is provided with a second determination result storage means, which stores the determination result of the determination means included in the specified command when the specified command is received, separately from the specified game information storage means, which stores the specified game information. With this configuration, when the specified command is received during the specified game round, the determination result of the determination means during the specified game round can be stored separately from the specified game information until the notification effect notifies the player that the specified bonus will be awarded.

Gaming machine 21D10. In the above gaming machine 21D9, the sub-control means is characterized in that it separately includes the decision result storage means and the second decision result storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means is provided with a separate determination result storage means for storing the determination result of the determination means included in the second specified command, and a second determination result storage means for storing the determination result of the determination means included in the specified command. This configuration makes it possible to separately store the specified bonus notified by the notification effect and the specified bonus notified by the specified notification effect.

Gaming machine 21D11. The gaming machine 21D10 described above, characterized in that the specified command and the second specified command are configured to contain the same type of information, except for information indicating the command type.

In this gaming machine, the specified command and the second specified command contain the same types of information, except for the information indicating the command type. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration when creating the specified command and the second specified command in the main control means, and makes it possible to reduce the amount of data pre-stored in the main control means.

Gaming machine 21D12. In the gaming machine 21D11 described above, the specified gaming information is information indicating the remaining number of gaming values that can be acquired before the specific gaming state ends, and if a third specified command (winning result command) including information related to the number of gaming values awarded in a game turn in which the notification effect notifies the determination result of the determination means is received, the determination result of the determination means is reflected in the specified gaming information; and if the third specified command is not received, the determination result of the determination means is not reflected in the specified gaming information, at least in the game turn in which the notification effect notifies the determination result of the determination means.

According to this gaming machine, the prescribed game information indicates the remaining number of game values that can be acquired before the specific game state ends. If a third prescribed command containing information related to the number of game values awarded for a game turn in which the determination result of the determination means is not received in a game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result, the determination result of the determination means is not reflected in the prescribed game information, at least in the game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result. This configuration reduces the chances of players feeling distrustful. Indeed, even if the third prescribed command is not received, it is possible to configure the prescribed game information to reflect the determination result of the determination means in the game turn in which the notification effect notifies the player of the determination result. However, with this configuration, if game values were awarded in the above game turn, even if the prescribed game information has been updated, there will be a discrepancy between the prescribed game information and the actual remaining number of game values that can be acquired before the specific game state ends, raising concerns that this could lead to players feeling distrust.

Gaming machine 21D13. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine 21D12 described above, if the third specified command is received in a game turn in which the result of the determination by the determination means is notified in the specified notification effect, the result of the determination by the determination means is reflected in the specified game information, and if the third specified command is not received, the result of the determination by the determination means is not reflected in the specified game information, at least in a game turn in which the result of the determination by the determination means is notified in the specified notification effect.

With this gaming machine, if the third specified command is not received in a game turn in which the determination result of the determination means is notified in the specified notification effect, the determination result of the determination means will not be reflected in the specified game information, at least in the game turn in which the determination result of the determination means is notified in the specified notification effect. This configuration reduces the opportunity for players to feel distrustful. Indeed, it is possible to configure the specified game information to reflect the determination result of the determination means in the game turn in which the determination result is notified in the specified notification effect, even if the third specified command is not received. However, with this configuration, if game value has been awarded in the above game turn, even though the specified game information has been updated, there will be a discrepancy between the specified game information and the actual remaining amount of game value that can be earned before the specific game state ends, which could cause players to feel distrustful.

The gaming machines 21A to 21D may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 21 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 20, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 22A1. Effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing auxiliary effects;
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine equipped with a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls the performance execution means based on a command transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means is provided with a regulation control means (freeze A processing function) that controls to execute a regulation effect (freeze A effect) when a regulation condition (a start command is issued in a situation where the number is converted to a non-determined number and freeze flag 1 is set) is met,
The sub-control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a presentation control means (freeze A presentation processing function) that controls the presentation execution means to execute a specific prescribed presentation (irregular display) when control is performed by the prescribed control means in a situation where an operation-induced condition (the value of the premonition game number counter is greater than 10) is met due to the player performing a prescribed operation (penalty operation).

In this gaming machine, the main control means is equipped with a regulation control means that performs control to execute a prescribed effect when a prescribed condition is met. The sub-control means is equipped with an effect control means that controls the effect execution means to execute a specific prescribed effect when control is performed by the regulation control means in a situation where an operation-induced condition resulting from the player performing a prescribed operation is met. With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute or not execute a specific prescribed effect depending on whether the player has performed a prescribed operation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 22A2. In the gaming machine 22A1, the effect control means controls to execute a second specific rule effect (final display of "!!!") that differs from the specific rule effect when control by the rule control means is performed in a situation where the operation-induced condition is not met.

According to this gaming machine, when control is performed by the regulation control means in a situation where the operation-induced condition is not met, the effect control means controls to execute a second specific regulation effect that differs from the specific regulation effect. This configuration makes it possible to have the effect execution means execute different auxiliary effects when control is performed by the regulation control means in a situation where the operation-induced condition is not met and when control is performed by the regulation control means in a situation where the operation-induced condition is met, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 22A3. In the above gaming machine 22A2, the main control means comprises period setting means (premonition mode transition processing functions S220607 to S220609) for setting a specified play period (omen mode), and specific transition means (announcement mode transition processing function S220611) for transitioning to a specific play state (announcement mode) when the specified play period has ended; the sub-control means comprises notification control means (victory effect execution function S221508) for controlling the effect execution means to execute a specific notification (victory effect) that notifies of the transition to the specific play state when the period setting means sets the specified play period; and a gaming machine characterized in that the operation-induced condition is met if the specified play period does not end in the play round in which the specific notification was executed.

According to this gaming machine, the main control means includes a period setting means for setting a specified play period and a specific transition means for transitioning to a specific play state when the specified play period has ended. The sub-control means includes a notification control means for controlling the effect execution means to execute a specific notification to notify transition to the specific play state when the period setting means has set the specified play period. If the specified play period does not end in the play round in which the specific notification was executed, the operation-induced condition is met. With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a second specific specified effect when executing a specified effect during the specified play period before executing the specific notification, and to execute a specific specified effect when executing a specified effect during the specified play period after executing the specific notification, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 22A4. In the gaming machine 22A3 described above, the main control means comprises main count information storage means (mode game count counter) that stores count information related to the number of games played during the specified play period, and main update means (mode game count counter update processing function S220603) that updates the count information stored in the main count information storage means; the sub-control means comprises sub-count information storage means (premonition game count counter) that stores count information related to the number of games played during the specified play period, and sub-update means (premonition game count counter update processing function S221501) that updates the count information stored in the sub-count information storage means; the main update means does not update the count information stored in the main count information storage means when the specified operation is performed, and the sub-update means updates the count information stored in the sub-count information storage means when the specified operation is performed.

In this gaming machine, the main control means includes a main count information storage means for storing count information related to the number of plays played during a specified play period and a main update means for updating the count information stored in the main count information storage means. The sub-control means includes a sub-count information storage means for storing count information related to the number of plays played during a specified play period and a sub-update means for updating the count information stored in the sub-count information storage means. When a specified operation is performed, the main update means does not update the count information stored in the main count information storage means. When a specified operation is performed, the sub-update means updates the count information stored in the sub-count information storage means. In this configuration, when a player performs a specified operation, a discrepancy occurs between the number of plays played during the specified play period as determined by the main control means and the number of plays played during the specified play period as determined by the sub-control means, resulting in an event in which a specific notification is executed before the specified play period ends. Therefore, by configuring the machine to execute a specific specified effect when such an event occurs, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game. It is certainly possible to configure the system so that the second specific requirement effect is executed after the specific notification is executed. However, if this is configured, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that the second specific requirement effect indicates the granting of some kind of bonus in the specific game state.

Gaming machine 22A5. The gaming machine 22A4 described above, characterized in that the specific regulation effects are clearly indicated as being unrelated to the awarding of a bonus.

With this gaming machine, it is clearly stated that specific regulation effects are unrelated to the awarding of bonuses, which prevents players from increasing their expectations of bonuses and encourages players to refrain from performing regulation operations.

Gaming machine 22A6. In the gaming machine 22A5 described above, the sub-control means is characterized by having a reduction control means (screen darkening processing function S221607) that controls the reduction of visibility of the auxiliary effects in a game in which the player performs the specified operation.

This gaming machine controls the visibility of auxiliary effects during a game in which a player performs a prescribed operation. This configuration allows the player to see the content of the auxiliary effects, while encouraging the player not to perform the prescribed operation through the reduced visibility. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine 22A5, it becomes possible to let the player understand the cause of the specific prescribed effect being executed, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player even when it is clearly stated that the effect is unrelated to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine 22A7. A gaming machine characterized by being configured such that, in gaming machine 22A5 or 22A6, if a first condition (execution of a process for determining a special role) is met in a predetermined game turn, and a second condition (issuance of a start command while freeze flag 1 is set) is met in a game turn after the predetermined game turn, the specified condition is met.

With this gaming machine, if the first condition is met in a specified play round and the second condition is met in a play round after the specified play round, control is performed to execute a specified effect. In this configuration, an event occurs in which the first condition is met before the specific notification is executed, and the second condition is met after the specific notification is executed. Therefore, by configuring the machine to clearly indicate that the execution of a specified effect during the specified play period after the specific notification is executed is unrelated to the awarding of a bonus, it is possible to avoid players becoming overly excited about the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine 22A8. Any of gaming machines 22A3 to 22A7 described above, characterized in that the period setting means is configured to set the number of games required until the specified play period ends, and the notification control means is configured to control the effect execution means to execute the specific notification when the number of games set by the period setting means has been played.

In this gaming machine, the period setting means sets the number of plays required until the specified play period ends, and the effect execution means executes a specific notification when the number of plays set by the period setting means has been played. With this configuration, if the player does not perform a specified operation, a specific notification is executed at the end of the play time when the specified play period ends, making it possible to transition to a specific play state from the next play time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 22A9. In any of gaming machines 22A1 to 22A8, the regulation control means controls multiple cyclic display means to pseudo-stop at a predetermined stop result.

In this gaming machine, the regulation control means controls the multiple cyclic display means to pseudo-stop at a predetermined stop result. This configuration makes it possible to execute a prescribed effect using multiple cyclic display means in addition to the effect execution means, thereby increasing the gaming experience.

Gaming machine 22A10. In any of the above gaming machines 22A1 to 22A9, the regulation control means is characterized by having a waiting means (timer confirmation processing function S221206) that waits until a predetermined regulation time (10 seconds) has elapsed.

In this gaming machine, the regulation control means is equipped with a standby means that waits until a predetermined regulation time has elapsed. This configuration makes it possible to secure the regulation time for executing the regulation effect, preventing the regulation effect from being omitted midway. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the regulation effect that has been painstakingly prepared will be wasted.

Gaming machine 22B1. Effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing auxiliary effects;
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine equipped with a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls the performance execution means based on a command transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes a regulation control means (freeze A processing function) that performs control to execute a regulation effect (freeze A effect) when a first condition (execution of a performance role determination process) is satisfied in a predetermined game round and a second condition (a start command is generated in a situation where freeze flag 1 is set) is satisfied in a game round after the predetermined game round;
A specific transition means (notification mode transition processing function S220408, S220611) for transitioning to a specific game state (notification mode) is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified control means performs control to execute the specified presentation even if the first condition is met in a game round that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state and the second condition is met in a game round that has transitioned to the specific game state.

In this gaming machine, the main control means includes a regulation control means that controls the execution of a prescribed effect when a first condition is met in a predetermined game turn and a second condition is met in a game turn after the predetermined game turn, and a specific transition means that transitions to a specific game state. The regulation control means controls the execution of a prescribed effect even when the first condition is met in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state and the second condition is met in a game turn that has already transitioned to the specific game state. This configuration reduces the chance of lingering lingering resentment in the player's mind and increases the player's interest in the game. For example, it is possible to configure the machine not to execute a prescribed effect if the first condition is met in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state and the game transitions to the specific game state without the second condition being met. However, with this configuration, if the player is aware that the first condition has been met, they may end up playing in the specific gaming state with lingering resentment over the fact that the specified effect was not executed, which could prevent the player from enjoying playing in the specific gaming state.

Gaming machine 22B2. The gaming machine 22B1 described above is characterized in that, if the first condition is met in a game turn that has not transitioned to the specific game state, and the second condition is not met in a game turn that transitions to the specific game state, the second condition is met in the first game turn that transitions to the specific game state.

With this gaming machine, if the first condition is met in a game turn before the transition to the specific gaming state, and the second condition is not met in a game turn after the transition to the specific gaming state, the second condition is met in the first game turn after the transition to the specific gaming state. With this configuration, if the first condition is met in a game turn before the transition to the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the specified effect at the latest in the first game turn after the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible for players to enjoy playing in the specific gaming state.

Gaming machine 22B3. The gaming machine 22B2 described above is characterized in that, if the first condition is met in the game turn that transitions to the specific game state, the second condition is met in the first game turn that transitions to the specific game state.

With this gaming machine, if the first condition is met in a game turn that transitions to a specific gaming state, the second condition is met in the first game turn after transition to the specific gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to execute a specified effect in the next game turn if the first condition is met in a game turn that transitions to a specific gaming state. As a result, players can enjoy playing in a specific gaming state.

Gaming machine 22B4. In the gaming machine 22B3 described above, the sub-control means is equipped with effect control means (freeze A effect processing function) that controls the effect execution means to execute different auxiliary effects as the specified effect when control by the specified control means is performed in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state and when control by the specified control means is performed in a game turn that has transitioned to the specific game state.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means is equipped with an effect control means that controls the effect execution means to execute different auxiliary effects as prescribed effects when control is performed by the prescribed control means in a game round that has not yet transitioned to a specific game state, and when control is performed by the prescribed control means in a game round that has transitioned to a specific game state. This configuration makes it possible to diversify prescribed effects and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 22B5. In the gaming machine 22B4 described above, the regulation control means performs the same control when controlling to execute the regulation effect in a game turn that has not transitioned to the specific game state and when performing control to execute the regulation effect in a game turn that has transitioned to the specific game state.

In this gaming machine, the regulation control means performs the same control when controlling the execution of a regulation effect in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to a specific game state, and when controlling the execution of a regulation effect in a game turn that has transitioned to a specific game state. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the regulation effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of data required to execute the regulation effects that is pre-stored in the main control means.

Gaming machine 22B6. In the gaming machine 22B4 or 22B5, the main control means is characterized in that it includes a grant determination means (a section lottery processing function in chance mode and premonition mode) that can determine to grant a specified benefit (transition to notification mode, advance addition of the number of games) when the first condition is met in a game that has not transitioned to the specific game state.

In this gaming machine, the main control means is equipped with award determination means that can determine to award a specified bonus when the first condition is met in a game round that has not yet transitioned to a specific game state. In this configuration, if a specified effect is executed in a game round that has transitioned to a specific game state, it is possible that the player will expect the specified bonus to be awarded in the specific game state. However, if the configuration is such that different auxiliary effects are executed by the effect execution means when control is performed by the specified control means in a game round that has not yet transitioned to a specific game state and when control is performed by the specified control means in a game round that has transitioned to a specific game state, the above concerns can be suitably alleviated.

Gaming machine 22B7. In the gaming machine 22B6, the award determination means can determine to award a bonus that confirms a transition to the specific gaming state as the specified bonus when the first condition is met in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific gaming state and in which a transition to the specific gaming state has not been confirmed.

With this gaming machine, if the first condition is met in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state and in which transition to the specific game state has not been confirmed, a bonus that confirms transition to the specific game state may be awarded. In such a configuration, if a prescribed effect is executed in a game turn after transition to the specific game state, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand. However, if the configuration is such that different auxiliary effects are executed by the effect execution means when control is performed by the prescribed control means in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state and when control is performed by the prescribed control means in a game turn that has transitioned to the specific game state, the above concerns can be suitably alleviated.

Gaming machine 22B8. In any of gaming machines 22B4 to 22B7 above, the sub-control means, when the effect execution condition (the value of the premonition game number counter is 10 in the premonition mode) is met, causes the effect execution means to execute a specific notification (victory effect) that notifies the player of a transition to the specific game state unless the second condition is met in the next game turn, and, if the second condition is met in the next game turn, causes the effect execution means to execute the specific notification or a non-specific notification (loss effect) that does not notify the player of a transition to the specific game state; and the effect control means is configured to control the effect execution means to execute a second specific notification (reverse effect) that notifies the player of a transition to the specific game state as the prescribed effect if the second condition is met in the next game turn after the non-specific notification.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means is equipped with notification control means that, when the effect execution condition is met, causes the effect execution means to execute a specific notification to notify a transition to a specific game state unless the second condition will be met in the next game turn. If the second condition will be met in the next game turn, the sub-control means controls the effect execution means to execute a specific notification or a non-specific notification that does not notify a transition to a specific game state. If the second condition is met in the next game turn after the non-specific notification, the effect execution means executes a second specific notification to notify a transition to a specific game state as a specified effect. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the specified effects while avoiding player misunderstandings. For example, it is possible to configure the same auxiliary effect to be executed as a specified effect when the second condition is met in the game turn after the specific notification is issued and when the second condition is met in the game turn before the specific notification is issued. However, with this configuration, if a specified effect is performed in a game after a specific notification has been issued, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that a special benefit other than transitioning to a specific game state will be awarded.

Gaming machine 22B9. In the gaming machine 22B8, the award determination means may determine to award, as the specified award, an award that increases the number of times playable in the specific gaming state when the first condition is met in a game that has not yet transitioned to the specific gaming state but in which transition to the specific gaming state has been confirmed.

According to this gaming machine, if the first condition is met in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state but in which transition to the specific game state has been confirmed, a bonus may be awarded to increase the number of times playable in the specific game state. In such a configuration, it is desirable to notify the player that a bonus to increase the number of times playable in the specific game state will be awarded in a game turn after transition to the specific game state or in a game turn after notification of transition to the specific game state. This is because if such notification is made in a situation in which the player is not aware that the game will transition to the specific game state, the player may be confused. Therefore, by applying this configuration to a configuration in which the bonus execution means executes different auxiliary effects when control by the regulation control means is performed in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state and when control by the regulation control means is performed in a game turn that has transitioned to the specific game state, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 22B10. In the gaming machine 22B9, the notification control means controls the effect execution means to execute the non-specific notification if the second condition is met in the next play when the effect execution condition is met while the award determination means has determined not to award a benefit that increases the number of playable times in the specific play state.

With this gaming machine, if the effect execution condition is met when the award determination means has determined that a bonus that increases the number of times playable in a specific gaming state will not be awarded, and if the second condition is met in the next play, the effect execution means will execute a non-specific notification. With this configuration, the specified effect in the next play does not notify the player that a bonus that increases the number of times playable in a specific gaming state will not be awarded, but rather it is possible to notify the player of a transition to a specific gaming state through the second specific notification. As a result, it is possible to alleviate player disappointment that a bonus that increases the number of times playable in a specific gaming state will not be awarded.

Gaming machine 22B11. In the above gaming machine 22B9 or 22B10, the notification control means controls the effect execution means to execute the specific notification if the second condition is met in the next play when the effect execution condition is met in a situation where the award determination means has decided to award a benefit that increases the number of plays that can be played in the specific play state.

With this gaming machine, if the effect execution condition is met while the award determination means has determined to award a bonus that increases the number of times playable in a specific gaming state, and if the second condition is met in the next play, the effect execution means will execute a specific notification that notifies the player of a transition to the specific gaming state. With this configuration, the specified effect in the next play can award a bonus that increases the number of times playable in the specific gaming state, or it can execute an auxiliary effect that creates anticipation for the bonus being awarded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 22B12. Any of the above gaming machines 22B9 to 22B11, characterized in that when the award determination means determines to award a benefit that increases the number of times play can be performed under the specific gaming state, the next play will be played under the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, if the award determination means determines to award a bonus that increases the number of times playable in a specific gaming state, play will be under the specific gaming state from the next round. With this configuration, if the award determination means determines to award a bonus that increases the number of times playable in a specific gaming state, it becomes possible to execute a specified effect under the specific gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to associate the execution of a specified effect under the specific gaming state with the awarding of a bonus that increases the number of times playable in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 22C1. Effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of executing auxiliary effects;
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine equipped with a sub-control means (display control device 81) that controls the performance execution means based on a command transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means
A first regulation control means (freeze A processing function) that performs control to execute the first regulation effect (freeze A effect) when a first regulation condition (a start command is generated when the performance role determination process is executed and the freeze flag 1 is set) is established;
and a second regulation control means (freeze B processing function) for controlling execution of a second regulation effect (freeze B effect) when a second regulation condition (a start command is issued when freeze flag 2 is set) is established.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when both the first specified condition and the second specified condition are met in one game round, the first specified presentation and the second specified presentation are executed in the one game round.

In this gaming machine, the main control means includes a first control means for controlling the execution of a first prescribed effect when a first prescribed condition is met, and a second control means for controlling the execution of a second prescribed effect when a second prescribed condition is met. If both the first and second prescribed conditions are met in a single game turn, the first and second prescribed effects are executed in that single game turn. This configuration makes it possible to enhance gaming enjoyment while suppressing an increase in the amount of data pre-stored in the main control means. It is certainly possible to configure the machine so that, if both the first and second prescribed conditions are met in a single game turn, only one of the first and second prescribed effects is executed in that single game turn. However, this configuration requires additional processing to determine which prescribed effect to execute, raising concerns about an increase in the amount of data pre-stored in the main control means. Furthermore, the result of implementing this processing is a loss of opportunity to execute the prescribed effects that have been carefully prepared, and increasing the amount of data pre-stored in the main control means does not lead to increased interest in the game.

Gaming machine 22C2. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the above gaming machine 22C1, if a first condition (execution of a process for determining a special role) is satisfied in a predetermined game round, and a second condition (issuance of a start command when freeze flag 1 is set) is satisfied in a game round after the predetermined game round, the first specified condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, if the first condition is met in a given play and the second condition is met in a play after the given play, the first specified condition is met. In this configuration, the play in which the second condition is met changes depending on when the first condition is met, and an event occurs in which both the first and second specified conditions are met in a single play. Therefore, by configuring the machine to execute both the first specified effect and the second specified effect in a single play if both the first and second specified conditions are met in a single play, it is possible to reduce the chances of a player feeling resentful and increase their interest in the game. For example, if the machine were configured to execute the second specified effect but not the first specified effect, if the player were aware that the first condition had been met, they would continue playing with resentment over the lack of the first specified effect, which could potentially prevent the player from enjoying the game.

Gaming machine 22C3. The gaming machine 22C2 described above, characterized in that the second specified condition is a condition that is met upon transition to a specific gaming state (announcement mode).

According to this gaming machine, the second specified condition is met upon transition to the specific gaming state. In this configuration, if the first condition is met in a game turn before transition to the specific gaming state, and the second condition is also met in a game turn in which the second specified condition is met upon transition to the specific gaming state, it is possible to configure the machine to execute the second specified effect but not the first specified effect. However, with this configuration, if the player is aware that the first condition has been met, they may play in the specific gaming state with lingering resentment over the fact that the first specified effect was not executed, which could potentially prevent the player from enjoying playing in the specific gaming state. On the other hand, if the machine is configured to execute both the first specified effect and the second specified effect in one game turn, the above concerns can be effectively alleviated.

Gaming machine 22C4. The gaming machine 22C3 described above is characterized in that, when both the first specified condition and the second specified condition are met in a single game turn, the first specified effect is executed in that single game turn, and then the second specified effect is executed.

According to this gaming machine, if both the first and second specified conditions are met in a single game turn, the first specified effect is executed in that single game turn, followed by the second specified effect. This configuration makes it possible to first execute the first specified effect corresponding to the first specified condition for which the first condition was met in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state, and then execute the second specified effect corresponding to the second specified condition that is met upon transition to the specific game state. This increases the player's interest in the game. It is certainly possible to configure the machine so that the first specified effect is executed after the second specified effect is executed. However, this configuration could lead to the player misunderstanding that the first specified effect suggests the granting of some kind of bonus in the specific game state, even though the first condition was met in a game turn that has not yet transitioned to the specific game state.

Gaming machine 22C5. In the gaming machine 22C4 described above, the main control means is equipped with a fulfillment determination means (front-loading flag confirmation function S221109) that determines whether a rule change condition (winning the front-loading lottery) is fulfilled when both the first specified condition and the second specified condition are fulfilled in one game round, and is configured to execute the first specified effect after executing the second specified effect in that one game round if the rule change condition is fulfilled.

According to this gaming machine, the main control means is equipped with a fulfillment determination means that, when both the first and second specified conditions are fulfilled in one game round, determines whether the rule change condition is fulfilled. If the rule change condition is fulfilled, the first specified effect is executed after the second specified effect is executed in that one game round. This configuration makes it possible to determine the execution order of the first specified effect and the second specified effect depending on whether the rule change condition is fulfilled, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 22C6. The gaming machine 22C5 described above, characterized in that the second specified condition is a condition that is met in the first game after transitioning to the specific game state.

According to this gaming machine, the second specified condition is met in the first game turn after the transition to the specific game state. In this configuration, if the first condition is met in a game turn before the transition to the specific game state, and the second condition is also met in a game turn in which the second specified condition is met following the transition to the specific game state, it is possible to configure the machine to execute the second specified effect but not the first specified effect. However, with this configuration, if the player is aware that the first condition has been met, they may play in the specific game state with lingering resentment over the fact that the first specified effect was not executed, which could potentially prevent the player from enjoying playing in the specific game state. On the other hand, if the machine is configured to execute both the first specified effect and the second specified effect in one game turn, the above concerns can be effectively alleviated.

Gaming Machine 22C7. In the gaming machine 22C6 described above, the main control means is equipped with a special award determination means (a section lottery processing function in the premonition mode) that can determine to award a special award (an advance on the number of games) if the first condition is met in a game that has not yet transitioned to the special game state, and the regulation change condition is set as a condition that is met when the special award determination means determines to award the special award.

According to this gaming machine, the main control means is equipped with a specific award determination means that can determine to award a specific award if a first condition is met in a game round that has not yet transitioned to a specific game state, and the specified change condition is met when the specific award determination means determines to award a specific award. This configuration makes it possible to change the execution order of the first specified effect and the second specified effect in a subsequent game round in which a second condition is met, depending on the determination result of the award determination means in the game round in which the first condition is met, thereby increasing the gaming experience.

Gaming machine 22C8. In the gaming machine 22C7, the specific award determination means can determine to award a bonus that increases the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state as the specified bonus.

According to this gaming machine, if the first condition is met in a game turn before the transition to the specific gaming state, a bonus may be awarded to increase the number of times playable in the specific gaming state. In such a configuration, it is desirable to notify the player that a bonus to increase the number of times playable in the specific gaming state will be awarded in a game turn after the transition to the specific gaming state or in a game turn after the transition to the specific gaming state is notified. This is because if the player is not aware that the transition to the specific gaming state will occur, the player may be confused. Therefore, by applying this configuration to a configuration in which the first specified effect is executed after the second specified effect is executed if both the first specified condition and the second specified condition are met in the first game turn after the transition to the specific gaming state and the rule change condition is also met, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 22C9. The gaming machine 22C8 described above is characterized in that it comprises an effect control means (freeze A effect processing function) that controls the effect execution means to execute different auxiliary effects as the first specified effect in the case where, when both the first specified condition and the second specified condition are met in one game turn, the second specified effect is executed after the first specified effect is executed in that one game turn, and the first specified effect is executed after the second specified effect is executed in that one game turn.

According to this gaming machine, when both the first and second specified conditions are met in one game turn, the sub-control means is equipped with effect control means that controls the effect execution means to execute different auxiliary effects as the first specified effect in the following cases: when the first specified effect is executed and then the second specified effect is executed in said one game turn, and when the second specified effect is executed and then the first specified effect is executed in said one game turn. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the first specified effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 22C10. In the gaming machine 22C9 described above, when the first specified effect is executed after the second specified effect is executed in the one game turn, the effect control means controls the effect execution means to execute an auxiliary effect as the first specified effect, which notifies the player that the specified bonus will be awarded.

With this gaming machine, when the first prescribed effect is executed after the second prescribed effect is executed in one play, the effect execution means executes an auxiliary effect that notifies the player that a prescribed bonus will be awarded as the first prescribed effect. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that a prescribed bonus will be awarded in the first prescribed effect after executing the second prescribed effect, which corresponds to the first play after transitioning to the specific play state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 22C11. In the gaming machine 22C10 described above, when the second specified effect is executed after the first specified effect is executed in the one game turn, the effect control means controls the effect execution means to execute an auxiliary effect unrelated to the determination result of the specific award determination means as the first specified effect.

With this gaming machine, when a second specified effect is executed after a first specified effect is executed in one play, the effect execution means executes an auxiliary effect as the first specified effect that is unrelated to the result of the determination by the special award determination means. This configuration makes it possible to alleviate player disappointment when a special award is not awarded despite having gone to the trouble of transitioning to the special game state.

Gaming machine 22C12. In the gaming machine 22C11 described above, the sub-control means is configured to, when the effect execution condition (the value of the premonition game number counter is 10 in the premonition mode) is met, cause the effect execution means to execute a specific notification (victory effect) that notifies the player of a transition to the specific game state unless the second condition is met in the next game turn, and to control the effect execution means to execute either the specific notification or a non-specific notification (loss effect) that does not notify the player of a transition to the specific game state unless the second condition is met in the next game turn.

According to this gaming machine, the sub-control means is equipped with a notification control means that, when the effect execution condition is met, causes the effect execution means to execute a specific notification that notifies the player of a transition to a specific gaming state unless the second condition will be met in the next game turn, and controls the effect execution means to execute a specific notification or a non-specific notification that does not notify the player of a transition to a specific gaming state if the second condition will be met in the next game turn. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player of a transition to a specific gaming state in a game turn prior to the game turn in which the second specified condition is met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine 22C13. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the present invention, wherein the notification control means is configured to control the effect execution means to execute the non-specific notification when the effect execution condition is met in a situation in which the specific award decision means has decided not to award the specific benefit in a game turn in which the first condition is met, and the effect control means is configured to control the effect execution means to execute a second specific notification (reverse effect) that notifies of a transition to the specific game state as the first specified effect when the second condition is met in a game turn following the non-specific notification.

According to this gaming machine, if the effect execution condition is met in a situation where the specific award decision means has decided not to award a specific award in a game turn in which the first condition is met, the effect execution means executes a non-specific notification. Then, if the second condition is met in the game turn following the non-specific notification, the effect execution means executes a second specific notification as the first specified effect, notifying the player of a transition to a specific game state. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of a transition to a specific game state in the first specified effect, rather than that a specific award will not be awarded, and by diversifying the first specified effect, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming Machine 22C14. In the gaming machine 22C13 described above, the notification control means is configured to control the effect execution means to execute the specific notification when the effect execution condition is met in a situation where the specific award decision means has decided to award the specific benefit in the game turn in which the first condition is met, and the effect control means is configured to control the effect execution means to execute an auxiliary effect notifying the effect execution means that the specified benefit will be awarded as the first specified effect when the second condition is met in the game turn next after the specific notification.

With this gaming machine, if the effect execution condition is met in a situation where the specific award decision means has decided to award a specific bonus in a game turn in which the first condition is met, the effect execution means executes a specific notification. Then, if the second condition is met in the game turn following the specific notification, the effect execution means executes an auxiliary effect as the first specified effect to notify that a specified bonus will be awarded. With this configuration, after executing the specific notification to notify of a transition to a specific game state, it is possible to notify that a specified bonus will be awarded in the first specified effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machines 22A to 22C may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 22 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 21, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine 23A1. A gaming machine that allows a game to be played using a gaming value (medal), and awards the gaming value when the game result satisfies the awarding condition (winning),
a difference storage means (MY counter) capable of accumulating and storing the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result;
a stipulated information storage means (a complete flag storage area) for storing stipulated information (a complete flag) when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a predetermined stipulated number (19,000);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means, the gaming machine is configured to transition to a non-playable state (stopped state) in which the game is no longer possible.

With this gaming machine, when the cumulative stored result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results reaches a predetermined specified number, stipulation information is stored. If stipulation information is stored, the machine transitions to a non-playable state in which play is no longer possible. This configuration makes it possible to avoid awarding excessive game values within a specified period, ensuring the soundness of play and increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine 23A2. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine 23A1 described above, when a specified operation is performed (power-on after the setting key is turned ON), including a power-on operation that switches the gaming machine from a power-off state to a power-on state, the gaming machine can be restored from the non-playable state to a playable state in which play is possible.

This gaming machine can restore a non-playable state to a playable state in which play is possible when a specified operation is performed, including a power-on operation that switches the gaming machine from a powered-off state to a powered-on state. This configuration makes it difficult to restore a playable state during business hours at the amusement facility where the gaming machine is installed, thereby ensuring the integrity of gaming. It is certainly possible to configure the machine so that a non-playable state can be restored to a playable state when a power-on operation is performed. However, this configuration could potentially render the function of transitioning to a non-playable state based on the accumulated storage results of the difference number meaningless, since it would be possible to easily restore a playable state during business hours.

Gaming machine 23A3. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine 23A2, when the specified operation is performed, a winning probability setting process (winning probability setting process S230906 of the main control device 101) that sets the winning probability for the game is started, and when an ending operation (ON operation of the start lever 41) that ends the winning probability setting process is performed, the game returns from the non-playable state to the playable state.

With this gaming machine, when a specified operation is performed, a win probability setting process is activated, which sets the win probability for the game, and when an end operation is performed to end the win probability setting process, the machine returns from a non-playable state to a playable state. This configuration makes it difficult to return to a playable state during business hours when there are customers at the gaming center, etc., and ensures the integrity of the game.

Gaming machine 23A4. In the gaming machine 23A3 described above, the winning probability setting process is characterized in that the set value corresponding to the winning probability for the game is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

With this gaming machine, the winning probability setting process makes the set value corresponding to the winning probability of the game visible from the front of the gaming machine. This configuration makes it difficult to return the machine to a playable state during business hours when customers are present at the amusement facility, ensuring the integrity of the game. This is because there is a possibility that the set value could be visible to players playing the gaming machine or other customers.

Gaming machine 23A5. The gaming machine 23A4 described above is equipped with initialization means (main control device 101 out-of-area RAM clear process S230903) that initializes the difference number storage means and the specified information storage means when the specified operation is performed, and is characterized in that when the specified operation is performed, the difference number stored in the difference number storage means is reset to its initial value and the specified information storage means is placed in a state where it does not store the specified information.

With this gaming machine, when a prescribed operation is performed, the difference stored in the difference storage means is reset to its initial value, and the prescribed information storage means is set to a state where no prescribed information is stored. This configuration makes it possible to return from a non-playable state to a playable state by performing a prescribed operation.

Gaming machine 23A6. Any of the above gaming machines 23A2 to 23A5 is equipped with a difference number initialization means (MY clear processing S230816 of the main control unit 101) that initializes the difference number storage means when only the power-on operation is performed, and is characterized in that when only the power-on operation is performed, the difference number stored in the difference number storage means is reset to its initial value.

With this gaming machine, when the power is turned on, the difference stored in the difference storage means is reset to its initial value. This configuration makes it possible to transition to a non-playable state based on the accumulated stored difference after power is turned on, making it possible to avoid excessive awarding of gaming value during one business day at an amusement parlor, etc.

Gaming machine 23A7. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23A6, characterized in that the stipulated information storage means is not initialized when only the power-on operation is performed.

With this gaming machine, the stipulated information storage means is not initialized when only the power-on operation is performed. In this configuration, if stipulated information is stored in the stipulated information storage means, the power can be turned on by performing the stipulated operation. If stipulated information is not stored in the stipulated information storage means, the power can be turned on by performing only the power-on operation. Therefore, even if a gaming facility has a function that transitions to a non-playable state based on the accumulated stored results of the difference number, it is possible to prevent the work required before business hours from becoming too complicated at gaming facilities, etc. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of gaming machine 23A3 described above, the game can be returned to a playable state by performing a so-called setting change operation. If the accumulated stored results of the difference number reach the stipulated number during one business day at the gaming facility, etc., it is expected that the manager of the gaming facility, etc. will change the winning probability for games on the following business day. From this perspective, it is possible to prevent the work required before business hours from becoming too complicated at gaming facilities, etc.

Gaming machine 23A8. The above-mentioned gaming machine 23A6 or 23A7 is equipped with a difference number updating means (MY counter update processing S230303 to S230309 of the main control unit 101) that updates the difference number stored in the difference number storage means when the game result is obtained, and the difference number updating means performs a process of subtracting the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means, and a process of adding the number of game values awarded based on the game result.

When a game result is obtained, this gaming machine performs the following processes: subtracting the number of game values used in the game from the difference stored in the difference storage means; and adding the number of game values awarded based on the game result. This configuration makes it possible to transition to a non-playable state based on the accumulated stored result of the difference after power-on, making it possible to avoid awarding excessive game values in one business day at an amusement parlor, etc.

Gaming Machine 23A9. In the gaming machine 23A8, the difference number updating means subtracts the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means, and adds the number of game values awarded based on the game result, and if the value obtained is less than the initial value, stores the initial value in the difference number storage means.

This gaming machine subtracts the number of game values used in a game from the difference stored in the difference storage means, and adds the number of game values awarded based on the game result. If the value obtained is less than the initial value, the initial value is stored in the difference storage means. This configuration makes it possible to transition to a non-playable state based on the increase from the point at which the number of game values has decreased the most since the power was turned on and the game result was obtained.

Gaming machine 23A10. In the gaming machine 23A8 or 23A9, if the game result is a re-play winning result that allows the next game to be played with the same number of game values as the number of game values used, the difference number updating means does not perform the process of subtracting the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means, and the process of adding the number of game values awarded based on the game result.

With this gaming machine, if the game result is a replay winning result, which allows the next game to be played with the same number of game values as the number of game values used, the process of subtracting the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means and the process of adding the number of game values awarded based on the game result are not performed. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the processing time when the game result is a replay winning result.

Gaming machine 23A11. Any of the above gaming machines 23A2 to 23A10 is equipped with an unplayable state transition means (error processing of the main control unit 101) that transitions to the unplayable state when a specified abnormality (such as a medal payout abnormality) occurs, and the operations that enable the machine to return from the unplayable state to the playable state differ depending on whether the transition to the unplayable state is based on the occurrence of the specified abnormality or the transition to the unplayable state based on the storage of the stipulated information in the stipulated information storage means.

This gaming machine may transition to a non-playable state if a specified abnormality occurs, and the operations required to return the machine from the non-playable state to a playable state differ depending on whether the transition to the non-playable state is due to the occurrence of a specified abnormality or due to the storage of specified information in the specified information storage means. This configuration ensures the convenience of returning the machine to a playable state within business hours when a specified abnormality occurs, while making it difficult to return the machine to a playable state within business hours when the machine transitions to a non-playable state based on the accumulated storage results of the difference number.

Gaming machine 23A12. A gaming machine comprising: a disable transition means (error processing of the main control device 101) that transitions to the unplayable state when a specified abnormality (such as an abnormality in medal payout) occurs in any of gaming machines 23A2 to 23A10; and when the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means, the disable transition means transitions to the unplayable state.

This gaming machine is equipped with a disable transition means that transitions to a non-playable state when a specified abnormality occurs, and the disable transition means transitions to a non-playable state when regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means. This configuration makes it possible to reuse the program and data that transitions to a non-playable state when a specified abnormality occurs when regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means. As a result, there is no need to prepare new program and data that transitions to a non-playable state when regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means, which makes it possible to prevent increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 23A13. In the above gaming machine 23A11 or 23A12, the specified abnormality is an abnormality related to the acceptance or awarding of the gaming value.

In this gaming machine, the unplayable state transition means transitions to an unplayable state if an abnormality occurs related to the acceptance or awarding of game value. Gaming machines that enable play by using game value and award game value when the game result meets the awarding conditions generally include programs and data that transition to an unplayable state if an abnormality occurs related to the acceptance or awarding of game value. Therefore, by applying this configuration to gaming machine 23A11 or gaming machine 23A12, it becomes possible to transition to an unplayable state using existing programs and data, thereby preventing an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 23A14. In any of gaming machines 23A11 to 23A13 above, the unplayable state transition means includes an unplayable state transition process (S230701 to S230705 in the error processing of the main control unit 101) for transitioning to the unplayable state, and a determination process (S230706 in the error processing of the main control unit 101) for determining whether the regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means after the unplayable state transition process is completed, and is configured to wait until it is determined that the regulating information is not stored in the regulating information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the unplayable state transition means includes a unplayable state transition process that transitions to a playable state, and a determination process that, after the unplayable state transition process is completed, determines whether or not regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means. If it is determined that regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means, the means waits until it determines that the regulating information is not stored in the regulating information storage means. This configuration allows for the unplayable state transition process to be reused, while only adding a program and data for executing the determination process that determines whether regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means, thereby minimizing increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 23A15. In the gaming machine 23A14 described above, the disabling transition means comprises second determination means (S230707, S230708 in the error processing of the main control unit 101) for determining whether a second specified operation different from the specified operation (turning on the reset switch 72 with the front door 12 open) has been performed after the disabling transition processing has ended, and recovery processing (S230709 in the error processing of the main control unit 101) for returning to the playable state when it is determined that the second specified operation has been performed.

According to this gaming machine, the unplayable state transition means includes second determination means for determining whether a second specified operation different from the specified operation has been performed after the unplayable state transition process has ended, and a return process for returning the machine to a playable state if it is determined that the second specified operation has been performed. This configuration ensures the convenience of returning the machine to a playable state within business hours when a specified abnormality occurs, while making it difficult to return the machine to a playable state within business hours if the machine transitions to a unplayable state based on the accumulated stored results of the difference number.

Gaming machine 23A16. The gaming machine 23A15 described above, wherein the second specified operation is an operation that does not include the power-on operation.

With this gaming machine, the second specified operation does not include the power-on operation, ensuring the convenience of restoring the machine to a playable state during business hours if a specified abnormality occurs.

Gaming machine 23B1. A gaming machine that allows a game to be played using a gaming value (medal) and awards the gaming value when the game result satisfies the awarding condition (winning),
a difference storage means (MY counter) capable of accumulating and storing the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result;
When the game result is obtained, a difference number updating means (MY counter updating process S230303 to S230309 of the main control device 101) updates the difference number stored in the difference number storage means;
a regulating information storage means (a complete flag storage area) capable of storing regulating information (a complete flag);
a difference number determination means (a 19000 confirmation function S230312 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not the difference number stored in the difference number storage means has reached a predetermined specified number (19000);
a regulating information setting means (a complete flag setting function S230313 of the main control device 101) for storing the regulating information in the regulating information storage means when the difference number determination means determines that the regulating number has been reached,
If the game result is a replay winning result that allows a next game with the same number of game values as the number of game values used, the difference number stored in the difference number storage means is not updated by the difference number update means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means, the gaming machine is configured to transition to a non-playable state (stopped state) in which the game is no longer possible.

With this gaming machine, when the cumulative stored result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results reaches a predetermined specified number, stipulation information is stored. If stipulation information is stored, the machine transitions to a non-playable state in which play is no longer possible. This configuration makes it possible to avoid awarding excessive game values within a specified period, ensuring the soundness of play and increasing interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the difference stored in the difference storage means were updated when a game result was obtained and the specified information were stored based on the difference stored in the difference storage means, the processing time after the game result was obtained would be longer, which could potentially result in a longer delay between the time the game result was obtained and the time the next game could be played. Therefore, in this gaming machine, if the game result is a replay winning result, which allows the next game to be played with the same number of play values as the number of play values used, the difference stored in the difference storage means is not updated. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the processing time when the game result is a replay winning result, and effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine 23B2. In the gaming machine 23B1, the difference number updating means performs a process of subtracting the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means, and a process of adding the number of game values awarded based on the game result.

With this gaming machine, when a game result is obtained, a process is performed to subtract the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means, and a process is performed to add the number of game values awarded based on the game result. This configuration makes it possible to cumulatively store the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result in the difference number storage means. Furthermore, by performing a process to subtract the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means when a game result is obtained, it is possible to configure the machine so that the difference number stored in the difference number storage means is not updated by the difference number update means if a replay win is obtained. Because the number of game values used in the game can be determined when the game begins, it is possible to subtract it from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means at that time. However, with this configuration, if a replay win is obtained, it becomes necessary to perform a process to add the number of game values used in the game to the difference number stored in the difference number storage means.

Gaming machine 23B3. In the gaming machine 23B2 described above, the difference number updating means subtracts the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the difference number storage means, and adds the number of game values awarded based on the game result, and if the value obtained is less than an initial value (0), stores the initial value in the difference number storage means.

According to this gaming machine, if the value obtained by subtracting the number of game values used in a game from the difference stored in the difference storage means and adding the number of game values awarded based on the game result is less than the initial value, the initial value is stored in the difference storage means. This configuration makes it possible to transition to a non-playable state based on the increase from the point at which the number of game values has decreased the most when the game result is obtained as the base point.

Gaming machine 23B4. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23B3, characterized in that if the game result is the replay winning result, the difference determination means does not make a determination.

With this gaming machine, if the game result is a replay winning result, not only is the difference stored in the difference storage means not updated by the difference update means, but the difference determination means is also not made. This configuration makes it possible to further shorten the processing time when the game result is a replay winning result.

Gaming machine 23B5. Any of the above gaming machines 23B1 to 23B4 is characterized in that, when a specified operation is performed (power-on after the setting key is turned ON), including a power-on operation that switches the gaming machine from a power-off state to a power-on state, the gaming machine can be restored from the non-playable state to a playable state in which play is possible.

This gaming machine can restore a non-playable state to a playable state in which play is possible when a specified operation is performed, including a power-on operation that switches the gaming machine from a powered-off state to a powered-on state. This configuration makes it difficult to restore a playable state during business hours at the amusement facility where the gaming machine is installed, thereby ensuring the integrity of gaming. It is certainly possible to configure the machine so that a non-playable state can be restored to a playable state when a power-on operation is performed. However, this configuration could potentially render the function of transitioning to a non-playable state based on the accumulated storage results of the difference number meaningless, since it would be possible to easily restore a playable state during business hours.

Gaming machine 23B6. Any of gaming machines 23B1 to 23B5 described above, comprising: specific game transition means (beneficial zone transition processing S1403 of the main control unit 101) for transitioning to a specific game state (advantageous zone); second difference number storage means (difference number counter) capable of accumulating and storing the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result after transition to the specific game state; second difference number update means (difference number adjustment processing S1707 of the main control unit 101) for updating the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means when the game result is obtained; and specific game termination means (normal zone transition processing S1703 of the main control unit 101) for terminating the specific game state when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches a predetermined upper limit (2400).

This gaming machine includes a specific game transition means for transitioning to a specific game state, a second difference number storage means for accumulating the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result after transition to the specific game state, a second difference number update means for updating the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means when a game result is obtained, and a specific game termination means for terminating the specific game state when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches a predetermined upper limit. In this configuration, when a game result is obtained, it becomes necessary to update the difference number stored in the difference number storage means and the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means. This lengthens the processing time after the game result is obtained, and there is a possibility that it will take a long time for the next game to become available after the game result is obtained. However, by configuring the system so that the difference stored in the difference storage means is not updated when the game result is a replay winning result, it is possible to shorten the processing time when the game result is a replay winning result, and the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

Gaming machine 23B7. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23B6, characterized in that if the game result is the replay winning result, the second difference number updating means does not update the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means.

With this gaming machine, if the game result is a replay winning result, not only is the difference number stored in the difference number storage means not updated, but the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means is also not updated. This configuration makes it possible to further shorten the processing time when the game result is a replay winning result.

Gaming Machine 23B8. In the gaming machine 23B7, the second difference number updating means performs a process of subtracting the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means, and a process of adding the number of game values awarded based on the game result.

According to this gaming machine, when a gaming result is obtained, a process is performed to subtract the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means, and a process is performed to add the number of game values awarded based on the gaming result. This configuration makes it possible to cumulatively store the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the gaming result in the second difference number storage means. Furthermore, by performing a process to subtract the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means when a gaming result is obtained, it is possible to configure the machine so that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means is not updated by the second difference number update means if the result is a re-play winning. Because the number of game values used in the game can be determined when the game begins, it is also possible to subtract it from the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means at this time. However, with this configuration, if the replay result is a winning one, it becomes necessary to add the number of game values used in the game to the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means.

Gaming Machine 23B9. In the gaming machine 23B8 described above, the second difference number updating means subtracts the number of game values used in the game from the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means, and adds the number of game values awarded based on the game result, and if the value obtained is less than an initial value (0), stores the initial value in the second difference number storage means.

According to this gaming machine, if the value obtained by subtracting the number of game values used in the game from the difference stored in the second difference storage means and adding the number of game values awarded based on the game result is less than the initial value, the initial value is stored in the second difference storage means. This configuration makes it possible to use the point at which the number of game values has decreased the most when a game result is obtained after transitioning to the specific gaming state as a base point, and to end the specific gaming state based on the increase from that base point.

Gaming machine 23B10. Any of the above gaming machines 23B6 to 23B9 is equipped with a second difference determination means (2400 confirmation function S1708 of the main control unit 101) that determines whether the difference stored in the second difference storage means has reached the upper limit, and the second difference determination means determines whether the difference stored in the second difference storage means has reached the upper limit even if the game result is the replay winning result.

With this gaming machine, if the game result is a replay winning result, the second difference update means does not update the difference stored in the second difference storage means, but the second difference determination means still makes a determination. This configuration shortens processing time and makes it possible to determine whether or not to end the specific game state each time a game result is obtained.

Gaming machine 23B11. Any of the above gaming machines 23B1 to 23B10, comprising special game transition means (BB state processing function S230119 of the main control unit 101) that transitions to a special game state when the game result is a special winning result (BB winning), and configured such that when in the special game state, no determination is made by the difference number determination means until the special game state ends.

With this gaming machine, when a special game state is in effect, the difference number determination means does not make a determination until the special game state ends. This configuration makes it possible to maintain a playable state until the special game state ends, even if the cumulative stored results of the difference number reach a specified number during the special game state. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game state becomes unplayable and the player's motivation to play is significantly reduced.

Gaming machine 23B12. The gaming machine 23B11 described above is characterized in that the special game state is configured to end when a predetermined number of games have been played or when a predetermined number of game values have been awarded.

With this gaming machine, the special gaming state ends when a predetermined number of plays have been played or when a predetermined number of gaming values have been awarded. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the special gaming state continues indefinitely after the cumulative stored results of the difference number reach a predetermined number, thereby ensuring the integrity of gaming.

Gaming machine 23B13. In any of gaming machines 23B1 to 23B3 above, the difference determination means determines whether the difference stored in the difference storage means has reached the specified number, even if the game result is the replay winning result.

With this gaming machine, if the game result is a replay winning result, the difference number stored in the difference number storage means is not updated by the difference number update means, but a determination is made by the difference number determination means. This configuration shortens processing time while making it possible to determine whether the cumulative stored difference number has reached a specified number each time a game result is obtained.

This configuration may also be applied to any of the above gaming machines 23B5 to 23B12, and even in such cases, the above-mentioned effects can be expected to be achieved.

Gaming machine 23C1. A gaming machine that allows a game to be played using a gaming value (medal), and awards the gaming value when the game result satisfies the awarding condition (winning),
a difference storage means (MY counter) capable of accumulating and storing the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result;
a stipulated information storage means (a complete flag storage area) for storing stipulated information (a complete flag) when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a predetermined stipulated number (19,000);
When the stipulated information is stored in the stipulated information storage means, the state transitions to a game-disabled state (a game-stopped state) in which the game is disabled;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to make a specified notification (advance notification) when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number (18,500) which is smaller than the specified number.

With this gaming machine, when the cumulative stored result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results reaches a predetermined specified number, stipulation information is stored. If stipulation information is stored, the machine transitions to a non-playable state in which play is no longer possible. This configuration makes it possible to avoid awarding excessive game values within a specified period, ensuring the soundness of play and increasing interest in the game.

However, with this configuration, if the game suddenly transitions to a state where the player is unable to play when he or she intends to continue playing, it is possible that the player's motivation to play may be significantly reduced. Therefore, this gaming machine is configured to issue a notification when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number that is less than the specified number. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand through the notification that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, thereby effectively alleviating the above-mentioned concerns. This is because the player can choose whether to continue playing until the cumulative stored result of the difference number reaches the specified number, or to end play before the cumulative stored result of the difference number reaches the specified number.

Gaming machine 23C2. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23C1, characterized in that the specified notification is configured so that specified numerical information (ending number) corresponding to the difference stored in the difference storage means is displayed on the specified display means (auxiliary display unit 65).

In this gaming machine, when a specified notification is made, specified numerical information corresponding to the difference stored in the difference storage means is displayed on the specified display means. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of game values that can be acquired before the game state transitions to an unplayable state, and prevents the player from losing significant motivation to play when the game state transitions to an unplayable state.

Gaming machine 23C3. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine 23C2, characterized in that when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the second specified number, the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means even when the game is not being played.

According to this gaming machine, when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number, the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means even when no play is being performed. This configuration makes it possible for not only players who have been playing the gaming machine, but also players who intend to play the gaming machine in the future, to understand that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from losing their motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23C4. The gaming machine 23C3 described above is equipped with customer waiting effect control means (display control device 81) that controls the execution of a customer waiting effect when a predetermined time has elapsed while no game is being played, and is configured so that when the customer waiting effect is executed while the specified numerical information is being displayed on the specified display means, the customer waiting effect can be executed while the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means.

With this gaming machine, when a customer waiting effect is executed while specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means, the customer waiting effect can be executed while the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means. This configuration makes it possible for players who have become interested in this gaming machine due to the customer waiting effect to understand that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from losing their motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23C5. Any of gaming machines 23C2 to 23C4 described above, characterized in that when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the second specified number, the specified numerical information is continuously displayed on the specified display means from the start of the game until the game result is obtained.

With this gaming machine, when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number, specified numerical information is continuously displayed on the specified display means from the start of play until the game result is obtained. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand, while playing, that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the player will forget that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23C6. Any of gaming machines 23C2 to 23C5 described above is equipped with an unplayable transition means (error processing of the main control device 101) that transitions to the unplayable state when a specified abnormality (such as a medal payout abnormality) occurs, and is configured so that if the specified abnormality occurs and the machine transitions to the unplayable state while the specified numerical information is being displayed on the specified display means, the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means in the unplayable state.

With this gaming machine, if a specified abnormality occurs while specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means and the machine transitions to a non-playable state, the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means even in the non-playable state. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, even in a situation where play is not possible. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the player will forget that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23C7. Any of gaming machines 23C2 to 23C6 described above, characterized in that the specified display means is configured to be able to display both the specified numerical information and auxiliary effects according to the game situation.

In this gaming machine, the specified display means is configured to be able to display both specified numerical information and auxiliary effects that correspond to the game situation. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will not notice that specified numerical information is being displayed, and prevents the player from losing interest in playing. This is because, in a gaming machine that displays auxiliary effects that correspond to the game situation, it is expected that the player's eyes will be drawn to the display means on which the auxiliary effects are being displayed.

Gaming machine 23C8. Any of gaming machines 23C2 to 23C7 described above, characterized in that when the specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means and the difference number stored in the difference number storage means becomes less than the second specified number, the specified numerical information is not displayed.

According to this gaming machine, if the difference number stored in the difference number storage means falls below the second specified number while the specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means, the specified numerical information is hidden. This configuration attracts the player's attention when the display state changes from not displaying the specified numerical information to displaying it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will forget that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, preventing the player from losing interest in playing. For example, it is possible to configure the specified numerical information to be constantly displayed on the specified display means. However, with this configuration, there is a possibility that the player will check the specified numerical information when the cumulative stored result of the difference number has not yet reached the second specified number, become relieved that the specified number is far away, and then stop checking the specified numerical information. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine 23C7, it is possible to display auxiliary effects in the area that previously displayed the specified numerical information, allowing the player to enjoy auxiliary effects even when the cumulative stored result of the difference number has not yet reached the second specified number.

Gaming machine 23C9. Any of the above gaming machines 23C2 to 23C8, characterized in that it comprises: a predetermined game transition means (main control unit 101's notification mode transition process S1608) that transitions to a predetermined game state (notification mode) in which an increase in the number of game values can be expected with each game; and an increased bonus granting means (main control unit 101's additional coin number addition function S1807) that grants an increased bonus (an increase in the net increase coin number counter) that increases the number of games that can be played in the predetermined game state when a predetermined condition (winning the additional coin lottery) is met.

This gaming machine may transition to a predetermined gaming state where an increase in the number of play values is expected with each play. In the predetermined gaming state, if predetermined conditions are met, an increased bonus is awarded, which increases the number of playable plays in the predetermined gaming state. In such a configuration, if the specified notification is not issued, an event may occur in which the machine suddenly transitions to a non-playable state when there are still playable plays remaining in the predetermined gaming state, which could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. However, if the specified notification is issued when the cumulative stored result of the difference number reaches a second specified number, the player can be made aware in advance that the non-playable state will occur during the predetermined gaming state, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

Gaming machine 23C10. The gaming machine 23C9 described above is equipped with an achievement notification control means (a specified number exceeding display function S231204 of the display control device 81) that controls the execution of an achievement notification (a specified number exceeding display) that notifies the user that the difference between the number of game values used in the game after the transition to the specified game state and the number of game values awarded based on the game result has reached a specified number (500, 1000, 1500, 2000), and the achievement notification control means does not control the execution of the achievement notification when the difference between the number of game values used in the game after the transition to the specified game state and the number of game values awarded based on the game result has reached the specified number due to the game result of the game round at which the specified game state ends.

This gaming machine is controlled to execute an achievement notification that notifies the player that the difference between the number of game values used in play and the number of game values awarded based on the game results after transition to a predetermined game state has reached a predetermined number. This configuration allows the player to continue playing in the predetermined game state with the aim of acquiring additional game values when the achievement notification is executed. This increases the player's motivation to play, thereby preventing the game in the predetermined game state from becoming monotonous. On the other hand, the machine is configured not to execute an achievement notification when the result of the game at the end of the predetermined game state indicates that the difference between the number of game values used in play and the number of game values awarded based on the game results after transition to the predetermined game state has reached a predetermined number. This configuration reduces the player's desire to play when the predetermined game state ends. It is also possible to issue a notification based on the results of the game that ends the specified game state, but in this case, there is a possibility that the player will become satisfied with the end of the specified game state when the specified number is reached, and will simply end the game.

Gaming machine 23C11. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine 23C10, characterized in that the arrival notification control means is configured not to perform control to execute the same arrival notification in one specified gaming state.

In this gaming machine, the reach notification control means does not control the execution of the same reach notification in one predetermined gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to avoid repeatedly issuing the same reach notification each time a gaming result is obtained after an reach notification has been issued to notify that a predetermined number has been reached.

Gaming machine 23C12. The gaming machine 23C10 or 23C11 described above is characterized in that the specified notification is made when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the second specified number as a result of the game result of the game round at which the specified game state ends.

In this gaming machine, when the difference stored in the difference storage means reaches a second specified number as a result of the game results of the game rounds at which the predetermined game state ends, a reach notification is not issued, but a specified notification is issued. This configuration allows the player to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine after the predetermined game state ends based on the specified numerical information displayed in the specified notification. As a result, it is possible to avoid a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play. Indeed, since the predetermined game state ends in which an increase in the number of play values can be expected with each game round, it is possible to configure the machine not to issue a specified notification when the second specified number is reached as a result of the game results of the game rounds at which the predetermined game state ends. However, with this configuration, if a so-called consecutive win occurs, in which the game state transitions back to the predetermined game state after a small number of games has ended, a specified notification may be issued during the consecutive win predetermined game state, resulting in a transition to an unplayable state during the consecutive win predetermined game state. When a series of consecutive wins occurs, the player's sense of satisfaction generally increases dramatically, so if the above event occurs, it is thought that the player's motivation to play will be significantly reduced compared to when a specified notification is made at the end of a specified gaming state.

Gaming machine 23C13. Any of the above gaming machines 23C1 to 23C12, characterized in that when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the second specified number, a specified signal (a game interruption request signal) can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

This gaming machine is configured to output a regulation signal externally when the cumulative stored results of the difference numbers reach a second specified number. This configuration enables devices electrically connected to this gaming machine to perform control in response to the cumulative stored results of the difference numbers reaching the second specified number.

Gaming machine 23C14. In the gaming machine 23C13 described above, the specified signal is a game interruption request signal requesting the interruption of gameplay.

This gaming machine is configured to output a game interruption request signal to an external device when the cumulative stored results of the difference numbers reach a second specified number. This configuration makes it possible to interrupt gameplay when a performance testing machine or similar device is used to play the game, rather than a player, as soon as the cumulative stored results of the difference numbers reach the second specified number. This allows for a smooth performance test.

Gaming machine 23D1. A gaming machine that allows a game to be played using a gaming value (medal), and awards the gaming value when the game result satisfies the awarding condition (winning),
a difference storage means (MY counter) capable of accumulating and storing the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result;
a regulating information storage means (a complete flag storage area) for storing regulating information (a complete flag) when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a predetermined specified number (19,000);
A predetermined game transition means (the notification mode transition process S1608 of the main control device 101) for transitioning to a predetermined game state (notification mode) in which an increase in the number of game values can be expected each time a game is played;
When a predetermined condition (winning the additional lottery) is met, an additional bonus granting means (addition function S1807 of the main control device 101) grants an additional bonus (addition of the net increase number counter) that increases the number of games that can be played under the predetermined gaming state;
and an achievement notification control means (a function S231204 of the display control device 81 for displaying a breakthrough of a specified number of coins) for controlling execution of an achievement notification (a display of a breakthrough of a specified number of coins) for notifying that the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result after the transition to the specified game state has reached a specified number (500, 1000, 1500, 2000).
When the stipulated information is stored in the stipulated information storage means, the state transitions to a game-disabled state (a game-stopped state) in which the game is disabled;
When the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number (18,500) that is smaller than the specified number, a specified notification (advance notification) is performed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the reach notification control means is configured not to control the execution of the reach notification when, based on the game result of the game round at which the predetermined game state ends, the difference between the number of game values used in the game after the transition to the predetermined game state and the number of game values awarded based on the game result reaches the predetermined number.

With this gaming machine, when the cumulative stored result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results reaches a predetermined specified number, stipulation information is stored. If stipulation information is stored, the machine transitions to a non-playable state in which play is no longer possible. This configuration makes it possible to avoid awarding excessive game values within a specified period, ensuring the soundness of play and increasing interest in the game.

However, with this configuration, if the game suddenly transitions to a state where the player is unable to play when he or she intends to continue playing, it is possible that the player's motivation to play may be significantly reduced. Therefore, this gaming machine is configured to issue a notification when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number that is less than the specified number. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand through the notification that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, thereby effectively alleviating the above-mentioned concerns. This is because the player can choose whether to continue playing until the cumulative stored result of the difference number reaches the specified number, or to end play before the cumulative stored result of the difference number reaches the specified number.

Furthermore, with this gaming machine, each time a game is played, the player may transition to a predetermined gaming state where an increase in the number of play values is expected. In the predetermined gaming state, if predetermined conditions are met, an increased bonus is awarded, which increases the number of playable plays in the predetermined gaming state. In such a configuration, if the specified notification is not issued, an event may occur in which the player suddenly transitions to a non-playable state when there are still playable plays remaining in the predetermined gaming state, which could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play. However, if the specified notification is issued when the cumulative stored result of the difference number reaches a second specified number, the player can be made aware in advance that the non-playable state will occur during the predetermined gaming state, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

In addition, this gaming machine is controlled to execute an achievement notification that notifies the player that the difference between the number of game values used in play and the number of game values awarded based on the game results after transition to a predetermined game state has reached a predetermined number. This configuration allows the player to continue playing in the predetermined game state with the aim of acquiring additional game values when the achievement notification is executed. This increases the player's motivation to play, thereby preventing the game in the predetermined game state from becoming monotonous. On the other hand, the machine is configured not to execute an achievement notification when the result of the game at the end of the predetermined game state indicates that the difference between the number of game values used in play and the number of game values awarded based on the game results after transition to the predetermined game state has reached a predetermined number. This configuration reduces the player's desire to play when the predetermined game state ends. It is also possible to issue a notification based on the results of the game that ends the specified game state, but in this case, there is a possibility that the player will become satisfied with the end of the specified game state when the specified number is reached, and will simply end the game.

Gaming machine 23D2. The gaming machine 23D1 described above is characterized in that when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the second specified number as a result of the game play that ends the specified game state, the specified notification is made.

In this gaming machine, when the difference stored in the difference storage means reaches a second specified number as a result of the game results of the game rounds at which the predetermined game state ends, a specified notification is not issued, but a specified notification is issued. This configuration allows the player to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine after the predetermined game state ends, based on the specified notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from significantly decreasing. Indeed, since the predetermined game state, in which an increase in the number of play values can be expected with each game round, ends, it is possible to configure the machine not to issue a specified notification when the second specified number is reached as a result of the game results of the game rounds at which the predetermined game state ends. However, with this configuration, if a so-called consecutive win occurs, in which the game state transitions back to the predetermined game state after a small number of games after the end of the predetermined game state, a specified notification may be issued during the consecutive win predetermined game state, resulting in a transition to an unplayable state during the consecutive win predetermined game state. When a series of consecutive wins occurs, the player's sense of satisfaction generally increases dramatically, so if the above event occurs, it is thought that the player's motivation to play will be significantly reduced compared to when a specified notification is made at the end of a specified gaming state.

Gaming machine 23D3. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23D2, characterized in that the arrival notification control means is configured not to perform control to execute the same arrival notification in one predetermined gaming state.

In this gaming machine, the reach notification control means does not control the execution of the same reach notification in one predetermined gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to avoid repeatedly issuing the same reach notification each time a gaming result is obtained after an reach notification has been issued to notify that a predetermined number has been reached.

Gaming machine 23D4. Any of gaming machines 23D1 to 23D3 described above, characterized in that the specified notification is configured to display specified numerical information (ending number) corresponding to the difference stored in the difference storage means on the specified display means (auxiliary display unit 65).

In this gaming machine, when a specified notification is made, specified numerical information corresponding to the difference stored in the difference storage means is displayed on the specified display means. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of game values that can be acquired before the game state transitions to an unplayable state, and prevents the player from losing significant motivation to play when the game state transitions to an unplayable state.

Gaming machine 23D5. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the present invention, characterized in that when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the second specified number, the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means even when the game is not being played.

According to this gaming machine, when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number, the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means even when no play is being performed. This configuration makes it possible for not only players who have been playing the gaming machine, but also players who intend to play the gaming machine in the future, to understand that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from losing their motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23D6. The gaming machine 23D5 described above is equipped with customer waiting effect control means (display control device 81) that controls the execution of a customer waiting effect when a predetermined time has elapsed while no game is being played, and is configured so that when the customer waiting effect is executed while the specified numerical information is being displayed on the specified display means, the customer waiting effect can be executed while the specified numerical information is continuously displayed on the specified display means.

With this gaming machine, when a customer waiting effect is executed while specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means, the customer waiting effect can be executed while the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means. This configuration makes it possible for players who have become interested in this gaming machine due to the customer waiting effect to understand that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from losing their motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23D7. Any of gaming machines 23D4 to 23D6 described above is characterized in that, when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the second specified number, the specified numerical information is continuously displayed on the specified display means from the start of the game until the game result is obtained.

With this gaming machine, when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number, specified numerical information is continuously displayed on the specified display means from the start of play until the game result is obtained. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand, while playing, that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the player will forget that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23D8. Any of gaming machines 23D4 to 23D7 above is equipped with an unplayable transition means (error processing of the main control device 101) that transitions to the unplayable state when a specified abnormality (such as a medal payout abnormality) occurs, and is configured so that if the specified abnormality occurs and the machine transitions to the unplayable state while the specified numerical information is being displayed on the specified display means, the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means in the unplayable state.

With this gaming machine, if a specified abnormality occurs while specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means and the machine transitions to a non-playable state, the specified numerical information continues to be displayed on the specified display means even in the non-playable state. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, even in a situation where play is not possible. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the player will forget that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23D9. Any of gaming machines 23D4 to 23D8 described above, characterized in that the specified display means is configured to display both the specified numerical information and auxiliary effects according to the game situation.

In this gaming machine, the specified display means is configured to be able to display both specified numerical information and auxiliary effects that correspond to the game situation. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will not notice that specified numerical information is being displayed, and prevents the player from losing interest in playing. This is because, in a gaming machine that displays auxiliary effects that correspond to the game situation, it is expected that the player's eyes will be drawn to the display means on which the auxiliary effects are being displayed.

Gaming machine 23D10. Any of gaming machines 23D4 to 23D9 described above, characterized in that when the specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means and the difference number stored in the difference number storage means becomes less than the second specified number, the specified numerical information is not displayed.

According to this gaming machine, if the difference stored in the difference storage means falls below a second specified number while the specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means, the specified numerical information is hidden. This configuration attracts the player's attention when the display switches from not displaying the specified numerical information to displaying it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will forget that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number, preventing the player from losing interest in playing. For example, it is possible to configure the specified numerical information to be constantly displayed on the specified display means. However, with this configuration, there is a possibility that a player will check the specified numerical information when the cumulative stored result of the difference number has not yet reached the second specified number, become relieved that the number is far from being reached, and then stop checking the specified numerical information. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine 23D9, auxiliary effects can be displayed in the area that previously displayed the specified numerical information, allowing the player to enjoy auxiliary effects even when the cumulative stored result of the difference number has not yet reached the second specified number.

Gaming machine 23E1. A gaming machine that allows a game to be played using a gaming value (medal), and awards the gaming value when the game result satisfies the awarding condition (winning),
a difference storage means (MY counter) capable of accumulating and storing the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result;
a regulating information storage means (a complete flag storage area) for storing regulating information (a complete flag) when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a predetermined specified number (19,000);
A specific game transition means (advantageous zone transition processing S1403 of the main control device 101) for transitioning to a specific game state (advantageous zone) consisting of a predetermined game state (announcement mode) in which an increase in the number of game values can be expected each time a game is played, and a non-predetermined game state (chance mode) different from the predetermined game state;
a second difference number storage means (difference number counter) capable of accumulating and storing the difference number between the number of game values used in the game after the transition to the specific game state and the number of game values awarded based on the game result;
a specific game ending means (a normal interval transition process S1703 of the main control device 101) for ending the specific game state when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches a predetermined upper limit number (2400);
When the stipulated information is stored in the stipulated information storage means, the state transitions to a game-disabled state (a game-stopped state) in which the game is disabled;
A gaming machine characterized by having an execution/non-execution determination means (ending determination functions S231205 to S231208 of the display control device 81) that determines whether or not to execute a specific effect (ending movie) to be performed under the specific gaming state based on the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means and the difference number stored in the difference number storage means when the game is not in the non-playable state.

With this gaming machine, when the cumulative stored result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results reaches a predetermined specified number, stipulation information is stored. If stipulation information is stored, the machine transitions to a non-playable state in which play is no longer possible. This configuration makes it possible to avoid awarding excessive game values within a specified period, ensuring the soundness of play and increasing interest in the game.

The system also includes specific game transition means for transitioning to a specific game state, second difference storage means for cumulatively storing the difference between the number of game values used in play and the number of game values awarded based on the game results after transition to the specific game state, and specific game termination means for terminating the specific game state when the difference stored in the second difference storage means reaches a predetermined upper limit. If the system is not in a non-playable state, the system also includes execution/non-execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect to be performed in the specific game state based on the difference stored in the second difference storage means and the difference stored in the difference storage means. This configuration makes it possible to change whether or not to execute a specific effect depending on the difference stored in the difference storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 23E2. The gaming machine 23E1 described above, characterized in that the specific effects are executed across multiple game sessions.

With this gaming machine, special effects are executed across multiple play sessions. In such a configuration, if a system is applied that transitions to a non-playable state when regulation information is stored, an event may occur in which the system transitions to a non-playable state midway through a special effect. However, if a system is used that determines whether or not to execute a special effect based on the difference number stored in the difference number storage means, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of this event, thereby making it possible to effectively increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine 23E3. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23E2, characterized in that, once the specific effect has started, it continues until the specific game state ends.

With this gaming machine, once a specific effect has started, it will continue until the specific game state ends. In this configuration, if a system is applied that transitions to a non-playable state when regulation information is stored, an event may occur in which the system transitions to a non-playable state midway through a specific effect. However, if a system is used that determines whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the difference number stored in the difference number storage means, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of this event, thereby making it possible to effectively increase interest in the game.

Gaming Machine 23E4. In the gaming machine 23E3 described above, the execution/non-execution determining means determines to execute the specific effect when it is determined that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit number under the specified gaming state, and when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the upper limit number, the difference number stored in the difference number storage means will not reach the specified number.

According to this gaming machine, a special effect is executed when it is confirmed that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit under a specified gaming state, and when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the upper limit, the difference number stored in the difference number storage means will not reach the specified number. By configuring the special effect to be executed based on the situation in which it is confirmed that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit under a specified gaming state, it is possible to associate the special effect with the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaching the upper limit and ending the special gaming state. As a result, when a special effect is initiated, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority and satisfaction, and to increase their interest in the game. Furthermore, by configuring the special effect to be executed when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the upper limit but the difference number stored in the difference number storage means will not reach the specified number, it is possible to avoid transitioning to a non-playable state midway through a special effect, thereby effectively increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming Machine 23E5. In the gaming machine 23E4 described above, the execution/non-execution determining means determines not to execute the specific effect when it is determined that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit number under the specified gaming state, and the difference number stored in the difference number storage means will reach the specified number before the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the upper limit number.

With this gaming machine, even if it is confirmed that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit under a specified gaming state, if the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the specified number before the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the upper limit, the special effect will not be executed. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a transition to an unplayable state in the middle of a special effect, thereby making it possible to effectively increase gaming interest. If a transition to an unplayable state occurs in the middle of a special effect, the player will not be able to bask in the afterglow after the special effect and special gaming state have ended, which will diminish the player's sense of superiority and satisfaction.

Gaming Machine 23E6. In the gaming machine 23E5 described above, the execution/non-execution determination means determines not to execute the specific effect regardless of the difference number stored in the difference number storage means when it is not certain that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit number under the specified gaming state.

With this gaming machine, if it is not certain that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit under a specified gaming state, the special effect will not be executed regardless of the difference number stored in the difference number storage means. This configuration makes it possible to associate the special effect with the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaching the upper limit and ending the special gaming state. As a result, when the special effect is started, it is possible to increase the player's sense of superiority and satisfaction, and to increase their interest in the game.

Gaming machine 23E7. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 23E6, but configured to issue a specified notification (advance notification) when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number (18,500) that is less than the specified number.

With this gaming machine, when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a second specified number that is less than the specified number, a specified notification is issued. This configuration allows the player to understand through the specified notification that the cumulative stored result of the difference number will soon reach the specified number. As a result, it is possible to avoid a sudden transition to an unplayable state in the middle of a specified gaming state, which would significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

Gaming machine 23E8. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23E7, characterized in that the specified notification is configured so that specified numerical information (ending number of coins) corresponding to the difference stored in the difference storage means is displayed on the specified display means (auxiliary display unit 65).

In this gaming machine, when a specified notification is made, specified numerical information corresponding to the difference stored in the difference storage means is displayed on the specified display means. This configuration allows the player to understand the number of game values that can be acquired before the game state transitions to an unplayable state, and prevents the player from losing significant motivation to play when the game state transitions to an unplayable state.

Gaming machine 23E9. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23E8, characterized in that, when the execution determination means determines not to execute the specific effect in a situation in which it is determined that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit number under the specified gaming state, the specified numerical information is displayed on the specified display means.

According to this gaming machine, if the execution/non-execution determination means determines not to execute a specific effect when it is determined that the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means will reach the upper limit under a specified gaming state, specified numerical information is displayed on the specification display means. This configuration makes it possible for the player to understand that the game will transition to an unplayable state before the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the upper limit, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the specific effect not being executed.

Gaming Machine 23E10. In the gaming machine 23E9 described above, the execution/non-execution determination means is configured to determine that the specific effect will be executed when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means under the specified gaming state reaches a second specified number (2100) that is less than the upper limit number, and the second specified number is set to a value such that the value obtained by subtracting the second specified number from the upper limit number is smaller than the value obtained by subtracting the second specified number from the specified number.

According to this gaming machine, when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means in a specified gaming state reaches a second specified number that is less than the upper limit number, a specific effect may be executed. In this configuration, the second specified number is a value such that the value obtained by subtracting the second specified number from the upper limit number is smaller than the value obtained by subtracting the second specified number from the specified number. With this configuration, if a specific effect is started when the specified numerical information is not displayed, it is possible to end the specified gaming state and the specific gaming state before the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches the specified number, i.e., before transitioning to a non-playable state, and it is possible to execute the specific effect to the end.

Gaming Machine 23E11. In the gaming machine 23E10 described above, the execution/non-execution determining means determines to execute the specific effect if, under the specified gaming state, the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the second specified number, and the value obtained by subtracting the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means from the upper limit number is smaller than the value obtained by subtracting the difference number stored in the difference number storage means from the specified number.

According to this gaming machine, when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the second predetermined number under a predetermined gaming state, a special effect is executed if the value obtained by subtracting the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means from the upper limit number is smaller than the value obtained by subtracting the difference number stored in the difference number storage means from the predetermined number. This configuration makes it possible to execute the special effect to the end if the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the second predetermined number under a predetermined gaming state, even when predetermined numerical information is being displayed.

Gaming Machine 23E12. In the gaming machine 23E11 described above, the execution/non-execution determining means determines not to execute the specific effect if, under the specified gaming state, the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the second specified number, and the value obtained by subtracting the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means from the upper limit number is equal to or greater than the value obtained by subtracting the difference number stored in the difference number storage means from the specified number.

According to this gaming machine, when the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the second predetermined number under a predetermined gaming state, the special effect is not executed if the value obtained by subtracting the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means from the upper limit number is equal to or greater than the value obtained by subtracting the difference number stored in the difference number storage means from the predetermined number. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a transition to an unplayable state in the middle of a special effect if the difference number stored in the second difference number storage means reaches the second predetermined number under a predetermined gaming state while predetermined numerical information is being displayed.

Gaming machine 23F1. Equipped with control means (main control device 101) that executes multiple types of processing (main processing, etc.) and temporarily stores information in internal storage means (registers) when executing the processing,
The control means
an intra-area processing execution means for executing intra-area processing, which is processing using a program stored in a storage area within a predetermined address range in a program storage means (ROM 105), among the plurality of types of processing;
an out-of-area processing execution means for executing out-of-area processing, which is processing using a program stored in a storage area in an address range outside the predetermined address range in the program storage means, among the plurality of types of processing;
When the in-area processing is started, the information stored in the internal storage means is not saved to the save storage means (the stack area 106is for game control, the stack area 106es for non-game control), and when the out-area processing is started or after the out-area processing is started, the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the save storage means (register value save functions S230115, S230201, S230202, S230507, S230814, S230901, S231001, S231002);
a restore execution means (register value restore functions S230118, S230206, S230207, S230510, S230817, S230904, S231005, S231006) for restoring the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means when or after the out-of-area processing is completed;
a means for executing specific processing (such as normal processing) capable of executing the in-area processing and the out-area processing;
means for executing an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) when an interrupt condition is satisfied;
When the out-of-area processing is started from a state in which the in-area processing is being performed in the specific processing, execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited in the in-area processing before the out-of-area processing is started, and when the out-of-area processing is ended and a return is made to the in-area processing, execution of the interrupt processing is permitted in the returned in-area processing, so that execution of the interrupt processing is not permitted in the out-of-area processing,
In the in-area processing, processing related to the progress of the game is executed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the outside-area processing executes a derivation process (aggregation process) for deriving result information (MY) obtained from game results played during a predetermined period.

According to this gaming machine, when in-area processing is initiated, information stored in the internal storage means is not saved to the save storage means, whereas when out-area processing is initiated, information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the save storage means. This configuration makes it possible to avoid overwriting information stored in the internal storage means during in-area processing, i.e., to prevent corruption of information stored in the internal storage means during in-area processing, when out-area processing is executed. Furthermore, when or after out-area processing is terminated, the information saved to the save storage means is restored to the internal storage means. This configuration makes it possible to return the internal storage means to the state it was in before the out-area processing was executed when the out-area processing was terminated. In addition, when out-area processing is initiated from a situation where in-area processing is being executed during specific processing, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited during the in-area processing before the out-area processing was initiated. When out-area processing is terminated and the in-area processing is returned to, execution of interrupt processing is permitted during the returned in-area processing, thereby disallowing execution of interrupt processing during the out-area processing. This configuration makes it possible to avoid an interrupt occurring when information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the backup storage means, and also makes it possible to avoid a complicated processing configuration when saving information stored in the internal storage means to the backup storage means.

Furthermore, the in-area processing is configured to execute processing related to the progress of the game, while the out-area processing is configured to execute derivation processing that derives result information obtained from game results played over a specified period of time. This configuration makes it possible to improve the efficiency of debugging work in a configuration in which the program storage means stores different storage areas for the programs used when executing in-area processing and the programs used when executing out-area processing. For example, when debugging processing related to the progress of the game, it is sufficient to check the storage area within a specified address range in the program storage means, and there is no need to check the storage area within an address range outside the specified address range.

In addition, by configuring the derivation process, which derives result information obtained from game results played over a specified period, to be performed as an outside-area process, it is possible to create free space in the memory area that stores the program used when executing the inside-area process.As a result, it becomes possible to store programs for executing processes related to the progress of the game in the free space, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 23F2. In the gaming machine 23F1 described above, in which game play is possible using game value (medals) and the game value is awarded when the game result satisfies the awarding condition (winning), the derivation process is configured to derive the accumulated result of the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result as the result information, and the out-of-area process executes a process to store regulated information (complete flag) when the accumulated result of the difference reaches a predetermined regulated number (19,000).

According to this gaming machine, the out-of-area processing derives the cumulative result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results, and when the cumulative result of this difference reaches a predetermined specified number, a process is executed to store specified information. This configuration makes it possible to derive the cumulative result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results and to perform control based on the cumulative result of this difference without putting pressure on the memory area storing the program used to execute the in-area processing.

Gaming machine 23F3. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 23F2, if the stipulated information is stored, the gaming machine transitions to a non-playable state (stopped state) in which the game is no longer possible.

When regulation information is stored, this gaming machine transitions to a non-playable state in which play is not possible. This configuration makes it possible to avoid excessive awarding of gaming value within a specified period, ensuring the integrity of play and increasing interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 23F4. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23F3, characterized in that, when the stipulated information is stored, processing is executed in the in-area processing to transition to the unplayable state.

With this gaming machine, if regulation information is stored, processing is executed in the in-area processing to transition to a play-disabled state. This configuration makes it possible to implement a configuration in which processing related to game progress is executed in the in-area processing, while the processing of deriving the cumulative result of the difference number and the processing of storing the regulation information based on the cumulative result of the difference number are executed in the out-area processing.

Gaming machine 23F5. The gaming machine 23F4 described above is equipped with storage means (RAM 106) for storing information obtained when the in-area processing is executed and information obtained when the out-area processing is executed, and the storage means is configured so that the in-area storage area (work area iw for game control) for storing the information obtained when the in-area processing is executed is concentrated and arranged in a storage area within a second predetermined address range, and includes a difference number storage area (MY counter) for storing the cumulative result of the difference number, and a specified information storage area (complete flag storage area) for storing the specified information, and the out-area storage area (work area ew for non-game control) for storing the information obtained when the out-area processing is executed is concentrated and arranged in a storage area in an address range outside the second predetermined address range.

This gaming machine is equipped with storage means for storing information obtained when an in-area process is executed and information obtained when an out-of-area process is executed. The storage means has an in-area storage area for storing information obtained when an in-area process is executed, which is centrally located in a storage area within a second predetermined address range, including a difference number storage area for storing the cumulative difference number result and a specified information storage area for storing specified information. The out-of-area storage area for storing information obtained when an out-of-area process is executed is centrally located in a storage area in an address range outside the second predetermined address range. This configuration makes it possible to improve the efficiency of debugging work even with the program storage means, in a configuration in which the storage area storing the program used when an in-area process is executed and the storage area storing the program used when an out-of-area process are different.

Gaming machine 23F6. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine 23F5, characterized in that the in-area processing is configured to be able to reference the out-area memory area but not be able to update it, and the out-area processing is configured to be able to reference the in-area memory area but not be able to update it.

According to this gaming machine, in-area processing is configured to be able to reference the out-area memory area but not be able to update it, and out-area processing is configured to be able to reference the in-area memory area but not be able to update it. This configuration makes it possible to avoid corrupting information stored in the out-area memory area when in-area processing is executed, or corrupting information stored in the in-area memory area when out-area processing is executed.

Gaming machine 23F7. The gaming machine 23F6 described above, characterized in that the interrupt processing executes the in-area processing and the out-of-area processing.

According to this gaming machine, interrupt processing involves the execution of in-area processing and out-area processing. In this configuration, if the execution of interrupt processing is not prohibited during in-area processing before the start of out-area processing, an event may occur in which the interrupt processing is started in the middle of out-area processing, and a different out-area processing is executed within the interrupt processing. This leads to a complicated processing configuration when saving information stored in the internal storage means to the save storage means. On the other hand, if the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited during in-area processing before the start of out-area processing, the above concerns can be suitably alleviated.

Gaming machine 23F8. A gaming machine comprising unplayable transition means (error processing of the main control device 101) that transitions to the unplayable state when a specified abnormality (such as an abnormality in medal payout) occurs in the gaming machine 23F7, and wherein the unplayable transition means transitions to the unplayable state when the specified information is stored in the specified information storage area.

This gaming machine is equipped with a disable transition means that transitions to a non-playable state when a specified abnormality occurs, and the disable transition means transitions to a non-playable state when specified information is stored in the specified information storage area. This configuration makes it possible to reuse the program and data that transitions to a non-playable state when a specified abnormality occurs when specified information is stored in the specified information storage area. As a result, there is no need to prepare new program and data that transitions to a non-playable state when specified information is stored in the specified information storage area, which makes it possible to suppress increases in storage capacity.

Gaming Machine 23F9. In the gaming machine 23F8 described above, the specified abnormality is an abnormality related to the acceptance or awarding of the gaming value.

In this gaming machine, the unplayable state transition means transitions the machine to an unplayable state if an abnormality occurs related to the acceptance or awarding of game value. Gaming machines that enable play by using game value and award game value when the game result meets the awarding conditions generally include programs and data that transition the machine to an unplayable state if an abnormality occurs related to the acceptance or awarding of game value. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the above gaming machine 23F8, it becomes possible to transition to an unplayable state using existing programs and data, making it possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 23F10. In gaming machine 23F8 or 23F9, the unplayable state transition means includes an unplayable state transition process (S230701 to S230705 in the error processing of the main control unit 101) for transitioning to the unplayable state, and a determination process (S230706 in the error processing of the main control unit 101) for determining whether the regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage area after the unplayable state transition process is completed, and is configured to wait until it is determined that the regulating information is not stored in the regulating information storage area if it is determined that the regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage area.

According to this gaming machine, the unplayable state transition means includes a unplayable state transition process that transitions to a playable state, and a determination process that, after the unplayable state transition process is completed, determines whether or not regulated information is stored in the regulated information storage area. If it is determined that regulated information is stored in the regulated information storage area, the means waits until it determines that regulated information is not stored in the regulated information storage area. This configuration allows for the unplayable state transition process to be reused, while only adding a program and data for executing the determination process that determines whether regulated information is stored in the regulated information storage area, thereby minimizing increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine 23F11. A gaming machine in any of gaming machines 23F1 to 23F10, wherein the save storage means comprises a first save area (a stack area for game control, is) to which the save execution means saves information stored in the internal storage means during the in-area processing, and a second save area (a stack area for non-game control, es) to which the save execution means saves information stored in the internal storage means during the out-area processing, and wherein the first save areas are collectively arranged in a storage area within a third predetermined address range, and the second save areas are collectively arranged in a storage area in an address range outside the third predetermined address range.

According to this gaming machine, the save storage means is composed of a first save area to which the save execution means saves information stored in the internal storage means during in-area processing, and a second save area to which the save execution means saves information stored in the internal storage means during out-of-area processing, with the first save area being collectively arranged in a storage area within a third predetermined address range, and the second save area being collectively arranged in a storage area in an address range outside the third predetermined address range. This configuration makes it possible to improve the efficiency of debugging work even with respect to the save storage means, in a configuration in which the program storage means stores programs used when executing in-area processing in different storage areas from the program storage area used when executing out-of-area processing.

Gaming machine 23G1. A control means (main control device 101) that executes multiple types of processing (main processing, etc.) and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register) when executing the processing;
a sub-controller (display control device 81) that performs subordinate control based on commands transmitted from the control unit,
The control means
an intra-area processing execution means for executing intra-area processing, which is processing using a program stored in a storage area within a predetermined address range in a program storage means (ROM 105), among the plurality of types of processing;
an out-of-area processing execution means for executing out-of-area processing, which is processing using a program stored in a storage area in an address range outside the predetermined address range in the program storage means, among the plurality of types of processing;
When the in-area processing is started, the information stored in the internal storage means is not saved to the save storage means (the stack area 106is for game control, the stack area 106es for non-game control), and when the out-area processing is started or after the out-area processing is started, the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the save storage means (register value save functions S230115, S230201, S230202, S230507, S230814, S230901, S231001, S231002);
a restore execution means (register value restore functions S230118, S230206, S230207, S230510, S230817, S230904, S231005, S231006) for restoring the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means when or after the out-of-area processing is completed;
a means for executing specific processing (such as normal processing) capable of executing the in-area processing and the out-area processing;
means for executing an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) when an interrupt condition is satisfied;
When the out-of-area processing is started from a state in which the in-area processing is being performed in the specific processing, execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited in the in-area processing before the out-of-area processing is started, and when the out-of-area processing is ended and a return is made to the in-area processing, execution of the interrupt processing is permitted in the returned in-area processing, so that execution of the interrupt processing is not permitted in the out-of-area processing,
In the in-area processing, processing related to the progress of the game is executed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the out-of-area processing executes a derivation process (aggregation process) that derives result information (MY) obtained from game results played over a specified period, and a command creation process (output value creation functions S230403, S230404, S230406, S230407, S230409, S230410 in the MY command transmission process) that creates a result information command (MY command) that indicates the result information.

According to this gaming machine, when in-area processing is initiated, information stored in the internal storage means is not saved to the save storage means, whereas when out-area processing is initiated, information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the save storage means. This configuration makes it possible to avoid overwriting information stored in the internal storage means during in-area processing, i.e., to prevent corruption of information stored in the internal storage means during in-area processing, when out-area processing is executed. Furthermore, when or after out-area processing is terminated, the information saved to the save storage means is restored to the internal storage means. This configuration makes it possible to return the internal storage means to the state it was in before the out-area processing was executed when the out-area processing was terminated. In addition, when out-area processing is initiated from a situation where in-area processing is being executed during specific processing, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited during the in-area processing before the out-area processing was initiated. When out-area processing is terminated and the in-area processing is returned to, execution of interrupt processing is permitted during the returned in-area processing, thereby disallowing execution of interrupt processing during the out-area processing. This configuration makes it possible to avoid an interrupt occurring when information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the backup storage means, and also makes it possible to avoid a complicated processing configuration when saving information stored in the internal storage means to the backup storage means.

Furthermore, the in-area processing is configured to execute processing related to the progress of the game, while the out-area processing is configured to execute derivation processing that derives result information obtained from game results played over a specified period of time. This configuration makes it possible to improve the efficiency of debugging work in a configuration in which the program storage means stores different storage areas for the programs used when executing in-area processing and the programs used when executing out-area processing. For example, when debugging processing related to the progress of the game, it is sufficient to check the storage area within a specified address range in the program storage means, and there is no need to check the storage area within an address range outside the specified address range.

In addition, by configuring the derivation process, which derives result information obtained from game results played over a specified period of time, and the command creation process, which creates result information commands indicating the result information, to be performed as out-of-area processing, it becomes possible to create free space in the memory area that stores the programs used when executing in-area processing.As a result, it becomes possible to store programs for executing processing related to the progress of the game in the free space, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine 23G2. In the gaming machine 23G1 described above, when the result information command is created during the outside area processing, a transmission process (transmission functions S230402, S230405, S230408, S230411, S230412 in the MY command transmission process) is executed to transmit the result information command to the sub-control means.

With this gaming machine, when a result information command is created, the transmission process for sending the result information command to the sub-control means is executed in the out-of-area processing. This configuration makes it possible to execute the series of processes of deriving the result information, creating the result information command, and sending the result information command in the out-of-area processing, thereby improving the efficiency of debugging work.

Gaming machine 23G3. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine 23G2, characterized in that the control means is configured to first transmit information in which predetermined information (1) is stored in a predetermined bit (bit 7) when transmitting the command to the sub-control means, and the result information storage area (MY counter) for storing the result information is configured to consist of multiple bytes.

In this gaming machine, when the control means sends a command to the sub-control means, it first sends information with predetermined information stored in predetermined bits. In this configuration, if the result information storage area for storing result information is composed of multiple bytes, it becomes necessary to separate and transmit at least the information stored in the lower bytes of the result information storage area into information stored in predetermined bits and information stored in bits other than the predetermined bits. Accordingly, the command creation process requires processing to separate at least the information stored in the lower bytes of the result information storage area into information stored in predetermined bits and information stored in bits other than the predetermined bits, resulting in a large program for executing the command creation process. However, if the command creation process is configured to be executed as an out-of-area process, it becomes possible to prevent the memory area storing the program used for executing in-area processing from being overwhelmed by the program.

Gaming machine 23G4. In the gaming machine 23G3 described above, the command creation process comprises at least a first creation process (output value creation functions S230403, S230404 in the MY command transmission process) that creates first information (a value obtained by changing bit 7 of the lower byte of the MY counter to 0) indicating information stored in the lower byte of the result information storage area other than the predetermined bit, and a second creation process (output value creation functions S230409, S230410 in the MY command transmission process) that creates second information (a value obtained by changing bit 7 of the transmission MY counter to 0) indicating information stored in the lower byte of the result information storage area other than the predetermined bit.

In this gaming machine, the command creation process involves at least the following: creating first information indicating information stored in the lower bytes of the result information storage area other than a predetermined bit; and creating second information indicating information stored in the lower bytes of the result information storage area but in a predetermined bit. In this configuration, the program required to execute the command creation process is quite large; however, if the command creation process is configured to be executed as an out-of-area process, it is possible to prevent the memory area storing the program used when executing in-area process from being overwhelmed by the program.

Gaming machine 23G5. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 23G4, characterized in that the transmission process is configured to transmit the result information command in byte units, and the information stored in the lower bytes of the result information storage area is transmitted separately as the first information and the second information.

In this gaming machine, the transmission process transmits the result information command byte by byte, and the information stored in the lower bytes of the result information storage area is transmitted separately as first information and second information. This configuration allows the sub-control means to grasp the result information in a configuration in which information with specified information stored in specified bits functions as a command header.

Gaming machine 23G6. Any of gaming machines 23G1 to 23G5 above allows play by using game value (medals), and awards said game value when the game result satisfies the awarding condition (winning), wherein the derivation process is configured to derive as the result information the cumulative result of the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game result, and wherein the out-of-area process executes a process to store the regulation information (complete flag) when the cumulative result of the difference reaches a predetermined regulation number (19,000).

According to this gaming machine, the out-of-area processing derives the cumulative result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results, and when the cumulative result of this difference reaches a predetermined specified number, a process is executed to store specified information. This configuration makes it possible to derive the cumulative result of the difference between the number of game values used in a game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results and to perform control based on the cumulative result of this difference without putting pressure on the memory area storing the program used to execute the in-area processing.

Gaming machine 23G7. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 23G6, characterized in that, when the stipulated information is stored, the machine transitions to a non-playable state (stopped state) in which the game is no longer possible.

When regulation information is stored, this gaming machine transitions to a non-playable state in which play is not possible. This configuration makes it possible to avoid excessive awarding of gaming value within a specified period, ensuring the integrity of play and increasing interest in gaming.

Gaming machine 23G8. A gaming machine as described above in accordance with the gaming machine 23G7, characterized in that, when the stipulated information is stored, processing is executed in the in-area processing to transition to the unplayable state.

With this gaming machine, if regulation information is stored, processing is executed in the in-area processing to transition to a play-disabled state. This configuration makes it possible to implement a configuration in which processing related to game progress is executed in the in-area processing, while the processing of deriving the cumulative result of the difference number and the processing of storing the regulation information based on the cumulative result of the difference number are executed in the out-area processing.

Gaming machine 23G9. The gaming machine 23G8 described above is equipped with storage means (RAM 106) for storing information obtained when the in-area processing is executed and information obtained when the out-area processing is executed, and the storage means is configured so that the in-area storage area (work area iw for game control) for storing the information obtained when the in-area processing is executed is concentrated and arranged in a storage area within a second predetermined address range, and includes a difference number storage area (MY counter) for storing the cumulative result of the difference number, and a specified information storage area (complete flag storage area) for storing the specified information, and the out-area storage area (work area ew for non-game control) for storing the information obtained when the out-area processing is executed is concentrated and arranged in a storage area in an address range outside the second predetermined address range.

This gaming machine is equipped with storage means for storing information obtained when an in-area process is executed and information obtained when an out-of-area process is executed. The storage means has an in-area storage area for storing information obtained when an in-area process is executed, which is centrally located in a storage area within a second predetermined address range, including a difference number storage area for storing the cumulative difference number result and a specified information storage area for storing specified information. The out-of-area storage area for storing information obtained when an out-of-area process is executed is centrally located in a storage area in an address range outside the second predetermined address range. This configuration makes it possible to improve the efficiency of debugging work even with the program storage means, in a configuration in which the storage area storing the program used when an in-area process is executed and the storage area storing the program used when an out-of-area process are different.

Gaming machine 23G10. In any of gaming machines 23G1 to 23G9, the save storage means comprises a first save area (a stack area for game control, is) to which the save execution means saves information stored in the internal storage means during the in-area processing, and a second save area (a stack area for non-game control, es) to which the save execution means saves information stored in the internal storage means during the out-area processing, and the first save areas are collectively arranged in a storage area within a third predetermined address range, and the second save areas are collectively arranged in a storage area in an address range outside the third predetermined address range.

According to this gaming machine, the save storage means is composed of a first save area to which the save execution means saves information stored in the internal storage means during in-area processing, and a second save area to which the save execution means saves information stored in the internal storage means during out-of-area processing, with the first save area being collectively arranged in a storage area within a third predetermined address range, and the second save area being collectively arranged in a storage area in an address range outside the third predetermined address range. This configuration makes it possible to improve the efficiency of debugging work even with respect to the save storage means, in a configuration in which the program storage means stores programs used when executing in-area processing in different storage areas from the program storage area used when executing out-of-area processing.

The gaming machines 23A to 23G may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines 23 may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to Y, and the gaming machines 9 to 22, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

10... slot machine as gaming machine, 32... reels as rotating body constituting circulation display means, 41... start lever as start operation means or initiation operation means, 42-44... stop switches as stop operation means, 56... first credit insertion switch as start operation means or input operation means, 57... second credit insertion switch as start operation means or input operation means, 58... third credit insertion switch as start operation means or input operation means, 63... upper lamp constituting auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 64... speaker constituting auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 65... auxiliary display section constituting auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 81... display control device constituting sub-control board or specific performance execution means, 101... main control device as main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine in which a game can be played by using a gaming value and the gaming value is awarded when the game result satisfies an awarding condition,
an execution means for executing an unplayable state transition process for transitioning to an unplayable state in which the game is impossible when a predetermined abnormality occurs;
a difference storage means for accumulating and storing the difference between the number of game values used in the game and the number of game values awarded based on the game results;
a regulating information storage means for storing regulating information when the difference number stored in the difference number storage means reaches a regulating number;
When the stipulated information is stored in the stipulated information storage means, the non-playable state is transitioned to by executing the non-playable state transition process;
The unavailability state transition process includes:
a first storage process for storing the abnormality response information corresponding to the occurred abnormality in the response information storage means;
a second storage process for storing, in the case where the regulating information is stored in the regulating information storage means, regulating corresponding information corresponding to the regulating information in the corresponding information storage means;
a process for outputting a disabled state signal indicating that the game has become disabled to the outside of the gaming machine;
a first determination process for repeatedly determining whether or not the specified correspondence information is stored in the correspondence information storage means until the specified correspondence information is no longer stored in the correspondence information storage means;
a second determination process in which, when it is determined in the first determination process that the specified correspondence information is not stored in the correspondence information storage means, it is repeatedly determined whether or not a second specified operation has been performed until the second specified operation is performed;
a return process for returning the game from the non-playable state to a playable state in which the game is playable when it is determined in the second determination process that the second specified operation has been performed;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specified operation different from the second specified operation is performed, including a power-on operation that switches the gaming machine from a power-off state to a power-on state, the difference number stored in the difference number storage means becomes an initial value, and the specified information storage means becomes a state in which the specified information is not stored, thereby making it possible to return from the non-playable state to the playable state.